EXTRA-MURAL LOCATIONS

The following are situated outside the University's main grounds and are not shown on the map opposite.

University Departments

Agricultural Economics-32 Story Street, Parkville Archives-16 Wimble Street, Parkville Clinical Sciences—Royal Parade Parkville, opposite R.M.H. Criminology-35 Royal Parade, Parkville Dental Science—Cnr. Royal Parade and Flemington Road, Parkville Maintenance Department-860 Swanston Street, Carlton Industrial Science-35 Royal Parade, Parkville Maaliin Quarterly-34 Story Street, Parkville Optometry—Cor. Keppel and Cardigan Streets, Carlton Social Studies-33 Royal Parade, Parkville Student Health Service-249 Grattan Street, Carlton Student Counsellors-268 Elgin Street, Carlton Student Housing Officer-69 Keppel Street, Carlton Veterinary Precinct—Cnr. Flemington Road and Park Drive, Parkville

Teaching Hospitals

Dental Hospital—Cnr. Royal Parade and Flemington Road, Parkville Royal Children's Hospital—Flemington Road, Parkville Royal Melbourne Hospital—Flemington Road, Parkville Royal Women's Hospital—Cnr. Swanston and Grattan Streets, Carlton

Colleges and Halls of Residence

Graduate House-224 Leicester Street, Carlton Janet Clarke Hall—College Crescent, Parkville Newman College—College Crescent, and Swanston Street, Carlton Ormond College—College Crescent, Parkville Queen's College—College Crescent, Parkville Ridley College—Walker Street, Parkville St Hilda's College—College Crescent, Parkville St Mary's College—College Crescent and Swanston Street, Carlton Trinity College—College Crescent, Parkville University Women's College—College Crescent, Parkville Whitley C о ll е ge-271 Royal Parade, Parkville

Associated Institutions

State College of Victoria—Swanston and Grattan Streets, Carlton Walter and Eliza Hall Institute—Royal Parade near R.M.H.

THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

FACULTY 0F ARTS

HANDBOOK, 1975

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY

In exceptional circumstances the Council is empowered to suspend

subjects and to vary the syllabus of a subject. Any such alteration to the details of subjects will be announced on departmental notice-boards by the beginning of Orientation Week, 1975.

SCIENCE SUBJECTS — ENROLMENT PROCEDURE

Students enrolling for any subjects in Information Science, Mathematics, Statistics or any other subject listed under the heading 'Science Subjects' in section 'Details of Subjects' should consult the Faculty of Science Handbook for correct subject and unit numbers; and should also consult the Assistant to the Dean of Science.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Officers of the University 6 Officers of the Faculty of Arts 6 Directory 7 Senior Teaching Staff 9

Generel Information 14

Dates in 1975 14 Graduation 14 Matriculation Roll 14 Enrolment 15 Fees 15 Student Membership Cards 16 Location of Lectures and Tutorials 16 Part-time Students 16 Evening Lectures 16 Leave of Absence 16 Colleges of the University 17 University Halls of Residence 18 Selection into Arts 18 Application Procedures for New Students and

Graduates in other faculties 18 Transfers from other faculties 18 Students wishing to resume an Arts Course 18 Special Principles of Selection

in Faculty of Arts 18 Undergraduate Quota 19 Sub-quotas 19 Subject Quotas 20 Reservations of Places in B.A. Quota 20 Prerequisites 20 Examinations 21 Special Consideration 22 Special Examinations 23 Last Subject of a Degree Course 23 Study Progress 24 Student Services 24

Contact Office 24 Student Counselling Service 24 Student Housing 25 Student Health Service 25 Legal Service 25 Chaplains 25 Financial Assistance 25 Appointments Board 26 Melbourne University Arts

Faculty Association 26

Description of Courses Available 28

Ordinary Degree 29 Honours Degree 29 Examples of Social Science Studies in

Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Commerce Courses 30

3

Information for Combined Course Students 32 Combined Course for Degrees of

Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Laws 32

Information for Students intending to proceed to Bachelor of Social Work Degree 33 Students currently enrolled for

Bachelor of Arts/Diploma of Social Studies 33

Students who have graduated in another faculty 35

Students who have completed the Diploma of Social Studies 36

Students transferring from other universities, interstate, overseas, or within Victoria 36

Planning a Course 36 Subjects 37 Graduate Studies 46

Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies 46 Master of Arts Preliminary 46 Master of Arts 46

Master of Arts Examination 47 Doctor of Philosophy 47 Doctor of Letters 47

Regulations 49

Bachelor of Arts 49 Ordinary Degree 50 Degree with Honours 51

Master of Arts 53 Doctor of Philosophy 55 Doctor of Letters 57 Diploma in Psychology 58

Details of Subjects 59

Ancient Greek 65 Arabic 317 Behavioural Studies 388 Bengali 255 Chinese 85 Classical Studies 72 Criminology 82 Dutch 191 East Asian Studies 100 Economic Geography 120 Economic History 123 Economics 111 English 130 Fine Arts 145 Foreign Language Reading Courses for

Honours Arts Students 63 French 158 Geography 179 German 186

4

Hebrew 314 Hindi 256 History 201 History and Philosophy of Science 238 Indian Studies 248 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 102 Information Science 257 International Relations 376 Italian 264 Japanese 97 Latin 67 Linguistics 60 Mathematics 276 Middle Eastern Studies 304 Modern Greek 68 Music 331 Philosophy 338 Political Science 369 Political Sociology 378 Politics 370 Psychology 383 Public Administration 377 Rhetoric 133 Russian 394 Science Subjects 414

Contemporary Biology 414 Biology 415 Chemistry 417 Geology 419

Social Studies 421 Social Biology 421 Social History 423

Statistics 406 Swedish 193 Syriac 313

Interdisciplinary Studies and Arts Special Courses (Continuing Education) 425

Interdisciplinary Studies 425 Eighteenth Century Studies 425 Religious Studies 427 Social Theory 429 Drama 429 Decolonization and Development 432

Arts Special Courses and Continuing Education Courses 434

Combined Honours Courses 439

Table of Contents 439 Samples of Courses 441

Financial Assistance 450

Enrolment—Arts Subjects and Codes 459

5

Faculty of Arts

OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITYt (as at 24 September 1974)

Chancellor, L. W. WEICKHARDT

Vice-Chancellor, PROFESSOR D. P. DERHAM

Deputy Vice-Chancellor, PROFESSOR D. E. CARO

Vice-Principal, R. D. MARGINBON

Registrar, A. T. J. BELL

Secretary for Graduate Studies, R. A. CUMMING

Officer-in-Charge, Students' Records, E. FINN

Fees Officer, H. SHUREY

Student Services Liaison Offiсе r, Mr R. R. PRIESTLEY

Director, Student Health Service, Dr H. D. G. HETHERINGTON

Student Counsellor, J. W. FREDERICK

Secretary, Appointments Board, K. GRAVELL

Spons Union Secretary, W. K. TICKNER

OFFICERS OF THE FACULTY OF ARTS

Office of the Dean

Dean, PROFESSOR S. B. HAMMOND Dean's Assistant, MRS A. BUDD

Secretary to the Dean, MISS L. ALEXANDER

Sub-Dean, D. J. O'HEARN

Assistants to the Sub-Dean, MISS L. BROUGHTON, MRS S. NEARBY

Senior Administrative Assistant, MISS I. OELSCHNER

Receptionist, MRS G. LUCAS

Office Secretary, MRS A. A. CHER

Faculty Secretariat

Secretary, P. G. MORGAN

Assistant Secretary, R. D. SPEECHLEY

Assistants to the Secretary, MISS H. R. REILLY, MRS E. SIMPSON

All correspondence should be addressed to the Registrar.

t A complete list of Administrative Officers may be found in the University Calendar.

Faculty of Arts

DIRECTORY

THE LANGUAGE CENTRE John Medley Building 1st floor West Tower

CLASSICAL STUDIES John Medley Building 6th floor East Tower

CRIMINOLOGY (BOARD OF STUDIES) 33 Royal Parade EAST AND SOUTHEAST ASIAN STUDIES John Medley Building

CHINESE 5th floor West Tower JAPANESE 5th floor West Tower INDONESIAN 6th floor West Tower

ECONOMICS (FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND New Commerce Building COMMERCE)

ENGLISH John Medley Building 2nd Floor West Tower

FINE ARTS John Medley Building 5th floor East Tower

FRENCH Babel 5th floor GEOGRAPHY Redmond Barry Building

9th floor GERMANIC STUDIES Babel

GERMAN 4th floor DUTCH 3rd floor SWEDISH 3rd floor

HISTORY John Medley Building 3rd floor West Tower

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Old Arts Building ground floor

INDIAN STUDIES Old Arts Building 1st floor

INFORMATION SCIENCE Richard Berry Building ITALIAN Babel

2nd floor MATHEMATICS Richard Berry Building

ground floor MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Old Arts Building

1st floor MUSIC (FACULTY OF MUSIC) Conservatorium of Music PHILOSOPHY Old Arts Building

ground floor POLITICAL SCIENCE John Medley Building

4th floor West Tower PSYCHOLOGY Redmond Barry Building

12th floor RUSSIAN Babel

ground floor STATISTICS Richard Berry Building

ARTS FACULTY OFFICE ground nd flоо r John Medley Building

LAW FACULTY OFFICE Lt floor East Tower Law Commercie

SCIENCE FACULTY OFFICE Old Commerce Building SOCIAL STUDIES FACULTY OFFICE 33 Royal Parade Parkville CONTINUING EDUCATION Appointments Board

Building ground floor

Faculty of Arts

STUDENT SERVICES LIAISON OFFICER

STUDENT COUNSELLING STUDENT HEALTH STUDENT HOUSING APPOINTMENTS BOARD

CONTACT OFFICE STUDENTS REPRESENTATIVE COUNCIL SPORTS UNION

Old Commerce Building 2nd floor 268 Elgin Street Carlton 249 Grattan Street Carlton 69 Керре l Street Carlton Appointments Board Building 3rd floor Union Union Union

8

Faculty of Arts

SENIOR TEACHING STAFF

THE LANGUAGE CENTRE Senior Lecturer, Richard Janusz Zatorski, M.A. Lecturers, Victor Austin, B.A., L: bs-L. (Paris)

Werner Haarburger, B.A., B.Ed. J. P. Kaplan, M.A., Ph.D. (Penn.) •Gerda Meyer, M.A.

Senior Technical Officer, H. Klingsoehr

CLASSICAL STUDIES

Professor Graeme Wilber Clarke, B.A. (Oxon), M.A. (N.Z. & lelb) Readers, George Henry Gellie, M.A., B.Ed.

Kenneth John McKay, D. Litt. (Utrecht), M.A. Senior Lecturers, Peter James Connor, M.A. (Cantab. & Melb.)

John Robert Charles lartyn, M.A. (Cantab. & Melb.) Albert Dennis Pryor, M.A. (Cantab.)

Lecturers, James McCaughey, B.A. (Cantab. & lalb.), M. Litt. (Dub.) Roger David Scott, B.A. (Cantab. & Melb.)

Lecturer in Modern Greek, Efstathios Gauntlett, B.A. (Oxon.)

EAST AND SOUTHEAST ASIAN STUDIES Professor of Oriental Studles, Harry Felix Simon, B.A. (Lind.), lA. Senior Lecturer in Chinese, Tsai-Hsieh Chang, B.A. (Fu Jen & Cot.), М .А .

(Mich. & Melb.) Senior Lecturer in Japanese, William Braithwaite Eggington, B.A. (Lind.

& laib.) Senior Lecturer in Indonesian, Jan Pieter Sarumpaet, Bak. Sastra (Gadjah

lada), M.A. (Ex.) Lecturers in Chinese, Hao-Jan-Chu, B.A. (Tsing Hue), A.I.E. (Lind.)

Robert Cheng-1-King, B.A. (Peking) Lecturers in Indonesian, Charles Antony Coppei, LL.B.

Muhammad Slamat, doctorandus rе r. soc.(Ley.). Lecturer in Japanese, Leslie Russell Oates, B.A. Senior Tutor in East Asian Studies, Joan Alison Anderson, B.A.

ENGLISH

Professor of English Language and Literature, George Harrison Russell, M.A. (N.Z.), Ph.D. (Cantab.)

Robert Wallace Professor, Samuel Louis Goldberg, B. Litt. (Oxon), BA. Professor, Vincent Thomas Buckley, М .А . Readers, Thomas Pye Dobson, M.A. (Cantab.) B.A.

Thomas Brian Tomlinson, B.A. (Cantab. & W. Aust.), LL.B. (W. Aust.)

Senior Lecturers, Alan Sargent Cole, A.B. (Bowdoin), Ph.D. (T.C.D.) Hume Dow, A.B. (Harv.), M.A. Evan Lloyd Jones, A.M. (Stan.), M.A. Timothy John kelly, M.A. (Cantab.) Mary Teresa Tomlinson, B.A. (Cantab. & lelb.) Christopher Wallace-Crabbe, M.A.

Lecturers, Adele Audrey Chessell, BA. Penelope Jane Magdalene Curtis, B.A.

t Personal Chair In the Department of English.

9

Faculty of Arts

Andrew Nicholas Deacon, B. Litt. (Oxon), B.A. Robin Marshall Grove, M.A.

Professor Emeritus, Ian Ramsay Maxwell, Chevalier of the Order of the Icelandic Falcon, B. Litt (Oxon), B.A. LL.B.

FINE ARTS

Professor, Joseph Terence Antony Burke, O.В .Е ., M.A. (Lind., Yale & leib.)

Senior Lecturers, Laurence John Course, B.A. Margaret Manion, M.A.

Lecturers, Ann Galbally, M.A. Basil Gilbert, B.A.

Senior Tutor, Biruta Ruth Zubans, B.A.

FRENCH

Professor, Ronald Francis Jackson, Chevalier de la Légion d'Honneur, Officer de l'Instruction Puf ique, B.A. (Syd.), M.A.

Senior Lecturers, Claire Hildegard Burger, D.U.P., M.A. Allan Keith Holland, B.A. (Syd.), Dip. d'Etudes (Bordeaux), D.U.P. Stanley John Scott, M.A. Ph.D. Colin Bernard Thornton-Smith, M.A., B.Ed., Ph.D. Graeme Douglas Watson, B.A. (Adel.), D.U.P.

Lecturers, Thomas Raymond Casey, M.A., Dip.Ed. Patricia Ann Clancy, M.A., Ph.D. Jocelyn Dunphy, M.A., Dip.Ed. (Melb.), I.S.E.0. (Paris) (temporary) Micheline Giroux, L: ès-L., Dip. d'Et.Sup., C.A.P.E.S. Diana Katrine Keuneman, D.U.P., LL.B., M.A., Barrister and Solicitor

(temporary) Leo Las Gourgues, D.U.P., Dip. d'Et. Théatrales (Paris), M.A.

Principal Tutor, Margaret Denat, B.A. (Adel.), M.A. (Oxon.), B.Ed. (Old.) Senior Tutors, Kay Marie Gorman, M.A.

Jean Marc Lecaudé, L.-ès-L.

GEOGRAPHY

Professor, To be appointed Readers, Eric Charles Frederick Bird, М .Sc. (Lind.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.),

М .Sc. Thomas Melville Perry, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), M.A. John Robert Victor Prescott, В .Sc., M.A., Dip.Ed. (Dunelm), Ph.D.

(Lind.), M.A. Arthur Alan Wilcock, B.Sc., B.Ed.

Senior Lecturer, Geoffrey James Missen, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.), M.S. (Wis.)

Lecturers, William Stewart Logan, M.A., Dip.Ed. Assistant Lecturer, John Sirles Massey, M.A. (N.Y.)

GERMANIC STUDIES Professor and Head of Department, Gerhard Schulz, Dr.Phil. (Leip.) Readers in German, Hector MacLean, Ph.D., Dip.Ed.

Heinrich Wiemann, Ph.D. Lecturers in German, Heinrich Alfred Hesse, Staatsexamen (Bonn),

Dip.Ed (Cologne)

10

Faculty of Arts

Hans Joachim Pott, M.A. Eva Ruff, M.A. Marion Louise Adams, A.M. (Harv.), Ph.D.

Lecturer in Swedish and Icelandic, John Stanley Martin, B.Ed., M.A., Ph.D.

Assistant Lecturer in Dutch and Germanic Philology, Bruce Christopher Donaldson, B.A. (W.A.), Litt Drs (Utrecht)

Senior Tutor in German, Alma Johnson, B.A. Senior Tutor in Swedish, Elisabet I. Coltman, F. I. L. Kand

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY

Max Crawford Professor, Gregory Moore Dening, Ph.D. (Harv.), M.A. Ernest Scott Professor, John Riddoch Poynter, M.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D. .

Readers, Weston Arthur Bate, M.A. William Culican, M.A. (Edin.) Lawrence Roy Gardiner, B.A. (grist.), M.A. Donald Edward Kennedy, Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A. Noel David McLachlan, Ph.D. (Lind.), M.A.

S е nlог Lecturers, Donald Farquhar Mackay, D.Phil. (Oxon.), I.A. Donna Merwick, B.A. (Mundelein Coll.), M.A. (De Paul), Ph.D.

(Wis.) 'Joy Parnaby, M.A., Ph.D. Alison Mary Houston Petrick, B.A., Ph.D. Ronald Thomas Ridley, M.A. (Syd.) Ian Gordon Robertson, B.Phil. (Oxon.), M.A. Lloyd Robson, M.A. (Tas.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.)

Lecturers, Graeme Davison, B.A. (Oxon. & Melb.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), Dip.Ed. John Harvey Foster, Ph.D. (Wales), M.A. Rosemary kiss, B.A. Sow Theng Leong, B.A. (Brandeis), M.A., Ph.D. (Harv.) David Philips, B.A. (Rand. & Oxon.), D.Phil. (Oxon.) Charles Orvis Sowerwine, M.A., Ph.D. (Wis.)

Principal Tutor, Jacqueline Templeton, М .А . Senior Tutors, 'Susie Ehrmann, B.A., Dip.Ed.

Rodney Malcolm Thomson, M.A. Australian Aboriginal and Oceanic Ethology:

Research Fellow, Douglas Wayne Orchiston, B.A. (Syd.) Senior Research Associate, Nicholas Peterson, B.A. (Cantab.), Ph.D.

(Syd.)

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

Reader and Chairman, Frederick John Clendinnen, B.A., Ph.D. Reader, Diana Joan Dyason, M.Sc. Senior Lecturers, Roderick Weir Home, Ph.D. (Indiana), В .Sc.

John Clifton Pottage, B.A. Wade Chambers, Ph.D. (Harv.)

Lecturers, Lesley James Jones, B.Sc., Dip.Mech.&EIec.Eng. (Q'Id.), В .А . Henry Paul Krips, В .Sc., Ph.D. (Adel.) Homer Le Grand, Ph.D. (Wis.) Monica Mackintosh MacCalium, B.A.

i Full-time officer with part-time duties In the department.

11

Faculty of Arts

INDIAN STUDIES Reader-in-Charge, Slьпагау e п Ray, M.A. (Calc. & М elb.) Senior Lecturer, Atindra Mojumder, M.A., B.T. (Calc.) Temporary Lecturer, John Martin Dunham, B.A., Dip.Ed. (syd.)

ITALIAN Reader-in-Charge, Colin Angus McCormick, Cavaliere dell'Ordine al

Merito della Repubblica Italiana, B.A. (Cantab.) Senior Lecturer, Corledia Gundolf. Dott.Lett. (Rome) Lecturers, Myra Callo', B.A.

Mary Elizabeth Dwyer, BA. (W. Aust. & Oxon.) Vittorio Ferrario, BA. (Lond.)

Principal Tutor, Anna Maria Sabbione, MA.

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Professor, John Bowman, M.A., B.D. (Gies.), D.Phil. (Oxon.), M.A.

F.A.H.A. Reader, Aimo Edward Murtonen, Ph.D., Th.D. (Helsinki) Senior Lecturers, Arthur Dudley Hallam, M.A. (Leeds), B.A.

Abdul Khaliq Kazi, B.A., Ph.D. (Lind.), Maulvi.Fazil. (Pan).), Ulamiya (Al-Azhar Cairo)

Nasseh Mirza, B.A. (Beirut & Lind.), Ph.D. (Dunelm) David Peles, M.A. (Jerus.) John Arthur Thompson, B.A., BEd., M.Sc. (a'Id.), Ph.D. (Cantab.),

M.A. PHILOSOPHY

Boyce Gibson Professor, Douglas Aidan Trist Gasking, B.A. (Liv.), M.A. (Cantab. & М elb.)

Reader, Maxwell John Charlesworth, Ph.D. (Louvain), M.A. Senior Lecturers, John Lauchlan Carter Chipman, B.Phil., D.Phil. (Oxon.),

M.A. Cecil Anthony John Coady, B.A. (Syd.), B.Phil (Oxon.), M.A. Joseph Eric D'Arcy, DPhil (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Greg.), M.A. Donald Lawrence Gunner, MLitt. (Cantab.), M.A. Mary Agnes McCloskey, M.A., Ph.D. Graeme Donald Marshall, M.A. (N.Z.), Ph.D. Jan Tadeusz Jerzy Srzednicki, M.A., Ph.D.

Lecturers, Leonard John O'Neill, Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A. William Kevin Presa, M.A. Vernon Irving Rice, M.A., Ph.D. Barry Marshall Taylor, Ph.D. (Oxon.), M.A.

Senior Tutor, Ann Elizabeth Jackson, M.A.

POLITICAL SCIENCE Professor, Alan Fraser Davies, M.A. Readers, Lloyd Gordon Churchward, M.A., Dip.Ed.

Edwin Arthur luck, M.A. Leon George Peres, B.Ec. (Syd.), M.P.A. (Hare.)

Senior Lecturers, Kenneth Gregory Armstrong, M.A. (Oxon.), B.A. Alan Hugo Hughes, Ph.D. (A.N.U.), B.A. Donald Francis Miller, M.A.

Lecturers, Phillip George Cavell Derby, LL.B., M.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.) Marjorie Jean Holmes, B.Ec. (Syd.), M.A., Dip.Ed.

12

Faculty of Arts

David Alastair Kemp, B.A., LL.B., M.Phil. (Yale) Frank Graham Little, Ph.D. (A.N.U.), B.Com., B.Ed. David Francis Burke Tucker, B.A. (Rhodes), B.Phil. (Oxon.)

Senior Tutor, Michael Richards, B.A.

PSYCHOLOGY

Professors, Samuel Battle Hammond, B.A. (W. Aust.), Ph.D., F.A.Ps.S.! Alexander James Wearing, M.A. (Adel.), Ph.D. (Ill.), M.В .Ра .S.,

M.A.Ps.S. Reader, Gordon Veitch Stanley, B.A., Ph.D. (W. Aust.), A.В .Ps.S.,

M.A.Ps.S. Senior Lecturers, Warren Keith Bartlett, B.A., В .Sc., B.D., Ph.D.

Loren Ross Borland, B.S., D.D.S. (Iowa), Ph.D. (Calif.), M.A.Ps.S. Godfrey Gardner, BA., Ph.D. (Lind.), M.A., M.A.Ps.S. Alexander Ronald Greig, B.A., M.A.Ps.S., M.A.C.E. Frank Knopfelmacher, B.A. (Brist.), Ph.D. (Lind.) Tamara Kotler, M.A., Ph.D., M.A.Ps.S. Charles William Langley, Ph.D. (Hare.), B.A., A.B.Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Keith Francis Taylor, B.A. (Ma п c.), M.A. (Lind.), Dip.Soc.Stud.

(Leic.), A. В .Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Kevin William Walsh, B.A., M.B., B.S., M.Sc., M.A.Ps.S.

Lecturers, Peter Howard Burgoyne, B.Eng. (Sheffield) Terence Michael Caelli, B.A. (Newcastle) Ian Matthew Campbell, M.A. (Cant.), M.N.Z.Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Norma Grieve, M.A., Dip.Ed. Patricia Lesley, B.A., Dip.Soc.Stud. Virginia Margaret Holmes, B.A. (Syd.), Ph.D., M.A.Ps.S. Susan Clare Somerville, B.A. (U.N.E.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.)

Temporary Lecturer, Amnon Tí11, B.A. (Tel Aviv), M.A., Ph.D. (Indiana) Senior Tutors, Robin Anne Penman, B.Com. (N.S.W.)

Robyn Christine Robinson, B.A. Senior Associate in Medical Psychology, Victor Raymond Leonard, Ph.D.

(Qu.), B.A., Dip.Psych., M.A.Ps.S.

RUSSIAN

Reader-in-Charge, Nina Christesen, B.A. (Q'Id.), M.A. Senior Lecturers, Paul Vincent Cubberley, M.A. (Glas.)

Igor Meshakov-Korjakin, M.A. Lecturers, Judith Mary Armstrong, M.A., Ph.D.

'Rae Doran Slonek, B.A. Senior Tutor, Natalia Grishin, Grad.Ped.inst. (Moscow)

Personal Chair in the Department of Psychology.

13

GENERAL INFORMATION

DATES IN 1975

Last day of enrolment for all students previously enrolled in Arts, 17 January, 1975.

Last day of application for post-graduate studies-24 January, 1975.

Last day of enrolment for post-graduate students-28 February, 1975.

Last day for application to transfer from other Faculties within University of Melbourne-20 December, 1974.

Last day for application from former students to resume studies-20 December, 1974.

Orientation Week commences-3 March, 1975.

Term dates—

Lecture Terms: Ist — From 10 March to 10 May (9 weeks) 2nd — From 2 June to 16 August (10 weeks) 3rd — From 1 September to 18 October (7 weeks)

Annual Examinations—

Annual Examinations begin 27 October. Last day of entry for Final Examinations-17 July. Final Dates for application to have degree conferred-16 January, 2 July, 7 November.

GRADUATION

The dates for conferring degrees in 1975 are as follows: Wednesday, 12 March Saturday, 22 March Saturday, 12 April Wednesday, 23 April Saturday, 9 August Saturday, 20 December

Candidates for degrees and diplomas must lodge an application on the prescribed form, obtainable from the Students' Records Office, by the due date.

MATRICULATION ROLL

Matriculation is the act of signing a declaration that you will abide by the University statutes and regulations. New students will be asked to sign the matriculation roll some time in first term. Notices stating when and where this will take place will be posted on notice boards around the University. In order to be eligible to sign the matriculation roll candidates must have:

(a) satisfied the general entrance requirements of the University. Full information regarding these requirements and conditions of exemp-tion may be obtained from the Secretary, Victorian Universities and Schools Examinations Board, 437 St. Kilda Road, Melbourne, 3004.

14

General Information

(b) satisfied the special course requirements, if any, for their particular course.

(c) been selected for and enrolled in their course, and

(d) attained the age of seventeen years by 31 March of the year concerned. Under-age students may be admitted on recommenda-tion of the Faculty. Those in doubt should consult the Faculty Office.

ENROLMENT

New Students: Once selected, each student will be required to plan his course with a member of the Sub-Dean's staff. The student must then formally enrol for his chosen first year subjects at the Stuд eп ts' Records Office. Enrolment and payment of fees must be made by the date set out in the selection notice. Students should note that any subsequent change in their enrolment must be approved by the Sub-Dean.

Change of Enrolment and Late Entries: No candidate who has not enrolled for a particular subject within one month after the beginning of first term will be admitted to the annual examination in that subject, except with the special permission of Council. Approval for any change of enrolment must be obtained from the Sub-Dean and from the department concerned.

Late entries may in special circumstances be accepted on payment of an additional fee.

Previously enrolled students: Previously enrolled undergraduates should enrol by 17 January. All students must consult the Faculty office. (All others, including Arts students who have formally withdrawn from the course or who have interrupted without formal leave of absence for at least two years or who have passed no subjects for the last five or more years, shall be required to apply for selection.) Students are required to inform the Sub-Dean of any proposed changes at any stage in their courses.

Terminal Re-enrolment: In order to maintain the accuracy of the Univer-sity's records, every student will be required to fill in a special re-enrol-ment slip at the end of the first term, showing the subjects which he proposes to study for the remainder of the year. A student who does not wish to proceed with his course must notify Students' Records and the Faculty Office in writing immediately.

SCIENCE SUBJECTS — ENROLMENT PROCEDURE

Students enrolling for any subjects in Information Science, Mathematics, Statistics or any other subject listed under the heading 'Science Subjects' (pp. 414 ff ) should consult the Faculty of Science Handbook for correct subject and unit numbers; and should also consult the Assistant to the Dean of Science. It is necessary to use the correct subject code numbers when enrolling. These are listed on pp. 459-474.

FEES There are no tuition fees for courses leading to degrees or diplomas. However, students enrolled In these courses are required to pay a General Service Fee which was $73.50 for full-course students and 840.50 for

15

Faculty of Arts

part-course students in 1974. It is expected that the 1975 fees will be not more than $90 and $50 respectively and precise fees will be announced as soon as possible. Students are expected to pay these fees at enrolment. The only exception will be those re-enrolling students who hold Commonwealth Scholarships awarded before 1974. Payment can be made at the enrolment centre during the normal enrol-ment time or, if necessary, can be made to the University account at any branch of the National Bank of Australasia. There is a branch of the National Bank in the grounds and, as a service to students, the branches of the State Savings Bank and Commonwealth Savings Bank in the grounds will accept payment of fees on behalf of the National Bank.

STUDENT MEMBERSHIP CARDS

Each new student will be issued with a student membership card upon enrolment. This card is designed to include a photograph of the student but the inclusion of the photograph is optional. Students who were enrolled in 1974 will not be issued with new cards but must present their existing cards at enrolment so that the cards can be embossed signifying enrolment in 1975.

LOCATION OF LECTURES AND TUTORIALS

Location of lectures and directions to various rooms will be found on a board near the entrance of the Old Arts Building, the New Arts Building and the John Medley Building in the first week of term. Information about times and location of tutorials is available on the relevant departmental notice-boards.

PART-TIME STUDENTS

The course for the ordinary degree may be taken by part-time study. However students should note the following provisions:

(i) Except in special circumstances part-time students may not enrol in more than two subjects in any year. Students undertaking non-university courses concurrently (e.g. Diploma of Higher Secondary Education) may be limited to one subject.

(ii) Since their studies are likely to extend over a number of years, part-time students should take particular care to note any changes in regulations and to consult the sub-dean before changing their courses.

The course for the honours degree is not normally available to part-time students. In some schools the first two years, but not the whole course, may be taken part-time by students providing they are able to attend the honours classes. Part-time students should also read the section on study progress.

EVENING LECTURES Evening lectures are available in a number of subjects. For Individual subjects see time-table at the end of the handbook.

LEAVE OF ABSENCE All students seeking leave of absence must request permission in writing from the Sub-Dean of the Arts Faculty stating the period of the proposed absence. The maximum period of leave of absence allowed by the faculty is four years. A candidate interrupting a course without leave of

18

General Information

absence may be suspended from the course by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the Faculty. When resuming after leave of absence, students should see the Sub-Dean in January of the year in which studies are recommenced to have their course approved before enrolling at Students' Records.

THE COLLEGES OF THE UNIVERSITY

There are ten residential colleges connected with the University, each of which provides additional teaching, mainly of a tutorial character. The residential colleges are: Janet Clarke Hall (Church of England) Principal: Dr Eva G. Eden Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 2208 Newman College (Roman Catholic) Rector: The V Rev G. G. Daily, S.J. Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 5577 Ormond College (Presbyterian) Master: The Rev Dr J. D. McCaughey Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 4784 Queen's College (Methodist) Master: Dr 0. W. Parnaby Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 4939 Ridley College (Church of England) Principal: Dr L. L. Morris Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 38 1396 St. Hilda's College (Methodist-Presbyterian) Principal: Mrs Marjorie Smart Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 1119 St. Mary's College (Roman Catholic) Principal: Mother Joan Nowotny, I.B.V.M. Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone 347 1882 Trinity College (Church of England) Warden: Dr E. L. Burge Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 1044 University Women's College (Undenominational) Principal: Mrs Margaret Russell-Smith Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone: 347 1073 Whitley College (Baptist) Principal: The Rev D. M. Himbury Address: Royal Parade, Parkville, Vic. 3052 Telephone 347 8388

College teaching is available for non-resident as well as resident students. All the colleges have liberal provision for resident scholarships and non-resident exhibitions. The University fees do not include college fees, which are payable to the colleges themselves. In addition there is the following post-graduate college for men and women:

Graduate House:

Warden: W. E. F. Berry Address: 224 Leicester Street, Carlton, Vic. 3053 Telephone: 347 3428.

For higher degree workers and academic visitors only. For further information regarding the colleges, students are referred to

17

Faculty of Arts

the sections printed in the University Calendar and to the heads of colleges.

UNIVERSITY HALLS OF RESIDENCE

International House:

Warden: John F. Hopkins Address: 241 Royal Parade, Parkville, Vic. 3052.

International House, a co-educational university hall, provides a place of residence, education and corporate life for members of the University, its members comprising approximately equal numbers of students from Australia and from overseas. The House provides tutorial assistance in the basic subjects of most faculties for both non-resident and resident members. There is a com-prehensive library of essential reference books, and scholarships and bursaries are available.

Medley Hall:

Warden: R. H. Wilkinson Address: 48 Drummond Street, Carlton, Vic. 3053.

A university hall of residence, accommodating some 30 women and 30 men residents, mainly undergraduate.

SELECTION INTO ARTS

The Faculty receives more applications for places than it can accept. There is therefore selection into a quota.

APPLICATION PROCEDURES FOR NEW STUDENTS AND GRADUATES IN OTHER FACULTIES

All applications must be made on the requisite application form avail-able from the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 11 Queens Road, Melbourne, 3004, by 31st October of the year preceding that in which they wish to commence an Arts course.

TRANSFERS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Applicants (within the University of Melbourne) must apply on the requisite application form available from the Faculty Office by 20 December of the year preceding that in which they wish to commence an Arts course.

STUDENTS WISHING TO RESUME AN ARTS COURSE

Students wishing to resume an Arts course after interrupting their studies without formal leave of absence from the course or for a period of time exceeding four (4) years must apply on the "resume course" form available from the Faculty Office, by 20 December, 1974.

SPECIAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION IN THE FACULTY OF ARTS

For admission to Arts, applicants must, in addition to satisfying univer-sity requirements, also have satisfied the special course requirements for Arts: Grade "D" standard or above in either a language other than English or a branch of Mathematics at the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination or equivalent. See 'Prerequisites' on pp. 20-21.

18

General Information

THE UNDERGRADUATE QUOTA 1. Scores arrived at by the Victorian Universities Admissions Commit-

tee formula will be debited for failure in the prerequisite by the number of marks by which the subject is failed. Applicants who have done exceptionally well at the Higher School Certificate Examination (e.g. obtained four "A" passes) but who have not satisfied either of the prerequisites shall be considered for selection.

2. No specific debits will be applied to applicants whose selection scores depend on native language or subjects such as Music Practical.

З . Applicants who have taken a Part 1 or Part 1A language or a first-year Mathematics subject at a university to satisfy the pre-requisite may not repeat the same subject for credit towards an Arts degree.

4. Interstate or overseas applicants will be considered in the light of their academic record. In some cases they may be required to take preliminary studies, sit for examinations and perform at a standard prescribed by the Faculty. Intending applicants should consult the Office of the Sub-Dean.

5. Persons who qualified to matriculate under the old regulations, and who lack adequate additional qualifications may also be required to take extra preliminary studies as described in 4.

8. Persons who qualified to matriculate more than ten years ago may not be admitted to the quota unless their results were outstanding; or unless they have recently completed some course of tertiary education; or unless they have completed preliminary studies as described in 4.

7. Persons who have previously enrolled in Arts but who have formally discontinued the course or who have interrupted without formal leave of absence for at least two years or who have passed no subjects for the last five or more years shall be required to re-apply for selection. The Arts Students' Progress Committee shall recommend whether all or some of these persons shall be subject to selection.

8. Persons transferring from other Victorian Universities will not normally be selected unless their academic record is of sufficient merit, and the reasons for changing are considered satisfactory by the Selection Committee. Provided that in special cases the Students' Applications Committee may rule on an applicant's eligibility.

9. Undergraduate applicants wishing to transfer from courses in other Faculties in this University will be considered on the basis of their academic record and their reasons for wishing to transfer.

10. Faculty may give special consideration to applicants whose studies have been handicapped by adverse social, educational or physical circumstances.

THE SUB-QUOTAS There are two Sub-quotas: 1. The Graduate Sub-quota

(For graduates of other faculties from this University and other

19

Faculty of Arts

approved institutions and diplomates in Journalism and Social Studies who wish to pursue an undergraduate Arts course.) The Selection Committee shall take into account:

(i) Results obtained in previous examinations. Preference will normally be given to those who have completed their previous courses in minimum time and/or obtained honours results in some subjects. Account will also be taken of improvement during the course and of results in particular subjects.

(ii) The content of the Arts course which the applicant proposes to take. Preference will normally be given to those who propose to take an honours course or to study in depth in a pass course. Preference may also be given to those who intend to proceed as full-time students. Applicants who wish mainly to take subjects taught by other faculties will not normally be selected in preference to those who wish mainly to take sub-jects taught by Arts departments.

(iii) An applicant's reasons for desiring to take an Arts degree course.

2. The Special Sub-quota

The Faculty may select a certain number of students whose quota scores are below the level necessary to gein entry into the ordinary undergraduate quota provided that:

(i) the students concerned show evidence of special capacity and interest in certain specified subjects; and

(ii) the students concerned agree to include in their course a major in that subject.

SUBJECT QUOTAS

It is likely that in 1975 special quotas will be imposed in a number of subjects. Details of these will be available prior to the commencement of the academic year.

RESERVATIONS OF PLACES IN B.A. QUOTA Places in the succeeding year's quota may be reserved. Students wishing to apply must do so on the prescribed form avaiIable at the Faculty Office. Only students proceeding direct from school will normally be granted a reserved place. It is not possible to reserve places in the graduate sub-quota.

PREREQUISITES In addition to satisfying university entrance requirements, candidates must also have satisfied the special course requirements. For the Arts course the prerequisite is a pass at Grade "D" or higher level either in a language other than English or a branch of Mathematics at the Higher School Certificate examination, or its equivalent. All students at school are strongly advised to include a language and/or branch of Mathematics in their studies, even if at that stage they have no intention of entering the Arts course at this University. In the great majority of cases the Faculty has no alternative to ruling ineligible those who have not com-pleted the prerequisite. The following groups are automatically exempt from the prerequisite:

20

General Information

(i) Graduates of another Faculty and holders of the Diploma of Social Studies and the Diploma of Physical Education.

(ii) Candidates who attempt the Higher School Certificate examination under the special provision for adults (over the age of 25 years).

(iii) Candidates who fail matriculation in the prerequisite (language or mathematics) but obtain marks in the compensatory range. Eligi-bility in such cases is determined by the automatic application of a mathematical formula when applications for selection are being considered. No additional application is necessary.

Exemption from the prerequisite will also be considered by Faculty in the following cases on application in writing to the Sub-Dean:

(i) A candidate who satisfies the Faculty that English is not his native language and that he has passed another language at an examina-tion of reasonable standard or has received his secondary schooling in another language may be permitted to substitute English for a Language other than English at matriculation.

(ii) A student who has successfully completed at least one year of a course in another Faculty, or at another University, or has com-pleted some other post-secondary qualification.

(iii) Applicants who can show some other similar evidence which the Selection Committee considers is clear evidence of change of intention.

(iv) Where the conditions of the applicant's schooling were such that study of the prerequisites would have been virtually impossible or would have constituted a case of serious hardship.

(v) Where the greater part of the applić ant's schooling was in another country; Faculty will require evidence of the length of time such students have lived in Australia, their previous schooling, their present schooling, etc.

(vi) Applicants who have performed exceptionally well at the Higher School Certificate, even though they have not attempted either of the prerequisites. Excellence is defined each year by the Selec-tion Committee. An average of Grade "A" is normally required.

Students in doubt about eligibility for admission to the Faculty are advised to consult the Faculty Office.

EXAMINATIONS

Annual Examinations. All candidates for the Annual Examination, must lodge an examination entry with the Registrar not later than 17 July. The entry must specify whether the candidate intends presenting for pass or honours in each subject, no candidate being permitted to enter for both pass and honours in the same subject. Candidates who take the honours papers in any subject but fail to reach the honours standard are eligible to be granted a pass. No candidate will be allowed to sit for examination in a subject in which he has not attended the necessary practical work. A timetable of the Annual Examination will be available some weeks before the examination. (External candidates sitting at country centres must pay a supervision fee of $3 per subject.) Examination numbers for candidates presenting at the University will be available at Students'

21

Faculty of Arts

Records during the week before the examination begins and must be applied for by the candidate in person. External candidates sitting at country centres will receive their numbers by post. Applications for special consideration together with medical or other evidence must be lodged before the commencement of the Annual Examination period. Applications lodged after the publication of results will not be considered.

Final Examination in Arts (degree with honours), etc: Entries for the final examination in Arts (degree with honours) must be lodged not later than 17 July.

Written work required as an integral part of a course as set out in the details of subjects must be completed by the dates specified, since the time available for such work is an essential component of the require-ments itself. Students who, without the formal permission of the head of depart-ment, fail to complete written work by the specified dates may be reported to faculty for unsatisfactory progress and/or credit for the subject may be withheld.

Final honours theses or essay work: The B.A. thesis or essay work for final year honours, in so far as it constitutes an examinable part of the final examination, must be completed by the date specified. Such work submitted after the due date without formal permission from the head of the department will be substantially penalized in the final honours examination, and no such thesis or essay work will be received for examination after the last day of November in the year in which the final honours examination is taken, without formal permission from the head of the department. Except with the permission of the Faculty no extension of time can be granted beyond the last day of the first term of the year following, that in which the final honours examination is taken.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION Students whose studies during the year have been impaired by ill-health or any other serious cause may apply for special consideration in their examinations. Students who are physically capable of sitting for the examination are expected to do so even though their studies have been interrupted. In the event of a failure, students' papers are re-assessed in the light of their request for special consideration. An additional test, oral or written, may be given at the discretion of the examiner. Because of the great variation from one case to another no automatic formula can be applied. Obviously students do not automatically gain a pass because of their requests for special consideration; if performance is substantially below a pass standard. a pass cannot be granted. An attempt is made to consider each request as humanely as possible. Procedure: A student should make application for special consideration either before the date of the examination(s) in question, or not later than three days after the date of the examination(s). If this is impossible applications should be made as soon as possible after the date of the examination(s). No application will be considered after the publication of results. It is in the best interest of students to consult an appropriate member of staff, e.g. Tutor, Lecturer, Sub-Dean, Student Counsellor, Chaplain, etc, before submitting an application.

22

General Information

Application forms are available at the Faculty Office, the Student Counsellors' Offices and Departmental Offices. Only one form should be completed. If more than one department is involved the form will be copied and distributed accordingly. Supposing documents such as medical certificates, letters from Student Counsellors, etc, should be returned with the form. The summary of extenuating circumstances and supporting documents should be as specific as possible about the ways and length of time for which study has been Impaired. Dates should be given. Where this Is not possible or relevant the period of the year during which distur-bance occurred should be stated. Applications should be sent to the Secretary, Faculty of Arts.

ALL APPLICATIONS ARE TREATED AS CONFIDENTIAL.

SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS

Special Examinations may be granted under the following circumstances: 1. Where students are physically unable to sit for an examination or

a substantial part of that examination. Satisfactory medical or other evidence is required. Applications must be made before or as soon as practicable after the date of the examination.

2. If the candidate is ill during the examination he should then report to the supervisor at the examination centre and make an application supported by medical or other evidence within three (3) days of the examination.

3. In cases where a student's studies have been so gravely Impaired by illness or other serious cause that they are precluded from doing themselves justice at the normal examination time, the Faculty may grant them special examinations in February. Such students should make it clear in their application for special consideration that they are applying for special examinations. Strong supporting evidence is necessary. In such cases the application must be made before the commencing date of the annual examination.

Special examinations are rare and may be granted only for the above reasons. They are granted by Faculty through the chairman of the depart-ment and his board of examiners. Special examinations are usually held In February. Students who have been granted a special examination will be notified by the appearance of their examination number in a special section under the published results. Applications together with supporting documents, should be submitted to the Faculty Secretary who will forward it to the chairman of the department concerned.

LAST SUBJECT OF DEGREE COURSE

Students who fail the last subject of the course for an ordinary B.A. Degree course will be automatically considered for special examination In that subject. The special examinations may be granted provided that:

(i) The examination performance is not too far below the pass mark; and

(1i) There is evidence that the student has made a serious attempt throughout the year.

23

Faculty of Arts

STUDY PROGRESS Arts students whose academic performance falls below the level of at least 50 per cent success are normally asked to appear before the Arts Students Progress Committee. The Faculty regards absence from an examination or cancellation of enrolment in third term without approval by the Sub-Dean as the equivalent of a failure in the subject concerned. Non-enrolment in any year is treated in a similar way unless leave of absence from the course has been granted. "Appearance" before the Arts Students' Progress Committee involves a discussion with two (2) of its members about the student's academic work and possible causes of failure. The legal powers of the Committee are as set out in the Calendar of the University of Melbourne Regulation 2.5 which provides that the Faculty may, after investigating the circum-stances and giving the student an opportunity to be heard, either

(i) specify the subject(s) for which he may enrol in any subsequent year, or

(ii) recommend to the Professorial Board that he be suspended from the course.

The attitude of the Committee is constructive and every effort is made to help a student cope better with his studies. Any student suspended from the course may apply for re-admission in any subsequent year and if the Professorial Board is satisfied that the condition or circumstances of the student have so changed that there is a reasonable probability that he will make satisfactory progress in the course, it may authorize re-admission of that student and impose such conditions as it may determine. Students suspended from the course may consult the Sub-Dean for advice concerning re-admission (preferably before November of the year preceding that in which the student wishes to resume the Arts course).

STUDENT SERVICES Information about student health service, student housing, student coun-selling, the student accident insurance scheme, the free legal advisory scheme, the students' loan fund, contact, Blackwood, concessions, the students' dental scheme, the A.U.S. Medical and Hospital Benefits Scheme and other facilities are given in the Orientation Handbook and at the S.R.C. office on the second floor of the Union. The Handbook is distributed free to all first entry students in Orientation Week. The Handbook also contains information about the Students' Representative Council, the student Union, clubs and societies, sporting activities and other aspects of student life at the University. Details of all welfare services are also found in the Student Information Booklet. The main student services are:

CONTACT OFFICE Contact (ground floor, Union Building) is a service organized by students, to answer any enquiry. Their telephone number is 345 1844, extension 5239.

STUDENT COUNSELLING SERVICE The staff of the Student Counselling Service, Jon Frederick, Marjorie

24

Generai Information

Priestley, Denis Kelynack, Brian James, Suzy Nixon, Rosemary Nicholls and Jo Kinross, are available to help any student at the University with problems such as difficulties in settling down to study or examinations. adjustment to university life, financial and domestic difficulties, etc. The Counseling Service also offers a number of other services including tape recorder loan scheme for temporarily or permanently disabled students, and a variety of group programmes. The service is free, voluntary and confidential. The counsellors can be seen either by appointment or on a walk-in basis throughout the year in the usual University hours. The Student Counselling Service is at 268 Elgin Street, Carlton, near the corner of Swanston and Elgin Streets. Since the service is likely to move to new premises in 1975, it would be wise to check the location. The telephone number is 341 6928/9.

STUDENT HOUSING

The staff of the Student Housing Service, Marilyn Swann, Robin Odell and Fairlea Bonar, helps in obtaining off-campus accommodation — in rooms, with or without full-board facilities, flats or houses. They also. give information about the Colleges and Halls of Residence, and advice about any housing problems that may arise. The Service is available to all enrolled students, and, where applicable, by other people connected with the University. Appointments can be made by telephoning 341 6901 or 341 6930, or by calling at the Student Housing Office at 69 K ер pel Street, Carlton, 3053.

STUDENT HEALTH SERVICE

The Student Health Service provides free medical advice and some forms of treatment for all enrolled students. Doctors are available without appointment for emergencies. A psychiatric service is also available. The Health Service is open Monday - Friday 9 a.m. - 5 p.m. and the address is 249 Grattan Street, Carlton, telephone 341 6904.

LEGAL SERVICE

The University Solicitor provides a free legal advisory service for students. Enquiries should be made at Room 805, 8th floor, Raymond Priestley Building.

CHAPLAINS The Chaplains' rooms in 1974 were on the first floor of the Old Arts Building, rooms 231, 232 and 233. The present chaplains are Father J. Lanigan and Father B. Donohue; The Reverend J. Brady, Mr H. Shaw and Mr H. Shub.

FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE All full-time unbonded degree students may apply for a means-tested living allowance from the Commonwealth Department of Education. All enquiries should be made to:

The Regional Director, Commonwealth Department of Education, 450 St. Kilda Road, MELBOURNE, VIC., 3004.

In addition the University offers a limited amount of financial assistance through the Student Loan Fund and the Bursary Scheme. Loans and

25

Faculty of Arts

bursaries are given on the basis of financial need and academic merit. Loans are made for the purchase of books and to help with living expenses. The normal upper limit is $750 in any one year. They are repayable after graduation or withdrawal from studies, and are usually interest-free until graduation or withdrawal. For details of scholarships, prizes, etc., see pp. 450-459. Enquiries should be made to the Sub-Dean, Student Counsellor or the Accounts Department.

APPOINTMENTS BOARD

The Appointments Board provides a careers advisory and employment service for intending students, undergraduates, and graduates.

Intending Students: The staff of the Board are always prepared to assist intending students with information and advice concerning the career implications of various courses of study. In addition, booklets on careers and information on scholarships are available free of charge. Enquiries should be directed initially to the School Information Officer.

Undergraduates: It is highly desirable that students who will be seeking employment upon graduation should inform themselves of likely career and employment opportunities well in advance. The staff of the Board are freely available for discussions on such matters. In addition, further information is provided for final-year students by the distribution of the Graduate Careers Directory and by the programme of on-campus inter-views with visiting employers. The Board can assist undergraduates to find part-time work where necessary and also employment during vacations preferably relevant to their course of study.

Permanent Employment: Graduates and undergraduates seeking full-time work are put in touch with suitable employers — special approaches may be made on behalf of particular students and graduates.

Careers Library: The Careers Library has been extensively modified end expanded and any interested person wishing to make use of it is most welcome to do so.

MELBOURNE UNIVERSITY ARTS FACULTY ASSOCIATION

The Arts Faculty Association is the student society to which all Arts students automatically belong. There is no subscription fee, and meny of the functions are free. The Association organizes a variety of activities. A Freshers' Conference is held the week before Orientation Week, to which all first year Arts students are invited. A.F.A. arranges functions during Orientation Week to acquaint Arts students with their course, their lecturers and tutors. One of its main purposes is to represent the views and protect the interests of Arts students in the areas of welfare and education in particular. This is achieved through the S.R.C., through the four student members of Arts Faculty and the three students elected to the Education Committee of the faculty; these students are all ex officio members of the A.F.A. committee. It also plays an active role in co-ordinating and assist-ing the various departmental staff-student committees. Other activities which A.F.A. organize include a ball, forums and seminars, a May camp and a typing course. Of particular importance is the Student Lounge which it organizes. It is located on the ground floor of the East Tower, John Medley Building, and the Committee requests Arts

26

General Information

students to make maximum use of the room whether they wish to work, drink coffee, or just to mix with other Arts students. A.F.A. Is organized by a committee of twenty-three, which is elected every August. The committee includes three first year representatives who will be elected by all Arts students in the fourth week of first term. The committee encourages all Arts students to take part in its activities. It welcomes ideas and offers of assistance. The committee members may be contacted via the A.F.A. letter box in the Union basement or in the Student Lounge, Jahn Medley Building, where much of its activity is centred.

27

DESCRIPTION OF COURSES AVAILABLE

The Faculty of Arts provides courses leading to:

(i) the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Arts; and

(ii) the degree of Bachelor of Arts with Honours. Selection of students into the honours courses is not made until the completion of the first year.

First Year: All students must take four Grade 1 subjects to comptete the first academic year. (In the case of part-time students this must be spread over at least two calendar years.) The subjects must be chosen so that at least three Grade 2 subjects are possible in the second year, and, normally, so that no more than two subjects taught by the one department are included. Assistance in the choice of subjects will be given by the staff of the Sub-Dean's section of the Faculty Office before enrolment. Students are also advised to consult appropriate academic staff if they require advice about particular subjects. The choice of subjects must be approved by the Sub-Dean. First year assessments will be graded under the following headings:

Honours, First Class H1 Honours, Second Class 12А Honours, Third Class 12 В Pass P Fail N

First year students who intend to enter honours schools at the beginning of their second year must pass the annual first year examinations in the appropriate subject (or subjects) with at least an honours 2В grading. They must also pass in such other subjects as Faculty may require. All such students are automatically eligible to enrol in the appropriate honours school or schools, provided that no student may enrol in more than two honours schools. Optional Additional Work in First Year: In addition to the work for Grade 1 subjects as set out In the details of subjects, certain departments will provide optional additional work in first year. The nature of this work will vary from department to department but in general will consist of extra lectures, or tutorials based on the additional work set. The object of the additional work is to amplify and deepen the student's course of study. It will be of general use and interest to all students and will also provide practice in the use of intellectual and other skills which will be particularly useful in the honours work of second and later years. Optional work is freely available to all students and may be taken in any subject in which it is offered. However. students who intend to enter the honours school at the beginning of their second year are strongly advised to take the additional work in first year in the relevant

department. This work is not a prerequisite to admission into the honours schools in second year. The work will not form a separate part of the annual

28

Description of Courses Available

examinations although departments may if they wish test it throughout the year or by means of optional questions on the annual examination papers.

THE ORDINARY DEGREE

Grades: A Grade 1 subject is a first year subject; A Grade 2 subject is a second year subject; A Grade З subject is a third year subject.

Major: A major is a subject studied for three consecutive years, e.g. Chinese 1, 2 and 3; Indian Studies 1A, 28 and Э C; or 1A, 2C and 3 В .

The ordinary degree requires three years of full-time study. Normally the pattern of course will be: First year: Four Grade 1 subjects. Second year: Three Grade 2 subjects. Third year: Two Grade 3 subjects.

The subjects can be chosen to include either two majors, e.g.: First year: Latin 1 Fine Arts 1 A History 1 E French 1 Second year: Latin 2 Fine Arts 2E History 20 Third year: Latin 3 Fine Arts 3F or at least one specialized major In which two third-year subjects are taken from the same department, e.g.: Politics/History/Fine Arts and many other departments. (See details of subjects.) Modification of these samples may be possible. The Sub-Dean should be consulted about such courses. It can be seen that the course, starting with a fairly broad range in first year, narrows down to one or two main fields of interest in third year. There is opportunity for a student to change plans in the light of the experience in first year and second year. In the example above. for instance, the second year subjects could have been Latin, History, and French, and the third year subjects History and French, if the student's interests had developed in that way. Provision is made In some disciplines for one of the majors to be enriched in second year by including two subjects from the one discipline. For Instance, in the example above the student very Interested In History could for either Latin or Fine Arts have substituted another grade 2 History subject. The enrichment of a major at second or third year is of course only possible in disciplines that provide more than one subject in second or third year. These can be identified by looking at the table of subjects set out on pp. 38-42. Subjects must be chosen to conform with any prerequisites that are laid down. See p. 42.

THE HONOURS DEGREE

Courses for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with Honours are more specialized and require a higher standard of performance than those for the ordinary degree..The honours degree requires four years of full-time study.

29

Faculty of Arts

Entry into Honours Schools: At the beginning of his second year any student who has gained at feast an honours 2 В in the appropriate subject (or subjects) and who has passed such other subjects as Faculty may require is eligible to enrol in a pure or combined honours course. Such enrolments must be approved by the Faculty through the Sub-Dean. The prescribed details of honours courses, pure and combined, are set out in the handbook. Students are asked to take careful note of those subjects which are strongly recommended by individual departments as useful supporting subjects, or, as in some cases (e.g. English, see p. 138) required.

Admission to third and fourth years of the honours course must be approved by the head or heads of departments concerned and by the Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Normally such approval will be given only to students who have gained first or second class honours in their honours subjects and who have successfully passed all the prescribed supporting subjects. .

The third and fourth years of honours courses are limited to full-time students. Any variation of these requirements may only be given by Faculty or by the Dean acting on behalf of Faculty. Honours courses may be taken in either one school (pure honours courses) or two schools (combined honours courses). Details of honours courses available are set out in the "Details of Subjects" Section, after the description of the pass subjects in each department. Combined honours courses are listed separately on pp. 439-449.

EXAMPLE OF SOCIAL SCIENCE STUDIES IN THE BACHELOR OF ARTS/BACHELOR OF COMMERCE COURSES .

Students are advised that certain study programmes in Arts or Commerce and Economics can be taken by those interested in the Social Sciences. In Arts the following is a sample list of courses with emphasis in certain areas of the Social .Sciences as described:

and Political Science emphasizing 1. (Including majors in Economics aspects of 'Social Welfare'):

First year Economics A (Arts) Politics 1 and two (2) other grade

1 subjects (e.g. Philo-sophy 1, Geography 1—or Psychology 1, Be-havioural Studies 1).

Second year Economics B Public Administration and one (1) other grade

2 subject (e.g. Political Philosophy — Philoso-phy 2D).

Third year Economics C— Political Units 2, 4 and 5 Sociology

2. (Including majors in Economics and Indonesian and Malayan Studies/Indian Studies, emphasizing aspects of the lesser developed

nations): .

30

Description of Courses Available

OPTION 'A'

First year

Economics A (Arts)

Second year

Economics 28

Third year

Economics C-3 units

OPTION '8' First year

Economics A (Arts)

Second уеег

Third year

OPTION 'C'

First year

Economics A (Arts)

Second year

Economics В or History 2A

International Relations

Indonesian & Politics 1 Malayan Studies 1

Indonesian & Politics 2A Malayan Studies 2

Any two of—

Indonesian & International Malayan Relations З Studies З

Economic Politics 1 History 1 D Geography 1

Economic Politics 2A Geography 2A

History 1 D

History 2

History 3T

Indian Studies Politics 1 History 1 D 1 or History 1E

Indian Studies Politics 2A

History 20 2

or Economics В Indian Studies

History 3T З

З . (Including majors in Psychology and/or History, Politics, Philosophy emphasizing the 'Individual in Societý ): First year

Psychology 1 Politics 1

History 1D Philosophy 1A or History 1E or Philosophy

18

Politics 2

History 2 or Philosophy . 2E

Political or History 3T or Philosophy Sociology 2D

Similar course samples for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce can be found in the Handbook of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce.

Second year

Psychology 2

Third year

Psychology 3

31

Faculty of Arts

INFORMATION FOR COMBINED COURSE STUDENTS

Courses that have most commonly been combined with Arts are those for the degree of Bachelor of Laws, and Diploma of Social Studies. From 1975 the combination of Bachelor of Arts/Diploma of Social Studies will no longer be available except to students already enrolled in that course. For information about the new Bachelor of Social Work degree and its entrance requirements, see p. 33. Combined courses with Science and Commerce and Music have occa-sionally been approved. Students who wish to study these latter courses are advised that the Arts requirements are at least six subjects consisting of one major, a sub-major and one grade 1 subject. These subjects must be chosen so that they are not credited to both degrees at once. No more than three subjects common to both degree courses may be taken. Students who wish to enrol in any combined course must be selected in both the Faculty of Arts and the other Faculty, and should consult the student adviser of the other Faculty as well as the Sub-Dean of Arts.

COMBINED COURSE FOR THE DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF ARTS AND BACHELOR OF LAWS

B.A./LL.B.: In the first year students are required to study two Law sub-jects and two Arts subjects. The Law subjects are fixed: Legal Process and Criminal Law. The Arts subjects may be chosen from any of the subjects offered. Since these Arts subjects are usually taken on to major and sub-major level, it is wise, in first year, to choose subjects which can be continued in later years. Arts students should note that In the combined course, History 1A (or Constitutional History) is a require-ment of the Law degree. Students who choose to study this subject in their first year should note, therefore, that they: still must complete another six subjects. Constitutional History can be used as the first part of a History major. Students who wish to transfer to a pure В achё lor'of Arts or Bachelor of Arts with Honours degree can be given credit in their Arts degree for Criminal Law and Legal Process as first year subjects. A student who is admitted to a combined course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (ordinary) and LL.B. will receive credit in the Bachelor of Arts course for History 1A and three other subjects in respect of the 11.8. degree. Credit for History fA will become effective on passing that subject but the remaining credit will not become effective before the completion of certain subjects in the third year of the 11.8. course. A minimum of six Arts subjects (excluding History 1A) must be com-pleted. The six subjects are to be arranged to include at least one Arts major and one sequence of two parts of a major. Note: B.A./LL.B. students will qualify for a Bachelor of Arts (ordinary) degree when they have completed (but not before) the six Arts subjects as specified, together with History 1A (or Constitutional History) and any three of Jurisprudence, Constitutional Law, Administrative Law, Company Law, International Law, or Equity.

The course should normally be taken гп the following order:

First year

Criminal Law Legal Process First part of major in Arts First part of sequence in Arts

Second year

History 1A (or Constitutional History); Second part of major Second part of sequence Torts

32

Description of Courses Available

Third year Fourth year

Third part of major Third year Law Remaining subject of Arts course Contract Property

Fifth year

Fourth year Law.

Special courses, usually of six years' duration, have been approved for students combining the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) degree with LL.B. Enquiries should be made of the Sub-Dean. B.A. (Hoes.)/LL.B. Courses: These courses are possible, but cannot be completed under six years of full-time study. Students accepted into these courses after first year should note that they may be excused from studying History 1A or Constitutional History. Since the pattern of such courses is not generally affected by first year choices it is best not to plan in detail until after the first year results are published. Some pure Honours courses require particular subjects in the first year (e.g. English Honours requires a language other than English). Students who intend to enter an Honours course in the second year should consult the details of the Honours course, as set out in the Details of Subjects. Enquiries should be made to the Sub-Dean.

INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS INTENDING TO PROCEED TO THE BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK DEGREE

The Bachelor of Social Work degree will commence in 1975 and will replace the old Diploma of Social Studies. It will not be available to students commencing university studies. Normal entry to the new degree will be after completion of a university degree (or its equivalent) which includes one year of a course in Psychological Studies at Melbourne University (or its equivalent from an approved institution) and one other subject from the Social or Behavioural Sciences at Melbourne (or its equivalent from an approved institution). Those who envisage applying for the Bachelor of Social Work course after completion of the first degree should include in the Bachelor of Arts course one of either Psychology 1 or Behavioural Studies 1, and one of either Psychology 2, Behavioural Studies 2, or another approved Social Science subject such as Economics, History, Politics, Criminology, Sociology, Anthropology. A limited number of undergraduates who have successfully completed two years of a degree course which includes two years of psychological studies may also be eligible for selection into the new degree course. Enquiries should be addressed to The Secretary, Board of Social Studies, University of Melbourne.

STUDENTS CURRENTLY ENROLLED FOR B.A./DIPLOMA OF SOCIAL STUDIES It is proposed to open the following options to undergraduate students presently in the Social Studies Diploma course combined with a degree course and for graduate students in the Social Studies Diploma course:

(a) Students who have successfully completed year one of e combined course: 1. To complete a second year of Arts, Commerce or Law in

33 в

Faculty of Arts

1975, including Psychology 2 and to be granted a deferred place in the Bachelor of Social Work quota for 1976.

or 2. To complete their Bachelor's degree during 1975, 1976 and be granted a deferred place in the Bachelor of Social Work quota for 1977.

(b) Students who have successfully completed year two of a combined course including Psychology 1 and Psychology 2:

1. To enter the Bachelor of Social Work year one in 1975.

or 2. To complete their Bachelor's degree and to be granted a deferred place in the Bachelor of Social Work quota in 1976 (if Arts or Commerce pass degree) or in 1977 (if an honours or Law degree).

or 3. To complete years three and four of the combined course.

(c) Students who have completed year three of the combined course: No option but to complete the final year of the combined course.

Students who are completing the combined Course for Bachelor of Arts, Diploma of Social Studies should note that the following Combined Courses have been approved. Two majors to be chosen from the following:

(1) Psychology 1, Psychology 2A, Psychology зА

(2) Social Organization A, Social History, History 3G or Social Organization B

(3) Any approved major of the Arts course.

One approved sequence of two subjects to be chosen from the following:

( 1 ) Psychology 1, Psychology 2A

(2) Social Organization A, Social History

(3) An approved sequence of two subjects comprising a grade 1 and a grade 2 subject. These subjects should normally form two consecu-tive parts of an approved major.

Note: Social Organization A and Social History, and at least two parts of Psychology must be included in the course to meet the requirements of the diploma of Social Studies.

Two Remaining subjects which shall be Social Biology and either one other Arts subject or Social Organization B, provided that the course also complies with the requirements of the diploma in Social Studies.

The combined course is to be taken as follows:

First year Second year

Psychology 1 Social Organization A Social Biology Psychology 2A Two approved grade 1 subjects Social Work 1

An approved grade 2 subject

Third year Fourth year

Social Work 2 Social History Psychology зА or an approved grade 3 subject

Social Work 3 History 3G or Social Organization B or Psychology зА or an approved grade 3 subject

34

Description of Courses Available

STUDENTS WHO HAVE GRADUATED IN ANOTHER FACULTY

This information is applicable only to graduates of other faculties in this or other Universities, who wish to study for the degree of Bachelor of Arts. All such students are required to complete a total of six (6) Arts subjects. Normally these subjects should form two majors but some flexibility is possible. At least one major from a distinctly Arts discipline is essential. The other major can often be 'mixed', i.e. a graduate who has completed Mathematics 1A and 2A in his original degree may well wish to study Mathematics 3A in his Arts degree; this is acceptable but he would need to study another grade 1 or grade 2 subject to complete this 'mixed' major.

So a course might be:

First major Second major or Fine Arts 1A English 1 French 1 German 1 Fine Arts 2E English 2 French 2 Economics 2 Fine Arts 3F Mathematics French 3 Economics 3C

3A

All graduates, irrespective of their primary degree and the subjects studied therein, are given the same block credit of three (3) subjects. Graduates may not undertake a double major in Economics. Most graduates engage in part-time studies, and Faculty expects part-time students to enrol in either one or two subjects in any one year. In the first year of the course it seems wiser to undertake only one subject so that the demands of University and employment can be sorted out. Graduates are often forced to cancel their enrolments during the year as their employment demands increase. It Is essential, if you find yourself caught in this situation, to let the Faculty office know what you are doing. Graduate entrance into quota subjects, especially Psychology, may be limited. This is because first preference must be given to incoming undergraduates.

Single Subjects: Some graduates may have studied Single Subjects or Special Courses (i.e. subjects which do not count towards a degree) either during or after their primary degree. It is usually possible to credit such subjects (if they are Arts subjects), towards the Arts degree thus cutting down the number of subjects required. For instance, a Bachelor of Science graduate may, after completing his Science degree, have studied English 1 and English 2 as single subjects. He might then have become interested in the Arts course and applied for selection. Upon being selected he could apply to have the two single subjects credited to his Arts degree. Thus he would have to complete only four extra subjects, including one major.

Example

First Major Mixed Major

Politics 1A English 1 Subjects Politics 2B English 2 credited towards Politics 3C Mathematics 3A ј degree

(Mathematics 1A and 2A completed in B.Sc. degree)

35

Faculty of Arts

STUDENTS WHO HAVE COMPLETED THE DIPLOMA OF SOCIAL STUDIES

Students who have completed the Diploma of Social Studies will be required to complete a further four (4) subjects in one of the following patterns:

(a) a completely new major together with any other subject; or

(b) completion of a major with Australian History 3G; completion of a new sub-major and any other first year subject;

or

(c) completion of a major with Political Sociology 3; completion of a new sub-major and any other first year subject;

or

(d) completion of a major with Psychology Э A; completion of a new sub-major and any other first-year subject.

Sub-major: Students who wish it may enrol in a grade 1 subject and Criminology A to fulfil the requirements. Time: Some students have attempted the four subjects in a full-time year. Most have found four subjects too difficult to cope with and have been forced to drop one. Part-time students, especially those beginning employment as social workers, have usually found that two subjects are too difficult a task.

STUDENTS TRANSFERRING FROM OTHER UNIVERSITIES, INTERSTATE, OVERSEAS, OR WITHIN VICTORIA

Students who wish to transfer from another University to Melbourne must make application for selection on the prescribed form available from:

The Secretary, Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 11 Queen's Road, MELBOURNE, 3004.

Credit for work done at another University may be granted up to a maximum of four subjects in the case of the Ordinary Degree, and up to a maximum of the first two years of the course in the case of the Honours Degree. Transferring students should make an appointment to see the Sub-Dean or one of the Sub-Dean's assistants as soon as possible to discuss the arrangements for credit. Students who have nearly completed their courses elsewhere may be better served by seeking approval from the original university to study subjects at Melbourne for credit towards a degree from the original university.

PLANNING A COURSE When planning your course many combinations of subjects are possible and you should read carefully the detailed syllabus of the subjects available listed throughout the handbook under the various Departments, e.g. the syllabus for East Asian Studies is listed under the Department headed Department of East and South East Asian Studies, the syllabus for Dutch 1 under Germanic Studies, and so on. A table of subjects,

36

Description of Courses Available

divided into grade 1, grade 2 and grade 3 subjects is on pp. 38-41 of the Handbook. Some subjects cannot be taken until others have been passed. You should look at the list of prerequisite subjects on pp. 42-43 of the handbook to ensure that if, for example, in later years you wish to proceed to a certain major, you have the necessary prerequisite. For instance, if you wish to take a major in Statistics, Information Science, or Mathematics В you must pass Mathematics 1 A or IC in your first year. Certain subjects are terminal, that is they do not form part of any major and are considered simply as first year subjects only. Particularly, these are Rhetoric, Social Biology, General Mathematics and Statistics 100. If you intend to study Chinese or Japanese at grade 2 level or above, you must also undertake East Asian Studies as well as Chinese 1 or Japanese 1 in your first year. Students who have studied certain languages at Higher School Certifi-cate are exempted from that first year language here. Higher School Certificate Chinese exempts from Chinese 1, Higher School Certificate Indonesian exempts from Indonesian 1. These students may proceed to Chinese 2 or Indonesian 2 in their first year but they must nevertheless study a total of nine subjects. For students of Chinese. East Asian Studies is a necessity and Indonesian students will find Dutch 1 a help. First year Science subjects are available to limited numbers of Arts students. Students should lodge an enrolment at the Science Faculty Office, after selection to the quota subject concerned, and should report to the individual departments to arrange practical classes before term commences. Similarly, particular rules apply to some subjects. For instance, credit cannot be given for both Geography 1 and Economic Geography 1; Eco-nomic Geography 1 will not normally be credited until a major in Eco-nomics is completed; Statistics 100 does not constitute part 1 of a major in Statistics. Such restrictions are set out in the details of subjects, and should be noted carefully when courses are being planned. Quotas exist on certain subjects and you will need to fill out a quota application form for these subjects and leave It at the Faculty office. Selection into quotas is made according to academic merit. You will be notified by the Faculty office as soon as possible about whether or not you have been selected into the quota. You should be prepared to choose another subject in case your application for a quota subject Is not successful.

SUBJECTS

When reading the subject table remember that the order in which subjects comprising must be taken is established by reading across the page from left to right. Faculty makes a clear distinction between Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade з subjects. These subjects must be taken In separate years. The numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4 indicate the grade of the subject. The letters A, В , C. etc., indicate the nature of the subject, for instance, History 2G is Australian History at grade 2 level, History 3G is Austra-lian History at grade 3 level. Students must specify the grade at which they wish to pursue a subject. Credit will not be given for subjects with the same alphabetical letter, in some cases the same title, taken in different years.

Э 7

GERMAN 2

GERMAN 3 HEBREW 2

HEBREW 3

INDONESIAN & INDONESIAN & MALAYAN

MALAYAN STUDIES 2

STUDIES 3 ITALIAN 2A

ITALIAN 3 ITALIAN 2 В JAPANESE 2

JAPANESE 3

LATIN 2 MODERN GREEK 2 RUSSIAN 2A• RUSSIAN 2 В

RUSSIAN 2 RUSSIAN 2C SWEDISH 2

LATIN 3

(RUSSIAN 3А • RUSSIAN 3

RUSSIAN 3

SWEDISH 3

LINGUISTICS 2

Faculty of Arts

e.g. credit will not be given for History 2G and History 3G, or Inter-national Relations 2 and International Relations 3, or Philosophy 2G and Philosophy 3G.

FIRST YEAR

SECOND YEAR

THIRD YEAR (Grade 1)

(Grade 2)

(Grade 3)

Languages

ANCIENT GREEK 1 ARABIC 1 BENGALI 1 CHINESE 1 CHINESE 1A' DUTCH 1 FRENCH 1

GERMAN 1A GERMAN 1 HEBREW 1 HINDI• INDONESIAN &

MALAYAN STUDIES 1

ITALIAN 1

JAPANESE 1 LATIN 1A LATIN 1 MODERN GREEK

RUSSIAN IA?

RUSSIAN it

SWEDISH 1 SYRIAC 1

Linguistics

LINGUISTICS 1

Criminology

ANCIENT GREEK 2 ARABIC 2

CHINESE 2 CHINESE 2A' DUTCH 2 FRENCH 2 Medieval French Language & Literature 2

CRIMINOLOGY A

ANCIENT GREEK 3 ARABIC 3

CHINESE 3 CHINESE 3А ' DUTCH 3 FRENCH 3 #Renaissance French Language & Literature 3 or #Advanced Medieval

French Language & Literature

•Half subjects. Carefully read details of subjects. #Offered in alternate years (see details of subjects). tRussian 1A is a beginners' course and the major sequence is that shown above reading from left to right. Russian 1 assumes that students have passed in H.S.C. Russian or at an equivalent standard.

38

HISTORY 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology)

Antiquity) HISTORY 2M

HISTORY 30 ( Pre-Classical

(Roman) Antiquity)

Not available 1975 HISTORY 2N HISTORY 3R

Description of Courses Available

Economics Majors in Arts

ECONOMICS A (Arts) ECONOMIC HISTORY A

REGIONAL & URBAN STUDIES 1 t

History

HISTORY 1A (British)

HISTORY 1B (Age of Revolutions)

HISTORY 1C (Classical Studies A)

HISTORY 1 Dt (Culture Contact in the Pacific)

HISTORY lEt (Urban History)

ECONOMICS B ECONOMIC HISTORY B

REGIONAL & URBAN STUDIES 2#

STATISTICAL METHOD

HISTORY 2G (Australian)

HISTORY 2H (American)

HISTORY 2" (East Asian)

HISTORY 2K (French)

ECONOMICS C (1-10•) ECONOMIC HISTORY C ECONOMIC HISTORY D REGIONAL & URBAN

STUDIES 3t

HISTORY 3G (Australian)

HISTORY 3H (American)

HISTORY 3J (East Asian)

HISTORY 3K (French)

HISTORY 2L HISTORY 3M (Modern British) (Pre-Classical

(German) (Late Medieval European)

HISTORY 20 HISTORY 3T (Roman)

(Social & Reflective) Not available 1975

Not available 1975

Political Science POLITICS 1

POLITICS 2A POLITICS 3A POLITICS 25 POLITICS 38 INTERNATIONAL INTERNATIONAL

RELATIONS 2 RELATIONS 3 PUBLIC PUBLIC

ADMINISTRATION 2 ADMINISTRATION 3 POLITICAL

SOCIOLOGY 3

Note: No student may enrol for International Relations or Public Adminis-tration at both Grade 2 and Grade 3 level In a major in Political Science.

Social Studies

SOCIAL BIOLOGY

SOCIAL HISTORY SOCIOLOGY

•Three units constitute one subject In 9-subject Arts degree. tRegional & Urban Studies may NOT be taken unless the student Intends to major ín Economics as well. (Offered in alternate years (see details of subjects). History subjects which have the same letter and ere offered at Grade 2 or Grade 3 level may be taken either as a Grade 2 or a Grade 3 subject In a History major but NOT at both levels.

39

INFORMATION SCIENCE 200

STATISTICS 200

PHILOSOPHY 2C (Contemp. European)

PHILOSOPHY 2D (Political Philosophy)

PHILOSOPHY 2E (Ethics)

PHILOSOPHY 2F (Formal Logic)

PHILOSOPHY 2G (Greek Philosophy)

PHILOSOPHY 2.1 (Philosophy of Religion)

PHILOSOPHY 2k (Aesthetics)

PHILOSOPHY 2L (Epistemology, Logic & Methodology)

PHILOSOPHY 2M (Modern Philosophy)

PHILOSOPHY 2N (Recent Philosophy)

INFORMATION SCIENCE 300

STATISTICS 300

PHILOSOPHY 3C/ Э CC (Contemp. European)

PHILOSOPHY 3D/3DD (Political Philosophy)

PHILOSOPHY 3E/ ЭЕЕ ( Ethics)

PHILOSOPHY 3F/3FF (Formal Logic)

PHILOSOPHY 3G/3GG (Greek Philosophy)

PHILOSOPHY 3J/3JJ (Philosophy of Religion)

PHILOSOPHY 3 К /3КК (Aesthetics)

PHILOSOPHY 3L/3LL (Epistemology, Logic & Methodology)

PHILOSOPHY 31/311 (Modern Philosophy)

PHILOSOPHY 3N/3NN (Recent Philosophy)

Faculty of Arts

History & Philosophy of Science

HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 1

Mathematical Sciences

Mathematics Sequence 1: MATHEMATICS 1A MATHEMATICS 1C Sequence 2: MATHEMATICS 1 B

HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2A

HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2 В

MATHEMATICS 2A

MATHEMATICS 2 В

HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3C

HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3D

MATHEMATICS 3A MATHEMATICS 3C

MATHEMATICS 3B

Note: Sequence 2 is available only for students who sequence 1. (Carefully study details of subjects.)

Computation

INFORMATION SCIENCE 100

Statistics

STATISTICS 100•

Philosophy

PHILOSOPHY 1A

PHILOSOPHY 1 B

are also taking

Note: Philosophy subjects offered both at Grade 2 and Grade 3 level may NOT be taken at both levels in a major in Philosophy. (Read details of subjects carefully.)

•Statistics 100 does not form part of a major and no student may receive credit

for both Statistics 100 and Statistics 200.

40

Description of Courses Available

Geography

GEOGRAPHY 1

Psychology

PSYCHOLOGY 1 BEHAVIOURAL

STUDIES 1

Science Subjects:

BIOLOGY CHEMISTRY GEOLOGY PHYSICS

Area Studies: EAST ASIAN

STUDIES 1 INDIAN STUDIES 1A

INDONESIAN & MALAYAN STUDIES 1 (See also under Languages)

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 1

RUSSIAN LITERATURE & SOCIETY

Classics

CLASSICAL STUDIES 1A

(History 1C)

GEOGRAPHY 2

PSYCHOLOGY 2A BEHAVIOURAL

STUDIES 2

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2 В

CLASSICAL STUDIES 2B•

GEOGRAPHY 3

PSYCHOLOGY 3A

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 3A

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 38

CLASSICAL STUDIES 38•

INDIAN STUDIES 2B INDIAN STUDIES Э B INDIAN STUDIES 2C INDIAN STUDIES 3C INDONESIAN & INDONESIAN &

MALAYAN MALAYAN STUDIES 2 STUDIES 3

CLASSICAL

CLASSICAL STUDIES 2C•

STUDIES 3C•

English

ENGLISH 1

ENGLISH 2

ENGLISH 3 RHETORIC

Fine Arts FINE ARTS 1A

FINE ARTS 2E

FINE ARTS 3F

(Medieval &

(Early Christian &

Renaissance)

Byzantine) FINE ARTS ЭК

(European Art History: 19th & 20th Centuries)

Music MUSIC 1A

MUSIC 2 В

MUSIC 3C

•AvailaЫ e In alternate years.

41

Faculty of Arts

Ni student may receive credit for both—

French 1 and French 1A (passed before 1974) Russian 1 and Russian 1A (passed before 1974)

and/or Russian Reading Course (passed before 1974)

Economic Geography 1

or Regional & Urban Studies 1 Later British History Mathematics 1 A, 1 В or 1 C

Mathematics 1A Statistics 100 German 1

Russian 1

Latin 1

and Geography 1 and Social History and General Mathematics (passed before

1975) and Mathematics 1 C and Statistics 200 and German 1A (new beginners' course

1975) and Russian 1A (new beginners' course

1975) and Latin 1A

Prerequisites; Except with the special permission of the Faculty no student may proceed to any of the subjects set out in the following table without completing the appropriate prerequisites:

Chinese 2} Japanese 2

Criminology A Statistical Method History 2J

Any other Grade 2 or 3 History subject

International Relations 2 Politics 2A

Politics 2A (Approved units)

Public Administration 2 Political Sociology 3

Social History History & Philosophy of

Science 2A History & Phiiosophy of

Science 3C or 3F

Philosophy 2D

Philosophy 2F1 Philosophy 2L

All other Grade 2 Philosophy subjects

East Asian Studies 1 in addition to Chinese 1 or Japanese 1 respectively

Any two university subjects Economics lA A Grade 1 History subject or East Asian

Studies 1 A Grade 1 or Grade 2 History subject

respectively Politics 1 or any History subject Politics 1 or History 1 B or International

Relations 2 or Economic History 1A East Asian Studies or Indian Studies 1A

or Russian Literature & Society Any two university subjects Any Grade 2 or 3 Political Science sub-

ject or Psychology 1 and Psychology 2A A Grado 1 History or any two Arts subjects History & Philosophy of Science 1 or one

Science or Mathematics subject History & Philosophy of Science 2A or 2 В

or a Grade 1 and 2 Mathematics subject or Social Biology and Social History or History & Philosophy of Science 1 and Philosophy 2L

One Philosophy subject or two Political Science subjects or a Diploma of Social studies

One Philosophy subject or any two univer-sity subjects

One Philosophy subject

42

A Grade 3 Philosophy subject from group one (3C-3N)

A Grade 3 Philosophy subject from group two (3CC-3NN)

Statistics 200 Statistics 300 Behavioural Studies 2

Description of Courses Available

Any two Philosophy subjects

Another Grade 3 Philosophy subject from group one

Mathematics 1A or 1C Mathematics 2A Behavioural Studies 1 or Psychology 1

MIXED MAJORS

The following combinations of subjects have been approved. No other combinations are acceptable as majors without the special permission of the Faculty.

Mathematics 1A or 1C Statistics 200 History & Philosophy

of Science 1 Statistics 200

Mathematics 1 A or 1 C

History & Philosophy of Science 1

A first year Science subject

History & Philosophy of Science 1

History & Philosophy of Science 1 or any two first year Science subjects

Mathematics 1A or 1C

Mathematics 1 A or 1 C History & Philosophy

of Science 1 History & Philosophy

of Science 1 or Social Biology

Philosophy 3L

Philosophy 31. (Logic & Methodology)

Information Science 300

Philosophy 31. (Logic & Methodology)

Philosophy 3L (Logic & Methodology)

Philosophy 31. (Logic & Methodology)

History & Philosophy of Science 3C

History & Philosophy of Science 3C

Statistics 300 Statistics 300

History & Philosophy of Science 3C

Information Science 200

History & Philosophy of Science 2A

History & Philosophy of Science 2A

History & Philosophy of Science 2A

Philosophy 2L (Logic & Methodology)

Mathematics 2A

Statistics 200 Statistics 200

Social History

COMBINATIONS OF POLITICAL SCIENCE WITH ECONOMIC HISTORY, HISTORY, INDIAN STUDIES, INDONESIAN & MALAYAN STUDIES, EAST ASIAN STUDIES AND PSYCHOLOGY

History 1A (British) International or Relations 2 or

History 1 B (Age of Politics 2A (approved Revolutions) units)

Behavioural Studies 1 Behavioural Studies 2 Political Sociology 3

or Psychology 1 or Psychology 2A or Criminology

'Prerequisite: A History Grade 1 and a History Grade 2 subject.

History 3J (East Asian) or

History 3H' (American)

43

Faculty of Arts

Economic History 1A Politics 1

Politics 1

Politics 1

East Asian Studies

Russian Literature & Society

Philosophy 1 B Indian Studies 1A

Indian Studies 1A

Indonesian & Malayan Studies 1

International Relations Any Grade 2 Political

Science subject or Economic History 2B History 2G (Australian)

Economic History 3C Economic History 3C or

3D

Any Grade 3 Political Science subject

Politics 3A Indian Studies 3 В or any

Grade 3 Political Science subject

Politics 3A (approved units)

History 3J• (East Asian) or International

Relations 3 or Politics 3A (approved

units)

History 2K (French) or History 2H

(American) or History 2J (East

Asian) or History 2L (British) Politics 2A (approved

units) or History 2J (East

Asian) Politics 2A (approved

units) Philosophy 2C or 2D Politics 2A (approved

units)

Indian Studies 2B

Indonesian & Malayan Studies 2

Any Grade 3 Political Science or History subject

Politics 3A (approved units)

Any Grade 3 Political Science subject

JOINT COURSES IN ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

The major in Mathematical Sciences as set out below has been approved and can be taken in the ordinary (Pass) degree course for the Bachelor of Arts in the following manner:

First Year Second Year

Economics A Mathematics 1 C Math. Sci. 1 One other subject

Economics B Mathematics 2A Math. Sci. 2

Third Year

Economics C Math. Sci. 3

Courses in Mathematical Sciences comprise the following units:

Sub ject

Mathematical Sciences 1

Mathematical Sciences 2

Component Units:

Information Science 101 Statistics 111

Information Science 202 Statistics 201 Statištics 202

•Prerequisite: A History Grade 1 and a History Grade 2 subject.

44

Description of Courses Available

Mathematical Sciences 3 Units totalling between 18 and 20 points, including Mathematics 393 (4) Statistics 301 (3) Statistics 303 (3)

and a selection from

Information Science 302 (6) Mathematics 373 (4) Mathematics 394 (3) Statistics 305 (3) Statistics 306 (3) Statistics 309 (3)

45

Faculty of Arts

GRADUATE STUD(ES

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES

For information on this postgraduate diploma course, graduates, see pp. 175-178.

designed for pass

M.А . PRELIMINARY

Graduates with the degree of B.А . (ord.) may be permitted to study for M.A., after completing studies as prescribed, and passing a preliminary examination. The length of time for the M.A. preliminary course varies according to the qualifications of the student in the appropriate school. In general, departments require that candidates have reached the standard of the B.A. (honours) work in that school. Graduates of other faculties may in certain circumstances be admitted to M.A. preliminary courses without completing a B.A. All intending candidates should consult the appropriate department and also refer to enrolment procedures as indicated on p. 53.

MASTER OF ARTS

Candidature must be approved by the department and by the Faculty degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours or, after completing the course for the ordinary degree, have pursued further studies for two years (unless this period be reduced by permission of the faculty in special circumstances) and have then passed a preliminary eха miп atiоп of the standard of the final examination for the degree with honours. The examination for the degree is usually in the form of a thesis. Intending M.A. preliminary and M.A. students should consult the head of the department concerned, from whom the application form should be obtained. Candidature must be approved by the department and by the Faculty before enrolment will be accepted. Candidates are required to enrol and pay fees in each year over which their course extends. Candidates are not entitled to supervision or any other facilities unless they are enrolled. The time over which these courses may extend is ordinarily limited to two years for full-time and four years for part-time students. In addition to the schools in which the examination may be taken as listed in the regulation, the Faculty of Arts has approved for advanced studies Criminology, Economic History and Music. No candidate can be admitted to the degree of Master of Arts unless he is a graduate of at least one year's standing. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates, and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candi-dature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the com-mencement of his candidature. The regulation is on p. 53.

46

Description of Courses Available

M.A. EXAMINATION

In most departments examination is done by thesis, three (3) copies of which must be submitted to the Arts Faculty office.

Format of theses:

(i) Generally should be on International Standard Size A4 paper, measuring 297mm x 210mm, typewritten, double-spaced but where this Is not suitable, on foolscap size paper measuring 13in. x Bin. Students are advised to consult the department concerned as to which size paper is preferred.

(ii) Sheets should be numbered consecutively and clearly; interpolated sheets should be marked distinctly — e.g. 69(a), or as the case may require.

(iii) Folding diagrams or charts should be arranged so as to open out to the top and right.

(iv) There should be a margin on the left hand side of at least 1c/д in. uniform on all sheets.

(v) At least one copy, for deposit in the library, must be bound in such a manner that it will stand on the shelf as a book. All copies must have the pages firmly fastened within a cover. Spring-back folders must not be used.

(vi) A title page must show the title of the thesis, the degree for which it is submitted, and the full name of the author as well as a state-ment that the thesis is the candidate's own work and that he has quoted all source material used.

(vii) The name of the author must be on the spine and it is desirable to show there also the title, abbreviated if necessary.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

This in general is a degree for full-time research workers. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other university recognized for the purpose, must be of such standing as may be required by the Professorial Board for graduates in this faculty, and must be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the depart-ment concerned. He must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research under a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the board, and on its completion must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The prerequisite for the Ph.D. degree is an M.A. with first or second class (division A) honours or B.A. with first or second class (division A) honours together with one year's experience in approved post-graduate work. In the latter case graduates with 1st or 2A honours would enter for the M.A. degree but, if recommended and approved by the faculty, could apply for admission to Ph.D. candidature at the end of their first year of graduate study without having to submit a master's thesis or be tested by publication or further examination. The head of the department is responsible for recommending acceptance by the Ph.D. Standing Committee and the matter is reported to faculty as soon as possible afterwards.

DOCTOR OF LETTERS

This degree is gained by original work only. The candidate must be a

47

Faculty of Arts

bachelor of Arts of at least seven years' standing or a graduate in some other faculty who has had adequate training in letters, and must submit a punished work on an approved subject, together with any other pub-lished or unpublished work he thinks appropriate. The degree will not be awarded unless the examiners are satisfied that the work submitted is effectively presented, and makes a substantial, sustained and original contribution to learning. Three (3) copies of the thesis submitted must be lodged for examination. (See Regulations 3.7 and 4.6.)

48

REGULATIONS

Regulation 3.5 — Degree of Bachelor of Arts

1. The degree of bachelor of Arts may be obtained either as an ordinary degree or as a degree with honours. 2. (1) A candidate for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall, after

matriculating, pursue his studies for at least three years, and pass examinations in accordance with the conditions prescribed.

(2) A candidate shall be deemed to be in the first year of his course until he has received credit for four subjects of his course and thereafter to be In the second year until he has received credit for seven subjects of his course. Save that in special cases the faculty may declare that a candidate has completed

(i) his first year upon receiving credit for three subjects of his course; and

(ii) has completed his second year upon receiving credit for six subjects of his course.

(3) No candidate may pursue a course of study or receive credit for examinations passed unless his proposed selection of subjects and the years of his course in which they are taken have been approved by the faculty. Any subsequent alterations In the proposed course must be approved by the faculty.

2А . A candidate who passes three out of four subjects in his First Year may in accordance with the principles determined by the Faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board be credited by the Faculty with having completed four subjects in his First Year having regard to his performance in the subjects taken by him in that First Year provided that the subject failed shall be recorded as a failure and the credit so granted by the faculty shall not entitle the candidate to proceed with other subjects of the course for which a pass in that subject may be a pre-requisite. .

3. (1) No candidate may receive credit for any subject for the pur- poses of the degree of bachelor of Arts unless he has at least six months before presenting himself for examination in such subject, obtained grade D or higher In a language other than English or a mathematics subject at the Higher School Cer-tificate Examination; Provided that the faculty may waive these requirements if a candidate satisfies the faculty—

(i) that he has achieved a sufficient standard in English and such other subjects as the faculty shall consider suitable to enable him to pursue the course successfully; and

(ii) that he would suffer severe hardship if the foregoing provisions were rigidly applied

Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding sub-section any candidate who has reached the age of 35 years by 31st December of the year preceding that in which he enters upon the course or has completed the course for a degree or for the

(2)

49

Faculty of Arts

diploma in Social Studies in the University shall not be required to obtain Grade D or higher in a language other than English or a mathematics subject at the Higher School Certificate Examination.

4. During each year a candidate shall attend such classes, submit written work and perform practical, laboratory, field or clinical work in accordance with the requirements prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects unless he satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate train-ing elsewhere.

THE ORDINARY DEGREE

6. A candidate shall pass the annual examination in at least nine subjects in such manner as to comply with the following conditions, viz. he shall—

(a) pass in two majors; and (b) pass in such other subjects as the faculty has approved pursuant

to section 2 hereof.

6. A major consists of three subjects, approved by the faculty as affording a continuous and progressive course of study. Save in excep-tional circumstances, the three subjects of a major must be passed in three separate years.

7. No candidate may receive credit for more than four subjects passed at any one examination.

8. The subjects of the course for the degree and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the substantive resolution of the Professorial Board on the recom-mendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects.

8A. The faculty may allow a candidate to substitute for a subject of the course a subject of another course which subject is, in its opinion, of at least equal standard and relevant to the candidates course of study. 9. Except by special permission of the faculty a candidate must pass the nine subjects of the course within a period of nine years from the beginning of the academic year in which he passes in the first of such subjects.

10. Where an honour examination is provided in any subject of the course for the ordinary degree, a candidate may enter for and be classed at that examination. A candidate so entering may compete for the exhibi-tion in a subject in accordance with the conditions prescribed therefor: Provided that no candidate may be awarded an exhibition at an examina-tion when at that examination he is completing or might complete the course for his degree.

11. In any subject of the course for the ordinary degree which is not a subject of the course for the degree with honours the faculty may if it thinks fit prescribe that the examination shall be both for pass and for honours.

12. (a) A candidate who is taking or has taken the course for another degree in the University may also be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Arts if he has passed in at least six subjects of the Arts course approved for the purpose by the faculty in addition to the subjects required for such other degree. Pro-

50

Regulations

vided that no candidate may be so admitted unless he has passed or received credit for at least ten subjects.

(b) A candidate who is taking or who has takert a course for the diploma of Social Studies and who wishes to take the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall submit for approval a course extending over at least four years and comprising at least thirteen subjects.

(c) A candidate who is taking or has taken a course for the diploma in Journalism end who wishes to take the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall submit for approval a course comprising e* least fourteen subjects.

13. Repealed.

DEGREE WITH HONOURS

14. An applicant for candidature for the degree of bachelor of Arts (degree with honours) shall —

(a) have completed at least one year's study and save in circumstances considered by the faculty to be special passed in three subjects of an approved course for the degree of bachelor of Arts or an approved combined course;

(b) be recommended for candidature by the head of the appropriate department;

(c) obtain the approval of the faculty for his candidature.

14А . (a) A candidate for the degree with honours must pursue the studies and pass the examinations prescribed In the details of subjects either in an honour school or in a combined honour course approved by the faculty as equivalent to an honour school.

(b) There shall be the following honour schools —

A. Classical Studies В . History C. Philosophy D. Mathematics E. English Language and Literature F. French Language and Literature G. Germanic Studies H. Economics I. Political Science J. Middle Eastern Studies K. Psychology L. Mathematical Statistics M. Russian Language and Literature N. Fine Arts O. History and Philosophy of Science P. Geography Q. Chinese R. Italian Language and Literature S. Indian Studies

15. The subjects of the course must be passed in accordance with section 8 hereof so far as it is applicable and in accordance with such conditions as may be prescribed by the faculty in the details of subjects.

16. (a) The faculty shall either in the details of subjects or by individual determination to special cases prescribe the condi-

51

Faculty of Arts

tions under which a candidate will be admitted to the work of the Second Year of an honour school or combined honour course. A candidate must at the beginning of his Second Year be approved by the faculty as a candidate in a specified honour school or combined honour course must pursue to the satis-faction of the faculty the course of study prescribed for the Second, Third and Fourth Years of that school or course1 must at such annual examinations and In such subjects as may be prescribed be placed in the class list and must be placed in the class list at the final examination.

17. The faculty may direct for any subject or part of a subject that the final examination shall be held at the same time as the annual exami-nation.

18. In addition to the class lists for the final examination in each honour school there shall be a separate class list for the final examination in each combined honour course approved by the faculty.

19. No candidate may be placed in the class list at the final examination more than twice in the same school or combined honour course.

20. A candidate who has failed to obtain a place in the class list of any examination may —

(a) if of sufficient merit be given credit for particular subjects in the course for the ordinary degree and in the final examination may be allowed the ordinary degree either immediately or on the com-pletion of such further works as the faculty may determine;

(b) present himself and be classed at a subsequent examination.

21. Where a candidate desires to abandon the course for the degree with honours and to proceed with the course for the ordinary degree the faculty may prescribe what further work must be completed by the candidate to qualify him for admission to the ordinary degree. 22. Repealed.

23. A person who has obtained the ordinary degree may with approval of the faculty be admitted as a candidate for the degree with honours. The faculty shall (notwithstanding section 16 hereof) prescribe what further work must be completed by the candidate before he shall be admitted to the final examination.

24. A candidate who has been placed in the class list at the final examination in any school or combined honour course may subsequently with the approval of the faculty which shall prescribe what further work (if any) must first be completed by him present himself and be classed at the final examination in any other school or combined honour course. 25. For the purposes of Regulation 6.1 prizes, exhibitions and scholar-ships in the subjects of the course shall be awarded on such conditions as may from time to time be prescribed by the faculty and published with the details of subjects.

[TEMPORARY REGULATION A candidate who obtained credit for any subject or subjects of the course before 31st March, 1966, may complete the course under the regulations

= The faculty will allow changes to be made et the end of the Second Year only in special cases In which ell the work required for the school or combined course to which the change is made has been covered in the preceding sections of the course.

(b)

52

Regulations

In force on 31st March, 1965 except that, for the purpose of completing a qualification for the degree, a candidate who on 31st December, 1944, had credit for any subject or subjects of the course shall not without special permission of the faculty retain credit therefor after 31st March, 1968. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st March, 1975.]

[TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. A candidate who has obtained credit for any subject or subjects of the course before 31st March, 1969, may complete the course under the regulations in force on 31st December, 1968, as if those regulations had remained in force. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st March, 1978.]

Regulation 3.6 — Degree of Master of Arts

1. A person may be a candidate for the degree of master of Arts if — ( а ) he has completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts with

honours, or

after completing the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) and obtaining the recommendation of the head (or heads) of the school (or schools) within which he proposes to pursue his studies for the degree of master of Arts he

(i) pursues further studies for two years or such shorter period as the faculty approves and

(ii) satisfies the faculty at a preliminary examination that he has the ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or

(c) having completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) and having qualified for a degree of master or doctor in some other faculty, he satisfies the faculty of Arts of his ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or

being an honours graduate in some other faculty in the discipline in which he applies for admission to master of Arts candidature, or in a closely related discipline, he satisfies the faculty of Arts of his ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or

being a graduate in some other faculty he satisfies the faculty of Arts et such preliminary examination as may be prescribed by the faculty of his ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts.

2. Before commencing the course each candidate must obtain the approval of the faculty for his candidature and for his course and must obtain the approval of the faculty for any subsequent change in his candidature or in his course.

3. The preliminary examination for a candidate who has completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) or is e graduate in some other faculty shall be prescribed by the head (or heads) of the appropriate school (or schools) in the light of a candidate's proposed advanced studies, and may consist of selected papers at the final examination for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours or of special papers of equivalent standard. A candidate who is admitted on grounds of having qualified for a degree

(b)

(d)

(e)

53

Faculty of Arts

of bachelor of Arts with honours in another University may be required to complete such additional work as the head (or heads) of the approp-riate school (or schools) shall prescribe before submitting for examination.

4. A candidate shall enter his name with the Registrar not later than the end of the third week of the first term of the year in which he com-mences either the further studies leading to the preliminary examination or the advanced studies for the degree and shall re-enrol in each year over which the course may be extended.

5. A candidate shall pursue advanced studies and enter for examination in one, or, with the approval of the faculty, in two of the following schools —

A. Classical Studies B. History C. Philosophy D. Mathematics E. English Language and Literature F. French Language and Literature G. Germanic Studies H. Economics I. Political Science J. Middle Eastern Studies K. Psychology L. Mathematical Statistics M. Russian Language and Literature N. Fine Arts O. History and Philosophy of Science P. Geography Q. Oriental Studies R. Italian Language and Literature

or in such fields of study as the faculty may approve'

6. A candidate shall ordinarily pursue his advanced studies through not less than one academic year, but if any candidate be engaged in employ-ment other than University study he may be required by the faculty to spend not less than two academic years in advanced studies.

7. (i) The examination in each school shall be prescribed by the Professorial Board in the details of subjects, and may be either wholly or in part by thesis and shall be held at a time or times to be fixed by the faculty.

(ii) The candidate shall submit the subject of a thesis to the head (or heads) of the appropriate school (or schools) for approval not later than the end of the first term of the year in which the candidate begins the advanced studies.

(iii) The thesis shall be submitted at such time as may be prescribed in the details of subjects:

Provided that no candidate who is a bachelor of Arts ordinary degree only or who is a bachelor only in some other faculty who graduated as such without honours shall in either event present for examination until three years after the date when he qualifies so to graduate unless faculty on the recommendation of the appropriate head of department and being

I The faculty has approved. for the purpose of this regulation, Social Studies, Criminology, Music, Indonesian Studies, Indian Studies and Economic History.

54

Regulations

satisfied that the case is one of exceptional merit approves a reduction in this period.

7A. Repealed.

8. (I) A candidate who satisfies the examiners shall be classified as having been awarded first or second class honours.

(H) The second class shall be divided into an upper and lower division to be called Division A and Division B respectively.

9. A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed and is a bachelor of Ап s or a graduate in some other faculty of not less than one year's standing may be admitted to the degree of master of Arts.

10. Notwithstanding any statute or regulation to the contrary, candidates who at or before the examination held In the fourth term 1935 obtained first or second class honours at the final examination for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours, and who are bachelors of Arts of not less than two years' standing, may be admitted to the degree of master of Arts without further examination.

Regulation 3.80 — Degree of Doctor of Philosophy

1. A candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy must: (a) either be a graduate of or be qualified to graduate either in this

University or if he is not such a graduate or so qualified of some other university or institution recognized for the purpose of this regulation by Professional Board and be of such standing as may be required by the Professorial Board for graduates In his faculty;

(b) if he does not satisfy the requirements of paragraph (a) hereof produce evidence satisfactory to the appropriate faculty or board of studies and the Professorial Board that he has adequate train-ing, research experience and ability to pursue the proposed course;

(c) if he is not a graduate of the University, matriculate in the Uni-versity before enrolling as a candidate;

(d) submit a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by him in a department of the University;

(e) be accepted by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department.

2. After being accepted he must pursue a course of advanced study and research in the University for such period (being not less than two years) and under such supervision as may be prescribed for him by the Board, save that—

(a) in special circumstances the Board may grant permission for the candidate to spend not more than one year of his course in research at another Institution provided that his work can be supervised in a manner satisfactory to the Board, or

(b) when the head of the appropriate department recommends that it is essential for the candidate to obtain material for his course away from the University, the Board may grant permission for the candi-date to absent himself from the University for such period as may be determined in each case, provided that supervision satisfactory to the Board can be maintained.

55

Faculty of Arts

3. (1) The candidate shall be required during the course to devote his whole time to his advanced study and research, save that —

(a) the Board may allow a candidate on application to under-take a limited amount of University teaching or outside work which in its judgement will not interfere with the continuous pursuit of the proposed course of advanced study and research; and

a member of the University staff may be accepted as a part-timer candidate for the degree, whereupon the Board shall prescribe a minimum period for the duration of his Course.

(2) In special circumstances the Board may accept as a part-time candidate for the degree a person engaged in another regular occupation which in its opinion leaves the candidate substantially free to pursue his course in a department of the University. The Board shall prescribe for the duration of his course of advanced study and research a minimum period which in its opinion, having regard to the proportion of his time which he is able to devote to the course in the appropriate University department, is equivalent to the two years ordinarily required.

4. A candidate may be required during his course to attend lectures and practical work in subjects prescribed by the Board.

5. If the Board is of opinion that a candidate is not making satisfactory progress it may terminate his course or make such changes in the condi-tions of his candidature as it thinks fit.

6. On completing the course of advanced study and research a candi-date must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The thesis shall be examined in manner provided in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees. The candidate must also satisfy the examiners in such written, oral or practical examinations as may be required by the Board on the recommendation of the examiners. 6A. (1) There shall be a panel of two examiners of whom at least one shall be external. џ The minimum requirement of the Board is approved research experience for one full year or part-time approved research experience which, in the opinion of the Board. is equivalent to that gained In one full year. This requirement is Included in the following specific statements of the pre-requisites of the several faculties. Agriculture — В .Agr.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience. Applied Science — B.App.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience. Architecture — B.Aroh. with Honours plus one year of approved research experience. Arts — M.A. with first or second class (Division A) honours; В .А . with first or

second class (Division A) honours together with one year's research experIence in approved post-graduate work.

Dental Science — В .D.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience. Economics and Commerce --. M. С om. or (in special cases approved by the

Faculty) its equivalent. such qualifications to include at least one year of approved research experience.

Education — MEd; B. Е d. with first class or high second class honours (or with equivalent performance) plus one year of approved research experience.

Engineering — В . Е . or В .Surv. plus one year of approved research experience. Law — LL.B. with honours (or, in special cases its equivalent) plus one year of

approved research experience. Medicine — M.B. B.S. plus one year of approved research experience. Science -- M.So. (obtained as a result of at least two years approved research

experience); or В .Sc. (Hons.) plus one additional year's approved research experience. or В .Sc. (Ord.) plus two years approved research experience.

The Faculty of science would be prepared to accept as e sufficient pre-requisite In certain cases of full-time members of the Academic Staff, pert-time research experience gained over two years providing such experience is more than equivalent to that gained In one full year.

Veterinary Science — B.V.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience.

(b)

56

Regulations

(2) The head of the appropriate department, if he be not an examiner, shall act as chairman of the panel.2

(3) If the head of the appropriate department be an examiner, the Council after consultation with the Professorial Board shall appoint a professor or other member of the whole-time teaching staff of the University to act as chairman of the panel.

(4) The chairman of the panel shall not have a vote. (5) Any examiner appointed pursuant to sub-section 2 of section

5 of regulation 4.6 shall be an external examiner. (6) The supervisor of the candidate shall not be appointed as an

examiner.

7. Three copies of the thesis and a summary of 300-500 words must be submitted. The thesis must be of standard format1 approved by the Board. 8. A candidate in submitting his thesis shall state generally in a preface and specifically in notes the sources from which his information is derived, the extent to which he has availed himself of the work of others, and In general terms the portions of his work which he claims as original. When a candidate submits work carried out in collaboration with another person, he shall indicate his own share in the work.

9. A candidate may not present as his thesis any work for which a degree has been conferred on him in this or another university, but he will not be precluded from incorporating such work or any part thereof in his thesis: Provided that in his application for acceptance he has stated his intention of doing so and In presenting the thesis indicates the part of the work which has been so incorporated.

10. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy.

Regulation 3.7 — Degree of Doctor of Letters

1. A bachelor of Arts may at any time after seven years from the com-pletion of his course for that degree become a candidate for the degree of doctor of Letters.

2. If the faculty is satisfied that a graduate in some other faculty has had an adequate training in letters the faculty may at any time after seven years from the completion of his course for a bachelor's degree admit him as a candidate for the degree of doctor of Letters.

З . Every candidate must submit for examination an original work,2 the subject, scope and character of which have been approved by the faculty, together with any other published or unpublished work which the candi-date thinks appropriate. The examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed the examination unless they are satisfied that the work sub-mitted is effectively presented and makes a substantial sustained and original contribution to learning.

s The chairman of examiners shall facilitate consultation among the examiners and shall prepare a comprehensive report on the result of the examination. I See regulation 4.8, footnote 2. I Three copies of work submitted muet be lodged for examination.

57

Faculty of Arts

4. A candidate shall not submit for examination work in respect of which a degree has been awarded in any university, or, without permission of the faculty, work which has previously been presented for any such degree.

5. If the principal work submitted by a successful candidate has not been published the degree shall not be conferred until It has been pub-lished in whole or in part in a form satisfactory to the faculty, unless for special reason exemption is granted by the Council on the recommenda- tion of the faculty. .

6. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Letters.

Regulation 3.84 — Diploma in Psychology (Repealed 1971) •

TEMPORARY REGULATION

1. A candidate who obtained any credit for any subject or subjects of the course before the 31st December 1971 may complete the course under the regulations In force on the 1st January 1971.

2. This temporary regulation shall expire on the 31st December 1975.

• Enrolments from new students wilt not be accepted.

58

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS

Subject to dispensation by the Faculty in special cases, no candidate shall be admitted to examination in any subject of the course or to the final examination for the degree with honours unless he either:

(a) has attended such classes, submitted such written work and per-formed sudi practical, laboratory, field or clinical work as may be prescribed by the head of the department concerned; or

(b) satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere.

Written work required as an integral part of a course as set out in the details of subjects must be completed by the dates specified, since the time available for such work is an essential component of the require-ment itself. Students who, without the formal permission of the head of department, fail to complete written work by the specified dates may be reported to faculty for unsatisfactory progress and/or credit for the subject may be withheld. Details of subjects are arranged in alphabetical order of departments. The requirements for honours and MA candidates will be found immediately after the pass requirements in each section. Books marked with an asterisk are essential and students should buy them. Students are advised to consult their tutors or lecturers before buying books not so marked.

EXAMINATIONS

Students will note that many departments have instituted or wish to institute changes from the traditional pattern of one or more three-hour examinations held at the end of third-term. The examinations as stated in the Details of Subjects will represent the maximum number and the most formal type of examinations demanded by any department. Any variation from the requirements as stated in the Handbook will thus operate in favour of students, i.e., will lessen the amount and provide a more varied flexible type of assessment than that formally stated. All cases of varia-tion, will be published and prominently displayed on departmental notice-boards no later than 31 March in any year. Commencing in 1973 Faculty wishes to distinguish clearly between grade I, grade I1 and grade Ill subjects. As a result all subjects have been differentiated by the use of a numerical and alphabetical code.

The number 1, 2, 3 or 4, indicates the grade of subject.

The letter A. B. etc. indicates the nature of the subject.

e.g. History 2G is Australian History as a grade 11 subject. History 3G is Australian History as a grade Ill subject.

Students then will not be able to retain credit for any two or more sub-jects differentiated by the same alphabetical letter or in some cases by the same title, except where different units are chosen in different years.

e.g. International Relations 2, and International Relations 3

59

Faculty of Arts

THE LANGUAGE CENTRE Acting Director: Mr R. J. Zatorski, M.A.

The Language Centre provides the language laboratory facilities for a wide range of courses offered by various Arts departments. In addition, it has its own teaching programme in Linguistics, provides special purpose foreign language courses taken by honours and post-graduate students in different faculties, and offers a special programme in English for Foreign Students. Facilities for self tuition in a variety of languages are offered, and the Language Centre collaborates in the conduct of vacation courses in a number of languages.

COURSES OFFERED

102-115 Linguistics 1 102-215 Linguistics 2 102-301 French Reading Course 102-302 German Reading Course

• 102-201 Science French •102-202 Science German •102-203 Science Russian

English for Foreign Studentst

'These courses are normally taken only by students in technical facul-ties. For details, refer to the Faculty of Science Handbook. tEnglish for Foreign Students is a programme adapted to the particular needs of the students seeking assistance. No formal details are published, and enquiries should be directed to the Language Centre.

102-115 LINGUISTICS 1 lг R. J. Zatorski, M.A. Dr J. P. Kaplan

INTRODUCTION

Linguistics is a rigorous study of the structure and function of natural languages, distinguishing three major subject areas of investigation: the study of human speech sounds — phonology; the study of word-arrangement in phrases and sentences — syntax; and the study of meaning — semantics. Theories of language constitute formal integrated models which specify the role of phonology, syntax and semantics respectively in the processes of sentence-generation by speakers and meaning-derivation by hearers. Linguistics 1 provides an introductory coverage of each of these areas, concentrating on contemporary theories and supplementing them with elementary coverage of related topics. Lectures in Term I concentrate on the following areas: History, General Distinctions and Methods in Linguistics, and Phonology. Tutorials examine selected areas in these general topics and provide opportunities for individual and group work in phonetic transcription and phonemic analysis. In Term II, lectures cover Traditional Syntax and Introductory Socio-linguistics. Tutorials offer a review of the problems attending the use of language as a vehicle in social interaction and detailed analyses of simple syntactic structures. In Term Ill, lectures are devoted to an informal account of Generative Transformational Grammar and Introductory Semantics. Tutorials deal

60

Linguistics

with complex syntactic structures and with the interrelations between structure and meaning.

SYLLABUS

Term 1 History of Linguistic Inquiry. General Distinctions. Methods in Linguistics. English and General Phonology.

Term 11 Traditional Syntax of English. Language and Society.

Term Ill English Transformational Grammar. Structure and Meaning.

COURSE DETAILS

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Course work will include periodic assignments and group work. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Stork F C & Widdowson J D A Learning About Linguistics, Hutchinson

Educational 1974 Chomsky N Language and Mind, Harcourt Brace and World 1968 Hornby A S A Guide to Patterns and Usage in English, OUP 1954 Lyons J Chomsky, Fontana 1970 Gleason H A An Introduction to Descriptive Linguistics, Holt Rinehart

& Winston 1961 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Liles B L Linguistics and the English Language, Goodyear 1972 Langacker R W Language and its Structure, Harcourt Brace & World

1967 Jacobs R & Rosenbaum P English Transformational Grammar, Blaisdell

Pub. Co. 1968 Pride J B & Holmes J Sociolinguistics, Penguin Books Ltd. 1967

ASSESSMENT

Students' performance will be assessed as follows: (a) By homework. Tutorial exercises, problem sheets and project work

will be set at regular intervals and work returned at prescribed times will be allotted point scores contributing to the final assess-ment.

(b) By term tests. There will be two 90-minute term tests, one in Term II and one in Term Ill, which will evaluate the students familiarity with phonology and with syntax/semantics, respectively; and

(c) By a final examination consisting of one 3-hour paper on the entire content of the course. Students with a consistent and satisfactory record of homework and term tests will be eligible for exemption from the final examination.

102-215 LINGUISTICS 2 Mr R. J. Zatorski, M.A. Dr J. P. Kaplan

Enrolment in this subject Is restricted to students who have gained a pass In Linguistics 1. Senior honours and post-graduate students may bo admitted by special arrangement. The second year linguistics course gives equal weight to the continued accumulation of theoretical competence and to the development of methodological and research skills In structural analysis. Lectures and

61

Faculty of Arts

tutorials will follow independent lines; the former will deal with theoreti-cal issues and the latter will concentrate on developing skills in linguistic analysis. The lecture series will concentrate on the following areas: Modern theories of grammar. Logic-based and interpretive semantics. Psychological theories of language-acquisition and integrated theories of language. The tutorial sequence will be devoted to develop-ing, studying and exercising techniques in linguistic analysis in all major problem areas of linguistics and with reference to a broad range of modern languages. In general, the course takes account of the fact that linguistics Is very closely associated with philosophy where the resolu-lion of certain classes of problems involves the investigation of the relations between linguistic structure and meaning, and with psychology whose scope includes the analysis of verbal behaviour and the modelling of linguistic competence and performance.

SYLLABUS

Term 1 Lecture Series: Properties of grammars. A formal model for English syntax.

Tutorial Series: Lexical analysis. Syntactic analysis.

Term Il Lecture Series: Introduction to logic-based and interpretive semantics. Psychological theories of language-acquisition.

Tutorial Series: Phonological analysis. Historical and comparative analysis. Linguistics and style.

Term III Lecture Series: Integrated models of language. Tutorial Series: Meta-theoretical issues in grammar-design.

Linguistic universals.

COURSE DETAILS

A course of not more than 40 lectures and a weekly 2-hour tutorial throughout the year. Course work will include periodic assignments and project work.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Davis P W Modern Theories of Language, Prentice-Hall 1973 Langendoen D T The Study of Syntax, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969 Leech G N Towards a Semantic Description of English, Longman 1969

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Chomsky N Syntactic Structures, Mouton 1957 •Chomsky N Aspects of the Theory of Syntax, MIT Press 1965 Chomsky N Studies on Semantics in Generative Grammar, Mouton 1972 •Fujimura 0 Three Dimensions of Linguistic Theory, TEC Co Ltd,

Tokyo 1973 Katz J J & Postal P M An Integrated Theory of Linguistic Descriptions,

MIT Press 1964 Kimball J P The Formal Theory of Grammar, Prentice-Hall 1973

•Langacker R W Fundamentals of Linguistic Analysis, Harcourt Brace

Jovanovich Inc 1972 •Stockwell R P Schachter P & Partee B H The Major Syntactic Struc-

tures of English, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973

62

Foreign Language Reading Courses

(c) Sources and Background reference: Anderson S R & Kiparsky P A Festschrift for Morris Halle, Holt Rine-

hart & Winston 1973 Fillmore C J & Langendoen D T Studies in Linguistic Semantics, Holt

Rinehart & Winston 1973 Fodor J & Katz J The Structure of Language. Prentice-Hall 1964 Gross M Mathematical Models in Linguistics, Prentice-Hall 1972 Harman G & Davidson D Semantics of Natural Language, Reidel 1972 Harris Z Methods in Structural Linguistics, Phoenix Books 1960 Harris Z Mathematical Structures of Language, Interscience John Wiley

1968 Hoenigswald H M Language Change and Linguistic Reconstruction,

Phoenix Books 1960 Jackendoff R S Semantic Interpretation in Generative Grammar, MIT

Press 1972 Katz J J Semantic Theory, Harper & Row 1972 McNeill D The Acquisition of Language, Harper & Row 1970 Menyuk P The Acquisition end Development of Language, Prentice-

Hall 1971 Reibel D A & Schane S A Modern Studies in English, Prentice-Hall

1969 Rosenbaum P S The Grammar of English Predicate Complement Con-

structions, MIT Press 1967 Schane S A Generative Phonology, Prentice-Hall 1972 Slobin D I & Ferguson C A Studies of Child Language Development,

Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973 Steinberg D D & Jacobovits L A Semantics, CUP 1971

ASSESSMENT

Performance in Linguistics 2 will be assessed as follows:

(a) By assignments. Problem sheets and assignments on the program covered in the lecture series will be set at regular intervals and when returned at prescribed times will be allotted point scores contributing towards the final result.

(b) By tests. Two 90-minute class tests on the program covered in the tutorial series will be set and the point scores obtained will be credited towards the final result.

(c) By final examination. Not more than two 3-hour papers will be set on the contents of the entire course. Students with a consistent and satisfactory record of assignment work and class tests [(a) and (b) above] will be eligible for exemption from the final examination.

FOREIGN LANGUAGE READING COURSES FOR HONOURS ARTS STUDENTS 102-301 FRENCH READING COURSE

This subject may not be offered if the enrolment is less than five. A course of two classes per week throughout the year, plus tutorial assistance and language laboratory practice as required.

SYLLABUS The aim of the course is to enable honours students and research workers to read and translate source material in their field of study. To this end the course will provide intensive instruction in the sound, word and sen-

63

Faculty of Arts

tance structure of French, practice in translation into English of extracts from a wide range of relevant publications, such as articles, textbooks, commentaries etc. selected in collaboration with the departments con-cerned. The course presumes no previous knowledge of the language.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks:

•Brichant C French Grammar: The Key to Reading, Prentice-Hall Inc 1968 or later ed.

Brichant C French for the Humanities, Prentice-Hall Inc 1968 or later ed.

Further notes and texts will be provided by the Language Centre. • Н ar г a p's New Shoг te г French and English Dictionary Part I French-

English, Harrap 1967 or later ed. Recommended for reference: Brereton G The Concise French Verb Book, ULP 1965 or later ed.

EXAMINATION

Terminal written examinations may be held during the year, as well as an annual written examination.

102-302 GERMAN READING COURSE

This subject may not be offered if the enrolment is less than five. A course of two classes per week throughout the year plus tutorial assis-tance and language laboratory practice as required.

SYLLABUS

The aim of the course is to enable honours students and research workers to read and translate source material in their field of study. To this end the course will provide intensive instruction in the sound, word and sentence structure of German, practice in translation into English of extracts from a wide range of relevant publications, such as articles, textbooks, commentaries etc. selected in collaboration with the depart-ments concerned. The course presumes no previous knowledge of the language.

BOOKS

Notes and texts will be provided by the Language Centre.

One of the following dictionaries:

• Langenscheidt's Concise Dictionary German-English, Hodder & Stough-ton 1967 or later edition.

or The New Schöffler-Weiss Compact German and English Dictionary,

Наггар 1969

EXAMINATION

Terminal written examinations may be held during the year as well as an annual written examination.

64

Classical Studies

DEPARTMENT OF CLASSICAL STUDIES Chairman of Department: Professor G. W. CLARKE, B.A. (Oxon), M.A. (N.Z. and Melbourne).

ORDINARY DEGREE

Details for the degree with honours are set out at the end of this section.

SUBJECTS OFFERED

Ancient Greek parts 1, 2 and 3. Latin parts 1, 2 and 3. Latin part 1A. Modern Greek parts 1 and 2. History 1C (Classical Studies 1A). Classical Studies 26, 36 (not offered in 1975). Classical Studies 2C, Э C.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Students are required to submit such written work as is prescribed during the year.

SYLLABUS

The syllabus for each part of Greek and Latin includes: (i) Prescribed authors;

(ii) Unprepared translations; (iii) Historical and literary studies.

In addition, parts 1, 1A and 2 have regular language classes. Each examination on prescribed authors may include questions on section (iii) of the syllabus.

104-101 ANCIENT GREEK PART 1 N.B. Students intending to take this course must either have passed Ancient Greek at Higher School Certificate (or reached an equivalent standard) or have attended the Greek summer school held during Feb-ruary of each year. Students Intending to take the summer school must approach the department before the end of January.

SYLLABUS

A course of basic training in the Greek language along with the study of selected texts designed to provide an introduction to Greek tragedy.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks for 1975: •North & Hillard Greek Prose Composition, Rivingtons •Bryant & Lake An Elementary Greek Grammar, OUP or •Goodwin School Greek Grammar, Macmillan

Euripides Scenes from Euripides' Trojan Women, ed Kinchin Smith and lodge, Macmillan

•Greek Tragedies, Voi 1 ed Grene and Lattimore, Phoenix Plato Martyrdom of Socrates, ed Doherty, OUP

Harvey P Oxford Companion to Classical Literature, OUP •Liddell & Scott Greek-English Lexicon, Abridged version, OUP or

65 C

Faculty of Arts

preferably (for those intending to do honours work), the unabridged version.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 28).

A course of 13 lectures on the Peloponnesian War. Prescribed textbooks:

•Thucydides Athenian Disaster in Sicily, ed Marchant, Macmillan Thucydides The Peloponnesian War, Penguin

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers: written work done during the year and class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-201 ANCIENT GREEK PART 2 (PASS) Three classes per week. A study will be made of the Iliad of Homer, Thucydides' History of the War between Athens and Sparta, and Plato and the Physical World (Timaeus).

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks for 1975: •Wilcock M M A Commentary on Homer's Iliad, Books 1-VI, Macmillan •Homerus Ilias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoelder, Tjeenk Willink •Thucydides Book 1, ed Marchant, Macmillan •Thucydides The History of the Peloponnesian War, Penguin •Plato Oxford Classical Text, vol IV ed Burnet, OUP •Cornford F M Plato's Cosmology, Library of Liberal Arts paperback

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-301 ANCIENT GREEK PART 3 (PASS) Four classes per week. A study will be made of the Iliad of Homer, Thucydides' History of the War between Athens and Sparta, and Plato and the Physical World (Timaeus).

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks for 1975: •Wilcock M M A Commentary on Homer's Iliad, Books I-VI, Macmillan

•Homerus Ilias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoeldar, Tjeenk Willink •Thucydides Book I, ed Marchant, Macmillan •Thucydides The History of the Peloponnesian War, Penguin

•Plato Oxford Classical Text, vol IV ed Burnet, OUP •Cornford F M Plato's Cosmology, Library of Liberal Arts paperback

• Greek Lyric Poetry, ed Campbell, Macmillan

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

66

Classical Studies

EXAMINATION

Up to two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-102 LATIN PART 1 N.B. Students intending to take this course must have passed Latin at Higher School Certificate, or reached an equivalent standard. Four classes per week. A study will be made of the social, political and literary life in Rome at the period of the collapse of the Roman Republic. This will take the form of a study of three major texts and a series of classes on Roman social history.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks for 1975: •Virgil Aeneid IV as in Virgil Aeneid I-VI, ed Williams R D. Macmillan Virgil Aeneid, tr Copley, Library of Liberal Arts, Bobbs Merrill or Virgil Aeneid, tr Jackson Knight, Penguin •35 Letters of Cicero, ed Stockton, OUP paperback 'Res Publica. Roman Politics and Society According to Cicero, ed

Lacey W K& Wilson B W J G, OUP paperback Stockton D A Political Biography of Cicero, OUP Taylor L R Party Politics in the Age of Caesar, U of California paper-

back •Caesar Civil War I, ed Montgomery, Macmillan Letters of Cicero, tr Wilkinson L P, Grey Arrow Caesar The Civil Wars, Penguin Scullard H H From the Gracchi to Nero, Methuen paperback Martial Epigrams—material will be supplied by the Department • Mountford J F Bradley's Arnold Latin Prose Composition, Longmans •Harvey P Oxford Companion to Classical Literature, OUP Langenscheldt's Shorter Latin Dictionary, ed Handford & Herberg, Hodder

& Stoughton or Lewis & Short Latin Dictionary, OUP •Carcopino J Daily Life in Ancient Rome, Pelican Source material for Roman Social History will be supplied by the Department.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 28). A course of seminars on the techniques of Latin poetry. Material will be supplied by the Department.

EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year and class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-202 LATIN PARт 2 (PASS) Three classes per week.

SYLLABUS A study will be made of the social, political and literary life of the early Roman principate.

67

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks for 1975:

'Tacitus Annals XIV, ed Woodcock, Methuen Tacitus The Annals, tr Dudley, Mentor or tr Grant, Penguin Suetonius The Twelve Caesars, Penguin •Juvenal Satires, ed Duff, CUP Roman Minority Groups—material will be supplied by the Department.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

Up to three 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-302 LATIN PART З (PASS) Four classes per week.

SYLLABUS

A study will be made of the social, political and literary life of the early Roman principate.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks for 1975:

•Tacitus Annals XIV, ed Woodcock, Methuen Tacitus The Annals, tr Dudley, Mentor or tr Grant, Penguin Suetonius The Twelve Caesars, Penguin •Juvenal Satires, ed Duff, CUP Roman Minority Groups—material will be supplied by the Department.

(b) Books for extensive reading:

•Seneca Select Letters, ed Summers, Macmillan 'Suetonius The Lives of the Caesars, tr Rolfe, vol 2, Loeb 'Seneca Apocolocyntosis, tr Rouse, Loeb •Propertius Carmina, ed Barber, Oxford Classical Texts (c) Special study: 'Petronius Satyricon, tr Heseltine, Loeb

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION Up to three 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year and class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-111 MODERN GREEK PART 1 A course of two literary lectures, one literary tutorial and one language class per week. The course presupposes a level of linguistic competence and literacy equivalent to a pass at H.S.C., and students seeking admission to the

course must either have attained this or have displayed a high degree

68

Classical Studies

of competence in the Department's Advanced (Literary) Summer School and the ensuing examination.

SUMMER SCHOOLS

The Department proposes to mount two Summer Schools in February/ March, 1975. The first, an intensive basic course in the language for complete beginners; the second, an advanced language and basic litera-ture course (centred on textual analysis), assumes a basic working knowledge of Modern Greek. It is anticipated that some students enrolled in the second (Advanced) Summer School may wish subse-quently to pursue the Modern Greek part 1 course: selection for admis-sion to the part 1 course will be based on performance in a Departmental examination conducted in early March. Details of both Summer Schools will be available on request from the Department from December. It is hoped that the two Summer Schools will be held in sequence, making it possible for a student of proven linguistic ability but with no previous knowledge of Modern Greek, to be admitted to the part 1 course after successfully negotiating both Summer Schools and the Departmental examination.

SYLLABUS

A. Language—translation, composition, dictation, conversation.

B. Literature—

(i) Intensive textual analysis of selected 20th century works (one novel, two collections of poetry and one modern play).

(ii) Broader historical examination (based on selected texts) of trends in 19th/early 20th century literature.

BOOKS

(i) Prescribed texts for intensive critical study:

a) Novels

b) Poetry

c) Drama

•kostas Tachtsis To trito stephani, Ermis

•Kavaphis K P Piimata (1896-1933), Ikaros •Sikelianos A Antidoro, Galaxie

•Yerasimos Stavrov Kalinichta Margarita, Kedros

(ii) Texts representative of trends in 19th/early 20th century literature for historical study:

a) Poetry—to be selected from •Linos Politis Piitiki antholoyia vols 4, 5, 6

b) Prose—developments to be studied around the following texts (for examination purposes, students will be allowed to make a choice of 4 texts).

•Makriyiannis Apomnimonevmata • Rotdis I Pepisse Joanna •Vikelas Loukis Leras •Kondilakis O Patouchas •Karkavitsas Loyia tis ploris, Estias or Viper •Papadiamantis 1 Phonissa •Theotokis O katadikos, К eimena or Viper •Christomanos I kerenia koukla

69

Faculty of Arts

all published (unless otherwise indicated) by Galaxia and "Viper" (Papyros-Larousse)—either edition acceptable. In addition to the above prescribed texts, students will find it useful to equip themselves with the following reference books: Pring The Oxford Dictionary of Modern Greek, OUP Thompson A Manual of Modern Greek, Collet's Browning Medieval and Modern Greek, Hutchinson Politis L /storia tis Neas Ellinikis Logotechnias, Thessaloniki or Politis L A History of Modern Greek Literature, OUP Campbell & Sherrard Modern Greece, Ernest Benn

ASSESSMENT

Two 3-hour literature examinations (the first on prescribed texts of unit (i), the second on 19th/early 20th century literary developments as taught in unit (ii) and an oral test (with questions on literary pre-scriptions) at the end of the year. There will be terminal tests in translation and dictation. In addition, the quality of students' language work, tutorial papers, and essays throughout the year will be taken into account in assessing their performance.

104-211 MODERN GREEK PART 2 A course of two literary lectures, one literary tutorial, and one language class per week. A pass in Modern Greek part 1 is the prerequisite for the course.

SYLLABUS

A. Language — translation, composition, dictation, conversation.

B. Literature — (i) Poetry and prose of the Generation of 1930.

(ii) Modern Greek folksong.

(iii) A 19th century play (for intensive critical study).

Books

(I) Poetry and prose of the Generation of 1930:

a) Poetry •Sepheris (selections from) • Elitis •Embirikos (selections from) • Ritsos

Piimata, Ikaros

/lios o pratos, Ikaros Piimata, Galaxia

Epitaphios, ked ros

b) Prose (for examination purposes, students will be allowed to choose four of the following texts for more intensive study).

•Mirivilis O Vasilis o Arvanitis, Ermis •Venezis To noumero 31328, Estias Politis k Eroica, karavias

•Theotokas Evripidis Pendozalis, Estias •karagatsis To regalo sinaxari, Estias •Terzakis 1 menexedenia politie, Estias •Prevelakis To chroniko mias polities, Galaxia •Beratis To plati potami, Ermis

70

Classical Studies

In connection with this unit, students will find it useful to refer to:

a) Karandonis b) Sachfinis

(ii) Modern Greek folksong:

• loannou Ta dimotika mas tragoudia, Tachidromos

(iii) 19th century play:

•Matesis A 0 Vasilikos, Ermis

ASSESSMENT

Two 3-hour examinations on the literature studied (the first on unit (i), the second on units (ii) and (iii)), and an oral test (with questions on prescribed texts) at the end of the year. There will be term tests in translation and dictation. The quality of students' language work, class-papers and essays through-out the year will also be taken into account in the assessment of their performance.

104-112 LATIN PART 1A Four classes per week, including sessions in the language laboratory. Facilities for private study in the language laboratory will also be available. The course will be adapted to the needs of those who have little or no acquaintance with Latin. It will not normally qualify students to proceed to Latin part II, but in special cases this permission may be granted. Students who do so proceed will receive a programme of vacation work to prepare them for Latin part II.

SYLLABUS

(a) The accidence and syntax of Classical Latin.

(b) Readings In the literature of Classical and Mediaeval Latin.

(c) An introduction to the study of Latin manuscripts and the trans-mission of texts.

BOOKS

(a) For preliminary reading:

Grant M The World of Rome, Mentor

(b) Prescribed textbooks for 1975:

•Sweet, Craig & Seligson Latin: A Structural Approach, University of Michigan Press

Harrison F E Millennium: A Latin Reader, OUP

•Balme M G Inteliegenda, OUP •Reynolds and Wilson Scribes and Scholars, OUP paperback

•Langenscheidt's Shorter Latin Dictionary, ed Handford & Herberg, Hodder and Stoughton

(c) Recommended for reference:

Maunde Thompson E An Introduction to Greek and Latin Palaeography,

OUP Highet Gilbert The Classical Tradition, Galaxy

Bolgar R R The Classical Heritage, Harper Torchbooks

lsagoyi sti neotert piisi, Galaxia 1 sinchroni pezographia mas, Galaxia

71

(c) Greek Art:

Carpenter Rhys •Richter G M A or •Boardman J

The Aesthetic Basis of Greek Art, Midland A Handbook of Greek Art, 6th ed Phaidon

Greek Art, 2nd ed Thames & Hudson

Faculty of Arts

Weiss R The Renaissance Discovery of Classical Antiquity, Blackwell Additional reading material will be supplied by the Department.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay (up to 2,500 words) during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work and class tests done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

100-103 HISTORY 1C (CLASSICAL STUDIES 1A) This first-year subject is offered in conjunction with the Department of History. It may lead to work at grade 2 level in both History and Classical Studies and serve as the first part of a major in either. It is a prerequisite for Classical Studies 26 or 2C, and for History 2M or 3M. A course of three classes per week.

SYLLABUS

The course will be concerned with three main areas of Greek civilization, viz. Greek history, Greek literature and Greek art, and will be concen-trated largely, but not exclusively, on Athens of the sixth and fifth centuries B.C. Within these areas the emphasis of the study of Greek history will be on the growth of the Athenian democracy, that of Greek literature will be on select tragedies of Euripides and comedies of Aristophanes and on the rise of Greek philosophy, and the theme of Greek art will be the strength of an artistic tradition and its assimilative response to outside influences.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK: (See p. 28 for those considering enrol-ment for the honours degree in History). A series of lectures on Mycenaean Greece in second and third terms. Textbook: Vermeule E Greece in the Bronze Age, Chicago 1964.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading:

Andrewes A Greek Society, Pelican Finley M I The Ancient Greeks, Pelican

(b) Athenian history:

'Ehrenberg V From Solon to Socrates, Methuen paperback •Jones A H M Athenian Democracy, Blackwell •Thucydides The Peloponnesian War, Penguin •Herodotus The Histories, tr Carter, Oxford World Classics •Plutarch The Rise end Fall of Athens, Penguin •Von Fritz K & Kapp E Aristotle's Constitution of Athens and Related

Texts, Hafner

(d) Greek Literature and History of Ideas:

72

Classical Studies

Euripides The Bacchae and other Plays, Penguin 'Euripides I ed Grene and Lattimore, Washington Square Press 'Aristophanes The Frogs end other Plays, Penguin 'Aristophanes The Acharniens, The Clouds, Lysistrata, Penguin `Plato The Last Days of Socrates, tr Tredennick, Penguin

Further reading material will be supplied by the Department.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays (of between 1,500 and 2,500 words) during the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. The final assessment will be made on both examination results and marks given for essays.

104-203 CLASSICAL STUDIES 2 В

104-303 CLASSICAL STUDIES 3 В . (This course will not be offered in 1975 but will be offered in 1976.)

For second-year students (Classical Studies 26) a course of two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year. Third-year students (Classical Studies 36) will have, in addition, one seminar per week for the first two terms, or the equivalent. Students who are taking Greek or Latin to third year may enrol for either of these courses without having taken Classical Studies 1A.

SYLLABUS

For students in Classical Studies 2B two of the following sections, for students in Classical Studies 36 three of the following sections:

(a) The Greek and Roman theatre.

(b) Greek and Roman historiography.

(c) Literature and Society of the Hellenistic period (covering the Ptolemaic, Seleucid and Attalid dynasties; special prominence will be given to the period of Ptolemy Philadelphus, 285-247 B.C.).

(d) Byzantium in the sixth century (both the art and history of the period will be studied).

(e) Literature and Society in the later Roman empire. Particular empha-sis will be placed on the following topics:

(i) The Roman empire and the early Christians.

(ii) Early church literature.

(iii) The conflict between Christianity and pagan culture.

(iv) Social, religious and literary life in the western provinces (especially to Gaul and Africa).

An intensive study of a field of art history.

WRITTEN WORK One essay of up to 2,500 words will be required of each section.

BOOKS (a) The Greek and Roman Theatre:

(f)

73

Faculty of Arts

Aeschylus The Oresteie, ed Grene and Lattimore, Washington Square Press

Sophocles Three Tragedies, tr Kitto, Oxford paperback Euripides I & V in the series The Complete Greek Tragedies, ed Grene

and Lattimore, Washington Square Press Aristophanes The Frogs and other plays, Penguin Menander The Plays and Fragments, Penguin Plautus Six Plays of Plautus, tr Casson, Anchor paperback Terence The Brothers and other plays, Penguin

(b) Greek and Roman historiography:

Herodotus, Penguin Thucydides, Penguin Polybius The Histories, tr Chambers M, Washington Square Press Sallust, Penguin or Four Square Livy The War with Hannibal, Penguin Tacitus 3 vols Agricola and Germania, Annals, Histories, Penguin Suetonius, Penguin

(c) Hellenistic Period: Grant F C Hellenistic Religions: the Age of Syncretism, New York

Liberal Arts Press Tarn-Griffith Hellenistic Civilization, 3rd ed Arnold Cary M A History of the Greek World 323-146 B.C., Methuen Peters F E The Harvest of Hellenism, Simon and Schuster (d) Byzantium in the sixth century: Barker J W Justinian and the later Roman empire, University of

Wisconsin Beckwith J The Art of Constantinople, Phaidon paperback, 2nd ed Browning R Justinian and Theodora, Weidenfeld and Nicolson Bury J B History of the Later Roman Empire, vol 2, Dover reprint Downey G Constantinople in the Age of Justinian, University of Okla-

homa Press Evans J A S Procopius, Twayne Procopius The Histories, tr Averil Cameron, Washington Square Press Procopius Secret History, tr Atwater, Ann Arbor Tesori d'Arte Cristiana

vol 1, n 5 Ravenna, basilica di S. Vitale vol 1, n 6 Ravenna, basilica di S. Apollinare Nuovo in Classe

Officine Grafiche Poligrafici i1 Resto del Carlino, Bologna Sanpaolesi P Santa Sofia a Constantinopoli, Forma e Colore no. 55.

Milan (e) Literature and Society in the later Roman empire: Eusebius A History of the Church, tr Williamson G W, Penguin Stevenson J A New Eusebius, SPCK paperback Augustine Confessions, tr Loeb, Penguin Nock A D Conversion, Oxford paperback Cochrane C N Christianity and Classical Culture, Galaxy paperback Either Chadwick H The Early Church, Pelican History of the Church or Frond W H C The Early Church, Hodder and Stoughton paperback

(f) Art history: A reading-list will be supplied.

74

Classical Studies

EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 2 В , up to three 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 3 В . Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-204 CLASSICAL STUDIES 2C

104-304 CLASSICAL STUDIES 3C (This course will be offered in 1975.)

For second-year students (Classical Studies 2C) a course of two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year. Third-year students (Classical Studies Э C) will have, in addition, one seminar per week for the first two terms, or the equivalent. Students who are taking Greek or Latin to third year may enrol for either of these courses without having taken Classical Studies 1A.

SYLLABUS

For second-year students two of the following sections, for third-year students any three of the following sections: (a) Literature and Society In the early Roman empire. (b) Greek and Roman Epic.

(c) Hellenistic and Roman Art.

(d) An agreed segment of the course in Greek Philosophy offered by the Philosophy department.

in 1975 second-year students (Classical Studies 2C) will normally take (a) and (b) but second-year students may be admitted to (c) or (d) under special circumstances on application to the chairman of the department.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of up to 2,500 words will be required for each section.

BOOKS

(a) Literature and Society in the early Roman empire:

Carcopino J Daily Life in Ancient Rome, Peregrine Grant M The World of Rome, Mentor •Petronius Satyricon, tr Sullivan J, Penguin •Apuieius The Golden Ass, tr Graves R, Penguin •Juvenal Satires, tr Green P, Penguin •Seneca Letters from а Stoic, tr Campbell R, Penguin •Pliny Letters, tr Radice B, Penguin •Suetonius The Twelve Caesars, tr Graves R, Penguin •Tacitus The Annals of Imperial Rome, tr Grant M, Penguin •Tacitus The Agricola and the Germania, tr Mattingly H, Penguin 'Ovid Amores, tr Lee G, John Murray •Catullus tr Wigham P, Penguin Glob, P V The Bog People, Paladin •Lucretius The Nature of the Universe, tr Latham, Penguin •Virgil Georgics, tr Lewis C. Day, Oxford paperback •Seneca Four Tragedies and Octavie, tr Watling E F, Penguin

75

Faculty of Arts

(b) Greek and Roman Epic:

• Homer Iliad, tr Lattimore R. Phoenix •Homer Odyssey, tr Fitzgerald, Panther •Apollonius of Rhodes The Voyage of the Argo, tr Rieu E V, Penguin •Catullus tr Wigham P, Penguin •Virgil Aeneid, tr Lewis C. Day, Oxford paperback •Ovid Metamorphoses, tr Innes, Penguin •Lucan Pharsalia, tr Graves R, Penguin

(c) Hellenistic and Roman Art:

Pollitt J J The Art of Rome, Prentice-Hall Toynbee J M C The Art of the Romans, Thames and Hudson or Wheeler M Roman Art and Architecture, Thames and Hudson Cary M A History of the Greek World 323-146 B.C., Methuen Salmon E T History of the Roman World 30 B.C.-138 A.D., Methuen

EXAMINATION

Up to two 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 2C, up to three 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies З C. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

HONOURS DEGREE

A. SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL STUDIES

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Classical Studies comprises the following subjects: Ancient Greek part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, parts 2, 3 and 4. Latin part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, parts 2, 3 and 4. A candidate in this school must take these subjects and three additional subjects normally including a sequence of two subjects. Prospective honours candidates should feel free to consult the chairman of depart-ment on their choice of subjects. Except with the permission of the faculty, no candidate for honours in the school of Classical Studies or combined courses may sit for exami-nation without completing the essay work and exercises, and attending tutorial classes In the subjects of the school.

2. In their first year, prospective honours candidates will take Ancient Greek part 1 (pass), Latin part 1 (pass) and two additional subjects. They will find of particular value the optional additional work provided in Ancient Greek part 1 (pass) and Latin part 1 (pass). Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this first year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. In their second year, candidates will take the honours courses in Ancient Greek part 2 and Latin part 2, and the remaining additional subject, nor-mally at grade 2 level, and in their third year, the honours courses in Ancient Greek part 3 and Latin part 3; and in their fourth year the honours courses in Ancient Greek part 4 and Latin part 4. Candidates for honours in the school of Classical Studies are required, unless exempted by the chairman of department, to submit one essay or to perform some other approved work by the beginning of first term in each of their second and third years.

76

Classical Studies

з . Candidates will be examined in the subjects of Ancient Greek part 2 and Latin part 2 at the annual examination at the end of the second year.

4. At the end of the third year candidates will be examined in translation from Ancient Greek and Latin. They will also be examined in special studies prescribed for the third year. They will also take part I of the final examination.

5. The final examination in the school of Classical Studies will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the third year, part Il at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 1. Prescribed Ancient Greek authors.

2. Historical and literary studies connected with prescribed Ancient Greek authors.

3. Prescribed Latin authors. 4. Historical and literary studies connected with prescribed Latin

authors.

5. Comparative philology (according to the year in which lectures are given).

Port 11

1. Extensive reading in Ancient Greek. 2. Extensive reading In Latin.

з . Ancient Greek unseen translation.

4. Latin unseen translation.

5. Latin literature.

6. Ancient Greek literature.

7. Ancient Greek special studies.

8. Latin special studies.

9. Comparative philology (according to the year in which lectures are given).

As part of part I1 of the final examination each student must also com-plete and hand in, on the first day of the third term, an essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject.

COMBINED HONOURS For possible combined honours courses with Latin and with Ancient Greek see pp. 439-340. Candidates in such combined honours courses will take either Latin part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, Latin parts 2, 3 and 4 or Ancient Greek part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, Ancient Greek parts 2, 3 and 4.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

SYLLABUS The syllabus for each part of Ancient Greek 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, 2, 3 and 4 and of Latin 1 (ordinary degree) and, at hon-ours level, 2, 3 and 4 includes:

(i) Prescribed authors;

77

Faculty of Arts

(ii) Unprepared translation;

(iii) Historical and literary studies.

In addition, parts 1 and 2 have regular language classes. Each examination on prescribed authors may include questions on section

(iii) of the syllabus.

ln addition to the sections of the syllabus listed above, honours students are required to do the special studies listed below under the several subjects.

104-261 ANCIENT GREEK PART 2 (HONS) Four classes per week. A study will be made of the Iliad of Homer, Thucydides' History of the War between Athens and Sparta, and Plato and the Physical World (Timaeus).

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks for 1975: •Wilcock M M A Commentary on Homer's Iliad, Books I-VI Macmillan •Homerus Ilias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoelder, Tjeenk Willink •Thucydides Book I, ed Marchant, Macmillan •Thucydides The History of the Peloponnesian War, Penguin •Plato Oxford Classical Text, vol IV ed Burnet, OUP •Cornford F M Plato's Cosmology, Library of Liberal Arts paperback (b) Additional reading for 1975: Selections from: Homer Iliad in Homerus Ilias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoelder, Tjeenk

Willink Homer Iliad, tr Lattimore, Phoenix

LANGUAGE WORK In terms 1 and 2 classes on language exercises will alternate with classes concerned with the practical criticism of Ancient Greek literary texts.

WRITTEN WORK

In addition to the vacation essay, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

Up to three 3-hour papers. Language exercises, written work done during the year afd class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-361 ANCIENT GREEK PART 3 (HONS) Six classes per week.

SYLLABUS

(i) Prescribed textbooks for 1975: • Wilcock M M A Commentary on Homer's Iliad, Books l-VI,

Macmillan •Homerus Ilias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoelder, Tjeenk Willink •Thucydides Book I, ed Marchant, Macmillan •Thucydides The History of the Peloponnesian War, Penguin •Plato Oxford Classical Text, vol IV ed Burnet, OUP

78

Classical Studies

•Cornford F M Plato's Cosmology, Library of Liberal Arts paper-back

(ii) Two special studies.

(iii) Historical syntax.

(iv) Additional reading for 1975:

Selections from:

•Homer Iliad in Homerus !lias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoeldar, Tjeenk Willink

Homer Iliad, tr Lattimore, Phoenix

(v) (For Pure School only) Comparative Philology: Textbook: •Lockwood W B Indo-European Philology, Hutchinson

University Library, London 1969

WRITTEN WORK

In addition to the vacation essay, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

(a) Class tests:

1. Additional reading.

2. Historical syntax. 3. Special studies.

(b) Annual examination:

1. Translation from Ancient Greek: one 3-hour paper.

(c) For part I of the final examination:

1. Prescribed Ancient Greek reading: one 3-hour paper or equiva-lent assessment.

2. Historical and literary studies connected with the prescribed reading: one 3-hour paper or equivalent assessment.

3. (For Pure School only) Comparative Philology: one 3-hour paper.

104-461 ANCIENT GREEK PART 4 (HONS) A course of three seminars and one lecture per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Ancient Greek literature and its transmission.

(ii) Two special studies as for Ancient Greek part 3 (hofs) sec. (ii).

(iii) Extensive reading.

(iv) (For Pure School only) Comparative Philology. Textbook: •Lockwood W В Indo-European Philology, Hutchinson

University Library, London 1969

(v) An essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject. Each student must present this essay by the first day of third term.

EXAMINATION Relevant papers of part Il of the final examination.

79

Faculty of Arts

104-262 LATIN PART 2 (HONS) Four classes per week.

SYLLABUS A study will be made of the social, political and literary life of the early Roman principate.

(i) Prescribed textbooks for 1975:

•Tacitus Annals XIV, ed Woodcock, Methuen Tacitus The Annals, tr Dudley. Mentor or tr Grant, Penguin Suetonius The Twelve Caesars, Penguin •Juvenal Satires, ed Duff, CUP Roman Minority Groups — material will be supplied by the Depart-

ment.

(ii) Language work.

(iii) Additional reading:

•Virgil Aeneid I-VI, ed Fairclough, Loeb vol I, Heinemann

(iv) Practical Criticism.

WRITTEN WORK In addition to the vacation essay, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

Up to three 3-hour papers. Language exercises, written work done during the year, and class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-362 LATIN PART 3 (HONS) Six classes per week.

SYLLABUS

A study will be made of the social, political and literary life of the early Roman principate.

Prescribed textbooks for 1975:

'Tacitus Annals XIV, ed Woodcock, Methuen Tacitus The Annals, tr Dudley, Mentor or tr Grant, Penguin Suetonius The Twelve Caesars, Penguin •Juvenal Satires, ed Duff, CUP Roman Minority Groups — material will be supplied by the De-

partment.

(ii) Two special studies.

(iii) Historical syntax.

(iv) Practical criticism.

(v) Additional reading:

As for Latin part 2 (hons).

(vi) (For Pure School only) Comparative Philology.

Textbook: Lockwood W В Indo-European Philology, Hutchinson University Library, London 1969

(i)

80

Classical Studies

WRITTEN WORK

In addition to the vacation essay, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

(a) Class tests:

1. Additional reading.

2. Historical syntax.

3. Special studies.

(b) Annual examinations:

1. Translation from Latin: one 3-hour paper.

(c) For part I of the final examination:

1. Prescribed Latin reading: one 3-hour paper, or equivalent assessment.

2. Historical and literary studies connected with the prescribed reading: one 3-hour paper, or equivalent assessment.

3. (For Pure School only) Comparative Philology: one 3-hour paper.

104-462 LATIN PART 4 (HONS) A course of three seminars and one lecture per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Latin literature and its transmission.

(ii) Two special studies as for Latin part 3 (hofs) sec. (ii).

(iii) Extensive reading.

(iv) (For Pure School only) Comparative Philology. Textbook: Lockwood W B Indo-European Philology, Hutchinson

University Library, London 1969

(v) An essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject. Each student must present this essay by the first day of third term.

EXAMINATION

Relevant papers of part II of the final examination.

MASTER OF ARTS 104-601 SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL STUDIES

Candidates for the degree may proceed in one of two ways:

1. By thesis only.

2. By a shorter research essay and by course work. The research essay will normally be about half the length of the thesis submitted by a can-didate proceeding to the degree of MA by thesis only. The course-work will normally be based on a selection of seminar-courses available for fourth-year honours candidates, provided that no student may repeat a course taken as part of the BA or MA preliminary course. The course-work may also be based, in part or in whole, on background studies to the research essay or such other courses as may be arranged.

81

Faculty of Arts

There will be special examinations arranged for the course-work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Theses must be submitted not later than 18 February, 1976. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time can-didates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF CRIMINOLOGY Chairman of Department: Mr S. W. JOН NSTON, B.A., LL.B., Barrister-at-Law

ORDINARY DEGREE

Criminology is the study of crime, or moral criticism, and in particular today the defining of the authority and criminal policy of the nation state and such enforcement of international law as exists. Criminology A is an introductory Criminology subject which may be taken towards an Arts degree, and also as an elective in a Law course or a combined Arts and Social Studies course. Students intending taking Criminology A as part of an Arts course must first pass in any two university subjects. A quota has been established In this subject for 1975. Students wishing to take Criminology A as part of their degree course must apply on the application form available from the Secretary, Board of Studies in Criminology, 33 Royal Parade, Parkville. The closing date for applications is Friday, 31 January, 1975.

No enrolments in this subject will be permitted before written approval is received. Students who have previously enrolled in the subject and who wish to take the subject in 1975 must also make application. The postgraduate diploma in Criminology may be taken after or in com-bination with an Arts course. There is some overlap in the subjects of the two courses, so that a candidate who plans a combined course from the beginning may expect to complete the diploma with about a year's work following the degree course. Applications for admission to the diploma course are available from the Secretary, Board of Studies in Criminology, and must be lodged by 31 January, 1975. Candidates are referred to the Handbook of the Board of Studies in Criminology for further details.

711-801 CRIMINOLOGY A This course is under review and students are advised to consult the Board of Studies or Faculty concerned before lodging application forms by 31 January, 1975. A course of two lectures and a 1-hour tutorial a week throughout the year, with visits to correctional agencies on Wednesday afternoon or in

82

Criminology

the vacations. Students will be required to submit not more than four written exercises during the year, one of which may relate to the visits of observation.

SYLLABUS

1. Principles of Criminology. The definition of crime and varying orien-tations, legal, social, psychological, to criminology. The incidence of crime and interpretation of criminal statistics. Sentencing philosophies and practice.

2. Preventing Juvenile Delinquency. Legal definitions of delinquency and pre-delinquency, Social Welfare Act Sections 31-35, ages of res-ponsibility, children's court procedures. Prediction scales applied to de-linquent behaviour. Family antecedents of delinquency: role of the family, personality development, 'acting out' behaviour, antisocial character dis-orders, multi-problem families, social class factors. Etiology of delin-quency: multi-factorial approaches, the development of an integrated theory and means of experimentation. Prevention: definition and criteria for evaluation, Melbourne projects, role of community agencies, typological approaches.

3. Sentencing and Treating the Insane Offender. Criminal responsibility, freewill and determinism, tests of Insanity, personality determinants, types of insanity, Mental Health Act, nature and length of detention, treatment to enhance responsibility.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Hood R & Sparks R Key Issues in Criminology, World University Library 1970

Johnston S W & Fox R G Correction Handbook of Victoria, Criminology Department University of Melbourne 1965

Jones H Crime in a Changing Society, Pelican A 692 1965 Mays J B Crime and the Social Structure, Faber 1963 Phillipson M Sociological Aspects of Crime and Delinquency, Routledge

& Kegan Paul 1971 Stafford-Clark D Psychiatry Today, Pelican A 262 1952

(b) Prescribed texts:

Carson W G & Wiles P Crime & Delinquency in Britain, Martin Robertson 1972

Wolfgang M E Savitz L & Johnston N The Sociology of Crime and Delinquency, Wiley NY 2nd ed 1970

Stratton J R & Terry R M Prevention of Delinquency: Problems and Pro-grams, Macmillan 1968 paperback

Tappan P W Crime, Justice and Correction, McGraw-Hill 1960 Children's Court Act, Victoria, 1958 Social Welfare Act, Victoria, 1970

(c) Detailed reading guides will be supplied during the year.

EXAMINATION

Prescribed written work as indicated above to be submitted by specified dates and which may include a 3-hour paper in lieu of part of this work.

83

Faculty of Arts

MASTER OF ARTS

711-601 SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY

Candidates prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the head of the de-partment, and are advised as to suitable reading and fieldwork. They work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. Candidates will normally be required to participate in a course of thirteen 2-hour seminars, playing a major role in the preparation and presenta-tion of materials for class discussion. This coursework will be assessed according to class participation and two written papers, the first being the product of а class discussion and the second being a research paper submitted at the conclusion of the coursework. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF EAST AND SOUTHEAST ASIAN STUDIES Chairman of Department: Professor H. F. SIMON, B.A. (Land.), M.A.

The departments of Oriental Studies and Indonesian and Malayan Studies were amalgamated in 1971 to form the department of East and Southeast Asian Studies. The department of Oriental Studies was established in 1961, thanks to a generous grant by the Myer Foundation. The depart-ment of Indonesian Studies was founded in 1958 with the encouragement and help of the Commonwealth Government. The department of East and Southeast Asian Studies offers courses in Chinese language and literature (a three year pass course and a four year honours course, either pure or combined), in Japanese language and literature (a three year pass course), in East Asian Studies (a first year course in the history and politics of China and Japan, leading to majors or two year sequences in history or in political science) and in Indonesian language, history and politics (a three year pass course and a four year combined honours course). A number of scholarships of $300 per annum are awarded by Conzinc Riotinto of Australia for students taking a major in Japanese and by the Forelenders Trust for students taking a major or honours course in Chinese. The scholarships are tenable for two or three years and are awarded either on performance in the first year or on general performance in the Higher School Certificate where neither Chinese nor Japanese are required. Further details may be obtained from the department. Details of courses in Chinese, Japanese, East Asian Studies and Indo-nesian Studies are set out below, together with some introductory remarks about each of these studies. It should be noted that no preliminary study of any kind Is required, but that faculty has approved exemption from first year Chinese, Japanese or Indonesian for students who have some knowledge of any of these languages attested by having passed the H.S.C. examination or in some other way. Members of staff of the department will gladly discuss their courses with intending students in December or

84

East and Southeast Asian Studies

January or at any other time of the year. It is advisable to make an appointment for interview with the secretary.

COURSES OFFERED

156-101 Chinese 1 156-102 Chinese 1A (half course) 156-201 Chinese 2 156-202 Chinese 2A (half course) 156-301 Chinese 3 156-302 Chinese 3A (half course) 156-261 Chinese 2 (Ions) 156-361 Chinese 3 (Ions) 156-461 Chinese 4 (Ions) 156-262 Medieval and Modern Chinese 2 (Ions) 156-362 Medieval and Modern Chinese 3 (Ions) 156-462 Medieval and Modern Chinese 4 (Ions) 156-111 Japanese 1 156-211 Japanese 2 156-311 Japanese 3 156-121 East Asian Studies 1 156-601 Master of Ais—School of Oriental Studies 156-131 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 156-231 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 156-331 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 156-271 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Ions) 156-371 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (Ions) 156-471 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 4 (Ions) 156-631 Master of Arts—School of Indonesian and Malayan Studies

COURSES IN CHINESE

The new course structure of 1 %2 subjects in each year:

After a recent study of work-loads, each of the three pass subjects in Chinese, with an average of six contact hours per week, were sub-divided into one-and-a-half subjects: the full subject now consists of four hours per week (five in the case of Chinese 3), the half-subject of two hours per week. Whilst it is therefore possible now to enrol for a major consisting only of Chinese 1, 2 and 3, students are strongly advised to attempt Chinese 1 and Chinese 1A in their first year. Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A in their second year and Chinese 3 and Chinese 3A in their third year, i.e. the programmes that used to comprise the former Chinese 1, 2 and 3. At the time of writing it is not clear whether there will be other half-subjects on offer In the Faculty in 1975 or 1976 for combination with the additional half-subjects In Chinese in each year, but provision has been made for complementary half-courses in East Asian Studies, Chinese politics, Chinese history and modern and medieval Chinese that will combine with the half-subject in Chinese and make up a fully integrated second subject. For instance, if one takes Chinese 1 and Chinese 1A in one's first year, one can add to it the first half of East Asian Studies 1 and gain credit for two first year subjects. If one takes Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A in one's second year one can add one of the prescribed half-courses in History (2J) under consideration at the time of going to press or in Political Science (Chinese Politics and Society 005) and gain credit for two second year subjects. Chinese

85

Faculty of Arts

3 and Chinese 3A plus one of the half-courses from History (3J) or Political Science 3 (Chinese Politics and Society 005) are recog-nised as the equivalent of two full third year subjects and form a full third year (super-major) course. It is also possible to substitute an approved part of Modern and Medieval Chinese 2 or 3 for the half subjects in history or politics, or for that matter, for Chinese 2A or Chinese ЗА . Students will, therefore, be able to enrol for the full 1 % subjects in each year and gain relief in their total work-load by carrying a lesser load in their remaining programmes. It is also possible, of course, to undertake the half-subject in Chinese as an additional subject in the course for each year, and to keep it in reserve for a possible failure or absence in another subject. In their first year students are therefore advised to enrol for Chinese 1, Chinese 1A, East Asian Studies 1 and two other subjects. Should they so wish, they will have the option in July of abandoning the second half of Chinese 1A or the second half of East Asian Studies and will still be able to get credit for four subjects. If they decide to abandon one of the two other first year subjects, they may count Chinese 1A and Chinese 2A as a full first year subject. The safest course would therefore be to pursue 4% subjects in the first year as a hedge against a possible failure or absence in a subject, since one will only need the half-course Chinese 2A in combination with Chinese 1A to make up for it. It should be noted that Chinese 3A and Chinese 2A count as the equivalent of a full second year subject. Holders of the G.C.E. or Higher School Certificate in Chinese and graduates of Chinese middle schools or similar or higher institutions, where the language of instruction is Chinese, are exempted from Chinese 1 and Chinese 1A. In their first year they may take East Asian Studies 1 or Japanese 1 or Chinese 2 as the first part of a major in Chinese. If they obtain a pass in Chinese 2 they may count Chinese 2A and Chinese 3A as the second part of a major and take the two subjects together in their second year. Chinese 3 will then be the third part of the major taken in the third year. They may also substitute an approved part of Modern and Medieval Chinese 2 or 3 for Chinese 2A or Chinese З A.

THE CHINESE LANGUAGE

The Chinese are proud of a civilization which is second to none. One of the most remarkable features of this civilization is that it has been carried in the one language by the one people over a period of some 4,000 years. We have a wealth of literature in many fields which covers the last two and a half millennia of this period as well as inscriptions on bronzes and oracle bones which go back much further. A knowledge of written Chinese will put within one's reach what is probably the largest corpus of litera-ture known to us in any one language. But it is necessary to distinguish three main forms of written Chinese: classical, medieval and modern. Classical Chinese has a structure and vocabulary broadly based on the written language of the 5th Century B.C. Medieval and modern Chinese, on the other hand, are based on the spoken language current at the time at which the texts were written. There are, therefore, fundamental and strongly marked differences of structure, style and vocabulary between the three forms. Modern Chinese may be dated from the beginning of this century, whilst medieval Chinese may be said to have its early beginnings in the 6th

86

East and Southeast Asian Studies

century A.D. and to have produced its first major creative works, the plays of the Yuan period, in the 13th century. The terms 'modern' and 'medieval' are, therefore, used in a rather special sense dictated by the nature and structure of the written material. Classical Chinese continued to be written throughout these periods and is still being written today. As a spoken language, Standard Chinese, or, as it is often called, Мап -darin, or Киоуй or Putunghua, is now spoken and understood through-out China and in most of the overseas Chinese communities in the various countries of South-East Asia. It is, therefore, a satisfactory medium of communication with the majority of the 750,000,000 of Australia's Chinese neighbours, rather more than one-fifth of the world's total population. Standard Chinese is based on the Peking dialect and the pronunciation taught will be that of Peking. In the first year the main emphasis of the course Is on spoken and simple written Chinese. From the second year the texts studied are virtually all from Chinese written for Chinese rather than from specially composed text books. An hour a week of classical Chinese is also introduced at this stage, but from a specially written text book. Medieval Chinese with readings from the Shuei-hu Chuan, the Hung-lou Meng and from Yüan drama is taken by pure honours students as from the second year. But the main emphasis of the course is on modern standard Chinese and on modern literature from the nineteen-twenties to the present day. The rapid emergence in the latter half of this century of China as a great world power has added considerable urgency to Western studies of Chinese and of Chinese civilization. From their early beginnings as a peripheral and esoteric pastime, these studies have now developed into an increasingly normal and central pursuit at most of the major univer-sities In the West. Australia's geographical position makes such a devel-opment particularly desirable and important. As a result of this development, opportunities now exist for careers in the academic world as well as in government and business for graduates in this field. A knowledge of Chinese either of major or sub-major standard coupled with suitable qualifications in such fields as History, Political Science or Economics is particularly useful in this respect.

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

156-101 CHINESE 1 A course of four hours per week consisting of two lectures, one tutorial and one language laboratory. No previous knowledge of Chinese is necessary for this course and its main emphasis will be linguistic. Students will receive a thorough grounding in Standard Chinese in its spoken and written form. The two lectures each week will be based on the First Reader in Stan-dard Chinese. This offers a study of everyday Chinese as spoken in Peking. It consists of dialogues and of some continuous pieces. Students will find that the simplicity of Chinese enables them to make fairly rapid progress in speaking and understanding at this stage. The grammatical structure of the language Is challengingly different from that of English and other European languages and will offer some insights into the structure of our own language as well as of Chinese.

87

Faculty of Arts

Phonetically Chinese introduces one or two unusual sounds, but the main point of interest lies in the study of the four tones. Just as we distinguish between 'bit' and 'but' and 'bit' and 'beat', so the Chinese distinguish between 'ta spoken with even, high-rising, low-rising or falling pitch. At once the most interesting and the most difficult part of the course is the study of 'characters' or syllable graphs'. Most syllables in Chinese can be shown to have some meaning, and syllables with different meanings (not necessarily with different sounds) are each written with a different character or 'syllable graph'. Students tend to master about five hundred of these in their first year. Each lesson in the Reader intro-duces thirty new characters. Tuition in writing with a brush is provided, and some students become quite expert at handling a brush, although most Chinese nowadays are content to write with a pen. The five hundred characters occur in compounds and give one a total vocabulary of up to 1,000 words. These are supplemented by words learnt only in their romanized form. The tutorial provides conversation and dictation and some simple struc-tural exercises. The language laboratory tapes are based on the Reader.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed texts:

Simon H F & king R C I A First Reader in Standard Chinese (supplied in mimeographed form by the department)

(b) Prescribed dictionary:

Simon W Beginners' Chinese Dictionary, Lund Humphries or Dictionary of Spoken Chinese, The Institute of Far Eastern Languages,

Yale University, Yale University Press 1965 (c) Recommended for reference: Wang Fang-Yu The Lady in the Painting, Far Eastern Publications,

Yale University 1957 Lee Pao-Ch'en Read About China, The Institute of Far Eastern Lan-

guages, Yale University, 1957 Simon W Structure Drill in Chinese, Lund Humphries The department will issue a supplementary reading list as well as additional teaching material in the farm of mimeographed sheets.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

A test will be set in the first week of second and third term. One of the objects of the tests is to prepare students for the annual examination and to show them where they stand in relation to the previous term's work. Corrected test papers will be returned to students after the test. The results of the tests will be taken into account in the final exami-nation.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper of translation from and into Chinese (unseen). An oral examination. The results of the term tests will be taken into account.

156-102 CHINESE 1A (half subject) A course of two lectures per week. One of the weekly lectures will take the form of exercises, translations

88

East and Southeast Asian Studies

and dictations based on the Reader in Standard Chinese (cf. Chinese 1) and on other elementary texts. The other lecture will offer a survey of the syntactical structure of Standard Chinese together with an introduc-tion to structural grammar. This course should be taken in conjunction with Chinese 1 (156-101).

EXAMINATION AND WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

There will be no formal examination paper at the end of the year. The examination will be based on the weekly exercises and on three short tests to be set in the first week of second and third terms and in the last week of third term.

156-201 CHINESE 2 (PASS)

A course of four hours per week consisting of two lectures and two tutorials. Students are strongly advised to spend at least one hour each week in the language laboratory or to work on the cassette tapes which are available on loan. It will be seen from the introduction to Chinese courses that this course is only a part (about two-thirds) of the former second year course in Chinese which it replaces. Students would, therefore, be well advised to enrol also for the half course Chinese 2A (156-202). This is particu-lar1y important, since that course also offers an introduction to classical Chinese and a survey of Chinese literature in addition to the study of two further modern texts. One of the two lectures in Chinese 2 is on the prescribed texts, which were written in the first half of this century; the other is on translation from Chinese and on Chinese grammar and poetry. One of the two tutorials is on translation into Chinese, the other comprises conversation and other oral exercises such as dictation. Before being allowed to proceed to Chinese 2, students must have obtained a pass in Chinese 1 (or exemption from it) and in East Asian Studies 1 or the first half of it. Under certain circumstances, permission may be granted by the chairman of the department to proceed to Chinese 2 and East Asian Studies simultaneously or to substitute History 2Jt or 3J or an approved part of Politics 2 or 3 (166-005) for East Asian Studies 1. Candidates who are exempt from Chinese 1 must satisfy the chairman of the department that they have a satisfactory command of Standard Chinese. Whilst the study of Chinese in the first year is based on texts specially written for foreign students, the texts studied in Chinese 2 were written for Chinese readers. The transition from 'textbook Chinese' is not easy, and the department offers a special vacation course in December and February to bridge the gap.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed texts:

'Selected stories and essays from the works of Ping 'sin and Hu Shih. (Copies of these texts may be obtained from the department.)

(b) Prescribed dictionaries:

•Hornby A S & Wu H C The Advanced Learner's Dictionary, Oxford University Press Hong kong

t Under consideration at the time of going to press.

89

Faculty of Arts

or • Tsung-he Ying-hua Hua-ying Ta T ź u-tien, any ed •Liang Shih-ch'iu A New Practical Chinese-English Dictionary, The Far

East Book Co Taipei or •Lin Yutang's Chinese-English Dictionary of Modern Usage, The Chinese

University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong 1972 or

Mathews R H Chinese-English Dictionary, any ed (c) Recommended for reference:

Shih Nai-an (Buck Pearl tr) All Men are Brothers, Grove Press NY Ts'а o Hsüeh-ch'in (Wang Chi-chef tr) Dream of the Red Chamber,

Twayne Publications NY or Ts'ao Hsüeh-ch'in (Hawkes D tr) The Record of the Stone, Penguin

1974 Luo Kuan-chung (Brewitt-Taylor C H tr) Romance of the Three King-

doms, Tuttle Rutland 1959 Liu T'ieh-yй n (Shadick H tr) The Travels of Leo Ts'an, Cornell UP 1952

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

One translation from Chinese and one translation into Chinese will be set each week. Two short essays in Chinese on a topic of the student's choice will be required, one in second term and one in third term. Each essay should be approximately 750 characters in length. A test will be set in the first week of second and third terms. One of the objects of the tests is to prepare students for the annual examination and to show them where they stand in relation to the previous term's work. Corrected test papers will be returned to the students after the test. Written assignments will be taken into consideration in the examination.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper on translation from and into Chinese (unseen), and on questions on the prescribed texts. An oral examination. The results of the weekly assignments, the two essays and the two term tests will be taken into consideration.

156-202 CHINESE 2A (half subject)

A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. In one of the lectures students will study two essays or stories from the works of Pa Chin and Lu Hsün, the other will offer an introduction to Chinese literature in first term and an introduction to classical Chinese in the remainder of the year.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed texts:

•Selected stories and essays from the works of Pa Chin and Lu Hsün (copies of these texts may be obtained from the department).

•Shadick H & Ch'iao C A First Course in Literary Chinese, vols I and II, Cornell University Press Ithaca 1968

90

East and Southeast Asian Studies

Shih Nai-an (Buck Pearl tr) All Men are Brothers, Grove Press NY Ts'а o Hsüeh-ch'in (Wang Chi-chef tr) Dream of the Red Chamber,

Twayne Publications NY or Ts'ao Hsüeh-ch'in (Hawkes D tr) The Record of the Stone, Penguin

1974 •Liu Wu-chi Introduction to Chinese Literature, Indiana UP 1966

(b) Prescribed dictionaries:

As for Chinese 2 (156-201) (c) Recommended for reference: Elsie C T The Classical Chinese Novel, Columbia UP 1968 Lo Kuan-Chung Romance of the Three Kingdoms (Brewitt-Taylor C H

tr), Tuttle Rutland 1959 Liu T'leh-Yün The Travels of Leo Ts'an (Shadick H tr), Cornell UP

1952

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

There will be a test in the first week of second and third term. The results will be taken into account in the examination. EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper on the prescribed texts and on classical Chinese together with a question on a general topic in Chinese literature.

156-301 CHINESE 3 (PASS)

A course of five hours per week consisting of three lectures sid two tutorials. Students are strongly advised to spend at least one hour each week in the language laboratory or to work on the cassette tapes that are available an loan. It will be seen from the Introduction to Courses in Chinese that this course is only a part (five-sevenths) of the former third year subject Chinese 3. Students are therefore advised to enrol also for Chinese 3A which will supplement the reading from modern texts and also provide a weekly lecture on classical Chinese and on Chinese bibIio-graphy. Chinese 3A may be combined with a half course in History (3"t or Political Science (Chinese Politics and Society [166-005]) or Modern and Medieval Chinese 38 (156-362) to provide a full third year Arts course in the form of a 'super-major' in Chinese. Of the three lectures, one Is on prescribed texts from modern Chinese (Mao Tse-tung's speech to the Art and Literature Forum in Yenen in 1942, together with a short study by Lu ‚sun), one is on newspaper Chinese, and the third is on translation from Chinese and on Chinese poetry (the tz'u of the Sung dynasty). One of the two tutorials is on translation into Chinese and on essay writing, the other is on conver-sation and other forms of advanced oral practice.

В OOKS (a) Prescribed texts:

• Mao Tse-tung Tsal Yen-an Wen-yl Tso-t'en-huei-shang-te Chiang-hua •Lu Hsй n, one of his short stories (copies of these texts may be obtained from the department)

t Under consideration at the time of going to prose.

91

Faculty of Arts

(b) Prescribed dictionaries:

• Ногпьу A S & Wu H C The Advanced Learner's Dictionary, Oxford University Press Hong Kong

or • Tsung-he Ving-hue Hua-ying Ta Tz'u-tien, any ed or •Liang Shih-ch'iu A New Practical English-Chinese Dictionary, The

Far East Book Co Ltd Taipei 1963 •Liang Shih-ch'iu A New Practical Chinese-English Dictionary, The Far

East Book Company Taipei or •Lin Yutang ś Chinese-English Dictionary of Modern Usage, The Chinese

University of Hong Kong Hong Kong 1972 or • Mathews R H Chinese-English Dictionary, any ed (c) Recommended for reference: Teng S Y & Biggerstaff K An Annotated Bibliography of Selected Chi-

nese Reference Works, Harvard 1950 Tz'u-hai, Chung-hua Book Company

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS One translation from Chinese and one translation into Chinese will be set each week. Two short essays in Chinese on a topic of the student's choice will be required, one at the beginning of second term and one at the beginning of third term. Each essay should be approximately 1,000 characters in length. A test will be set in the first week of second and third terms. One of the objects of the tests is to prepare students for the annual examination and to show them where they stand in relation to the previous term's work. Corrected test papers will be returned to the students after the test. The results of the tests and of the written assignments will be taken into consideration in the examination.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. The first will consist of translation from modern and newspaper Chinese (unseen), the second of translation into Chinese (unseen), a short essay in Chinese and a question on the prescribed texts. There will also be an oral examination. The results of the weekly assignments, the two term tests, and the two essays will be taken into consideration.

156-302 CHINESE ЭА (half subject) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. In one of the lectures students will study two or three essays or short stories from the works of Chu Tzu-ch'ing and Mao Tun. In the other they will study passages selected from Mencius and will also be given an introductory survey of Chinese bibliography.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts:

•Selected stories and essays by Mao Tun and Chu Tzu-ch'ing

•Mencius, book VI, part I

92

East and Southeast Asian Studies

(b) Prescribed dictionaries:

As for Chinese 3 (156-301)

(c) Recommended for reference:

As for Chinese 3 (156-301) together with the following: •Lau D C Mencius Shadick H & Ch'iao C A First Course in Literary Chinese, vols I and ii,

Cornell University Press Ithaca 1968

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

There will be two tests in the first week of second and third terms. The results will be taken into account in the annual examination.

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper with questions on the prescribed texts in modern and classical Chinese.

HONOURS DEGREE

SCHOOL OF CHIК ESE 1. The course for the honours school in Chinese comprises the follow-ing subjects: Chinese 1, 2 (hons), 3 (bons), 4 (bons). Medieval Chinese 2, 3, 4 (bons). East Asian Studies 1. Students are required to pass in four additional subjects selected from the course for the ordinary degree. Two of these should be approved by the chairman of the department and should normally be at second or third year level. Candidates will be encouraged to proceed to a major in an approved subject.

2. Admission to the honours school is conditional upon a satisfactory performance in first year and must be approved by the faculty through the Sub-Dean. Admission will normally be granted to candidates who have obtained at least an honours 2 В in Chinese 1. Other candidates should interview the chairman of the department who will be guided in his recommendation to faculty by the merits of the case.

3. Intending honours students are strongly advised to take Chinese 1A in their first year.

4. Admission to the honours school is also possible in the third year on the recommendation of the chairman of the department for candi-dates who have obtained a good result in Chinese 2. Such candidates will take Medieval Chinese 2 and Medieval Chinese 3 in their third year as well as the lecture on classical Chinese in Chinese 2A if they have not taken it previously. 5. Candidates in their second year will normally take Chinese 2 (huns), Medieval Chinese 2 and an additional second year subject. The additional subject should be approved by the chairman of the depart-ment. Candidates who did not take East Asian Studies in their first year may, on the recommendation of the chairman of the department, be granted special permission to offer it as their additional subject in second year, or to take History 2J or an approved course in Politics 2 instead.

6. In their third year candidates will take Chinese 3 (hots), Medieval

93

Faculty of Arts

Chinese 3 and an additional second of third year subject. This subject should be approved by the chairman of the department.

7. In the fourth year candidates will take Chinese 4 together with Medieval Chinese 4.

8. Majors or two-year sequences in the following subjects are thought to be particularly useful for students in the honours school of Chinese: History, Political Science, Economics, Japanese, English, Geography.

9. Students who take Chinese in a combined honours course will be exempted from Medieval Chinese 2 -4 and the additional subject in second and third year. The fourth year thesis will also be substantially shorter or may, with the approval of the chairman of the two depart-ments, take the form of a joint thesis.

156-261 CHINESE 2 (HONS) A course of four lectures and two tutorials per week.

SYLLABUS

As for Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A of the ordinary degree.

BOOKS

As for the ordinary degree together with the following recommended text: Hightower J R Topics in Chinese Literature, Harvard 1953 Candidates for honours will be given additional references to Chinese and Western texts.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

As for the ordinary degree. Honours candidates will be given additional assignments which will not exceed the equivalent of one short essay each term.

EXAMINATION

As for Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A of the ordinary degree.

156-262 MEDIEVAL AND MODERN CHINESE 2 A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week.

SYLLABUS

A study of selected chapters from the Shui-hu Chuan, the Hung-lou Meng or the Ju-lin Wei-shih. Special oral work together with a study of selected passages from traditional novels.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

'Shui-hu Chuan, 70 chapter ed chaps 20 and 21 'Hung-lou Meng chap 6 or •Ju-Iin Wai-shih, chap 1 Irwin R G The Evolution of a Chinese Novel, Harvard 1953 (Photocopies of the prescribed texts may be obtained from the

department.)

94

East and Southeast Asian Studies

Recommended additional texts: As for Chinese 2 as well as: Edgerton Clement tr The Golden Lotus

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

Not more than one substantial translation from the prescribed text and one essay in English on the Shui-hu Chuan or the Hung-lou Meng or the Ju-lin Wal-shlh.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper on the prescribed text.

156-361 CHINESE 3 (HONS) A course of four lectures and two tutorials per week.

SYLLABUS

As for Chinese З and Chinese Э A of the ordinary degree.

BOOKS

As for the ordinary degree.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

As for the ordinary degree. Honours candidates will be given additional assignments which will not exceed the equivalent of one short essay each term.

156-362 MEDIEVAL AND MODERN CHINESE 3 A course of two lectures per week.

SYLLABUS A study of selected chapters from the Shui-hu Chuan and the Hung-lou Meng.

BOOKS Prescribed texts:

•Shih Nai-an Shul-hu Chuan, 70 chapter ed chaps 22 and 23 •Ts'ао Hsй eh-ch'in Hung-lou Meng, 120 chapter ed chaps 9 and 19 (Photocopies of the prescribed texts may be obtained from the

department.) The department will also issue a supplementary reading list.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS A substantial translation from each of the two prescribed texts together with an essay in English on the Hung-lou Meng.

EXAMINATION The prescribed texts in Medieval and Modern Chinese 3 (362) will be examined together with those of Medieval Chinese 4 (462) in the fourth year examination.

156-461 CHINESE 4 A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week.

95

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS Advanced translation from and into Chinese. Chinese essays. Classical Chinese. Chinese Poetry. Advanced Oral Work. A thesis involving a substantial translation project.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Szu-ma Chien S ń i ň -chi, Book 7 A photocopy of this chapter of the Shih-chi may be obtained from the department. The department will also supply copies of other recom-mended texts and of translation passages and recorded tapes.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

One translation from Chinese will be set each fortnight and one trans-lation into Chinese each week. In addition there will be not more than two essays in Chinese of approximately 1,200 characters each on topics of the student's choice. There will be a test in the middle of second term consisting of transla-tion from and into Chinese and an essay In Chinese.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper of translation from Modern and Classical Chinese (unseen). One 3-hour paper of translation into Chinese (unseen) and an essay in Chinese. An oral examination. Candidates taking Chinese 4 in a combined school will have a 90-minute paper on the prescribed text in Classical Chinese and on Chinese poetry. Candidates in the pure school will take this as part of the examination for Medieval Chinese з and 4. The results of the weekly assignments and of the tests and essays will be taken into consideration. Students will be expected to submit a thesis before the third week of third term. The thesis will incorporate a substantial piece of translation from Modern Chinese. The topic should be chosen before the end of third term in the preceding year.

156-462 MEDIEVAL AND MODERN CHINESE 4 A course of two lectures per week.

SYLLABUS

A study of a Yuan dynasty play and of selected chapters from the Hung-lou Meng.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

•Ts'ао Н s й eh-ch'in Hung-lou long, 120 chapter ed chaps 32 and 33 •Ma Chih-yй an Han-kung Ch'iu, any ed (The prescribed texts together with supplementary teaching material and reading lists may be obtained from the department.)

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Not more than a substantial translation from each of the two prescribed

96

East and Southeast Asian Studies

texts together with an essay in English on Yuan drama with special reference to the play under study.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers on the prescribed texts for Medieval Chinese 3 (362) and 4 (462) together with questions on Chinese poetry and the classical text prescribed for Chinese 4.

COURSES IN JAPANESE

Japan's emergence as a modern State over the last hundred years is one of the most striking features of recent history. Today Japan stands as one of the most Important nations on the world scene, and an understanding of Japan and its people is of the greatest importance. Australia's geo-graphical position In particular makes it Inevitable that contacts with Japan must steadily grow. A very large part of Australia's trade is with Japan, and the proportion will probably increase. It Is most desirable that knowledge of Japanese culture and civilization should increase at the same time. A knowledge of Japanese also provides access to a highly stimulating and varied field of study. Before the modern era, Japan had already evolved a complex civilization by supplementing its own distinctive cultural foundations with extensive adaptations of a wide range of Chinese, In-dian and other elements. In addition to the intrinsic value of the resulting variety of literary expression and historical records, this wide back-ground makes a knowledge of modern Japanese scholarship especially useful in the study of other Asian civilizations. Again, Japan's extraordinary success in the task of modernization, both cultural and economic, has resulted in the growth of a vigorous modern literature in close touch with all contemporary problems, as well as a steady stream of valuable publications on scientific and other specialized research. Japanese studies are therefore important both for the intrinsic interest of the national culture, ancient and modern, as well as for the many special contributions the Japanese have made to Asian and General problems of our time.

ORDINARY DEGREE

156-111 JAPANESE PART 1 A course of 6 hours per week consisting of four lectures and one tutorial and one language laboratory period. No previous knowledge of Japanese is necessary for this course and its main emphasis will be linguistic. Students will receive a thorough grounding in Japanese in its spoken and written form. Candidates who intend to proceed to Japanese 2 must also take East Asian Studies 1 (p. 100) since a pass in this subject is a prerequisite for Japanese 2. Students who have attained Grade D or above at the Higher School Certificate examination in Japanese, or who have passed an approved examination of similar standard, are exempted from Japanese 1. Similar exemption may also be given at the discretion of the head of the department to other candidates who have approved qualifications in Japanese.

97

п

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS

The structure of the Japanese language. Reading and writing Japanese script (Hiragana, Katakana, Kanji). The spoken language (conversation and language laboratory).

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

• Dunn C J & Yanada S Teach Yourself Japanese, EUP •Sakade Florence ed A Guide to Reading and Writing Japanese, Tuttle Additional notes and texts will be issued by the department.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

One English-Japanese translation exercise per week. In the first week of second and third terms a 2-hour written test will be held, based on the work covered to date. The purpose of the tests is to enable both staff and students to assess the students progress. The corrected papers will be returned to the students after the test.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper of translation from Japanese (unseen). One 3-hour paper of translation into Japanese (unseen) together with questions on Japanese grammar. An oral examination.

156-211 JAPANESE PART 2

A course of six hours per week consisting of four lectures and two tutorials.

The emphasis of courses in Japanese 2 will be divided between language and the study of Japanese literature. Some Classical Japanese will also be introduced at this stage. Vacation course. A vacation course is held in the last two weeks before the beginning of first term for students proceeding to Japanese 2. Students who have passed or are exempted from Japanese 1 are required to attend this course. Further information will be available from the department.

SYLLABUS

Prescribed texts from Modern and Classical Japanese literature. Translation from and into Modern Japanese. Conversation and oral practice. Lectures on Japanese literature.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed texts:

Miller R A A Japanese Reader, Graded Lessons in the Modern Lan-guage, Tuttle 1964

Кеепе D Anthology of Japanese Literature, Penguin

(Other Japanese texts may be obtained from the department.)

(b) Prescribed Dictionaries:

Kenkyusha's New Japanese-English Dictionary, Kenkyusha Tokyo 1974

• Nelson A N The Modern Reader's Japanese-English Character Diction-ary, Tuttle

98

East and Southeast Asian Studies

(c) Recommended for reference:

Sakade Florence ed A Guide to Reading and Writing Japanese, Tuttle 1965

Vaccari 0 English-Japanese Conversation-Dictionary, Vaccari's Lan-guage Institute Tokyo

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

One English-Japanese translation and one Japanese-English translation per week. In the first week of second and third terms a 2-hour written test will be held, based on the work covered to date. The purpose of the tests is to enable both staff and students to assess the students' progress. The corrected papers will be returned to the students after the test.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper on translation from and Into Japanese (unseen). One 3-hour paper on prescribed texts together with questions on Japanese literature. An oral examination.

156-311 JAPANESE PART 3

A course of six hours per week consisting of four lectures and two tu-torials. As in Japanese 2, the emphasis of courses in Japanese 3 will continue to be divided between language and literature. Selected Modern and Classical works will be studied in the original.

SYLLABUS

Prescribed texts from Modern and Classical Japanese literature. Translation from and into Modern Japanese. Classical Japanese. Advanced oral work.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed texts:

(1) For Classical Japanese

• Teketori Monogatari, ed Iwanami Bunko Hojoki, ed Iwanami Bunko

(2) For Modern Japanese

•Akutagawa Ryunosuke Rashomon, ed Shincho Bunko •Natsume Soseki Botchan, ed Iwanami Bunko •Mishima Yukio Kinkakuji, ed Shincho Bunko •Nakamura Mitsui Nihon No Kindai Shosetu, The Modern Japanese

Novel ed Iwanami Shoten

(b) Prescribed dictionaries:

•Nelson A N The Modern Reader's Japanese-English Character Diction-ary, Tuttle

Kenkyusha's New Japanese-English Dictionary, Kenkyusha Tokyo 1974 Sanseido's New Concise English-Japanese Dictionary, Sanseido Tokyo

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

One English-Japanese translation and one Japanese-English translation

99

Faculty of Arts

per week. Students will also be asked to write two essays in Japanese on subjects of their own choice. Each essay will be approximately 1,000 words in length. In the first week of second and third terms a 2-hour written test will be held, based on the work covered to date. The pur-pose of the tests is to enable both staff and students to assess the stu-dents' progress. The corrected papers will be returned to the students after the test.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper on prescribed texts. One 3-hour paper on unseen translation from modern Japanese. One 3-hour paper on translation into Japanese together with questions on Japanese literature. An oral examina-tion.

CENTRE OF EAST ASIAN STUDIES

Course Committee: Professor H. F. SIMON (East and Southeast Asian Studies)

Mr A. HOCK (Political Science) Mr L. R. OATES (East and Southeast Asian Studies) Dr S. T. LEONG (History) The Centre of East Asian Studies is an interdepartmental organization which offers interdisciplinary courses on East Asia. The course is devised by an interdepartmental course committee. At present the centre offers a one-year course entitled East Asian Studies 1. This is open to students of all faculties. It may be taken as the first part of a two year sequence or a major consisting of East Asian Studies 1, History 2" (East Asian History), or an approved combination of Politics 2 and any third year History subject or of East Asian Studies 1, or an approved combination of Politics 2 and International Relations 3.

156-121 EAST ASIAN STUDIES PART 1

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week. A survey of the history of China and Japan and of political institutions and problems in the two countries, together with lectures on Chinese thought. About two-thirds of the course relates to Chinese studies (from earliest times) and one-third to Japanese studies. Lectures are given by members of the departments of History, Political Science and East and Southeast Asian Studies and by scholars and ex-perts from other universities in Australia and occasionally from overseas. Lectures are integrated according to academic disciplines and the main emphasis of the course is on the history of China and Japan and on political institutions and problems in both countries. The course also contains a short series of lectures on Confucianism, Taoism, Buddhism and Neo-Confucianism. Clearly the study of such a vast area as East Asia with a continuity of culture over three millennia poses great problems of selection and emphasis. The first fourteen or fifteen weeks of the course are devoted to a brief survey of each of the major dynasties in China from earliest times up to and including the revolutions of 1911 and 1949. Within this framework China is seen as an independent source of ideas, ideals and institutions. The discovery of these and of the distinctive shapes of its history is central to this part of the course and relevant to the

100

East and Southeast Asian Studies

remainder. A series of eight lectures on contemporary Chinese politics concludes the work in second term. The Japanese component in third term consists of a study of the related but ultimately independent growth of a complex and highly original civilization within the same cultural area. The written work for the course and the examination are based on the view that within the larger framework of the year's studies students will wish to specialize.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Fairbank J IC The United States and China, Harvard 1971 Fitzgerald C P The Birth of Communist China, Pelican 1964 •Fitzgerald C P The Chinese View of Their Place in the World, OUP

1984 Hail J W Japan from Prehistory to Modern Times, Weidenfeld & Nicol-

son 1970 •Bodde D China's Cultural Tradition, Source Problems in World Civili-

zation Series Rinehart 1961

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Fairbank J IC Reischauer E O & Craig A M East Asia: Tradition and Transformation, Allen & Unwin 1973

or •Reischauer E 0 & Fairbank J K East Asia: The Great Tradition, Allen

& Unwin 1958 Reischauer E O Fairbank J IC & Craig A M East Asia: The Modern

Transformation, Allen & Unwin 1965 •De Bary W T Sources of Chinese Tradition, Columbia UP 1960

(c) Additional texts:

Bolitho H Treasures Among Men, Yale UP 1974 Chen J ed Mao, Prentice-Hall 1969 Creel H G Chinese Thought, U. of Chicago 1971 Crowley J В Modern East Asia: Essays in Interpretation, Harcourt

Brace & World 1970 De Bary W T The Buddhist Tradition in India, China and Japan, Vin-

tage Books 1972 Lau D C ed & t г Lao Tzu: Tao Te Ching, Penguin 1963 Levenson J R & Schurmann F China: An Interpretive History: From

the Beginnings to the Fall of Han, U of California Press 1971 Levenson J R Modern China: An Interpretive Anthology, Macmillan 1971 LI Dun J The Essence of Chinese Civilization, Van Nostrand 1967 Loewe M Imperial China, Allen & Unwin 1966 Mason R H P & Caiger J G A History of Japan, Cassell 1972 Meskill J T An Introduction to Chinese Civilization, Heath & Co 1973 North R C Chinese Communism, Weidenfeld and Nicolson 1966 Schurmann F & Schell 0 eds China Readings, vols 1, 2 and 3, Pelican

1987 Schram S Mao Tse-tung, Pelican 1966 Tiedemann A Modern Japan, Anvil 1982 Tsunoda R Sources of Japanese Tradition, Columbia UP 1958 Waley Arthur The Analects of Confucius, Vintage Books or Allen &

Unwin The Centre will supply supplementary reading lists.

101

Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS

Students are required to submit a first term essay of approximately 1,500 words, a second term essay of approximately 3,000 words and a short paper for discussion in second or third term.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

Class work and essays will be taken into consideration in the grading of examination results. The final result will be based on both the examination paper and the written work done during the year.

MASTER OF ARTS

156-601 SCHOOL OF ORIENTAL STUDIES

Candidates will, under the supervision of a member of the department, prepare a thesis on a subject to be approved by the head of the depart-ment. They may be directed to take any subject or attend any lectures bearing on their work and will be required to write regular reports on the progress of their research. Prospective candidates for the MA in the school of Oriental Studies should in all cases consult the department of East and Southeast Asian Studies before beginning work for the purpose. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Pro-fessorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4:6 in the University Calendar).

COURSES IN INDONESIAN

Indonesia's motto is 'Unity in Diversity'. Despite the multitude of islands and peoples and the many different languages and different culture pat-terns, there are certain strong unifying bonds of sentiment and interest which have held the country together and have made possible the for-midabl a task of welding a single nation with a distinct national identity.

The discovery of the underlying similarities as well as of the wealth of regional variations in ways of life, in art, literature, religion and in po-litical and social structures in the different parts of the archipelago is one of the great fascinations of studying Indonesia closely. The colourful past still impinges on the present in all kinds of ways, enriching the country culturally even though it has left formidable problems eco-nomically.

Because of its geographical position across the historic trade routes from India to the Spice Islands and to China, Indonesia has experienced vari-ous waves of influence from the world's great civilizations: Indian Buddhism and Hinduism, Islam from Arabia, Christianity from the Portu-guese and Dutch. The Chinese. too, have traded with Indonesia for a thousand years and now form about two per cent of the population. Yet the Indonesians have absorbed all these influences without losing their own individuality and, especially after having obtained political inde-pendence, have continued the search for a national identity in both politico-economic patterns and in the cultural and ideological spheres, where the country's writers and artists are groping their way towards a

102

East and Southeast Asian Studies

united and independent Indonesia. Their efforts deserve our sympathy and attention, for they are our nearest neighbours and there is much that we can iearn from them. The Commonwealth Advisory Committee on the Teaching of Asian Lan-guages and Cultures in its report of September, 1970 feels that it is through the social studies course in primary schools and in the core area studies, taken by all students at secondary level, that Australian students may be given an opportunity to learn about Asia. The Com-mittee believes that the school systems should concentrate on Indonesian/ Malay, Japanese and Chinese, and holds the view that, in this respect, Australia should become a major centre. Any significant expansion in Asian language teaching will require a substantial Increase in the number of teachers. In 1975 more than 50 secondary schools In Victoria are teaching the Indonesian language. There is also a demand for teaching the history of Indonesia within the Asian History Syllabus. In addition to these openings in the teaching profession graduates majoring in Indonesian and Malayan Studies have also found employment with the Departments of Foreign Affairs, Defence and Trade, Radio Australia, various news-papers and as business representatives.

The courses offered in Indonesian and Malayan Studies combine two types of study:

(1) the study of Indonesian language and literature, and

(2) the 'area study', i.e., the study of historical, political, social and economic problems and structures in present-day Indonesia. Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 (IlS-1) is primarily devoted to basic language study, while the middle of the first year and the remaining years (IМ S-2, IМ S-3, IМ S-4) include both an area study content and work in Indonesian language and literature, the two parts being woven together as closely as possible. IМ S-1 is a prerequisite for entry to IМ S-2 (except for those who have obtained exemption), and I М S-2 is a prerequisite for entry to 1М S-3.

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the honours degree are set out at the and of this section.)

156-131 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 1 A course of two lectures, two tutorials and one language laboratory session per week throughout the year.

Students who have passed the Victorian Higher School Certificate ex-amination In Indonesian are exempted from Indonesian and lalayan Studies 1. They may take instead Dutch 1, Chinese 1, Japanese 1 or East Asian Studies as the first part of a major with Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 and 3. Similar exemption may be granted by the head of de-partment to other candidates who hold recognized professional quali-fications in Bahasa Indonesia or Malay.

SYLLABUS

(i) Basic elements of sentence structure and idiom. in Bahasa Indo-nesia. Translation from Indonesian into English from prescribed texts and elementary translation from English into Indonesian. Pro-nunciation and elementary conversation.

103

Faculty of Arts

(ii) Reading from set texts.

(iii) In the middle of the year ten lectures will be given as an introduc-tion to the study of Indonesian society and its history.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

'Legge J D Indonesia, Prentice-Hall 'Zainu'ddin A A Short History of Indonesia, Cassell Missen G J Viewpoint on Indonesia, Nelson Grant B Indonesia, Penguin Special

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Echols J M and Shadily Hasan An Indonesian-English Dictionary, Cor-ne1l UP

Pino E & Wittermans T Kamus Inggeris, part 1 J B Wolters Groningen Sarumpaet J P & Mackie J A C An Introduction to Bahasa Indonesia,

MUP Sarumpaet J P The Structure of Bahasa Indonesia, PO Box 282, Box

Hill, Vic Sarumpaet J P & Hendrata H A Modern Reader in Bahasa Indonesia,

Books 1 and 2, PO Box 282, Box Hill, Vic

The department will supply typescript material, including explanation of more advanced grammatical structures and extracts for reading from In-donesian novels and stories. An annotated reading list and additional material for reading will be available in the department for students wishing to proceed to honours in Indonesian and Malayan Studies.

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS

One short written exercise on the language will be required every week. A written test of 60 minutes will be held in the middle of the year. Results of these assignments and the test will be taken into account in determining examination results.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test of 15 minutes. The area study will be examined by an essay of 2.000 words to be submitted during the year.

156-231 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 2 (PASS) A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week on section 1 (language), and one lecture per week and one tutorial per week on section 2 (area).

SYLLABUS

IMS-1 is a prerequisite for this course, except for students who have passed the Victorian Higher School Certificate in Indonesian or have been exempted by the head of department because they hold some other pro-fessional qualifications in Bahasa Indonesia or Malay. (See under In-donesian and Malayan Studies 1.)

SECTION 1 Further work in Bahasa Indonesia with emphasis on composition. Ma-

104

East and Southeast Asian Studies

teria) for reading will be taken from writings in modern Bahasa Indonesia related to the area study.

SECTION 2

Either (A) Historical and political studies of Indonesia, or ( В ) Socio-logical and anthropological studies of Indonesian communities.

Only one of either A or В will be offered in any one year. Section 2A will be offered in 1976, 1978 and so on, while section 2 В will be available In 1975, 1977 and so on. The lectures will be given jointly to second and third year students, but there will be separate tutorials for each of the two years.

В O O КЅ

(a) Prescribed books for section 1:

As for Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 with:

Poerwadarminta W J S Kamus Umum Bahasa Indonesia, Balai Pustaka Djakarta

'drus Dan l Ave leria ke Ojalan Lain ke Roma, any ed

Selected extracts from writing related to the area study and short stories will be supplied by the department.

(b) Prescribed books for section 2A:

(i) Preliminary Reading:

Kartinl R A Letters of a Javanese Princess, Norton Legge J D Indonesia, Prentice-Hall Legge J D Sukarno, Penguin Polomka P Indonesia Since Sukarno, Penguin Sukarno An Autobiography as told to Cindy Adams, Gunung

Agung, Hong Kong

(ii) Textbooks •Steinberg D J ed In Search of Southeast Asia, Praeger •Dahm В History of Indonesia in the 20th Century, Pall Mall Press 'Wertheim W F Indonesian Society in Transition, van Hoeve

The Hague

(c) Prescribed books for section 2 В : Brandon J R On Thrones of Gold — Three Javanese Shadow Plays,

Harvard UP Covarrubias M Island of Ball, A Knopf New York Geertz C Religion of Java, Free Press paperback NY Geertz C The Social History of en Indonesian Town, MIT Press Geertz C Islem Observed, Yale UP Gibb H A R Mohammedanism, Mentor or Guillaume A Islam, Pelican Kuntjaraningrat Villages in Indonesia, Cornell UP McGee T G The Urbanization Process in the Third World, Bell & Sons

London McVey R T Indonesia, HRAF Press New Haven Rassers W H Panji, the Culture Hero: e Structural Study of Religion

in Java, M Nijhoff The Hague Stace W T The Teaching of the Mystics, Mentor

105

Faculty of Arts

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS One short written exercise on the language will be required every fort-night. On the area studies, one essay of 2500 words will also be required in the middle of the year. Results of the assignments and essay will be taken into account in determining examination results.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers, one on section 1 (language) and the other on section 2A or 2B (area), together with an oral test in Bahasa Indonesia, and the results of the written assignments.

156-331 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 3 (PASS) A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week on section 1 (language) and one lecture per week and one tutorial per week on section 2 (area).

SYLLABUS

IMS-2 is a prerequisite for this course.

SECTION 1

Advanced language study with emphasis on composition, and the study of the development of modern Indonesian literature.

SECTION 2

Either (A) Historical and political study of Indonesia, or (B) Sociological and anthropological study of Indonesian communities. Only one of either A or B will be offered in any one year. Section 2A will be offered in 1976, 1978 and so on, while section 28 will be available in 1975, 1977 and so on. The lectures will be given jointly to second and third year students, but there will be separate tutorials for each of the two years.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed books for section 1:

Alisjahbana T Lejer Terkembang, any ed Kartamihardja A Atheis, any ed Moeis A Salah Asuhan, any ed Pane A Belenggu, any ed Pramudya A Toer Perburuan, any ed Pramudya A Toer Tjerita dari 81ога , any ed Rusli M Sitti Nurbaja, any ed Teeuw A Modern Indonesian Literature, Martinus Nijhoff The Hague

Two of the novels will be selected by each student after consultation with the lecturer.

(b) Prescribed books for section 2A:

(i) Preliminary Reading:

Kartini R A Letters of a Javanese Princess, Norton Legge J D Indonesia, Prentice-Hall Legge J D Sukarno, Penguin Polomka P Indonesia Since Sukarno, Penguin Sukarno An Autobiography as told to Cindy Adams, Gunung

Agung Hong Kong

106

East and Southeast Asian Studies

(ii) Textbooks

'Steinberg D J ed in Search of Southeast Asia, Praeger 'Dahm B History of Indonesia in the 20th Century, Pall Mail

Press •Wertheim W F Indonesian Society in Transition, van Hoeve

The Hague

(c) Prescribed books for section 2 В : Brandon J R On Thrones of Gold — Three Javanese Shadow Plays,

Harvard UP Covarrubias M Island of Bali, A Knopf New York Geertz C Religion of Java, Free Press paperback NY Geertz C The Social History of an Indonesian Town, MIT Press Geertz C Islam Observed, Yale UP Gibb H A R Mohammedanism, Mentor or Guillaume A Islam, Pelican Kuntjaraningrat Villages in Indonesia, Cornell UP McGee T G The Urbanization Process in the Third World, Bell & Sons

London McVey R T Indonesia, HRAF Press New Haven Rassers W H Pan J1, the Culture Hero: a Structural Study of Religion

in Java, M Nijhoff The Hague Stace W T The Teaching of the Mystics, Mentor

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS

One short written exercise on the language will be required every fort-night. One essay of 3,000 words on the area study, and one Indonesian language essay of 1,000 words will be required in the middle of the year. Results of assignments and essays will be taken into account in determining examination results.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers, one on section 1 (language), the other on section 2A or 2B (area), and an oral test in Bahasa Indonesia, and the results of the written assignments.

HONOURS DEGREE

(It is possible to combine Indonesian and Malayan Studies with most honours subjects in the Faculty of Arts. For some examples see pp. 439ff.)

1. Indonesian and Malayan Studies may at present be taken only in combined honour schools, which will include the three honours level courses outlined below and the subjects prescribed by the other de-partment concerned. Students will be required to submit a short thesis in their fourth year, the subject of which must be approved by the chairman of the department before the end of the third year. Occasionally it may be possible with the agreement of the chairmen of both departments to arrange for the submission of a joint thesis.

2. Students who wish to proceed to a combined honours course in-volving the school of Indonesian and Malayan Studies should seek approval from the head of the department and from faculty through the

107

Faculty of Arts

Sub-Dean. Such approval will normally be given to students who have ob-tained the equivalent of second class honours in Indonesian 1 and who have performed well in their remaining three subjects.

156-271 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 2 (HONS) Admission to this course will be dependent on good performance (i.e. at least second class honours division B) in the first year annual examina-tions. A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, with an additional weekly class and additional reading. The weekly classes will be divided between language work and the area study.

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, together with:

in section 1, a more intensive study of the language, and in section 2, either (A) an intensive study of changes in certain political and social institutions of Indonesia, or (B) the study of socio-economic features of Indonesia. °niv one of either 2A or 2B will be offered in any one year. Section 2A will be offered in 1976, 1978 and so on, while section 26 will be avail-able in 1975, 1977 and so on.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed books for section 1:

As for the ordinary degree, with Toha Mohtar Puling, any ed

(b) Prescribed books for section 2A:

As for the ordinary degree plus the following: Coedes G The lndianized States of Southeast Asia, ANU Press Holt C ed Culture and Politics in Indonesia, Cornell UP Pye L W ed Cases in Comparative Politics: Asia, Little Brown Schnieke B Indonesian Sociological Studies, 2 vols, van Hoeve The

Hague . van Leur J C Indonesian Trade and Society, van Hoeve The Hague Wolters 0 W Early Indonesian Commerce, Cornell UP

(c) Prescribed books for section 2B:

As for the ordinary degree plus the following: Bhagwati J The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries, World Univ

Libr London Fryer D W Emerging Southeast Asia, George Philip London Galbraith J K The Affluent Society, Pelican Geertz C Agricultural Involution, U of California P Geertz C Peddlers and Princes, Phoenix Paperback U of Chicago P Mackie J A C Problems of Indonesian Inflation, Cornell Modern In-

donesia Project

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS

As for the ordinary degree, together with one additional assignment on the language every fortnight.

EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, together with one additional 3-hour paper comprising both the language and the area sections.

108

East and Southeast Asian Studies

156-371 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 3 (HONS) A course of study as for the ordinary degree, with an additional weekly class. The weekly classes will be divided between language work (section 1) and the area study (section 2).

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, together with:

in section 1, a more intensive study of the language, which includes an introduction to the Jawl script, and in section 2, either (A) an intensive study of changes in certain political and social institutions of Indonesia, or (B) the study of socio-economic features of Indonesia. Only one of either section 2A or 26 will be offered in any one year. Sec-tion 2A will be offered in 1976, 1978 and so on, while section 28 will be available in 1976, 1977 and so on.

BOOKS

(a) Section 1. As for the ordinary degree plus additional reading, for which material will be supplied by the department. (b) Prescribed books for section 2A:

As for the ordinary degree plus the following: Coedes G The lndianized States of Southeast Asia, ANU Press Holt C ed Culture and Politics In Indonesia, Cornell UP Руе L W ed Cases in Comparative Politics: Asia, Little Brown Schrieke B Indonesian Sociological Studies, 2 vols, van Hoeve The

Hague van Leur J C Indonesian Trade and Society, van Hoeve The Hague Wolters 0 W Early Indonesian Commerce, Cornell UP (c) Prescribed books for section 26:

As for the ordinary degree, plus the following: Bhagwati J The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries, World Univ

Libr London Fryer D W Emerging Southeast Asia, George Philip London Galbraith J K The Affluent Society, Pelican Geertz C Agricultural Involution, U of California P Geertz C Peddlers and Princes, Phoenix Paperback U of Chicago P Mackie J A C Problems of Indonesian Inflation, Cornell Modern In-

donesia Project

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS As for the ordinary degree, with an additional assignment on the language every week (Jawi script or translation into Bahasa Indonesia).

EXAMINATION

As for the ordinary degree, with one additional 3-hour paper comprising both the language and the area sections.

156-471 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 4 (HONS) A course of study based on a one-hour lecture on advanced Bahasa In-donesia and a 2-hour seminar on the area study. It would be an advan-tage for students taking this subject to have a reading knowledge af Dutch.

109

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS

An intensive study of selected aspects of Indonesian society and culture. Traditional literature as a source of historical evidence. A short thesis on an approved subject, which must be submitted by the second week of third term. The subject must be approved by the head of the department before the end of third year. Occasionally it may be possible with the agreement of both departments to arrange for the submission of a joint thesis.

BOOKS

Eisenstadt S N Modernization: Protest and Change, Prentice-Hall Jassin H B Kesusasteraan Indonesia Modern daler Kritik dan Esei, 4

vols Gunung Agung Djakarta Klinkert H C Facsimile's van eenige Maleische Handschriften, Brill

Leiden Paauw D S Financing Economic Development: The Indonesian Case,

Free Press Glencoe Resink G J Indonesia's History between the Myths, van Hoeve The

Hague Sa г tono Kartodirdjo The Peasant Revolt of Bunten in 1888, Martinus

Nijhoff The Hague Soedjatmoko ed An Introduction to Indonesian Historiography, Cornell

UP Teeuw A Modern Indonesian Literature, Martinus Nijhoff The Hague Ter Haar B Adat Law in Indonesia, Bhratara Djakarta Winstedt R A History of Classical Malay Literature, OUP

Extracts from:

Hikayat Hang Tuah. Hikayat Abdullah. Sejarah Melayu.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers, one on language and literature and the other on the area study.

MASTER OF ARTS

156-631 SCHOOL OF INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES

1. Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires a BA degree with honours or a BA ordinary degree with subsequent completion of MA Preliminary work in Indonesian and Malayan Studies as prescribed by the Faculty of Arts. In all cases enquiries should be directed to the department before a formal application for admission is made to Faculty. To complete the MA Preliminary qualification in Indonesian and Malayan Studies the minimum normally expected is (a) to reach second class honours in IMS 2, 3 and 4. (b) to reach a satisfactory level in an approved supporting subject, and (c) to complete a thesis of 8,000 to 10,000 words. Candidates from other universities who have reached a satisfactory honours level in subjects similar to IMS 2 and IMS з , may. with the permission of the department, proceed to do IMS 4 and to complete the work mentioned under (b) and (c) above.

110

Economics

The MA Preliminary course may be done in one year of full-time work or in two to three years of part-time work.

2. Examination is by thesis, prepared under supervision and assisted by participation in research seminars. The thesis must not exceed 50,000 words, excluding footnotes, bibliographies and appendices. Three copies of each thesis (typewritten, double-spaced on international size paper, A4, measuring 297mm x 210mm) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the university library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board regarding the format of theses in Regulation 4:6 in the University Calendar. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within eighteen months from the commencement of candidature for the MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

See Regulation 3:60 on p. 55 and also p. 47. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis.

The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time can-didates and within four years by part-time candidates.

Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

Chairman of Department of Economics: Professor J. O. N. PERKINS, M.A., Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.Com.

Chairman of Department of Economic History: Professor G. N. BLAINEY, M.A.

Chairman of Department of Economic Geography: Dr R. K. WILSON, B.A. (N.Z.), I.A. (Loud.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.).

The subjects of this group may also be taken for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce. Students who wish to qualify for both degrees should note the instructions concerning combined courses in the regulation in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook.

The requirement concerning prerequisites should be carefully noted.

Particular attention is drawn to the regulation which states that Economic Geography part 1 and Economic Geography part 2A may not be taken in any course which does not include a major in Economics.

Entries for external study will not be accepted for any subject of this group.

Students will be required to submit essays and exercises, as set by the lecturers. These will be taken into account at the annual examination, and failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from the annual examination.

111

Faculty of Arts

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details of the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

SUBJECTS OFFERED

Economics 1A (Arts) Economics B

Economic Geography part 2B Economic Geography part 2A

Economic History A Economics C (1-10)' Economic History B Statistical Method Economic History C (Arts) Economic Geography part 1

Any three units

316-151 ECONOMICS 1A (ARTS) A course of two lectures, with one tutorial class per week.

SYLLABUS

Historical survey of the emergence of modern economic society and its economic problems. Microeconomics: the firm; product and factor (especially labour) markets; equilibrium conditions; industrial structure and competition policy. Macroeconomics: national income; unemploy-ment and inflation; money; international economic relations. The course will have special reference to Australia.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Downing R I ed The Australian Economy, Weidenfeld & Nicolson Heilbroner R I. The Worldly Philosophers, revised edition, Simon and

Schuster paperback Stewart M Keynes and After, Pelican (b) Prescribed textbooks: Dooley P C Elementary Price Theory, Appleton-Century-Crofts paper-

back Lipsey R G Introduction to Positive Economics, 3rd ed Weidenfeld &

Nicolson or Samuelson P A Hancock IC & Wallace R Economics, Australian edition

McGraw-Hill Heilbroner R L The Economic Problem, Prentice-Hall Inc. Scherer F Industrial Market Structure and Economic Performance, Rand

McNally Perkins J 0 N & Sullivan J E Banks and the Capital Market, MUP Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Credit will be given for a mid-year test.

316-201 ECONOMICS В Economics 1A (Arts) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week.

SYLLABUS Theory of income, wages, employment and prices; of economic growth and fluctuations; of the government sector; and of the balance of pay-

112

Economics

ments. Macro-economic policy, mainly with reference to Australia. International monetary arrangements.

BOOKS

•Shapiro E Macro-Economic Analysis, 3rd ed Harcourt 'Keynes J M General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money, Mac-

milIan 'Glahe F R Macro-Economic Theory and Policy, Harcourt Brace Jonano-

vltch Isaac J E Wages and Productivity, Cheshire Arndt H W & Stammer D W The Australien Trading Banks, 4th ed.

Cheshire 'Perkins J 0 N Macro-Economic Policy in Australia, MUP Perkins J 0 N et al Macro-Economic Policy — A Comparative Study,

Allen & Unwin Nevile J W & Stammer D W (ads) Inflation and Unemployment, Pelican

Other publications as referred to in lectures. Students who wish to pursue a mathematical approach to the subject will find the following books useful:

Archibald G C & Lipsey R G Introduction to a Mathematical Treatment of Economics, Weidenfeld & Nicolson

Allen R G D Macro-Economic Theory—A Mathematical Treatment, Mас -millan & St Martin's Press

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Credit will be given for a mid-year test.

316-301 ECONOMICS Cl INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

Economics B must be passed before this subject la taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS

Basic theory of international trade. The balance of payments under con-ditions of equilibrium and of growth. Aims and methods of state inter-vention with special reference to Australian conditions. Current problems of the world economy.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Pen J Primer on International Trade, Vintage Books Kenwood A G & Longheed A L The Growth of the International Eco-

nomy. Allen & Unwin paperback

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

'Kindleberger C P International Economics, latest ed Irwin •Sodersten B International Economics, Macmillan Student Edition or •Perkins J 0 N Australia in the World Economy, 2nd ed Sun Books Snape R H International Trade and the Australian Economy, 2nd ed

Longman paperback Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

113

Faculty of Arts

316-302 ECONOMICS C2 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS Theories of economic development for developed and developing coun-tries; population; capital formation; foreign trade; historical patterns; strategy for development; development finance; problems in particular developing countries.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

•Lewis W A The Theory of Economic Growth, Allen & Unwin paperback Bhagwati J The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries, World Uni-

versity Library

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Lewis W A The Theory of Economic Growth, Allen & Unwin paper-back

•Higgins B Economic Development, 2nd ed Constable •Myint H The Economics of the Developing Countries, 3rd ed Hutchin-

son University Library paperback Maddison A Economic Progress and Policy in Developing Countries,

Allen & Unwin paperback Meier G M Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford paper-

back Kindleberger C P Economic Development, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill paper-

back Agarwala A N & Singh S P The Economics of Underdevelopment. Ox-

ford paperback Boehm E A Twentieth Century Economic Development in Australia,

Longman paperback

Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-303 ECONOMICS C3 ECONOMICS OF THE FIRM

Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS

Theories of competition, monopoly and market structure. The structure of Australian industry. The control of monopolies and restrictive prac-tices. Empirical studies of cost and revenue functions. The growth of the firm.

BOOKS

•Scherer F M Industrial Pricing, Rand McNally •Levenson A M & Solon B S Outline of Price Theory, Holt Rinehart &

Winston

114

Economics

Cohen C J & Cyert R M The Theory of the Firm: Resource Allocation in a Market Economy, Prentice-Hall

Caves R American Industry: Structure, Conduct, Performance, Prentice- Hall

Ferguson C E Microeconomic Theory, rev ed Irwin 1969 Kahn A E The Economics of Regulation: Principles and Institutions,

vol 1 Economic Principles, Wiley Nieuwenhuysen J P ed Australian Restrictive Trade Practices: Readings,

Cheshire Penrose E The Theory of the Growth of the Firm, Blackwell Stubbs P The Australian Motor Industry, Cheshire Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-304 ECONOMICS C4 SOCIAL ECONOMICS

Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS

The distribution of Income and wealth in the community; taxation, social security and government provision of goods and services as redistributive instruments.

BOOKS

'Atkinson A B ed Wealth, Income and Inequality, Penguin Atkinson A B Poverty in Britain and the Reform of Social Security,

Cambridge University Press Atkinson A B Unequal Shares, rev ed Penguin Bronfenbrenner M Income Distribution Theory, Macmillan Henderson R F Harcourt A & Harper R J A People in Poverty: A Mel-

boume Survey, Cheshire Miller S M & Roby P A The Future of Inequality, Basic Books Pen J Income Distribution, Penguin Tltmuss R M Income Distribution and Social Change, Allen and Unwin Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-305 ECONOMICS C5 PUBLIC FINANCE

Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken.

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS Public finance and government policy; public finance in relation to in-come distribution, stability, resource allocation and growth; govern-ment revenue and the theory of taxation; the national debt; government expenditure; problems of federal finance.

115

Faculty of Arts

BOOkS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Eckstein 0 Public Finance, 3rd ed Foundations of Modern Economics Series, Prentice-Hall

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Due J F & Friedlaender A F Government Finance: Economics of the Public Sector, 5th ed Irwin

"Downing R I Arndt H W Boxer A H& Mathews R L Taxation in Aus-tralia, MUP

Houghton ed Public Finance: Selected Readings, 2nd ed Penguin Mathews R L & Jay W R C Federal Finance, Nelson Musgrave R A The Theory of Public Finance, McGraw-Hill International

Student edition Musgrave R A & Musgrave P 8 Public Finance in Theory and Practice,

McGraw-Hill International Student Edition Payments to or for the States, Aust Govt Publishing Service The Budget Speech, Govt Printer Canberra

Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-306 ECONOMICS C6 BANKING AND FINANCE

Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken.

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS

Monetary theory and policy; techniques of central banking control; banks and other financial institutions (with special reference to Australia); international monetary arrangements and institutions.

вО 0 К 5

Hirst R R & Wallace R H eds Studies in the Australian Capital Market, 2nd ed Cheshire paperback

'Grubel H G international Monetary Systems, Penguin Laidler D The Demand for Money, International Textbook Company 'Newlyn W T Theory of Money. OUP Officer L H & Willett T D The International Monetary System, Prentice-

Hall Bain A D The Control of the Money Supply, Penguin Croome D R & Johnson H G ed Money in Britain 1959-69, OUP Report on the Working of the Monetary System, Radcliffe Report Cmd

827 HMSO

Other publications referred to In lectures.

A number of excellent books of readings in monetary economics have become available in recent years, and it is recommended that students purchase one of these. Attention is drawn to the following available in paperback:

Gibson W E & Kaufman G C Monetary Economics — Readings on Current Issues, McGraw-Hill

116

Economics

Mittra S Money and Banking — Theory, Analysis and Policy, Random House

Prager Jonas Monetary Economics — Controversies in Theory and Policy, Random House

Williams H R & Wondenberg H W Money, Banking and Monetary Policy — Readings in Domestic and International Policy, Harper & Row

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-307 ECONOMICS C7 LABOUR ECONOMICS

Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS

Theories of wages; wages and the price system; the supply of labour; collective bargaining; conventional forces determining rates of pay; the wage-price issue; incomes policies; general problems of wage deter-mination; principles of wage determination in Australia; problems of manpower planning.

BOOKS

Burton J F & Benham L K Readings in Labour Market Analysis, Holt Rinehart

Jackson J M Weges and Labour Economics, McGraw-Hill Jones A The New Inflation, Penguin 'McCormack P J & Smith E O Labour Market, Penguin 'Niland J R Isaac J E & Ford G W eds Australian Labour Economics:

Readings, Macmillan Turner M A Wilkinson F & Jackson D Do Trade Unions Cause Infla-

tion?, Cambridge UP Whitehead D M Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia, Longman Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-308 ECONOMICS C8 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial class every two weeks throughout the year. The course has special reference to Australia but international comparisons are made, wherever appropriate.

SYLLABUS

Industrial conflict. Trade unions and employers' associations. Collective bargaining. The settlement of industrial disputes. Legal .provisions and industrial relations.

BOOKS Bloom G F & Northrup H R Economics of Labor Relations, 6th ed

Richard D Irwin or Chamberlain N W The Labor Sector, McGraw-Hill

117

Faculty of Arts

'Hyman R Strikes, Fontana paperback •Isaac J E & Ford G W eds Australian Labour Relations: Readings, 2nd

ed Sun Books Kornhauser A Dublin R & Ross A M Industrial Conflict, McGraw-Hill McCarthy W E J ed Trade Unions. Penguin Sutcliffe J T A History of Trade Unionism in Australia, Macmillan

paperback Sykes E I & Glasbeek H J Labour Law in Australia, Butterworth Walker K F Australian Industrial Relations Systems, Oxford paperback Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-309 ECONOMICS C9 AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS

A course of 30 lectures in Terms 1 and 2, with one tutorial every two weeks.

SYLLABUS

The farm as a firm and agriculture as an industry. Inter-relations between agriculture and other sectors. Price, demand and supply in agriculture. Pricing of factor inputs. Seasonal price patterns, price cycles. Fore-casting agricultural prices. Government intervention in agriculture. Objectives and methods of agricultural policy. Consideration of agricultural policy from the view-points of 'efficiency' and 'equity'. The 'farm problem' and agricultural adjustment; 'orderly' marketing, two-price schemes, stabilisation schemes, subsidies and tariffs; agricultural policy overseas. Industry surveys — price policy and marketing in selected primary industries. International commodity agreements. Agricultural marketing: functions, methods, costs. Organization of mar-keting. Marketing boards. Co-operative marketing. Future markets. Technological change in agriculture; capital formation in agriculture; rural credit. World food problem and role of agriculture in economic development.

BOOKS

There is no single text, but the following books will be used extensively. •Throsby C D ed Agricultural Policy, in Readings in Australian Eco-

nomic Policy Series, Pelican 1972 •Campbell K 0 Agricultural Marketing and Prices, Cheshire 1973 Hardaker J B Lewis J N & McFarlane G C An Introduction to Farm

Management and Agricultural Economics, Angus and Robertson 1970 'James P G Agricultural Policy in Wealthy Countries, Angus & Rob-

ertson 1971 Williams D B ed Agriculture in the Australian Economy, Sydney UP

1967 •Samuelson P A Hancock K & Wallace R Economics, Aust ed McGraw-

Hill 1970 Kohls R L Marketing of Agricultural Products, Macmillan 1961

118

Economics

EXAMINATION

In addition to a 2-hour exempting examination at the beginning of third term, tests will be given during the course. Marks will also be given for assignments. Students who fail to achieve a satisfactory result in the assignments and the exempting exam will be required to undertake a written exam In fourth term. The time-table and weighting given to each part of the exam will be published at the beginning of first term. For Pass and Honours.

316-310 ECONOMICS C10 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS

Economics B must be passed before this subject Is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS

Government and the individual; theories of free market capitalism, the Marxian system, democratic socialism, and authoritarian socialism; case studies, including planning in the West, the Soviet Union, and Yugo-slavia.

BOO К S

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Halevi E The Era of Tyrannies, preface keiley Hayek F A Studies in Philosophy, Politics and Economics, chs 11 & 15

Routledge & kegan Paul Robbins Lord Politics апд Economics, chs 4 and 5 Macmillan 1963 Talmon J L The Origins of Totalitarian Democracy, Introduction Mer-

cury Books 1961

(b) Other recommended books: Friedman M Capitalism and Freedom, Phoenix paperback Loucks W N Comparative Economic Systems, 7th ed 1965 or later ed

Harper & Row Bornstein M ed Comparative Economic Systems: Models and Cases,

rev ed Irwin 1969 Bornstein M & Fusfeld D R The Soviet Economy: A Book of Readings,

3rd ed Irwin paperback 1970 Dirlam J B & Plummer J L An Introduction to the Yugoslav Economy,

Merrill paperback Elliott J M Comparative Economic System, Prentice-Hall Meyer G Leninism, Harvard UP 1957 Nove A The Soviet Economy — An Introduction, Praeger paperback P гу bу lа J S ed Comparative Economic Systems, Appleton 1969 Reagan M D The Managed Economy, Oxford paperback Other texts and publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-202 STATISTICAL METHOD Economics 1A must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week.

119

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS

Statistics as a method of studying economic problems; methods of collecting data; design of samples; classification, graphs, frequency dis-tributions, averages, dispersion and skewness; distributions of sample statistics (means and proportions); significance tests and estimation; linear regression; analysis of time series; index numbers; special studies of Australian statistics of national income and prices.

BOOKS

•Karmel P H & Polasek M Applied Statistics for Economists, 3rd ed Pitman

or •Mills F C Statistical Methods, Pitman 1955 or

Hamburg M Statistical Analysis for Decision Making, Harcourt Brace & World (International Edition)

Haig B D & McBurney S S Interpretation of National Income Esti-mates, ANU Press

Mansfield E ed Elementary Statistics for Economics and Business: Selected Readings, Norton paperback

•loser C A & Kalton G Survey Methods in Social Investigation, Heine-mann

•Australian National Accounts, Latest issue Aust Govt Publishing Service 'Labour Report, Latest issue Cwlth Bureau of Census and Statistics Other texts and publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers. Before admission to the examination candidates must have satisfactorily completed the practical work.

321-101 ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY PART 1 A course of two one-hour carrel sessions and one tutorial class per week throughout the year.t

SYLLABUS

Basic principles of industrial location; cost, revenue and behavioural approaches illustrated by case studies. Environmental perception and decision-making. Evolution of Industrial location patterns and develop-ment areas, resource assessment and development, environmental con-siderations. Spatial and resource-use studies of subsistence and commercial agricultural systems; ecological and economic approaches. The von Thunen model of agricultural location and its application to Australian farming. Regional variations in agricultural land use. The farm problem in a national and regional setting. The small town problem and decentralization. Central place theory, urban functions, spatial inter-action models in urban systems, the internal structure of the metropolis. Concepts of socio-economic development, patterns and process. The problems of regional inequalities. Population explosion, urbanization trends, resource utilization and the world as an ecosystem. Overall a study of the spatial distribution and functional inter-relationships of economic activities in different environments.

t See footnote on p. 121.

120

Economics

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Lloyd P E & Dicken P Location in Space: A Theoretical Approach to Economic Geography, Harper & Row paperback 1972

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper. Credit Is given for short essays and an objective test during term.

321-201 ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY PART 2A REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT

Economic Geography 1 or Geography 1 must be passed before this subject Is taken, and Economics B should have been completed or be taken concurrently. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week. At some stage two lectures may be replaced by two one-hour carrel sessions per week.Y

SYLLABUS

The Concept of a Region — The location of cities and city systems; central place theory. Agricultural and Industrial location patterns — Models of agricultural land rent and land use; commercial, industrial and residential land use; transport costs and location; the regional location of manufacturing; spatial price theory; spatial equilibrium theories (Weber, Losch, Green-hut Lefeber). Empirical Analysis of the Region — Application of tools and tech-niques in regional analysis; comparative cost studies, input-output rela-tionships, shift and share analysis, spatial interaction models, multiplier mechanism, spread and backwash models, factor mobility, identification of socio-economic characteristics of regions; resource assessment and utilization in economic and ecological terms. The Regional Factor in Development — Depressed and problem regions, development areas; regional development strategies, including decentrali-zation, new towns, growth centres; area planning techniques.

BOOKS

A textbook will be prescribed in the first lecture.

Recommended for reference:

Friedmann J & Alonso W eds Regional Development and Planning. MIT 1964

Hoover E M An Introduction to Regional Economics, Alfred A Knopf 1971

Isard W et al General Theory: Social, Political, Economic and Regional, MIT 1969

Isard W et al Ecologic-Economic Analysis for Regional Development, Free Press 1972

Perlman M, Leven C J & Chinitz B Spatial, Regional & Population Economics, Gordon & Breach 1972

Richardson H W Regional Economics, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1969

fA carrel session is an Individual study progra тте using audio-visual materials and equipment. One session Is taken In the first halt of the week, the other In the second. Individual times are available throughout the day end on Tuesday and Thureday evenings.

121

Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Credit is given for essays and a short-answer test during the year.

321-301 ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY PART 28 URBAN STUDIES

Statistical Method (or equivalent) and Economic Geography 1 or Geography 1 must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two 1 1/2-hour seminars per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The Economics of Urban Development — The role of the market as a regulator-decision maker in urban land use. Urban welfare and allocative criteria. Externalities in the urban environment. Urban environmental and ecological problems; policy and options. Rationale for governmental intervention in the urban land use market, government policies in Melbourne. Urban Transport — Interrelation between transport and land use. Demand for urban transport, trip generation, trip distribution, model choice. Optimal pricing of private and public transport. Investment criteria inc. cost-benefit analysis. Evaluation of the Melbourne Tran-sport Plan. Urban Land Use — Theory and practice of residential location decisions. The urban land price problem and urban sprawl. Market imperfections, neighbourhood degradation, housing segregation; factorial ecology of the city; theories of filtering. Urban redevelopment policies in Mel-bourne. Retailing, wholesaling, office and manufacturing land use. Urban Public Finance — Dimensions of urban public sector concerns; distribution of functions in a multi-level government. Revenue sources; property taxes v. user charges.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

'Edel M & Rothenberg J Readings in Urban Economics, Macmillan 1972

Recommended for reference: Berry B J L & Horton F E Geographic Perspective on Urban Systems,

Prentice-Hall 1970 Henderson W L & Ledebur L C Urban Economics: Processes & Prob-

lems, Wiley 1972 Hirsch W Z Urban Economics Analysis, McGraw-Hill 1973 Lee C Models in Planning, Pergamon 1973 McKee D L Dean R D & Leahy W H Urban Economics, Collier-Mac-

millan 1970 Perloff H S & Wingo L Issues in Urban Economics, Resources for the

Future 1968 Rasmussen D W Urban Economics, Harper & Row 1973 Rasmussen D W & Haworth C T The Modern City: Readings in Urban

Economics, Harper & Row 1973

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Credit will be given for a mid-year test and class assignments.

122

Economics

326-101 ECONOMIC HISTORY A Dr J. P. Fogarty, Mr A. W. Hodgart, Professor G. N. Blainey

Students must attend two lectures and one tutorial weekly.

SYLLABUS

International economic history 1830-1970. As the main aim of the course is to see the contemporary economic world in perspective, the following themes will be emphasized: the widening web of world commerce and the spread of Industrialization; Imperialism and decolonization; the causes and the economic effects of the two world wars; economic fluctuations including the world depression of the 1930s; the golden age of capitalism and the rise of communism; the movements towards greater national and international regulation of economic activity; and the life and significance of influential economic observers including John Stuart Mill, Karl Marx, and John Maynard Keynes.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Hughes Jonathan Industrialization and Economic History: Theses and

Conjectures, McGraw-Hill New York 1970 Pollard S The Idea of Progress: History and Society, Pelican 1971 (b) Prescribed textbook:

Kenwood A G & Lougheed A L The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960, Allen & Unwin paperback 1971

Further reading will be issued during the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper and prescribed written work throughout the year.

326-201 ECONOMIC HISTORY В Professor G. Blainey, Dr E. A. Beever

THE ECONOMIC HISTORY OF AUSTRALIA

A course of two lectures a week with tutorial classes throughout the year; some lectures may be replaced by seminars.

SYLLABUS

The economic history of Australia, 30,000 B.C. to 1970 A.D. with par-ticular attention to new themes.

BOOKS

No books are prescribed but the following will be useful: Blainey G N The Rush that Never Ended, M UP 1963 Butlin N G Investment in Australian Economic Development, 1861-1900,

CUP 1964 Cannon M The Land Boomers, MUP 1966 Coghlan T A Labour and Industry in Australia, 4 vols Macmillan paper-

back 1969 Hail A R The Stock Exchange of Melbourne and the Victorian Economy,

ANU 1968 Kiddie M Men of Yesterday, MUP 1961

123

Faculty of Arts

Articles in Historical Studies of Australia and New Zealand, Economic Record, and Australian Economic History Review.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, one research essay and class assignments.

326-301 ECONOMIC HISTORY C Dr J. P. Fogarty, Mr A. W. Hodgart

A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly. This subject can be taken in the second or third year of the course.

SYLLABUS

An historical study of social, cultural and institutional influences on economic development. A thematic approach, based on Latin America, will be followed, and comparisons will be made between developed and developing countries. Particular attention will be given to colonialism and post-colonial experience, and the impact of external economic forces on the political and social framework of particular areas.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Pendle G A Shon History of Latin America, Penguin

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Furtado C Economic Development of Latin America: A Survey from Colonial Times to the Cuban Revolution, Cambridge University Press 1970

Brown M & Barrett After Imperialism, rev ed Heinemann London 1970 Owen R & Sutcliffe B Studies in the Theory of Imperialism, Longman

London 1972 Further reading will be issued during the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper and prescribed written work throughout the year.

326-302 ECONOMIC HISTORY D Mrs M. Harper

This is normally a third year subject. A course of two lectures a week, and seminars throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The economic growth of the U.S.A. Emphasis will be given to the changing role of government within the economy and the development of modern economic and social policies. Within this framework students may study intensively topics which link with other subjects in their courses, or in which they are particularly interested. Examples of such topics include labor relations, big business, fiscal policy, the problems of federalism, urbanization, black economic development.

BOOKS No books are prescribed, but detailed reading guides will be provided.

124

Economics

For students who wish to buy books early in the year, the following are recommended:

Preliminary reading: Degler C N Out of Our Past: The Forces that Shaped Modern America,

Harper Colophon 1970 North D C Growth and Welfare in the American Past: a New Economic

History, Prentice-Hall N.J. 1974 Textbook: Robertson R M History of the American Economy, Harcourt Brace

Janovlch 1973

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and/or written work as required throughout the year.

326-303 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT Dr E. A. Beaver, Mr A. W. Hodgart

Economics B is normally required before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly.

SYLLABUS

This subject Is intended as an introduction to the development of economic thought and theory with particular emphasis on the relation-ship between economic thinking and its historical environment. The relationship between economic thinking and policy issues is also discussed. Some particular subjects which may be discussed are: Mercantilism and economic thinking of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries; English 'classical' thought and the development of the 'classical' system; nineteenth century dissenters; Socialist thought of the nineteenth century emphasizing Marx and his analysis of capitalism; the development of Welfare economics from the thought of Bentham to Pigou; the rise of marginalism; economic crises and business cycle theories; Keynes and the Cambridge school.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Barber W A History of Economic Thought, Penguin 1968

Prescribed textbooks:

No particular book is prescribed but the following are recommended: Blaug M Economic Theory in Retrospect, rev ed Irwin Illinois 1968 Spiegel H W The Growth of Economic Thought, Prentice-Hall New

Jersey 1971 Hutchinson T W Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929, Oxford

University Press 1953 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and prescribed written work.

HONOURS DEGREE H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS (For possible combinations with this school see pp. 439ff.)

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Economics comprises the following subjects:

125

Faculty of Arts

Economic History A (unless an alternative subject is approved by the professor of Economics) Economics 1A (Arts), Economics 2, 3 and 4. Statistical Method History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics An approved grade 1 subject together with one of the following sequences of subjects:

(1) History 1A or History 1B, Economic History B or History 2G, Economic History C or History 2H;

(2) Mathematics 1A or 1 C, Mathematics 2A and Statistics 200; (3) Philosophy part 1, Philosophy 2C and either Philosophy 2M or Philo-

sophy 20; (4) Politics 1, Politics 2 В and either Politics 3C or Philosophy 3D; (5) Three parts of Psychology;

(6) Some other sequence of subjects approved by the professor of Eco-nomics, in accordance with the details set out below, and for the ordinary degree.

2. In his first year, a candidate should take the courses in Economic History A, Economics 1A, the first of the additional sequence of subjects and the approved grade 1 subject.

The first year is regarded as a preliminary year of study, and admission to the higher years of the course is conditional on satisfactory perform-ance in this year. Students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the second year of the honours school. The chairman of the department normally recom-mends approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in two first year subjects including Economics 1A. Other can-didates who wish to enter the honours school should consult the chair-man of the Department of Economics, who will be guided in his recom-mendations by the merits of the case. 3. The faculty will not admit to the honours school a candidate who has previously graduated bachelor of Commerce (honours degree) or bachelor of Commerce (ordinary degree). 4. In their second year, candidates should take Economics part 2, Statis-tical Method and the second part of the additional sequence of subjects. They must be classed in Economics part 2 and must give evidence of ability to complete the work of the third and fourth years satisfactorily before being permitted to proceed.

5. In their third year, candidates should take Economics part 3 and the third part of the additional sequence of subjects. The examination in Eco-nomics part 3 consists of five papers and is the first part of the final examination. Before the end of their third year, candidates must select a subject for the essay, required as part of the final examination. The subject selected must be approved by the professor of Economics. The major part of the work for the essay should be undertaken during the long vacation between the third and fourth years and the essay should be submitted at the beginning of the third term of the year of the final examination.

6. In their fourth year candidates should take Economics part 4 and either History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics.

7. The final examination in the school of Economics consists of three

126

Economics

papers, the essay in accordance with section 5 above and one paper on either History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics.

316-271 ECONOMICS PART 2 (HONS)

A course of four lectures and one tutorial class per week.

SYLLABUS

A more advanced treatment of the topics prescribed for Economics B in the course for the ordinary degree together with a general survey of economic principles.

BOOkS

As prescribed for Economics B together with the following: Marshall A Principles of Economics, Macmillan Hicks J R Value and Capital, OUP Robbins L C Essay on Nature and Significance of Economic Science,

Macmillan Robertson D H Lectures on Economic Principles, Fontana paperback Wickstead P H Commonsense of Political Economy, 2 vols Routledge Pigou A C Economics of Welfare, Macmillan Archibald G C & Lipsey R G Introduction to a Mathematical Treatment

of Economics, 2nd ed Weidenfeld & Nicolson paperback kleppner D & Ramsay N Quick Calculus, Wiley Other texts and publications as referred to In lectures.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

316-371 ECONOMICS PART 3 (HONS) A course of five lectures per week throughout the year. Students are also required to attend a weekly research essay class.

SYLLABUS

(i) Micro-economics; macro-economics; international economics. (ii) Special topics in Economics. (Selected from monetary economics;

regional economics; capital and distribution theory; econometrics I, industrial relations; not all of which latter subjects will necessarily be offered in any one year.)

BOO К S

(i) For part (i) of the syllabus:

Chamberlin E H Theory of Monopolistic Competition, Harvard UP Hicks J R Capital and Growth, Oxford Hicks J R Critical Essays on Monetary Theory, OUP Hicks J R Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle, OUP Meade J E Balance of Payments, OUP Sen A Growth Economics, Selected Readings, Penguin Staley C E International Economics, Prentice-Hall Caves R E & Johnson H G Readings in International Economics, Allen

& Unwin

(ii) For part (ii), as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION Five 3-hour papers.

127

Faculty of Arts

316-471 ECONOMICS PART 4 (HONS) A course of at least three lectures per week throughout the year. Students are also required to attend a weekly essay class.

SYLLABUS

Economic policy and planning; public economics and welfare; and one from development economics; Marxian economics; labour studies; econometrics II.

BOOKS

Musgrave R A Theory of Public Finance, McGraw-Hill paperback Millward R Public Expenditure Economics, McGraw-Hill Winch D M Analytical Welfare Economics, Penguin Surveys of Economic Theory. American Economic Association and Royal

Economic Society, 3 vols Macmillan Houghton R W ed Public Finance: Selected Readings, Penguin Other references as given in lectures.

EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers together with research essay.

316-311 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Economics B and Mathematics 1A, Mathematics 1C or General Mathe-matics must be passed before this subject Is taken.

A course of two lectures per week throughout the year.

Lectures in this subject will be given only if there are sufficient students offering. Intending candidates should consult the sub-dean of the faculty of Economics and Commerce. SYLLABUS

Selected aspects of economic theory treated in a mathematical way. BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Allen R G D Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Papermac (b) Prescribed textbooks: Allen R G D Mathematical Economics, Macmillan Huang D S Introduction to the Use of Mathematics in Economic Analy-

sis, Wiley 1964 Lancaster K Mathematical Economics, Collins-Macmillan Other references as given in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 3 -hour paper.

MASTER OF ARTS

316-602 H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS

A MA by Thesis

1. Candidates who have passed the preliminary examination, and also, if they so elect, those who have qualified for the degree of BA with honours in Economics, may proceed to the MA degree by pursuing original re-search on an approved topic for at least one academic year. Candidates should, if possible, submit their research topic to the head of the depart-ment for approval at the beginning of the year in which they commence

128

Economics

their research. Each candidate will be assigned to a supervisor with whom he must consult regularly.

2. Candidates are required to present the results of their research in the form of a thesis of about 50,000 words or, on the recommendation of the head of the department, a series of papers. Three copies (A4, type-written, dour e-spaced) of the thesis must be submitted and, if passed by the examiners, one will be deposited in the University Library. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candida-ture or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

В MA by Course of Advanced Studies

1. Candidates who have been awarded first or upper second class honours in the final examination for the degree of BA or BCom with honours in the school of Economics, or who have been admitted with an equivalent qualification, may, with the approval of the chairman of the department, proceed to the degree of MA by pursuing a course of advanced studies extending over at least one year for full-time students or, in special cases, two years for part-time students. Candidates should seek approval for their proposed course of study by the last Friday in January of the year in which they commence their course. After approval candidates must enrol at the Students' Records Office, and re-enrol for each subsequent year of their approved course. An entry form for examinations must be lodged at the appropriate time.

2. The course of advanced studies will include: (i) two weekly postgraduate classes extending over one academic year

and requiring the submission of two satisfactory seminar or exami-nation papers. (The topics to be covered in the class will include Iwo of the following: Econometrics, the Economics of Inflation, Industrial Economics, Industrial Relations, Social Economics, Eco-nomic Development and International Economics. Further particu-lars may be obtained from the department);

(ii) either two additional weekly postgraduate classes covering two more of the topics listed under (i), or one of the following subjects not already taken as part of the candidate's undergraduate course: Mathematical Economics, Statistics 300, History of Economic Thought or another subject approved by the chairman of the department; and

(ili) an article for publication or a research report, which may incorporate further development of the candidate's BA or BCom honours essay, or may relate to one of the topics chosen for postgraduate study.

3. Examination (i) Two seminar papers and, if judged necessary by the examiners, two

3-hour examination papers;

129 E

Faculty of Arts

(ii) as for (i) above, or as prescribed in the details of the relevant sub-jects; and

(iii) a research report or publishable article.

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH Professor of English Language and Literature: Professor G. H. RUSSELL, Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A. (N.Z.)

Robert Wallace Professor of English: Professor S. L. GOLDBERG, B. Litt. (Oxon), B.A.

Personal Chair in English: Professor V. T. BUCKLEY, M.A.

Subjects offered by the Department:

First year

106-101 English Part 1 (day and evening) 106-102 Rhetoric (the one time is for day and evening)

Second year

Ordinary degree

106-201 English Part 2 (day and evening)

Honours degree

106-261 English Literature Part 2 (day only) 106-262 English Language Part 2 (day only)

Third year

Ordinary degree

106-301 English Part 3 (the one time is for both day and evening)

Honours degree

106-361 English Literature Part 3 (day only) 106-362 English Language Part 3 (day only)

Fourth year

Honours degree

106-461 English Language & Literature Part 4 (day only) (Combined Honours students take either the Literature [106-462] or the Language [106-463] component.)

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

The major in English is English 1, 2, 3. Rhetoric may not be taken as a part of the major, but may be taken in addition to other English subjects.

NOTE ON PRESCRIBED TEXTS

English 1: Students should possess the texts that have been asterisked, which form the nucleus of the course for everyone, together with all the books of poetry listed, from which material for lectures and tutorials on poetry will be drawn. In the fiction and drama sections of the course, students will be expected to read about half the number of the books listed; so that, while students should buy some of these and start reading

130

English

them as early as possible, they will be consulting with their tutors early in first term about which fiction and drama they will especially need to have for tutorial study.

Rhetoric, English 2, English 3: No books have been asterisked in any of these subjects, since all prescribed texts are essential books which students should possess.

106-101 ENGLISH PART 1 A course of lectures and discussion classes, amounting to 3 hours a week.

SYLLABUS

An introduction to the critical study of literature. The course will cover various kinds of poetry, fiction and drama, and consider some of the main questions that arise in reading them. There is no rigidly defined list of texts for study. Instead, each student will undertake a course of reading, tutorial discussion and written work, under the supervision of a tutor, selecting a body of reading to interest him from each of the lists below. (The only proviso is that all students are required to take for special attention, and as the nucleus of their course, at least two of the works in each section marked with an aste-risk.) In practice, each student's work will thus centre in, and take its direction from, his or her tutorials, though students are advised to start reading among the works listed before classes begin. Tutorials are designed to follow up whatever may emerge as the main interests and problems of a tutorial group, and they may therefore take a variety of possiЫ e directions. Some things are so basic to any study of English, of course, that they are bound to concern every tutorial group: how to read literature more res-ponsively, for example, by discovering things about it one missed; or learning to test one's own view of a work by confronting quite different views in tutorial discussions or in lectures; or discovering what one then does see in a work by having to articulate one's view of it—both in discussion and on paper—as honestly and as accurately as possible. But dealing with such problems soon raises a number of further ques-tions—questions about critical insight and judgment. We can hardly avoid asking (or can we?) how good we think a particular work of literature is and why. How does comparing a work with others help us to see It better? If we enjoy a particular work, we might well ask what exactly it is we are enjoying? How deep is our enjoyment? What is it worth? Or if we don't, we might ask is this a failing in it or in us? In what ways does a particular work challenge the assumptions we bring to it? How far, if at all, should we take account of an author's intention—what he evidently set out to do, or what he claimed he wanted to do—when read-ing his play, novel, or poem? Does it matter if what he actually did turn out to be very different from what he seems to have intended? Does it help, or hinder, our reading to know about a writer's life, background, contemporaries? Does It—and should it—make any difference to our judgment of a work if we disagree strongly with its moral outlook or dislike the 'tone of voice' in which It is written? What use is there, if any, in terms like 'sincerity' or 'realistic' or 'spontaneous' or 'con-trived', and so on? Indeed, do we need any special terminology at all in order to discuss literature critically?

131

Faculty of Arts

Clearly, these are only some of the questions that could arise; even so, not all of them will necessarily do so for everyone in first year. Again, very few such questions can be answered easily, and most of them will still remain to be considered further in later years. The course does not attempt to limit them, much less to offer ready solutions. In short, Eng-lish 1 is designed primarily as an opening up, a preliminary year of exploratory study.

As the Note on Prescribed Texts above indicates, students are expected to study only a selection from each of the following lists. Students should begin reading for the course before the commencement of classes.

1. Poetry: a critical study of some of its possibilities. The work for study will be selected from: Eastman ed The Norton Anthology of Poetry, Norton, which all students must possess, and from among the following: Chaucer The Canterbury Taies, ed Cawley, Everyman; 'John Donne, ed Hayward, Penguin; •Pope Poems, Everyman or Twicken-ham edition; Hardy Selected Shorter Poems, ed Wain, Macmillan; T. S. Eliot Collected Poems, Faber; Lowell Selected Poems, Faber. (The selection in the Norton Anthology is not adequate for the named poets.)

2. Fiction: a critical study of some of its possibilities. The works for study may be selected from among the following: Homer The Odyssey, Panther; The Book of Job (in the Authorised or Revised version); Hrofnkel the Priest of Frey (in Eirik the Red, World's Classics); Bunyan The Pilgrim's Progress; Fielding Joseph Andrews; •Jane Austen Emma; Hawthorne The Scar-let Letter; Flaubert Madame Bovary, Penguin; Dickens Great Expectations; George Eliot The Mill on the Floss; Dostoievsky Crime and Punishment, Penguin; •Tolstoy Anna Karenin, Penguin; Mark Twain The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn; Hardy Tess of the d'Urbervi/les; •Conrad Victory; Lawrence The Fox, The Captain's Doll; Waugh Decline and Fall; Faulkner Light in August; White The Tree of Man; Malravx Man's Estate; Solz-henitsyn Cancer Ward.

З . Drama: a critical study of some of its possibilities. The works for study may be selected from among the following:

'Aeschylus The Agamemnon tr MacNiece, Faber, or tr Grene and Lattimore, Pocket Books; Aeschylus The Libation Bearers and The Eumenides (both, with The Agamemnon, in Aeschylus 1, tr Grene and Lattimore, Pocket Books); Euripides Electra tr Vellacott, Pen-guin; Everyman and The Second Shepherds' Play (both in Everyman and Mediaeval Miracle Plays, ed Cawley, Everyman); Shakespeare Henry IV, Part I; Henry IV, Part Il, Twelfth Night, •Hamlet, Othello, The Winter's Tale; Jonson Volpone; Ibsen Rosт ersholm, Pen-guin; •Chekhov Uncle Vcrnya, Penguin; Brecht Mother Courage, Methuen; Beckett Waiting for Godot; Albee Who's Afraid of Virginia Woolf); Weiss Marat/Bade, Calder & Boyars; Stoppard Rosencrantz and Guildenstern are Dead; Hibberd A Stretch of the Imagination.

132

English

Reference books: The following general references are recom-mended for all students intending to pursue studies in English:

Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable; Harvey ed The Oxford Companion to English Literature 4th ed 1967; and either The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary or The Concise Oxford Dic-tionary.

ASSESSMENT

Students are required to submit two exercises and two essays, details of which will be supplied during the year. Regular tutorial attendance is expected, and students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required exercises and essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. Essays and tutorial work will be taken into account along with the examination. The exami-nation will consist of not more than two 3-hour papers.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see also p. 28).

(i) A short course of lectures and/or tutorials, normally for one hour a week, centring on Chaucer The Canterbury Tales.

The course will extend over the first part of the year. At the end of the course there will be an informal class test, which will be of special value to students interested in the possibility of taking an honours course in Pure English.

(ii) Lectures and discussion classes on a selection of texts.

106-102 RHETORIC Mr H. Dow

A course of two lectures a week, with tutorial classes.

SYLLABUS

A study of the technique and style of English prose, linked with a study of the practical problems of English expression.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Cowers E The Complete Plain Words, Penguin Potter S Our Language, Penguin Vallins G H Good English: How to Write It, Pan Books Vallins G H Better English, Pan Books

(b) Prescribed texts:

Defoe, Swift, Johnson, Hazlitt, Macaulay, Dickens, R L Stevenson and others: Selections In cyclostyled booklets, from English Dept. Huxley T H Selections from the Essays, ed Castell A, Crofts Classics Shaw Bernard Preface to Saint Joan, Penguin Russell Bertrand In Praise of Idleness, Unwin Books Hemingway E A Moveable Feast, Penguin The School of Barbiana Letter to a Teacher, Penguin

(c) Recommended for reference:

The Concise Oxford Dictionary, 5th ed or The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary

133

Faculty of Arts

Fowler H W & F G The King's English, OUP Fowler H W Modern English Usage, OUP or 2nd rev ed Gowers E,

OUP Partridge E Usage and Abusage, Hamilton Carey G V Mind the Stop, Penguin

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit written work periodically throughout the year. Written and tutorial work will be taken into account at the exam-ination. Students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject.

ASSESSMENT

Assessment will be based on the examination and on written and tutorial work during the year. The number of examination papers will not exceed two of 3 hours each.

106-201 ENGLISH PART 2

A course of two lectures and one tutorial class a week.

SYLLABUS

A study of nineteenth and twentieth century poetry, fiction and drama. (a) Prescribed texts: (i) Poetry in the late Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries: Auden and Pearson eds Poets of the English Language, Vols 3, 4 & 5: Restoration end Augustan Poets, Romantic Poets and Victorian end Edwardian Poets, Viking Portable ed Vol 3 of this anthology is of particular importance as containing poems by the immediate forerunners of Blake. Wordsworth and Coleridge. Blake Oxford Standard Authors or Viking Portable ed Coleridge Modern Library ed Wordsworth Modern Library ed The Penguin parallel text of The Prelude (ed J C Maxwell) is also of particular value for the study of Wordswoп h. Note: The selection of Blake, Coleridge and Wordsworth in the Auden & Pearson anthology is not adequate for this course. (ii) Poetry in the Twentieth Century:

Yeats W B Selected Poetry, St Martin's Library [Honours students are advised to buy, instead, the Collected Poems, Macmillan]

Pound E Selected Poems, New Directions (the Faber selection is not suitable)

Eliot T S Four Quartets Auden Selected Poems, Penguin Walsh Chad ed Today's Poets, Scribners . (Also recommended for comparison, Twelve Poets, ed Craig, Jacaranda

Press.)

(iii) The Nineteenth and Twentieth Century Novel:

Austen Emma Bronte Wuthering Heights Dickens Dombey and Son

134

English

Melville Moby Dick Eliot George Middlemarch

Two Novellas:

James The Europeans Conrad The Shadow Line

Joyce A Portrait of the Artist es a Young Man ( Also in The Essential James Joyce, Penguin)

Lawrence The Rainbow (iv) A selection of drama from the period: Chekhov The Cherry Orchard Brecht The Caucasian Chalk Circle Beckett Waiting for Godot

(b) Other recommended reading:

Wordsworth Preface to the Lyrical Ballads, 2nd ed (Modern Library ed of Poems)

Coleridge Biographia Literaria, Everyman (or selections in Modern Library ed of Poems)

Keats Letters Arnold Critical works In The Portable Mathew Arnold, Viking Press James The House of Fiction, ed Leon Edel Eliot Selected Essays Yeats Autobiographies Auden The Enchafed Flood Lawrence Selected Literary Criticism (Penguin) Note: Authors and works to be studied in the anthologies will be speci-fied in class. Critical writings in addition to those in Section (b) will be recom-mended in class.

ASSESSMENT

Students will be required to submit three pieces of written work. These and contributions to tutorials will formally be taken into account along with examinations at the end of the year. Students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. The number of examination papers to be sat will not exceed two.

106-301 ENGLISH PART 3 A course of three lectures and one tutorial class a week.

SYLLABUS

(a) A study of English poetry and prose from Chaucer to the eighteenth century, together with either

(b) (i) Further work on drama, mainly English; or (ii) A selection of American and Australian literature.

Students are not required formally to choose between the optional sec-tions of the course. Details of lecture and tutorial arrangements will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year.

(a) Texts for study are:

Chaucer The Canterbury Tales, as selected in class, ed Cawley, Every- man

135

Faculty of Arts

Donne, Marvell and other poets in The Schools of Donne and Jonson, ed H Kenner, Holt, Rinehart & Winston, and Auden and Pearson eds Poets of the English Language, vols 1 & 2 Viking.

Shakespeare King Leer, Antony and Cleopatra, Twelfth Night Two seventeenth-century plays: Webster The Duchess of Malfi, Middle-

ton The Changeling Milton Paradise Lost Dryden as selected in class, Heinemann Poetry Bookshelf ed Pope The one-volume Twickenham ed or the Everyman. (The selection

in Penguin Poets is not adequate for this course) Swift Gulliver's Travels and other work as selected in class. Modern

Library ed Johnson as selected in class. (The following two will together provide

a usable selection: Bronson B H ed Samuel Johnson: Rasselas, Poems and Selected Prose, Holt, Rinehart & Winston; Lives of the Poets, Fontana or World's Classics)

(b) Either:

(i) Further work on drama. Texts for study are:

Sophocles King Oedipus Euripides The Bacchae Everyman end Mediaeval Miracle Plays, ed Cawley, Everyman—plays to

be selected Shakespeare Henry IV Parts 1 and 2, Hamlet, Measure for Measure, The

Tempest Tourneur The Revenger's Tragedy Jonson Volpone or (ii) A selection of American and Australian literature. Texts for study are:

Hawthorne The Scarlet Letter and other Tales, Penguin Henry James The Bostonians F. Scott Fitzgerald The Great Gatsby Lawson Selected Stories, Rigby Patrick White The Vivisector Christina Stead The Man Who Loved Children Modern American and Australian poetry—as selected in class

Heseltine ed The Penguin Book of Australian Verse Mark Strand ed Contemporary American Poetry, Mentor

GENERAL REFERENCE BOOKS

A list of general references useful for preliminary reading will be posted on the English department notice-board at the beginning of the year.

ASSESSMENT Students are required to submit four essays and at least one class paper, details of which will be supplied during the year. Regular tutorial atten-dance is expected, and essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. The examination will be

either: (A) With the approval of the chairman of department, students with a record of good class work and essay work may satisfy the examiners

without sitting for (B) below;

136

English

or

(B) An examination, the nature of which will be announced at the be-ginning of the academic year. The number of papers to be sat will not exceed two.

HONOURS DEGREE

E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (For possiы a combinations with this school see pp. 439ff.)

GENERAL

The first year is regarded as a preliminary year of exploratory study. Before entering on their second year as candidates for the degree with honours, students will require the permission of the faculty of Arts to do so. Normally this will be given only to those who have gained a first or a second class honour in English 1. Any student who, not having been awarded a first or second class honour in English 1, wishes to enter the honours school, must apply through the Sub-Dean to the faculty for per-mission to do so. Any student who wishes to transfer from a combined honours school to the school of Pure English must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for per-mission of the chairman of the department of English. Any student who wishes to repeat any course in the honours school in English must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission of the chair-man of the department of English. All students who have completed any year in the honours school of English, must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission of the chairman of the department of English to proceed into their next year. Normally this will be given only to students who have gained first or second class honours in their English course (or courses) and who have progressed satisfactorily in their additional subjects. The course in Practice of Criticism for English Literature 2 will be ex-amined at the end of, and together with, the course in Practice of Criti-cism in English Literature 3. The examination will normally take place at the end of third term, before the beginning of the examination term. Regular attendance at classes is expected, and class work will be taken into account at the examination. All students taking part 11 of the final examination are required to submit a thesis by 8 June of the year In which they are taking part II of the final examination, or at such other time as is set down In the details of the combined honours courses. This thesis forms part of the final examina-tion. The subject of the thesis must be approved by the chairman of the department by the end of the first week of the third term of the student's third year. Work on the thesis should begin in the long vacation. The thesis itself should be between 8,000 and 10,000 words in length; any thesis significantly longer or shorter will not be accepted. It should be typewritten, double-spaced, on A4 paper. Two copies must be sub-mitted. Students' attention is drawn to the faculty regulation affecting the thesis.

N.B.—(i) any thesis submitted after the due date without the formal permission of the chairman of department will be substantially penalized; (i1) no thesis will be examined if It Is submitted after 30 November with-out formal permission of the chairman of department.

137

Faculty of Arts

PURE ENGLISH SCHOOL

The course for the degree with honours comprises the following subjects:

English 1 English Literature 2 and 3 English Language 2 and 3 English Language and Literature 4 in accordance with the details set out below. Students must take these six subjects and at least four approved additional subjects chosen so as to comply with the requirements for the ordinary degree. For the degree with honours in the school of Pure English these additional subjects must include at least part 1 of a language (other than English) approved by the chairman of the department. (Normally this will be one of the following: Dutch, French, German, Greek, Italian, Latin, Russian or Swedish.)

1. First year:

( а ) The normal requirements for first year are:

(i) The achievement of a suitable standard in English 1, usually first or second class honours; and

(ii) Passes in three other part 1 subjects chosen in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree.

(b) However, in view of the requirements above for part 1 of a language other than English, and the nature of English Language 2. students who may wish to pursue the honours course in the school of Pure English are strongly recommended to include the required part 1 of a language other than English in their first-year studies, as well, of course, as the op-tional Additional Work in English 1, which Is of special value to students interested in the possibility of an honours course in Pure English. (A student whose first year does not include a language other than English may, in special circumstances, be given permission to enter on the second year of the Pure English course and take part 1 of a language other than English in his second year instead of an additional part 2 subject. Such permission must be sought through the Sub-Dean.)

2. Second year:

The normal requirements for second year are:

(i) The achievement of a suitable standard, usually first or second class honours, in English Literature 2;

(ii) The achievement of a suitable standard, usually first or second class honours, in English Language 2;

(iii) A pass in a grade 2 subject chosen in accordance with the require-ments for the ordinary degree.

3. Third year: Final Honours, Part I:

Students will take English Literature 3 and English Language 3 (in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours), the examination for these consisting of papers in:

Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American litera-ture or Studies in drama, as available. (Numbers in any of these classes may have to be limited.) Practice of criticism (dating). Middle English.

138

English

(5) Elementary Old Norse or Early English lyric poetry.

4. Fourth Year: Final Honours, Part 11:

Students will take English Language and Literature 4, the examination for which consists of five papers, which shall include:

(1) A thesis of 8,000-10,000 words on an approved subject;

• (2) Medieval literature;

and three of:

(3) American literature; (4) Aspects of poetry from 1500; (5) Literature and thought, c. 1830-1880, or Literature and thought, C.

1870-1925, or Literature and thought, 1920—; (6) Shakespeare;

• (7) Old English poetry; • (8) Old Norse poetry and prose; • (9) History of the English language.

N.B. Some of the above papers may not be available and others may be added in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading for each seminar course, will be listed on the departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these seminars. The papers marked with an asterisk are available only to students who have taken English Lan-guage 3.

ENGLISH IN COMBINED HONOURS COURSES

English in combined honours courses will consist of EITHER

(A) English 1, and English Literature 2, 3, and 4: or

( В ) English 1, and English Language 2, 3, and 4;

in accordance with the details set out below, and such additional sub-jects as comply with (a) the requirements of the ordinary degree and (b) the particular combined honours course concerned. Normally, these additional subjects will comprise the relevant honours work in the com-bining school together with two grade 1 and one grade 2 pass subjects.

(A) In their first year, students will take English 1, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. They are also strongly recommended to include part 1 of a language other than English among their first year subjects, as well, of course, as the optional Additional Work in English 1. In their second year, students will take English Literature 2, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours (together with the required work for the combining honours school and a grade 2 subject in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree). In their third year, they will take papers (1), (2), and (3) of part I of the final examination in the school of Pure English (together with the re-quired work for the combining honours school) in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. In their fourth year, they will present a thesis in accordance with the requirements of the particular combined honours course concerned, and two of papers (3), (4), (5) and (6) offered in part I1 of the final exam-ination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school).

139

Faculty of Arts

(B) Students may take English Language as part of a combined honours course, provided they give evidence of their ability to do so and pass in part 1 of a language other than English in accordance with the require-ments of the school of Pure English as set out above. Thus:

In their first year, students will take English 1, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. (N.B. Stu-dents who may wish to study English Language 2, 3, and 4, are reminded that the optional additional work in English 1 is partly designed to give them some introduction to this study.) In addition they should take the required part 1 of a language other than English (which should normally be one of those listed above under the course for Pure English), and two other subjects. In their second year, they will take English Language 2, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours (together with the required work for the combining honours school and a grade 2 subject in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree). In their third year, they will take papers (4) and (5) of part I of the fina' examination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school), in which they must achieve e suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. In their fourth year, they will present a thesis in accordance with the re-quirements of the particular combined honours course concerned, and two of papers (2), (7), (8) and (9) offered in part I1 of the final examination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school).

106-261 ENGLISH LITERATURE PART 2 A course of four lectures a week, with 1-2 tutorials per week, and an additional weekly 2-hour class in the practice of criticism.

Regular attendance at all classes is expected, and essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination.

SYLLABUS

(i) The course in literature prescribed for English part 2 (ordinary de-gree).

(ii) Older forms of narrative: Homer The Iliad, tr Richmond Lattimore, Phoenix Books Beowulf (in translation) The Song of Roland, Penguin translation

The Norse Saga, with special reference to:

The Story of Burnt N¡ál, tr Dasent G W, Everyman Laxdaela Saga, tr Press M, Everyman

Medieval Romance, with special reference to:

Aucassin and Nicolette, Everyman Marie de France French Medieval Romances, Everyman Chrétien de Troyes Arthurian Romances, Everyman Malory Morte d'Arthur

Dante The Divine Comedy, Temple Classics translation Chaucer Troilus and Criseyde, ed Warrington Everyman or ed Cook,

Anchor

140

English

The following works are recommended for reference:

K е r W P Epic and Romance, Macmillan. This is the most important reference book.

Phillpotts B Edda and Saga, HUL Lewis C S The Allegory of Love, OUP

ASSESSMENT

On Section (i) of the syllabus: three pieces of written work are required. These and contribution to tutorials will formally be taken into account along with examinations at the end of the year. Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of depart-ment, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. For sections (i) and (ii) of the syllabus: the number of examination papers to be sat will not exceed three.

106-262 ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART 2 A course of three lectures a week with a weekly tutorial.

Regular class attendance is expected, and essay and class work will be taken into account at the examination.

SYLLABUS

A study of Old and Middle English with prescribed and unprescribed translation, together with a short course of lectures on the history of the English language, and some study of the Anglo-Saxon background.

Students taking English Language part 2 as part of a combined honours course must attend lectures and sit for the examination in section (il) of English Literature part 2.

BOO К S

(a) Prescribed texts:

Sweet H Anglo-Saxon Reader, ed Whitelock, OUP Brook G L An Introduction to Old English, Manchester UP Mitchell R B A Guide to Old English, Blackwell Sisam k ed Fourteenth Century Verse and Prose, OUP Baugh A C A History of the English Language, Routledge

(b) Recommended for reference:

Zesmer D Guide to English Literature, Barnes & Noble Whitelock D The Beginnings of English Society, Pelican Blair P H An Introduction to Anglo-Saxon England, CUP

ASSESSMENT

An essay of about 2,500 words will be required on some part of the syllabus. Class work will include regular assignments in grammar and translation. Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of depart-ment, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. The number of examination papers to be sat will not exceed one, in addition to class tests.

141

Faculty of Arts

106-361 ENGLISH LITERATURE PART 3 A course of (i) two lectures and one tutorial per week: (ii) a 2-hour seminar per week together with weekly tutorials as required; and (iii) a seminar of 1 1/2-2 hours per week.

Regular attendance at all classes is expected, and essays and class work will be taken into account at the examination.

SYLLABUS

(i) Section (a) of the course prescribed for English part 3 (ordinary degree). Honours students are advised to possess a good edition of Wyatt's Poems (e.g. Muses' Library), Marvell's Poems (e.g. Modern Library or Muses' Library) and an edition of Donne that Includes some of his prose (e.g. Nonesuch or Modern Library). They should also obtain the Pelican Book of English Prose, 2 vols, and Auden and Pearson's Poets of the English Language, both of which will be necessary for section (iii) of the syllabus as well.

(ii) One of the following:

(a) Australian and American literature. Works from the two litera-tures will be studied concurrently throughout the year. Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Preliminary reading will be re-quired.

(b) The 19th and 20th century novel. Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Preliminary reading will be required.

(c) Studies in drama, chiefly Greek, 17th century, and modern. Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Preliminary reading will be required.

N.B. Any of (a), (b) and (c) above may not be available in any particular year, and numbers in each may have to be limited. Those that are available will be announced towards the end of the previous year, when students will be asked for their preferences.

(iii) Seminars in the practice of criticism (dating).

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to do two essays on section (i) of the syllabus, and to present at least one seminar paper on section (ii, a or b or c).

Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of depart-ment, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject.

EXAMINATION

The number of papers to be sat will not exceed three.

106-362 ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART 3 A course of lectures amounting to about four hours a week. Regular class attendance is expected, and class work, which will include regular assignments in translation, will be taken into account at the examination.

142

English

SYLLABUS

(i) A study of Middle English.

Dickins & Wilson Early Middle English Texts, Bowes & Bowes Langland Piers Plowman, ed Bennett J A W. OUP Silam K ed Fourteenth Century Verse and Prose, OUP Chaucer G The 'Dream Poems', Robinson ed preferred Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, ed Tolkien J R R & Gordon E V, 2nd

rev ed Davis N, OUP Henryson R Poems, ed Elliott C, OUP Ford B ed The Age of Chaucer, Pelican Guide to English Literature Vol 1

Together with one of the following two subjects:

(ii) A study of Early English lyric poetry.

Sweet H Anglo-Saxon Reader, ed Whitelock, OUP Davies R T ed Mediaeval English Lyrics, Faber paperback Bolton W F An Old English Anthology, Arnold

(iii) Elementary Old Norse.

Gordon E V Introduction to Old Norse, rev Taylor, OUP Snorri Sturluson Hákonar Saga G6Sa, English Dept

ESSAY WORK

A class paper will be required on section (I) of the syllabus.

EXAMINATION

The number of papers to be sat will not exceed two.

106-461 . ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE PART 4 (SCHOOL E)

A course chiefly of seminar work throughout the year. Seminars are generally 2 hours per week, together with weekly tutorials as required.

Regular attendance at classes is expected, and class work will be taken Into account at the examination.

SYLLABUS

Five papers, which shall include:

(1) Thesis of 8,000-10,000 words on an approved subject. • (2) Medieval literature;

and three of:

(3) American literature. (4) Aspects of poetry from 1500. (5) Literature and thought, c. 1830-1880, or

Literature and thought, C. 1870-1925, or Literature and thought, 1920-

(6) Shakespeare. • (7) A study of Old English, chiefly poetry, with special reference to:

Beowulf, ed Klaeber, Heath Bolton W F An Old English Anthology, Arnold

Sweet H Anglo-Saxon Reader, ed Whitelock, OUP • (8) Old Norse poetry and prose.

Zoëga, G A Concise Dictionary of Old Icelandic, Clarendon Gordon E V Introduction to Old Norse, rev Taylor, OUP

143

Faculty of Arts

Typescript texts (English department). •(9) History of the English language.

N.B. Some of the above papers may not be available and others may be added in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading for each, will be listed on the departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these seminars. The papers marked with an asterisk are availabIe only to students who have taken English Language 3.

EXAMINATION The total number of papers will not exceed five.

106-462 ENGLISH LITERATURE PART 4 (COMBINED COURSES)

A course chiefly of seminar work throughout the year: See details of Eng-lish Language and Literature 4.

SYLLABUS

Three papers, which must include (1 ) in accordance with the require-ments of the combined honours course concerned, and in addition two other papers from (3), (4), (5) and (6), as set out in the details for part 4 of English Language and Literature above.

EXAMINATION

The total number of papers will not exceed three.

106-463 ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART 4 (COMBINED COURSES)

A course of about four hours a week: See details of English Language and Literature 4.

SYLLABUS

Three papers which must include (1) in accordance with the requirements of the combined honours course concerned, and in addition two other papers from (2), (7), (8) and (9), as set out in the details for part 4 of English Language and Literature below.

EXAMINATION

The total number of papers to be sat will not exceed three.

MASTER OF ARTS

106-601 E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

1. Enrolment.

Candidates must complete two formal applications—one for the sub-dean of the faculty and the other for the department of English—seeking per-mission to enrol, whether for the degree of MA or for the preliminary course qualifying pass-degree students to enter upon the MA. If permission is granted, candidates must enrol at the Students' Records Office, re-enrol for each subsequent year of their approved course and, when appropriate, lodge an entry form for examination for higher degrees.

144

Fine Arts

2. Preliminary Course (for candidates with pass degrees).

Students should apply, both to the sub-dean and the department of Eng-lish, on the appropriate forms not later than the end of January in the year in which they propose to begin.

Students should consult the department about details of their course, but generally they will be required to take only one paper from those set for part I of the final honours examination and two papers from those available for part II, together with a thesis on an approved subject as re-quired for part II. However, all proposed courses must be approved by the chairman of the department.

З . MA Course.

Candidates may choose, with the approval of the chairman of the depart-ment, to fulfil the requirements for the degree of MA in one of the follow-ing two ways:

(i) Prepare a thesis of about 50,000 words on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. Students will work under a supervisor nominated by the department, to whom they are required to report regularly on their work. Three copies of the thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted. Candidates may also be examined on the subject of their thesis.

(11) (a) Sit for a special examination of two papers in any of the courses available for part 2 of the final honours examination or such other courses as may be offered from time to time, provided that no student may repeat a course he has taken as part of his BA or his MA Preliminary course.

(b) In addition, prepare a thesis of about 25,000 words on a sub-ject approved by the chairman of the department. Other requirements

for this thesis are those set out above under (i) concerning the longer thesis.

Course work must normally be undertaken before, or concurrently with, the writing of the thesis.

The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time can-didates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF FINE ARTS Chairman of Department: Professor J. T. BURKE, O.B.E., M.A. (Lind. Yale and leib.)

The Fine Arts Department provides courses in the history and theory of the visual arts. No courses In practical art are offered. At present the Department's programme concentrates on the development of Western Art. Courses range from Egyptian to Contemporary Art.

145

Faculty of Arts

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

1. The department offers: Grade One: Fine Arts 1A. (Introduction to Western Art and Archi-

tес tи rе .) Grade Two: Fine Arts 2E. (Medieval and Renaissance Art History.)

Grade Three: (a) Fine Arts 3F. (Early Christian and Byzantine: Baroque Art History.)

(b) Fine Arts 3K. (European Art History; 19th and 20th Centuries.)

2. A major in Fine Arts consists of Fine Arts 1A, Fine Arts 2E, and in third year Fine Arts 3F or 3K.

3. Normally Fine Arts 1A is a prerequisite for Fine Arts 2E, and Fine Arts 1A and 2E are prerequisites for either of the Grade Three subjects Fine Arts 3F or 3K. Students who wish for goad rea-sons to be dispensed from a prerequisite must apply to the department.

4. No external tuition is available in these subjects.

111-101 FINE ARTS 1A A course of two lectures per week, with one 1-hour tutorial class or an occasional 2-hour seminar, throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in the subject.

SYLLABUS

The course provides an introduction to the history of Western Art and Architecture from classical antiquity to the present day. Its aims are twofold:

1. To develop a critical awareness of individual artists and works.

2. To introduce students to the basic problems of art history.

The course will focus on three aspects.

TERM I

A study of Egyptian, Greek and Roman art, circa 1000 B.C.-A.D. 200, with an introduction to Early Christian and Byzantine art.

TERM I1

A special study of selected artists and monuments from the 12th to the 17th century.

TERM Ill

A study of modern art. Sore aspects of Australian art. Throughout the course there are many options open to students as regards areas of study and students are free to concentrate on their special interests. The course places considerable emphasis on students obtaining a good range of visual knowledge. It is essential that illustrative material is studied throughout the year. The collections of the National Gallery of

Victoria play an important rale in gaining such knowledge. Students

146

Fine Arts

should therefore acquaint themselves thoroughly with the collections before and during the course.

BOOKS

Essential preliminary reading:

Gombrich E H The Story of Art, Phaidon paperback 1968 or Janson H W A History of Art, any ed Thames & Hudson end Richter G M A A Handbook of Greek Art, 6th ed Phaidon paperback

1968 Clark K The Nude, any ed

Prescribed textbooks:

The following are a basic list of readily available books. Most of them are in paperback. Fuller bibliographies and reading lists will be issued to students during the year.

Students are recommended to buy these books. Clark K The Nude, any ed Richter G M A A Handbook of Greek Art, 6th ed Phaidon paperback

1968 Trendall A D Notes on Greek and Roman Art, Melbourne 1973 Carpenter R Greek Sculpture, University of Chicago paperback 1971 Toynbee J M C The Art of the Romans, Thames & Hudson 1965 Talbot Rice D Byzantine Art, Pelican 1968 Smart A The Renaissance and Mannerism in Itaiy, Thames & Hudson

1971 Wölfflin H Classic Art, any ed Phaidon Greenberg C Art and Culture, Thames & Hudson paperback 1973 Smith B Australian Painting, Oxford University Press 1971 Pevsner N An Outline of European Architecture, Pelican 1963 Summerson J The Classical Language of Architecture, any ed Methuen Hoff Ursula European Painting and Sculpture before 1800, National

Gallery of Victoria 1973 The National Gallery of Victoria in conjunction with Oxford University Press publishes a series of Gallery booklets dealing with various aspects of the collection, e.g. French Impressionists and Post-Impressionists.

Prescribed for reference:

Murray Peter & Linda A Dictionary of Art end Artists, Penguin 1964

ASSESSMENT

Class work and written work during the year will constitute part of the assessment. The percentage allotted to class and written work and the details and nature of examination papers (which will not exceed two 3-hour papers) will be available at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-201 FINE ARTS 2E (PASS) (MEDIEVAL AND RENAISSANCE ART HISTORY)

A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in this subject.

147

Faculty of Arts

Students who wish for good reasons to take this subject without having previously taken Fine Arts 1A must obtain permission of the lecturers in charge of the subject and must undertake a course of preliminary reading prescribed by the department.

SYLLABUS

A study of late Medieval and Renaissance Art, with special emphasis on Italy. Tutorial work will include the study of documentary sources and Renaissance art theory as well as stylistic and iconographic problems. Some tutorials will be conducted in the National Gallery of Victoria.

BOOKS

Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year. (a) Prescribed preliminary reading:

Lamer J Culture and Society in Italy 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Huizinga J The Waning of the Middle Ages, Pelican 1965 'Panofsky E Renaissance and Renascentes in Western Art, Paladin

paperback 1970 Burke P Culture and Society in Italy 1420-1540, Batsford 1972 •Wõlfflin H Classic Art, Phaidon paperback 1968 (b) Prescribed Primary Sources: 'Alberti L В On Painting, ed J. R. Spencer 2nd ed Yale UP paperback

1966 or Alberti L B On Painting and on Sculpture, c. Grayson Phaidon 1972 •Holt E G A Documentary History of Art, Vols I and Il, Doubleday-

Anchor paperback 1958 •Klein R & Zerner H Italian Art 1500-1600, Sources and Documents in

the History of Art, Prentice-Hall paperback 1966 Leonardo Treatise on Painting, tr A. P. McMahon, Princeton 1957 Complete Poems and Selected Letters of Michelangelo, tr with foreword

and notes by C Gilbert, Modern Library New York 1965 Vasari G Lives of the Most Eminent Painters, Sculptors and Architects,

Everyman Library 1962 Oerte! R Early Italian Painting 600-1400, Thames & Hudson 1966 Panofsky E Early Netherlandish Painting, 2 vols. Cambridge Mass.

1953 Pope-Hennessy J An Introduction to Italien Sculpture, 3 parts, 5 vols.

Phaidon 1955-63 Seymour C Sculpture In Italy 1400-1500, Pelican History of Art Series

1966 White J Art and Architecture in Italy 1250-1400, Pelican History of Ar

Series 1966 Wittkower R Architectural Principles in the Age of Humanism, Tiranti

paperback 1962

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit one essay (of approximately 3,000 words) and two or three class papers during the year.

EXAMINATION

Class work, written work and tests done during the year will constitute part of the examination. The percentage allotted to class and written

148

Fine Arts

work and the details and nature of examination papers (which will not exceed two 3-hour papers) will be available from the Fine Arts Department at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-301 FINE ARTS 3F (PASS) (EARLY CHRISTIAN AND BYZANTINE: BAROQUE ART HISTORY)

A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with a special class per week for part of the year. Students who wish to take this subject should consult with the lecturer in charge of the subject. A reading knowledge of a modern European language or of Latin is desirable.

SYLLABUS

The course consists of two half-year units. (a) A study of selected problems in late Antique, Early Christian and Byzantine art and archaeology in the first half of the year. (b) A study of the art of the Baroque with special emphasis on Italy in the second half of the year.

BOOKS

Unit (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Brown P The World of Late Antiquity, Thames & Hudson 1971 Brown P Augustine of Hippo, A Biography, Faber & Faber 1969 Beckwith J The Art of Constantinople, Phaidon 1968 Beckwith J Early Christian and Byzantine Art, Pelican 1971 Krautheimer R Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture, Pelican 1965 L'Orange H P Art Forms and civic life in the late Roman Empire,

Princeton University 1965 Grabar A Christian Iconography, A Study of its Origins, New York

University 1969 Detailed bibliographies will be issued throughout the year.

Unit (b) Recommended for preliminary reading: Ovid Metamorphoses, Pelican 1964

•Panofsky E Meaning in the Visual Arts, Doubleday 1955, Introduction and Ch. 1

Ма le E Religious Art, Noonday paperback 1968 Wõlfflin H Classic Art, Phaidon paperback 1968

Shearman J Mannerism, Pelican 1967 Kitson M The Age of the Baroque, McGraw-Hill 1966 Dickens A G The Counter Reformation, Thames & Hudson 1968

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit at least two essays of approximately 3,000 words and two class papers throughout the year.

EXAMINATION

Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. The percentage allotted to class and written work and the details and nature of final examination papers (which will not ex-ceed two 3-hour papers) will be available at the beginning of the Ace-demic Year.

149

Faculty of Arts

111-302 FINE ARTS 3K (PASS) (EUROPEAN ART HISTORY NINETEENTH AND EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURIES)

A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. This subject is not available for external tuition.

Fine Arts 3k will be given every year.

SYLLABUS A study of European art of the 19th and 20th centuries with special reference to painting and sculpture from 1848 to the present day.

BOOKS

The following is a basic list only. Students are recommended to buy the books marked with an asterisk. Further bibliographical guides to monographs and other works of refer-ence will be issued to supplement this basic list.

(a) Prescribed preliminary reading:

Huyghe R Modern Art, London 1965 •Novotny Fritz Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1780 to 1880, Pelican

History of Art 1960 Hamilton G H Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1880 to 1940, Pelican

History of Art 1967 Arneson H H History of Modern Art, Prentice-Hall 1969 Hitchcock H R Architecture, Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries, Peli-

can History of Art 1958

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Primary Sources

Eitner L Neoclassicism and Romanticism 1750 to 1850, Vol II. In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1970

•Holt E G From the Classicists to the Impressionists, Doubleday 1966 Baudelaire: Selected Writings on Art and Artists, Penguin classics 1972 •Nochlin Linda Realism and Tradition in Art, 1848 to 1900. In Sources

and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1966 •Nochlin Linda Impressionism and Post-Impressionism, 1874 to 1904.

In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hail 1967

Venturi L Les Archives de L'Impressionisme, 2 vols Paris 1939 Chipp H B Theories of Modern Art, University of California Press 1968

Secondary Sources

Praz M The Romantic Agony, Fontana paperback 1962 Boime A The Academy and French Painting in the 19th Century,

London 1971 Clark T J The Absolute Bourgeois: Artists & Politics in France 1848-

1851, London 1973 Clark T J Image of the People: Gustave Courbet and the 1848 Revo-

lution, London 1973 Nochlin L Realism, Penguin 1971 Licht F Sculpture 19th and 20th Centuries, London 1967

160

Fine Arts

Gauss C E The Aesthetic Theories of French Artists 1855 to the Present, Baltimore 1949

Rewald J The History of Impressionism, New York 1956 Rewald J Post-Impressionism from Van Gogh to Gauguin, New York

1956 Sutter J ed The Neo-Impressionists, tr Deliss C, London 1971 Meiss M et al eds Problems of the 19th and 20th centuries Studies in

Western Art Vol. IV, Princeton 1963 Duthuit G The Fauvist Painters, New York 1950 Cooper D The Cubist Epoch, London 1971 Pevsner N Pioneers of Modern Design from William Morris to Walter

Gropius, Penguin rev ed 1960

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit an essay of 4,000-5,000 words and complete two or three exercises during the year. in addition a special visual exercise may be given.

EXAMINATION

No more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

HONOURS DEGREE

N. SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS

(For possible combinations with this school see pp. 439ff.)

1. The course for the degree with honours in the School of Fine Arts Comprises a first preliminary year and three years in the honours school as set out below. Students should plan their courses in consultation with a member of the academic staff of the depart-ment of Fine Arts, and should make appointments for this pur-pose at the departmental office as well as with the sub-dean.

2. First (preliminary) year

(a) The normal requirements for admission in the second year to the honours school of Fine Arts are: (i) A suitable standard (usually the equivalent of first or sec-

ond class honours) in Fine Arts 1A; (il) Passes in three other first-year subjects.

(b) The latter subjects must be chosen to comply with the re-quirements of the ordinary degree, but it is strongly recom-mended that students intending to pursue honours in Fine Arts include in their first year studies:

(i) A subject in History, English or Classics;

(ii) Part I of a language other than English. (Note: reading ability in the relevant Modern European languages and, in specific cases, of Latin and Greek is important for advanced study in Art History);

(iii) A subject which can form the first part of a major (or at least a two-subject sequence) supporting or complement-ing an honours course in Art History;

(iv) The optional additional seminar work in Fine Arts 1A.

151

Faculty of Arts

Second year

(I) Fine Arts 2E Honours (Medieval and Renaissance) and one of: History 2R Honours (Late Medieval European History) • or a Grade 2 Honours subject in a related discipline approved by the depart-ment.' •

(ii) A Grade 2 subject in a discipline other than Fine Arts forming a two-subject sequence with a subject taken in the first year.

Third year

(i) Fine Arts 31( Honours (European Art, 19th and 20th centuries) and: Fine Arts 3F Honours (Early Christian and Byzantine).

(ii) In addition students may take an additional pass subject or approved course of study. Students may take this opportunity to complete a pass major or undertake a course which will increase proficiency in reading foreign languages.

(iii) Students should select the topic for their thesis at the beginning of third term, in consultation with a member of the academic staff of the Department of Fine Arts. It is expected that students will have progressed sufficiently by the end of third term to be able to do substantial work on the thesis during the long vacation.

Fourth year: Final Honours

(a) The final year in the school of Art History consists of:

(i) Fine Arts 4R Honours (Theory and Method of Art History); (ii) Fine Arts 4S Honours (Special Study in Art History);

(iii) Completion of the final honours thesis of 8,000-10,000 words due to be submitted on the first day of second term.

Final Examination

Examinations In third and final years will be regarded as comprising final examinations in the School of Art History, and will normally consist of:

(i) The papers In each of the honours Fine Arts subjects taken in third year. (These papers will be written in the third year);

(ii) Assessment of the final honours thesis, and

(iii) In the final year the examinations in 4R and 4S;

(iv) Written work done during the year will constitute part of both examinations.

Fine Arts in Combined Honours Courses

Normally Fine Arts in combined honours courses consists of half the Fine Arts subjects required or recommended in the pure honours school: i.e. Fine Arts 1A in the first year; Fine Arts 2E Honours (Medieval and Renaissance) in the second year; either Fine Arts 3F Honours (Early Christian and Byzantine) or Fine Arts 3K Honours (European Art, 19th and 20th centuries) in the third year; and Fine Arts 4R Honours (Theory and Method of Art History and Criticism) or Fine Arts 4S Honours (Special Study in Art History) in the fourth year.

• By arrangement with the Department of History the prerequisite for this sublect for a student in the Fine Arts Honours School will be a suitable standard In a first

year History and Fine Arts IA.

With permission fram the department students may taka Honours Fine Arts F (Early Christian and Byzantine: Baroque Art History) at second year level Honours Fine Arts 2F.

152

Fine Arts

For some of the possible combined honours courses with Fine Arts see pp. 439ff.

111-261 FINE ARTS 2E HONOURS (MEDIEVAL AND RENAISSANCE ART HISTORY)

A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the two lectures each week in Fine Arts 2E.

SYLLABUS

A study of late Medieval and Renaissance art with special emphasis on Italy.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed preliminary reading:

Lamer J Culture and Society in Italy, 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Burke P Culture and Society In Italy, 1420-1540, Batsford 1972 Huizinga J The Waning of the Middle Ages, Pelican 1965 'Panofsky E Renaissance and Renascences in Western Art, Paladin

paperback 1970 'Wõlfflin H Classic Art, Phaldon paperback 1968

(b) Prescribed Primary Sources:

'Alberti L B On Painting, ed J R Spencer 2nd ed Yale UP paperback 1966

or Alberti L B On Painting and on Sculpture, ed C Grayson Phaidon 1972 'Holt E G A Documentary History of Art, vols. I and Il, Doubleday-

Anchor paperback 1958 'Klein R & Zerner H Italian Art 1500-1600, In Sources and Documents

In the History of Art. Prentice-Hall paperback 1966

Leonardo Treatise on Painting, tr A P McMahon, Princeton 1957 Complete Poems and Selected Letters of Michaelangelo, tr with foreword

and notes by C Gilbert, Modern Library New York 1965 Vasari G Lives of the Most Eminent Painters, Sculptors and Architects,

Everyman Library 1962

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit one essay (of approximately 4,000 words) and two or three class papers during the year.

EXAMINATION

Class work, written work and visual tests done during the year will constitute part of the examination. The percentage allotted to class and written work and the details and nature of examination papers (which will not exceed two 3-hour papers) will be available from the Fine Arts Department at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-361 FINE ARTS 3F HONOURS (EARLY CHRISTIAN AND BYZANTINE: BAROQUE ART HISTORY)

A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with a special class per week for part of the year.

153

Faculty of Arts

Students who wish to take this subject should consult with the lecturer in charge of the subject. A reading knowledge of a modern European language or of Latin is desirable.

SYLLABUS The course consists of two half-year units.

(a) A study of selected problems in Iate Antique, Early Christian and Byzantine art and archaeology in the first half of the year.

(b) A study of the art of the Baroque with special emphasis on Italy in the second half of the year.

BOOKS

Unit (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Brown P The World of Late Antiquity, Thames & Hudson 1971 Brown P Augustine of Hippo, A Biography, Faber & Faber 1969 Beckwith J The Art of Constantinople, Phaidon 1968 Beckwith J Early Christian and Byzantine Art, Pelican 1971 Krautheimer R Early Christian and Byzantine Architecture, Pelican 1965 L'Orange H P Art Forms and civic life in the late Roman Empire,

Princeton University 1965 Grabar A Christian Iconography, A Study of its Origins, New York Uni-

versity 1969 Detailed bibliographies will be issued throughout the year.

Unit (b) Recommended for preliminary reading: 'Ovid Metamorphoses, Pelican 1964 'Panofsky E Meaning in the Visual Arts, Doubleday 1955, Introduction

and Ch. 1 М lе E Religious Art, Noonday paperback 1968 'Wõlfflin H Classic Art, Phaidon paperback 1968 Shearman J Mannerism, Pelican 1967 Kitson M The Age of the Baroque, McGraw-Hill 1966 Dickens A G ' The Counter Reformation, Thames & Hudson 1968 WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit at least two essays of approximately 3.000 words and two class papers throughout the year.

EXAMINATION

Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. The percentage allotted to class and written work and the details and nature of final examination papers (which will not exceed two 3-hour papers) will be available at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-362 FINE ARTS 3K HONOURS (EUROPEAN ART HISTORY NINETEENTH AND EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURIES)

A weekly seminar of two hours throughout the year and four additional 2-hour seminars in second term. Students will also attend the two lectures each week in Fine Arts 3K.

SYLLABUS A study of European art of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries with special reference to painting and sculpture from 1848 to the present day.

154

Fine Arts

The additional seminars in second term will be given on the techniques of painting and of conservation of works of art.

BOOKS

The following Is a basic list only. Students are recommended to buy the books marked with an asterisk. Further bibliographical guides to monographs and other works of refer-ence will be issued to supplement this basic list.

(a) Prescribed preliminary reading:

Huyghe R Modern Art, London 1965 •Novotny Fritz Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1780 to 1880, Pelican

History of Art 1960 Hamilton G H Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1880 to 1940, Pelican

History of Art 1967 Arneson H H History of lodern Art, Prentice-Hall 1969 Hitchcock H R Architecture, Nineteenth end Twentieth Centuries, Peli-

can History of Art 1958

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Primary Sources

Eitner L Neoclassicism end Romanticism 1750 to 1850, Vol. Il. In Sources end Documents In the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1970

'Holt E G From the Classicists to the Impressionists, Doubleday 1966 Baudelaire C P Art in Paris, 1845 to 1862, tr ed Mayne J, Phaidon

1965 Baudelaire C P The Painter of Modern Life and Other Essays, tr ed

Mayne J, Phaidon 1965 or •Baudelaire: Selected Writings on Art and Artists, Penguin Classics 1972 •Nochlin Linda Realism and Tradition In Art 1848 to 1900. In Sources

and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1966 'Nochlin Linda Impressionism and Post-Impressionism, 1874 to 1904.

In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1967

Venturi L Les Archives de L'Impressionisme, 2 vols Paris 1939 •Chipp H B Theories of Modern Art, University of California Press 1968

Secondary Sources

Praz M The Romantic Agony, Fontana paperback 1962 Buime A The Academy and French Painting in the 19th Century, Lon-

don 1971 Clark T J The Absolute Bourgeois: Artists & Politics in France,

1848-1851, London 1973 Clark T J Image of the People: Gustave Courbet & the 1848 Revolu-

tion, London 1973 Nochlin L Realism, Penguin 1971 Gauss C E The Aesthetic Theories of French Artists 1855 to the

Present, Baltimore 1949 Rewald J The History of Impressionism, New York 1956 Rewald J Post-Impressionism from Van Gogh to Gauguin, New York

1956 Sutter J ed The Neo-Impressionists, tr Deliss C London 1971

155

Faculty of Arts

Meiss M et al eds Problems of the 19th and 20th centuries Studies in Western Art Vol. IV, Princeton 1963

Duthuit G The Fauvist Painters, New York 1950 Cooper D The Cubist Epoch, London 1971 Pevsner N Pioneers of Modern Design from William Morris to Welter

Gropius, Penguin rev ed 1960

(c) Prescribed textbooks for seminar study:

Bo rne A The Academy and French Painting in the 19th Century, Lon-don 1971

Venturi L History of Art Criticism. E P Dutton & Co 1936 Brookner A The Genius of the Future: Studies in French Art Criticism,

Phaidon 1971 Baudelaire C P Art in Paris 1845 to 1862, tr ed Mayne J, London

1965 Baudelaire C P The Painter of Modern Life and Other Essays, tr ed

Mayne J. London 1965 or Baudelaire: Selected Writings on Art and Artists, Penguin Classics 1972 Nochlin L Realism and Tradition in Art 1848 to 1900. In Sources and

Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1966 Nochlin L Impressionism and Post-Impréaslonlam, 1784 to 1904. In

Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1967

Chipp H B Theories of Modern Art: A source Book by Artists and Critics, University of California Press 1988

A bibliography will be issued for the additional seminars in second term.

Preliminary reading:

Constable W G The Painters Workshop, Oxford 1954

WRITTEN WORK

One 4,000-5,000 word essay and at least one class paper per term. Students may, at their option, complete the tutorial exercise for Fine Arts 3K. In addition a special visual exercise may be given.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

111-461 FINE ARTS 4R HONOURS (THEORY AND METHOD OF ART HISTORY AND ART CRITICISM)

SYLLABUS

A weekly seminar of two hours per week in the fourth year in the theory and method of Art History and Art Criticism.

BOOKS Bibliographical guidance will be given by the lecturer in charge

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit class papers and exercises throughout the year. Not more than one class paper will be required each term.

156

Fine Arts

EXAM [NATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work throughout the year will constitute part of the examination, and the details and nature of final examination papers will be available at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-462 FINE ARTS 4S HONOURS (SPECIAL STUDY IN ART HISTORY)

SYLLABUS

Students will be asked to choose towards the end of their third year, one of the subjects announced for Special Study in the following year. These will be drawn from Chinese Art, Early Christian and Byzantine Art, Medieval Art, Renaissance Art, Mannerism, Baroque Art, 18th and 19th century French Art and aspects of Contemporary Art, European, American and Australian. Students will work at an advanced level under the super-vision and direction of a member of staff specializing in the field. In some cases reading ability in specified foreign languages may be a condition of admission.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers (or one 3-hour paper and a viva voce examination).

Class work throughout the year will constitute part of the examination, and details and the nature of examination papers will be available from the Fine Arts Department at the beginning of the Academic Year.

MASTER OF ARTS

111-601 N. SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS

Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires either BA degree with honours, or BA ordinary degree and subsequent completion of MA preliminary work as prescribed by the Faculty of Arts. MA preliminary work in Fine Arts consists of at least two years of part-time work in honours subjects, including the completion of e thesis. The examination for the degree of Master of Arts is by thesis. Can-didates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject (which should not exceed 50,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, biblio-graphy and catalogue raisonne). They will work under the supervision of a member of the Fine Arts department, to whom they must report regularly on the progress of their work. They may also be required to attend seminars or lectures bearing on their subject. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Pro-fessorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6, in the University Calendar). The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time can-didates and within four years by part-time candidates.

157

Faculty of Arts

Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the com-mencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF FRENCH

Chairman of Department: Professor R. F. JACKSON, Chevalier de la Légion d'Honneur, B.A. (Syd.), M.A.

1. SUBJECTS OFFERED

Set out below are the subjects offered in the Department of French, with an indication of the class hours available for each subject (day hours are grouped between 9 a.m. and 4.15 p.m., evening hours are those from 5.15 p.m. on):

Subject Times of lectures, etc.

First year 116-101 French part 1

Second year Ordinary degree

116-201 French part 2 (pass) 116-202 Medieval French Language and

Literature (pass)•

Honours degree

116-261 French part 2 (hons)

116-262 Medieval French Language and Literature (huns)

Third year Ordinary degree

116-301 French part 3 (pass)

Day or Evening

Day or Evening

Day

Day (with some al-ternative evening hours available where clashes with subjects in other departments may occur)

Day

Evening, except for one lecture and one tutorial available day or evening

116-302 Medieval French Language and Literature (pass) • Day

116-303 Renaissance French Language and Literature (pass) (in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years) • • Day

116-304 Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature (pass) (in 1977 and thereafter in alternate years) • 'Day

This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the either French part 2 (pass) or French part 3 (pass). • 'This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the French part 3 (pass).

completion of,

completion of,

158

French

Honours degree

116-361 French part 3 (hofs) Day and Evening 116-364 Advanced Medieval French

Language and Literature (hofs) (in 1975 and thereafter in alternate years) Day

116-363 Renaissance French Language and Literature (huns) (in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years) Day

Fourth year

116-461 French part 4 Day 116-464 Advanced Medieval French

Language and Literature (in 1975 and thereafter in alternate years) Day

116-463 Renaissance French Language and Literature (in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years) Day

2. MAJOR AND POSSIBLE VARIATIONS

A major in French consists of:

(i) French part 1

(ii) French part 2 (pass)

(iii) French part 3 (pass)

However, students doing a major in French may extend their study of French, within the framework of the 9-subject degree course, by taking an additional French subject in second year and/or an additional French subject in third year — see pp. 158, 165ff.

3. PREREQUISITES

For admission to French part 1 students should normally have passed in French at the Higher School Certificate examination or an equivalent examination. Admission to grade 2 and 3 subjects requires a pass in French in the preceding grade.

4. WRITTEN WORK

Students who without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge fail to submit the required exercises, essays and seminar papers by the due dates may be reported to faculty for unsatisfactory progress and/or may not be given credit for the course.

5. ATTENDANCE AT LECTURES AND TUTORIALS

Regular attendance at the lectures and tutorials which comprise the course Is required.

6. BOOKS OF REFERENCE

The following books are recommended for reference throughout the course:

Dictionaries

Mansion J E ed Harrap's Standard French and English Dictionary, 2 vols, Harrap

159

Faculty of Arts

Mansion J E ed Наггвр ś New Standard French and English Dictionary, part 1, 2 vols, Harrap

Mansion J E ed Harrap's Shorter French and English Dictionary, Harrap Robert P Dictionnaire alphabétique et analogique de la langue française,

6 vols, Paris PUF Robert P Le Petit Robert, Paris Société du Nouveau Littré Littré E Dictionnaire de la langue française, Paris Hachette Grand Larousse е nc у clopédique, Paris Larousse Dictionnaire usuel, Paris Quillet-Flammarion Dubois J et al Dictionnaire du français contemporain, Paris Larousse

Grammars Ferrar H A French Reference Grammar, 2nd edition OUP 1970 Mansion J E A Grammar of Present-Day French, Harrap Heath's New Practical French Grammar, Harrap Grevisse M Le Bon Usage, Paris Ratier Chevalier J-CI ed et al Grammaire Larousse du français contemporain,

Paris Larousse Hanse Joseph Dictionnaire des difficultés grammaticales et lexicolo-

gigues, Brussels Baude Le Bidois B et R Syntaxe du français moderne, 2 vols Paris Picard Martinon P Comment on parle en français, Paris Larousse

Phonetics Dutton K Spoken French, Sydney Ian Novak All students should possess Harrap's •Shorter French and English Dic-

tionary (one-volume edition, completely revised and enlarged, 1967) and Ferrer's 'A French Reference Grammar.

Honours students will need to have Maurice Grevisse's 'Le Bon Usage.

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the honours courses are set out at the end of this section.)

116-101 FRENCH PART 1 Co-ordinator: Dr L. Las Gourgues

A course of three lectures, one tutorial class, and two language labora-tory sessions per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Aspects of nineteenth and twentieth century French literature.

(ii) Translation from and into French; composition ln French; grammar and syntax.

(iii) Conversation and dictation.

(iv) Practical oral-aural work in the language laboratory.

Section (i) of this course is designed to introduce students to modern French fiction, drama and poetry by the close literary-linguistic analysis of a small number of major works and in so doing to develop students' knowledge of French and their capacity for responsive reading. In sections (ii) - (iv) the accent is placed on the consolidation of written and oral language skills through a co-ordinated programme of lectures, tutorials and language-laboratory classes.

160

French

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 28)

Lectures and/or seminars on (a) aspects of the French language and (b) aspects of the literature syllabus.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise (translation or free composition) and an essay in English on a literary topic.

В OOKs

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Brogan D W The French Nation, Hamish Hamilton Charlton D G France. A Companion to French Studies, Methuen Roe F C Modern France. An Introduction to French Civilization, Long-

mans Cobban A A History of Modern France, Vols 1 and 2, Pelican Books Clancy P A Writing in French: from phrases to free composition, Jaca-

randa Press

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

For the nineteenth century course— Musset A de Lorenzaccio, Nouveaux Classiques Larousse

•Baudelaire Ch Les Fleurs du mal, Classiques Gamier • Maupassant G de Selected Shon Stories, ed Matthews J H, Univer-

sity of London Press

For the twentieth century course- • Мд u Г iac Fr Thér ё ae Desqueyroux, ed Jenkins C, UП ive Г sity of London

Press •Gide A L'Immoraliste, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Camus A L'Exil et le Royaume, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

The sections prescribed for translation In these books will be indicated on the departmental notice-board.

For part (ii) of the syllabus: Farrar H A Reference French Grammar, 2nd ed OUP 1970

•Carlut C & Meiden W French for Oral and Written Review, Holt Rine-hart & Winston

For part (iii) of the syllabus:

•Thornton-Smith C B Graded French Vocabulary Topics, Melbourne OUP

For part (iv) of the syllabus:

•Hagiwara M P & Politzer R L Continuons b parler: A Workbook, Wal-tham Mass Blaisdell Pub Co

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers (the first on unseen translation into English and free composition; the second on part (i) of the syllabus); terminal tests in translation into French and phonetics; and in third term a dictation test and an oral test in reading and conversation. Written work will also be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

161

F

Faculty of Arts

116-201 FRENCH PART 2 (PASS) Co-ordinator: Dr C. B. Thornton-Smith

A course of lectures and tutorials as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study In the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar Unit 2: Spoken French Unit 3: Seventeenth century theatre

Unit 4: Eighteenth century philosophes

Unit 5: Civilization of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries

(1 hour per week) (1 hour per week) (2 hours per week in the first half of the year) (2 hours per week in the second half of the year)

(1 hour per week in Terms 1 and 2)

Unit 6: One of the following:

(a) Phonetics and spoken French (1 hour per week)

(A course of integrated lectures, language laboratory sessions and seminars, designed to give instruction in the theory of French phonetics and to offer advanced practical training in fluent pronunciation. This unit. which may include work with a native French speaker, will be of special interest to future teachers.)

(b) Man, morals and society in seventeenth century literature (1 hour per week) (c) The novel before the Revolution (1 hour per week)

N.B. The Department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 14th February, 1975.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise for unit 1 and an explication (in English or French) and an essay (in English or French) on unit 3.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference (numbers refer to relevant units):

Charlton D G ed France. A Companion to French Studies, Methuen 1972 (3, 4, 5, 6(ь ), 6(c))

Lough J An Introduction to Seventeenth-Century France, Longmans (3, 5, 6( ь ))

Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background. II; Seventeenth Century, OUP 1969 (3, b, 6(b))

Roger J XVlle Siècle français, Le Grand Siècle, Seghers (3, 5, 6(b))

Lough J An Introduction to Eighteenth-Century France, Longmans (4,

5. 6(c))

162

French

Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background. Ill; Eighteenth Century, OUP 1970 (4, 6, 6( с ))

Duby G et Mandrou R Histoire de la civilisation française, tome 2, Coll 'U', Armand Colin (5)

Forestier L XVIile Siècle français, Le Siècl е des Lumières, Paris Se-ghers (4, 5, 6( с ))

Méthivier H L'Ancien Régime, Coll 'Que sais-je? PUF (5) Méthivier H Le Siècle de Louis Xlll, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5) Méthivier H Le Siècle de Louis XIV, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5) Méthivier H Le Siècle de Louis XV, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5)

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

For unit 3— Corneille P Le Cid, Bordas

•Molière Tartuffe, Bordas •Racine Phèdre, Bordas In addition, duplicated material will be provided.

For unit 4—

Crocker L G Anthologie de /e littérature française du XVllle siècle, Holt Rinehart & Winston (N.B. Sections of this book also furnish useful material for units 5 and 6(c).)

For unit 5- •Bénichou P Morales du Grand Siècl е , Paris Gallimard Students will also be given duplicated notes extracted from primary sources and from modern studies on the period. In the eighteenth century section of the course Crocker's Anthologie de la litt бга c игВ française du XVIIIe siècle (prescribed for unit 4) will provide texts for discussion.

For unit б (a)- Dutton K Spoken French, Jan Novak

•Callamand M L'Intonation expressive. Exercises systématiques de perfectionnement, Coll 'Le Français dans le Monde' BELC, Hachette-Larousse

•Malmberg Bertil La Phonétique, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF

For unit 6(b)—

•La Fontaine Fables, Classiques Gamier •La Bruyère Les Caractères, Classiques Gamier •Saint-Simon Mémoires, Bordas

For unit 6( с )—

Madame de La Fayette La Princesse de Clèves, ed Nurse H P Harrap •Prévost Histoire du chevalier des Grieux et de Maun Lescaut, Coli

'Folio' Gallimard Diderot La Religieuse, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

•Laclos Les Liaisons dangereuses, Classiques Garnier

EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first comprising an unseen, composition in French and a commentary, all on topics relating to unit 5; the second on unit 6; the third on unit 4); terminal tests in unseen translation into French; and, in third term, a dictation test and an oral test, with a further short test for students taking unit 6(a). Work in unit 3 will be examined by the mid-year essay and explication (see WRITTEN WORK above),

163

Faculty of Arts

supplemented by such oral and written tests as may be considered feces-sary. The weekly language exercises will also be taken into account in determining examination results.

For second year PASS course in Medieval French Language and Literature (116-202), see p. 169

116-301 FRENCH PART 3 (PASS) Co-ordinator: Dr G. D. Watson

A course of lectures and tutorials as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Nineteenth century fiction (1 hour per week) Unit 4: Twentieth century fiction and drama (1 hour per week) Unit 5: Civilisation of the nineteenth and

twentieth centuries (1 hour per week) Unit 6: One of the following:

(a) French poetry from Hugo to Apollinaire (1 hour per week) (b) Some twentieth century essays (1 hour per week) (c) Aspects of contemporary French (1 hour per week)

N.B. The Department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 14 February.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise and, in addition, an explication in English or French and an essay in French on unit 4.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference (numbers refer to relevant units):

Charlton D G ed France: A Companion to French Studies, Methuen 1972 (3, 4, 5, 6(a), 6(b))

Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background, vols 4 & 5, OUP 1969 (3, 5, 6(a))

Robichez J Panorama illustré du Х I Хе siècle français, Seghers (3, 5, 6(a))

Cobban A A History of Modern France, vol 2, Penguin Books 1961 (5) Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background, vol 6, OUP

1970 (4, 5, 6(a), 6(b)) Brogan D W The French Nation, Hamish Hamilton (5)

Thoraval J Les Grandes étapes de la civilisation française, Bordas (5)

Ardagh J The New France—De Gaulle and after, Pelican Books (5)

Sauvageot A Français écrit, Français parlé, Larousse 1962 (6(c))

Sauvageot A Portrait du vocabulaire français, Larousse 1964 (6(c))

164

French

Sauvageot A Analyse du français parlé, Hachette 1972 (6( с )) Dubois et ai Dictionnaire du français contemporain, Larousse (6(c)) von Wartburg W Précis de syntaxe du français contemporain, Berne

eds A Francke S.A. 1958 (6(c)) Vinay J P et Darbelnet J Stylistique comparée du français et de

l'anglais, Didier (6(c)) (b) Prescribed textbooks:

For unit 3— •Balzac H de La Cousine Bette, Classiques Garnier •Stendhal La Chartreuse de Parme, Garnier-Flammarion •Flaubert G Madame Bovary, Classiques Garnier 'Zola E Germinal, Garnier-Flammarion

For unit 4— `Malraux A La Condition humaine, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Vian B L'Ecume des jours, '10/18', Union Générale d'Editions `Beckett Ohl les beaux jours, Editions de Minuit • Ionesco Tueur sans gages, Univ of London Press

For unit 5— Duplicated notes and a reading-list will be provided.

For unit 6(a)— •Hugo V Choix de poèmes, Manchester UP •Nerval G de Les Chiméres, ed Busier N, Athlone Press •Verlaine P Selected Poems, OUP Apollinaire G Alcools, Nouveaux Classiques Larousse

For unit 6(b)— Bergson H Le Rire, PUF

•Artaud A Le Théåtre et son double, Coll 'Idées' Gallimard 'Barthes R Mythologies, Coll 'Points' Editions du Seuil •Sa г tге J-P Qu'est-ce que la littérature? Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

For unit 6(c)—Duplicated material will be provided.

EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first comprising an unseen, composition in French and a commentary, all on topics relating to unit 5; the second on unit 6; the third on unit 3); terminal tests In unseen translation into French; and, In third term, a dictation test and an oral test (reading and conversation on general topics). Work in unit 4 will be examined by the mid-year essay and explication (see WRITTEN WORK above) and a written test. The weekly language exercises will also be taken into account in determining examination results.

For third year PASS courses in Medieval French Language and Literature (116-302), Renaissance French Language and Literature (116-303), and Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature (116-304), see pp. 169,

171, 174 respectively.

HONOURS DEGREE F. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of French Language and Literature comprises the following subjects: French part 1, French part 2 (hoes), French part 3 (hoes), French part 4, and Medieval French Language and Literature, Renaissance French Lan-

165

Faculty of Arts

guage and Literature, Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, and four additional subjects in accordance with the details set out below and as set out for the ordinary degree. Students' attention is drawn to the fact that certain Philosophy and History subjects provide particularly suitable supporting studies for the French honours course. 2. In their first year students will take four subjects in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree. Admission to the honours school of French in the second year must be approved by the faculty through the sub-dean and is conditional upon satisfactory performance in French in the first year. The chairman of the department will recommend such admission for candidates who have gained at least second-class honours in French part 1. Other candidates who wish to enter the honours school must apply, through the sub-dean, for permission from the chairman of the department. For the philological sections of the honours course it is desirable that students have or acquire a working knowledge of Latin, but prior study of Latin is not a prerequisite for admission to the honours school. 3. In their second year, candidates will take French part 2 (hoes), Medieval French Language and Literature, and a grade 2 subject in a discipline other than French. In order to proceed to the third year, they will require to be 'recommended to proceed' at the end of the second year. 4. In their third year, candidates will take French part 3 (hoes). and either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, according to the year in which the lec-tures in these subjects are delivered. In their fourth year, candidates will take French part 4, and either Renaissance French Language and Litera-ture or Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, whichever subject is given in that year. The third and fourth years have been planned as a continuous course of study, but candidates will sit for a preliminary final examination, both written and oral, at the end of the third year. Students should utilize the long vacation at the end of the third year to cover a major part of their fourth year reading, including their reading for the thesis, the subject of which should have been defined in at least a preliminary way in consultation with members of the academic staff of the department of French by the end of third term. 5. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 in the third year and part II in the fourth year, and will comprise the following: (a) M the third year:

A. Formal examination papers:

( 1 ) A 3-hour paper on unit 7 (first paper of French part 3 honours). (2) A 3-hour paper on unit 6 (second paper of French part 3 honours). (3) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French literature or Advanced

Medieval French literature. (4) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French language and texts or studies

in linguistics.

В . Tests, essays, seminar papers, etc.:

(1) Terminal tests in unseen translation from English into French. (2) Test in unseen translation from French into English.

(3) Test on unit 5.

166

French

(4) Oral test.

(5) Mid-year essay and explication on unit 3.

(6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminar discussions, as bases for assessment of unit 4.

(7) An oral test on both parts of the Renaissance syllabus or the Advanced Medieval syllabus.

(b) In the fourth year:

A. Formal examination papers:

(1) A 3-hour paper on 20th century fiction (first paper of French part 4).

(2) A 3-hour paper on 20th century drama (second paper of French part 4).

(3) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French literature or Advanced Medie-val French literature.

(4) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French language and texts or studies in linguistics.

В . Tests, essays, seminar papers, etc.:

(1) Terminal tests in unseen translation from English into French.

(2) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on unit 5.

(3) Oral test on unit 4.

(4) An oral test on both parts of the Renaissance syllabus or the Advanced Medieval syllabus.

C. A thesis in French of approximately 10,000 words on an approved topic (not necessarily 20th century), to be prepared under the guidance of a supervisor and submitted early in third term.

FRENCH IN COMBINED COURSES

For candidates taking French in a combined honours course the required French subjects are normally French part 1, French part 2 (hons), French part 3 (hofs) and French part 4. However, students who have attained an adequate standard in French part 1 may, on the recommendation of the chairman of department, be allowed to replace the three honours subjects by Medieval French Language and Literature, Renaissance French Language and Literature, and Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature. Even for students taking the normal sequence of honours subjects Medieval French Language and Literature may be a suitable additional subject to take in second year. Those interested in including it should seek the advice and approval of the departments concerned. In the fourth year of the course (see pp. 439ff.) honours students who have chosen the normal sequence of French honours subjects in com-bination with honours courses in certain other foreign languages or in English may be permitted to specialize in French. in which case they will take, in addition to French 4, either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, according to the year in which the lectures In these subjects are given. Where students combining French with another honours course have to submit two theses in their fourth year, a thesis of 5,000-6,000 words only is required by the department of French.

167

Faculty of Arts

116-261 FRENCH PART 2 (HONS) Co-ordinator: Dr C. B. THORNTON-SMITH

A course of lectures and tutorials as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the Ian-guage laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Seventeenth century theatre (2 hours per week in

the first half of the year)

Unit 4: Eighteenth century philosophes ( 2 hours per week In the second half of

Unit 5: Civilization of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries

Unit 6: One of the following:

(a) Phonetics and spoken French

the year) (1 hour per week in Terms 1 and 2)

(1 hour per week)

(A course of integrated lectures, language laboratory sessions and seminars, designed to give instruction in the theory of French phonetics and to offer advanced practical training in fluent pronunciation. This unit, which may include work with a native French speaker, will be of special interest to future teachers.)

(b) Man, morals and society In seventeenth century literature (1 hour per week) (c) The novel before the Revolution (1 hour per week)

Unit 7: either

(a) Religion and literature in the seventeenth century — for honours students taking Medieval French Language and Literature; (1 hour per week) or (b) An introduction to Old French with some study of Old French texts — for honours students in combined courses who have not chosen to take Medieval French Language and Literature.

Units 1 to 6 will be as for French 2 Pass, except that special honours classes will be held for units 1 and 2, and that for units 3 and 4 study and written work at honours level will be expected. Unit 7 is the addi-tional honours unit.

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 14 February, 1975.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise, an explica-

tion (in English or French) and an essay (in French) on unit 3.

168

French

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: As for French Part 2 (ordinary degree) and, in addition, the following:

For unit 7( а )— Adam A Les Libertins du XVIIe siècle, Buchot Chastel 1964 В énichou P Morales du Grand Siècle, Gallimard Busson H Le Religion des classiques 1660-1685, PUF Cognet L Le Jansénisme, PUF Cognat L Crépuscule des mystiques: le conflit Fénelon-Bossuet, Des-

clé& de Brouwer Preclin E & Jarry E Les luttes politiques et doctrinales aux XVIIe et

XVllle siècles, Bloud et Gay For unit 7(b)- Decahors E Histoire de la littérature française. Tome I: Le Moyen Age,

Paris Les Editions de l'Ecoie (b) Prescribed textbooks: As for French Part I1 (ordinary degree) and, in addition, the following: For unit 7( а )- •Lagarde A et Michard M XVIIe siècle, Bordas •Pascal Pensées, Classiques Delmas 1960 'Pascal Provinciales, Classiques Garnier •Corneille Polyeucte, Bordas •Molière Tartuffe, Bordas •Racine Athalie, Bordas Montherlant Port-Royal, Coli 'Livre de Poche' or 'Folio'

For unit 7(b)— Fox J & Wood R A Concise History of the French Language, Black-

well •Ferran A et Decahors E Morceaux choisis de la littérature française,

Tome I: Le Moyen Age, Les Editions de l'Ecole

EXAMINATION

Three 3-hour papers (the first on unit 7; the second on unit 6; the third on unit 4); terminal tests in unseen translation into French; ln second term a test ln unseen translation from French; and, in third term, a written test on unit 5 and an oral test (reading and conversation on general topics), with a further short test for students taking unit 6(a). Work in unit 3 will be examined by the mid-year explication and essay (see WRITTEN WORK above), supplemented by such oral and written tests as may be considered necessary. The weekly written work will also be taken Into account in the determining of examination results.

116-262 MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS) Pass students in this course should use as code number either 116-202 (second year) or 116-302 (third year) Co-ordinator: Dr S. J. Scott

A course of four lectures per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS (i) Studies in the Old French Literature with special reference to the

epic cycles and the lyrical poetry. Studies in the wider cultural

169

Faculty of Arts

background of the literature. The topic to be studied in the back-ground course, which will vary from year to year, will usually be chosen from the following: Folk-lore in medieval literature, Alle-gory and symbolism in medieval literature, History of Paris (ancient and medieval), Ideas and institutions in the Middle Ages, etc.

(ii) Outline history of the French language with a study of Old French texts.

WRITTEN WORK Candidates will be required to submit two essays in English or French during the year.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference:

Dauzat A Le Génie de la langue française, Payot Voretzsch K Introduction to the Study of Old French Literature,

Sticheг Southern R The Making of the Middle Ages, Arrow Books or Hutchin-

son Ross J B & McLaughlin N M ads The Portable Medieval Reader, Vik-

ing Press

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Bourdillon ed Aucassin et Nicolette, Manchester UP •Ferran A et Decahors E Morceaux choisis de la littérature française,

Tome I: Le Moyen Age, Paris Les Editions de l'Ecole •Paris G et Langlois E Chrestomathie du moyen age, Hachette

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers (the first on part (i) of the syllabus, the other on part (ii)); in third term, an oral test on both parts of the course.

116-361 FRENCH PART 3 (HONS) Co-ordinator: Dr G. D. Watson

A course of lectures, tutorials and seminars as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Nineteenth century fiction (1 hour per week) Unit 4: Twentieth century fiction and drama (1 hour per week) Unit 5: Civilization of the nineteenth and

twentieth centuries (1 hour per week) Unit 6: One of the following:

(a) French poetry from Hugo to Apollinaire (1 hour per week) (b) Some twentieth century essays (1 hour per week) (c) Aspects of contemporary French (1 hour per week)

Unit 7: Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry (1 hour per week)

170

French

Units 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 will be as for French part 2 (pass), except that special honours classes will be held for units 1 and 2. For unit 4 a special honours seminar will be held and a special and more extensive reading list will be prescribed. Unit 7 is the additional honours unit.

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 14 February, 1975.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise and, in addition, two essays in French and an explication in English or French on unit З . BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: As for French part 3 (ordinary degree) and, in addition, the following: For unit 7— Bonnefoy Y Rimbaud par lui-même, Coll 'Ecrivains de toujours' Edi-

tions du Seuil Chadwick C Symbolism, 'The Critical Idiom', Methuen Michaud G Mallarmé, l'homme et /'oeuvre, Ratier-Boivin Scarfs F The Art of Paul Valéry, Heinemann (b) Prescribed textbooks:

As for French part 3 (ordinary degree), except that for the unit 4 semi-nar a special reading-list will be posted up at the beginning of the year and that the following books are prescribed for the special honours unit 7: •Rimbaud A Oeuvres, Classiques Garnier •Mallarmé S Poésies, Coll 'Poésies' Gallimard •Valéry P Charmes, Classiques Larousse

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers (the first on unit 7; the second on unit 6); terminal tests in unseen translation into French; in second term a test in unseen translation from French; and, in third term, a written test on unit 5 and an oral test (reading and conversation on general topics). Work in unit 3 will be examined by the mid-year essays and explication (see WRIT-TEN WORK above). Work in unit 4 will be assessed on the basis of seminar papers and participation in seminar discussions. The weekly written work will also be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

116-363 RENAISSANCE FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS) Code number 116-303 should be used by third year PASS students in this course; 116-463 by fourth year Honours students Co-ordinator: Dr S. J. SCOTT

A course of three or more lectures per week throughout the year. Lec-tures will be given in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years.

SYLLABUS (1) Studies in 16th-century French literature with special reference to

Rabelais, Scève, du Bellay, Ronsard and Montaigne. Studies in

171

Faculty of Arts

the wider cultural background of the literature. The topic to be studied in the background course, which will vary from year to year, will usually be chosen from the following: Folk-lore in medi-eval literature, allegory and symbolism in medieval literature, his-tory of Paris (ancient and medieval), ideas and Institutions in the Middle Ages, etc.

(ii) A general study of the development of the French language in the 16th century, with special emphasis on semantic problems.

WRITTEN WORK

Candidates will be required to submit two essays in English or French during the year.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Hay D ed The Age of the Renaissance, Thames & Hudson 1967 Stone D France in the Sixteenth Century, Prentice-Hall 1969 Burke P ed The Renaissance, Longmans 1964 (b) Prescribed textbooks: •Rabelais F Pages choisies, Colin (Copies will be provided by the de-

partment) •Montaigne M Selected Essays, eds Tilley and Boase, Manchester UP •Ronsard P de Poèmes, Blackwell's French Texts EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on part (i) of the syllabus and the other on part (ii); in third term, an oral test on both parts of the course.

For third year honours course in Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature (116-364), see p. 174

116-461 FRENCH PART 4 Co-ordinator: Professor R. F. Jackson

A course of lectures, tutorials and seminars as detailed below. SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Advanced prose and unseen (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Bibliography and research method (1 hour per week

in Term 1) Unit 4: Twentieth century fiction and drama (2 hours per week) Unit 5: One of the following:

( а ) Surréalisme and after (1 hour per week) (b) French literary criticism since

Bachelard (1 hour per week) (c) Autobiography, memoirs, journal

intime (1 hour per week) •(d) The stylistics of French (1 hour per week)

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 5(a), 5(b), 5(c) and 5(d) above. Students must submit their choice af units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 14 February, 1975.

This option will not be available in 1975.

172

French

PRELIMINARY WORK

Students are required to read at least the set texts of Proust (see below) during the long vacation preceding their final-honours year. They will present for a viva voce examination on these books during Orientation Week.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise for unit 1.

THESIS

Each candidate is required to prepare under the guidance of a super-visor and submit early In third term a thesis in French on an approved topic of his choice (not necessarily a 20th century topic).

BOOKS

For unit 1- •Vinay J P et Darbelnet J Stylistique c о m р a г é е du français et de

l'anglais, Didier • Vinay J P et Darbelnet J Cahier d'exercices no 1 Work Book, Lib-

rairie Beauchemin, Montréal

For unit 4— •Proust M Du CBté de chez Swann, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

Sodome et Gomorrhe, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Le Temps retrouvé, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

• Gide A L'immoraliste, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Porte étroite, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Les Caves du Vatican, Coll 'Folio Gallimard Les Faux-monnayeurs, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

• Bernanos G Sous le soleil de Satan, Coll 'Livre de Poche' Journal d'un curé de campagne, Coll 'Livre de Poche'

• Camus A L'Etranger, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Peste, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Chute, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

• Claudel P Partage de midi, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Le Soulier de satin, Coil 'Folio' Gallimard

• Montherlant H La Reine morte, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Ville dont le prince est un enfant, Coll 'Livre de Poche'

•Sartre J-P Huis clos suivi de Les Mouches, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Les Mains sales, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Les Séquestrés d'Altona, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

•Genet J Les Bonnes, Editions de l'Arbalète Les Nègres, Editions de l'Arbalète

For unit 5( а )—

• Breton A Manifestes du surréalisme, Coll 'Idées' Gallimard •Aragon L Le Paysan de Paris, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard • Eluard P Choix de poémes, Gallimard •Char R Fureur et m у stére, Coll 'Poésie' Gallimard • Prévert J Paroles, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard

For unit 5(b)—

• Bachelard G L'Eau et les réves, Corti •Richard J P Stendhal et Flaubert, Coll 'Points' Editions du Seuil

173

Faculty of Arts

•Goldmann L Pour une sociologie du roman, Coll 'Idées Gallimard

•Todorov T Littérature et signification, Coll 'Langue et langage' Larousse

• Genette G Figures 1, 11, 111, Editions du Seuil (Chapters from Genette will be provided by the Department.)

For unit 5(c)— , • Rousseau J J Les Confessions tomes 1 et 2, Coll 'Livre de Poche' •Constant B Adolphe, Garnier-Flammarion •Delacroix H Journal, '10/18' Union Generale d'Editions Mauriac F Mémoires intérieurs, Coll 'Livre de Poche'

•Beauvoir S de Mémoires d'une jeune fi lle rangée, Coll 'Folio' Gal-limard

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers on unit 4, the first on the novel and the second on the drama; the thesis (mentioned above); an oral examination of one half-hour on the year's work in unit 4; terminal tests in advanced unseen translation into French. The work in unit 5 will be assessed during the year, for instance, by terminal tests.

116-364t/116-4641 ADVANCED MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONs) In 1977 this subject will be available for third year PASS students, who will use code number 116-304

Co-ordinator: Dr S. J. sCOTT

A course of three or more lectures per week throughout the year. Lectures will be given in 1975 and thereafter in alternate years. After 1975 the course will be revised.

SYLLABUS

(i) Studies in Old French Literature. Evolution of the Arthurian and Grail legends. The chief Celtic and British-Latin sources. Special study of the work of Chrétien de Troyes. There will also be a study of the wider cultural background of the literature. The subject of the background course, which will vary from year to year, will usually be chosen from the following: Folk-lore in medieval litera-ture, allegory and symbolism in medieval literature, history of Paris (ancient and medieval), ideas and institutions in the Middle Ages, etc.

(ii) Advanced studies in the Old French language.

WRITTEN WORK Candidates will be required to submit two essays in English or French during the year.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference:

Loomis R S and others Arthurian Literature in the Middle Ages, OUP

t Fourth Year honours students.

174

French

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

'Chrétien de Troyes Le Conte du graal (Percevai ). Classiques français du moyen Age

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers, one on part (i) of the syllabus and the other on part

(ii); in third term, an oral test on both parts of the work.

116-801 POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES

A course of four lectures/seminars/tutorials per week throughout the year. Classes are held in the evening, on two days each week. The prerequisite for admission to the diploma course is a pass B.A. degree with major in French or the equivalent. The course is intended for graduates who do not wish to proceed to a research degree but desire to extend and deepen their knowledge of contemporary French language, literature and civilization. Some provision is also made for those who want to make a study of medieval French. The course normally involves two years of part-time study, but in special cases adequately qualified graduates may be allowed to complete it in one year of full-time study.

116-811 POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES 1 (First Year)

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Contemporary French (a descriptive study — phonological, morphological, syntactical, lexical — of the present-day Ian-guage, with reading and analysis of articles from Le Monde and other exercises. The course will introduce some basic notions of modern linguistic description — one hour per week for three terms).

Unit 2: Spoken French (discussions on topics related to units 3 and 5 below, conducted in French by a native speaker — one tutorial per week throughout second and third term).

Unit 3: French Literature since 1945 (a course of lecture/seminars — one hour per week for three terms).

Unit 4: History and Criticism of the French Film since 1945 (a course of lecture/seminars — a double period per week, in first term only, with some lengthier sessions to be arranged). Introductory historical survey — the first fifty years: the begin-ning of the two traditions, with Lumière and MBliès; the attempts at the Film d'Art; the achievements of Delluc, Gance, Clair, Vigo and Feyder in the twenties; of Renoir and Carné in the thirties. The period since 1945 will be examined through the work of Truffaut, Godard, Chabrol, Resnais and Malle, through the critical debates generated by the Cahiers du cinéma school and through the influence and achievements of the New Wave. Students will view representative films and study their dia-logue in spoken and written form.

175

Faculty of Arts

Unit 5: Twentieth Century France (a course of lecture/seminars—one hour per week during second and third term, conducted in French). Students who desire further background may attend the parallel lectures given (in English) for History 2K. The course will be an historical study of the nature of French society from the Dreyfus Affair to May 1968. Both literary and historical sources will be used.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference (numbers refer

to relevant units): Sauvageot A Français écrit. Français parlé, Larousse (1) Sauvageot A Portrait du vocabulaire français, Larousse (1) Sauvageot A Analyse du français раг lé, Hachette (1) Dubois J et a1 Dictionnaire du français contemporain, Larousse (1) von Wartburg W Précis de syntaxe du français contemporain, Berne

eds A Francke SA (1) Vinay J P et Darbelnet J Stylistique comparée du français et de l'anglais,

Paris Didier (1) Aitchison, Jean General Linguistics, EUP 'Teach Yourself Books', Lon-

don 1972 (1) Bersani J et al La littérature en France depuis 1945, Bordas (3) Sadoul G Le Cinéma français, Flammarion (4) Armes R French Cinema since 1946, vols I and II, Zwemmer 1966 (4) Bazin A Qu'est-ce que le cinéma?, vols 1 and I1 University of California

Press (4) Perkins V F Film as Film, Pelican 1972 (4) Graham P ed The New Wave, Sacker and Warburg 1969 (4) Derfler L The Third French Republic, 1870-1940, Anvil pb Van Nos-

trend Reinhold (5, second term) Ardagh J The New France, Pelican (5, third term) (b) Prescribed textbooks (students will need to have personal copies

of the texts asterisked): For unit 3— Mauriac F Un Adolescent d'autrefois, Flammarion

•Butor M La Modification, Editions de Minuit •Perec G Les Choses, J'ai lu •Beckett S Ohl les beaux jours, Editions de Minuit • Ionesco E Macbett, Coll 'Le Manteau d'Arlequin' Gallimard •Genet J Les Bonnes, Editions de l'Arbalète •Eluard P Choix de poèmes, Gallimard •Barthes R Mythologies, Coll 'Points' Editions du Seuil For unit 5—

Zola E La Vérité en marche, Garnier-Flammarion Kedward H R The Dreyfus Affair: Catalyst for Tensions in French

Society, Longmans •Barbusse H Le Feu, J'ai lu Ferro M La Grande Guerre, 1914-1918, Gallimard

Martin du Gard R Les Thibault, 2 vols 'Pléiade' Gallimard or 5 vols Coli 'Livre de Poche'

Guérin D Front populaire, révolution manquée: témoignage, Maspéro Lefranc G Juin 36, l'explosion sociale du Front populaire, Julliard

•Weil S La Condition ouvrière, Gallimard

176

French

Paxton R 0 Vichy France, Old Guard and New Order, Barrie & Jenkins Maier C S & White D S eds The Thirteenth of May: the Advent of

De Gaulle's Republic, Oxford Williams P & Harrison M Politics and Society in De Gaulle's Republic,

Anchor paperback 'Schnapp A & Vidal-Naquet P Journal de la Commune étudiante, Seuil Singer D Prelude to Revolution: France in May 1968, HiII & Wang

Toura ine A Le Mouvement de mai ou le communisme utopique, Edi-tions du Seuil

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers (the first on unit 1, the second on unit 3); for unit 2, a viva voce test of a half-hour's duration on the full scope of the course; for unit 4, a 5,000-word essay to be handed in at the end of second term; for unit 5, seminar papers and participation in the seminars (if this work has not proved satisfactory, it will be followed by one 3-hour paper at the end of the year).

116-821 POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES 2

In the second year students will take two of the special subjects listed below (or two subjects suggested by themselves and approved by the Department) and explore them under the direction of a supervisor, in the first and second halves of the academic year respectively. Short papers will be submitted regularly for correction and discussion, and an essay of 5.000 words on each special subject will be handed in in September and November. A short course on bibliography will be given at the beginning of the year. Seminars on the special subjects chosen will also be held from time to time where the number of students who have chosen a given topic warrants it. Requirements for the second year are flexible so that if a candidate wishes to spend the year in France, for instance, as an "assistant" or on a French Government scholarship, he may be allowed to do so, on condition that adequate written assignments and the major essays are sent to the supervisor in Melbourne. This flexibility is also such as to permit the inclusion of any interdisciplinary courses provided by the Faculty and approved by the Department as relevant and of suitable standard.

Special Subjects:

Contemporary French music Painting and sculpture in contemporary France Existentialism and French literature Aspects of French thought since 1945 French literary criticism since Bachelard Surréalisme and after The "nouveau roman" Modern French drama Phonetics and present-day spoken French Old French Historical phonology

N.B. The Department reserves the right not to offer all of the special subjects listed. Students must submit their choice of special subjects for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 14th February.

177

Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION

Assessment will be based on the prescribed written work and, where necessary, viva voce examinations, but account will also be taken of papers submitted and of any other relevant work done.

MASTER OF ARTS

116-601 F. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Prospective candidates, who should normally possess a satisfactory Honours degree (or equivalent) in French, must, after consulting the de-partment of French, lodge an application on the prescribed form at the Arts faculty office, seeking permission to enrol. If permission is granted, candidates must enrol at the Students' Records Office and subsequently re-enrol for each remaining year of their approved course. Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in French of about 50,000 words on an approved subject, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised as to a suitable course of reading, and may be required to attend relevant lectures or seminars. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be lodged with the Registrar when the thesis is submitted. Three bound copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library, and one in the French seminar library collection. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations on the presentation of theses and other matters set out in the department's Guide for MA Candidates in French. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and/or oral examination on the subject of their research or on other sub-jects approved by the chairman of the department. Prospective candidates who do not possess a satisfactory Honours degree in French (or equivalent) will be required to complete an MA Preliminary course before being permitted to enter upon the MA. This course nor-mally requires two years of part-time study, but exceptionally may be completed in one year's full-time study. The first (part-time) year of the course covers approximately the same ground as units (i) and (iv) of French Part 4 (see above, p. 172); the second (part-time) year of the course involves a programme of study at Final-Honours level adapted in each individual case to meet the eventual background requirements of the chosen MA thesis topic. Enrolment procedure for the MA Preliminary course is similar to that prescribed for enrolment in the MA course. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the com-mencement of his candidature.

178

Geography

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY Chairman of Department: To be appointed.

ORDINARY DEGREE

The major in Geography for the ordinary degree consists of Geography 1, 2 and 3. Geography 1 is designed as an introductory course indicating the breadth of geographic interests while focusing mainly on broad questions of man's use of the earth and the various physical and human influences affecting patterns of land use. In Geography 2 and 3 the courses offer a wide range of studies in the various specialist fields of geography and while a choice of specialisms is offered in some terms to permit students to bias their course to their own field of interest, the course aims to provide a grounding In the whole field of geography. (Details of the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Admission to the examinations in geography is conditional upon satis-factory performance of the prescribed written, practical, and field work which will be taken into consideration In the determination of examina-tion results. Students in Geography parts 1, 2 and 3 should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

121-101 GEOGRAPHY PART 1

A course of two lectures, one tutorial class and three hours' practical work per week throughout the year, with three days' field work.

SYLLABUS

World patterns in physical geography and human activities. The physical basis of resources. The concepts of development and under-development. The relations between population, resources and development and the different processes of development in the major geographical areas in the modern period. The practical work will Consist largely of the study of maps and map techniques as instruments in geographic investigation. Students In Geography part 1 should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion charges.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Broek Jan 0 M & Webb John W A Geography of Mankind, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1973

Twidale C R Geomorphology, Nelson's Australasian Paperbacks For reference: Strahler A N Introduction to Physical Geography, 2nd ed Wiley

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Occasional tests may be given in practical classes. One practical examination (approx. 2 hours) about the end of each term. Reports on field work, practical work, and the results of tests and practical examinations will be used in assessing students' examination results.

179

Faculty of Arts

121-201 GEOGRAPHY PART 2 (PASS)

Students in Geography Part 2 should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

Four of the following courses are to be taken:

First Term: Terrain Analysis.

Second Term: In the first five weeks Historical Geography A or Population Geography In the second five weeks Historical Geography B or Quantitative Methods.

Third Term: Location Theory or Political Geography

Students may take Historical Geography B without having taken His-torical Geography A. The choice of course is subject to the approval of the chairman of the department and students should consult him before making their choice.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers. Assessment of field work, practical work and essays will be used In assessing students examination results.

First Term

TERRAIN ANALYSIS. A course of two lectures and three hours' practical work per week throughout the term; four days' field work.

SYLLABUS

Methods of classifying and mapping landforms, soils and vegetation. Land systems. Land research methods used in Australia and elsewhere. Land evaluation.

BOOKS For reference: lsachenco A G Principles of Landscape Science and Physical-Geo-

graphic Regionalization, ed J S Massey MUP 1973 Reading lists will be given in class.

Second Term (First isve weeks)

HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY A. A course of two lectures and one 1-hour tutorial per week during the first five weeks of second term. One essay (about 2,000 words).

SYLLABUS

The nature and problems of historical geography. A series of case studies of particular regions and countries exhibiting the changing interaction of geographical and historical circumstances on the distribution and organization of settlement, agriculture and industry. The lectures will deal with European, North American, and southern African topics and the tutorials with Australian ones.

180

Geography

BOOKS

Recommended reading:

Mitchell J B Historical Geography, revised ed 1968 EUP Hoskins W G The Making of the English Landscape, Pelican 1970 Smith C T An Historical Geography of Western Europe before 1800,

Longman 1967 Further references will be given in class. OR

POPULATION GEOGRAPHY. A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week for the first five weeks of term. A practical exercise will be done by each student.

SYLLABUS

Study of population distribution and dynamics and relationships with economic growth.

BOOKS

Recommended for preliminary reading: Wrong D Population and Society, Random House Peterson W Population, Macmillan Demko G J Rose H M& Schnell G A Population Geography: A Reader,

McGraw-Hill Other readings will be given in class.

Second Term (second five weeks)

HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY B. A course of two lectures and one 1-hour tutorial per week during the second five weeks of second term. One essay (about 2,000 words).

SYLLABUS

Further case studies as for Historical Geography A. Both the lectures and tutorials will deal with Australian topics.

BOOKS

Recommended reading:

Perry T M Australia's First Frontier, MUP 1966 Jeans D N An Historical Geography of New South Wales to 1901,

Reed 1972 Powell J M The Public Lands of Australia Felix, OUP 1970 Peel L Rural Industry in the Port Phillip Region 1835-1880, MUP 1974 OR

QUANTITATIVE METHODS. A course of two lectures and one 3-hour practical class per week during the second five weeks of second term.

SYLLABUS

A survey of the changing place of mathematical methods in geography. The practical exercises will deal with methods used In recent geographi-cal publications.

BOOKS

Reading lists will be given in class.

181

Faculty of Arts

Third Term

LOCATION THEORY. A course of three lectures and either one 1-hour tutorial or one 3-hour practical per week throughout the term; one essay (2,500 words).

SYLLABUS

Physical and other factors influencing the distribution of economic activi-ties. The common patterns of associations of economic activities. Loca-tion theory, particularly relating to primary and secondary industry. Space relations and their quantitative analysis. Regional complexes of activi-ties and inter-regional linkages.

BOOKS

Lloyd P E & Dicken P Location in Space: a theoretical approach to economic geography, Harper & Row, New York 1972

OR

POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY. A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the term.

SYLLABUS

The scope and methods of political geography. Frontiers and boundaries, including maritime boundaries and the international division of the continental shelf. Electoral geography. Geography and national policies. BOOKS

Prescott J R V Political Geography, Methuen 1972

121-301 GEOGRAPHY PART 3 (PASS)

Students in Geography part 3 should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers. Assessment of field work, practical work and essays will be used in assessing students' examination results.

One of the following courses to be taken each term.

First Term

THE COASTAL ENVIRONMENT. A course of three lectures and three hours' practical work per week throughout the term; the practical work may be in the form of field trips. Four days' additional field work will be required.

SYLLABUS

Coastal features and the physiographic and ecological processes at work on them. The utilization and management of coastal environments with particular reference to recreation and conservation. Coastal processes and the evolution of coastal Iandforms.

BOOKS

Bird E C F Coasts, ANU Press

182

Geography

OR

GEOGRAPHY AND DEVELOPMENT: MALAYSIA AND INDONESIA. A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the term; one essay.

SYLLABUS

The processes of economic growth and underdevelopment and the evolution of regional inequalities in resource use and welfare; inter-national and national space economies; planning for national and regional change. Malaysia and Indonesia treated as special but not exclusive examples.

BOOKS

Recommended for preliminary reading: Frank A G Latin America: Underdevelopment or Revolution?, Monthly

Review Press 1970 Friedman J Regional Development Policy: a case study of Venezuela,

MIT Press 1966 Johnson E A The Organisation of Space in Developing Countries, Har-

vard UP 1970 Missen G J Viewpoint on Indonesia: a geographical study, NAP 1972 Additional readings will be given in class.

Second Term

ECONOMIC AND URBAN GEOGRAPHY. A course of three lectures and three hours' practical work or one 1-hour tutorial per week through-out the term. Four days' field work.

SYLLABUS

Factors influencing the distribution of economic activities. Patterns of associations of economic activities. Regional complexes. The process of urbanization and the economic role of cities and theories of the location of economic activities within cities. Metropolitan expansion and attendant problems.

BOOKS

Lloyd P E & Dicken P Location in Space: a theoretical approach to economic geography, Harper & Row, New York 1972

Johnson J H Urban Geography — an introductory analysis, Pergamon Rose A J Patterns of Cities, Nelson Rugg D S Spatial Foundations of Urbanism, Wm C Brown Company

Publishers Additional reading lists will be given in class.

Third Term

APPLIED GEOGRAPHY. A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the term; one essay (2,500 words).

SYLLABUS

The application of a geographical training to the solution of practical problems, notably in the fields of resource evaluation, land use planning, environmental management and conservation. Emphasis will be given to case histories of such problem-solving by geographers, both indi-vidually and as members of multidisciplinary teams.

183

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

Reading lists will be given in class.

HONOURS DEGREE

P. SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY

(For possible combinations with this school see pp. 439 ff.)

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Geography comprises the following subjects:

First year: Geography 1 (as for the ordinary degree) and three other first-year subjects selected from the subjects of the degree of Bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree), preferably including at least one of the first year subjects in Mathematics, Statistics, History, Economics, Govern-ment or Geology. Candidates for admission to the honours school at the beginning of their second year will be selected on their performance in the annual examination in Geography 1, on the quality of their practical and written work in Geography 1, and on their examination results in their other first-year subjects. Students who have failed a first-year subject will not normally be admitted to the honours school.

Second year: Geography 2 (as for the ordinary degree), Geography 2A (honours), and one other subject being the second part of a major.

Third year: Geography 3 (as for the ordinary degree), Geography 3B (honours), and one other subject being the third part of a major.

Fourth year: Geography 4. No subject other than Geography 4 may be taken in the fourth year. Admission to the fourth year of the honours school is dependent on candidates being awarded honours in the annual examinations for Geog-raphy 2 and 2A, and Geography 3 and 38, and having completed all the subjects of the first three years of the honours course listed above.

2. Admission to the Honours School must be approved by the faculty through the Sub-Dean, and by the chairman of the department of Geography.

3. The order in which the above subjects are taken must be approved by the chairman of the department of Geography if the subjects are not to be taken in the order listed above. Students in Geography part 1 (hops), part 2 (hofs), and part 3 (hots), should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

GEOGRAPHY IN COMBINED COURSES

The subjects required by the Geography department as part of combined honours courses are as follows:

First year: Prescribed Geography part 1 It is strongly recommended that intending honours stu-

184

Geography

dents take, where possible, at least one subject from the following—History, Economics, Government, Statistics, Mathematics or Geology.

Second year: Geography 2 Geography 2A honours

Third year: Geography 3 Geography 3B honours

Fourth year: Selected sections of Geography 4

A thesis of not more than 9,000 words approved by the chairman of each department in which the student is taking his combined course.

121-461 GEOGRAPHY PART 4

This course will involve the preparation of a thesis on an approved topic, based upon individual field work. Seminars will be held on the specialisms involved, and on geographic methodology and research techniques.

BOOKS

Reading lists will be provided for the seminars.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and a thesis.

121-262 GEOGRAPHY PART 2A (HONS)

A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the year, in advanced terrain analysis, histori-cal geography and political geography, with written work of the order of one essay per term.

SYLLABUS

A series of studies, each lasting one term, in advanced terrain analysis, historical geography and political geography.

BOOKS

Reading lists will be given In class.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

121-362 GEOGRAPHY PART 36 (HONS)

A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the year, in migration, advanced economic and urban geography, and theory and philosophy of geography, with written work of the order of one essay per term.

SYLLABUS A series of studies, each lasting one term, in migration, advanced eco-nomic and urban geography, and theory and philosophy of geography.

BOOKS Book lists will be supplied in class.

185

Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

MASTER OF ARTS

121-601 P. SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY

Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis ( А 4, typewritten, douы e-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF GERMANIC STUDIES Chairman of Department: Professor G. SCHULZ, Dr. phil. (Leipzig)

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the Honours Course are set out at the end of this section.)

The Department of Germanic Studies offers courses in German, Dutch and Swedish. For German language and literature there is a three-year pass course and a four-year honours course, both pure and combined; a pass in H.S.C. German or the equivalent is assumed. There is also a German course which requires no previous knowledge of the language, and which merges with the ordinary course in later years. Dutch language and literature may be taken as a three-year pass course or as a four-year combined honours course, and Swedish as a three-year pass course. For Dutch and Swedish, no prior knowledge of the language is assumed. A number of scholarships are available to the best students for further study in Europe.

SUBJECTS OFFERED:

German parts 1, 2, 3 and lA Dutch parts 1, 2, 3 Swedish parts 1, 2, 3

BOOKS OF REFERENCE: GERMAN The following reference works will be used throughout the course:

(a) Dictionaries

R й denberg W & Messinger H Langenscheidt's Concise Dictionary, English-German German-English 2 vols latest ed

186

Germanic Studies

or Klatt E and G Langenscheidt's Pocket Dictionary of the English and

German Languages, 2 pts in 1 vol latest ed Wehrle-Eggers Deutscher Wortschatz, 2 vols Fischer Bücherei 953/954 Farrell R B A Dictionary of German Synonyms, CUP paperback latest

ed Sprachbrockhaus, F A Brockhaus Wiesbaden latest ed

(b) Grammars and Books with Exercises

Griesbach H Deutsche Grammatik im Oberblick, Max Hueber Verlag München 1970

Schulz-Griesbach Moderner Deutscher Sprachgebrauch. Ein Lehrgang far fortgeschrittene, 2nd ed Max Hueber Verlag M й nchen 1966

(c) History of Literature Frenzel H A and E Daten deutscher Dichtung, 2 vols dtv М nchе n 1962 Ritchie J M Periods In German Literature, Wolff 1966

(d) Background

Adams Marion ed The Germen Tradition, John Wiley 1971

All students should possess:

Griesbach H Deutsche Grammatik im Überblick Schulz-Griesbach Moderner Deutscher Sprachgebrauch.

Any one of the English-German, German-English dictionaries.

126-101 GERMAN PART 1 Mr H. A. Hesse

The course assumes that students have reached pass standard In German at the Higher School Certificate examination.

A course of four lectures/seminars per week throughout the year, together with one hour in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

The course is divided into the study of language and the study of literature. The study of language will aim at improving linguistic skills in the spoken and written Idiom and at developing a more reflective approach to the structure of the German language. Using new linguistic methods, grammatical and stylistic aspects of modern German will be studied. The course in literature will consist of an introduction to the study of literature, Illustrated by selected texts from the 18th to the 20th centuries, and an intensive study of selected texts by 20th century authors. Various kinds and methods of response to and understanding of literary texts, problems of critical assessment of literary values, and questions of literature as seen in the social and historical context of Germany and the German-speaking countries will be discussed.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks:

Schulz-Griesbach Moderner Deutscher Sprachgebrauch. Ein Lehrgang f й r Fortgeschrittene, latest ed Max Hueber Verlag München

Heine H Deutschland. Ein Wintermbrche п , Reclam

187

Faculty of Arts

Wiese B v Deutschland erzählt. Von Schnitzler bis Johnson, Fischer Wagenbach K ed Lesebuch. Deutsche Literatur der sechziger Jahre,

Wagenbach Berlin Kafka F Das Urteil und andere Erzählungen, Fischer Brecht B Der gute Mensch von Sezuan, Methuen Dürrenmatt F Der Besuch der alten Dame, Methuen

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour examination and oral/aural tests at the end of the year; language tests will be given each term. Assignments throughout the year will be taken into account at the annual examination.

126-102 GERMAN PART 1 A Miss E. Ruff

Four classes per week throughout the year with two additional sessions in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

The course is adapted to the needs of students who have little or no knowledge of German, and it is therefore open only to these. It offers an introduction to all the important structures of the German language and provides a training in pronunciation, aural and written comprehension, conversation, grammar, translation and composition. It is an intensive course which aims at enabling students to make active use of the spoken and written language within a relatively short period. Audio-visual aids (language laboratory, films and slides) will assist students to achieve this aim. Films in English will also provide students with some background knowledge of present-day Germany. The number of students admitted to the subject will be limited. During the enrolment period applicants must apply to the Chairman of the Department of Germanic Studies for permission to enrol in this course. It is intended that successful completion of German 1A will be a prerequisite for German 2A from 1976 onwards, which may then lead to German 3.

BOOKS

For preliminary reading:

Adams M ed The German Tradition, J Wiley Prescribed textbooks: Schulz-Griesbach Deutsch Sprachlehre f й r Ausländer, Grundstufe in 1

Band, Hueber Munich and the supplementary works: Schй lerheft Contrastive Grammar, Hueber Munich German-English von Adele T Palmberg und U Henry Gerlah, Hueber

Munich Glossar Deutsch-Englisch, Hueber Munich Leseheft von Roland Hils, Hueber Munich Additional texts will be available from the department. Reference books: R й denberg W & Messinger H Langenscheidt's Concise Dictionary, Eng-

lish-German, German-English, 2 vols latest ed

188

Germanic Studies

or

Klatt E & G Langenscheidt's Pocket Dictionary of the English and Ger-man Languages, 2 pts in 1 vol latest ed

Farrell R B A Dictionary of German Synonyms, latest ed CUP paperback

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturer.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour written examination, written class and terminal tests, oral-aural tests. The quality of the candidate's work throughout the course will be taken into account.

126-201 GERMAN PART 2 (PASS) Dr H. Maclean

A course of one lecture and four seminars with one hour in the language laboratory throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Advanced language studies (one 2-hour language seminar plus one hour in the language laboratory).

(ii) The Faust-theme in literature (one lecture throughout the year).

(iii) Special language course of one hour per week as option to (ii) in second and third terms only.

(iv) One 2-hour seminar throughout the year on drama, prose and poetry of the 19th and 20th centuries.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Schulz-Griesbach Moderner Deutscher Sprachgebrauch, latest ed Max Hueber Verlag München Hammond Robin T Fortbildung In der deutschen Sprache, OUP 1969

(ii) Marlowe C The Tragical History of Doctor Faustus, Everyman or any other edition Goethe J W Faust Parts I and ll, Reclam

(iii) Material to be supplied by department.

(iv) (a) Drama: Kleist H v Der zerbrochene Krug, Macmillan Büchner G Leonce und Lena In: "Werke und Briefe" dtv Wedekind F Der Marquis von Keith, Goldmann Sternheim C Die Hose, Fischer Brecht B Herr Puntila und sein Knecht Matti, Methuen Frisch M Biedermann und die Brandstifter, Methuen (b) Prose: Kleist H v Der Zweikampf, Reclam Hoffmann E T A Das Fräulein von Scudéri, Reclam Dorste-Hülshoff A Dle Judenbuche, Harrap Dürrenmatt F Die Panne, OUP

(i)

189

Faculty of Arts

(d) Poetry: The Penguin Book of German Verse, ed Forster, latest ed Penguin

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination; language tests to be given each term; oral-aural tests; assignments submitted throughout the year will be taken into consideration.

126-301 GERMAN PART 3 (PASS) Dr H. Wiemann

A course of five lectures/seminars per week:

(i) A lecture on German literature between 1750 and 1820 (one hour per week).

(ii) A seminar on German narrative prose between 1750 and 1960 (two hours per week).

(iii) A language seminar (two hours per week).

In the seminar on German Narrative Prose (ii) an option may be exer-cised for the second and third terms in favour of a Special Language Class (two hours per week).

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

(i) German Literature between 1750 and 1820 Lessing G E Minna von Garnhelm, Reclam Lenz J M R Die Soldaten, Reclam Goethe J W Iphigenie auf Tauris, Reclam Schiller F Maria Stuart, Reclam Kleist H v Die Marquise von 0, Reclam

(ii) German Narrative Prose 1750 to 1960 Goethe J W Die Leiden des jungen Werthers, Reclam Novalis Heinrich von Ofterdingen, Reclam Tieck L Der blonde Eckbert, Reclam

Der Runenberg, Reclam Hoffmann E T A Der goldene Topf, Reclam Chamisso A Peter Schlemihls wundersame Geschichte, Reclam В i chner G Lenz, Reclam Fontane Th Schach von Wuthenow, Reclam Kafka F Des Schloss, Fischer Grass G Die Blechtrommel, Fischer

(iii) Language seminar

Schade G Einf й hrung in die deutsche Sprache der Wissenschaften, E Schmidt Verlag

Additional textual material will be made avalaibl e by the Department.

EXAMINATION One three-hour paper on the lecture course; assignments on the seminar on German Narrative Prose; language tests each term; oral tests.

190

Germanic Studies

126-111 DUTCH PART 1

A course of three lectures, two tutorials, and one language laboratory session per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Grammar, translation, composition, conversation and language labo-ratory work.

(li) Study of prescribed texts.

(Iii) Outline of Dutch history and civilization.

A previous knowledge of Dutch is not required. The language classes will, however, be divided into two groups — people who are proficient in Dutch and those who are not acquainted with the language at all. The latter will be given more intensive grammar lessons to bring them up to a level comparable with that of the people with a prior knowledge of the subject. Dutch students must contact the Department of Germanic Studies during the preceding long vacation and are strongly advised to attend a summer course in Dutch in February 1975. Failure to attend the summer school does not, however, exclude one from Dutch Part 1.

Books Contact the Department of Germanic Studies before purchasing any of the following texts:

(i) Smit J & Meijer R P Dutch Grammar and Reader, rev ed MUP 1966 Shatter W Introduction to Dutch, Martinus Nijhoff Renier F G Dutch-English and English-Dutch Dictionary, Routledge & kegan Paul or (only for those continuing on to Dutch Part II) Prick van Wely F P H Kramers /Cassell's English-Dutch Dutch-

English Dictionary, van Goor Den Haag/Cassell London

(ii) Minco M Het bittere kruid, Bert Bakker Bomans G Sprookjes, Elsevier

(iii) Schõffer I A Short History of the Netherlands, Amsterdam 1956 Vlakke B H M Evolution of the Dutch Nation, New York 1945

PRELIMINARY READING

See (iii) above.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour language paper and an oral test of fifteen minutes at the end of the year will account for 50 per cent of marks. The remaining 50 per cent will be assessed from essays and tests set throughout the year.

126-211 DUTCH PART 2 (PASS)

A course of three lectures per week, one tutorial and a session in the language laboratory throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Grammar, translation, composition and conversation.

191

Faculty of Arts

(ii) Study of prescribed texts.

(iii) Outline of Dutch literary history from the Middle Ages to the present.

(iv) Outline of the history of the Dutch language.

BOOKS

(i) Grammars and dictionaries as for part 1.

(ii) Multatuli Max Havelaar, Donker Hermans W Een wonderkind of een total loss, De Bezige Bij Couperus L De stille kracht, Veen Gijsen M Joachim van Babylon, Stols

(iii) Meijer R P Literature of the Low Countries, Assen 1971

(iv) Vooys C G N de Geschiedenis van de Nederlandse Taal, Wolters Groningen 1970

PRELIMINARY READING

See (iii) above.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers (the first on grammar and the second on literature and history of the language), oral test of fifteen minutes. Essay and tests set throughout the year will also be taken into account.

126-311 DUTCH PART З (PASS)

A course of three lectures and one tutorial throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) Advanced language study consisting of translation, composition and conversation.

(ii) Study of selected texts of medieval and seventeenth century authors.

(iii) Study of modern literary texts.

BOOKS

(i) Grammars and dictionaries as for Part 1

(ii) Beatrijs, Wolters Groningen Texts for seventeenth century Dutch yet to be chosen.

(iii) Vestdijk S Terug tot Ina Dammen, Nijgh en van Ditmar Couperus L De Stille Kracht, Veen Schendel A v De Waterman, Meulenhoff Bordewijk F Blokken — Knorrende Beesten — Bint, Nijgh en van

Ditmar

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on translation of medieval, 17th century

and modern Dutch texts, the second on literature); oral test of fifteen minutes. Work throughout the year will be taken into account.

192

Germanic Studies

126-121 SWEDISH PART 1

A course of four classes per week, including one hour in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS (i) Modern Swedish expression, oral and written.

(II) Study and discussion of prescribed texts.

(iii) An outline of the cultural history of Sweden with special emphasis on the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, and an Introduction to modern Swedish society.

The course is planned to attain a standard comparable with that of other first year subjects, but in its early stages it is adapted to the needs of those previously unacquainted with the language. Such students must contact the Department of Germanic Studies during the preceding long vacation, and are strongly advised to attend a summer course in February, 1975.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit written work during the year. Some of this work will constitute part of the examination in the subject.

BOOKS

Students are asked to contact the lecturer in Swedish before buying their books. Hildeman N G and Beite A M Learn Swedish, Almqvist och Wiksell

Stockholm 1969 Hildeman N G Hildeman P A & Olsson I Practise Swedish, Almqvist

och Wiksell Stockholm 1963 Facts about Sweden, The Swedish Institute 1987 Svensk-engelsk ordbok, Bokfõrlaget Prisma Stockholm 1970 Bj8rkhagen 1 Modern Swedish Grammar, Svenska Bokfõrlaget Stock-

holm 1982 Hjort A, Manne G, Wistrand P, Ekroth G Leva bland rnãnniskor, Sveriges

radios fõrlag Stockholm 1972

EXAMINATION

Work assessed during the year will be supplemented by two oral tests of fifteen minutes each to be conducted in the second and third terms respectively and by two written tests at the beginning of the second and third terms respectively and one 3-hour written examination at the end of the year.

126-221 SWEDISH PART 2

A course of four classes per week throughout the year. Students are advised to spend at least one hour in individual work in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

(i) Modern Swedish expression.

(ii) Modern Swedish poetry.

(iii) Modern Swedish prose.

193

G

Faculty of Arts

(iv) The dramas of August Strindberg.

(v) Contemporary Swedish debate as reflected in literature.

(vi) A survey of twentieth century Swedish literature and society.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit written work during the year. This will include three assignments selected from sections (ii) to (vi) of the syllabus. These assignments and some of the other written work will form part of the examination in the subject.

BOOKS

Students are required to contact the lecturer in Swedish before buying their books. In most instances any edition of the prescribed text will suit.

(i) Modern Swedish expression

Bjõrkhagen I Modern Swedish Grammar, Svenska Bokfõrlaget Stock-holm 1962

Santeson R ed Svensk-engelsk ordbok, Lãromedels förlagen Stockholm 1968

or Svensk-engelsk ordbok, Bokfõrlaget Prisma Stockholm 1970 К ã г rе -Lindkvist-Nöjd-Rodin Engelsk-svensk ordbok, Norstedt Stockholm

1949 or Engelsk-svensk ordbok, Bokfõrlaget Prisma Stockholm 1970 Hjort A, Manne G, Wistrand P, Ekroth G Leva bland människor, Sveriges

radios förlag Stockholm 1972 Mathlein M Lãsebok fõr invandrare, Lãromedels förlagen, Stockholm

1972 Mathlein M Lãsebok fõr invandrare, õvninga г , Lãromedels förlagen

Stockholm 1972 Texts supplied by the department. (ii) Modern Swedish poetry

McLean R J A Book of Swedish Verse, The Athlone Press 1968 Tideström G Lyrik frân vâr egen tid, Gleerups 1961 Texts supplied by the department. (iii) Modern Swedish prose Bergman Hj Flicken i track, any ed Lagerkvist 4 Gist hos verkligheten, any ed Lagerlöf S Herr Arnes penninger, any ed Moberg V Utvandrerne, ett urval Bonniers Moberg V Invandrarna, ett urval Bonniers Niland G Dagboken, Gebers

(iv) The dramas of August Strindberg Strindberg A Fadren, any ed Strindberg A Frõken Julie, any ed Strindberg A Gustav Vasa, any ed

Strindberg A Р'ѕ k, any ed

(v) Contemporary Swedish debate Hjort A, Manne G, Wistrand P, Ekroth G Leva bland mãnniskor, Sveriges

radios förlag Stockholm 1972 Texts supplied by the department.

(vi) Survey of twentieth century Swedish literature and society

Hammar T Leva i Sverige, Sveriges radios forlag 1971

194

Germanic Studies

Texts supplied by the department.

EXAMINATION In addition to assignments two oral tests of twenty minutes each will be conducted in the second and third terms respectively and two 2-hour written tests will be held at the beginning of the second and third terms respectively and one 3-hour written examination at the end of the year.

126-321 SWEDISH PART 3 A course of four classes per week throughout the year. Students are advised to spend at least one hour in individual work in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS (1) Advanced modern Swedish eх prев sioп . (ii) The Swedish novel in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.

(iii) The history of Swedish poetry. (iv) The writings of August Strindberg. (v) Contemporary Swedish debate as reflected in literature.

WRITTEN WORK

Students are required to submit written work during the year. This will include three assignments selected from sections (ii) to (v) of the syllabus. These assignments and some of the other written work will form part of the examination of the subject.

BOOKS

Students are required to contact the lecturer in Swedish before buying their books. In most instances any edition of the prescribed text will suit.

(i) Advanced modern Swedish expression Bruzaeus L Wallin U Svenska, Kursverksamheten vid Lunds universitet

1972 Bruzaeus L Wallin U Mera Svenska, Kursverksamheten vid Lunds uni-

versitet 1972 Bruzaeus L Wallin U Ännu mere Sve л Ρska, Kursverksamheten vid Lunds

universitet 1972 See section (i) of the syllabus for Swedish Part 2

(ii) The Swedish novel in the 19th and 20th centuries

Almgvist C J L Det går an, any ed Bergman Hj Markurells i Wedkdping, any ed Dagerman S Вгё nt barn, any ed Johnsson E Nu ver det 1914, any ed Lagerkvist P В õd е ln, any ed Lagerlof S Herr Arnes penningar, any ed Lidman S Regnspiran, any ed Rydberg V Si п goalla, any ed Wiistberg P Jordmånen, any ed

(iii) History of Swedish poetry

Gellman C M Fredmans epistlar, Prisma 1962

195

Faculty of Arts

Frõding G Ur Gustav Frõdings diktning, Svenks Во kförlaget 1959 McLean R J A A Book of Swedish Verse, The Athlone Press 1968 Tideström G Lyrik fan vår egen tid, Gleerups 1961

Material supplied by the department.

(iv) The writings ot August Strindberg Strindberg A Spõksonaten, any ed Strindberg A Mister Olof, any ed Strindberg A Ovider, any ed

(v) Contemporary Swedish debate as reflected in literature Hammar T Leve I Sverige, Sveriges radios förlag 1971 Material supplied by the department.

EXAMINATION

In addition to assignments two oral tests of thirty minutes each will be conducted in the second and third terms respectively and two 2-hour written tests will be held at the beginning of the second and third terms respectively and one 3-hour written examination at the end of the year.

HONOURS DEGREE

G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES

Courses for the degree with honours in the school of Germanic Studies are offered from a wide range of subjects:

German language and literature, Dutch language and literature, Scandinavian language and literature, and Medieval Germanic languages and literature.

Combinations with other schools are also possible (see pp. 439 ff ).

In each case students should consult the chairman of the department, but the following guidelines are given:

Second Year

Students taking an honours course in the School of Germanic Studies enrol for either Germen 2 (huns) or Dutch 2 (hens) or both, together with Germanic Studies 2 (hens). Pre-requisites are German 1 or Dutch 1 respectively.

The following requirements apply:

I. Students wishing to pursue a pure honours course specialising in German are required to take German 2 (hons) plus two seminar-courses selected from the syllabus of Germanic Studies 2 (hoes), plus two additional grade 2 subjects, one of which is to be specially approved by the Chairman of the Department of Germanic Studies.

2. Students wishing to pursue a pure honours course combining German and Dutch are required to take German 2 thons), Dutch 2 (hens) plus two seminar courses selected from the syllabus of Germanic Studies 2 (hons) plus one additional grade 2 subject.

3. Students wishing to combine honours in Germanic Studies with honours in another school are required to take German 2 (hofs) or Dutch 2 (hurls), plus one seminar course selected from the syllabus of Germanic Studies 2 (bons) together with such work as

196

Germanic Studies

the other honours school may require, plus one additional grade 2 subject.

Third Year

For students taking honours in Germanic Studies the following require-ments apply:

1. Students pursuing a pure honours course specialising in German ere required to take German 3 (hils) plus four half-year courses selected from the syllabus for Germanic Studies 3 (huns.).

2. Students pursuing a pure honours course combining German and Dutch are required to take German 3 (hops), Dutch 3 (huns) plus two half-year courses selected from the syllabus for Germanic Studies 3 (huns).

3. Students combining honours in Germanic Studies with honours in another school are required to take German 3 (huns) or Dutch 3 (hofs) plus one half-year course selected from the syllabus for Germanic Studies 3 (huns) together with such work as the other honours school may require.

Fourth Year

All honours students in the School of Germanic Studies enrol for Ger-manic Studies 4 (huis). б half-courses will be required for pure hon-ours students and 3 half-courses for students taking combined honours.

Examination requirements:

The final examination will consist of two parts, part I taken at the end of third and part I1 at the end of fourth year.

Part l: One 3-hour paper, as for the ordinary degree, an oral test of thirty minutes, and papers in relation to the half-courses taken. Pure Honours: Four papers of which not more than one may be taken at a prescribed date prior to the time of the end-of-year examinations. Combined Honours: One paper taken at the time of the end-of-year examinations. Candidates are required to prepare under supervision for the thesis which forms part of the final examination of the school (see GERMANIC STUDIES PART 4). Choice of topic must be made by the beginning of second term after consultation with the head of the department.

Part Il: The examination of all honours students consists of a thesis of not more than 10,000 words which is to be handed in on the first day of third term, an oral test of thirty minutes, and papers in relation to the half-courses taken.

Pure Honours: S1x papers of which not more than two may be taken at a prescribed date р riо r to the time of the end-of-year examinations.

Combined Honours: Three papers of which not more than one may be taken at a prescribed date prior to the time of the end-of-year examinations. A thesis of not more than 10,000 words is to be handed in on the first day of third term.

Comments: Admission to the honours course is conditional upon satisfactory perform-ance in the first year, and students must be approved by the faculty of

197

Faculty of Arts

Arts as candidates for the degree with honours. The chairman of the department of Germanic Studies will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second-class honours either in German 1 or Dutch 1. No extra work will be demanded for admission to German 2 (honours) or Dutch 2 (honours).

126-261 GERMAN PART 2 (IONS)

A course of one lecture and four seminars per week with one hour in the language laboratory throughout the year, and work prescribed for Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions).

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, courses (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) together with such work as prescribed by the Department.

EXAMINATION

As for the ordinary degree and Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions).

126-271 DUTCH PART 2 (IONS)

A course of three lectures per week with one tutorial class and at least one hour per week in the language laboratory throughout the year, and work prescribed for Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions).

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, courses (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) together with such work as prescribed by the Department.

EXAMINATION

As for the ordinary degree and Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions).

126-262 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 2 (IONS)

For pure honours students: two seminar courses throughout the year selected from the subjects set out below; For combined honours students: one seminar course throughout the year selected from the subjects set out below.

SYLLABUS

(i) Middle High German.

(ii) Ancient Germanic Myth and Epic.

(iii) Topic to be announced later.

BOOKS

(i) Richey Margaret F Middle High German, Oliver & Boyd London 1952

(ii) Students are advised to consult the lecturer before purchasing any texts. Translations into Dutch, English or German may be used. Beowulf Das Nibelungenlied

198

Germanic Studies

The Poetic Edda The Prose Edda

Other material will be supplied by the Department.

The following works are recommended for reference:

Einarsson S A History of Icelandic Literature Gaster T Thespis Kе r W Epic and Romance Phillpots В Edda and Saga Turville-Petre G The Heroic Age of Scandinavia Turville-Petre G Myth and Religion in the North Vries J de A ltgermanische Religionsgeschichte Vries J de Altnordische Literaturgeschichte

(iii) See (iii) above.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper or an equivalent examination for each seminar course taken by the student.

126-361 GERMAN PART 3 (IONS) A course of five lectures/seminars per week, and work prescribed for Germanic Studies Part 3 (Ions).

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, together with such work as proscribed by the Department.

EXAMINATION

Final examination part I. See p. 197.

126-371 DUTCH PART 3 (IONS) A course of three lectures per week together with one tutorial class throughout the year, and work prescribed for Germanic Studies Part 3 (Ions).

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, together with such work as prescribed by the Department.

EXAMINATION

Final examination part I. See p. 197.

126-362 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 3 (IONS) For pure honours students, specialising in German:

Four half-year courses selected from the subjects set out below; For pure honours students, combining German with Dutch:

Two half-year courses selected from the subjects set out below; For honours students, combining German or Dutch with honours in

another school: One half-year course selected from the subjects set out below.

199

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS

1. Old Norse 2. Gothic 3. Balladen und Erzählgedichte 4. Goethes Dichtung und Wahrheit 5. Elemente der Lyrik 6. Friedrich Nietzsche 7. The German Dadaists 8. The Novels of Max Frisch 9. Theater nach Brecht

10. Afrikaans 11. Modern Dutch Novel 12. Modern Dutch Poetry.

Courses will be available depending on enrolment numbers. Details will be provided by the Department.

EXAMINATION

Final examination, part 1. See p. 197.

126-462 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 4 (IONS) For pure honours students:

Six half-courses, selected from the list provided under GERMANIC STUDIES PART 3 (Ions).

For combined honours students:

Three half-courses, selected from the list provided under GER-MANIC STUDIES PART 3 (Ions).

SYLLABUS

See under GERMANIC STUDIES PART З (Ions). Courses will be available depending on enrolment numbers. Details will be provided by the Department.

EXAMINATION

Final examination, part 2. See p. 197.

MASTER OF ARTS

126-601 G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES

Candidates will under supervision prepare a thesis in either German or Dutch on an approved subject and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. Candidates are expected to pass an oral test covering the general field of their research. Research students are required to attend the research seminars held by the department. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced and bound) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the departmental library, another in the University Library. Each copy should be provided

200

History

with a summary in English up to 1,500 words in length. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candi-dature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY Max Crawford Professor of History: Professor G. M. DENING, Ph.D. (Nary.)

M.A.

Ernest Scott Professor of History: Professor J. R. POYNTER, M.A. (Oxon) Ph.D.

1. Subjects offered in the History School are listed below. In an attempt to give all students the opportunity to take subjects of their choice the lecture time-table has been planned for 1975/76, alternating day and evening lectures where appropriate. Day lectures are between 9 a.m. and 4.15 p.m.; evening lectures are at 4.15 and 5.15 p.m. Details for the Honours School follow those for the Ordinary degree.

Subject

Lecture times

First year

1975 1976 131-101 History 1A (British History

1485-1700)

Day Evening 131-102 History 18 (Age of Revolutions

1750-1850)

Evening Day 1100-103 History 1C (Classical Studies A) Evening Evening

131-104 History 1D (Culture Contact in the Pacific)

Not avail. until 1977

131-105 History 1E (Urban History)

Day Not avail. 131-106 History 1F (Prehistoric

Archaeology)

Day Day

Second year Ordinary degree

131-201 History 2G 131-202 History 2H 131-203 History 2J 131-204 History 2K 131-205 History 2l. 131-206 History 2M 131-207 History 2N 131-210 History 2Q

(Australian)• (American)•

(East Asian)• (French)• (Modern British) (Pre-classical Antiquity)• (German) (Roman)

Day Evening Evening Day Day Day Evening Day Evening Evening Day Day Day Evening Not avail. Evening

Honours degree 131-262 History 2H Ions (American)• Evening Day

fТ hls subject 15 taught In collaboration with the Department of Classical Studies and Is a prerequisite tir History 2M & 3M (P. & H.). •May be taken as either a grade 2 or a grade 3 subject, but not both.

201

Faculty of Arts

1975 1976

131-263 History 2J Ions (East Asian) Day Day 131-264 History 2K Ions (French) • Evening Day 131-265 History 2L Ions (Modern British) Evening Evening 131-266 History 2M Ions (Pre-classica)

Antiquity)' Day Day 131-267 History 2N Ions (German) Day Evening 131-270 History 2Q Ions (Roman)• Not avail. Evening

Third year Ordinary degree

131-301 History 3G (Australian) 131-302 History 3H (American)• 131-303 History 3J (East Asian) 131-304 History 3K(French)• 131-306 History 3M (Pre-classical

Antiquity) • 131-310 History З Q (Roman)' 131-311 History 3R (Late Medieval

European) 131-313 History 3T (Social & Reflective)

Honours degree

131-361 History 3G Ions (Australian) Day Evening 131-362 History 3H Ions (American)' Evening Day 131-363 History 3J Ions (East Asian)• Day Day 131-364 History 3K Ions (French)' Evening Day 131-366 History 3M Ions (Pre-classical

Antiquity)' Day Day 131-370 History 30 Ions (Roman)' Not avail. Evening 131-371 History 3R Ions (Late Medieval

European) Day Day 131-372 History 3S Huns (Early Modern

British) Day Day 131-373 History 3T Ions (Social &

Reflective) Available 1977

Fourth year

131-461 History 4W Ions (Theory & Method of History) 131-462 History 4X Ions (Special Study)

2. Major:

A major in History consists of: one grade 1 subject one grade 2 subject one grade 3 subject

3. Prerequisites:

A grade 1 History subject is a prerequisite for all grade 2 History subjects, and a grade 2 History subject is a prerequisite for all grade 3 History subjects. East Asian Studies 1 is an acceptable prerequisite for History 2J (East Asian History). History 1C (Classical Studies A) is a prerequisite for History 2M or 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) but not for 2Q or 3Q (Roman History).

o May be taken as either a grade 2 or a grade 3 subject, but not both.

Day Evening Evening Day Day Day Evening Day

Day Day Not avail. Evening

Day Day Not avail. Day

202

History

4. Progression:

Australian, American, Pre-Classical Antiquity, East Asian and Roman History are offered at both grade 2 and grade 3 levels and permit flexibility in choosing a major; but none of these may be taken at both levels.

5. No external enrolments are accepted.

HISTORY

131-101 History 131-102 History 100-103 History 131-104 History 131-105 History 131-106 History 131-201 History 131-301 History 131-361 History 131-202 History 131-262 History 131-302 History 131-362 History 131-203 History 131-263 History 131-303 History 131-363 History 131-204 History 131-264 History 131-304 History 131-364 History 131-205 History 131-265 History 131-206 History 131-266 History 131-306 History 131-366 History 131-207 History 2N 131-267 History 2N 131-210 History 2Q 131-270 History 2Q 131-310 History 3Q 131-370 History 3Q 131-311 History 3R 131-371 History 3R 131-372 History 3S 131-313 History 3Т 131-373 History 3Т

( Honours) 131-461 History 4W (Theory and Method of History) (Honours) 131-462 History 4X (Special Study in History) (Honours) 131-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination —School of History 131-601 M.A. School of History 131-701 Ph.D. Department of History

1A (British History 1485-1700) 1 B (The Age of Revolutions 1750-1850) 1C (Classical Studies 1A) 1 D (Culture Contact in the Pacific) 1E (Urban History) 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology) 2G (Australian History) (Pass) 3G (Australian History) (Pass) 3G (Australian History) (Honours) 2H (American History) (Pass) 2H (American History) (Honours) 3H (American History) (Pass) 3H (American History) (Honours) 2J (East Asian History) (Pass) 2.1 (East Asian History) (Honours) 3J (East Asian History) (Pass) 3.1 (East Asian History) (Honours) 2K (France since 1850) (Pass) 2K (France since 1850) (Honours) 3K (France since 1850) (Pass) 3K (France since 1850) (Honours) 2L (Modern British History) (Pass) 21 (Modern British History) (Honours) 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Pass) 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Honours) 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Pass) 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Honours)

(German History) (Pass) (German History) (Honours) (Roman History) (Pass) (Roman History) (Honours) (Roman History) (Pass) (Roman History) (Honours) (Late Medieval European History) (Pass) (Late Medieval European History) (Honours) (Early Modern British History) (Honours) (Problems in Social and Reflective History) (Pass) (Problems in Social and Reflective History)

203

Faculty of Arts

131-101 HISTORY 1A (BRITISH HISTORY, c. 1558-1688) Dr D. E. Kennedy, Mr L. R. Gardiner

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year, with one optional additional lecture per week during part of the year.

SYLLABUS

The history of England c. 1558-1688, with special regard to the period from 1603-1660.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 28)

The syllabus for additional work will consist of a short course of lectures on selected authors and wider reading by students in these authors.

BOOKS

( а ) Prescribed for preliminary reading:

•Smith A G R The Government of Elizabethan England, Arnold •Hurstfieid J Elizabeth I and the Unity of England, Penguin •Aylmer G E A Short History of Seventeenth-Century England, Mentor

Books

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Elton G R The Tudor Constitution, CUP •Hurstfieid J & Smith A G R eds Elizabethan People, State and Society,

Arnold •Kenyon J P The Stuart Constitution, CUP •Elton G R England Under the Tudors, Methuen •Tanner J R English Constitutional Conflicts of the Seventeenth Century,

CUP •Huehns G Selections from Clarendon, World's Classics Further reading will be suggested during the course. (c) Recommended for additional work: • Bunyan J Grace Abounding, etc, Everyman •Bunyan J The Holy War, Sovereign Grace Union •Huehns G Selections from Clarendon, World's Classics •Milton J Prose Writings, Everyman •Ashley M ed Cromwell, Spectrum Books Further reading will be suggested during the course.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of not more than one short essay (2,000 words) in first term and one essay (3,000 words) in second term. The Rosemary Menlo Prize for the best essay in the subject will be awarded annually.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. The examination papers will allow intending honours students to use their additional work.

131-102 HISTORY 16 (THE AGE OF REVOLUTIONS, 1750-1850) Dr A. M. Patrick

A course of two lectures and one tutorial oer week throughout the year.

204

History

with one additional lecture (optional) during part of the year, and individual guided study in carrels during a short part of first term.

SYLLABUS

A study of the relationship between social tensions and political action in the American colonies in the second half of the eighteenth century and in France In the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Particular attention will be paid to the connections between ideology and revolu-tionary action, and to the social situations giving "democratic" assump-tions their relevance. The areas of study will be the American revolution and the French revolutions of 1789 and 1848.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 28)

The syllabus for additional work for those specially interested in some of the problems raised by the course, and particularly for those consider-ing entry to the honours school in history, will consist of further study of detailed evidence relating to pre-revolutionary and revolutionary society in America and France.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Hobsbawm E J The Age of Revolution, Mentor (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Bailyn B The Ideological Origins of the American Revolution, Harvard

UP, paperback edition 'Langer W L The 1848 Revolutions, Harper Torchbooks

Morgan E S The Birth of the Republic, Chicago 'Rudé G Revolutionary Europe, Fontana (c) Reference books:

Detailed reading-lists will be distributed in lectures. The following books should be of use to all students, irrespective of their special interests. Cobban A History of Modern France, vols 1-2, Penguin Denholm A France in Revolution: 1848, John Wiley Duveau G 1848: the Making of a Revolution, Vintage Henretta James A The Evolution of American Society 1700-1815, Heath Jacobson D L ed Essays on the American Revolution, Holt, Rinehart Lefebvre G The Coming of the French Revolution, Vintage Palmer R R Twelve who Ruled, Atheneum Hampson N A Social History of the French Revolution, Toronto Rudé G The Crowd in the French Revolution, Oxford paperback The following books of documents, among others, will be used: Greene Jack P Colonies to Nation, 1763-1789, McGraw-Hill Marx K The Class Struggles in France, any edition Stewart J H A Documentary Survey of the French Revolution, Mас -

millan Tocqueville A de Recollections, Meridian (d) Prescribed for additional work: No books prescribed. Documents used for tutorial work will be distributed in lectures. Students will be able to follow up their individual interests by essay-work.

205

Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK Written work must be submitted during the year. This will consist of ONE short essay (1500 words), ONE longer essay (2500 words) and TWO class-papers (800 words each). For their own interest and to help in gaining historical technique, students will be asked in first term to undertake practical exercises, in individual carrels at times convenient to themselves, in note-taking from books and lectures and in the analysis of documentary sources.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers, one of which will be a "seen" paper. The final result will be based on an assessment of written work done during the year and examination work at the end of the year.

100-103 HISTORY 1C (CLASSICAL STUDIES 1A) This first-year subject is offered in conjunction with the department of Classical Studies. It may lead to work at grade 2 level in both History and Classical Studies and serve as the first part of a major in either. It is normally a prerequisite for Classical Studies 2B or 2C, and for History 2M or 3M. A course of three classes per week.

SYLLABUS

The course will be concerned with three main areas of Greek civilization, viz. Greek history, Greek literature and Greek art, and will be concen-trated largely, but not exclusively, on Athens of the sixth and fifth centuries B.C. Within these areas the emphasis of the study of Greek history will be on the growth of the Athenian democracy, that of Greek literature will be on select tragedies of Euripides and comedies of Aristophanes and on the rise of Greek philosophy, and the theme of Greek art will be the strength of an artistic tradition and its assimilative response to outside influences.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK: (See p. 28 for those considering enrol-ment for the honours degree in History.) A series of lectures on Mycenaean Greece in second and third terms. Textbook: Vermeule E Greece in the Bronze Age, Chicago 1964.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Andrewes A Greek Society, Pelican Finley M I The Ancient Greeks, Pelican (b) Athenian History:

•Ehrenberg V From Solon to Socrates, Methuen paperback Jones A H M Athenian Democracy, Blackwell

•Thucydides The Peloponnesian War, Penguin •Herodotus The Histories, t г Carter, Oxford World Classics •Plutarch The Rise and Fall of Athens, Penguin 'Von Fritz K & Kapp E Aristotle's Constitution of Athens and Related

Texts, Hafner

(c) Greek Art:

Carpenter Rhys The Aesthetic Basis of Greek Art, Midland

206

History

Richter G M A A Handbook of Greek Art, 6th ed Phaidon or 'Boardman J Greek Art, 2nd ed Thames & Hudson

(d) Greek Literature and History of Ideas:

'Euripides The Bacchae and other Plays, Penguin 'Euripides I ed Grene and Lattimore, Washington Square Press 'Aristophanes The Frogs and other Plays, Penguin 'Aristophanes The Acharnians, The Clouds, Lysistrata, Penguin 'Plato The Last Days of Socrates, tr Tredennick, Penguin Further reading material will be supplied by the department.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays (of between 1,500 and 2,500 words) during the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. The final assessment will be made on both examination results and marks given for essays.

131-104 HISTORY 1D (CULTURE CONTACT IN THE PACIFIC) (Not available until 1977.)

Professor G. M. Dening

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year with one optional additional lecture per week during part of the year. The course will not be given in 1975 or 1976.

SYLLABUS

The course will explore the ways in which indigenous societies in Polynesia, Melanesia and Australia reacted to the European Intrusion in the late 18th Century and early 19th Century, and the ways in which different European social groups reacted to a totally new environment. Issues studied will Include the nature of Oceanic societies and their processes of change, different European social systems in the contact situation (beachcombers, missionaries, traders, explorers), the conse-quences of culture contact such as depopulation, racial prejudice and revitalisation movements, the role of scientific expeditions and anthro-pology in the development of European racial images. Historiographical problems will turn about interdisciplinary approaches to historical issues. A substantial amount of the students' work will involve the study of unpublished and archival material.

BOOKS: Prescribed.

(a) Preliminary reading:

Oliver Douglas The Pacific Islands, New York 1961 Suggs R C The Island Civilizations of Polynesia, N.Y. New American

Lib. 1960 Elkin A P The Australien Aborigines, Sydney 1964

(b) The basic texts are the published and unpublished accounts of 18th and 19th Century explorers, missionaries, etc. They will be available in the library.

207

Faculty of Arts

Recommended reading:

Sharp, Andrew Ancient Voyages in Polynesia, Pelican 1957 Beaglehole J C The Exploration of the Pacific. London 1966 Davidson J W & Scarr J W Pacific Island Portraits, Melbourne 1970 Maude H E Of Islands and Men, OUP 1968 Harding T G & Wallace B A Cultures of the Pacific, N.Y. 1970 Smith, Bernard European Vision and the South Pacific 1768-1850,

OUP 1960 Shineberg Dorothy They Came for Sandlewood, MUP 1967 Beaglehole J C ed The Endeavour Journal of Joseph Banks, 2 vols

Sydney 1963 Beaglehole J C ed The Journals of Captain James Cook, Hakluyt

Society, 4 vols 1955-1968 Vayda A Peoples and Cultures of the Pacific, N.Y. 1968

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT

Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of the appropriate assessment in the course. A maximum possible examination in the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than two essays, contributing part of the examination.

131-105 HISTORY 1E (URBAN HISTORY) Dr G. J. Davison

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Additional optional lectures or tutorials may be given during part of the year. This course alternates with History 1 D. Available 1975, not in 1976.

SYLLABUS

A study of the historical development of post-industrial cities as reflected in the experience of Manchester c. 1830-50, London 1850-90, Melbourne 1860-1900 and Chicago 1890-1930. Among the issues to be considered are the nature and sources of city growth, the relations between industry and social structure, spatial segregation, problems of casual labour and urban poverty, the absorption and settlement of immigrants, the process of inner city decay, urban crime, suburban development and the character of urban politics. Particular attention will be devoted to the historical relationship between the emergence of urban problems and the develop-ment of 'urban sociology'. Tutorial work will be geared to the study of primary sources, including maps, drawings and other visual materials.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

•Briggs Asa Victorian Cities, Pelican •Engels Frederick The Condition of the Working Class in England,

Panther 1969 Sheppard F The Infernal Wen — London 1808-1870, Sacker and War-

burg 1971 •Thompson E P & Yeo E The Unknown Mayhew, Pelican 1973 •Fried A & Elmen R Charles Booth's London, Pelican 1971 Grant James & Serle Geoffrey The Melbourne Scene, MUP

Twopeny R E N Town Life in Australia, Penguin 1973

James Stanley The Vagabond Papers, MUP

208

History

•Mayer H & Wade Richard Chicago: Growth of a Metropolis, University of Chicago Press 1969

Park Robert E The City, Chicago University Press Sinclair Upton The Jungle, Penguin

(b) Tutorial guides will be issued through the year.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit written work at specified times during the year. This will consist of not more than two essays of 3,000 words.

EXAMINATION

To be finally determined through consultation at the beginning of the year, but to consist of no more than two 3-hour papers with written work.

131-106 HISTORY 1F (PREHISTORIC ARCHAEOLOGY) (PASS) Mr W. Culican, Dr W. Orchiston

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year, with one optional additional lecture per week during part of the year.

SYLLABUS

A study of Palaeolithic and Mesolithic hunter-gatherer cultures of Africa and Europe (Term 1), Neolithic agricultural communities of Europe and Central and Western Asia (Term 2), and Australian prehistory (Term 3). There will also be an introduction to archaeological method and theory.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading: . Clark J G D World Prehistory, an Outline, Cambridge University Press

1969 Deetz J Invitation to Archaeology, American Museum Science Books,

1967

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Bordes F The Old Stone Age, Weidenfeld and Nicolson 1968 Clark J G D Excavations at Star Carr ..., Cambridge University Press

1954 •Clark J G D Stone Age Hunters, Thames and Hudson 1967 Cole S The Neolithic Revolution, British Museum 1961 •Daniel G E The Megalith Builders of Western Europe, Pelican 1958 •Mellaart J Earliest Civilizations of the Near East, Thames and Hudson

1965 Mulvaney D J The Prehistory of Australia, Thames & Hudson 1969

Mulvaney D J & Golson J eds Aboriginal Man and Environment in Australia, ANU Press 1971

•Piggott S Ancient Europe, Edinburgh University Press 1965 Renfrew C The Emergence of Civilisation. The Cyclades and the Aegean

in the Third Millennium B.C., Brills 1972 •Tringham R Hunters, Fishers and Farmers of Eastern Europe 6000-

3000 B.C., Hutchinson paperback 1971 Watson W Flint Implements, British Museum 1968

209

Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit at times specified during the year two essays of 3,000 words and a shorter paper embodying results of practical work. Practical work will consist of short reports on museum study, or on field excursions or participation in excavations.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper at the end of the year. Written work done during the year will also be taken into account.

131-201 HISTORY 2G (AUSTRALIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (3G may not be taken in addition to 2G)

Mr W. A. Bate, Dr L. L. Robson, Dr Joy Parnaby

A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The history of Australia, 1788-1960. The course will consist of a study of the Australian colonies in the nineteenth century, and an examination of selected social and political problems in the Commonwealth period.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Crawford R M Australia, Hutchinson Clark C M H A Short History of Australia, Mentor Books Hancock W K Australia, Jacaranda Press La Nauze J A The Study of Australian History, 1929-1959, (Reprint

from Historical Studies, Australia end New Zealand separately avail-able in Baillieu Library.)

Kiddie Margaret Men of Yesterday, A Social History of the Western . District of Victoria, MUP

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Clark C M H A History of Australia, vols I. II and Ill, MUP 'Clark C M H ed Select Documents in Australian History, 2 vols 1788-

1850, 1851-1900 Angus & Robertson •Clark C M H ed Sources of Australian History, World Classics 'Greenwood G ed Australia — A Social and Political History, Angus &

Robertson •Gollan R Radical and Working Class Politics. A Study of Eastern Aus-

tralia 1850-1910, MUP

(c) Reference books:

Reading guides will be issued during the course.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of at least one essay (3,000 words) and two class papers (800 words each).

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

210

History

131-202 HISTORY 2H (AMERICAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3H may not be taken in addition to 2H)

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

Problems in the social, intellectual and political history of the United States 1800-1970 will be considered in relation to major questions of social development and intellectual change. Emphasis will be placed on three major topics: the development of American institutions from 1800 to 1865; slavery and the Black Experience; 20th century liberalism, intellectuals and foreign policy.

BOOKS

Prescribed books (in paperback):

"Nye R B and Morpurgo J E History of the United States, Pelican 'Calhoun John C Disquisition on Government and Selections from the

Discourse, Bobbs •Cooper James F Home as Found, Capricorn 'Miller Perry ed The American Transcendentalists Their Prose end Their

Poetry, Anchor Doubleday 'Stowe Harriet Beecher Uncle Tom's Cabin, Harper-Row •Jones Leroi Home, Apollo •King Martin Luther Why we can't Weit, New American Library •The Trial Record of Denmark Vesey, ed J 0 Killers, Beacon ' Bourne Randolph War and the Intellectuals, Harper Torchbook •Lippmann Walter Preface to Politics, U of Mich. 'Latham Earl ed The Meaning of McCarthyism in Problems in Ameri-

can Civilization, Heath & Co.

"This general text is recommended for preliminary reading and is used throughout the course.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit, at specified times, five critical reviews of 1,300 words.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-203 HISTORY 2J (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3J may not be taken in addition to History 2J)

Dr Sow-Thang Leong

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

Select problems in the history of East Asia. Problems will concern the traditional society and politics of China, China's subsequent moderniza-tion and emergence as a world power.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Fairbank J K The United States and China, Harvard paperback

211

Faculty of Arts

Waley Arthur Three Ways of Thought in Ancient China, Doubleday Anchor paperback

McAleavy Henry The Modern History of China, Praeger paperback Schram Stuart Mao Tse-tung, Pelican Chesneaux J Peasant Revolts In China 1840-1949, Thames & Hudson

paperback Reischauer E O Japan, Past and Present, Duckworth paperback

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Reischauer E O & Fairbank J K East Asia: The Great Tradition, Allen and Unwin

•Fairbank J K Reischauer E 0 and Craig A M East Asia: The Modern Transformation, Allen and Unwin

•De Bary W T Sources of Chinese Tradition, vol 1 Columbia UP •Teng Ssu-yu & Fairbank J K China's Response to the West, Athe-

neum paperback

(c) Full tutorial guides will be issued each term.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit, at times specified, two essays of 3.000 words each and two class exercises of 1.000 words each.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-204 HISTORY 2K (FRANCE SINCE 1850) (PASS) (History 3K may not be taken in addition to History 2K) Dr C. Sowerwine

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

A study of French History from 1850 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments, and to opposition to capitalism, particularly as it manifests itself in the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May-June, 1968.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading:

• Wright G France in Modern Times, Rand McNally, 2nd ed

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Feuer L ed Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on Politics and Philo-sophy, Anchor paperback Doubleday or the following three: •Marx K The Communist Manifesto, International •Marx K The Eighteenth Brumaire of Louis Bonaparte, New World

(other editions may be used) •Marx K The Civil War in France, New World (other editions may

be used) •Edwards S ed P-J Proudhon: Selected Writings, Macmillan paperback

Zola E Germinal, Penguin

212

History

'Schulkind E The Paris Commune of 1871: the View from the Left, Jonathan Cape paperback

'Jellinek F The Paris Commune of 1871, Grosset & Dunlap ' Edwards S The Communards of Paris, 1871, Thames & Hudson Barbusse H Under Fire, Everyman Ferro M The Great War 1914-1918, Routledge & Kegan Paul Werth A France, 1940-1955, Beacon paperback Williams P & Harrison M Politics and Society in De Gaulle's Republic,

Anchor paperback Doubleday 'Seale P & McConville M French Revolution 1968, Penguin 'Schnapp A & Vidal-Naquet P French St и dent Uprising — November

1967 - June 1968: an analytic record, Beacon paperback N.B.: Students with a reading knowledge of French will have the option of joining a tutorial for which some of the reading will be in French (discussion will be in English). The reading for this section will be as follows:

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Same as above.

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Feuer L ed or the three books by Marx [same as above]

'Proudhon P-J Qu'est-ce que la propriété, Garnier-Flammarion 'Zola E Germinal [in French], PIblade edition (vol III of Histoire des

Rougon-Macquart) is recommended, but cheaper editions may be used.

'Lissagaray P Histoire de la Commune de 1871, Maspéro 'Rougerie J Paris libre 1871, Seuil Barbusse H Le feu: carnet de querre, Flammarion 'Martin du Gard R Eté 1914, Livre de poche 'Guerin D Front populaire, revolution manquee: temoignage, Maspéro 'Weil S La condition ouvrière, Gallimard 'Werth A France, 1940-1955, Beacon paperback 'Williams P & Harrison M Politics and Society in De Gaulle's Republic,

Anchor paperback Doubleday 'Singer D Prelude to Revolution: France in jay 1968, Hill & Wang 'Schnapp A & Vidal-Naquet P Journal de la Commune étudiante, Seuil

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit three critical essays of not more than 2,000 words. Oral class papers may also be required.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute a major part of the examination.

131-205 HISTORY 2L (MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) (PASS) Dr D. F. Mackay, Dr D. Philips

A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week through-out the year.

SYLLABUS A study of British History from the Iate eighteenth to the mid-twentieth

213

Faculty of Arts

century. Most emphasis is given to social, political and economic changes and their relationships, e.g. the social and political consequences of indus-trialization; but some developments in literature and religion will also receive attention, as will Anglo-Irish relations and the changing fortunes of the empire.

This course is not designed as a background to Australian History, but aspects of it will prove useful to students who subsequently take that subject.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Hobsbewm E J Industry and Empire: An Economic History of Britain

since 1750, Weidenfeld & Nicolson. Also available in Pelican. Kitson Clark G S R An Expanding Society, MUP

(b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Webb R K Modern England, Dodd lead & Co 'Perkin Harold The Origins of Modern English Society, 1780-1880,

Routledge & Kegan Paul 'Thompson E P The Making of the English Working Class, Pelican •Briggs A The Age of Improvement, 1783-1867, Longmans •Ensor Sir Robert England 1870-1914, Oxford •Houghton W E The Victorian Frame of Mind, Yale •Fieldhouse D K Economics and Empire, 1830-1914, Weidenfeld and

Nicolson 'Thornton A P The Imperial Idea and its Enemies, Macmillan paperback 'Taylor A J P English History 1914-1945, Oxford (c) Reference books:

Reading guides will be issued during the year.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of one exercise of 2,000 words, one essay of 3,000 words and either one class paper of 2,000 words or one report as part of a group project.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-206 HISTORY 2M (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (PASS) (History 3M may not be taken if History 2M is taken)

Mr W. Culican

A course of two weekly lectures and one tutorial throughout the year devoted to expanding themes studied in History 1 C and to examining source materials in selected topics in Ancient History and Archaeology. The topics are:

(i) Early Sumerian History; (ii) The Early Dynastic Period in Egypt; (iii) The Annals of Sargon lI of Assyria; (iv) The Behistun Inscription of Darius I; (v) Hekataeus and Herodotus; (vi) The Archaeological and Textual Evidence for Greek and Phoenician Colonisation; (vil) The

214

History

Decrees of the Athenian Empire; (viii) Lydia, Phrygia and the Ionian Greeks; (ix) The Biographers of Alexander the Great.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

'Translations of Herodotus, Thucyciides, and Livy Gomme A W A Historical Commentary on Thucydides, Oxford 1958 How W and Wells J A Commentary on Herodotus, Oxford 1928 •Kramer S N The Sumerians, Chicago 1963 'Gardiner A Egypt of the Pharaohs, Oxford 1981 Huxley G L The Early Ionians, London 1965 'Gadd C J The Dynasty of Agede, Cambridge Ancient History fase Blazquez J M Tartessos y los Origenes de la Colonizacion Fenicia en

Occidente, Madrid 1968 •Brea L B Sicily Before the Greeks. London 1957 •Boardman J The Greeks Overseas, Pelican 1964 'Edwards I E S The Early Dynastic Period In Egypt, Cambridge Ancient

History farm (b) Reference works: Kent R G Old Persian: Grammar, Texts, Lexicon, Oriental Society, New

Haven 1950 Jacobsen T The Sumerian King List, Chicago 1966 Dunbabin T J The Western Greeks, Oxford 1948 Merritt B D et al The Athenian Tribute Lists, Princeton 1950 Griffith G T ed Alexander the Great: The Main Problems, Cambridge

1966 CompernoIIe R van Etude de chronologie et d'historiographie siciliotes,

Brussels 1960

WRITTEN WORK

Students wili be required to submit two essays, each of 3,000 words, at times specified during the year.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-207 HISTORY 2N (GERMAN HISTORY) (PASS) Dr J. H. Foster

A course of one lecture and one 2-hour seminar per week throughout the year with an occasional additional lecture.

SYLLABUS

A study of German History since 1870. The course will explore political and social change in Imperial Germany, the Weimar Republic and Nazi Germany. Emphasis will be placed on the problems of War and Society, the development of extremist movements of the Left and the Right, and the failure of liberal democracy.

В 00KS

•Rosenberg A Imperial Germany, Beacon paperback 'Nicholls A J Weimar and the Rise of Hitler, Papermac

215

Faculty of Arts

Bullock A Hitler, A Study in Tyranny, Penguin •Bracher K D The German Dictatorship, Allen Lane

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of three essays of 3,000 words and one report as part of a group project.

EXAMINATION

Written work done during the year will constitute the examination.

131-210 HISTORY 2Q (ROMAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History Э Q may not be taken if 2Q is taken) (Not available in 1975) Mr R. Ridley

A course of two seminars a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course is predominantly a seminar course devoted to select periods of Roman history with special reference to source criticism:

(i) From Monarchy to Republic (to c. 300 B.C.); (ii) The Julio Claudians;

(iii) The period of Diocletian and Constantine.

BOOKS •Livy Books 1-6, of which the first five are translated as The Early History

of Rome by de Selincourt, Penguin •Cicero The Republic and The Laws, Loeb Classical Library Heurgon J The Rise of Rome, Batsford Grant M Roman Myths, Pelican Lewis & Reinhold Roman Civilisations, 2 vols, Harper & Row Scullard H A The Etruscan Cities and Rome, London 1967 Alfoldi A Early Rome and the Latins, Michigan 1965 •Brunt P & Moore J eds Res Gestae Divi Augusti, OUP •Tacitus Annals, tr Dudley, Mentor br Grant, Penguin •Suetonius Lives of the Caesars, tr Graves, Penguin •Syme R The Roman Revolution, OUP 1939 Jones A H M Studies in Roman Government and Law, Blackwell 1960 •Parker H M D History of the Roman World, A.D. 138-337, Methuen •Eusebius The History of the Church, Penguin Classic

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays (3,000 words) and one class paper (1,500 words) in the course of the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

216

History

131-301 HISTORY 3G (AUSTRALIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3tß may not be taken if 2G is taken.) Mr W. A. Bate, Dr L. L. Robson, Dr Joy Parnaby

A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

For details of this subject see History 2G, but additional research work will be required.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of at least two essays (3,000 words each) and two class papers (800 words each).

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-302 HISTORY 3H (AMERICAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3H may not be taken if 2H is taken)

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

For details of this subject see History 2H, but additional research work will be required.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit, at specified times, five critical reviews of 1,300 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-303 HISTORY 3J (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3J may not be taken in addition to History 2J)

Dr Sow-Thang Leong

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2J, but additional research will be required.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at times specified, two essays of 4,000 words each and two class exercises of 1,000 words each.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work and class performance during the year will constitute part of the examination.

217

Faculty of Arts

131-304 HISTORY 3K (FRANCE SINCE 1850) (PASS) (History 3k may not be taken if History 2k taken)

Dr C. Sowerwine

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

A study of French History from 1850 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments and to the opposition to capitalism, particu-larly as it manifests itself in the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May-June 1968.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading:

• Wright G France in Modern Times, Rand McNally, 2nd ed (b) Prescribed textbooks:

• Feuer L ed Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on Politics and Philo-sophy, Anchor paperback Doubleday or the following three: •Marx K The Communist Manifesto, International •Marx K The Eighteenth Brumaire of Louis Bonaparte, New World

(other editions may be used) •Marx K The Civil War in France, New World (other editions may

be used) •Edwards S ed P-J Proudhon: Selected Writings, Macmillan paperback •Zola E Germinal, Penguin •Schulkind E The Paris Commune of 1871: the View from the Left,

Jonathan Cape paperback 'Jellinе k F The Paris Commune of 1871, Grosset & Dunlap •Edwards S The Communards of Paris, 1871, Thames & Hudson Barbusse H Under Fire, Everyman Ferro M The Great War 1914-1918, Routledge & kegan Paul Paxton R Vichy France, Old Guard and New Order, Barrie & Jenkins Werth A France, 1940-1955, Beacon paperback Williams P & Harrison M Politics and Society in De Gaulle's Republic,

Anchor paperback (Doubleday) 'Seale P & McConville M French Revolution 1968, Penguin •Schnapp A & Vidal-Naquet P French Student Uprising — November

1967-June 1968: an analytic record, Beacon paperback

N.B.: Students with a reading knowledge of French will have the option of joining a tutorial for which some of the reading will be in French (discussion will be in English). The reading for this section will be as follows:

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading:

Same as above.

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Feuer L ed or the three books by Marx [same as above]

•Proudhon P-J Qu'est-ce que la propriet ě , Garnier-Flammarion

'Zola E Germinal [in French], Pléiade edition (vol III of Histoire des

Rougon-Macquart) is recommended, but cheaper editions may be

used

218

History

•Lissagaray P Histoire de la Commune de 1871, Maspéro •Rougerie J Paris libre 1871, Seuil •Schulkind E The Paris Commune of 1871: the View from the Left,

Jonathan Cape paperback Barbusse H Le feu: Carnet de guerre, Flammarion

Martin du Gard R Eté 1914, Livre de poche Paxton R Vichy France, Old Guard and New Order, Barrie & Jenkins •Guérin D Front populaire, révolution manquée: temoignage, Maspéro •Weil S La condition ouvrière, Gallimard Werth A France, 1940-1955, Beacon paperback Williams P & Harrison M Politics and Society in De Gaulle's Republic,

Anchor paperback Doubleday •Singer D Prelude to Revolution: France in May 1968, Hill & Wang •Schnapp A & Vidal-Naquet P Journal de la Commune étudiante, Seuil

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit three critical essays of not more than 3,000 words. Oral class papers may also be required.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute a major part of the examination.

131-306 HISTORY 3M (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (PASS) (History 3M may not be taken in addition to History 2М )

Mr W. Culican

A course of two weekly lectures and one tutorial throughout the year devoted to expanding themes studied in History 1C and to examining source materials in selected topics in Ancient History and Archaeology. For details of this subject see History 2M, but additional research work will be required.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays, each of 3,000 words, at times specified during the year.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-310 HISTORY 30 (ROMAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History З Q may not be taken in addition to History 20)

(Not available In 1975)

Mr R. T. Ridley

A course of two seminars each week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2Q, but additional research will be required.

219

Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays (3,000 words) and one class paper (1,500 words) in the course of the year.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

131-311 HISTORY З R (LATE MEDIAEVAL EUROPEAN HISTORY) (PASS) Ms Rosemary Kiss

A seminar course with some lectures averaging out, over the year, at no more than four hours per week.

SYLLABUS

Select problems in the social, political and cultural history of Florence during the Renaissance.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading:

Background: general

Students will be assumed to have some knowledge of the general history of Europe in the period under study. The following works are useful from that point of view: Cheney Edward P The Dawn of a New Era 1250-1453, Harper Torch-

books: The Rise of Modern Europe 1962 Cipolla Carlo M The Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries, Fontana:

Economic History of Europe, vol 2 1972 Gilmore Myron P The World of Humanism 1453-1517, Harper Torch-

books: The Rise of Modern Europe 1962 Hale John R Renaissance Europe 1480-1520, Fontana: History of

Europe 1971 Miskimin Harry A The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe 1300-

1460, Prentice-Hall: Economic Civilization of Europe 1969 Panofsky Erwin Renaissance and Renascences in Western Art, Paladin

1970 Background: Italian Brucker Gene Renaissance Florence, John Wiley and Sons: New

Dimensions in History: Historical Cities 1969 Cochrane Eric ed The Late Italien Renaissance 1525-1630, Macmillan:

Stratum series 1970 La гпег John Culture and Society in Italy 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Laven Peter Renaissance Italy 1464-1534, Capricorn Books 1987 Martines Lauro ed Violence and Civil Disorder In Italian Cities 1200-

1500, University of California Press

(b) More specialized reading guides will be devised by students indi-vidually and in classes during the year.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work but the length and nature of such work will be decided in consultation with students taking

the course.

220

History

EXAMINATION

Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. Other forms of assessment will be decided upon in consultation with students taking the course but in no case will these amount to more than the equivalent of two 3-hour papers.

131-313 HISTORY 3T (PROBLEMS IN SOCIAL AND REFLECTIVE HISTORY) (PASS) (Not available in 1975)

Professor G. M. Dening

A course of one lecture, one tutorial and one seminar per week through-out the year.

SYLLABUS

The course will cover the image of man in the historical and social sciences in the 19th and 20th centuries, the processes of perceiving and explaining meaning in human behaviour, and such problems as relativism, objectivity, the function of inquiry as are raised by the disciplines of history, anthropology and sociology. First term will be devoted to ethnography, symbol, myth, ritual, gesture and metaphor; second term to a specific historical problem, such as The 'Bounty' in the Pacific; third term to a review of problems In the theory and method of the social sciences.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks:

'Berger P & Luckman T The Social Construction of Reality, Doubleday Anchor 1967

'Carr E H What Is History? Penguin Books 1987 'Berger P Invitation to Sociology — A Humanist Approach, Penguin

Books 1967

(b) Recommended Reading:

Aron R Main Currents in Sociological Thought, 2 vols, Penguin Books 1965

Berkhofer R F A Behavioural Approach to Historical Analysis, Free Press 1969

Collingwood R G The Idea of History, Oxford 1946 Daedalus Myth Culture end Symbol, vol 101, 1972 Goffman E Presentation of Self in Everyday Life, 1959 Kuhn T S The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Chicago 1970 Lewis O The Children of Sanchez, 1961 Marwick A The Nature of History, Macmillan 1970 Meyerhoff H The Philosophy of History in our Time, Doubleday 1959 Mills C W The Sociological Imagination Stern F Varieties of History, Meridian Books 1956 Skotheim R A The Historian and the Climate of Opinion 1969

Redfield R The Little Community Zinn H The Politics of History, Boston 1970

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of appropriate assessment In the course. Maximum possible examination in

221

Faculty of Arts

the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than two essays contributing part of the examination.

HONOURS DEGREE

В . SCHOOL OF HISTORY (For possible combinations with this school, see pp. 439 ff.)

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of History comprises a first preliminary year and three years in the honours school, as set out below. Students should plan their courses In consultation with a member of the academic staff of the department of History, and should make appointments for this purpose at the departmental office, as well as with the sub-dean.

Admission into the honours school must be approved by the faculty through the sub-dean.

2. First (Preliminary) Year

(a) The normal requirements for admission, in the second year, to the honours school of History are:

(i) A suitable standard (usually the equivalent of first or second class honours) in ONE of History 1A, 16, 1C, 1 D, 1 E and 1F; and

(ii) Passes in three other first-year subjects. These latter subjects must be chosen to comply with the requirements of the ordinary degree but it is recommended that students intending to pursue honours in History include in their first-year studies:

(i) A second first-year History subject; (ii) Part I of a language other than English. (Note: competence

in specified foreign languages may be a prerequisite for certain fiпа l-year special studies in History);

(iii) a subject (other than History) which can form the first part of a major (or at least a two-subject sequence) supporting or complementing an honours course in History; and

(iv) the optional additional work in at least one of the History subjects taken. The object of this additional work is to amplify and deepen the student's course, and to introduce students to skills useful in honours work in later years.

3. Second Year

(a) Students entering the honours school of History shall take in their second year:

(i) TWO of History 2H Honours (American)• History 2J Honours (East Asian) • History 2K Honours (France since 1850)• History 2L Honours (Modern British) History 2M Honours (Pre-classical Antiquity)•

•Ameriс an, Pre-classical Antiquity, East Asian, France since 1850 and Roman His-tory are offered in both the second and third years of the honours school, but no student may take more than one subject in these fields. Thus students may take either but not both Honours History 2H or 3H, 2J or 3J, 2K or 3K, 2M or 3M, 20 or 30.

(b)

222

History

History 2N Honours (German) History 2Q Honours (Roman)•

(ii) A Grade 2 subject in a discipline other than History, forming a two-subject sequence with a subject taken in the first year.

(b) Students who fail to gain first or second class honours in the examinations in honours history subjects in the second year will normally not be permitted to proceed in the honours school.

4. Third Year

(а ) In the third year, in the honours school, students shall teke:

(i) TWO of History 3G Honours (Australian) History 3H Honours (American)• History 3J Honours (East Asian)• History 3K Honours (France since 1850)• History 3M Honours (Pre-classical Antiquity)• History 3Q Honours (Roman History)• History 3R Honours (Late Medieval European) History 3S Honours (Early Modern British) History 3T Honours (Social and Reflective

History) (ii) Methods of Historical Research, a course of classes in

preparation for the final honours thesis of 8-9.000 words to be submitted by the first day of the second term of the fourth year. Students are expected to take the first steps in selecting their thesis subjects during the second term of the third year, and will be required to define the limits of their subjects at the beginning of the third term. Members of the academic staff of the department of His-tory will discuss possible subjects in the course Methods of Historical Research, and will also be available for con-sultation at specified times. It is expected that students will have progressed sufficiently by the end of third term to be able to do substantial work on the thesis during the long vacation.• •

(iii) in addition, students may take an additional pass subject or approved course of study. Students may use this oppor-tunity to complete a pass major or to undertake a course which will increase linguistic or other skills relevant to particular historical fields.

(b) Students will not be permitted to proceed to the fourth year in History unless they achieve a satisfactory honours standard in the third-year examinations.

(c) Students who are unable to proceed to the fourth year, may, if their results have been satisfactory, be admitted to the ordinary degree and should apply to the faculty for approval.

6. Fourth Year: Final Honours (а ) The final year in the school of History consists of:

(I) History 4W Honours (Theory and Method of History)

• see footnote on p. 222. •* For faculty rules on the submission of final honours thesis etc. see p. 47.

223

Faculty of Arts

(ti) History 4X Honours (Special Study in History) (iii) Completion of the final honours thesis of 8-9,000 words,

due to be submitted on the first day of second term.

6. Final Examination.

Examinations in third and final years will be regarded as comprising a final examination in the school of History, and will normally conist of:

(i) In the third year not more than two papers In each of the honours History subjects taken in third year.

(ii) In the final year not more than two papers in each of 4W (Theory and Method of History) and 4X (Special Study in History); and

(ill) Assessment of the final honours thesis (4Y). (iv) Written work done during the year will constitute part of

both examinations.

7. Attendance at classes and the completion of written work by the due dates are compulsory in the honours school of History.

8. Students wishing to combine the honours school of History with a Law course should consult the head of the department.

HISTORY IN COMBINED HONOURS COURSES

In general, History in combined honours courses consists of half the History subjects required or recommended in the pure honours school: i.e. one grade 1 History subject in the first year, one honours History subject in each of the second and third years, and History 4X honours (Special Study in History) in the fourth year. The short course in Methods of Historical Research in the third year is also included as part of the preparation for the final honours thesis, which is to be completed in the fourth year.

Courses in which History is combined with honours work in almost all other disciplines available in the Arts faculty have been approved; some of them are set out later in the handbook (see pp. 439 ff). Students intending to undertake a combined honours course Including History are strongly recommended to take the optional additional work In a History subject in first year, and also to include part 1 of a language other than English among the subjects taken in the first year. Students whose first year does not include a language other than English should note that competence in specified foreign languages Is a prerequisite for some special studies in History in the fourth year.

For details of History IA (British History c. 1485-1700), History 1B (Age of Revolutions, 1750-1850), History 1C (Classical Studies A), History 1D (Culture Contact In the Pacific), History fE (Urban History) and History 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology). see details of the ordinary degree.

131-262 HISTORY 2H HONOURS (AMERICAN HtSTORY) (History 3H Honours may not be taken in addition to 2 Н )

A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the lectures in 2H.

224

Nlstory

SYLLABUS

The following topics will be the subject of intensive study: Social and intellectual history, 1800-1860; slavery; the relationship of philosophical pragmatism and 20th century liberalism.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed books: •Nye R B & Morpurgo J E History of the United States, Pelican •Cooper James Fenimore Home as Found, Capricorn •Calhoun John C A Disquisition on Government, Bobbs Miller Perry ed The American Transcendentalists, their prose and their

poetry, Anchor Doubleday •Stowe H B Uncle Tom's Cabin, Harper & Row •Kiltens J O ed The Trial Record of Denmark Vesey, Beacon •Bourne R War and the Intellectuals, Harper Torchbook •Lippmann Walter Preface to Politics, U. of Michigan •Latham E ed The Meaning of McCarthyism (Heath, Problems in Ameri-

can Civilization Series) (b) Recommended Books: Hofstadter R Age of Reform, Vintage paperback Lasch C The New Radicalism, Vintage paperback

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays of 2,500 words during the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper to be taken at the end of second year. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-263 HISTORY 2J HONOURS (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (History 2J Honours may not be taken in addition to 3J) Dr Sow-Thong Leong

A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the two lectures per week in History 2J. Occasional additional lectures may be given.

SYLLABUS

A study of selected themes from the syllabus for History 2J: Select problems in the history of East Asia, 1600-1945. Problems will concern the traditional society and politics of Japan and China, their subsequent modernization, and their emergence as world powers.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Fairbank J K The United States and China, Harvard paperback Waley Arthur Three Ways of Thought in Ancient China, Doubleday

Anchor paperback McAleavy Henry The Modern History of China, Praeger paperback Schram Stuart Mao Tse-tung, Pelican Chesneaux J Peasant Revolts in China 1840-1949, Thames & Hudson

paperback

225 H

Faculty of Arts

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Reischauer E 0 & Fairbank J K East Asia: The Great Tradition, Alien and Unwin

•Fairbank J K Reischauer E 0 & Craig A M East Asia: The Modern Transformation, Allen & Unwin

•De Bary W T Sources of Chinese Tradition, vol 1 Columbia UP •Teng Ssu-yu & Fairbank J K China's Response to the West, Atheneum

paperback

(c) Full tutorial guides will be Issued each term.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit, at times specified, two essays of 3,000 words and two class papers of 1,500 words each.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work and class work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-264 HISTORY 2K HONOURS (FRANCE SINCE 1850) (This subject may not be taken in addition to 3K)

Dr C. Sowerwine

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS .

A study of French History from 1850 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments and to the opposition to capitalism, particularly as It manifests itself in the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May-June 1968. On each of these events students will be expected to do fairly extensive additional reading and to develop their own critical interpretation through discussion and through the term essays.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks as for the pass course with additional reading provided In the Baillieu Library.

WRITTEN WORK.

Students will be required to submit three critical essays of not more than 3,000 words. Oral class papers may also be required.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute a major part of the examination.

131-265 HISTORY 2L HONOURS (MODERN BRITISH HISTORY)

Dr D. F. Mackay, Dr D. Philips

A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with occasional lectures, a total of not more than 3 hours per week. Students taking this subject are also required to attend lectures In

History 2L.

226

History

SYLLABUS

A study of aspects of British society from the Iate eighteenth to the twentieth century. Students should acquire a general knowledge of the main developments in social, political and economic history early in the year, preferably during the long vacation, by reading through some of the better textbooks on the period. Special emphasis will be given to a selection from such topics as the following: (a) social consequences of Industrialism; (b) political and administrative reform; (c) religion and society; (d) literature and society; (e) doubt and confidence in Victorian England; (f) old and new imperialism; (g) working class movements; (h) Liberalism and Conservatism; (i) Anglo-Irish relations; (j) social problems and thought in the twentieth century. In third term an oppor-tunity may be given to specialise on one such topic.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed for preliminary reading:

Cole G D H and Postgate R The Common People, University paperbacks Methuen

Hobsbawm E J Industry and Empire: An Economic History of Britain Since 1750, Weidenfeld & Nicolson. Also available in Pelican

Kitson Clark G S R An Expanding Society, MOP Plumb J England in the Eighteenth Century, Pelican Thomson D England in the Nineteenth Century, Pelican Thomson D England In the Twentieth Century, Pelican

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Webb R K Modern England, Dodd, lead & Co. •Perkin Harold The Origins of Modern English Society, 1780-1880,

Routledge & Kegan Paul •Thompson E P The Making of the English Working Class, Pelican •Briggs Asa The Age of Improvement, 1783-1867 Longmans •Halevy E A History of the English People, 8 vols Benn ▪ Kitson Clark G S R The Making of Victorian England, Methuen •Young G I Victorian England: Portrait of an Age, Oxford Houghton W E The Victorian Frame of Mind, Yale Harrison J F C The Early Victorians, 1832-51, Weidenfeld & Nicolson

•Best G Mid-Victorian Britain, 1851-1875, Weidenfeld & Nicolson •Ensor R C K England, 1870-1914, Oxford •Taylor A J P English History, 1914-1945, Pelican •Fieldhouse D K Economics and Empire, 1830-1914, Weidenfeld &

Nicolson •Thornton A P The Imperial Idea end its Enemies, Macmillan paperback Robinson R and Gallagher J Africa and the Victorians, Macmillan

(c) Reference books:

Lists will be'issued during the year.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of two essays of 3,000 words and not more than three class papers.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

227

Faculty of Arts

131-266 HISTORY 2M HONOURS (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) Mr W. Culican

A course of two weekly lectures throughout the year, as In History 2М pass course, plus one additional seminar each week during second and third terms.

SYLLABUS

The items prescribed for study are the same as in the pass course. The additional seminar will be devoted to the following texts:

(i) The inscriptions of the First Akkad dynasty; (ii) The historical inscriptions of Rameses II;

(iii) The Athenaion Politeia and Politics of Aristotle; (iv) Alexander in European historiography.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks as for pass, plus • Day J and Chambers M Aristotle's History of Athenian Democracy,

University of California 1962 •Fritz K von and Kapp E Aristotle's Constitution of Athens, N.Y. Hafner

1964 • Barker E The Politics of Aristotle, Oxford 1961 •Gardiner Sir A The Kadesh Inscriptions of Rameses II, Oxford 1960 Hirsch H 'Die Inschriften der Könge von Agade', Archiv fir Orientfors-

chung, 20, 1963 (translation available)

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit three 3,000 word essays during the year.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-267 HISTORY 2N HONOURS (GERMAN HISTORY) Dr J. H. Foster

A course of one lecture and a two hours seminar per week throughout the year, with an occasional additional lecture.

SYLLABUS

A study of German history since 1870. The course will explore political and social change in Imperial Germany, the Weimer Republic and Nazi Germany. Emphasis will be placed on the problems of War and Society, the development of extremist movements of the Left and the Right, and the failure of liberal democracy.

BOOKS

• Rosenberg A imperial Germany, Beacon paperback •Nicholls A J Weimar and the Rise of Hitler, Papermac 'Bullock A Hitler, A Study in Tyranny, Penguin • Bracher K D The German Dictatorship, Allan Lane

.228

History

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of three essays of 3,000 words and one report as part of a group project. Special arrangements with regard to assessment will be made for students enrolled in the German Reading Course. For further details consult the lecturer in charge.

EXAMINATION

Written work done during the year will constitute the examination.

131-270 HISTORY 2Q HONOURS (ROMAN HISTORY) (This subject may not be taken in addition to 3Q) (Not available in 1975)

Mr R. T. Ridley

A course of two seminars a week throughout the year as for the pass course with one additional seminar during second and third terms. Students may also be expected to attend the courses given in the Department of Classical Studies either in Imperial Art or Fourth Century Life and Letters.

SYLLABUS

Four periods of Roman History with special reference to source criticism: (i) From Monarchy to Republics (as for pass);

(ii) The Julio Claudian Period (as for pass); (iii) The Age of Diocletian and Constantine (as for pass); (iv) The Collapse of the Roman Empire to Italy and the Central Euro-

pean Provinces, the reactions of contemporary Romans and major modern explanations.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks as for the pass course with the addition of: •Jones A H M The Decline of the Ancient World, Longmans •Bury J B The Invasion of Europe by the Barbarians, Norton paperback •Dill S Roman Society in the Last Century of the Western Empire,

Gordon Press • Gordon C D The Age of Attila, Ann Arbor •loss H L B The Birth of the Middle Ages, 395-814, Oxford paperback Mazzarino S The End of the Ancient World, Faber 1968 Thompson E A The Visigoths In the Time of Ulfila, Oxford 1966 Boak A Manpower Shortage and the Fall of the Roman Empire in the

West, Ann Arbor 1955 Walbank F The Awful Revolution, Liverpool 1969

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays (3,000 words) and two class papers (2,000 words).

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done throughout the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

229

Faculty of Arts

131-361 HISTORY 3G HONOURS (AUSTRALIAN HISTORY) Mr W. A. Bate, Dr L. L. Robson, Dr Joy Parnaby

SYLLABUS A general survey of Australian history along the lines set down for the pass subject, History 3G. In addition, the class will undertake a detailed study, including documentary work, of selected periods or topics within the general field.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Crawford R M Australia, Hutchinson Clark C M H A Short History of Australia, Mentor Books Hancock W K Australia, Jacaranda Press La Nauze J A The Study of Australian History, 1929-1959, (Reprint

from Historical Studies, Australia and New Zealand separately available in Baillieu Library)

Kiddie Margaret Men of Yesterday, A Social History of the Western District of Victoria, MUP

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Clark C M H A History of Australia, vols I, I1 and III, MUP 'Clark C M H ed Select Documents in Australian History, 2 vols 1788-

1850, 1851-1900, Angus & Robertson 'Clark C M H ed Sources of Australian History, World's Classics 'Greenwood G ed Australia — A Social and Political History, Angus &

Robertson

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of two essays (3,000 words each) and two class papers (800 words each).

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class and written work done during the the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-362 HISTORY 3H HONOURS (AMERICAN HISTORY) (History 3H Honours may not be taken in addition to 2 Н )

A course of 2-hour seminars and two lectures each week throughout the year. Students will attend the two lectures each week in History 3Н (American).

SYLLABUS The following topics will be the subject of Intensive study: 18th century social structure and political thought; slavery; the relationship of philo-sophical pragmatism and 20th century liberalism.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed books:

'Nash Gary Class and Society In Early America, Prentice-Hai'

'Nye R B & Morpurgo J E History of the United States, Pelican

230

History

'Killens J 0 ed The Trial Record of Denmark Vesey, Beacon 'Bourne R War and the Intellectuals, Harper Torchbook 'Lippmann Walter Preface to Politics. U. of Michigan 'Latham Earl ed The Meaning of McCarthyism, (Heath, Problems in

American Civilization Series)

(b) Recommended Books

Hofstadter R Age of Reform, Vintage Lockridge Kenneth A New England Town: The First Hundred Years,

1626-1726, Norton Lasch C The New Radicalism, Vintage

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit at times specified two essays of 2,500 words.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-363 HISTORY 3J HONOURS (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (History 3" Honours may not be taken in addition to 2J) Dr Sow-Thong Leong

A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the two lectures per week In History 3J. Occasional additional lectures may be given.

SYLLABUS

For details of this subject see History 2J Honours, but additional research will be required.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit, at times specified two essays of 4,000 words and two class papers of 1,500 words.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work and class work done during the year will constitute part of thе examination.

131-364 HISTORY 3k HONOURS (FRANCE SINCE 1850) (This subject may not be taken In addition to History 2K)

Dr C. Sowerwine

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of French History from 1850 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments and to the opposition to capitalism, particularly as it manifests itself in the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May-June 1968. On each of these events students will be expected to do fairly extensive additional reading and to develop

231

Faculty of Arts

their own critical interpretation of each through discussion, through the essays, and especially through the paper.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks as for the pass course with additional reading provided in the Baillieu Library.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two critical essays of not more than 3,000 words and project involving some independent work on an aspect of the Commune or the Popular Front. Oral class papers may also be required.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute a major part of the examination.

131-366 NISTORY 3M HONOURS (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (This subject may not be taken in addition to History 2M Honours)

Mr W. Culican

A course of two weekly lectures throughout the year, as in History 2M pass course plus one additional seminar each week during second and third terms.

SYLLABUS

For details of this subject see History 2M Honours, but additional research work will be required.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit three 3,000 word essays during the year and one class paper.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-370 HISTORY З Q HONOURS (ROMAN HISTORY) (This subject may not be taken in addition to 2Q) (Not available in 1975)

Mr R. T. Ridley

A course of two seminars a week throughout the year as for the pass course with one additional seminar during second and third terms. Students may also be expected to attend the courses given In the Depart-ment of Classical Studies either In Imperial Art or Fourth Century Life and Letters.

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2Q Honours, but additional research work will be required.

232

History

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays (3,000 words) and two class papers (2,000 words).

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done throughout the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-371 HISTORY З R HONOURS (LATE MEDIAEVAL EUROPEAN HISTORY) Ma Rosemary Kiss

A seminar course with some lectures averaging out, over the year, at no more than four hours per week.

SYLLABUS

Select problems In the social, political and cultural history of Florence during the Renaissance.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Background: general

Students will be assumed to have some knowledge of the general history of Europe in the period under study. The following works are useful from that point of view:

Cheney Edward P The Dawn of e New Era 1250-1453, Harper Torch-books: The Rise of Modern Europe 1962

Cipolla Carlo M The Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries, Fontana: Economic History of Europe, vol 2, 1972

Gilmore Myron P The World of Humanism 1453-1517, Harper Torch-books: The Rise of Modern Europe 1962

Hale John R Renaissance Europe 1480-1520, Fontana: History of Europe 1971

Miskimin Harry A The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe 1300-1460, Prentice Hall: Economic Civilization of Europe 1969

Panofsky Erwin Renaissance and Renascences in Western Art, Paladin 1970

Background: Italian .

Brucker Gene Renaissance Florence, John Wiley and Sons: New Dimen-sions in History: Historical Cities 1969

Cochrane Eric ed The Late Italian Renaissance 1525-1630, Macmillan: Stratum series 1970

Lamer John Culture and Society in Italy 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Laven Peter Renaissance Italy 1464-1534, Capricorn Books 1987 Martines Lauro ed Violence and Civil Disorder in Italian Cities 1200-

1500, University of California Press

(b) More specialised reading guides will be devised by students indi-

vidually and in classes during the year.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work but the length and

233

Faculty of Arts

nature of such work will be decided in consultation with students taking the course.

EXAMINATION

Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. Other forms of assessment will be decided upon in consultation with students taking the course but in no case will these amount to more than the equivalent of two 3-hour papers.

131-372 HISTORY 3S HONOURS (EARLY MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) (Fifteenth and early sixteenth centuries)

Mr L. R. Gardiner

Students in this subject will normally be required to have taken History 1A (British). A course with a weekly seminar supported by a weekly lecture.

SYLLABUS

Social, political and religious themes in English society between 1400 and 1560.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Lander J R Conflict and Stability in Fifteenth Century England,

Hutchinson paperback bades D M Politics and the Nation 1450-1660: Obedience Resis-

tance and Public Order, Fontana/Collins Pill D H The English Reformation 1529-58, University of London Press

paperback

(b) Prescribed Source Books: • Davis N The Paston Letters: A Selection, World's Classics •Dickens A G & Carr D eds The Reformation In England to the Acces-

sion of Elizabeth 1, Arnold paperback Stavin A J Humanism, Reformation and Reform in England, Wiley

•Sylvester R S & Harding D P eds Two Early Tudor Lives, Yale Paper-bound

•Fletcher A Tudor Rebellions, Longmans Seminar Studies in History •More Sir Thomas Utopia, Penguin Henderson P John Skelton's Complete Poems 1460-1529, Dent

• Elyot Sir Thomas The Governor, ed S E Lehmberg Dent Everyman

(c) Prescribed Commentaries:

• Du Boulay F R H An Age of Ambition, Nelson •Scavisbrick J J Henry VIII, Penguin •Elton G R Reform and Renewal: Thomas Cromwell and the Com-

monweal, Cambridge paperback • Dickens A G The English Reformation, Fontana

(d) For reference: ,

Lender J R The Wars of the Roses, Sacker and Warburg Myers A R English Historical Documents 1327-1485, Eyre and Spottis-

woode

234

History

Williams C H English Historical Documents 1485-1558, Eyre and Spottiswoode

Thomas Keith Religion and the Decline of Magic, Penguin

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be expected to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of not more than one essay (3,000 words) and four class papers (1,500 words each).

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work in the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-373 HISTORY 3T HONOURS (PROBLEMS IN SOCIAL AND REFLECTIVE HISTORY) (Not available until 1977.)

Professor G. M. Dening

A course of one weekly seminar and individual reading guidance throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The readings will cover the image of men in the historical and social sciences in the 19th and 20th centuries. Special attention will be given to the writings of Durkheim, Weber, Marx and to the works of later philosophers and sociologists and social anthropologists as Schutz, Malinowski, lead, Redfield, Levi-Strauss. There will be a thematic inquiry into symbol, myth, ritual, gesture and a metaphor as elements in ethnography and historical inquiry.

BOOKS

See History 3T.

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT

Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of appropriate assessment in the course. A maximum possible examination in the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than two essays, contributing part of the examination.

131-461 HISTORY 4W HONOURS (THEORY AND METHOD OF HISTORY)

A weekly seminar during the Fourth year. Theory and Method of History Is designed to encourage reflection on the assumptions, the methods and the conclusions of historical study.

BOOKS

General Reading

Walsh W H An Introduction to Philosophy of History, Hutchinson's University Library

Coilingwood R G The Idea of History, OUP Gardiner P Theories of History, Free Press Gardiner P The Nature of Historical Explanation, OUP Dray W Laws and Explanation in History, OUP

235

Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK Students will be expected to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of not more than one class paper or essay in each term.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers in the final examination. Class work and written work throughout the year will be considered in determining the result.

131-462 HISTORY 4X HONOURS (SPECIAL STUDY IN HISTORY)

Students will be asked to choose, towards the end of their third year, one of the subjects announced for special study in the following year. It is hoped that courses will normally be available in all the principal fields taught in the department, i.e. Ancient History, Later Medieval and Early Modem European History, Seventeenth-Century British History, Aus-tralian, American, East Asian, Far Eastern, Modern European, Modern British History, American and Pacific. Each course is normally conducted as a weekly 2-hour seminar, with occasional special lectures. The courses offered will involve advanced study of a restricted theme in each field. Courses available in recent years include, for example: The Fifteenth-Century Papacy; Seventeenth-Century English Puritanism; The French Revolution; Germany in the Weimar and Nazi periods; Race Relations in the U.S.A.; Selected Aspects of the History of Japan and China in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries; Urban History with particular reference to Australia; The Involvement of Australia In the Great War; Studies in the modern history of China and Japan. A course in Palaeography and Diplomatic will be offered from time to time as occasion warrants. (Enquiries should be directed to Dr D. E. Kennedy or Mr L. R. Gardiner.) Each course will presuppose earlier general study of the field and period, and students will not normally be admitted to a particular course unless they have already taken the relevant prerequisite subject at pass or honours level. In some cases reading ability in specified foreign languages may also be a condition of admission. Students are advised to keep choice of a special study in mind when planning earlier years of the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers in the final examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

MASTER OF ARTS

131-601 В . SCHOOL OF HISTORY

1. Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires either В .A. degree with honours, or B.A. ordinary degree and subsequent completion of M.A. preliminary work as prescribed by the Faculty of Arts. In all cases enquiries should be made from the department of History before application for admission is made through Faculty.

236

History

Acceptance as a candidate for the M.A. Preliminary qualification requires the recommendation of the department of History and the approval of Faculty, and in most cases requires the completion of a History major in the ordinary degree.

To complete the M.A. Preliminary qualification in History the minimum normally expected is (a) to reach a satisfactory honours level in two later-year honours history subjects; (b) to complete a thesis of 8-9,000 words; and (c) to attend the course in Methods of Historical Research. The M.A. Preliminary course may be done in two years of part-time work or (in exceptional cases) one year of full-time work.

2. Examination is normally by thesis, prepared under supervision and assisted by participation in research seminars. All candidates may be required to take any subject or attend any classes relevant to their M.A. subject. For certain students the professor in charge may plan M.A. courses which require a shorter thesis and give credit for time spent in the mastering of ancillary studies (such as languages, statistics, etc.), or in other course work.

Students pursuing the traditional M.A. course will submit a thesis not exceeding 50,000 words, excluding footnotes, bibliographies and appendices which are transcripts of relevant documents. For students pursuing a course giving more time to ancillary studies, the length of thesis will be prescribed by the professor in charge.

All M.A. students must write regular reports on the progress of their research as requested. An entry for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar.

Three copies of each thesis (international size paper, A4, measuring 297mm x 210mm, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library and one in the department. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommenda-tions of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4:6 in the University Calendar).

The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates.

Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candi-dature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY The Ph.D. in History is under the control of the Professorial Board rather than the Faculty of Arts, and is administered through the Secretary for Graduate Studies; but all' enquiries should be made in the first instance to the department of History. Admission to Ph.D. in History normally requires the completion of an M.A. at good honours standard,. although candidature may, in appropriate circumstances, be recommended after one year's post-graduate research experience following e B.A. honours degree of e suitable standard without the completion of the M.A. degree.

237

Faculty of Arts

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Chairman: Dr F. JOHN CLENDINNEN

Science is obviously a central phenomenon in our modern world, indeed there are good grounds for claiming that it is the distinguishing charac-teristic of "the advanced nations". It is therefore important that humani-ties students, who do not want to study science as such, should never-theless have an opportunity to study the way in which science has developed, how it has changed the framework of aur world vision and our mode of thought, as well as our material environment.

ORDINARY DEGREE

The subjects offered by the department are as follows: Grade One: H.P.s.1. Grade Two: H.P.S.2A and H.P.S.2 В . Grade Three: H.P.S.3C and 3F.

A major in H.P.S. will consist of one subject from each grade. An H.P.S. major may be enriched at either the second or third year level by taking an additional H.P.S. subject of the appropriate grade. The grade two and three subjects are constituted from units (which are also available for separate enrolment by students in the Science Faculty). Most of these units are designed expressly to be suitable for Arts students with no scientific or mathematical knowledge. The topics dealt with in these units are chosen because:

(1 ) They are comprehensible to students who have no previous scien-tific or mathematical training.

(2) They are central to the development of science. (3) They can be shown to have played a major part in modifying man's

view of himself or his intellectual or material environment.

These units, which each run for half the academic year, are as follows: 202 GeneraI Philosophy of Science, first half of the year. 223 Darwinism, first half of the year. 224 The Scientific Revolution, second half of the year. 225 History of Public Health and Germ Theory, second half of the year. 311

H.P.S.(Ed.), first half of the year; the syllabus for this unit will be available from the department by December. (This unit is avail-able to second year students.)

324) These third year units are developments of 32511 224 and 225 respectively.

There are also two units available which do presuppose some back-ground in mathematics. 201 Philosophy of Mathematics, second half of the year. Mathematics

to about H.S.C. standard will be assumed. 212 History of Mathematics В , Tecros 11 and Ill. Students without

University mathematics should consult with the lecturer before enrolling.

See the details of subjects below for the way these units may be taken in an Arts course. The details of the units follow the details of the subjects.

238

History and Philosophy of Science

Mixed Majors. A number of mixed majors, including H.P.S. subjects together with science, philosophy or history subjects are available. In particular the following are available. H.P.S.1 or Social Biology, Social History; H.P.S. 3(C or F) including units 225 and 325. Epistemology, Logic and Methodology, Philosophy 2L, 3L or 3LL, may replace the second or third year H.P.S. subject respectively In the normal major. B.Sc. units to the value of 8 points may replace H.P.S.1 and some sequences of two science or mathematics units and H.P.S. 3 с or 3F constitute a major. There are also majors with H.P.S. and either one or two of the Statistics 200 and 300 (see pp. 408 ff.). Students should note that it is possible for other combinations, provided they constitute a reasonable sequence of study, to be approved by Faculty as majors. Anyone with such a proposal should consult the chair-man of the department.

Note: Students with appropriate prerequisites who wish to concentrate on H.P.S. may take an enriched H.P.S. major, or a major in H.P.S. together with a mixed-major including H.P.S. subjects.

136-141 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 1 John Clendinnen, Monica MacCallum

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week. The substance of the course will be confined to two lectures a week. The third lecture will be used for films, class exercises, etc. No scientific or mathematical knowledge will be presupposed in this course. Written work will be required during the year and this will be taken into account in the final result.

SYLLABUS

The subject consists of two components (which may be taken as sepa-rate units by Science students). Internal students will take components (a) and (b). External students, (c) and (b).

(a) EXPLANATION AND METHOD IN THE NATURAL AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (First half of the year)

The lectures will, in part, discuss how far the concepts and methods of the natural sciences are significant for the social sciences.

BO O КЅ A guide to preliminary reading will be available from the H.P.S. Depart-ment's office in the Old Arts Building from December.

(b) HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY (Second half of the year)

The main concern will be e detailed study of the development of astronomical theories using, where possible, the writings of the aden-tists concerned. This study will involve a discussion of the problems that had to be faced, the emergence of the new concepts necessary to solve these problems and the general outlook end philosophy of the times dealt with.

239

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Adler I The Sun and its Family, Signet Science Library 1962 Moore Patrick Basic Astronomy, Oliver & Boyd 1968 Toulmin S & Goodfield J The Fabric of the Heavens, Pelican 1963 Prescribed textbooks: •Roneoed Source Material issued by the department. •Cohen I B The Birth of a New Physics, Heinemann 1961 •Koestler A The Watershed, Heinemann Science Study Series. Also

contained in The Sleepwalkers, Hutchinson 1959 Kuhn T S The Copernican Revolution, Harvard paperback 1973

(c) HISTORY OF THEORIES OF GENERATION AND INHERITANCE

(This will replace component (a) for External students.) No lectures or tutorials are given, students will be provided with study guides and written assignments will be set and corrected.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Asimov I Wellsprings of Life, Mentor 1967 Asimov 1 A Shon History of Biology, Natural History Press 1964 Prescribed textbooks: 'Roneoed Source Material issued by the department •Gasking E Investigations into Generation 1651-1828, Hutchinson 1967 • BBC Pamphlet The Science of Man, No. 3, "Egg to Adult"

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers. Candidates may be exempt from part or whole of the examinations by reaching a satisfactory standard in essays and class exercises.

Students who have already made satisfactory progress towards their B.A. degree may apply in writing to the department for permission to take this subject externally.

136-241 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2A (PASS)

136-242 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2В (PASS)

Neither of these subjects consists of a fixed syllabus. Each will consist of two units from the following list, normally one given in the first half of the year and one in the second half.

Units available in the first half of the year:

136-202 General Philosophy of Science 136-223 Darwinism 136-311 H.P.S. Education course (syllabus will be available by

December)

Units available in the second half of the year:

136-201 Philosophy of Mathematics

240

History and Philosophy of Science

136-212 History of Mathematics B (commences at the beginning of second term)

136-224 The Scientific Revolution 136-225 The History of Public Health and the Germ Theory

Details of these units are listed after the details of subjects H.P.S. Э C and 3F. A student taking one H.P.S. second year subject will enrol for H.P.S. 2A and also for the two units which they wish to constitute the subject. (This is required by Students' Records.) A student taking two H.P.S. second year subjects will enrol for H.P.S. 2A and H.P.S. 2B and also for the four units which they wish to consti-tute these subjects. (H.P.S. 2A will consist of the unit in the first half of the year with the lowest course number, together with the unit in the second half of the year with the lowest course number. H.P.S. 26 will consist of the other two units.) (Note: Arts students passing in Ч .P.S. 2A or 26 will be credited only with a pass In that subject and not also with passes in the constituent units. Students can not gain credit towards a B.A. degree for separate units. These units must be constituents of H.P.S. 2A, 26, 3C or 3F.)

136-343 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE .Э C (PASS)

136-344 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3F (PASS)

Each of these subjects will consist of three units, all of which must be distinct from any units taken as part of a second year H.P.S. subject. No more than two of the units may be taken In either half of the year. The units available are the same as those for H.P.S. 2A and 28 together with two distinctively third year units, 136-324 and 136-325. Each of these units are intended to complement and extend a corresponding second year unit; hence 136-324 may only be taken concurrently with 136-224, and likewise for 136-325 and 136-225. Students whose main interest is in the History of Science would normally take one of these combinations. Students are required to enrol for the constituent units as wel! as enrolling for the subject. (N.В .: see note following H.P.S. 2A and 2 В .)

DETAILS OF UNITS WHICH MAY CONSTITUTE GRADES 2 AND 3 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE SUBJECT

136-201 PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS Dr John Clendinnen

A course of 25 lectures, 12 tutorial classes and about 8 hours of practice classes in the second half of the year. An essay of about 2,000 words is part of the prescribed work in this subject.

SYLLABUS

(i) Introduction to formal methods: basic concepts of modern logic, the nature of axiomatic systems and discussion of these as analytical tools of philosophy.

(il) Introduction to the philosophy of mathematics: the foundations of geometry and Its relation to empirical science, and examination of

241

Faculty of Arts

the use of logic and axiomatics in examining the nature of mathe-matics, and an introductory discussion of the formalist, logicist and intuitionist schools of thought.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Kline Morris ed Mathematics in the Modern World, Sections I and IV Readings from Scientific American, W H Freeman & Co 1968

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Barker Stephen F Philosophy of Mathematics, Prentice-Hall paperbacks

Foundations of Philosophy series 1964 •Thomas N L Modern Logic, C. Barnes & Noble Co. series, NY 1966 (N.B. A fuller guide to preliminary reading and the suitability of various reference books will be available from the H.P.S. department office from January, 1975.)

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Candidates may be exempt from part of this paper by achieving a suitable standard in the essay and class assignments.

136-202 GENERAL PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Dr H. Kripa

A course of 25 lectures and 12 tutorials in the first half of the year. Two essays, each of about 2,000 words, are part of the prescribed work in the subject. There are no prerequisites for the subject.

SYLLABUS

General problems in the philosophy of science, including an investigation of the "scientific method" — is it rational?

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Popper K Conjectures and Refutations, Routledge and Kegan Paul. (b) Recommended for Reference: Skyrms B Choice end Chance, Dickenson Lakatos I Criticism and the Growth of Knowledge, Cambridge Kuhn T The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, 2nd ed

EXAMINATION. Assessment will be based on the two essays.

136-212 HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS B

Dr J. C. Pottage

A course of one 2-hour lecture-seminar per week throughout second and third terms. Prescribed written work amounting to one or more papers totalling approximately 2,000 words will be required and will count towards the final result in the unit.

SYLLABUS

Greek mathematics with special reference to Archimedes. The European successors of Archimedes and a study of the beginnings of the calculus

242

History and Philosophy of Science

in the seventeenth century. Students who have not done any university mathematics should consult the lecturer before enrolling.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Ball W W R A Short Account of the History of Mathematics, Dover (b) Prescribed Textbooks: •Duplicated Source Material issued by the H.P.S. Department 'Midonick H The Treasury of Mathematics, 2 vols, Pelican Heath T L A Manual of Greek Mathematics, Dover

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

136-223 DARWINISM Miss M. M. MacCallum

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week for the first half of the academic year. The substance of the course will be confined to two lectures a week; the third lecture will be used for class exercises and to compensate for lectures missed due to public holidays, etc. Essays and class assignments will be required during the course and will be taken into account in the final result.

SYLLABUS

A study of Darwin's ideas and some of the ways in which they have influenced the intellectual history and everyday life of modern man.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Kelly Peter Evolution and its implications, Mills & Boon 1962 or Simpson G G The meaning of evolution. Mentor 1951 Prescribed textbooks: •Appleman Philip ed Darwin, W W Norton & Co. 1970 •Darwin Charles The Origin of Species, Pelican Classics 1972

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper at the end of the year. Students may earn exemption from this examination by reaching a satisfactory standard in essays and class assignments given during the course.

136-224 THE SCIENTIFIC REVOLUTION Dr R. W. Home

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week for the second half of the academic year. Written work not exceeding 4,000 words will be required and will be taken into account in the final result.

SYLLABUS The emergence of modern science during the 17th and early 18th centuries.

243

Faculty of Arts

In 1975 the course will focus on the 17th century debates over what constituted the proper method for science. Particular attention will be paid to the ideas of Descartes, Leibniz and Newton, by means of a detailed study of certain of their writings.

BOOKS Preliminary reeding:

Cohen I B The Birth of a New Physics, Heinemann 1961 Prescribed textbooks: Haldane E S & Ross G R T eds The Philosophical Works of Des-

cartes, vol 1 Cambridge UP 1969 •Newton I Opticks, Dover 1952 •Alexander H G ed The Leibniz-Clarke Correspondence, Manchester UP

1956 Recommended for continual reference: Hall A R The Scientific Revolution, Fontana 1970

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work will be taken Into account in the final result.

136-225 HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND GERM THEORY

Miss D. J. Dyason

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week for the second half of the year. Approximately one lecture per week will be devoted to the factual scientific content necessary for an understanding of the historical material. Because of inter-faculty timetable problems up to five of these lecture times may be used to compensate for missed lectures and public holidays. The aim of this course is to study the development of scientific and medical ideas which have had important social or economic consequences.

SYLLABUS

Epidemiology and the development of the germ theory from Fracastorius to Koch with emphasis on the public health problems and reforms in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries which lead to the development of the National Health Service.

BOOKS

The emphasis will be on original scientific publications.

Preliminary reading:

Gale A H Epidemic Diseases, Penguin 1959 Postgate J Microbes and Man, Pelican 1969 Poynter F N L & Keele K D A Short History of Medicine, Mills & Boon

1961 Winslow C A E Man and Epidemics, Princeton 1962 Longmate N Alive and Well, Penguin 1970

Prescribed textbooks:

Winslow C A E Conquest of Epidemic Disease, Hafner 1967 Roneoed Source Material issued by the department. A further list available from the department in first term.

244

History and Philosophy of Science

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work and tests will be required and will be taken into account In assessing the final result.

136-311 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (EDUCATION)

A course of twenty-four lectures, sixteen in first term and eight in second, together with tutorial classes through both terms. No classes in third term.

SYLLABUS

An examination of some of man's attempts to understand the phenomenal world through explanatory systems of his own devising. What makes an explanation acceptable ('plausible', 'convincing', 'Irresis-tibi e')? Logical and psychological features of explanations which have counted as satisfactory, especially in their historical setting. Simplicity, elegance, generality, appeals to analogy.

BOOKS

A list will be available from the H.P.S. department office (Old Arts) from early in 1975.

EXAMINATION

The method of examining in this subject will be that of progressive assessment. Students will be required to submit no more than three essays (each approximately 1,500 words in length). The final assessment for pass or honours will be made on the basis of student's performance in these essays.

136-324 THE SCIENTIFIC REVOLUTION

(May only be taken concurrently with 136-224.) A course of one 2-hour lecture/seminar per week during the second half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS

A study in depth of some topics arising in unit 136-224.

EXAMINATION

Assessment will be based on written work presented during the course.

136-325 HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND GERM THEORY

(May only be taken concurrently with 136-225.) A one-and-a-half hour seminar each week in the second half of the year developing in depth themes from unit 136-225.

EXAMINATION

Assessment will be based on written work presented during the course.

HONOURS DEGREE

O. SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (For some possible combinations with this school see pp. 439 ff., and a pamphlet available from the Arts Faculty office.)

245

Faculty of Arts

The course for the degree for the pure History and Philosophy of Science Honours degree should be in accordance with the following pattern:

First year:

Second year:

Third year:

Fourth year:

H.P.S.1 and three other subjects (at least one history or philosophy subject is desirable, but not essential).

H.P.S. 2A at honours standard, together with two additional second year subjects one of which should be Philosophy 21. or an approved substitute. The course must include the unit "General Philosophy of Science"; this will normally be achieved by including it in a second or third year subject. But it is possible to take the unit separately as an extra.

H.P.S. 3C and 3F at honours standard.

136-461 H.P.S.4.

1. Students should consult with the chairman of the department for advice on their choice of subjects in second year and on whether a pure or combined honours course would best suit their interests.

2. Students may also be advised to attend other lecture courses which are relevant to their work.

3. The final honours examination will normally consist of three papers for H.P.S.4 together with essay work. In the final assessment, results in other subjects may be taken into account.

4. The interdepartmental programme in Eighteenth Century Studies' is available as a unit of H.P.S.4 in both pure and combined honours courses.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE IN COMBINED COURSES

The department will require the following subjects as part of a combined honours course: H.P.S.1. H.P.S.2A (hons) H.P.S.3C (hens) H.P.S.4.

The papers for combined honours students in fourth year will be reduced from three to one and a half, or to one paper and essay work.

136-261 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2A (HONS)

136-262 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 26 (HONS)

136-363 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Э C (HONS)

136-364 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3F (HONS)

Each of these subjects will be the same as the corresponding subject in the ordinary degree except that candidates for honours will be

expected ta show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the essay work.

See pp. 425-427.

246

History and Philosophy of Science

136-461 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 4 Three lecture-seminars per week throughout the year, together with written work in the form of (a) seminar papers, and (b) essay work; either one 5,000 word essay per seminar course or as otherwise arranged, but not to exceed a total of 16,000 words. This will count towards the final examination result.

SYLLABUS

An Intensive study of topics in the history and philosophy of science to be decided on In the light of the scientific, historical and philosophical backgrounds of the students concerned.

EXAMINATION

Three 3-hour papers.

MASTER OF ARTS

136-601 0. SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject. They may be required to sit for an examination at honours standard in the field of the proposed thesis before the subject is approved. The work is to be carried out under the supervision of a member of the History and Philosophy of Science department to whom regular reports on progress are to be made. Normally candidates will also be required to attend two courses of weekly lecture-seminars as specified by the department. Written work will be required in such courses and It will constitute a part of the final examination. An M.A. approval form (obtainable from the Arts Faculty office) is to be submitted by the beginning of each year in which the student is a candidate for the M.A. degree (or for M.A. preliminary study). Three copies of each thesis (typed double-spaced on International stan-dard A4) are to be submitted together with an examination entry form for higher degrees (obtainable from Students' Records). The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6 in the University Calendar). Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of their thesis. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty, no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candi-dature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

MASTER OF SCIENCE

Suitar y qualified students (see Faculty of Science Handbook) may apply for M.Sc. candidature. Further advice may be obtained from the chairman of the department.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

Admission to Ph.D. candidature in H.P.S. normally requires the com-pletion of a master's degree at a suitably high standard.

247

Faculty of Arts

DEPARTMENT OF INDIAN STUDIES Chairman of Department: Mr S. N. Ray, M.A. (Calcutta and leid.)

Indology has been an estabifshed discipline In the West for more than a century, but its introduction in Australian universities is a recent develop-ment. Melbourne was the first university in Australia to establish a department of Indian Studies in 1961. The department offers courses in Indian history and civilization (a three year pass course and four year combined honours course) and a one year course in Bengali. It also accepts candidates for the degree of Master of Arts. The importance of Indian Studies is obvious. India possesses a very ancient civilization which is virtually unique in its continuity to modern times. In the past it has made great contributions to human progress; its achievements in philosophy, science, literature, arts, religion and social organization are universally recognized. Its population is only second in size to China's. Its cultural influence on China, Japan and the countries of South East Asia has been considerable. It is the world's largest demo-cracy, and in spite of its vast and complex problems, it is currently engaged in a momentous experiment in peaceful social engineering which has hardly any parallel in history. In view of the recent geo-political revolution which has tied up Australia's future with developments in Asia, it is vital that this country should produce a growing number of citizens who understand India well. The courses offered by the department are guided by an inter-disciplinary approach, and examine the living continuity of Indian civilization from the Harappan civilization to the present time, the harmonious co-existence of various schools of thought and religions, the significant social, political and cultural transformations brought about by Islam and western influences, and the problems and efforts of contemporary India. The course in Bengali would be particularly useful to those who wish to specialize in modern Indian intellectual developments. The language is one thousand years old and is spoken by over one hundred and fifteen million people in the Indian subcontinent; it also possesses the richest modern literature of India which includes the works of Rabindranath Tagore who in creative versatility and accomplishments was the peer of world figures like Dante and Goethe. Two prizes of $50 per annum are awarded by the Australia-india Society of Victoria and the Australian-Asian Association of Victoria to the best students in the first and the second year who take a major or a combined honours course in Indian Studies.

ORDINARY DEGREE

Indian Studies 1A may be taken as one subject in the Arts degree course or as the first part of a major which is completed with parts 28 and Э C or 2C and 38. After the first year the following courses will be offered: Modern Indian Political Thought and Movements (half-subject)

Indian Studies 2B or 36 Classical Indian Thought (half-subject) Modern Indian Literature (half-subject)

Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature (half-subject)

Indian Art and Architecture Indian Studies 2C or 3C (half-subject)

Islam in India (half-subject)

248

Indian Studies

Each of these courses constitutes only one half of a degree subject. Indian Studies 2 В or 38 shall consist of any two of these courses, and Indian Studies 2C or З C shall consist of any two not yet taken as part of Indian Studies 2 В or 3В .

These courses will be available to students of Indian Studies 2 В and 2C on the following basis:

INDIAN STUDIES 2B or 3B•

Classical Indian Thought Modern Indian Literature Modern Indian Political Thought

and Movements

INDIAN STUDIES 2C or 3C• Indian Art and Architecture Islam in India Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature

Available in 1975 and alternate years

Available in 1976 and alternate years

141-101 INDIAN STUDIES 1A Mr S. N. Ray, Mr A. Mojumder, Mr J. M. Dunham

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

An introductory course on Indian history and civilization devoted to the study of the relationship between traditional and modern India. The relationship will be examined with reference to the following selected themes: the family, caste and elements of continuity and change; major religions and religious reform movements; and the forces of national unity and regional diversity.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Cohn Bernard S India: The Social Anthropology of a Civilization,

Prentice-Hall paperback (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Thapar R & Spear P History of India, 2 vols Penguin 'Sources of Indian tradition, ed de Bary W T et al,

University paperback •Embree A T ed The Hindu Tradition, Vintage Books paperback 'Hanson A H & Douglas J India's Democracy, Weidenfeld & Nicol-

son paperback

(c) Recommended for reference: Basham A L The Wonder That Was India, Fontana paperback Lingat R The Classical Law of India, University of California Press Titus M T Islam in India and Pakistan, YMCA paperback Calcutta Sastri Sivanath A History of the Renaissance In Bengal, Editions

Indian Calcutta Seal Anil The Emergence of indian Nationalism, Cambridge University

Press paperback

•Indian Studies ЗВ or Э C will be taken by students enrolling In the half-subjects as grade III half-subjects, i.e. such students will normally be completing e major In the discipline.

2 vols Columbia

249

Faculty of Arts

Rudolf I. I & S H The Modernity of Tradition, Orient Longmans New Delhi

India 1974, a Reference Annual, Publications Division Govt of India New Delhi

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Students will be required to write two essays during the first two terms. These essays and performance in tutorials will be given due weight in the final assessment.

141-201 INDIAN STUDIES 2В (PASS) 141-261 INDIAN STUDIES 2 В (HONS) 141-202 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (PASS) 141-262 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (HONS)

Students are reminded that although Indian Studies 2B and 2C consist of two half-subjects, credit will not be given for one half-subject only. The final assessment of the examination will be based on the two papers together, and the students will pass or fail in both together.

141-301 INDIAN STUDIES 3В (PASS) 141-361 INDIAN STUDIES 36 (HONS) 141-302 INDIAN STUDIES Э C (PASS) 141-362 INDIAN STUDIES 3C (HONS)

Students enrolling in any of the half-units offered, where such units con-stitute the third part of a major, must enrol formally In either Indian Studies 3 В or Indian Studies Э C.

141-021 INDIAN STUDIES 2В (MODERN INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT AND MOVEMENTS) (Half-Subject) Mr S. N. Rey

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1975.

SYLLABUS

This will be an advanced study of some of the major Indian political thinkers and schools of thought during the twentieth century. Their ideas and activities will be examined in the context of contemporary political developments.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

de Bary W T ed et al Sources of Indian Tradition, Vol II, Columbia U paperback

•Pandey B N The Break-up of British India, Macmillan paperback •Ray S N ed Gandhi India and the World, Hawthorn Press Tagore Rabindranath Towards Universal Man, Asia Bombay Nehru Jawaharlal Toward Freedom, Beacon paperback

250

Indian Studies

'Hardy P The Muslims of British India, Cambridge University Press paperback

'Masani M R The Communist Party of India, Bharatiya Vidyabhavan Bombay

Kothari Rajni Politics in India, Little Brown & Co

(b) Recommended for reference:

Spate O H K & Learmonth india end Pakistan, Methuen Majumdar R C ed Struggle for Freedom, Vol Eleven of The History and

Culture of the Indian People, Bharatiya Vidyabhavan Bombay Varma V P Modern Indian Political Thought, L N Agarwal, Agra, India Rudolf L I and S H The Modernity of Tradition, Univ of Chicago Norman Dorothy ed Nehru the First Sixty Years, 2 vols, Godley Head Ahmad Aziz Islamic Modernism in India and Pakistan, OUP Haithcox J P Communism and Nationalism in India, Princeton Univ

Press

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. Tutorial work and essay will be given due weight in final assess-ment.

141-031 INDIAN STUDIES 3 В As above for 2 В but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-022 INDIAN STUDIES 2 В (CLASSICAL INDIAN THOUGHT) (Half-Subject) Mr J. M. Dunham

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available In 1975.

SYLLABUS

An introduction to the formative religious and philosophical literature of Hinduism. In 1975 special attention will be given to the Upanishads and to their most Important commentators.

Books

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

'Radhakrlshnan S The Principal Upanisads, Allen & Unwin Hiriyanna M Outlines of Indian Philosophy, Allen & Unwin

(b) Recommended for reference:

Deutsch E Advaita Vedanta A Philosophical Reconstruction, East-West Center Press

Edgerton F The Beginnings of Indian Philosophy, Allen & Unwin Eliade M Yoga Immortalily and Freedom, Routledge & Kegan Paul

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. Tutorial work and essay will be given due weight in final assess-ment.

251

Faculty of Arts

141-032 INDIAN STUDIES 3D As above for 2 В but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-023 INDIAN STUDIES 26 (MODERN INDIAN LITERATURE) (Half-Subject) Mr A. Mojumder, Mr S. N. Ray

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1975.

SYLLABUS

This will be a study of Modern Indian literatures with prescribed literary texts in English translation. Background material will be provided by the department.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

•Bandopadhyay Manik Padre river Boatman, University of Queensland Press

•Pillai T A Chemmeen, Jaico Bombay Jussawalla A New Writing in India, Penguin •Tagore Rabindranath Chaturenga, Sahitya Akademi Delhi •Premchand Goden, Jaico Bombay •Banerjee Bibhutibushan Pather Panchali, Allen & Unwin •Tagore Rabindranath One Hundred and One, Asia Bombay •Chitre Dilip ed An Anthology of Marathi Poetry, Nirmala Sadanand

Publishers Bombay •BanerjeeTarasanker Ganadevata, Kutub-Popular Bombay •Contemporary Indian Shon Stories, series I and Il, Sahitya Akademi

Delhi •Pendse S N Wild Bapu of Garambi, Sahitya Akademi Delhi •Ray S N & Maddern M eds I have seen Bengal's Face, Editions Indian

Calcutta

(b) Recommended for reference:

•Chatterjee S K Languages and Literatures of India, Bengal Publishers

Calcutta Contemporary Indian Literature: A Symposium, 2nd ed Sahitya Akademi

New Delhi Modernity and Contemporary Indian Literature, Institute of Advanced

Study, Simla, India Kripalani K Modern Indian Literature, Nirmala Sadanand Pub Bombay

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay.

141-033 INDIAN STUDIES 36 As above for 29 but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

252

Indian Studies

141-024 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (SANSKRIT AND PRAKRIT LITERATURE) (Half-Subject) Mr J. M. Dunham

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available ln 1976.

SYLLABUS

Some major works of Classical Sanskrit and Prakrit literature (lyrical, didactic, narrative and dramatic) will be studied in translation. The course also includes the study of Indian poetics.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

Keith A B Classical Sanskrit Literature, YMCA Calcutta Wells H W Six Sanskrit Plays, Asia London Edgerton F E ed Kalidasa, The Cloud Messenger, Ann Arbor paperback Yohannan J D A Treasury of Asian Literature, Mentor Ryder A W tr Pancatantra, Jaico Bombay Tawney C H tr Stories from Somadeva's Kathasaritsagara, Jaico Bombay Francis H T and Thomas E J Jataka Tales, Jaico Bombay Miller B S Bhartrihari: Poems, Columbia UP 1967

(b) Recommended for reference:

Dasgupta S N and De S K A History of Sanskrit Literature, Vol I Calcutta University

De S K History of Sanskrit Poetics, Firma K L Mukhopadhyaya Calcutta

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. Tutorial work and essay will be given due weight In final assess-ment.

141-034 INDIAN STUDIES 3C As above for 2C but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-025 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (INDIAN ART AND ARCHITECTURE) (Half-Subject) Mr S. N. Ray

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1976.

SYLLABUS

An historical survey of Indian painting, sculpture and architecture to the end of the Hindu period, with some discussion of the canons of Hindu-Buddhist art.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Winstedt Sir Richard ed Indian Art, Sidgwick & Jackson paperback, London

Rowland Benjamin Art in East and West, Beacon paperback, Boston.

53

Faculty of Arts

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Rowland Benjamin The Art and Architecture of India, Pelican paper-back

•Brown P Indian Architecture: Buddhist and Hindu, Taraporevala, Bombay.

Rawson Philip Indian Sculpture, Dutton-Vista paperback, New York and London

•Dasgupta S N Fundamentals of Indian Art, Bharatiya Vidyabhavan, Bombay

(c) Recommended for reference:

Zimmer H The Art of Indian Asia, 2 vols Pantheon Coomaraswamy A K The Transformation of Nature in Art, Dover Coomaraswamy A K History of Indian and Indonesian Art, Dover Saraswati S K A Survey of Indian Sculpture, Firma K L Mukhopadhyaya,

Calcutta Indian Aesthetics and Art Activity, Indian Institute of Advanced Study

Simla India Zimmer H Myths and Symbols in Indian Art and Civilization, Harper

Torchbooks

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. Tutorial work and essay will be given due weight in final assessment.

141-035 INDIAN STUDIES Э C As above for 2C but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-026 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (ISLAM IN INDIA) (Half-Subject) Mr A. Mojumder

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1976.

SYLLABUS

An introduction to Islam's contribution to religion, culture, and social and political developments in India. Its scope will be limited mainly to the pre-British period.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Titus M T Islam In India and Pakistan, YMCA Calcutta

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Sources of Indian Tradition, Compiled by de Bary W T and others Vol I Chapters 14-19 only Columbia UP

•Tarachand Influence of Islam on Indian Culture, Indian Press Allahabad Husain Yusuf Glimpses of Medieval Indian Culture, Asia Bombay

•Mujeeb M The Indian Muslims, Allen & Unwin

Arberry A J Aspects of Islamic Civilization and Culture, OUP

254

Indian Studies

(c) Recommended for reference:

The History and Culture of the Indian People, Vol 6 Bharatiya Vidyabhan Bombay

Smith Vincent Oxford History of India, Oxford paperback Ahmad Aziz Studies in Islamic Culture in the Indian Sub-continent.

Oxford

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. Tutorial work and essay will be given due weight in final assessment.

141-036 INDIAN STUDIES 3C As above for 2C but taken as grade 3 half-subject.

INDIAN LANGUAGE: ORDINARY DEGREE

Of the fourteen major languages of India, Bengali has experienced the greatest literary development during the last 150 years. It Is spoken by 40 million people in West Bengal and by 75 million people in Bangla Desh. The department offers a one-year terminal course in Bengali which may be taken as a single subject, or as a part of the combined honours course in Indian Studies.

141-111 BENGALI Mr A. Mojumder, Miss M. Maddenn

A course of two lectures per week plus two tutorials throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) General historical outline of the origln and development of the Bengali language.

(ii) Basic elements of Bengali grammar, phonetics, phonology and orthography.

(iii) Spoken Bengali. (iv) Reading from set texts, translation from Bengali into English and

from English into Bengalt.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

•Dimmock E C An Introduction to Bengali, Part I, East West Center Press Hawaii University Honolulu

Sen Sukumar History of Bengali Literature, Sahitya Akademi Delhi Tagore Ram ndranath Sanchayita, Viswabharatl Calcutta •Sengupta Subodh ed Samlad Bengali-English Dictionary, Sahitya

Samlad Calcutta

The department will supply transcript material on Bengali grammar, pronunciation, vocabulary and prescribed texts.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test.

255

Faculty of Arts

141-029 INTRODUCTORY HINDI (Half-Subject)

A course of one lecture and one tutorial (including language laboratory work) per week throughout the year. Introductory Hindi may be taken as a grade one half-subject, or in combination with half-subjects in grade two or grade three, or as a part of the combined honours course in Indian Studies, subject to the approval of the chairman of the department.

SYLLABUS

Basic elements of Hindi grammar, phonetics, phonology and orthog-raphy; spoken Hindi; reading from set texts and translation from Hindi Into English.

B O O КЅ

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

•Gumperz John J Hindi Reader, vol 1, Center for South Asia University of California Berkeley Calif

McGregor R S Hindi Grammar, Cambridge University Press Fairbanks Gordon H & others Hindi Exercises and Reading, Cornell

University Press •Student's Model Dictionary (Hindi-English), Subodh Granthamala Karya-

laya Ranchi Bihar India The department will supply transcript material on Hindi grammar, pronunciation, vocabulary and prescribed texts.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper.

HONOURS DEGREE

S. SCHOOL OF INDIAN STUDIES

Indian Studies may at present only be taken in combined honours schools. These combined honours schools will include a selection of pass courses in Indian Studies and Bengali together with such honours work as may be agreed from time to time by the chairmen of the departments concerned and approved by the Faculty. The fourth year programme will also include thesis work to be approved in consultation with the two chairmen of departments concerned. Currently the department offers special honours level courses in the following subjects: Indian Historiography; Indian Aesthetics; Indian Social Organization; Regional History (Bengal); Buddhist Religion and Phili-sophy; Tagore and his Age; and Tribal India. Details of courses are available from the department. Students who wish to proceed to a combined honours course involving the School of Indian Studies should seek approval from the chairman of the department and from Faculty through the Sub-Dean.

MASTER OF ARTS

141-601 S. SCHOOL OF INDIAN STUDIES

Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires either BA degree with honours, or BA ordinary degree and subsequent

256

Information Science

completion of MA preliminary work as prescribed by the Faculty of Arts. MA preliminary work in Indian Studies consists of at least two years of part-time work in honours subjects including the completion of a thesis. The examination for the degree of Master of Arts is by thesis. Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject (which should not exceed 50,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, bibliography and catalogue raisonne). They will work under the super-vision of a member of the Indian Studies department, to whom they must report regularly on the progress of their work. They may also be required to attend seminars or lectures bearing on their subject. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates Is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6, in the University Calendar.) The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candi-dature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION SCIENCE Students taking Information Science units will be required to spend time on practical assignments in addition to lectures, practice classes and tutorials. However the total time involved for each unit should be approxi-mately the same as that for any other Science unit of similar level and point score.

Arts students should note the following:

(I) Credit at grade 1 level can be offered to students who have successfully completed the 3 units 101 (or 111), 102 and 103.

(ii) Credit at grade 2 level can be offered only to students who have successfully completed the 3 units 201, 202 and 203.

(iii) Credit at grade 3 level can be offered only to students who have successfully completed 3 units, i.e. 301, 302 or 312 and 303 or 313.

622-101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Twenty-four lectures, eight 1-hour tutorials, first term (day) or second term (evening), 3 points. A course of three lectures and one 1-hour tutorial per week during first term (day lectures) and repeated in second term (evening lectures).

257 J

Facuty of Arts

SYLLABUS

Problem solving techniques, flowcharts, number systems, introduction to computers, programming languages, elementary programming using Fortran IV.

PRACTICAL WORK

Tutorials are an integral part of the course and specified programming projects must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the first term.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Watkins R P Computer Problem Solving, Wiley 1974 Schaeffer G F Introducing Computers, Wiley 1974 McCracken D D A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, 2nd ed Wiley

1972 Andree R V Andree J P & Andree D D Computer Programming: Tech-

niques, Analysis and Mathematics, Prentice-Hai 1973

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects and practical work completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-111 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

Two to three weeks full time during the summer vacation. This unit is substantially similar to COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 101, but the lectures, practical work and examination are done in a 2-3-week period towards the end of the summer vacation.

622-102 DATA STRUCTURES

Twenty-four lectures, eight 1-hour practice classes second term, 3 points. A knowledge of 622-101 will be assumed. A course of three lectures and one 1-hour practice class per week during second term.

SYLLABUS

Data structures, concepts and algorithms used in the solution of non-numerical problems. Applications to data management systems, file organization, information retrieval, list processing and programming languages.

PRACTICAL WORK

Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified program-ming projects must be completed satisfactorily end presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the second term.

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Page E S & Wilson L B Information Representation and Manipulation

in a Computer, Cambridge University Press

258

Information Science

Berztiss A T Data Structures: Theory and Practice, Academic Press Knuth D The Art of Computer Programming, vol 1 Fundamental Algo-

rithms, Addison-Wesley

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-103 PROGRAMMING APPLICATIONS

Twenty-four lectures, eight 1-hour practice classes, third term, 3 points. A knowledge of 622-101 will be assumed. A course of three lectures and a 1-hour practice class in third term.

SYLLABUS

Applications of computer programming to the solution of problems including numerical integration, summation of series, numerical solution of linear and non-linear equations, simulation, pseudo-random numbers, generation of statistical distributions, structural representation, plotting.

PRACTICAL WORK

Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified pro-gramming projects must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the second term.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

McCracken D A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, Wiley

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

PRACTICAL WORK

Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified pro-gramming projects must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the second term.

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-201 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

Twenty-four lectures, eight 1-hour practice classes second term, 4 points. Prerequisites: 822-101 or equivalent. A course of three lectures and a 1-hour practice class per week during second term.

SYLLABUS Assembly language programming.

259

Science Unit Course

Lectures Practical Work Faculty Prerequisites

Special (Hours) Points

Conditions Score

till Computer Programming 1111 Computer Programming

102 Data Structures 103 Programming Applications 201 Computer Programming

202 Numerical Methods

203 Computers: Logical Design and Organization

301 Computers: Systems, Programming

302 Numerical Methods for Linear Systems

•303 Numerical Analysis of Continuous Functions

•313 Data Structures and Data Management

24 8 3 24 8 3 24 8 3 24 8 3 24 8 4 Information

Science 101 or Information Science 111

24 8 4 Information Science 101 or Information Science 111 Mathematics 171 or Mathematics 131 & Mathematics 132

24 8 4 Information Science 201

24 16 6 Information Science 203

24 16 6 Information Science 202 Any three 200 level Mathematics including 273

24 16 6 Information Science 202 Any three 200 level Mathematics including 294

24 16 6 Information Science 301

leld in Summer vacation.

1

In special cases some prerequisites may be waived by the Head of

> the Department of In- formation Science.

1These are alternate units. These are alternate units.

Information Science

622-202 NUMERICAL METHODS

Twenty-four lectures, eight 1-hour practice classes third term, 4 points. Prerequisites: 622-101, 618-131, 618-132 or equivalents. A course of three lectures and a 1-hour practice class per week during third term.

SYLLABUS

Error analysis, finite differences, polynomial approximation, solution of linear equations, solution of non-linear equations, numerical integration.

PRACTICAL WORK

Specified programming projects and numerical exercises must be com-pleted satisfactorily and presented for assessment before the end of third term.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference: Henrici P Elements of Numerical Analysis, Wiley Williams P W Numerical Computation, Nelson

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects and practical work completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-203 COMPUTERS: LOGICAL DESIGN AND ORGANIZATION

Twenty-four lectures, eight 1-hour practice classes first term, 4 points. Prerequisites: 622-101, or equivalent. A course of three lectures and a 1-hour practice class per week during first term.

SYLLABUS

Boolean algebra, fundamentals of computer design, memory systems, sequential machines, design of computer systems.

PRACTICAL WORK

A record of practical work must be kept and be available for inspection as required.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Seigel P Understanding Digital Computers, Wiley

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-301 COMPUTERS: SYSTEMS, PROGRAMMING Twenty-four lectures, eight 2-hour practice classes first term, 6 points. Prerequisites: 622-203, 622-201 or equivalents.

281

Faculty of Arts

A course of three lectures and a 2-hour practice class per week during first term.

SYLLABUS

Advanced programming, operating systems, compiler techniques.

PRACTICAL WORK

Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified pro-gramming projects must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the first term.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Collin A J T Introduction to Operating Systems, Macdonald Cuttle G & Robinson P B Executive Programs and Operating Systems,

Macdonald Hopgood F R A Compiler Techniques, Macdonald

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-302 NUMERICAL METHODS FOR LINEAR SYSTEMS

Twenty-four lectures, eight 2-hour practice classes second term, 6 points. Prerequisites: 622-202, any three 200 level maths including 218-273 or equivalents. A course of three lectures and a 2-hour practice class per week during second term.

SYLLABUS

Solution of linear equations by direct methods, matrix inversion, deter-mination of eigen values and eigen vectors, iterative solution of linear equations.

PRACTICAL WORK

Specified programming projects and the numerical exercises must be completed satisfactorily and presented for assessment before the end of second term.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Fox L An Introduction to Numerical Linear Algebra, OUP Isaacson E & Keller H B Analysis of Numerical Methods Faddeeva V N Computational Methods of Linear Algebra, Dover Wilkinson J H The Algebraic Eigenvalué Problem, OUP

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

262

Information Science

622-303 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS FOR CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS

Twenty-four lectures, eight 2-hour practice classes third term, 6 points. Prerequisites: 622-202, any three 200 level maths including 618-294 or equivalents. A course of three lectures and a 2-hour practice class per week during third term.

SYLLABUS

Interpolation, numerical integration and differentiation, numerical solu- tion of ordinary differential equations, approximation of functions.

PRACTICAL WORK

Specified programming projects and the numerical exercises must be completed satisfactorily and presented for assessment before the end of third term.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference: Henrici P Elements of Numerical Analysis, Wiley Hildebrand F B Introduction to Numerical Analysis, 2nd ed

Hill 1974 Action F S Numerical Methods that Work, Harper & Row 1970

EXAMINATION

One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-312 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

Twenty-four lectures, eight 2-hour practice classes second term, 6 points. Prerequisite: 622-201 or equivalent. A course of three lectures and a 2-hour practice class per week during the second term.

SYLLABUS

String processing principles, the SNOBOL4 language, assembly language macros, general purpose macro-processors, pseudo processors, string language implementation.

PRACTICAL WORK Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified pro-gramming projects must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of second term.

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Griswold Plage and Polonsky The Snowbol4 Programming Language, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall

Waite Implementing Software for Non-numeric Applications, Prentice-

Hall

McGraw-

263

Faculty of Arts

Griswold The Macro Implementation of Snobol4, Freeman Campbell-Kelly An Introduction to Macros, vol 21 computer mono-

graphs Macdonald/American Elsevier Gries Compiler Construction for Digital Computers, Wiley EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming pro-jects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-313 DATA STRUCTURES AND DATA MANAGEMENT Twenty-four lectures, eight 2-hour practice classes third term, 6 points. Prerequisites: 622-201 or equivalent. A course of three lectures and a 2-hour practice class per week during third term. SYLLABUS

Types and properties of data structures, searching and sorting techniques, file management, handling of data on peripheral devices. PRACTICAL WORK Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified pro-gramming projects must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of third term. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Foster J M List Processing, MacDonald-Elsevier Iverson K E A Programming Language, Wiley EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined. Programming projects completed during the term may be assessed as part of the examination.

622-401 SCHOOL OF INFORMATION SCIENCE-В .SC. HONS Candidates are required to:

(i) Study a selected research topic in Computer Science and write a report of the study embodying a literature survey and a description of the experimental and theoretical work carried out by the candidate.

(ii) Attend specified lectures. (iii) Attend colloquia on selected topics one of which they may be

required to deliver. (iv) Sit for examinations as required.

622-601 M.A.-SCHOOL OF INFORMATION SCIENCE

DEPARTMENT OF ITALIAN Chairman of Department: Mr C. A. McCORMICK, Cavaliere dell 'Ordine al

Merito della Repubblica Italiana, B.A. (Cantab.)

INTRODUCTION . The department of Italian offers a full range of courses at both Pass and Honours levels. Teaching in the first-year course (Italian 1) assumes

264

Italian

that students have gained at least a D grade pass in Italian at H.S.C. Students who have not reached this standard are strongly advised to consult the department before enrolling. When possible, the department also accepts a small number of beginners who have proved language learning ability and offers them, by means of a Summer School and extra tuition throughout the year, the chance to complete Italian 1 (see details below). Apart from English, Italian is the most used language in Australia. It is very natural that many students of Italian origin should choose to study Italian at the University and thus to gain a familiarity with the culture of the land from which they or their parents have come. It is equally natural that Australians who are not of Italian origin should wish to study a language and a culture of great intrinsic importance and also of particular relevance to Australia. The department seeks to provide courses that will be of interest to both groups, but it aims to set stan-dards which can be achieved by those for whom Italian is a foreign language. Modern Italian is taught progressively throughout the department's courses, but it is a particular feature of Italian that the written literary language has remained remarkably stable throughout the country's long history. Texts of the 13th century are written in what is still, funda-mentally, the language of today. To read Dante does not require the learning of 'Old Italian'. This means that, potentially, almost 1,000 years of Italian literature is available to the student. The department cannot, of course, cover everything, but It attempts, through an introductory course in first year and a range of optional choices in subsequent years, to give students both a general overall view and to allow them to study in depth the authors or periods which they find most interesting.

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the honours courses are set out at the end of this section.) Subjects offered:

Italian Part 1 Italian Part 2A (Pass) Italian Part 26 (Pass) Italian Part 3 (Pass)

A normal 3-year sequence, i.e. a major in Italian, consists of Italian 1, Italian 2A and Italian 3. Italian 2B can be taken in conjunction with Italian 2A by students who wish to take two Grade 2 subjects in Italian.

BOOKS

The books listed hereunder are for general consultation. Detailed reading lists for each course will be issued at the beginning of the year.

(a) Grammars

Battaglia S e Pernlcone V La grammatica italiana, Loescher Torino Trabalza C e Allodoll E Le grammatica degl'italiani, Le bonnier Firenze Jones F J A Modern Italian Grammar, ULP Shewring W Italian Prose Usage, CUP

(b) Dictionaries

Cassell's Italian Dictionary Purves J English-Italian, Italian-English Dictionary, Routledge Hazon M Dizionario inglese-italiano, italiano-inglese, Garzanti Milano

265

Faculty of Arts

The Cambridge Italian Dictionary, Vol I Italian-English CUP Cappuccini G e Migliorini B Vocabolario della lingua italiana, Paravia

Torino Zingarelli N Vocabolario della lingua italiana, Zanichelli Bologna Panzini A Dizionario moderno, Hoepli Milano Gabriel!! A Dizionario linguistico moderno, Mondadori Milano Dizionario Garzanti della lingua italiana, Garzanti per tutti Dizionario Garzanti italiano-inglese inglese-italiano, Garzanti per tutti

(c) Histories of Literature

Wilkins E H History of Italian Literature, Harvard UP Whitfield J H History of Italian Literature, Penguin Sapegno N Compendio di storia della letteratura italiana, La Nuova Italia

Firenze Rossi V Storia della letteratura italiana, Vallardi Milano Flora F Storie della letteratura italiana, Mondadori Milano Various authors Storie letteraria d'Italia, Vallardi Milano Binni W & Scrivano R Introduzione ai problemi critici della letteratura

italiana, D'Anna (d) Histories

SalvatoreIli L. Sommario della storia d'Italia, Einaudi Tо riпо Rodolico N Storia degli italiani, Sansoni Firenze Trevelyan J P A Shen History of the Italian People, Allen & Unwin

READING COURSE

A reading course consisting of an intensive Summer School followed by not more than two 1% hour sessions per week in first and second terms, may be available for a limited group of students with no previous knowledge of Italian but with proved language learning ability. The course is designed to help students of other departments who are required to read Italian. Admission to the group will be based on personal inter-view. Students interested must contact the department not later than 14 February.

149-101 ITALIAN PART 1 A course of four lectures per week, with one tutorial class and one lan- guage laboratory session throughout the year. Facilities for private study in the language laboratory will also be available.

This course assumes that students have reached matriculation standard in Italian and is a prerequisite for Italian part 2A and part 26.

SUMMER SCHOOL AND SPECIAL COURSE

A special course consisting of an intensive Summer School followed by two hours per week extra tuition throughout the year, may be available for a limited group of students with no previous knowledge of Italian but with proved language learning ability, who are enrolled for Italian part 1. Selection for admission to the group will be based on personal interview. Students interested must contact the department not later than 14 February. Italian Part 1 builds on the knowledge of the language gained for H.S.C. A revision of grammar is carried out through prose translation classes and composition exercises are used to increase facility in written expres-

266

Italian

sill. Conversation practice and practice in understanding the spoken language are given in tutorials and through the language laboratory sessions. During first term a modern text is studied in tutorials both as a basis for conversation and for translation. During the rest of the year conver-sation is based on texts illustrating contemporary Italy. The main literary element in the course is the Introduction to the History of Italian literature. These lectures are based on selected readings from the main authors and include also orientation lectures on the principal periods. Another series of classes, based on selected readings, give an outline of the history of Italy during the 19th and 20th centuries and illustrate some aspects of contemporary life in the country, the political situation, the education system, etc. Further lectures Introduce students to literary appreciation and deal with the modern text prescribed for literary study.

SYLLABUS

(i) Translation of prescribed texts and unseen translation. (ii) Translation into Italian; composition in Italian; grammar and syntax. (iii) Conversation. (iv) Literary study. (v) Introduction to the history of Italian literature.

(vi) Introduction to modern Italy.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK

A fortnightly tutorial class on history of literature and contemporary texts.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Cole J P Italy, Chatto & Windus Pettoello D An Outline of Italian Civilization, Cassell Solmi A The Making of Modern Italy, Benn Salvadori M Italy, Prentice-Hall (b) Prescribed textbooks:

McCormick C A Basic Italian Grammar, Cheshire •Levi C Cristo s1 ě fermato a Eboli, Harrap •Cerutti T A Guide to Composition in Italian, CUP •Lennie D Posso Presentarle? Longman •Silone I L'avventura di un povero cristiano, Oscar Mondadori N.B. Students intending to proceed beyond Italian part 1 are strongly recommended to acquire Cappuccio C Storia della letteratura Italiana, Sansonl Firenze.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, the first on translation into Italian, unseen translation into English and composition In Italian: the second on history of litera-ture; an oral test of about 15 minutes which will iпс lиде questions on item (v1) of the syllabus; class tests on translation, composition and history of literature and an essay on the modern literature which must be completed before the annual examinations and will be taken into account In the determination of examination results.

267

Faculty of Arts

149-201 ITALIAN PART 2A (PASS)

A course of not more than four lectures per week and one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

1. Translation and composition.

2. Introduction to literary criticism.

3. Literary and linguistic exercises based on aspects of 20th century I iterature.

4. 20th century Italian literature studied through selected poetry, novels and drama.

5. One of the following units: (i) The 19th century novel.

(ii) 19th century poetry. (iii) Historical Grammar.

6. Conversation and modern reading.

In special circumstances students may be permitted to take Dante (Inferno) instead of item 5. Their course must be approved by the chairman of department.

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer any of the units in item 5 above. Students must submit their choice of unit for approval by the chairman of department not later than 14 February.

WRITTEN WORK

Weekly exercises on item 1; a total of six exercises on item 3; an essay on item 4: an essay or written exercise on item 5; a composition in Italian ort a literary topic based on item 6. Students choosing to write one of their essays in Italian will be exempted from the composition. This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant units): •Fuchi F L'italiano facile, Feltrinelli Milano (1 and 3) •Pirandello L Three Plays, ed Firth, Manchester UP (4) •Testori G L'Arialda, Feltrinelli Economica Milano (4) •Brancati V La governante, Bompiani Milano (4) •Moravia A Racconti romani, Bomplani Scolastica Milano (4) •Campanile A Manuale di conversazione, Rizzoli Milano (4) •Manzoni A I Promessi Sposi, ed Momigliano, Sansoni Firenze (5(i)) Verge G 1 Malavoglia, Mondadori Scolastica Milano (5(1)) Varga G Mastro-don Gesualdo, Mondadori Scolastica Milano (5(i))

'Leopardi G Canti, ed Whitfield, Manchester UP (5(ii)) •Le ire corone, ed Vicinelli, Mondadori Scolastica Milano (5(11)) •Rohlfs G Grammatica storica della lingua italiana e dei dialetti, vols

I & II, Piccola Biblioteca Einaudi Torino (5(1íi)) Further texts may be prescribed. Texts for item 6 will be available on loan from the department.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on item 4. Item 5 will be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both.

288

Italian

Language tests will be given each term. An oral test of about 15 minutes will Include questions on item 6 of the syllabus.

149-202 ITALIAN PART 2 В (PASS )

A course of not more than five lectures per week throughout the year with tutorial assistance as required. This subject is available only to students also taking Italian Part 2A (Pass) and will normally be taken in conjunction with it.

SYLLABUS

1. Advanced study of Italian. 2. Either Dante (Inferno) together with one further unit from item 5

of the Part 2A (Pass) syllabus. Or two further units from item 5 of the Part 2A (Pass) syllabus.

WRITTEN WORK

Written exercises and tests on item 1 during the year. An essay or written exercise on each of the units chosen in item 2. This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

•Dante Alighieri Le Divina Commedia, Vol 1, Inferno, ed Sapegno, La Nuova Italia Firenze, 2nd ed

•Di Salvo T Letture critice della Divina Commedia, Vol I. Inferno, La Nuova Italia Firenze

For other prescribed texts see Part 2A details.

EXAMINATION

Item 1 will be assessed on written work and tests during the year. A 3-hour paper on Dante (Inferno); other units taken will be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both.

149-301 ITALIAN PART 3 (PASS )

A course of not more than four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

1. Translation and Composition.

2. Two of the following areas: (1) Dante (Inferno) or Dante (Purgatorio)• (ii) Literature of the 13th and 14th centuries (iii) Literature of the Renaissance (iv) Literature of the 19th and 20th centuries (v) Historical Grammar or History of the Italian Language.• •

• Dente (Purgatorio) is available only to students who have previously completed Dante (Inferno). ••History of the Italian Language is available only to students who have previously completed Historical Grammar.

269

Faculty of Arts

3. An assignment, involving not more than 5 hours' class work, based on one of the areas in item 2. or Advanced Language Studies — a course of classes which investi-gates aspects of modern Italian and could be of particular interest to future teachers.

4. A group project. Under the direction of a supervisor, students will work in groups, each investigating an area of study and writing a report.

5. Conversation and modern reading.

WRITTEN WORK

Weekly exercises on item 1; a written assignment on item 3 (or exer-cises if Advanced Language Studies is chosen), an essay or written exercise on each of the areas chosen from item 2; a report on item 4; a composition on a literary topic based on item 5. Students choosing to write one of their essays in Italian will be exempted from the composition. This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant items): •Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia, Vol I, Inferno, ed Sapegno, La

Nuova Italia Firenze, 2nd ed (2(i) Inferno) •Di Salvo T Lettura critica della Divine Commedia, Vol I, Inferno, La

Nuova Italia Firenze (2(i) Inferno) •Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia, Vol Il, Purgatorio, ed Sapegno,

La Nuova Italia Firenze (2(i) Purgatorio) • Di Salvo T Lettura critica delle Divina Commedia, Vol II, Purgatorio, La

Nuova Italia Firenze (2(i) Purgatorio) •1l Novellino Biblioteca Universale Rizzoll Milano (2(ii)) •Dante Alighieri Le vite nuova, Sanson' Firenze (2(ii)) •Salinavi C & Ricci C Storia della letteratura italiana con antologia

degli scrittori e dei critici Vol I1, Laterza Bari (2(iii)) Manzoni A I Promessi Sposi, ed Mamigliano, Sansoni Firenze (2(iv))

•Verga G 1 Malavoglia, Edizioni scolastiche Mondadori Milano (2(iv)) •Da "Tute le Opere", Ungaretti, Montale, Quasimodo, ed Spagnoletti,

Edizioni scolastiche Mondadori Milano (2(iv)) •Rohlfs G Grammatica storica della lingua italiana e dei suoi dialetti,

Vols 1 & 2, Piccolo Biblioteca Einaudi Torino (2(v) Historical Grammar)

Meyer Luebke W Grammatica storica della lingue italiana e dei dialetti toscani, Loescher Torino (2(v) Historical Grammar)

•Migliorini B Storia delle lingua italiana, Universale Sansoni Firenze (2(v) History of Language)

Further texts may be prescribed.

EXAMINATION The areas selected from item 2 of the syllabus will each be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. Language tests will be given each term. An oral test of about 15 minutes which will include questions on item 5 of the syllabus.

270

Italian

HONOURS DEGREE

R. SCHOOL OF ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Combined honours courses are available with most other subjects. Students should consult the department for full details and advice in planning their courses.

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Italian lan-guage end literature will comprise the following subjects:

149-101 Italian part 1

149-261 Italian part 2C (Ions)

149-262 Italian part 2D (Ions)

149-361 Italian part 3A (Ions)

149-362 Italian part 3 В (Ions) 149-461 Italian part 4

in accordance with the details set out below.

Candidates for the degree with honours must take also four additional subjects at pass or honours standard, two of which should form a sub-major.

2. In their first year, candidates who intend to enter the honours school will take Italian part 1, and three additional subjects (one of which will normally form part of a sub-major) approved by the chairman of the department. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satis-factory performance in this first year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the honours school. The chairman of department will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Italian pert 1. Other candidates who wish to enter honours school must consult the chairman of department, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of each case.

3. In their second year, candidates will take the two honours courses. Italian part 2 course A and Italian part 2 course В , and the second part of their sub-major or additional remaining subject. In order to proceed to the third year, they will be required to be 'recommended ta proceed' at the end of the second year.

4. In their third year, candidates will take the honours courses, Italian part 3 Course A and Italien part 3 Course В . In their fourth year, candi-dates will take the honours course Italian part 4. The final examination will be held In two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, and part 2 at the end of the fourth year, and will consist of:

(a) At the end of the third year. Formal examination papers and other work and testing as set out in the details of Italian Part 3A (Ions) and Italian Part ЗВ (Ions).

(b) At the end of the fourth year. Formal examination papers, thesis, other work and testing as set out in the details of Italian Pert 4 (Ions).

271

Faculty of Arts

ITALIAN IN COMBINED SCHOOLS

Candidates taking Italian in a combined honours course will take the following Italian subjects: 1st year: Italian part 1 2nd year: Italian part 2C (Ions) 3rd year: Italian part ЗА (Hons)' 4th year: Italian part 4 (Hons)

'Students particularly interested in linguistic studies should consult the chairman of department about the possibility of varying their third year course. They are advised to take the Historical Grammar unit as part of their second year work and are referred to the note on this in the Italian part 2C (Ions) details. Honours students combining Italian with certain other foreign languages or with English may be permitted to specialize in Italian in their 4th year and should consult the department on the extra work in Italian that will be required of them in that year. (See also pp. 439 ff., and a pamphlet available from the Arts Faculty office.)

149-261 ITALIAN PART 2C (HONS)

A course of not more than five lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

1. Items 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 of the Part 2A (Pass) Syllabus. 2. Dante (Inferno).

N.B. Combined Honours students wishing to specialize in language may take Historical Grammar in place of the full item 4 of the Part 2A (Pass) syllabus. However their course, which requires approval by the chairman of department, must include a section of this item.

WRITTEN WORK

As for Part 2A (Pass) for those items taken in common; an essay on Dante (Inferno); an honours level assignment on either 20th century literature or Dante (Inferno). Students taking Historical Grammar will do their assignment either on Historical Grammar or on Dante (Inferno). This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

See Part 2A (Pass) for books prescribed for item 1. 'Dante Alighieri La Divine Commedia, Vol I, Inferno, ed Sapegno, La

Nuova Italia, Firenze, 2nd ed 'Di Salvo T Letture critica della Divina Commedia, Vol I, Inferno, La

Nuova Italia Firenze

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on item 4 of the Part 2A (Pass) syllabus and one on Dante (Inferno). Language and oral testing as for Part 2A (Pass).

N.B. Students taking Historical Grammar will do one 3-hour paper on this unit and one 3-hour paper on Dante (Inferno). Twentieth century

272

Italian

literature will be assessed on work during the year. Language and oral testing as above.

149-262 ITALIAN PART 2D (IONS) A course of not more than five lectures per week. (N.B. This subject is available only to Pure Honours candidates. It will be taken in addition to Italian Part 2C (Ions)).

SYLLABUS

1. Advanced study of Italian.

2. The 19th century novel.

3. 19th century poetry. 4. Historical Grammar.

WRITTEN WORK

Written exercises throughout the year on item 1; an essay or written exercise on each of items 2, 3 and 4. An honours level assignment on one of items 2, 3 and 4.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks:

Books as prescribed for the corresponding items under Italian Part 2A (Pass).

EXAMINATION

Item 1 will be assessed on written work and tests during the year. Items 2, 3 and 4 will each be examined either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by bath.

149-361 ITALIAN PART Э A (IONS) A course of not more than five lectures with one tutorial hour throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

1. Items 1, 3•, 4 and 5 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus.

2. Three of the areas from item 2 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus.• •

•Pure Honours students may not select Advanced Language Studies which they will take as part of the work in Part 3B (Ions). • 'Students who did not take Petrarch and Boccaccio In 1974 must include 13th and 14th century literature among the areas selected.

WRITTEN WORK An essay on each of two of the areas chosen and an honours level assignment on the third area. Other written work as for the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus. This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

273

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Books as prescribed for the corresponding items under Italian Part 3 (Pass).

EXAMINATION The areas selected in item 2 will each be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. Language and oral testing as for the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus.

149-362 ITALIAN PART 39 (HONS)

A course of not more than four lectures throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

1. History of the Italian language.

2. Dialectology.

3. Advanced Language Studies (see item 3 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus).

WRITTEN WORK

Two honours assignments and written exercises on items 1 and 2; written exercises on item 3.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant items): •Migliorini B Storks della lingua italiana, Universale Sansoni Firenze (1) •Migliorini B & Folena G Testi non-toscani del Trecento, Società

Tipografica Modenese Modena (2) •Migliorini B & Folena G Testi non-toscani del Quattrocento, Società

Tipografica Modenese Modena (2) Devoto G & Giacomelli G l dialetti delle regioni d'Italie, Sansoni Uni-

versità Firenze (2)

EXAMINATION

Items 1 and 2 will each be examined either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. Item 3 will be assessed on written and class work during the year.

149-461 ITALIAN PART 4 (HONS)

1. Advanced study of modern Italian.

2. Pure Honours students will take FIVE and Combined Honours students THREE of the units listed below. Each unit will consist of not more than 2 hours' class work per week.

(i) Dante (Paradiso)t (ii) The 20th century novel (iii) 20th century poetry (iv) The Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries

(v) Dialectology

274

Italian

(vi) La Questione della Lingua from Dante to the present day.•• (vii) Linguistic studies—assignments.• •

(viii) The Interdepartmental Programme in Eighteenth Century Stud-ies. (For details, soe p. 425.) Students wishing to take this unit must consult the chairman of department before 28 February, as some adjustments in the rest of their course may have to be made.

tPrerequisite Dante (Purgatorio) ••Prerequisite Historical Grammar. The department reserves the right

not to give any of the units in 2 above. З . Each student will be required to prepare under the guidance of a

supervisor and submit in third term a thesis in Italian on an approved topic of his choice. Alternatively the thesis may be written in English but a substantial essay in Italian on an approved literary or linguistic topic will also be required.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant items): •Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia Vol III, Paradiso. A cura di N

Sapegno. La Nuova Italia, Firenze (N.B. second edition) (i) . Di Salvo T Lettura Critica della Divina Commedia Vol Ill Paradiso, La

Nuova Italia, Firenze (i) Montare E Ossi di seppia, Mondadori Milano (iii) Montale E Le occasioni, Mondadori Milano (ili)

•Saba U Antologie del Canzoniere, Einaudi Torino (iii) •Migllorini B & Foiena G Testi non-toscani del Trecento, Società Tipo-

grafica Modenese, Modena (v) •Migllorini B & Folena G Testi non-toscani del Quattrocento, Società

Tipografica Modenese, Modena (v) Devoto G & Giacomelli G I dialetti delle regioni d'Italie, Sassoni

Università, Firenze (v) •Dante Alighieri De Vulgar! Eloquentia, A cura di A Mar/go, Firenze

Le lainier (vi) Bombo P Prose della volgar lingua, A cura di M Mап i, Liviana

Padova (v1) Material for items (i1), (iv) and (vii) will be supplied by the department.

EXAMINATION

Item 1 will be assessed on written work during the year. Each unit in item 2 may be examined by a 3-hour paper but other forms of assess-ment may also be offered.

The thesis.

MASTER OF ARTS

149-601 R. SCHOOL OF ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in Italian, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised of a suitable course of reading and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar.

276

Faculty of Arts

Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass e written and oral examination on subjects approved by the head of the department. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the pв rmissioл of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candida-ture or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Chairman of Department: Professor S. Rosenblat, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Syd.)

Professor of Pure Mathematics: E. R. Love, B.А . (bleib. and Cantab.), Ph.D. (Cantab.)

Professor of Mathematics: C. J. Thompson, B.Sc., Ph.D. (N.S.W.)

PASS DEGREE

(Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

SUBJECTS OFFERED

(1) GRADE 1 SUBJECTS

Mathematics 1 A, Mathematics 1 B, Mathematics 1 C, General Mathe-matics.

Note:

(a) Not more than one of Mathematics 1A, Mathematics 1C, General Mathematics can be taken.

(b) Mathematics 16 must be accompanied by Mathematics 1A or Mathematics 1 C.

(2) GRADE 2 SUBJECTS

Mathematics 2A, Mathematics 2 В . Note: Mathematics 2 В must be accompanied by Mathematics 2A. (3) GRADE 3 SUBJECTS Mathematics З A, Mathematics 3В , Mathematics Э C. Note: Mathematics 3 В must be accompanied by Mathematics 3A or Mathematics 3C.

MAJOR SEQUENCES

Two major sequences are available in Mathematics. These are:

Sequence 1. EITHER

(i) Mathematics 1A Mathematics 2A OR

(ii) Mathematics 1 C Mathematics 2A OR

(iii) Mathematics 1A Mathematics 2A OR

(iv) Mathematics 1 C Mathematics 2A

Mathematics 3A

Mathematics 3A

Mathematics 3C

Mathematics 3C

276

Mathematics

Sequence 2.

Mathematics 1 В

Mathematics 2 В Mathematics 3 В

Note: Sequence 2 is only available for students who are also taking Sequence 1.

ENROLMENT

Students enrolling for Mathematics or units thereof must consult the Sub-Dean of Science, as well as the Sub-Dean of Arts.

618-011 MATHEMATICS 1A This comprises the units 131 and 132 as outlined below. Mathematics 1A is the basic first year course in Mathematics. Students taking this subject will be expected to have obtained good results in HSC Pure Mathematics. Students taking Mathematics 1A may not take either Mathematics 1C or General Mathematics.

618-131 ANALYSIS

Two lectures per week throughout the year and tutorial classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Sets and numbers: elementary logic, mathematical language, rational and real numbers. Complex numbers and geometrical interpretation. Sequences and series: convergent and divergent sequences, limits (a, S); positive term series. Inequalities. Functions of one real variable: elementary functions and inverses; graphs; polar co-ordinates; continuity, differentiation, first mean-value theorem. Taylor's series, applications, estimate of remainders. Integration: applica-tion of integration; areas, arc-length, solids of revolution, numerical integration. Functions of two real variables: surfaces, partial derivatives, directional derivatives, tangent plane; chain rule. Double and triple integrals.

В OOKS:

Prescribed textbook:

•Courant R & John F introduction to Calculus and Analysis Vol. 1, Wiley, 1986

•Hilton P J Partial derivatives, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1960 •Ledermann W Complex numbers, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1960

Recommended for reference:

Clapham C R J Introduction to mathematical analysis, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1973

Scott D В & Tims S R Mathematical Analysis, Cambridge, 1968

EXAMINATION: One 3-hour paper, together with written work submitted during the year.

818-132 ALGEBRA AND GEOMETRY Two lectures per week throughout the year and tutorial classes by arrangement.

277

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS Group theory: definitions, symmetric groups, permutation groups, order, normal subgroups. Field theory: definitions, examples. Vector theory: 3-dimensional vector space, subspaces, linear dependence, basis, dot and cross products, triple products, generalizations. 3-dimensional geometry, equations of lines and planes, quadric surfaces. Linear transformations, Inverses, matrices, solution of equations, deter-minants, geometric illustrations. Eigenvalue concept, central conic, rotations. Introduction to one or more of: geometric topology, linear programming, non-Euclidean geometry, graph theory, number theory.

BOOKS:

Prescribed textbooks:

• Cohn P M Linear Equations, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1959 'Cohn P M Solid Geometry, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1961 'Dinkines F Abstract Mathematical Systems, Appleton-Century 1964 Recommended for reference:

Tropper A M Linear Algebra, Nelson 1989 Mostow G D Sampson J H & Meyer J P Fundamental Structures of

Algebra, McGraw-Hill 1963

EXAMINATION: One 3-hour paper, together with written work submitted during the year.

618-012 MATHEMATICS 1 B This is the unit 152 Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems. It is a first course in the applications of mathematics and is a prerequisite for similar courses in later years. Students taking this course should have completed HSC Pure Mathematics; it will be an advantage but not essential to have studied Applied Mathematics or Physics at HSC level. Students taking Mathematics 1 В must take or must have taken previously either Mathematics 1A or Mathematics 1C.

618-152 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS

Two lectures and 1 tutorial class per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

First-order equations: growth and decay models, methods of solution. Rectilinear particle motion. Second-order equations with constant coeffi-cients. Harmonic oscillator with damping and forcing. Complex variable notation. Particle motion in two and three dimensions. Angular momen-tum. Orbit, projectiles, motion on surfaces. Systems of particles. Conti-nuum models: conservation laws. Elementary wave motion.

BOOKS:

Prescribed textbook:

'Smith R C & Smith P Mechanics, Wiley 1971

Recommended for reference:

Kaplan T W Elements of Ordinary Differential Equations, Addison-Wesley 1964

278

Mathematics

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, together with written work submitted during the year.

618-013 MATHEMATICS 1 C This is the unit 171 Calculus and Linear Algebra. It is an alternative to Mathematics 1A, compared with which it covers less material and does so in less depth. Although Mathematics 1C is available as the first subject in a major sequence in Mathematics, it is primarily intended for students whose main interests are in other fields. Students enrolling for this course will be expected to have satisfactorily completed HSC Pure Mathematics or to have obtained good results in HSC General Mathematics. Mathematics 1C is not available to students who take either Mathematics 1A or General Mathematics.

618-171 CALCULUS AND LINEAR ALGEBRA

Three lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

Functions: sets, functions and inverse functions, special functions, graphical representation, polar co-ordinates. Introduction to group theory: definitions, examples, subgroups, cosets, Lagrange's theorem. Number systems: complex numbers, their geometry and algebra, De Moivre's theorem. Vectors: vector algebra and geometry. 3-dimensional geometry: equations of lines and planes. Matrices: solution of equations. Transformations and rotations, geometrical appli-cations, conics. Differentiation, Taylor's Theorem, series. Integration: limit sums, syste-matic integration, volumes. Numerical integration. Differential equations: first order; second order, with constant coefficients. Functions of several variables, equations of surfaces, partial derivatives, chain rule. Double and triple integrals. Line integrals.

BOOKS:

Prescribed textbook:

•Thomas G B Calculus end Analytic Geometry, Addison-Wesley 1968

Recommended for reference:

Courant R & John F Introduction to Calculus and Analysis Vol. I, Wiley-Interscience 1965

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-014 GENERAL MATHEMATICS This is the unit 618-183 General Mathematics (Social Sciences), but other than Science students (e.g. Arts students) are to use the subject number 618-014. This is a course intended for students who have only taken HSC General Mathematics. It aims at giving an understanding of elementary mathematical principles and some basic mathematical techniques for

279

Faculty of Arts

application to other disciplines, particularly the social sciences. General Mathematics is a terminal course. It does not qualify as a prerequisite for any second year mathematics course. It is not available to students who take either Mathematics 1A or Mathematics 1 C.

Three lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Vectors, matrices, determinants. Elements of linear programming and game theory. Introduction to probability. Graph sketching and curve fitting. Differentiation and integration of standard elementary functions. Differential and difference equations. Functions of two variables, partial differentiation. Applications will include economic and sociological models.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook:

'Yamane T Mathematics for economists, Prentice-Hall 1968 Recommended for reference: Kemeny J G & Snell J L Mathematical models in the social sciences,

Blaisdell 1963 Restle F Mathematical models in psychology, Penguin 1971

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account.

618-021 MATHEMATICS 2A (PASS) This comprises units 271, 273 and two other of the units listed below. The selection must be approved by the department of Mathematics. The prerequisite for Mathematics 2A is a pass in either Mathematics 1 A or Mathematics 1 C.

618-022 MATHEMATICS 2B (PASS) This course is available only to students who are taking Mathematics 2A, or who have taken it previously, and who have passed in Mathematics 1A and 1B. Mathematics 26 comprises those four of the units listed below which have not been included in Mathematics 2A.

618-271 REAL ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS Definition of limit. Convergence, sequences and series, tests for con-vergence. Absolute and conditional convergence. Monotonic sequences, nested intervals, real numbers. Power series, interval of convergence, estimates of remainder. Algebra of power series, with applications. Term by term integration and differentiation of power series. Riemann integral. Infinite and improper integrals. Functions of several variables.

280

Mathematics

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Burkill J C A First Course in Mathematical Analysis, CUP 1962

Recommended for reference:

Fulks W Advanced Calculus, Wiley 1961

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-272 FURTHER REAL ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Sequences and series of functions; uniform convergence; term by term integration and differentiation. Functions of two variables: partial deriva-tives, discontinuous surfaces. Taylor series. Implicit and inverse func-tions; functional dependence. Introduction to metric spaces; contraction mapping theorem.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Olmstead J M H Advanced Calculus, Appleton-Century 1961

Recommended for reference:

Marder L Calculus of Several Variables, Allen & Unwin 1971

EXAMINATION

One 1 %/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-273 LINEAR ALGEBRA

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Vector spaces and subspaces; linear maps and matrix representation; rank. Determinants. Partitioned multiplication and Inverse: applications. Inner product; orthonormal matrices, rotations, projections. Eigenvalues and eigenvectora of 3 x 3 symmetric matrix. Central conica and quad-ratic forms. Diagonalisation of 2 x 2 symmetric matrix. Gram-Schmidt orthogonalisation. Spectral resolution (3 x 3). Matrix and vector norms.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook:

'Tropper A M Linear Algebra, Nelson 1969

Recommended for reference:

Murdoch D C Linear Algebra, Wiley 1970

EXAMINATION

One 1 %/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

281

Faculty of Arts

618-274 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

The emphasis in this course is placed on properties and manipulation rather than proofs. Groups, subgroups, isomorphisms. Normal subgroups, examples. Quotient groups, examples. Homomorphisms, kernel and image. Groups structure, examples. Fields, splitting and finite field. Galois group. Ruler and compass construction.

B00KS

Prescribed textbook:

•Ledermann W Introduction to the Theory of Finite Groups, Oliver & Boyd 1964

Recommended for reference: Adamson 1 T Introduction to Field Theory, Oliver & Boyd 1964 MacDonald I D The Theory of Groups, Oxford 1968

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-292 CLASSICAL MECHANICS

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Two-dimensional rigid body dynamics; rolling and sliding. i.agrange's equations, holonomic constraints, central forces, small oscillations. Motion of rigid bodies, rotating frames, motion on a rotating earth. Inertia tensor. Е ulе r's equations. Free motion, symmetric top.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

•Synge J L & Griffith B A Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill 1959 Recommended for reference: Kibble T W B Classical Mechanics, McGraw-Hill 1966

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-293 VECTOR ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Cartesian tensor, rotation of axes, tensor algebra 61j, sijk, symmetry and antisymmetry. Vector calculus: Gradient, divergence, curl; line and surface integrals. Gauss, Green and Stokes theorems. Curvilinear co-ordinates. Newtonian potential, discrete and continuous distributions. Laplace's and Poisson's equations; applications to gravitation and electro-statics. Green's theorem and application.

282

Mathematics

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook: •Dixon C Applied Mathematics of Science and Engineering, Wiley 1971

Recommended for reference:

Bourne D E & Kendall P C Vector Analysis, Oldboumne 1967

EXAMINATION

One 1 r/z-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-294 BOUNDARY-VALUE PROBLEMS AND DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Ordinary differential equations of second order: constant coefficients, Euler-type; series solutions. Legendre functions, orthogonality. Bessel functions, zeros, orthogonality. Fourier series, half-range series, appli-cations. Partial differential equations, standard types, separation of variables, applications to vibrating strings, membranes, heat.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

•Dixon C Applied Mathematics of Science and Engineering, Wiley 1971 Recommended for reference:

Churchill R V Fourier Series end Boundary Velue Problems, McGraw-Hili 1963

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-295 CONTINUUM MECHANICS

A course of 24 lectures, and tutorials or practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Cartesian tensors, with applications in fluid mechanics. kinematics. Continuous media. Motion of e material element. Equation of continuity. Kinematic boundary condition. 'notational velocity fields with zero divergence. Rate of strain. Stress tensors. Stress in a fluid at rest. Normal stress assumption for fluids in motion. (1st order approx.). Navier-Stokes equations. Bernoulli's equation. Conservation of circula-tion and permanence of irrotational motion. Forces on bodies ln irrota-tional motion. D'Alembert's paradox.

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Fung Y C A First Course in Continuum Mechanics, Prentice-Hall 1969 Curie N & Davies H J Modern Fluid Dynamics Vol. 1, Van Nostrand

1968

283

Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-031 MATHEMATICS ЗА (PASS) This comprises four or five of the 300-level units listed below. The number will be four or five depending on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the department of Mathematics.

618-032 MATHEMATICS 36 (PASS) This course is available only to students who are taking Mathematics ЭА concurrently, or who have taken it previously, and who have passed Mathematics 2A and 2B. Mathematics 3B comprises four or five of the 300-level units listed below, which have not been included in Mathematics З A. The number will be four or five depending on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the department of Mathematics.

618-371 COMPLEX ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Differentiability. Conformal mapping. Power series. Residues. Contour integration.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Tall D 0 Functions of a Complex Variable, Vois. I & Il, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1970

Recommended for reference:

Churchill R V Complex Variables and Applications, McGraw-Hill 1960

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

• 618-372 GEOMETRY

A course of 16 lectures and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Revision of Euclidean geometry. Cross ratio, harmonic section, pole and polar. Geometry of incidence. Axiomatic system. Finite geometries. Real projective plane. Principle of duality. Perspectives, projectives. Complete quadrange. Projectives on a conic. Non-Euclidean geometries.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Coxeter H S M Introduction to Geometry, Wiley & Sons 1961

'This course will not be given in 1975.

284

Mathematics

Pedia D A Course of Geometry for Colleges and Universities, Cam-bridge 1970

TuIler A A Modern Introduction to Geometries, Van Nostrand 1967

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-373 LINEAR ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Real inner-product spaces, Bessel and Schwanz inequalities. Fourier series. Linear functionals on R. Linear operators. Norms. Sequence spaces. Completeness. Contraction mapping theorem. The space C(I). Weierstrass approximation theorem.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Vulikh B Z Introduction to Functional Analysis, Pergamon 1963

EXAMINATION

One 1 %/z-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-374 ALGEBRAIC GEOMETRY

A course of 16 lectures and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Rings and modules: rings, homomorphisms, quotient rings, types of rings, factorization modules, module homomorphisms. Geometry: affine, Euclidean, projective geometry by co-ordinates. Groups of these geome-tries. Invariance. Extension fields.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Murtha J A & Willard E R Linear Algebra and Geometry, Holt, Rine-hart & Winston 1969

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-375 TOPOLOGY OF SURFACES

A course of 16 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS Topics selected from: Classification of surfaces, equivalence and orien-tation, topological polygons, Riemann surfaces.

285

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Blackett D W Elementary Topology, Academic 1967 Alexandroff P Elementary Concepts of Topology, Dover 1961

EXAMINATION

One 1 1/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

•618-376 FOUNDATIONS OF NUMBERS

A course of 16 lectures and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Peano axioms. Mathematical Induction. Cardinal numbers, transfinite numbers, ordinals. Real, algebraic, transcendental numbers.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Landau E Foundations of Analysis, Chelsea 1960 Niven I Numbers, Rational and Irrational, Random House 1961 Thurston H A The Number System, Blackie 1956

EXAMINATION: One 1 r/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-391 METHODS OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS

A course of 32 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

A selection from the following topics: Tensor calculus, special func-tions, Laplace and other integral transforms, variational methods, Green's functions, asymptotic expansions, integral equations, opti-mization.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Dettman J W Mathematical Methods in Physics and Engineering, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1969

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-392 CONTINUUM MECHANICS A course of 16 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS Viscosity, Reynolds number, Stokes flow, potential flow, boundary layer approximation. Waves in fluids and In elastic media.

This course will not be given in 1975.

286

Mathematics

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook: Long R Mechanics of Solids and Fluids, Prentice-Hall 1961

Recommended for reference:

Eringen A C Mechanics of Continua, Wiley 1967

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-393 SYSTEMS THEORY

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Linear operators, transforms. Input, output, feedback; applications: renewal equation, traffic dynamics. Stability. Volterra problem of com-peting species. Dynamical systems in biology. Elements of variational calculus and optimal control.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference: Brown B M The Mathematical Theory of Linear Systems, Chapman &

Hall 1985 Distefano J J Stubberud A R & Williams I J Feedback and Control

Systems, Schaum

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

618-394 LINEAR PROGRAMMING

A course of 16 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

The linear programming problem. Review of basic algebra. Simplex and revised simplex methods. Duality. Degeneracy. Computational tech-niques. Introduction to game theory.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook:

Gass S I Linear Programming, McGraw-Hill 1969

Recommended for reference:

Kim C Introduction to Linear Programming, Holt, Rinehart & Winston 1971

EXAMINATION One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

287

( а )

( ь ) ( С )

(d)

(e)

Faculty of Arts

618-033 MATHEMATICS 3C (PASS) This comprises the unit 318 Mathematical Structures. It is intended primarily for prospective schoolteachers, and is offered as an alternative to Mathematics ЗА . The prerequisite for this course is Mathematics 2A.

818-318 MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES

A course of 72 lectures, with practice classes, reading and written assignments. For each topic in the course part of the content will be covered by assignment work. The first such assignment will be required early in first term. Details will be given in an instruction sheet available In the Mathematics department. Students are strongly advised to obtain this sheet in January, so that they can do some of the reading and complete the first written assignment before lectures begin. A reading list will be supplied with the instruction sheet.

SYLLABUS

(a) Numbers Number systems, transfinite numbers, integers: Factori-sation, congruences, continued fractions, diophantine equations. 12 lectures.

(b) Geometry Its changing nature. Non-euclidean geometries. Deduc-tive systems. Invariant properties under group of transformations. Projective geometry illustrating the above. 12 lectures.

(c) Linear Programming and Extensions The simplex method: duality; sensitivity analysis; parametric linear programming; integer linear programming; the transportation problem; game theory. 18 lectures.

(d) Combinatorics and Graph Theory General rules of combinatorics; samples; permutations and combinations; distributions and parti-tions; occupancy problems. Basic concepts of graphs; Euler and Hamilton circuits and other applications. 18 lectures.

(e) Complex Variable Cauchy's integral formulae, Taylor and Laurent series, singularities, residues, contour integration. Conformal mapping. 12 lectures.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Davenport H The Higher Arithmetic, Hutchinson Tuller A A Modern Introduction to Geometries, Van Nostrand Gass S I Linear Programming, McGraw-Hill 1969 Busacker R G & Saaty T L Finite Graphs and Networks. McGraw-

Hill 1965

Tall D 0 Functions of a Complex Variable, Vols I & II, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1970

EXAMINATION Assignments throughout the year, together with twо 3-hour papers on the topics given in lectures.

288

Mathematics

HONOURS DEGREE

D. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS

1. The course for the B.A. with honours in Mathematics covers four years, during which the following subjects must be taken: First Year: Mathematics 1A

Mathematics 1 B Two other grade 1 subjects excluding Biology, Chemistry 1 and Geology 1.

Second Year: Mathematics 2A Ions. Mathematics 2B Ions. One other subject at grade 2 level. Science language if no language (other than English and the student's native language) has been passed at Higher School Certificate or grade 1 level.

Third Year: Mathematics 3A Ions. Mathematics 3B Ions.

Fourth Year: Mathematics 4.

The details of the Mathematics subjects of this course are given below. 2. Students In combined honours courses which Include Mathematics will take Mathematics 1A, 2A Ions. and ЭА Ions. The following provi-sions, so far as they are relevant, apply to them. 3. Students proposing to take the second year of the honours school of Mathematics should normally have obtained at least second class hon-ours in Mathematics 1A and Mathematics 18. In exceptional circum-stances students may be admitted without these qualifications; if admitted they will be advised what reading to undertake in the long vacation. Admission to the second and higher years of the honours school must be approved by the faculty; candidates should make application as soon as possible after the examination results of the first year have been published.

4. At the final examination the Wyselaskie Scholarship of $346 in Mathematics is awarded. This award may be held in conjunction with a University research grant. Normally the Wyselaskie scholar will be required to pursue study or research in Mathematics or some other subject. See Calendar, regulation 6.7. 5. For students majoring in Mathematics who wish to pursue Physics or Chemistry to part 2 level the B.Sc. degree is available under the provisions of section 9, regulation 3.20, in the Calendar. Such students may further proceed to the degree of B.Sc. with honours on completing the fourth year of the honours school of Mathematics (as above). 6. The Professor Wilson Prize and the Professor Nanson Prize are awarded in alternate years for the best original memoir in Pure or Applied Mathematics. Candidates must be graduates of not more than seven years' standing from matriculation. See regulation 6.72 (2) and (14) In the University Calendar.

MATHEMATICS IN COMBINED COURSES Possible combinations are listed on pp. 439 ff.; see also a pamphlet avail-able at the Arts Faculty office.

289 к

Faculty of Arts

The subjects prescribed by the department of Mathematics for combined honours courses are as follows. Students will also study such other subjects as faculty may require.

First Year: Mathematics 1A.

Second Year: Mathematics 2A Ions.

Science language, if no language (other than English and the student's native language) has been passed at Higher School Certificate or grade 1 level.

Third Year: Mathematics 3A Ions.

Fourth Year: A number of units from Mathematics 4. The number and choice of units must be approved by the department of Mathematics.

It is also recommended that the first year subjects should include: Mathematics 1 В .

618-061 MATHEMATICS 2A (HONS) This course comprises units 231, 233 and two of the units 232, 234, 252-255. The selection must be approved by the Department of Mathematics. In addition It is recommended that students take one of the vacation projects 227 or 228 detailed below. Mathematics 2A Honours may be taken by students who have obtained adequate honours in Mathematics 1A. Students who have not been accepted into Mathematics 2A Honours may be allowed to join the course provisionally; their applications will be reconsidered at the end of first term in the light of their work during first term.

618-062 MATHEMATICS 2 В (HONS) This course is available only to students who are taking Mathematics 2A Honours, or who have taken it previously, and who have obtained adequate honours in Mathematics 1A and 1B. Mathematics 2 В Honours comprises those four of the units 232, 234, 252-255 which have not been included in Mathematics 2A Honours.

618-227 NUMERICAL PROJECT

Vacation work. Assessment by written work. Intending students should obtain the instructions and exercises from the Mathematics department in November or December, and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March. Condition: Students taking this unit may not gain credit for 369-202.

SYLI-АВ US Numerical exercises on summation of series, difference tables, inter-polation, integration, differential equations, curve fitting, simultaneous linear equations and determinants. Calculating machines will be avail-able, for use in the Mathematics department, on request.

BOOk Prescribed textbook:

Wilkes M V A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis, CUP 1971

290

Mathematics

618-228 NUMBER THEORY PROJECT

Vacation work. Assessment by written work.

Intending students should obtain the instructions and exercises from the Mathematics department in November or December, and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March.

SYLLABUS

Exercises on prime number, factorization, congruences, quadratic resi-dues, continued fractions, Diophantine approximation, quadratic forms.

BOOk

Prescribed textbook:

Davenport H The Higher Arithmetic, Hutchinson 1970

618.231 REAL ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Sequences and series: convergence, absolute and conditional; tests. Continuity; Heine-Borel and uniform continuity. Differentiability: Rolle, first mean-value, Taylor theorems. Riemann integral: definition. Infinite and improper integrals. Uniform convergence; Weierstrass, Dirichlet, Abel tests; differentiating under integral.

Books

Prescribed textbook:

Fulks W Advanced Calculus, Wiley 1961

Recommended for reference:

Burkill J C & Burkill H A Second Course In Mathematical Analysis, Cambridge 1970

Fiett T M Mathematical Analysis, McGraw-Hill 1966

EXAMINATION

One 1 у 2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-232 FURTHER REAL ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS Metric spaces: convergence In metric; open and closed sets; Cauchy sequence, completeness, contraction mapping theorem, Heine-Borel, compactness. Functions of several variables: (Frechet)-differentiability; partial derivatives. Implicit and inverse function theorems.

BO O КЅ Prescribed textbook:

White A J Real Analysis, Addison-Wesley 1968

Recommended for reference:

Copson E T Metric Spaces, Cambridge 1968

291

Faculty of Arts

EXAM I NATI O N One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-233 LINEAR ALGEBRA

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Vector spaces and subspaces. Linear maps, matrix representation, rank. Determinants. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors: Cayley-Hamilton; diagon-alisation, decompositions. Inner product spaces; orthogonalisation, Gram-Schmidt; symmetric and Hermitian matrices. Matrix norms. Dual spaces.

BOOKS .

Prescribed textbook:

'Lang S Linear Algebra, Addison-Wesley 1969

Recommended for reference:

Shilov G E Linear Algebra, Prentice-Hall 1971 Cohn P M Algebra, Vol I Wiley 1974

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-234 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Groups, isomorphisms, permutation groups, transpositions, orbits, stabi-lizers. Normal subgroups, quotient groups, simple groups. Homomor-phisms, kernel and image. Group structure, centre; finite Abelian groups; Sylow groups. Fields, primitive element theorem; fundamental Galois theorem, ruler and compass constructions. BOOKS

Prescribed textbook: 'Dean R A Elements of Abstract Algebra, Wiley 1966 Recommended for reference: Maxfield J E & Maxfield M W Abstract Algebra and Solution by

Radicals, Saunders 1971 Cohn P M Algebra, Vol I Wiley 1974

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-252 CLASSICAL MECHANICS A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS Two-dimensional motion of a rigid body: rolling and sliding; impulses.

292

Mathematics

Lagrange's equation: holonomic and non-holonomic constraints. Central forces (inc. Rutherford scattering and planetary motion). Small oscilla-tions. Electromagnetic theory and small oscillations. Motion of rigid bodies: rotating frames, motion on rotating earth. Inertia tensor. Euler's equations: free motion, tops, gyroscopes.

BOO К S

Recommended for reference: klbble T W B Classical Mechanics, McGraw-fill 1966 Corben I C & Stehle P Classical Mechanics, Wiley 1960

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

618-253 VECTOR ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Cartesian tensors: rotation of axes; tensor algebra; symmetric, anti-symmetric, isotropic second-order tensors. Vector calculus: gradient, divergence, curl; line and surface Integrals; Gauss, Green, Stokes theorems. Curvilinear co-ordinates. Newtonian potential: poles and dipoles, Laplace, Poisson equations; uniqueness theorems; applications to electrostatics, gravitation; source, dipole distributions, Green's equivalent stratum. Complex variable methods: Cauchy-Riemann equa-tions, Laplace equatiоп in plane, applications.

В OO К S

Recommended for reference: Marder L Vector Fields, Allen & Unwin 1972 Jeffreys I & Jeffreys B S Methods of Mathematical Physics, Cam-

bridge 1962

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-254 BOUNDARY-VALUE PROBLEMS AND DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Ordinary differential equations: existence, uniqueness: linear indepen-dence; eigenvalues; Frobenius, series solutions. Bessel functions: series solutions, zeros, orthogonality. Legendre functions. Fourier series: sine and cosine series, applications. Partial differential equations: separation of variables, Fourier and Fourier-Bessel series, applications.

BOO К S

Prescribed textbook:

'Churchill R V Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems, McGraw-H111 1963

293

Faculty of Arts

Recommended for reference:

Sagan H Boundary and Eigenvalue Problems in Mathematical Physics, Wiley 1966

Rabenstein A L Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, Aca-demic 1966

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-255 CONTINUUM MECHANICS

A course of 24 lectures, and practice classes by arrangement.

SYLLABUS

Review of vectors and tensors. Stress, strain and rate of strain tensors. Constitutive equations for fluids and solids. Conservation laws and thermodynamic principles. Kinematics and dynamics of continuous sys-tems. Navier-Stokes equations, applications to pipe and channel flows, Stokes flows, etc. Linear elasticity, applications to flexure and torsion, etc.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook: 'Fung Y C A First Course in Continuum Mechanics, Prentice-Hall 1969

Recommended for reference: Prager W Introduction to Mechanics of Continua, Ginn 1961

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-071 MATHEMATICS ЭА (HONS) This comprises four or five of the units listed below. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year.

618-072 MATHEMATICS 3 В (HONS)

This course is available only to students who are taking Mathematics 3A Honours, or who have taken it previously. Mathematics 38 Honours comprises about five of the, units listed below which have not been included in Mathematics 3A Honours. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year.

618-325 MATRIX THEORY

A course of 16 lectures.

294

Mathematics

SYLLABUS

Topics selected from: Partitioned matrix inverse and applications. Generalised Inverse. Spectral resolution; projections; subspaces. Matrix analysis. Jordan form. Minimum polynomial.

BOOkS

Recommended for reference: Lancaster P Theory of matrices, Academic. EXAMINATION

One 1 У 2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

818-331 COMPLEX ANALYSIS A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Sequences and series. Continuity, differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equa-tions, plane harmonic functions. Curves, contours; Goursat's lemma, Cauchy's theorem; winding numbers. Singularities: poles, Cauchy's formulae, Liouville's theorem, Laurent's theorem. Residues. Monodromy, analytic continuation.

BOOkS

Prescribed textbook:

Copson E T An Introduction to Functions of a Complex Variable, Oxford 1935

Recommended for reference:

Ahlfors L V Complex Analysis, McGraw-Hill 1953 Goodstein R L Complex Functions, McGraw-Hill 1965

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-332 INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS Finite-dimensional vector spaces; norms, completeness, unit ball. Sequence spaces, Banach and Hilbert spaces, linear functionals and operators, adjoint. The space C(X), Stone-Weierstrass, Riesz represen-tation theorems, separability, compact subsets, Arzela's theorem. Lebesgue spaces: Hölder and Minkowski inequalities, Riesz-Fischer theorem, linear integral operators. Linear operators on Banach spaces.

B O O КЅ Prescribed textbook: Brown A L & Page A Elements of Functional Analysis, Van Nostrand

Reinhold 1970

295

Faculty of Arts

Recommended for reference:

Liusternik L A & Sob°lev V J Elements of Functional Analysis, Ungar 1961

Hille E Methods in Classical and Functional Analysis, Addison-Wesley 1972

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-333 MEASURE AND INTEGRATION

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Inadequacy of Riemann integral. Measure: outer measure and measura-bility. Measurable functions, monotone convergence. Plane Lebesgue measure, Lebesgue-Stieltjes measure. Lebesgue integral. Dominated con-vergence, Fatou's lemma, absolutely convergent integrals. Integral as linear functional Lt and LP spaces, equivalence classes. Fubini's theorem. Differentiation properties.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Williamson J H Lebesgue Integration, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1982

Recommended for reference: Natanson I P Theory of Functions of a Real Variable Vol. 1, Ungar 1961 Titchmarsh E C Theory of Functions, Oxford 1932

EXAMINATION

One 1 %/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-334 RINGS AND MODULES

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Rings; modules; Abelian groups.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

'Hartley B & Hawkes T O Rings and Modules, Chapman & Hall 1970

Recommended for reference:

Herstein I N Topics in Algebra, Xerox College Pub . 1964 Zariski 0 & Samuel P Commutative Algebra Vol. 1, Princeton 1958

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-335 FURTHER COMPLEX ANALYSIS

A course of 16 lectures.

296

Mathematics

SYLLABUS

Regular functions defined by series, integrals and contour integrals. Solution of differential equations. Infinite products. Gamma function. Entire functions. General form of an entire function with a given set of zeros. Maximum modulus theorem. One or more of the following topics: Harmonic functions. Riemann mapping theorem. Doubly periodic functions. Phragmen-Lindelöf theorem. Riemann -function. Hypergeo-metric functions.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

As for unit 331.

Recommended for reference:

As for unit 331.

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

•618-338 DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Manifolds: curves, surfaces and solids in R3, differentiable manifolds. Curves: tangent, curvature, normal, torsion. Surfaces: metric and second fundamental form, Frobenius' theorem, Christoffel symbols, Riemann tensor. General manifolds, tangent and cotangent spaces, tensor and form bundles. Lie groups and Lie algebras. Geodesics, parallel transport, holonomy group. Variational approach.

BOOKS

The list of books is available from the Mathematics department.

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper.

818-337 TOPOLOGY

A course of 18 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Set axioms. Topological spaces, Hausdorff spaces. Topologies and functions spaces. Compact sets. Nets, filterbases, convergence; ultra-filters. Tychonov theorem; weak compactness. Connectedness. Urysohn and Tietze theorems. Peano curves.

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Dugundji A Topology, Allyn & Bacon 1988 Hocking J G & Young G S Topology, Addison-Wesley 1961 Simmons G F Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-Hill 1963

'This course will not be offered In 1975.

297

Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

•618-338 PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

n-dimensional projective space, subspaces, frames and co-ordinates, basic theorems. Cross ratio, basic properties, harmonic sets. Collinea-tion and projectivities, fundamental theorems, central collinatlons. Bilinear and quadratic forms, Pascal and Brianchon theorems, polarity; classification; signature. Subgeometries. Co-ordinization.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

bradam A F Undergraduate Projective Geometry, Pergamon 1970 Fishback W T Projective and Euclidean Geometry, Wiley 1969 Gruenberg k W & Weir A J Linear Geometry, Van Nostrand 1967 EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-339 INFINITE GROUPS

In 1975 this is offered as a reading course; no lectures will be given. Students will be expected to read prescribed material and will be able to discuss the work with a member of staff.

SYLLABUS

Free groups, elementary properties; subgroup theorem and its conse-quences; finiteness conditions; elementary properties of solvable and nilpotent groups.

BOOks

The list of books is available from the Mathematics department.

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper.

•618-343 LATTICE THEORY

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Definitions; modular lattices. Application to abstract algebras. Distribu-tive lattices. Boolean algebras. Applications to logic.

Books Recommended for reference:

Birkhoff G Lattice Theory, Amer. Math. Soc. 1948 Halmos P Lectures on Boolean Algebra, Van Nostrand 1963 Rutherford D E Introduction to Lattice Theory, Oliver & Boyd 1965

•This course will not be offered in 1975.

298

Mathematics

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

618-344 GENERAL ALGEBRA

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Universal algebras and related topics.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference: Albert A A Studies in Modern Algebra, Prentice-Hall 1963 Gratzar G Universal Algebra, Van Nostrand 1966 Kurosh A G General Algebra, Chelsea 1963 EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

618-345 FOUNDATIONS OF NUMBERS

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Logic and set theory, basic axioms, axiom of choice. Cardinal numbers, operations. Natural numbers. Partial order, Zorn's lemma, Zermelo's theorem, ordinal numbers. Construction of the real system, Integers; order, rationale, Dedekind cuts.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Cohen L W & Ehrlich G The Structure of the Real Number System, Van Nostrand 1963

Landau E Foundations of Analysis, Chelsea 1960 Suppes P Axiomatic Set Theory, Dover 1972

EXAMINATION

One 1 %-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

818-351 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS Existence and uniqueness theorems. Linear systems, Wronskians. Lap-lace transforms, Inverse; Integral representation of solutions. Regular and irregular singularities. Adjoint systems. Sturm-Liouville problems, elgenvalues, oscillation theorems. Calculus of variations, Euler equation, Lagrange multipliers, elgenvalues, Rayleigh-Ritz non-selfadjoint prob-lems. Green's functions.

299

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Carrier G F & Pearson C E Ordinary Differential Equations, Blaisdell 1969

Coddington E A & Levinson N Theory of Ordinary Differential Equa-tions, McGraw-Hí11 1955

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-352 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Partial differential equations; characteristics, types of equations, boun-dary conditions. Elliptic equations: maximum principle, mean value theorem, Green's function, variational formulation, eigenfunction expan-sions. Hyperbolic equations: use of characteristics, wave equation, nonlinear waves and Riemann invariants. Heat equation: maximum prin-ciple, Green's function and similarity solution.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook: Smith M G Introduction to the theory of partial differential equations,

Van Nostrand 1967

Recommended for reference: Garabedian P Partial differential equations, Wiley 1964

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-353 LINEAR PROGRAMMING

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Formulation of programming problems. Algebraic background: matrix inequalities, convexity. Feasible and basic solutions, slack variables. Simplex and revised simplex methods. Perturbed programme. Duality. Computational methods. Examples.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Trustrum K Linear Programming, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1971

Recommended for reference:

Spivey W A & Thrall R M Linear Optimization, Holt, Rinehart & Win-ston 1970

300

Mathematics

EXAMINATION One 1t/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

618-364 FLUID MECHANICS

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

lnviscid fluids: vorticity, Вегпо ulll's equations. Two-dimensional flows: Joukowskl airfoil. Three-dimensional flow: Blender bodies. Boundary-layer theory; similarity solutions, flat plate, stagnation point, separatiоп . Stokes, Oseen flow.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Batchelor G IC An Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, Cambridge 1967

Recommended for reference: Yih C S Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill 1969

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken Into account.

•618-355 WATER WAVES

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Dispersive waves: Linearised equations of motion; standing progressive sinusoidal waves; group velocity and energy flux; waves due to a localised disturbance; method of stationary phase; wave pockets; ship waves. Long waves: linear, shallow-water equations of motion; tides; waves in a canal of variable section; waves of finite amplitude and hydraulic jumps.

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Lamb H Hydrodynamics, Dover 1945 Phillips 0 M Dynamics of the Upper Ocean, Cambridge 1966 Stoker J J Weter Waves, Interscience 1957

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-366 CLASSICAL MECHANICS A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS Hamiltonian Lagrangians, variational principles, conservation theorem. Canonical transformations, Poisson brackets, canonical invariants. Small

This course will not be offered in 1975.

301

Faculty of Arts

oscillations, normal modes. Hamilton-Jacobi theory. Continuous systems and fields.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Landau L D & Lifschitz E M Mechanics, Pergamon 1960

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-357 THERMODYNAMICS & STATISTICAL MECHANICS A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Laws, thermodynamic relations and ideal gas. Elements of kinetic theory. Gibbs ensembles and the thermodynamic limit. Phase transitions and critical points. Model systems. Applications to biology.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook:

Thompson C J Mathematical Statistical Mechanics, Macmillan 1972

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

•618-368 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY

A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Maxwell equations (assumed known): field energy, momentum; reflec-tion and refraction phenomena; electromagnetic potentials (outlined): radiation by fixed dipole; rад iation from moving charge (Llenard-Wiechert potentials); special relativity: Lorentz transformation and mechanics; Minkowski world, mechanics and electromagnetism; Max-well equations for moving medium.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook: Panofsky W H & Phillips M Classical Electricity and Magnetism,

Addison-Wesley 1955

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-359 SOLID MECHANICS A course of 16 lectures.

SYLLABUS Review of basic equations, energy theorems; integral representations.

This course will not be offered in 1975.

302

Mathematics

Half-space problems. Two-dimensional crack problems. Equations of visco-elasticity. Introduction to seismology.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Sokolnikoff I S Mathematical Theory of Elasticity, McGraw-Hill 1956

EXAMINATION

One 1 1/2-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-362 MATHEMATICAL METHODS

A course of 24 lectures.

SYLLABUS

Fourier and Laplace transforms. Asymptotic evaluation of integrals. Asymptotic methods for solving ordinary differential equations. Applications to the special functions (hypergeometric, Bessel, Legendre). Conformal mapping.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

Carrier G F Krook M & Pearson C E Functions of a complex variable, McGraw-Hill 1966

EXAMINATION

One 1%-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into account.

618-400 MATHEMATICS 4 The fourth-year course will consist of (a) about 180-200 lectures, arranged in units of approximately 16 lectures each. The units will be chosen from a list covering topics In Pure and Applied Mathematics, and each student's selection must be approved by the chairman of the department. In special circumstances, and subject to approval, some Mathematics units may be replaced by 4th-year units offered by other departments. (b) a thesis to be written on a special topic. The work for the thesis will involve the reading, analysis and collation of relevant mathematical literature. The topic should be chosen in consultation with the staff of the department, and the work will be directed by a staff member. The final results of the fourth year will be determined on the basis of examinations, set work connected with lectures, and the thesis.

MASTER OF ARTS 618-602 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS

Candidates will prepare a thesis on some approved branch of Mathe-matics, Involving reading of relevant periodical and other literature. Regular colloquia will be held to assist candidates in their studies. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to

З 03

Faculty of Arts

the Registrar. Three copies of the thesis (typewritten), on A4 paper and double-spaced, should be submitted; one will be deposited in the Univer-sity Library if approved. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the com-mencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Chairman of the Department: Dr J. A. THOMPSON, B.A., B.Ed., M.Sc. (Q'Id.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A.

The Department of Middle Eastern Studies is an extension of the department of Semitic Studies which was established in 1945. In 1987 the name was changed to the department of Middle Eastern Studies in order to give a better description of the range of study undertaken in the department. With the arrival of Professor John Bowman in 1960 new courses of a cultural kind were introduced. In the course of the years the shape of these has changed somewhat but the department today provides lectures in the language and literature of Arabic, Hebrew and Syriac, and also in the related cultural subject Middle Eastern Studies which covers Ancient, Judaeo-Christian, Islamic and Modern aspects of the Middle East. In addition, in support of the Ancient Middle East, some work is offered in Akkadian, Ugaritic, Semitic Inscrip-tions and the Archaeology of Palestine.

COURSES OFFERED

First year:

181-111 181-121 181-131 181-141

Arabic Part 1 Hebrew Part 1 Middle Eastern Studies 1 Syriac Part 1

Second year: Ordinary Degree

181-211 Arabic Part 2 (Pass) 181-221 Hebrew Part 2 (Pass) 181-231 Middle Eastern Studies Part 2A (Pass) 181-232 Middle Eastern Studies Part 28 (Pass)

Honours Degree

181-261 181-271 181-281 181-291 181-292

Hebrew Part 2 (Hofs) Arabic Part 2 (Ions) Syriac Part 2 (Ions) Middle Eastern Studies 2A (Ions) Middle Eastern Studies 2 В (Ions)

304

Middle Eastern Studies

Third year: Ordinary Degree

181-311 Arabic Part 3 (Pass) 181-321 Hebrew Part 3 (Pass) 181-331 Middle Eastern Studies 3A (Pass) 181-332 Middle Eastern Studies 3В (Pass)

Honours Degree

181-381 Hebrew Part 3 (Ions) 181-371 Arabic Part 3 (Ions) 181-381 Syriac Part 3 (Ions) 181-391 Middle Eastern Studies 181-392 Middle Eastern Studies

ЗА (Ions) 3 В (Ions)

Fourth year:

181-461 Hebrew Part 4 181-471 Arabic Part 4 181-481 Syriac Part 4 181-491 Middle Eastern Studies 4

2. Pass courses in Middle Eastern Studies Parts 2 and 3 comprise two half courses. In either case, two half courses constitute one full course, four half courses constitute two full courses. Students are required to enrol for both the full subject and the separate units.

3. No external enrolments are accepted.

N.B. Students are invited to consult the chairman of the department at any time about their courses. Enquiries should be made in the first instance at the departmental office.

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

The department offers one major pass course in Miдд lе Eastern Studies consisting of one subject from each year.

First year:

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 1

The Ancient Middle East

Second year:

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 28

Each of these subjects consists of two of the units listed below:

The Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part 1 (Pass)

The Islamic Middle East—Part 1 (Pass)

The Modern Miдд lе East—Part 1 (Pass) (Arab States)—available In alternate years

The Archaeology of Palestine—Part 1 (Pass)

305

Faculty of Arts

Third year:

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES ЭА

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 3В

Each of these subjects consists of two of the units listed below:

The Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part 2 (Pass)

The Islamic Middle East—Part 2 (Pass)

The Modern Middle East—Part 2 (Pass) (Non Arab States)-availabl e In alternate years

The Archaeology of Palestine—Part 2 (Pass)

181-131 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 1

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The study will cover aspects of the rise of literate civilization in the Middle East; lectures will cover Sumero-Babylonian mythology, Canaanite and Egyptian Literature, concepts of social life and institutions against a background of ancient art, and in the context of comparative religion. In the first term a brief introduction to the pre-history of the Middle East and a short outline of the history and major folk movements includ-ing Israel's exodus and settlement will be followed by a consideration of the major early law codes and a discussion of the Ancient Middle Eastern Vassal Treaties and the Biblical Covenant. In the second term attention will be concentrated on the mythologies of the Ancient Middle East—Sumerian, Egyptian, Babylonian and Assyrian, West Semitic, Hittite. Particular attention will be given to Canaanite mythology. In the third term ideas of kingship in the Ancient Middle East, in Sumer, Egypt, Israel, Babylon and Assyria will be discussed. Some attention will be given to concepts of death, judgment, the after-life, time, good and evil. The study will take into consideration the ideas of Iranians, Classical Zurvanism and Zoroastrianism.

BOOKS

Prescribed books: Mellaart J Earliest Civilization of the Near East, Thames & Hudson

1965 Hooke S H Middle Eastern Mythology, Pelican 1963 Frankfort H Ancient Egyptian Religion, Harper Torchbooks 1961 Frankfort H Before Philosophy, Pelican 1953 Gurney 0 The Hittites, 2nd ed Pelican 1954 Pritchard J B ed The Ancient Near East, Princeton & OUP 1958 Additional reference books: These will be furnished to students from time to time during the course.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays (of approximately 2,500 words) during the year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

306

Middle Eastern Studies

181-231 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A (PASS)

181-232 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2 В (PASS)

Each of these subjects is made up of two of the units listed below:

Units available:

181-001 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part 1 (Pass) 181-002 The Islamic Middle East—Part 1 (Pass) 181-003 The Modern Middle East—Part 1 (Pass) 181-004 The Archaeology of Palestine—Part 1 (Pass)

181-001 THE JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST-PART 1 (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course will concentrate on three aspects of Judaeo-Christian thought and Is based on a study of biblical and non-biblical texts in English translation.

Topics for consideration will be: (i) Problems in the early history of Israel: Patriarchs, Exodus, Settle-

ment, The rise of the Kingdom. (ii) The prophetic movement in Israel with special reference to Isaiah

and Jeremiah.

(iii) The rise of Judaism, including an introduction to the Dead Sea Scrolls.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading.

(The substance of this reading will be assumed in the course.) Bright J A History ot Israel, SCM 1960 Heaton E W The Old Testament Prophets, Pelican 1961 Rowley H H The Faith of Israel, SCM 1956 Russell D S Between The Testaments, SCM 1960

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Bright J A History of Israel, SCM 1960 Rad G von The Message of the Prophets, 1968 Vermes G The Dead Sea Scrolls in English, Pelican 1962

In addition students should possess one modern commentary on Isaiah and Jeremiah. Volumes in any of the following series are suitable: Anchor Bible, Century Bid e, New Clarendon Bible, The Old Testament Library.

(c) Books recommended for reference and additional reading: Anderson B W The Living World of the Old Testament, Longman 1971 Bright J Early Israel in Recent History Writing, SCM 1956 Hermann S Israel in Egypt, SCM 1973 Lindblom J Prophecy in Ancient Israel, Blackwell 1963 Russell D S The Method and Message of Apocalyptic, SCM 1964

307

Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words during the year.

EXAM 1 NATI O N

One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

181-002 THE ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST-PART 1 (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course will concentrate on two aspects of Islamic thought and Is based on a study of the Koran and other texts in English translation. Topics for consideration will be: 1. Antecedents of Islam: A survey of central teachings of Zoro-

astrianism, Judaism and Syrian Christianity and their relevance to the teachings of the Qur'an.

2. The life and teachings of the Prophet Muhammad as witnessed by the Qur'an and Hadith.

BOOKS

Prescribed books:

Bowman J "The Debt of Islam to Monophysite Syrian Christianity" in Thatcher Memorial Volume, ed MacLaurin E C. Sydney University Press

Cragg K The Call of the Minaret, New York 1956 Guillaume A Islam, Pelican 1955 Rahman F Islam, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1967 Watt G Montgomery Muhammad, Prophet and Statesman, OUP 1961

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-003 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST-PART 1 (PASS) (ARAB STATES)

A course of one lecture per week and up to one tutorial a week through-out the year. Available in alternate years 1975, 1977, etc. In the years 1976, 1978 students will take course 181-007.

SYLLABUS A study of the social, economic, technological and political aspects of the Modern Arab States with particular reference to the impact of the Western nations since World Wer 1.

308

Middle Eastern Studies

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed books:

Cremeans C D The Arabs and the World, Praeger F A 1963 Laqueur W ed The Israel—Arab Reader; a Documentary History of the Middle East Conflict, Penguin 1969 McDonald R W The League of Arab States, Princeton 1965 Lenczowskl G The Middle East in World Affairs, 3rd ed Cornell University Press 1962

(b) Books recommended for reference and general reading: Binder L The Ideological Revolution in the Middle East, John

Wiley 1964 Karpat K H ed Political and Social Thought in the Contemporary

Middle East, Pall Mall Press 1968 Laqueur W The Struggle for the Middle East; the Soviet Union

and the Middle East 1958-1968, London 1972 Lenczowskl G Oil and State in the Middle East, Cornell 1960 Peretz Don The Middle East Today, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1965

Students will be encouraged to consult academic journals dealing with Miдд lе Eastern problems, such as the international Journal of Middle East Studies, The Middle East Journal, The Middle East and North Africa.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words during the year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

181-004 THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE—PART 1 (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course consists of a number of introductory lectures on methodology followed by a study of the Archaeology of Palestine from the Palaeo-lithic to the Miдд l е Bronze Age. Comparison with neighbouring cultures will be made constantly. An introduction to the study of pottery; description, cataloguing and drawing forms part of the course.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading: Kenyon K M Beginning In Archaeology, Phoenix 1961

(b) Prescribed texts: Kenyon K M Archaeology In the Holy Lend, 3rd ed Oxford 1969 Kenyon K M The Biblical Archaeologist Reader 2, Doubleday 1984

Anatl E Palestine before the Hebrews, Jonathan Cape 1963

Albright W F The Archaeology of Palestine, Pelican 1960

309

Faculty of Arts

Winton Thomas D ed Archaeology and Old Testament Study, Oxford 1967

Pritchard J B The Ancient Near East, Princeton 1965

(c) Books recommended for reference and additional reading: Students will be introduced to the basic journals dealing with the Archaeology of Palestine and also to representative definitive archaeological reports.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 2,500 to 3,000 words and one class paper of 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper and a half-hour test on pottery. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-331 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES ЗА (PASS)

181-332 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 3 В (PASS) Each of these subjects is made up of two of the units listed below:

181-005 Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part 2 (Pass) 181-006 Islamic Middle East—Part 2 (Pass) 181-007 Modern Middle East—Part 2 (Pass) (Non-Arab States) 181-008 Archaeology of Palestine—Part 2 (Pass) Students are required to enrol both for the full subject and for the separate units using the numbers of the courses.

THIRD YEAR PASS

181-005 THE JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST-PART 2 (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course will concentrate on three aspects of Judaeo-Christian thought and is based on a study of biblical and non-biblical texts in English. Topics for consideration will be:

(i) The historical Jesus and the Synoptic Gospels, with special reference to Luke's Gospel.

(ii) The debt of Christianity to Judaism and the Old Testament illus-trated by the Johannine literature.

(iii) The contribution of Paul to emergent Christianity with special reference to Romans and Galatians.

Prescribed textbooks:

Bruce F F New Testament History, Nelson London 1969 Forster W Palestinian Judaism in New Testament Times, Oliver and

Boyd 1984 Lightfoot R H St John's Gospel, Oxford paperback 1963

Marsh J St John, Pelican 1968

310

Middle Eastern Studies

Neil S The Interpretation of the New Testament 1861-1961, Oxford paperback 1966

Robinson J M A New Quest for the Historical Jesus, SCM 1959

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 2,500 - 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-006 THE ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST—PART 2 (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The syllabus will concentrate on two aspects of Islamic thought and is based on a study of the Qur'an and other texts in English.

Topics for consideration will be:

(I) Beginnings of Kalam; discourse with mediaeval Judaism and Chris-tianity; appearance of sectarian divisions in Islam: Sunnites and Shiites.

(ii) A study in Islamic Mysticism and a comparison with other mystical streams.

Prescribed textbooks:

Arberry A J Sufism, en account of the Mystics of Islam, London 1950 Nicholson R A Studies in Islamic Mysticism, CUP 1967 Watt G Montgomery Islamic Theology and Philosophy, Islamic Survey

No 1 Further reading guides will be furnished to students during the year.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-007 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST—PART 2 (PASS) (NON-ARAB STATES)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. Available in alternate years 1976, 1978, etc. In the years 1975, 1977, etc., students will take course 181-003. Additional essay work is expected and a higher standard of pass in the annual examination.

SYLLABUS A study of social, economic, technological and political aspects of the non-Arab states Iran, Turkey and Israel, with particular reference to the impact of the Western nations in the post-World War 1 period.

311

Faculty of Arts

Prescribed textbooks:

Bentwich N Israel Resurgent, Benn 1960 Jacobs N The Sociology of Development—Iran as an Asian Case Study,

Praeger 1966 Lewis G Turkey, Ernest Benn 1965 Peretz Don The Middle East Today, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1965 Robinson D R The First Turkish Republic—A Case Study in National

Development, Harvard 1965 Weingrod A Israel, Group relations in a new Society, Pall Mall Press

1965 Wilber D N Iran Past and Present, Princeton 1967 Students will be encouraged to consult the Year Books of the UNO, and make constant use of The Middle East and North Africa (Europa) and also of current academic journals dealing with the Middle East.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,500 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-008 THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE-PART 2 (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course will cover the period Late Bronze Age to the Roman Period in Palestine. Comparison with neighbouring cultures will be made continually. The study of pottery will continue and will include the drawing of more difficult items. Some restoration work will be done.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed books: Kenyon K M Archaeology in the Holy Land, 3rd ed Oxford 1969 Kenyon K M The Biblical Archaeologist Reader 2, Doubleday

1964 Albright W F The Archaeology of Palestine, Pelican 1960 Winton Thomas D ed Archaeology and Old Testament Study,

Oxford 1967 Pritchard J B The Ancient Near East, Princeton 1965

Books recommended for reference and additional reading: Amiran R Ancient Pottery of the Holy Land, Messada Jerusalem

1969 Franken H J & Franken-Battershill C A A Primer of Old Testa-

ment Archaeology, E J Brill 1963 Kenyon K M Amorites and Canaanites, British Academy 1966 Lapp P W Palestinian Ceramic Chronology 200 BC-AD 70, Ameri-

can Schools of Oriental Research 1961 Routledge and Kegan Paul 1961

(b)

312

Middle Eastern Studies

Wright G E The Bible end the Ancient Near East (Essays in Honour of W. F. Albright)

Wright G E The Pottery of Palestine from the Earliest Times to the End of the Early Bronze Age, American Schools of Orien-tal Research 1937

Closer attention will be paid to definitive archaeological reports and to archaeological journals like Palestine Exploration Fund Quarterly, Israel Exploration Journal, Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Re-search, Biblical Archaeologist, Levant.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-141 SYRIAC PART 1

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(1) Study of the accidence and syntax of Syriac. Translation from, and into Syriac.

(2) Study of selected passages in Mark's Gospel in the Peshitta. (3) Study of the Teaching of the apostle Addai. (4) Literary and historical introduction to the prescribed books plus a

general introduction to Syriac Literature.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Mark in the Peshitta and Old Syriac The teaching of the Apostle Addai in Carl Brockelmann Syrische Gram-

matik, Leipzig 1960 pp. 12-21 Robinson T H Paradigms and Exercises in Syriac Grammar, latest ed Jennings W Lexicon to the Syriac New Testament, revised by Gantillon

OUP 1928

Recommended for reference:

Bensley R L Rendel Harris J & Burkitt F C The Four Gospels in Syriac, CUP 1894

Nöldeke T H Compendious Syriac Grammar, Williams and Norgate Lon-don 1904

Vöő bus A Studies in the History of the Gospel Text in Syriac, CSC° vol 128 Subsidia 3, Louvain 1951

Wright W A Short History of Syriac Literature, (reprint) Philo Press Amsterdam 1966

WRITTEN WORK Written exercises will be submitted throughout the year.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Written work submitted throughout the year will be taken Into consideration.

313

Faculty of Arts

181-121 HEBREW PART 1

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year for those taking the Modern Hebrew option. For students taking the Biblical Hebrew option a course of two lectures and one tutorial through-out the year and one lecture per week in second term to be taken jointly with students of Hebrew Part 2. Students who, before their enrolment, have not reached Leaving or Higher School Certificate standard in Hebrew may be required to give evidence of ability to follow the course.

Note: An intensive summer school in Hebrew may be offered by the department each year.

Intending students for summer school must consult the chairman of the department not later than the second week in January, 1975.

Note: The course is not available for external students.

SYLLABUS

Translation of Biblical texts and history will be compulsory for all stu-dents. In addition students must choose one of the following options:

(a) Modern Hebrew.

(b) Biblical Hebrew.

(a) Modern Hebrew will consist of translation of selected modern texts together with grammar and prose styles of Modern Hebrew. Tuition will be given in modern conversational idioms. (b) Biblical Hebrew will consist of translation of selected Biblical texts together with work on grammar and prose styles, and the study of exegesis.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts (general): Genesis, chaps 21-24; 1 Samuel, chaps 16-20; 1 Kings, chaps 11-14.

Note: Students taking option (a) take only selections of these texts for 13 weeks. Then an introduction to Israeli society is taken for 13 weeks.

In addition:

Option (a):

Chomsky M ed Sh а er leSifrut, Selected Texts Am ‚ved Tel Aviv 1969 Bialik Ch N HaMatmid, Poems Dvir Tel Aviv 1966 Agnon S Y Maaseh haEz, Schocken, Tel Aviv. Yedidut, Schocken Tel

Aviv

Option (b): Psalms 8, 18, 29, 46, 65, 72, 74, 94, 115, 147.

N.B. Hebrew Bible. (Any Massoretic text edition; Kittel edition is es-pecially recommended.)

Standard histories such as J Bright A History of Israel, SCM 1960, or M Noth The History of Israel, 2nd ed A & C Black 1960 are adequate. Any of the standard commentaries will provide helpful background and exegetical material on the set biblical texts, e.g., the commentaries in The Old Testament Library Series, SCM, International Critical Commen-

314

Middle Eastern Studies

tary, Tyndale, Torch Bible Commentaries, Anchor Bible, The Century Bible, etc.

Recommended for reference:

Koehler L & Baumgartner W Lexicon in V T Libros, Brill 1953 Cowley A E Gesenius Hebrew Grammar, 2nd English ed OUP 1910 Pfeiffer R H introduction to the Old Testament Weiser A Introduction to the Old Testament, E tr of German ed

1967—Da г ton Longman & Todd 1961 Brown Driver & Briggs Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testa-

ment, OUP 1906 Llvny Y & Kokhba M A Hebrew Grammar, Mass Jerusalem 1964 Schachter H The New Universal Hebrew-English Dictionary, 'Yarneh'

Pub House Tel Aviv Alcalay R The Complete English-Hebrew Dictionary, Massadah Pub

Co Tel Aviv Jerusalem Alcalay R The Complete Hebrew-English Dictionary, Massadah Pub.

House Tel Aviv Jerusalem Weiser A The Psalms, 5th ed ET SCM 1962

In addition students are advised to read the relevant material from the reference bibliography of the Middle Eastern Studies 2 course.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers.

181-221 HEBREW PART 2 (PASS) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. The lecture for the Biblical Hebrew option will be taken jointly with students of Hebrew Part 3. External studies are not available.

SYLLABUS

Translation of Biblical texts and history will be compulsory for all stu-dents who, in addition, must choose one of the following options: (a) Modern Hebrew.

(b) Biblical Hebrew.

(a) Modern Hebrew will continue translation of selections from Modern Hebrew literature of various styles. Prose composition in Modern He-brew, Modern Hebrew syntax, and tuition in spoken Modern Hebrew will be taken.

(b) The Bid ical Hebrew option will continue translation of Biblical material together with syntax and prose composition In Biblical styles, and the study of exegesis.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts (general):

Isaiah, chaps 1-6; Jeremiah, chaps 1-8, 7, 13, 20-21; Ezekiel, chaps 8-11, 35-36; Psalms 8, 18, 29, 46, 65, 72, 74, 94, 115, 147.

Note: Students taking option (a) take only selections of these texts for 13 weeks. Then an introduction to Israeli society is taken for 13 weeks.

315

Faculty of Arts

In addition:

Option (a): Bialik Ch N Yom haShishi halatsar, Stories Dvir Toi Aviv 1971 Tshernichovski S Barukh miMagenza, Poems Dvir Tel Aviv 1966 Agnon S Y Tehillah, Works SС hОС kе n Tel Aviv

Option (b):

Deut. chaps 8-11, 27-28, 31; Puy. chaps 1, 8-10, 28-31. The first of these prescriptions forms part of the general prescribed texts for Hebrew Part 3, and the second forms part of Option (b) for Hebrew Part 3.

Prescribed books:

Weiser A The Psalms, 5th ed ET SCM 1962 Ben-or Orinowsky A Toledot Hasifrut Hahadashe, 3 vols Tel Aviv 1946 Bright J Jeremiah, Anchor Bible 1965 The International Critical Commentary in its relevant parts.

Students are also referred to the relevant material in the bibliography for the Middle Eastern Studies 2 course.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

181-321 HEBREW PART 3 (PASS) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. External studies are not available.

SYLLABUS

A study of comparative grammar, prose composition and translation of Biblical texts will be compulsory for all students. In addition students must choose one of the following options:

(a) Modern Hebrew. (b) Biblical Hebrew.

(a) Modern Hebrew option will consist of translation of advanced texts, advanced prose composition in Modern Hebrew and essays on Israeli writers and their works.

(b) The Biblical Hebrew option will continue translation of selected Biblical literature, together with work on advanced Biblical prose com-position and studies on topics of Biblical literature, and exegesis.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts (general):

Job 1-8; Deut. chaps 8-11, 27-28, 31, Jonah and Malachi.

Note: Students taking option (a) take only selections from these texts. Then an introduction to Israeli society is taken for 13 weeks.

In addition:

Option (a):

Ahad Ha-Am Moshe, Works pt 1 Dvir Tel Aviv 1971

Shimoni D Matseivah, Tel Aviv 1972

Hazaz Ch Rachamim or Shelulit Genuzah, Am Oved, 1952

316

Middle Eastern Studies

Option (b):

Isaiah, chaps 2435; Proverbs, chaps 1, 8-10, 28-31.

Recommended for reference:

The International Critical Commentary in its relevant parts.

Students ere also referred to the bibliography for Hebrew part 2.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers.

181-111 ARABIC PART 1-MODERN ARABIC

A course of three lectures per week plus one tutorial class throughout the year. Facilities for study in the language laboratory will also be available.

SYLLABUS

No previous knowledge of Arabic is necessary for this course. Students will be introduced Into modern literary Arabic. The emphasis will be on the literary form both written and oral, not colloquial. There will be some introductory lectures on Arab society today.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts: Frayha Anis The Essentials of Arabic, Khayat 1958 Ziadeh F J & Winder R B Introduction to Modern Arabic, Princeton

University Press 1957

Recommended for reference:

Hitti P K A History of the Arabs, 6th ed Macmillan 1958 Cremeans C D The Arabs and the World, Praeger 1963 Wehr Hans Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic, Otto Harrassowitz

Wiesbaden 1961 Donlach N S ed The Oxford English-Arabic Dictionary of Current

Usage, Oxford University Press 1972

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers and an oral examination.

181-211 ARABIC PART 2 (PASS) -- MODERN ARABIC

A course of three lectures per week plus one tutorial class throughout the year. Facilities for study in the language laboratory will also be available.

SYLLABUS Translation from prescribed texts from modern Arabic Literature (prose), selections of modern Arabic poetry. Translation from English into Arabic and composition. Accidence and syntax. Study of modern Arabic society continued.

BOOKS

Frayha Anis The Essentials of Arabic, Khayat 1958 Sheringham A T Modern Arabic Sentences, Selections from the News-

papers Kegan Paul 1927

317

Faculty of Arts

Shawgi Ahmad Cleopatra, Ministry of Education Cairo 1948 A г berrу A J Modern Arabic Poetry, London 1950

Recommended for reference:

Hitti P K A History of the Arabs, 6th ed Macmillan 1958 Cremeans C D The Arabs and the World, Praeger 1963 Wehr Hans Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic, Otto Harrassowitz

Wiesbaden 1961 Doniach N S ed The Oxford English-Arabic Dictionary of Current

Usage, Oxford University Press 1972

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers and an oral examination.

181-311 ARABIC PART 3 (PASS)—CLASSICAL ARABIC

A course of three lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

A study of Classical texts including selections from the Qur'an, pre-Islamic poetry and Belles Lettres. BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Qur'an Chapters Malda and Maryam Classical poetry al-Mu allagat Majanil-Adab vol 4 pp 265-305 Ibn Khaldun Mugaddimah, Beirut 1967

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers.

HONOURS DEGREE

SCHOOL OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

(For possible combinations with this school, see pp. 439 ff., and a pamphlet available from the Arts Faculty office.)

1. The courses for the degree with honours in the school of Middle Eastern Studies comprise the following subjects:

Hebrew parts 1 (pass), 2 (hofs), 3 (hots) and 4 (hofs). Arabic parts 1 (pass), 2 (hors), 3 (hans) and 4 (hans). Syriac parts 1 (pass), 2 (hens), 3 (hofs) and 4 (hots). Middle Eastern Studies 1 (pass), 2A and/or 26 (hans), 3A and/or 38

(hens) and 4 (hans).

2. Candidates who intend to enter the honours school should normally take in their first year:

One of: Hebrew 1, Arabic 1 or Syriac 1 together with Middle Eastern Studies 1. Plus two additional grade 1 subjects. Admission to the honours course is conditional upon a satisfactory performance in the first year. This will normally be the equivalent of at least second class honours. Other candidates who wish to enter the

318

Middle Eastern Studies

honours school must consult the chairman of the department who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. In their second year candidates will take the appropriate honours courses In two of the following:

Hebrew 2 (hens), Arabic 2 (hofs), Syriac 2 (hens), Middle Eastern Studies 2 (hens). Plus one additional grade 2 subject.

In their third year students will take the Honours courses in two of the following:

Hebrew 3 (hens), Arabic 3 thons) or Syriac 3 (hofs). Middle Eastern Studies 3 (hofs). Towards the end of the third year candidates are required to select a subject for their fourth year honours thesis. This will be prepared during the fourth year and submitted by the end of second term as part of the final examination. The final examination will be taken in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

PART 1

Two papers from one of the following:

Prescribed Hebrew texts and unseen translation. Prescribed Arabic texts and unseen translation. Prescribed Syriac texts and unseen translation.

Two papers in:

Middle Eastern Studies 3 (hens).

PART 2

There are several patterns:

(a) Two papers in one of:

Advanced Hebrew prescribed texts and prose composition. Advanced Arabic prescribed texts and prose composition. Advanced Syriac prescribed texts and prose composition. One paper in one of: Hebrew Literature Biblical and post-Biblical. Arabic Literature Classical and Modern. Syriac Literature. One paper in Middle Eastern Studies 4 (Hofs).

One paper in one of: Advanced Hebrew/Arabic/Syriac prescribed texts and prose com-

position. Three papers of Middle Eastern Studies 4 (Hans).

(c) Four papers in Middle Eastern Studies 4 (Ions). In each of the above patterns students are required to submit in addition a thesis of between 8,000 and 10,000 words in length.

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES IN COMBINED COURSES In general, Middle Eastern Studies in combined honours courses con-sists of half of the Middle Eastern Studies subjects required or recom-mended ln the pure Honours School, that is, one Middle Eastern Studies unit in the first year, one Honours Middle Eastern Studies subject in

(b)

319

Faculty of Arts

each of the second and third years and half of the requirements (repre-sented by two papers at the final examination) of the fourth year. The final honours thesis will be mutually arranged with the second department with which the candidate works.

181-291 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A (HONOURS)

181-292 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2 В (HONOURS)

Honours courses in each of the four half-courses (pass) referred to above, namely 181-001, 181-002, 181-003, 181-004 will comprise the pass course plus additional seminar work of up to one hour per week. An honours course will consist of two pass units plus seminar work in each unit.

181-009 JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST—PART 1 (HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week plus a series of seminars each of one hour's duration throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

As for Judaeo-Christian Middle East—part 1 (pass) course 181-001. The seminar will investigate a limited number of topics in greater depth. Among the topics discussed the following may be included—additional historical problems. form criticism and Old Testament litera-ture, Wisdom literature in Israel, pre-Christian Jewish literature.

BOOKS

As for the pass course. The bibliography will depend on seminar topics discussed. Appropriate lists will be supplied to honours students.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words, and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

181-010 ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST—PART 1 (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week plus a series of seminars each of one hour's duration throughout the year.

SYLLABUS As for Islamic Middle East—part 1 (pass) course 181-002. The seminars will study a limited number of the topics taken up in the pass course at greater depth.

320

Middle Eastern Studies

BOOKS

As for the pass course.

The bibliography will depend on the precise seminar topics discussed. Appropriate lists will be supplied to honours students.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approxi-mately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-011 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST—PART 1 (HONOURS) ARAB STATES

A course of one lecture per week and up to one tutorial a week through-out the year, plus a weekly seminar of one hour throughout the year. Available in alternate years 1975, 1977, etc. In the years 1976, 1978 students will take the alternate third year course.

SYLLABUS

As for the pass course 181-003. The seminar will investigate a limited number of topics in greater depth. Among these the following may be included: oil in the Middle East; problems of water distribution; political contacts with non-Arab States; sociological changes since the end of World War II.

BOOKS

As for the pass course. Additional bibliography arising from the precise seminar topics dis-cussed will be supplied.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-012 THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE—PART 1 (HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and one tutorial a week throughout the year plus one seminar weekly throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

As for the pass course 181-004. The seminar will investigate in greater depth a number of methodo-logical problems and study at greater depth appropriate typical sites with the aid of excavation reports. Students will be encouraged to develop individual Interests.

321 L

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS As for pass course. Additional bibliography will be supplied to students to cover seminar topics.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-391 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Э A (HONOURS)

181-392 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 3 В (HONOURS) Honours courses in each of the four half-courses (pass) referred to above, namely 181-005, 181-006, 181-007, 181-008. Courses 181-009 and 181-010 are honours courses with certain prerequisites. TWO honours courses comprise ONE honours subject.

181-013 JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST-PART 2 (HONOURS)

As for the pass course 181-005. Plus a seminar. Several topics will be studied in depth among which the following may be included: form criticism and the Gospels; Paul and rabbinic exegesis; interpreting the parables; redaction criticism.

BOOKS

As for the pass course.

Additional bibliography will be supplied to students depending on the precise seminar topics discussed.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-014 ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST-PART 2 (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year, plus one weekly seminar of up to 1% hours throughout the year.

SYLLABUS As for Islamic Middle East—Part 2 (pass) course 181-006. The seminar will be based on Kitab a1-Miial wa'1-Ni ń al by Shahrastani, translated by Drs Kazi and Flynn; Abr-Nahrain, vols VII-X and Studies in

322

Middle Eastorn Studies

Islamic Mysticism by R A Nicholson as well as A J Arberry's Fifty Poems of Hafiz, CUP 1962.

BOOKS

As for pass course. Additional bibliography will be provided during the course of the seminars.

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit two essays of approximately 2,500 words during the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-015 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST-PART 2 (HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year plus one weekly seminar of up to 1 1/2 hours throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

As for pass course 181-007. The seminar will consider a limited number of topics in depth. These may include the following — land reforms In Iran, experiments in democracy in Turkey, sociological problems in Israel.

BOOKS

As for pass course. Additional bibliography will be provided for seminars during the year.

WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approxi-mately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-016 ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE-PART 2 (HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year plus one weekly seminar of up to 1 1/2 hours throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

As for the pass course 181-008. The seminar will be concerned with an Introduction to Semitic Alpha-betic Inscriptions. Examples of inscriptions from the earliest Seraы t el Khadim texts to early Syriac texts will be studied.

BOOKS

As for the pass course.

NO set booke will be prescribed for Inscriptions but the following are recommended for general reference:

323

Faculty of Arts

Donner H & Rollig W Kanaaniische und Aramäische Inschriften, Har-rassowitz Wiesbaden 1964

Gibson J C L Syrian Semitic Inscriptions vol 1, Oxford 1971 Lldzbarski M Handbuch der Nordsemitischen Epigraphik, Hildesheim

1962

WRITTEN WORK

Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 3,000 words during the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-017 THE ANCIENT MIDDLE EAST-AКК ADIAN PART 1 (PASS & HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. As a prerequisite for this course students will be required to have com-pleted two years of a Semitic language.

SYLLABUS

An introduction to the basic grammar and syntax of Akkadian with the reading of simple texts both in transliteration and in cuneiform. N.B. The work in Akkadian can be continued in Middle Eastern Studies 4.

BOOKS

These will be referred to in the course of the year. For the most part the course will be developed independently of standard texts which can be consulted for reference.

WRITTEN WORK

Exercises will be prepared regularly during the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

181-018 INTRODUCTION TO THE SEMANTICS OF SEMITIC LANGUAGES (PASS & HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. As a prerequisite for this course students will be required to have completed two years of a Semitic language.

SYLLABUS The course will consist of a brief survey of general semantics and an introduction into the semantic structure of Semitic languages, with a few exhaustive examples of common Semitic roots, starting from Biblical Hebrew.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Barr J The Semantics of Biblical Language, Oxford 1961

324

Middle Eastern Studios

Prescribed texts:

Holladay W L The root /shub/ in the Old Testament, Leiden 1958 Murtonen A "The use and meaning of the words/Ibarek/and/braka in

the Old Testament" Vetus Testamentum IX, Leiden 1959

WRITTEN WORK

Tutorial class assignments through the year.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper; more advanced class work will also be taken into account.

181-491 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES-PART 4

A course of four lecture-seminars per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

Towards the close of the third year a range of topics will be decided with honours students in the light of the interests and backgrounds of the students, each involving the advanced study of a restricted theme in Middle Eastern Studies. Typical themes might be: Law and Covenant in the Ancient Near East; Ideas of Salvation in Middle Eastern Religions; Historiography in the Middle East; Literary Forms and Motifs in Middle Eastern Literatures; Cultural and Religious Cross-fertilization in the Ancient Middle East; the emergence of Nationalism in the Modern Middle East; Economic Problems in the Middle East.

Note: Where linguistic areas are elected, e.g. Akkadian, Ugaritic, Epi-graphy or some part of Arabic 4, Hebrew 4, Syriac 4, the amount of work ta be undertaken in Middle Eastern Studies 4 will be reduced. See patterns of examinations in the Second Part Final Examination. It is expected that, in any case, students will make functional use of lan-guages studies in Parts 1 ta 3.

BOOKS Bibliography will be supplied in the course of the year.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified In the form of (a) Seminar papers, and (b) essay work.

EXAMINATION

Four 3-hour papers.

181-261 HEBREW PART 2 (HONS) A course of four lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS in addition to the work of the ordinary class, honours students will do additional work in one or two of the following areas, viz:

(a) Modern Hebrew, to be taken jointly with Hebrew Part 3.

(b) Additional Biblical Hebrew; to be taken jointly with Hebrew part 3.

325

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

Prescribed texts (general):

As for the ordinary degree plus:

Option (a): Appelfald A Kitty Hazaz Ch Rachamim or Shelulit Genuzah, Am Oved 1952

Option (b):

Deut. chaps 8-11, 27-28, 31;Prov. 1, 8-10, 128-131. and/or Jonah; Malachi; Zechariah, chaps 1-8; Song of Songs; Haggai.

Prescribed books:

Relevant sections of Encyclopedia Talmudit . Waxman M A History of Jewish Literature, Bloch NY 1930-41 Encyclopedia Israelit, Jerusalem 1947 Wright W Lectures on Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages,

CUP 1890 Brockelmann C Grundriss der Vergleichenden Grammatik der Semitis-

chen Sprachen, 2 vols Reuther & Reichard Berlin 1908-13 Epstein L Judaism, Pelican 1959

EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers.

181-361 HEBREW PART 3 (HONS) A course of four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

Three of the lectures and the tutorial will be taken jointly with Hebrew Part 3. The fourth lecture will be taken jointly with students of Hebrew Part 4.

SYLLABUS

In addition to the work of the ordinary class, honours students will do additional work in one or two of the following areas, viz:

(a) Modern Hebrew. (b) Biblical Hebrew.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts (general):

As for the ordinary degree, plus:

Option (a): Appelfeld A Kitty Jehoshuah A B Shetigah Holekhet weNimshekhet shel Meshorer

Option (b): Isaiah, 24-35; Proverbs 1, 8-10, 28-31. and/or Zechariah, 1-8; Song of Songs; Haggai; Isaiah 56-60.

326

Middle Eastern Studies

Recommended for reference:

Yale Judaica series with special reference to the volumes of the code of Maimonides, Yale UP

Husik 1 A History of Mediaeval Jewish Philosophy, Jewish Pub Soc. Phllad 1946

Rabin C Maimonides: The Guide for the Perplexed. East and West Library London 1952

Halkin S Modern Hebrew Literature, Schocken NY 1950 Bauer P L Historische Grammatik der Hebraischen Sprache, Jewish Pub

Soc Halle 1922 В г п no E Studien Liber Hebräische Morphologie und Vokalismus auf

Grundlage der Mercatischen Fragmente der Zweiten Kolumne dei Hexaple des Origenes, Brockhaus Leipzig 1943

Brockelmann C Kurzgefasste Vergleichende Grammatik der Semitischen Sprachen, Reuther & Reichard Berlin 1908

Bentzen A Introduction to the Old Testament, 2 vols Gael Copenhagen 1948-9

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and an oral test.

181-461 HEBREW PART 4 A course of two lectures and one seminar per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(a) Advanced translation: modern Hebrew literature. or

(b) Advanced translation: Biblical Hebrew literature.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Option (e):

Selections from the works of Shimoni, Bialik, Tschernichovski, Leah Goldberg. Selections from Agnon, Shamir, Hazaz, Amihai, Appelfeld, Jehoshuah.

Option (b): Selections from Deuteronomy, Hosea, Job, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes, Daniel; or from Hodayoth, Zadokite Fragments, and the War of the Sons of Light against the Sons of Darkness.

Students at this stage in their course are expected to prepare their own bibliographies as an essential part of their preparation for research.

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers, an oral test of 25 minutes and thesis.

181-271 ARABIC PART 2 (HONS)

A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial throughout the year.

327

Faculty of Arts

N.B. The course comprises the two lectures of Arabic 2 (pass), plus certain parts of the prescribed texts for Arabic З (pass). Lectures will be taken at the same hours. Students should consult the lecturers in Arabic.

SYLLABUS As for Arabic 2 (pass) with additional grammar.

BOOKS As for Arabic 2 (pass) plus Taha Husayn: AI A ууат ; Muhamud Taymur: Nida' al-Majhul, pp. 9-31.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

181-371 ARABIC PART 3 (HONS) A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial, throughout the year. N.B. Two of the lectures are identical with those for Arabic 3 (pass) and will be taken at the same hours. Students should consult the lecturer in Arabic.

SYLLABUS

As for Arabic 3 (pass) plus history of classical Arabic literature consult-ing Arabic sources.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

AI-Zayyat A H Tarikh al-Adab al-'Arabi (History of Arabic Literature), Cairo

Al-Fakhuri H Tarikh a1-Adab ul-'Arabi (A History of Arabic Literature), Beirut 1960

Recommended for reference:

Nicholson R A A Literary History of the Arabs, CUP 1953 Gibb H A R Arabic Literature, en Introduction, CUP 1926 Grunebaum G E von Kritik und Dichtkunst, Harrassowltz Wiesbaden

1955

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers.

181-471 ARABIC PART 4 A course of two lectures per week, with one seminar throughout the year.

SYLLABUS One only of the following options may be taken in any one year.

(1) Advanced study of Arabic historiography. or (2) Advanced study of special topics in modern Arabic literature.

or (3) Advanced study of Arabic philosophical and scientific works.

or (4) Study of Arabic and Muslim linguistic, literary and cultural in- influence among non-Arabic speaking Muslim communities, with special reference to Persian and Urdu.

328

Middle Eastern Studies

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

1. al-Mubarrad: Al K ě mil; al-Más' й dT: Tanbih; al-Tabari: Annals; al-Balãdhuri: Fut й h a1 Ви ldãn; Salih 'Ali: Muh darat fi Ta'rikh

Ai'Areb.

2. Taha Husayn: 'Ala Н ámish а s-Sire; Mahmй d Taymur: al-Atlál; Taw-fiq al Hakim: Himári lala Li; Amin al-RayhánT: Muluk al-Arab; Jurji Zaydan: Riwayat е l-Maml й k.

з . Ibn Tafayl: Hayy Ibn Yagzán; Ibn Rushd: Fasl A1-Magii; al-Ma'arri: L uzumiyyšt; a1-Biruni:Rasa'i1; Abd al-Quadir al-Jitáni: Fal Fath al Rabbini wa-fayd al-Rahmani (Cairo 1380 1960 pp. 112-138; 146-194).

4. Igbal M: Reconstruction of Religious Thought in Islam; Yusuf Ja'fari: Kelm 1-Urdu; Prem. Chand: Gau-Dan; Sarshar R N: Fisana- е -ozad; Hafiz: Diwan; Ruml: Masnavl; Sa'di: Gulistan; Omar Khayyam: Rubayyat.

Recommended for reference: Platts J T A Grammer of Hindustani or Urdu Language, OUP 1941 Lambton A K S Persian Grammar, CUP 1953 Browne E G Literary History of Persia, 2 vols T F Unwin 1902-08 Bailey T G History of Urdu Literature, OUP 1932 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and thesis

181-281 SYRIAC PART 2 (HONS) SYLLABUS

A course of two lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

(i) Study of Syriac of the Patristic period, with reading of prescribed texts. All three scripts to be read. Translation and prose-work. Ad-vanced grammar and unprepared translation.

and

(it) Literary, historical and cultural background to the texts prescribed.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Jansma T A Selection from the Acts of Judas Thomas, Brill Leiden 1952 Bardalsan Kthava d'Namusa d'Athrawatha, Patrologia Syriaca Euseblus Historia Ecclesiae, Bk I xiii ed by Wright & Maclean CUP Brockelmann C Syrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Literatur, Chresto-

mathie und Glossar, Leipzig 1960

Recommended for reference (see also part I):

Duval R La Litterature syriaque, Bibiiotheque de L'Enseignement de L'histoire ecclesiascique. Anciennes litteratures chretiennes, vol II Paris Lecoffre 1899

Baumstark A Geschichte der Syrischen Literatur, Marcus & Weber Bonn 1922

329

Faculty of Arts

van Hoonacker A Une Communauté Judéo- А raт é еп e å Elephantine Schweich Lectures 1914 OUP 1915

Altaner B Patrologie, 2te Aufl Herder Freiburg I B 1950 Dictionaries: In addition to those mentioned under part 1, the following should be con- sulted: Smith R Payne Thesaurus Syriecus, 2 vols OUP 1879-1901 Smith J P Supplement to Thesaurus Syriacus of R. Payne Smith, OUP

1927 Students are also referred to the other literature prescribed for Middle Eastern Studies parts 1 and 2.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

181-381 SYRIAC PART 3 (HONS) A course of two lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(i) More advanced treatment of grammar and syntax, together with translation of unprescribed texts from Syriac.

(ii) Study of Syriac Biblical commentators, and advanced study of Patristic texts.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Theodore on the Nicene Creed, Woodbrooke Studies ed Mingana A, Vol.6 Baptism Camb 1932

Wright W Joshua the Stylite, Chronicle, CUP 1880 Bar Habraeus Tractate on Heresies: Patrologia Orientalis, Vol XIII Mitchell C ed Prose Refutations of Mani. Marcion and Bardaisan, Texts

and Trans Soc 1912 Gibson M D The Commentaries of lsho'dad on the Gospel of John,

Books i-x Horae Semiticae vii CUP 1911 Burkitt F C Euphemia and the Goth, Williams & Norgate 1913 Aphraates De Monachis, Patrologia Syriaca Vol. 1 ed Graffin R

Recommended for reference:

Barrett C K The Gospel According to St. John. An Introduction, SPCK 1955

Dodd C H The Interpretation of the Fourth Gospel, CUP 1953

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers.

181-481 SYRIAC PART 4 A course of two lectures per week, with one seminar, throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The overall plan will be as follows:

330

Music

Texts:

(i) Syriac: Study of Nestorian and Monophysite liturgies and homilies. (il) A special study on a selected topic.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Liber Graduum, Patrologia Syriaca ed Graffin R, Firmin-Didot Paris 1926 Cols 584-765

Dionysius Bar Saiib Against the Armenians, ed Mingana A 1931 Martyrium Beall Simeonls bar Sabb- e Patrologia Syriaca, Vol II Cols

714-960 Severos of Antioch Homily XC. Pat. Or., 23 Fasc 1A pp 120-165 Liturgical texts from the departmental collection viz:

The Liturgies of Addai and Mari, and Theodore of Mopsuestia, etc.

Bibliography at this stage will be considered to be the responsibility of students, as pert of their initial training for research.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Thesis on special subject.

MASTER OF ARTS

181-601 J. SCHOOL OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

Candidates will prepare a thesis on an approved subject. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department of Middle Eastern Studies to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. Research seminars will be held throughout the year. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC Chairman of Department: Professor G. F. LOUGHLIN, DMus. (Dunelm.), M.A., F.R.C.M., F.R.C.O.

ORDINARY DEGREE The subjects which may be taken in the ordinary degree course are Music 1A, 28, Э C.

The major Is Music 1A, 26, Э C.

331

Faculty of Arts

No pure honours course in Music is available, but honours courses in Music 1A, 26, Э C, 4D or 4E may be taken as part of an approved com-bined honours course. (See pp. 439 ff., and a pamphlet available from the Arts Faculty office.) External tuition is not available in Music 1A, 26, Э C, 4D. Satisfactory attendance at both lectures and tutorials is necessary.

740-001 MUSIC 1A This course is divided into (a) Form and (b) History of Music, compris-ing two lectures and one tutorial per week, with assignments throughout the year. Although no special prerequisite is laid down, students will be expected to have sufficient knowledge to enable them to follow the lectures.

SYLLABUS

(a) Form:

Folk Song and the principal forms from the 16th century to the early 20th century, including the following:

Mass, Motet, Madrigal, the forms used by J. S. Bach and his contem-poraries, Sonata, Quartet, Symphony, Concerto, Symphonic Poem, Varia-tioП s.

(b) History of Music:

The social history of European music from 1600 to 1770 and the study of representative works from those of Monteverdi to the early works of Haydn and Mozart.

ASSIGNMENTS

Two assignments will be given during the year in each part of the course.

These assignments will be taken into consideration when assessing ex-amination results. Listening assignments and other tutorial projects will be set from time to time.

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

Abraham G History of Music in Sound, Vols IV, V and VI, OUP 1953-4 Berry W Form In Music, Prentice-Hall 1966 Bukofzer M Music in the Baroque Era, Dent 1946 Davison A T & Apel W Historical Anthology of Music, Vol. II, Hary UP

1959 Harman & Mellers Man and his Music I1, 3-6 Barrie & Rockliff 1962 Lang P H Music in Western Civilization, Norton 1941 or Dent 1965 Morris R 0 The Structure of Music, OUP 1966 Thorpe Davie C Musical Structure end Design, Dobson 1970

(b) Prescribed score for 1975:

Bach J S Mass in B Minor (any miniature score not vocal score)

(c) Recommended for reference:

Arnold D Monteverdi, Dent 1963 Bairstow E C The Evolution of Musical Form, OUP 1943

Dart T The Interpretation of Music, 4th ed Hutchinson 1967

332

Music

Dent E J Alessandro Scarlatti, Arnold 1962 Geiringer K The Bach Family, Allen & Unwin 1954 Grout D J A A Short History of Opera, Columbia UP 1963 Hutchings A J B The Baroque Concerto, Faber & Faber 1961 Lang P H George Frederick Handel, Faber & Faber 1966 Morris R 0 The Structure of Music, OUP 1935 Moser H J M Heinrich Sch й tz, Faber & Faber 1967 Newman W S The Sonata in the Baroque Era, Chapel Híii U of North

Carolina 1959 O'Brien G The Golden Age of Italian Music, Jarrolds 1948 O'Brien G The Golden Age of German Music, Jarrolds 1953 Sadie S Handel, Calder 1962 Schweitzer A J S Bach, 2 vols, Black 1935 Terry C S The Music of Bach, OUP 1933 Terry C S Bach's Orchestra, OUP 1932 Zimmerman F B Henry Purcell, His Life and Times, Macmillan 1967

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers and assignments.

740-021 MUSIC 2 В (PASS) A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS

A survey of European music from c. 1770-1900 with a critical study of prescribed works. . The works selected for special study have been chosen with a view to increasing the student's awareness of:

(a) The problem of characterisation and dramatic construction in opera, the function of music in the Liturgy and also an examination of the "miniaturist art" of Lieder;

The structural problems of the symphony and allied forms, espe-cially the dilemmas confronting Romantic composers in the orga-nisation of large scale abstract works and the variety of solutions preferred.

ASSIGN МЕ NTS

Two essay assignments will be set during the year in addition to "listening programmes", class papers and other tutorial projects.

PRESCRIBED WORKS Any readily available editions of the following works may be used, including vocal scores. Beethoven L. Quartet, Op 132 Beethoven L Symphony No. 3, Eroica Beethoven L Symphony No. 9 Berlioz H Romeo et Juliette Brahms J Symphony No. 3 Haydn J Missa in tempore bell! Haydn J Symphony No. 104 Liszt F Faust Symphony Mahler G Lieder eines fahrenden Gesellen

(b)

333

Faculty of Arts

Mozart W A The Marriage of Figaro Mozart W A Symphony No. 40. К .550 Schubert F Die schöne M й lleri п Schumann R Dichterliebe Schumann R Symphony No. 4 Verdi G Rigoletto Wagner R Tristan and Isolde Weber C M Der Freisch й tz

(b) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference:

Abraham G A Hundred Years of Music, Duckworth London 1949 Barzun J Classic, Romantic and Modern, Anchor Books 1961 Barzun J Berlioz and the Romantic Century, Gollancz Brion M Daily Life in the Vienna of Mozart and Schubert, Weidenfeld &

Nicolson 1961 Brophy B Mozart the Dramatist. Faber 1964 Donington R Wagner's Ring and its Symbols, Faber 1963 Einstein A Music in the Romantic Era, J M Dent & Sons London 1947 Ericson R The Structure of Music. Noonday Press 1965 Ferguson D Music as Metaphor, U of Minnesota 1960 Goldman A & Sprinchorn E eds Wagner on Music and Drama, Gollancz

1970 Grout D A Short History of Opera, Columbia UP 1966 Grove Sir George Beethoven and His Nine Symphonies, Dover 1962 Hanslick E The Beautiful in Music, Liberal Arts Press 1957 Kerman J The Beethoven Quartets, OUP 1967 Kerman J Opera as Drama, Vintage Books 1958 Longyear R M Nineteenth-Century Romanticism in Music, Prentice-Hall

1969 Meyer L B Emotion and Meaning in Music, U of Chicago P 1956 Moberly R Three Mozart Operas, Gollancz 1967 Morgenstern S Composers on Music, Faber 1961 Tovey Sir Donald Essays in Musical Analysis, OUP 1966

EXAMINATION

Two 3-hour papers and the required essays.

740-031 М USIC Э C A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week, with assignments, throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(a) European music from earliest times to A.D. 1600.

(b) Post-romantic music to the present day.

ASSIGNMENTS Two assignments will be given during the year in each part of the course.

These assignments will be taken into consideration when assessing ex-amination results. Listening assignments and other tutorial projects will be set from time to time.

334

Music

В 00KS

(a) Prescribed textbooks:

Abraham G The History of Music in Sound, Vol 1 11 Ili IV and X. OUP 1953

Austin W Music in the Twentieth Century, Norton 1966 Davison A T & Apel W Historical Anthology of Music, Vol I Hary UP

19 59 Harman & Mellers Man and his Music, Barrie & Rockliff 1962 Leng P H Music in Western Civilization, Norton 1941 or Dent 1963 Myers R ed Twentieth Century Music: A Symposium, Calder 1960

(b) Recommended for reference: Abraham G A Hundred Years of Music, Duckworth 1949 Apel W Gregorian Chant, Burns & Oates 1958 Bacharach A L Brltlsh Music of Our Time, Penguin 1951 Bowra M Medieval Love-Song, Athlone Press University London 1961 Bukofzer M Studies in Medieval and Renaissance Music, Dent 1951 Cooper M . French Music, OUP 1951 Copland A Our New Music, Whitt1asey House 1941 DartT The Interpretation of Music, 4th ed Hutchinson 1967 de Rougemont D Passion and Society, Faber 1956 Ewen D The Book of Modern Composers, Knopf 1950 Grout D J A History of Western Music, Norton 1960 Harrison F L Music In Medieval Britain, Routiedge & Kegan Paul 1958 Hartog H European Music in the Twentieth Century, Routiedge & Kegan

Paul 1957 Hindemith P A Composer's World, Hary UP 1952 Lambert C Music Hol, Faber & Faber 1937 Leibowitz R Schoenberg and his School, Da Capo Press 1970 Lockspeiser E Debussy, Dent 1951 Machlis J Introduction to Contemporary Music, Dent 1963 Marrou H I A History of Education in Antiquity, Shе ed & Ward 1956 Mailers W Music and Society, Dobson 1946 Mellers W Studies in Contemporary Music, Dobson 1947 Myers R Music in the Modern World, Arnold 1948 Myers R Ravel: Life and Works, Duckworth 1960 Reese G Music in the Middle Ages, Norton 1940 Sachs C The Rise of Music in the Ancient World, Norton 1943 Salazar A Music in Our Time, Godley Head 1948 Stevens H The Life and Music of Bela Bartok, OUP 1964 Strunk O Source Readings in Music History, Faber 1952 Vlad R Stravinsky, OUP 1960 We ł fesz E ed The New Oxford History of Music, Vols 1-IV OUP Wellesz E Eastern Elements in Western Chant, Munksgaard 1967 Werner E The Sacred Bridge, Dobson 1959

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and assignments.

HONOURS DEGREE (Combined Honours Course) (see also pp. 439 ff., and a pamphlet available from the Arts Faculty office.)

740-062 MUSIC 26 (Combined Honours Course) The details prescribed for Music 2 В Ions. are as specified in the details

335

Faculty of Arts

of subjects for Music 2 В Pass degree with the addition of a weekly one-hour seminar devoted mainly to the study of further prescribed works.

PRESCRIBED WORKS

in addition to those set out in the Handbook for the Pass syllabus, the following works will be studied. Any readily available editions may be used, Including vocal scores. Beethoven L Missa solemnis Mahler G Das Lied von der Erde Mahler G Symphony No. 5 Mozart W A Don Giovanni Mozart W A The Magic Flute Wagner R Der Ring des Nibelungen

ASSIGNMENTS

Students will be required to submit three assignments during the year, one of which may be read as a class paper.

EXAMINATION

Honours students will be required to sit for the two Pass papers except that they will be required to answer fewer questions in greater depth. In addition, a further paper will be set on the works studied in the Honours seminar. The assignments submitted during the year will constitute part of the examination.

740-072 MUSIC Э C (Combined Honours Course) The course prescribed for Music Э C Hons. is as specified in the details of subjects for Music 3C Pass degree with the addition of a weekly one hour seminar in Palaeography. In this part of the course, students will be required to study the various notational systems evolved for poly-phonic music from the 10th to the end of the 17th centuries as well as various types of lute and keyboard tablatures.

PRESCRIBED BOOKS

Apel W The notation of polyphonic music 900-1600, Rev 4th ed with commentary, The Mediaeval Academy of America, Cambr. Mass. 1953

Strunk O Source readings in music history, W Norton, N.Y. 1950 In addition, the department will supply texts for transcription.

ASSESSMENT

There will be no formal examination in this part of the course, but students will be required to submit a folio of transcriptions in the last week of the third term upon which their assessment will be based.

740-082 MUSIC 4D (Combined Honours Course)

A course of one 2-hour seminar per week in contemporary music theory and a study of selected compositions since 1950, together with partici-pation in a weekly creative workshop that will include an introduction to electronic music.

336

Music

ASSIGNMENTS AND SEMINAR WORK

Students will be expected to undertake listening programmes, essays and other projects that will be set from time to time.

EXAMINATION

Students will be required to sit for a 3-hour "open book" paper, submit a tape project, as well as satisfactorily complete the assignments and seminar work specified during the year.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Boretz & Cone Perspectives on Contemporary Music Theory, W H Nor-ton NY 1972

Cope D New Directions in Music, W Brown Iowa 1971 Peyser J The New Music, Delacorte Press NY 1970 Schartz E Electronic Music — A Listener's Guide, Praeger NY 1971 Strange A Electronic Music, Systems, Techniques, and Controls, W

Brown Iowa 1971

Periodicals:

Perspectives of New Music, Princeton Journal of Music Theory, Yale Source, Davis

740-083 MUSIC 4E (MUSICOLOGY) (Combined Honours Course)

A course consisting of the following two components:

(i) A weekly seminar of two hours duration In the theory and method of Historical Musicology, including Advanced Palaeography, Tex-tua' Criticism and Musical Bibliography.

(ii) One of the following: (a) A research project in some approved field of enquiry in which

supervision will be available within the department. (b) A "workshop" course in selected periods of music history

involving the study of specified source materials, the musical instruments employed and the preparation of critical performing editions.

BOOKS

General reading:

•Allen W D Philosophies of Music History, Dover Collingwood R G The Idea of History, OUP •Donington R The Interpretation of Early Music, Faber Esdaile A A Student's Manual of Bibliography, Allen & Unwin Gardiner P Theories of History, Free Press Humphries C & Smith W C Music Publishing in the British Isles, Cas'

sell & Co. Riemann H History of Music Theory, transi R H Haggh, Univ of

Nebraska Spiess L B Historical Musicology, Inst of Mediaeval Music

•Strunk 0 Source Readings In Music History, Norton

337

Faculty of Arts

Walsh W H An Introduction to Philosophy of History, Hutchinson's University Library

Other reading will be specified by the lecturer.

EXAMINATION

In Section (i) of the course, students will be required to submit two assignments during the year and sit for an "open book" examination of not more than three hours' duration. In Section (ii) of the course, students will be required to submit either a thesis of 8,000 to 10,000 words or else a folio of self-prepared critical editions.

MASTER OF ARTS 740-611 Sc1o0L of Music

Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within one year from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time can-didates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature, or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY Chairman of Department: Dr M. J. CHARLESWORTH, Ph.D. (Louvain), M.A.

Philosophy is a controversial subject. That is to say, hardly any philo-sophical question, outside formal logic, has a "correct" answer, agreed on by all the qualified experts. This does not mean that in philosophy anything goes. There are some very good answers as well as some fairly good ones, some poor ones and some quite incompetent ones. A good answer is one that is backed up by well-ordered and clear arguments — indeed an answer without supporting argument is worthless and frequently barely intelligible. Moreover an answer, if it is to have any chance of being a contribution to the subject, must be informed — must take account of the arguments advanced and of the criticisms and distinctions made by others who have thought deeply about the same questions. Thus in learning philosophy you have to learn how to argue for or against philosophical opinions, and you have to become familiar with some of the arguments that have been advanced on certain topics in the past. The latter, however, involves no great effort of memorization: the difficulty is one of understanding rather than of remembering. Once you have really understood an argument you are not very likely to forget it. Broadly speaking, you learn in lectures what are the main arguments that have been advanced on a certain topic or at a certain period in the over two-thousand-year-long history of the subject; and in tutorials and

338

Philosophy

written work you acquire by practice the skill of advancing cogent and informed arguments of your own. It is very difficult to give a short and helpful explanation of what a philosophical question is, and how it differs from other sorts of ques-tions. Perhaps the best idea is to give a few examples (although the handful that follow will scarcely give an adequate idea of the range of different topics that philosophers have taken an interest in).

A problem about the minds of other people

Suppose that everything that looks red to you has always looked green to Smith, and vice versa. He will nevertheless describe the colours of things with the same words that you use. He will have learnt as a child that "red" is the name for the green colour he sees on looking at letter-boxes, stop lights and Russian flags, so he will call all such things "red". Similarly he will have learnt to apply "green" to the red colour he sees in spring grass. So he will talk just as you do. He will also behave as you do, e.g. he will stop at the red traffic-lights. Then how do you know he doesn't see red when you see green, and vice versa?

A problem of free will

With advances in scientific knowledge we are more and more able to predict what people will do. But if we could always predict exactly what they would do, surely they would not have free will and so could not justly be praised or bIamed for their actions. Yet surely you are sometimes free to choose one course of action rather than another? Surely you can be justly praised or blamed for what you do?

A problem about morality

You know that some actions are right and some wrong. But what is it to say that an action is right or wrong? Is it to state a special sort of fact about the action? Is it to say how you feel about the action? Is it to report an arbitrary convention adopted by a particular human society? Or what?

A problem about theology

Can the existence of God be proved? What sort of evidence would count for or against a theological statement?

A problem about scientific method

The laws which scientists state are supposed to hold for all time. But how do they know that the laws they now state will hold in the future? On the basis of past experience? But they are justified in going from "this always has happened" to "this always will happen" only if they can be sure the future will be like the past. And how do they know that in future the future will be like the past? All we know is that in the past the future has (so far) been like the past.

A problem about mathematics

Chemists study substances of various kinds, geologists study rocks, botanists plants, and so on. What do mathematicians study? Numbers? But what are they? "What is an elephant?" is an easy question: you can point to an elephant or describe one. "What is a number?" is not so easy. Nor is it a mathematical question. Mathematicians do not study this sort of question about numbers.

339

Faculty of Arts

COURSES OFFERED BY THE PHILOSOPHY DEPARTMENT

First year

(Each of the two alternative courses consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week.) 161-101 Philosophy 1A (Tuesday and Thursday 11 a.m. in 1975; Mon-

day and Wednesday 5.15 p.m. in 1976). 161-102 Philosophy 1B (Monday and Wednesday 5.15 p.m. ln 1975;

Tuesday and Thursday 11 a.m. in 1976).

Second year (ordinary degree)•'

(Each course consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week.)

161-201 Philosophy 2C (Contemporary European Philosophy). 161-202 Philosophy 2D (Political Philosophy). 161-203 Philosophy 2E (Ethics). 161-204 Philosophy 2F (Formal Logic). 161-205 Philosophy 2G (Greek Philosophy). 161-206 Philosophy 2J (Philosophy of Religion). 161-207 Philosophy 2K (Aesthetics). 161-208 Philosophy 2L (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology). 161-209 Philosophy 2M (Modern Philosophy). 161-210 Philosophy 2N (Recent Philosophy).

Third year (ordinary degree)

Each third-year subject consists, in effect, of the corresponding second-year subject enlarged by the addition of a half-subject (one weekly lecture-discussion class of one and a half hours' duration). The former—the "major part" of the third-year subject — counts for two-thirds of the overall result and the latter — "the minor part" — counts for one-third.

Third-year ordinary degree subjects are divided into two groups:

GROUP ONE

(See entries under headings "Restricted Combinations" and "Pre-requisites".)

161-301 Philosophy 3C (Contemporary Philosophy & Philosophical Theories).

161-302 Philosophy 3D (Political Philosophy & Philosophical Theories). 161-303 Philosophy 3E (Ethics & Philosophical Theories). 161-304 Philosophy 3F (Formal Logic & Philosophical Theories). 161-305 Philosophy 3G (Greek Philosophy & Philosophical Theories). 161-306 Philosophy 3J (Philosophy of Religion & Philosophical

Theories). 161-307 Philosophy 3K (Aesthetics and Philosophical Theories). 161-308 Philosophy 3L (E.L.M. & Philosophical Theories). 161-309 Philosophy 3M (Modern Philosophy & Philosophical Theories). 161-310 Philosophy 3N (Recent Philosophy & Philosophical Theories).

Each of the above third-year subjects has as its "major part" the corres-

ponding second-year subject and as its "minor part" the half-subject entitled Philosophical Theories (the syllabus of which will be found in the details of Philosophy 3C).

• For details of honours courses in Philosophy see below, p. 360.

340

Philosophy

GROUP TWO

(See entries under headings "Restricted Combinations" and "Prerequi-sites".)

161-321 Philosophy 3CC (Contemporary Philosophy & Philosophical Problems) .

181-322 Philosophy 3DD (Political Philosophy & Philosophical Prob-lems).

161-323 Philosophy ЭЕЕ (Ethics & Philosophical Problems). 161-324 Philosophy 3FF (Formal Logic & Philosophical Problems). 161-325 Philosophy 3GG (Greek Philosophy & Philosophical Problems). 161-326 Philosophy 3JJ (Philosophy of Religion & Philosophical Prob-

lems). 161-327 Philosophy 3KK (Aesthetics and Philosophical Problems). 161-328 Philosophy 3LL (E.L.M. & Philosophical Problems). 161-329 Philosophy 3MM (Modern Philosophy & Philosophical Prob-

lems). 161-330 Philosophy 3NN (Recent Philosophy & Philosophical Problems).

Each of the above third-year subjects has as its "major part" the corresponding second-year subject and as its "minor part" the half-subject entitled Philosophical Problems (the syllabus of which will be found under the details of Philosophy 3CC).

RESTRICTED COMBINATIONS 1. Subjects for the ordinary degree labelled with the same letter of the alphabet have a common ingredient, and students may therefore only do one of them, e.g. they may do only one of 2C, 3C and 3CC; only one of 2E, 3E and ЗЕЕ , and so on. 2. Third-year subjects from group one have a common ingredient, and students may not do more than one third-year subject from that group. For the same reason they may not do more than one in group two. Students completing a double major in philosophy must therefore enrol in one group one subject and one group two subject, each having e different alphabetical label.

PREREQUISITES

(a) The prerequisite for Philosophy 20 is either one philosophy subject, or two Political Science subjects, or a Diploma of Social Studies.

(b) The prerequisite for Philosophy 2F and for Philosophy 2L is either one philosophy subject or any two university subjects.

(c) The prerequisite for the remaining second-year philosophy subjects is one philosophy subject.

(d) The prerequisite for any third-year subject from group one is any two philosophy subjects.

(e) No student may take a third-year subject from group two unless he has already passed or is concurrently taking a third-year subject from group one.

161-101 PHILOSOPHY 1A Dr J. L. C. Chipman, Dr В . M. Taylor, Dr V. I. Rice, Dr C. C. W. Taylor

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Each tutor will set two written assignments (two essays, two class

341'

Faculty of Arts

papers, or one of each). These do not form part of the examination in the subject, but performance does count towards a final assessment in the following circumstances:

(a) If, after reading the November examination paper, the examiners are in doubt as to whether to award a fail or a pass, then a tutor's report of good essays and/or class papers is adduced in the candidate's favour.

If, after reading the November examination paper, the examiners are in doubt as to whether to award a pass or an honour, then a tutor's report of good essays and/or class papers is adduced in the candidate's favour.

SYLLABUS

A study of philosophical issues arising from certain classical texts, together with a short introductory section on logic. (The first text, together with the logic section, also form part of Philosophy 1B.) In 1975 the topics to be studied are: 1. Such problems as—

(a) whether anything can be known with certainty; (b) the nature of the human person, and in particular the relation

between the mind and the body; (c) the possibility of proving or disproving the existence of God; (d) identity through change. Descartes' Meditations and related writings.

2. The rudiments and application of deductive and Inductive logic; the evaluation of arguments (Gorovitz and Williams Philosophical Analysis).

З . Arguments concerning the nature and immortality of the psych; or 'soul', including the claim that human understanding requires that we relate the world of experience and our own life to mathematical and moral 'forms', or standards of perfection (Plato's Phaedo). 4. Either existentialism; personal freedom and morality ()ean-Paul

Sап re's Existentialism and Humanism) Or some other topic to be announced (for details consult the notice-board of the Philosophy department in January 1975).

BOOKS

1. Preliminary reading:

Gorovitz S & Williams R G Philosophical Analysis: An Introduc-tion to its Language and Techniques, 2nd ed chs VIII & IX, Random House

Cornford F M Before and After Socrates, Cambridge 2. Prescribed texts:

•Anscombe G E M & Geach P T (trans and ed) Descartes' Philo-sophical Writings, Nelson

•Gorovitz S & Williams R G Philosophical Analysis: An Introduc-tion to its Language and Techniques, 2nd ed Random House

•Plato Phaedo, in The Last Days of Socrates, Penguin Classics • Ether Sartre J-P Existentialism and Humanism in Kaufmann W

edition Existentialism from Dostoevsky to Sartre, Meridian Books

(b)

342

Philosophy

Or such other text as may be prescribed (for details consult the notice-board of the Philosophy department in January 1975).

3. Recommended for reference: For the Descartes section (in order of usefulness): Doney W ed Descartes, A Collection of Critical Essays, Mac-

millen Kenny A Descartes, A Study of his Philosophy, Random House Broadie F An Approach to Descartes Meditations, Athlone Malcolm N Problems of Mind: Descartes to Wittgenstein, Allen

& Unwin Armstrong D M A Materialist Theory of the Mind, Routledge &

Kegan Paul Hick J H & McGill A eds Many Faced Argument, Macmillan Pike N ed God and Evil, Prentice-Hall Quinton A The Nature of Things, Routledge & Kegan Paul For the Plato section: Field G C The Philosophy of Plato, Oxford

References to articles in journals and to chapters in other books will be given from time to time by the lecturers and tutors. A paper giving fuller details of the contents of this course will be available from late January 1975 on application to the Philosophy department office, room 104 Old Arts Building, for students contemplating taking this course.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper, covering the whole course.

161-102 PHILOSOPHY 1 B Fr J. E. D'Arcy, Dr B. M. Taylor, Dr H. Lewis

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Each tutor will set two written assignments (two essays, two class papers, or one of each). These do not form part of the examination in the subject, but performance does count towards a final assessment in the following circumstances:

(a) If, after reading the November examination paper, the examiners are in doubt as to whether to award a fail or pass, then a tutor's report of good essays and/or class papers is adduced in the candidate's favour.

(b) If, after reading the November examination paper, the examiners are in doubt as to whether to award a pass or an honour, then a tutor's report of good essays and/or class papers is adducod in the candidate's favour.

SYLLABUS

A discussion of a number of philosophical topics, including some or all of the following:

1. Such problems as— (a) whether anything can be known with certainty; (b) the nature of the human person, and in particular the relation

between the mind and the body; (c) the possibility of proving or disproving the existence of God;

(d) identity through change.

343

Faculty of Arts

(These problems will be discussed in relation to the arguments put forward by Descartes in his Meditations and in related writings.)

2. The rudiments and application of deductive and inductive logic; the evaluation of arguments (Gorovitz and Williams Philosophical Analysis).

З . The relationship between Law and Morality, in contemporary and classical philosophy.

4. Certain other philosophical problems will also be studied. Details of the topics to be covered, as well as of the books to be prescribed in connection with these topics will be posted on the Philosophy department notice-board in January.

BOOKS:

1. Preliminary reading:

Gorovitz S & Williams R G Philosophical Analysis: An Introduc-tion to its Language and Techniques, 2nd ed Random House paperback

2. Prescribed Texts:

'Anscombe G E M & Geach P T trans and ed Descartes' Philo- sophical Writings, Nelson

'Gorovitz S & Williams R G Philosophical Analysis: An Introduc- tion to its Language and Techniques (as above)

'Devlin P The Enforcement of Morals, OUP paperback 'Mill J S On Liberty, any ed 'Mitchell B Law, Morality and Religion in a Secular Society, OUP

paperback Gilby T ed Law and Political Theory, St Thomas Aquinas' Summa

Theologiae, vol 28, Eyre & Spottiswoode 'fart H L A Law, Liberty and Morality, OUP paperback 'Grisez G Beyond New Morality, Uni of Notre Dame Press For information about prescribed books for section four, consult the departmental notice-board in January 1975.

3. Recommended for reference:

For the Descartes section (in order of usefulness): Doney W ed Descartes, A Collection of Critical Essays, Macmillan Kenny A Descartes, A Study of his Philosophy, Random House Broadie F An Approach to Descartes' Meditations, Athlone Malcolm N Problems of Mind: Descartes to Wittgenstein, Allen

& Unwin Armstrong D M A Materialist Theory of the Mind, Routledge &

Kegan Paul Hick J H & McGill A eds Many Faced Argument, Macmillan Pike N ed God and Evil, Prentice-Hall Quinton A The Nature of Things, Routledge & Kegan Paul

On other parts of the course: see the departmental notice-board in January 1975. Reference to articles in journals and to chapters in other books will be given from time to time by the lecturers and tutors. A paper giving fuller details of the contents of this course will be available from late January 1975 on application to the Philosophy department office, room 104 Old Arts Building, for students contemplating taking this course.

344

Philosophy

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper, covering the whole course.

161-201 PHILOSOPHY 2C (CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN PHILOSOPHY) Dr M. J. Charlesworth

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It con-sists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Students are required to write two essays and one class paper in the course of the year.

SYLLABUS

A discussion of certain major tendencies in recent European philo-sophical thinking:

(i) the phenomenological current as represented in the work of Edmund. Husserl, Martin Heidegger, Jean-Paul Sartre and Maurice Merleau-Ponty. Reference will also be made to the use of phenomenological: and existentialist ideas in the work of Alfred Schut, R. D. Laing; and others;

(ii) the current of thought concerned with the philosophical issues raised by Freud's psychoanalytical theory, as represented in the work of Paul Ricoeur, Jacques Lacan, Jurgen Habermas and others;

(iii) neo-Marxist thought—e.g. 'existentialist', 'structuralist' and 'Freu-dian' versions of Marxism—as represented in the work of Jean-Paul Sartre, Louis Althusser, Herbert Marcuse and Leszek Koia-kowskl;

(iv) 'structuralist' themes as represented in the work of Claude Lévl-Strauss, Michel Foucault and others.

Information concerning the particular texts to be studied, background reading etc., will be given at the beginning of the course. Preliminary reading:

Murdoch I Sartre: Romantic Rebel, Fontana Library Wm Collins Wollheim R Freud, Fontana Modern Masters, Wm Collins Robinson P A The Sexual Radicals—Roheim, Reich, Marcuse, Paladin

Books Leach E Lévi-Strauss, Fontana Modern Masters, Wm Collins

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper or assessment by essays and class-paper.

161-202 PHILOSOPHY 2D (POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY) Fr J. E. D'Arcy, Dr J. Srzednicki

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It con-sists of two lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year. Two essays or class papers will be required in the course of the year. (This course consists of two consecutive units, only the second of which will be attended by Honours students enrolled for Philosophy Honours 2P.)

SYLLABUS

(1) A study of several key concepts and theses in Rousseau, Hegel and Marx.

345

Faculty of Arts

(2) An examination of Rawls theory of justice in basic social insti-tutions.

(3) A philosophical analysis of the concept community, and certain other related concepts, e.g. rights.

BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading:

Berlin I Four Essays on Liberty, OUP Laslett P & Runciman W G eds Philosophy, Politics and Society, Second

Series, Blackwell Lucas J R Principles of Politics, OUP

Prescribed texts:

Hegel G W F Philosophy of Right, tr Knox T M Oxford Marx K Early Texts, McLellan D ed Blackwell Rawls J Theory of Justice, Oxford Rousseau J-J Social Contract, Brumfitt J H ed Everyman

Recommended for reference:

Avineri S Social and Political Thought of Karl Marx, Cambridge Beck R N ed Perspectives in Social Philosophy, Holt Rinehart &

Winston Feuer L S ed Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on Politics and Philo-

sophy, Doubleday, Anchor Gilby T ed Law and Political Theory: St Thomas Aquinas' Summa

Theologiae, Vol 28, Eyre and Spottiswoode Grisez G Beyond the New Morality, Uni of Notre Dame Hart H L A The Concept of Law, OUP Kojève A Introduction to Reading Hegel, Basic Books Masterson P Atheism and Alienation, Gill and Macmillan Mill J S On Liberty, any edition Rousseau J-J Du Contrat Social, Grimsley R ed Oxford Schacht R Alienation, Allen & Unwin Winch P The Idea of a Social Science, RKP

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

161-203 PHILOSOPHY 2E (ETHICS) Dr G. D. Marshall, Mr R. Bambrough

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of moral values: their source, justification and place in contem-

porary life and society.

BOOKS Preliminary reading:

Williams Bernard . Morality, Pelican

Maclntyre Alasdair A Short History of Ethics, RKP

346

Philosophy

Warnock G J . Contemporary Moral Philosophy, Macmillan Kamenka E Marxism and Ethics, Macmillan

Prescribed text:

Maclntyre Alasdair ed lure's Ethical Writings, Collier

ASSESSMENT

Students will be required (a) to write two essays during the year, and (b) either to submit whatever further work is agreed upon, or to present for one 3-hour examination. Further information about the course and its requirements is available from the Philosophy office.

161-204 PHILOSOPHY 2F (FORMAL LOGIC) Dr В . M. Taylor

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). A course in deductive logic, which is built from two units. No mathematicaF or philosophical knowledge is presupposed. Students will be intro-duced to various logical symbolisms, and will be expected to acquire facility in manipulating them. Students wanting more information about this subject (including, e.g. information about its relevance to other things) should peruse the department's pamphlet, 'Introduction to the Study of Formal Logic', available from the Philosophy office, room 104, Old Arts Building. Unit 1. 161-378 RUDIMENTS OF SYMBOLIC LOGIC This unit comprises 26 lectures and 12 practice classes.

SYLLABUS

The theory and metatheory of the classical systems of modern logic, viz the sentential and lower predicate calculi.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Students totally unfamiliar with the scope and nature of the course may acquire further information by consulting the department's notes 'lntro-duction to the Study of Formal Logic', as well as Nidditch P H The Development of Mathematical Logic, Routledge &

Kegan Paul Gorovitz S & Williams R G Philosophical Analysis: An Introduction to

its Language and Techniques, 2nd ed Random House 1969 The course will be conducted by means of lecture notes to be issued by the department.

Recommended for reference is:

Jeffrey R C Formal Logic: Its Scope and Limits, McGraw-Hill 1967

EXAMINATION There will be an examination at the conclusion of this unit (during the week of July 7-12) consisting of one 3-hour paper. This examination will count for one-third of the marks for Philosophy Honours 2Q, for those taking this unit as part of that subject. For other candidates, perfor-mance at this examination counts 50 per cent towards the final examina-tion in Philosophy 2F. All students enrolled in Philosophy 2F whose work

347

Faculty of Arts

is of sufficiently high standard will be awarded honours in the subject, irrespective of whether ordinary or honours degree candidates.

Unit 2. 161-379 SET THEORY This unit comprises 24 lectures and 12 practice classes.

SYLLABUS

A development of Zermelo-Fraenkel set theory, embracing in particular the fundamental properties of sets, the theory of relations, and the set- theoretic explications of the notions of number and infinity.

В OO К S

Preliminary reading:

Suppes P Axiomatic Set Theory, Van Nostrand, 1960, Ch. 1. Lecture notes will be issued by the department. Especially recommended for reference: Suppes P op cit Takeuti G & Zaring W Introduction to Axiomatic Set Theory, Springer

Verlag 1971

EXAMINATION

At the completion of this unit there will be an examination consisting of one 3-hour paper, which will test specifically the material covered in Unit 2. This paper will constitute 50 per cent of the examination in Philosophy 2F, and will be the only paper in Philosophy Honours 314. All students enrolled in Philosophy 2F whose work is of sufficiently high standard will be awarded honours in the subject.

161-205 PHILOSOPHY 2G (GREEK PHILOSOPHY) Dr Mary A. McCloskey, Dr C. C. W. Taylor

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). There are two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students are required to write one essay and one class paper In the course of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of Plato's and Aristotle's works selected to show some of their distinctive contributions in metaphysics, ethics and philosophical psychology.

В OO К S

Introductory reading:

Burnet J Greek Philosophy from Thales to Plato, Macmillan

Texts:

Plato Collected Dialogues, eds E Hamilton & H. Cairns Pantheon

Aristotle The Basic Works of Aristotle, ed R Ickeon Random House For further references consult the Philosophy notice-board.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

зав

Philosophy

161-206 PHILOSOPHY 2J (PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION) Mr R. Bambrough, Fr E. D'Arс y, Dr V. I. Rice

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Students are required to write one essay and one class paper In the course of the year.

SYLLABUS

An examination of (i) the logical status of Christian belief-expressions, (ii) the logic of certain religious concepts, (iii) the conditions for acceptance of statements of religious belief, and the viability of such statements, (iv) a critical study of some arguments for the existence of God.

BOOKS

Recommended for preliminary reading: Heimbeck R S Theology and Meaning, Allen & Unwin Meynell H God and the World, SPCK Prescribed reading:

Bambrough R Reason, Truth and God, Methuen 'Hick J The Existence of God, Macmillan paperback Helm P Varieties of Belief, Allen & Unwin Recommended for reference: Anscombe G E M & Geach P Three Philosophers, Blackwell Charlesworth M J The Problem of Religious Language, Prentice-Hall Durrant M The Logical Status of "God", Macmillan Geach P God and the Soul, Blackwell King R H The Meaning of God, SCM Surlis P ed Faith: its Nature end Meaning, Gill & Macmillan

EXAMINATION: One 3-hour paper.

161-207 PHILOSOPHY 2K (AESTHETICS) Mr W. K. Presa

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It con-sists of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. For requirements concerning written work, students should consult the Philo-sophy department notice-board at the beginning of the year.

SYLLABUS

A study of some twentieth century writings on important issues in the arts: Writers include James Joyce, T. S. Eliot, Yeats, Jung, Freud and Wittgenstein: Areas of interest include (a) language, thought, symbol and consciousness; (b) motivation and intentions of artists; (c) cultural influences on artists and the effects of the arts in society.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Buckley V Poetry and Morality, Chatto & Windus 1959 Buckley V Poetry and the Sacred, Chatto & Windus 1968

349

Faculty of Arts

Cooke D The Language of Music, OUP paperback 1962 Schneider D E The Psycho-Analyst and the Artist, Mentor 1962 Storr A The Dynamics of Creation, Secker & Warburg 1972 Detailed reading guides available from the Philosophy department office.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

161-208 PHILOSOPHY 21 (EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY) Professor D. A. T. Gasking

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It con-sists of two lectures and one discussion class per week throughout the year. Two essays or class exercises are required of students in the course of the year.

SYLLABUS

Reasonable belief and knowledge. Intuition, judgement and inference. Types of argument and types of statement. Generalization. Laws. Hypo-theses. Applying loose generalizations and balancing considerations. Probability. Causal investigations. Types cf explanation. Empirical and a priori. Necessity, meaning and analyticity. Types of concept. Goals and techniques of definition.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks: •Lambers K & Britten G G An Introduction to the Philosophy of

Science, Prentice-Hall Hempel C Philosophy of Natural Science, Prentice-Hall •Ouine W V 0 & Wien J S The Web of Belief, Random House • Salmon W Logic, Prentice-Hall For reference:

Chisholm R Theory of Knowledge, Prentice-Hall Ackermann R Nondeductive Inference, Routledge & Kegan Paul Alston W Philosophy of Language, Prentice-Hall Dray W Philosophy of History, Chs i & 2, Prentice-Hall Lerner D ed Evidence and Inference, Free Press of Glencoe Nidditch P H ed The Philosophy of Science, Oxford readings in Philo-

sophy Salmon W The Foundations of Scientific Inference, U of Pittsburgh

Press

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

161-209 PHILOSOPHY 2M (MODERN PHILOSOPHY) Dr V. I. Rice, Dr J. L. C. Chipman

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the

350

Philosophy

year. Two essays or class exercises are required of students in the course of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of a selection of the major writings of Descartes, Locke, Berkeley and Hume, with particular reference to problems of ontology and epistemology. Reference will also be made to Spinoza, Leibniz and Bradley, and in third term four lectures will be devoted to a brief introduction to some of the ideas of Kant. Among the issues to be considered in relation to the set texts are (i) scepticism and certainty—how much of what we think we know do we really know? (ii) the exis-tence of God — can God's existence be proved and if so what can be known of God's nature? (iii) the relation between the mind and the body — are they two distinct related entities or is one reducible to the other? (iv) Perception — when we are said to perceive something, does this mean that we are aware of an external world or only of ideas in our minds? (v) Substance and the self — must we postulate a substratum distinct from the sensible qualities of material objects? Must we posit a self as the subject of our conscious experiences? (vi) Universals — how do we link objects of the same sort — via objective forms, by abstract ideas or only by common names based on resem-

ances? (vii) Causality — are causal connections merely a species of statistical correlation or are they real connections in nature? (viii) the limits of thought — are there discoverable limits to what is thinkable set by the constitution of the human mind? Students taking this course in 1975 should note that this is the last year In which a detailed study of Descartes' writings will form part of this subject, and that from 1976 students taking this subject will be required to give more attention to Kant.

BOOKS Prescribed books:

Descartes R Philosophical Writings, tr & ed Anscombe & Geach, Nelson

Locke J An Essay Concerning Human Understanding, 2 vols, ed Yolton Everyman

Berkeley G Berkeley's Philosophical Writings, ed Armstrong D M Collier Books

Hume D A Treatise of Human Nature, Everyman 548 549 or Selby-Bigge ed Clarendon

Recommended for reference: Armstrong D M A Materialist Theory of Mind, Routledge & Kegan Paul Beck L J The Metaphysics of Descartes, OUP Beck L J The Method of Descartes, OUP Copleston F History of Philosophy, vol IV, Doubleday Anchor Descartes R The Philosophical Works of Descartes, ed Haldane & Ross,

CUP Doney W ed Descartes: a Collection of Critical Essays, Modern Studies

in Philosophy, Papermac Kenny A Descartes: a study of his Philosophy, Random House

Ryle G The Concept of Mind, Hutchinson Aaron R I John Locke, OUP Martin C B & Armstrong D M eds Locke and Berkeley: a Collection of

Critical Essays, Anchor Books

351

Faculty of Arts

O'Connor D J John Locke, Pelican Copleston F History of Philosophy, vol V, Doubleday Anchor Hicks G Dawes Berkeley, Benn Steinkraus W E ed New Studies in Berkeley's Philosophy, Holt Rine-

hart & Winston Warnock G J Berkeley, Penguin Anderson G R F lume's First Principles, U of Nebraska P Basson A H David Hume, Pelican Chappell V C ed Hume, Doubleday Anchor Kemp-Smith N The Philosophy of David Hume, Macmillan Mackie J L The Cement of the Universe, Clarendon Passmore J A lume's Intentions, CUP Pears D F ed David Hume: a Symposium, Macmillan Price H H lure's Theory of the External World, Clarendon Platinga A ed The Ontological Argument, Macmillan Кёг ner S Kant, Penguin Yolton John W Locke and the Compass of Human Understanding, CUP Aune B Rationalism, Empiricism & Pragmatism: an Introduction, Ran-

dom House Bennett J Locke, Berkeley, Hume, Oxford Strawsо n P F The Bounds of Sense, Methuen

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper.

161-210 PHILOSOPHY 2N (RECENT PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr L. J. O'Neill, Mr C. A. J. Coady

A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It con-sists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

A study of issues arising in recent philosophical work. Discussion in 1975 will be concerned with (1) a study of Gottlob Frege's philosophical works and of Russell's Logical Atomism. This will involve Issues in philosophical logic such as the idea of a perfect language, the notions of meaning and reference, the relation of language to ontology, (2) the epistemological issues involved in historical knowledge, the nature of historical "facts", and certain questions concerning historical evidence.

BOO К S

Preliminary reading for (1):

Geach P & Black M Philosophical Writings of Gottlob Frege, Blackwell Pears D F Russell's Logical Atomism, Fontana

Preliminary reading for (2):

Collingwood R G The Idea of History. Oxford 1961 Bloch M The Historian's Craft, Manchester University Press Further information about the details of this course, reading, etc. will be provided through the departmental office before the beginning of lectures.

EXAM INATION

One 3-hour paper.

352

Philosophy

161-301 PHILOSOPHY Э C (CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr M. J. Charlesworth, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. it comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the following unit:

PHILOSOPHICAL THEORIES SYLLABUS

Material from medieval philosophers, especially St Thomas Aquinas, to provide a starting-point for discussions of

(i) Intellect, Will and Emotions (ii) Acts and dispositions

(iii) Truth, Certainty, Belief and Knowledge

Attention will be given to important features and consequences of Scholastic methodology.

BOOKS

Prescribed texts:

Aquinas St Thomas Summa Theologiae, Vols 3, 13 and 16-22, Black- friars and Eyre & Spottiswoode

Boehner P ed Ockham Philosophical Writings, Nelson Ryle Gilbert The Concept of Mind, Hutchinson Kenny Anthony Action, Emotion and Will, Routledge &Kegan Paul

Detailed reading guides available from the Philosophy department office.

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

Students will be required to write an essay (of not more than 2,000 words) in each of the two parts, and there will be two 3-hour exam-ination papers, one in each part. In the major part, which will receive a weight of two thirds, the examination will consist of one 3-hour paper. In the т iпо r part, which will receive a weight of one third, the examina-tion will comprise the 3-hour paper together with the essay, the latter counting for 10% of the total marks in that part.

161-302 PHILOSOPHY 3D (POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Fr J. E. D'Arcy, Dr J. Syzednlcki, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which Is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year) Is identical with Philosophy 2D (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

353 М

Faculty of Arts

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-303 PHILOSOPHY 3E (ETHICS) (PASS) Dr G. D. Marshall, Mr R. Bambrough, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year) is identical with Philosophy 2E (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-304 PHILOSOPHY 3F (FORMAL LOGIC) (PASS) Dr B. M. Taylor, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one practice class a week throughout the year) is identical with Philosophy 2F (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject. All students enrolled in Philosophy 3F, whose work is of sufficiently high standard, will be awarded honours in the subject, irres-pective of whether ordinary or honours degree candidates.

161-305 PHILOSOPHY 3G (GREEK PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr Mary A. McCloskey, Mr W. K. Presa, Dr C. C. W. Taylor

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which Is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of

which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-

out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2G (for its syllabus and book-list see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion

З 54

Philosophy

class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor pert of Philosophy Э C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements end system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-306 PHILOSOPHY 3J (PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION) (PASS) Fr J. E. D'Arcy, Mr R. Bambrough, Dr V. I. Rice, M г W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year) is Identical with Philosophy 2J (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy Э C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-307 PHILOSOPHY 3k (AESTHETICS) (PASS) Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year) is identical with Philosophy 2K (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-308 PHILOSOPHY 3L (EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY (PASS) Professor D. A. T. Gasking, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of

355

Faculty of Arts

which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2L (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-309 PHILOSOPHY 3M (MODERN PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr V. I. Rice, Dr J. L. C. Chipman, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major pert (of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year) is identical with Philosophy 2M (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy 3C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-310 PHILOSOPHY З N (RECENT PHILOSOPHY) Dr L. J. O'Neill, Mr C. A. J. Coady, Mr W. K. Presa

A grade three subject, to terminate a major which is the first or the only philosophy major a student does. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year) is identical with Philosophy 2N (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Theories", I.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy З C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-321 PHILOSOPHY 3CC (CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN PHILOSOPHY (PASS) Dr M. J. Charlesworth, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors

356

Philosophy

as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2C (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the following unit:

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS SYLLABUS The course will be largely devoted to contemporary developments in metaphysical issues. Topics will be selected from the following: Sub-stance, Individuation, Innate Ideas, Persons, Cause, Sensible Properties, Time, Objectivity, Rationality, Materialism. Throughout the course the nature and contemporary relevance of metaphysics will be explored.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Armstrong D M A Materialist Theory of Mind, Routledge & Kegan Paul Munitz M K Identity and Individuation, New York University Press Smart J J C Philosophy and Scientific Realism, Routledge & Kegan

Paul Taylor R Metaphysics, Prentice-Hall Sellars W Science and Metaphysics, Routledge & Kegan Paul Ayer A J Language, Truth and Logic, Gollancz Strawson P F Individuals, Methuen Lazerowitz M The Structure of Metaphysics, Routledge & Kegan Paul Brown D G Action, Allen & Unwin Hampshire S Freedom of the Individual, Chatto & Windus Stoll A ed Epistemology, Harper & Row White A R ed The Philosophy of Action, OUP

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

1 61 -322 PHILOSOPHY 3DD (POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Fr J. E. D'Arсу , Dr J. Srzsdnìckì, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is Identical with Philosophy 20 (for Its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor pert (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Problems", i.e. It is Identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

З 57

Faculty of Arts

161-323 PHILOSOPHY ЭЕЕ (ETHICS) (PASS) Dr G. D. Marshall, Mr R. Bambrough, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2E (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Prodems", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-324 PHILOSOPHY 3FF (FORMAL LOGIC) (PASS) Dr B. M. Taylor, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one practice class a week throughout the year) is identical with Philosophy 2F (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Problems", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" In the details for that subject. All students enrolled in Philosophy 3FF whose work is of sufficiently high standard will be awarded honours in the subject, irrespec-tive of whether ordinary or honours degree candidates.

161-325 PHILOSOPHY 3GG (GREEK PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr Mary A. McCloskey, Dr L. J. O'Neill, Dr C. C. W. Taylor

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2G (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Prodems", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3СС (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATI0NS The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for

358

Philosophy

Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-326 PHILOSOPHY 3JJ (PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION) (PASS) Fr J. E. D'А rсу , Mr R Bambrough, Dr V. I. Rice, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2,1 (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Prodems", I.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-327 PHILOSOPHY 3KK (AESTHETICS) (PASS) Mr W. K. Presa, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2K (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Problems", I.e. It is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-328 PHILOSOPHY 3LL (EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY (PASS)

Professor D. A. T. Gasking, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2L (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Proteems", i.e' it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

359

Faculty of Arts

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-329 PHILOSOPHY 3MM (MODERN PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr V. I. Rice, Dr J. L. C. Chipman, Dr L. J. O'Neill

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2M (for its syllabus and book-list see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Prodems", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy 3C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

161-330 PHILOSOPHY 3NN (RECENT PHILOSOPHY) (PASS) Dr L. J. O'Neill, Мг C. A. J. Coady

A grade three subject, to be done by those who do two philosophy majors as the third part of their second major. It comprises two concurrent parts, of which the major part (of two lectures and one tutorial a week through-out the year) is identical with Philosophy 2N (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject). The minor part (of one lecture-discussion class of an hour and a half per week throughout the year) consists of the unit entitled "Philosophical Problems", i.e. it is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3CC (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

The requirements and system of weighting are analogous to those for Philosophy Э C. See under "Essays and Examinations" in the details for that subject.

HONOURS DEGREE• C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY

1. FIRST YEAR Students hoping to enter the honours school in their second year should include either Philosophy 1A or Philosophy 16 among their four first-year subjects. It is suggested that they should, if possibi e, broaden their acquaintance with philosophy by attending some or all of the lectures (but not the tutorials or examinations) in the other Philosophy 1 subject.

'All prospective Philosophy students should register with the Philosophy depart-ment secretary, Room 104, Old Arts when enrolling at Students' Records.

360

Philosophy

2. SECOND YEAR

Students are required to obtain: ( а ) A pass in a non-philosophical subject (being the second part of а major)

(b) Honours standard in the following: 161-269 Philosophy Honours 2НМ (Modern Philosophy) 161-272 Philosophy Honours 2P (Moral and Political Philosophy) 161-273 Philosophy Honours 2Q (General Logic)

For essay requirements and examinations see under the details of the above subjects.

3. THIRD YEARt

(a) Students are required to participate to a satisfactory level in a special third-year honours seminar of an hour and a half per week. Student-selected topics will be discussed, and each student will be required to read to the group an essay which will then be handed in for assessment. (b) 161-370 Philosophy Honours 3HN (Recent Philosophy)# (c) EITHER three full subjects and one unit selected from the follow-

ing lists OR two full subjects and three units:

Full Subject Options

161-361 Philosophy Honours 3HC (Contemporary European Philo-sophy)

161-365 Philosophy Honours 31G (Greek Philosophy) 161-366 Philosophy Honours 3HJ (Philosophy of Religion) 161-367 Philosophy Honours 31K (Aesthetics) 100-461 The Interdepartmental Programme: Eighteenth Century

Studies 100-462 The interdepartmental Programme: Religious Studies

Unit Options

161-375 Philosophy Honours 311 (Logical Problems) 161-376 Philosophy Honours 312 (Philosophical Theories) 161-377 Philosophy Honours 313 (Philosophical Problems) 161-379 Philosophy Honours 314 (Set Theory)

Essays and Examinations

Third year honours students will be required to write one essay (of not more than 2,000 words) in each full subject and in each unit (except that in Set Theory there will be a revision assignment in place of an essay). Unless otherwise provided for in the details of relevant subject or unit there will be one 3-hour paper In each subject and in each unit.

4. FOURTH YEAR

161-475 Philosophy Honours 4S (Philosophical Psychology)

tin 1975 third year honours students who completed second year in 1974 will enrol for Philosophy Honours 2НМ Instead of Philosophy Honours 3Н N.

361

Faculty of Arts

161-476 Philosophy Honours 4T (Ethics) 161-477 Philosophy Honours 4U (Political Philosophy) 161-478 Philosophy Honours 4V (Kant) 161-479 Philosophy Honours 4W (Current Issues in Philosophy) 161-480 Philosophy Honours 4X (Philosophy of Knowledge and Rational

Inquiry)

Essays and Examinations

There will be one 3-hour examination in each of the above six subjects. In addition students will write during the long vacation preceding their fourth year an essay (of about 3,000 words) to be handed in at the beginning of first term. They will also write and hand in at a date to be prescribed a further essay, of similar length, on a topic chosen by them and approved by the head of department. To secure this approval they must hand in before the last week of first term a one hundred word outline of the essay they propose to write, together with a bibliography of works to be used in writing it. (This essay is intended to give an opportunity to those students who wish to do guided individual work in areas not formally taught by the department. but choice of such an "outside" topic will not be required.) In arriving at an overall assess-ment the two essays will jointly be given the same weight as one examination paper.

5. OVERDUE ESSAYS

Unless a long extension has been granted on strong medical or other grounds, a final year essay which is more than two weeks overdue will not be accepted. In place of it the student will be required to sit, within the department, a 3-hour essay-type examination paper. 6. COURSES WITHOUT GRADE ONE PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT

A student who does a grade two subject as his first philosophy subject may, if his work is of sufficient standard, be admitted to the honours school. Such students will not do a grade one philosophy subject. Instead they will qualify for the honours degree by satisfying the standard require-ments for the second, third and fourth years of the pure honours course, with the following modifications: ( а ) If his first philosophy subject was Philosophy 2L he may convert that into Philosophy Honours 2Q by doing unit one of Philosophy 2F, 161-378 Rudiments of Symbolic Logic, but he must in addition either do an extra subject chosen from the list of third-year honours subject options or do two extra units chosen from the list of third-year unit options. .

(b) If his first philosophy subject was Philosophy 2F he may convert that into Philosophy Honours 2Q by doing Philosophy 2L, but he must in addition either do an extra unit chosen from the third-year honours unit options or do unit one of Philosophy 2D (161-380).

(c) If his first philosophy subject was Philosophy 2D he may convert that into Philosophy Honours 2P by doing Philosophy 2E, but he must in addition do an extra unit chosen from the third-year honours unit options.

161-269 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 21M (MODERN PHILOSOPHY) Dr V. I. Rice, Dr J. L. C. Chipman

Honours students doing this subject attend the lectures for Philosophy

362

Philosophy

2M, but attend a special weekly honours tutorial and are examined at honours level.

161-272 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 2P (MORAL AND POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY) Dr G. D. Marshal, Mr R. Bambrough, Fr J. E. D'Arс y, Dr J. Srzednicki

During the first half of the year this course consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week. During the second half of the year it consists of four lectures and two tutorials per week. Throughout the year students will attend the two weekly lectures given for the pass degree course in Philosophy 2E, and a weekly honours tutorial in that subject. During the second half of the year they will also attend the two weekly lectures given for unit two of the pass degree course In Philosophy 2D, and a weekly honours tutorial in that subject. SYLLABUS AND BOOKS

As for Philosophy 2E and for unit two of Philosophy 2D. ESSAYS

Two essays, one in each part, of not more than 1,500 words each. EXAMINATIONS

Two 3-hour papers, one in each part.

161-273 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 2Q (GENERAL LOGIC) Professor D. A. T. Gasking, Dr B. M. Taylor

During the first half of the year, this course consists of four lectures, one tutorial and one practice-class per week. During the second half of the year, it consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week. Throughout the year students will attend the two weekly lectures given for the pass degree course in Philosophy 2L and a weekly honours tutorial in that subject. During the first half of the year they will also attend the two weekly lectures given for unit one of the pass degree course in Philosophy 2F, and a weekly honours practice-class In that subject.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS

As for Philosophy 2L and for unit one of Philosophy 2F.

ESSAYS

Two essays, one in each part, of not more than 1,500 words each.

EXAMINATIONS Two 3-hour papers, one in each part. The paper for unit one of Philosophy 2F is taken in the sixth week of Second Term and is worth one-third of the total marks for the subject. The paper for Philosophy 2L is taken at the end of the year, and Is worth two-thirds of the marks in the subject.

161-370 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 3HN (RECENT PHILOSOPHY) • Dr L. J. O'Neill, Mr C. A. J. Coady

Honours students doing this subject attend the lectures for Philosophy

Іп 1975 thIrd year honours phy Hoп ours

second year in 7974 will enrol for 3HN.

З 63

Faculty of Arts

2N, but attend a special weekly honours tutorial and are examined at honours level.

161-361 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS ЭН C (CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN РН ILOSOPН Y) Dr M. J. Charlesworth

Honours students doing this subject attend the lectures for Philosophy 2C, but will be examined at honours level and if the number of honours students warrants it will attend a special weekly honours tutorial.

161-365 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 31G (GREEK PHILOSOPHY) Dr Mary A. McCloskey

Honours students doing this subject attend the lectures for Philosophy 2G, but will be examined at honours level and if the number of honours students warrants it will attend a special weekly honours tutorial.

161-366 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 3HJ (PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION) Fr J. E. D'Arcv. Mr R. Bambrough, Dr V. I. Rice

Honours students doing this subject attend the lectures for Philosophy 2J, but will be examined et honours level and if the number of honours students warrants it will attend a special weekly honours tutorial.

161-367 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 31K (AESTHETICS) Mr W. K. Presa

Honours students doing this subject attend the lectures for Philosophy 2K, but will be examined at honours level and if the number of honours students warrants it will attend a special weekly honours tutorial.

100-461 THE INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME: EIGHTEENTH CENTURY STUDIES

For details, see under separate heading for this programme: pp. 425-427.

100-462 THE INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME: RELIGIOUS STUDIES

For details, see under separate heading for this programme: pp. 425, 427-429.

161-375 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 311 (LOGICAL PROBLEMS) Dr L. J. O'Neill

A unit (half-subject) consisting of one 1 %-hour lecture-seminar during the first half of the year, being one of the unit-options open to third-year honours students.

SYLLABUS A discussion of problems selected from the fields of philosophical logic,

364

Philosophy

inductive logic and probability, and the philosophy of the natural and social sciences. In 1975 a selection will be made from the following topics: Propositions, Logical Truth, Entailment, Existence, Counter-factual Statements, Formalization of Inductive Logic, Analysis of Belief State-ments, Probability, Quantified Iodai Logic, Rationality, Objectivity.

В 00KS

Recommended for reference:

Reacher N Topics in Philosophical Logic, Reidel Hintikka J & Suppes P Aspects of Inductive Logic, North-Holland Isemlnger G Logic and Philosophy, Appleton-Century-Crofts Lakatos I ed The Problem of Inductive Logic, North-Holland Kyburg H E Philosophy of Science: a formal approach, Macmillan Reacher N Hypothetical Reasoning, North-Holland Quine W V Selected Logic Papers, Random House Quine W V Ways of Paradox, Random House Quine W V Ontological Relativity and Other Essays, Columbia UP Quine W V Philosophy of Logic, Prentice-Hall Quine W V & Ullian J S The Web of Belief, Random House

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

An essay of 1,500 words will be required during first term, and there will be a mid-year 3-hour examination paper. In the overall assessment the essay will be given а maximum weight of 10%.

161-376 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 312 (PHILOSOPHICAL THEORIES) Mr W. K. Presa

A unit (half-subject) consisting of one 11,4-hour lecture-seminar per week throughout the year, being one of the unit-options open to third-year honours students. It is identical with the minor part of Philosophy зС (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

Students will be required to write an essay (of not more than 2,000 words) and there will be one 3-hour examination paper at the end of the year. In the overall assessment the essay will be given a maximum weight of 10%.

161-377 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 313 (PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS) Dr L. J. O'Neill

A unit (half-subject) consisting of one 1 %-hour lecture-seminar per week throughout the year, being one of the unit-options open to third-year honours students. It is identical with the minor part of Philosophy 3cc (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

Students will be required to write an essay (of not more than 2,000 words) and there will be one 3-hour examination paper at the end of the year. In the overall assessment the essay will be given a maximum weight of 10%.

365

Faculty of Arts

161-379 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 314 (SET THEORY) Dr В . M. Taylor

A unit (half-subject) consisting of two 1-hour lectures and one practice-class per week during the second half of the year, being one of the unit-options open to third-year honours students. It is identical with Unit Two of Philosophy 2F (for its syllabus and booklist see details for that subject).

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS

There will be one 3-hour examination paper at the end of the year.

161-475 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4S (PHILOSOPHICAL PSYCHOLOGY) Dr G. D. Marshall, Mr W. K. Presa

One lecture-seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental noticeboards for detailed Information.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper which will include questions concerning (1) actions and events; (2) philosophical theories about the senses; (3) emotions. Further questions, pertaining to other areas in philosophical psychology, may also be asked in accordance with known interests of staff and stu-dents in the Department.

Preliminary reading for: (1) Davidson D 'Agency' in Bink ley R et al eds Agent, Action and

Reason, Blackwell Davidson D 'Mental Events in Foster 1. & Swanson J W eds Experience

and Theory, Duckworth (2) Swartz R J ed Perceiving, Sensing and Knowing, Anchor Books Grice H P 'Some Remarks about the Senses' in Butler R J ed Analytical

Philosophy Series 1 A list of books to be consulted should be collected from the Philosophy department office at the beginning of 1975.

161-476 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4T (ETHICS) Dr Mary A. McCloskey

One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental noticeboards for detailed information.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper which will include questions on "good" and "ought" in general and in moral and aesthetic contexts. Texts will be: Moore G E Principia Ethica, Cambridge UP paperback

36б

Philosophy

Kant I Fundamental Principles of the Metaphysics of Morals, tr Abbott T K Longman

Wertheimer R The Significance of Sense, Cornell UP Further questions, pertaining to other areas in ethics may also be asked in accordance with known interests of staff and students in the depart-ment. Further reading lists will be issued from the Philosophy department office during 1975.

161-477 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4U (POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY) Dr J. L. C. Chipman

One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. The main themes to be dealt with in 1975 include:

(i) Legal obligation — a critical examination of various theories of the sources and character of legal obligation, with special reference to the question of whether, and in what circumstances, other obli-gations might override legal obligations.

(ii) Legal justification — consideration of the ways in which the reasons for a judicial decision are related to the judicial conclusion, with particular reference to the questions of whether the support is neither deductive nor inductive, and where the line is to be drawn between rational argument and rhetoric in general.

(iii) Political ideals — an examination of the ideals of equality (particu-larly in application to questions of racial equality and sexual equality) and justice, with special reference to the question of whether these Ideals involve any empirical content.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Students are expected to read the Introduction and chapters I and I1 of Quinton (reference below) before the first class. Prescribed texts: 'Lord Lloyd of Hampstead Introduction to Jurisprudence, 3rd ed

Stevens 'Quinton A ed Political Philosophy, OUP

Reference books:

Rawls J A Theory of Justice, OUP Singer P A D Democracy and Civil Disobedience, OUP Guest A G ed Oxford Essays in Jurisprudence, OUP Simpson A W B ed Oxford Essays in Jurisprudence—Second Series,

OUP Hart H L A The Concept of Law, OUP Cross R Precedent in English Law, OUP Raz J The Concept of a Legal System, OUP Barry B Political Argument, Routledge & Kegan Paul Benn S & Peters R Social Principles end the Democratic State, Allen

& Unwin Further questions, pertaining to other areas in political philosophy may also be asked in accordance with the known interests of staff and students in the department.

367

Faculty of Arts

Further references to articles in journals and other books will be given during the year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

161-478 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4V (KANT) Dr J. T. J. Srzednicki

One seminar of one-and-a-half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental notice-boards for detailed information.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper which will include questions on Kant's Critique of Pure Reason, tr Kemp Smith, Macmillan. Further relevant questions may also be asked in accordance with known interests of staff and students in the department. A list of books to be consulted should be collected from the Philosophy department office at the beginning of 1975.

161-479 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4W (CURRENT ISSUES IN PHILOSOPHY) Mr C. A. J. Coady, Dr В . M. Taylor, Dr H. Lewis

One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental noticeboards for detailed information.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper which will include questions concerning (1 ) issues in formal semantics, and (2) the psycho-social aspects of linguistic communication.

Preliminary reading:

for (1) Davidson D "Truth and Meaning". Synthese, 1967 for (2) Grace H P "Meaning", Philosophical Review, 1957 Further questions, pertaining to other relevant areas, may also be asked in accordance with known interests of staff and students in the depart-ment. A list of books to be consulted should be collected from the Philosophy department office at the beginning of 1975.

161-480 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4X (PHILOSOPHY OF KNOWLEDGE AND RATIONAL INQUIRY) Professor D. A. T. Gasking, Mr C. A. J. Coady

One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental notice-boards for detailed information.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper which will include questions on the epistemological significance of our reliance upon testimony as well as other problems selected for study in 1975. Further questions, pertaining to other rele-

368

Political Science

vant areas, may also be asked in accordance with known interests of staff and students in the department. A list of books to be consulted should be collected from the Philosophy department office at the begin-ning of 1975.

161-499 THE M.A. PRELIMINARY COURSE IN PHILOSOPHY

Any person who has completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts or is a graduate of some other faculty may apply for admission to the M.A. preliminary course with a view to qualifying for admission to the M.A. course in philosophy. Closing date for applications in 1975 is 24 January, 1975. A form giving details of the course is available from the Philosophy department secretary.

MASTER OF ARTS

161-601 C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY

Students seeking admission to the M.A. course in Philosophy (for which the normal prerequisite is at least second class honours in the school of Philosophy, in the philosophical part of a combined honours school, or an equivalent standard in the M.A. preliminary examination in philosophy) should consult the department before sending an application form to the Registrar. Examination is normally by thesis on an approved topic. The length of the thesis must not exceed 35,000 words. (The chairman of the department may give permission to exceed this limit by a specified amount In the case of a thesis requiring extensive quotation of source material.) Subject, however, to the availability of suitable courses a candidate may, with the approval of the chairman of department, satisfy the requirements of the M.A. degree in part by course-work and in part by thesis. In this case the department will also set an upper limit to the length of the thesis. Unless specially exempted, candidates must also attend an oral examination covering the general field of their research. They will work under the supervision of a member of the Philosophy department to whom they should report regularly on the progress of their work, and who will advise them about a suitable course of reading. They may also be required to attend such lectures or discussion classes and to submit such pieces of interim written work as may be prescribed by their supervisor or by the department. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten. double-spaced) are re-quired, of which one copy, in the case of the successful candidate, will be deposited in the University Library and one in the departmental library.

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE Chairman of Department: Mr K. G. ARMSTRONG, M.A.(0xon.), B.A. Professor of Political Science: Professor A. F. DAVIES, M.A.

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details of honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

SUBJECTS OFFERED

First Year: Politics 1

369

Faculty of Arts

Second Year: Politics 2A Politics 2В International Relations 2 Public Administration 2

Third Year: Politics ЭА Politics 3 В International Relations З Public Administration З Political Sociology 3

All students enrolling in 1975 must indicate the serial numbers of the subjects they are enrolling in. The subject or unit number must be prefixed by the departmental number 166-.

No student may enrol for both

International Relations 2 and 3, nor for both Public Administration 2 and З .

For approved majors see p. 39. For prerequisites for certain subjects see p. 42. Note: Students other than those taking honours in Political Science may also enter for individual Political Science subjects at honours level. Details of the additional honours syllabus in each subject will be found below, under the heading 'Honours Degree: School of Political Science'.

166-101 POLITICS 1 • J. Helmer, D. A. Kemp, D. F. В . Tucker

A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Students will be required to submit at least two essays to gain a pass in the subject.

SYLLABUS

The course is designed to provide students with an introduction to the study of politics. In particular, it aims to develop skills in the analysis of both empirical and normative issues in politics. Empirical questions include, for example, the amount of influence party members do, as a matter of fact, have on government policy. Normative questions include examination of the grounds on which governments may justifiably claim the obedience of citizens of laws. The course is divided into two parts. One part deals largely with the normative questions about the desirable structure of the democratic political system. This part of the course directs attention to the con-temporary debate about the nature of democratic society. In particular, it aims to provide students with the skills and relevant material to assess suggested justifications of the institutions of competitive liberal systems. The lectures explore the ramifications of the belief that for a society to qualify as a democracy there must be contestation and a representative parliamentary system in which governments are prepared to surrender power to an opposition if they lose an election. The other part of the course deals largely with empirical questions, i.e. questions of fact. It is particularly concerned to provide an introduction to the analysis of political power and influence, with determining who gets what, when and how. To this end, it provides a close examination of

•Previously Modern Government 1A.

370

Political Science

political and governmental institutions, and the way in which the social and cultural setting affects their operation. Attention is given to Austra-lian political and governmental institutions as a route to studying the nature and distribution of political power in Australia. Sections of the course deal with political parties, elections, interest groups, parliament and cabinet, and public administration. By the end of the course it is hoped that students will have developed an understanding of the distinct problems that arise in the handling of normative and empirical political questions, and will have acquired skills in the assessment of empirical data about politics. The student should also have acquired knowledge about the nature of politics and govern-ment in Australia and the working of Australian institutions.

BOOKS

There Is no formal text and students should buy reference books from those set out in the reading guides issued during the year. Advice about book purchases will be given in the first lecture and tutorials. (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Macpherson C B The Real World of Democracy, OUP 1969 Dahl R A After the Revolution, Yale 1970 Wolff R P in Defense of Anarchism, Harper 1970 Strickland D A Wade L L & Johnston R A Primer of Political Analysis,

2nd ed Markham 1972 (b) Recommended for reference: Mayer H Nelson H eds Australian Politics: A Third Reader, Cheshire

1973 Dowse R E & Hughes J A Political Sociology, John Wiley & Sons 1972 Murphy J G Civil Disobedience and Violence, Wadsworth Cal 1971 Bachrach P The Theory of Democratic Elitism, ULP 1969 Kar el H Frontiers of Democratic Theory, Random House 1970 Pateman C Participation and Democratic Theory, Cambridge 1970 Dahl R A Polyarchy, Yale 1971 Further references and detailed reading guides will be issued during the year.

EXAMINATION

Assessment will be based on prescribed written work which may include an examination of not more than 3 hours.

166-201 POLITICS 2A (PASS)

166-202 POLITICS 2 В (PASS) There is no one fixed syllabus for any of the subjects — they are made up from the units described below. A pass subject will consist of two units; an honours subject will consist of three units. The full list of units offered is as follows:

166-001 American Politics and Society (compact unit, first half of the year).

166-002 Problems of American Politics (compact unit, second half of the year).

166-003 Western European Politics (not availabl e in 1975). 166-004 Indian Politics and Society (extended unit).

371

Faculty of Arts

166-005 Chinese Politics and Society (compact unit, second half of the year).

166-006 Soviet Politics and Society (compact unit, first half of the year).

166-007 Communist Political Theory (extended unit). Students enrolling in only one of these subjects in a given year must enrol in Politics 2A or ЗА ; students enrolling in two of these subjects in a given year must enrol in Politics 2A and 26 or Politics 3A and 3 В . Students should note the following provisions governing these subjects and the units of which they are composed:

(1) An enrolment must be lodged both for the subject and for the units being studied. Thus a second year student enrolling In one Political Science subject could enrol for:

166-201 Politics 2A, comprising units 166-001 and 166-002. Some other possible combinations would be:

166-001 + 166-004 166-001 + 166-005 166-001 + 166-006 166-001 + 166-007 166-004 + 166-005

166-004 + 166-006 166-004 + 166-007 166-005 + 166-006 166-005 + 166-007 166-006 + 166-007

(2) Both units in a subject will be examined at the end of the year. Students may not enrol in single units nor may they claim credit for passing single units. (3) A student must construct his subject on one of the following patterns:

Two compact units' taught in different halves of the year. Two extended units'. One compact unit and one extended unit.

(4) Students enrolling at the honours level must include three units. One of these units must be selected from 166-002 or 166-007 or 166-008 (see under 'Honours Degree', School of Political Science). (5) Students may not take unit 166-002 unless they have already studied unit 166-001.

(6) Students may not select units which contain subject matter which was included in subjects already passed; e.g. students who have passed Modern Government В in 1973 or earlier may not enter for Unit 166-001 American Politics and Society; students who have passed Modern Government C (in 1973 or earlier may not enter for unit 166-006 or unit 166-005). Students who have passed a particular unit as part of Politics 2A or 2 В may not enter for that same unit as part of Politics 3A or 3B. More details on this point may be obtained from the Arts Faculty Office or the Political Science department.

166-001 AMERICAN POLITICS AND SOCIETY

Mr K. G. Armstrong

A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the first half of the academic year.

• A compact unit consists of a course of two lectures and one tutorial a week over half the academic year. An extended unit consists of one lecture a week and one tutorial a fortnight throughout the academic year.

372

Political Science

SYLLABUS An introduction to the United States political system in its social and constitutional setting. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Vile M J C Politics in the U.S.A., Penguin Beloff M The American Federal Government, OUP

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Carr R K Bernstein M H Murphy W F & Danielson M N Essentials of

American Democracy, Holt Rinehart & Winston 7th ed 1974 or •Irish M D & Prothro J W The Politics of American Democracy, Pren-

tice-Hall, 5th ed. 1971

(c) Recommended for reference:

Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-002 PROBLEMS OF AMERICAN POLITICS

Dr John Helmer and others

A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the second half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS

A study of aspects of United States politics which raise problems for American policy makers or for those who wish to interpret and evaluate the American political system. Each year a selection will be made from such topics as the following:

(a) racial minorities and integration; (b) elite, class and pluralist interpretations of American politics; (c) the need and prospects for institutional reform; (d) the alienation of youth and the 'silent majority'; (e) the rise of the political amateur—Goldwater, McCarthy, McGovern; (f) the politics of poverty. N.B. This unit can only be taken by students who have already taken Unit 166-001 American Politics and Society. Students will be required to submit an essay of 1,400 words.

Books

( а ) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Hamilton Richard Class and American Politics, Wiley 1974 Helmer John The Deadly Simple Mechanics of Society, Continuum

Books 1974 Mills C Wright White Collar, Galaxy Books 1970

373

Faculty of Arts

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

As for Unit 166-001 American Politics and Society.

(c) Recommended for reference:

Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-003 WESTERN EUROPEAN POLITICS (Not available in 1975.)

Dr Alan Hughes and others

A course of one lecture a week and one tutorial a fortnight throughout the academic year.

SYLLABUS

The course will cover the politics of one or more of the following countries, Britain, West Germany, France, Italy.

166-004 INDIAN POLITICS AND SOCIETY Mr D. F. Miller

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight through-out the academic year.

SYLLABUS

The course presents an analysis of some aspect of contemporary Indian politics, stressing the interaction of Indien society and culture and politics. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS

Prescribed books:

Kothari K Politics in India, 1970 Weiner W Party Building in a New Nation, 1968 Bailey F Politics and Social Change, 1963 Miller D F Pervasive Politics, Melbourne Politics Monograph 1972 Dumont L Homo hierarchicus, 1972

Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper.

166-005 CHINESE POLITICS AND SOCIETY

Mr E. A. luck A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week during the second half of the academic year.

374

Political Science

snwBUs

A course dealing with the Chinese Communist Revolution, Chinese political culture, Maoist ideology and China's relations with the outside world. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS

Recommended for preliminary reading:

Fitzgerald C P The Birth of Communist China, Pelican Huck E A The Security of China, Chatto & Windus 1970 Schram S Mao Tse-tung, Pelican Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-006 SOVIET POLITICS AND SOCIETY

Mr L. G. Churchward

A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week throughout the first half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS

A short course dealing with the political history of the Soviet Union, with the functioning of the Soviet political system, and with social and political change in the USSR since the death of Stalin.

Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Armstrong J A Ideology, Politics and Government in the Soviet Union, Praeger

Wesson R G The Soviet State: An Aging Revolution, Wiley & Sons 1972

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Churchward L G Contemporary Soviet Government, Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1968

or •Barghoorn F C Politics in the USSR, Little Brown 2nd ed 1972 or •Reshetar Jr, J S The Soviet Polity, Dodd lead 1971 or •Hazard J N The Soviet System of Government, Chicago UP 4th

edition 1988 or 'Lane D Politics end Society in the USSR, Weidenfeld & Nicolson Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

375

Faculty of Arts

166-007 COMMUNIST POLITICAL THEORY Mr L. G. Churchward, Mr E. A. luck

A course of one lecture a week and one tutorial a fortnight throughout the academic year.

SYLLABUS The development of Communist theory from classical Marxism to Russian and Chinese Marxism. The course will include a study of some of the main trends in contemporary Communist ideology. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words throughout the course.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Meyer A G Communism, 3rd edition Random House 1967 Meyer A G Marxism: The Unity of Theory and Practice, Uni. of_

Michigan Press 1966 Tucker R C The Marxian Revolutionary Idea, Norton 1969 Mills C W The Marxists, Laurel 1962 Schram S R The Political Thought of Mao Tse-tung, Penguin 1969 Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-301 POLITICS ЗА (PASS)

166-302 POLITICS 3 В (PASS) Syllabus, books and examination as above for Politics 2A, 2B. In addition students will be required to submit additional essay work.

166-203 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 2 (PASS) Dr P. G. C. Darby

A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

An introductory study of international relations between the new states of Africa and Asia and their relations with the developed world. The emphasis will be primarily empirical and historical. At the same time certain more general themes relating to issues such as the changing role of military power, the increasing intrusion of economic considerations, and the politics of regional Integration will be developed within the con-text of particular area studies.

Prescribed books:

Lyon P War and Peace in South East Asia, RIIA-OUP 1969 Osborne M Region of Revolt, Pelican 1971 Davidson В Which Way Africa? Penguin 1971 Harris J E Africans and Their History, Mentor 1972

376

Political Science

Fanon F The Wretched of the Earth, Penguin 1971 Taber R War of the Flea, Paladin 1970 First R The Barrel of a Gun, Penguin 1972 Castel H ed World Development: an Introductory Reader, Macmillan

1971 Buchan A War in Modern Society, Fontana 1968

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-303 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 3 (PASS) As above for International Relations 2 but this subject shall be taken solely as a Grade 3 subject.

166-204 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 2 (PASS) M. J. Holmes, L. G. Peres

A course of two lectures and one tutorial class a week throughout the year. However, arrangements may be made during certain periods of the year for seminar discussion groups to be substituted for lectures.

SYLLABUS

A study of the relationship between administration and policy develop-ment. An Introductory outline deals with the institutions of Australian Federal and State governments. Particular policy areas will be examined in some detail to illustrate the role of public management and the exer-cise of power through public policy outcomes.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Marx F M The Administrative State, Chicago 1957 Lindblom Charles E The Policy-Making Process, Prentice-Hall Prescribed books: Spann R N Public Administration in Australia, new ed NSW Govt Printer

1973 Spann R N & Curnow R C eds Public Policy and Administration in Aus-

tralia, Wiley forthcoming Forward R IC ed Public Policy in Australia, Cheshire 1974 Parris H Constitutional Bureaucracy, Allen & Unwin Chapman R A & Dunsire A eds Style in Administration, Allen & Unwin Rourke Francis E Bureaucracy, Politics and Public Policy, Little Brown A detailed reading guide will be issued In this subject.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-304 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 (PASS) Syllabus, books and examination as for Public Administration 2. In addition students will be required to sи bт it extra essay work.

377

Faculty of Arts

166-305 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY 3 (PASS) Dr Alan Hughes, Professor A. F. Davies

A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year with additional optional practical classes.

SYLLABUS

( а ) The structure and problems of authority in the modern industrial state in times both of stability and stress with special reference to Australia, Germany and Britain. Topics to be discussed will include political culture, social class distinctions, poverty and social welfare, alienation and satisfaction in work, the absorption of migrants and discrimination against minority groups. Aspects of modern social theory will also be considered.

(b) The person and the political process, with reference to political learning, and the psychological and sociological basis of attitudes and ideology.

(c) Methods of social enquiry: Mass survey techniques and measure-ment of attitudes with appropriate statistical apparatus; a sample survey addressed specifically to some questions raised in (a) above; training in intensive interviewing — techniques and analysis; methods of field obser-vation: observation and analysis of the behaviour of small, real, political groups.

ASSESSMENT

The components of the annual examination will be decided at the beginning of the academic year. Students will be notified by published sheets on departmental notice-boards no later than 31 March 1975.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading: Wallace W Sociological Theory, Heinemann paperback 1969 Hughes A Psychology and the Political Experience, CUP 1975 Freud S An Outline of Psycho-Analysis, Hogarth Press 1959

Prescribed books:

Wilson P R ed Australian Social Issues of the 70's, Butterworth 1972 Worsley P ed Problems of Modern Society, Penguin 1972 Dahrendorf R Society and Democracy in Germany, Weidenfeld & Nicol-

son 1968 Roberts G K West German Politics, Macmillan Papermac 1972 Berger P L & Luckman T The Social Construction of Reality, Penguin

1972 Erikson E Childhood and Society, Pelican 1970 Little G Politics and Personal Style, Nelson paperback 1973 Davies A Essays in Political Sociology, Cheshire paperback 1972 Oppenheim A Questionnaire Design and Attitude Measurement, Heine-

mann paperback 1966 Phillips J Statistical Thinking, Freeman 1973

HONOURS DEGREE 1. SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE (For possible combinations of this school with other honours schools, see pp. 439 ff., and a pamphlet available from the Arts Faculty office.)

378

Political Science

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Political Science comprises the following subjects:

A. POLITICS 1 В . Two subjects chosen from POLITICS 2A hens; POLITICS 2 В huns;

International Relations 2 hens; Public Administration 2 hens.

C. Two subjects chosen from POLITICS 3A hens; POLITICS 3 В hofs; International Relations 3 hens; Public Administration 3 hens; or Political Sociology 3 hens.

D. Two courses in Theories of Politics selected from the range of courses offered in the 4th year of the course.

E. A pass sequence (i.e. one subject at grade 1 and grade 2 levels) in a discipline other than Political Science.

2. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Political Science consists of a first (preliminary) year and three years in the honours school, as set out below:

First (Preliminary) Year:

A. POLITICS 1.

В . Three other Grade 1 Arts subjects, one of which should be selected to form the first part of a two-subject sequence supporting or complementing an honours course in Political Science.

It is strongly recommended that another of these subjects should be part 1 of a foreign language.

Second Year:

(a) The general requirements for admission to the honours school of Political Science are a suitable standard (usually the equivalent of first or second class honours) in POLITICS 1 and passes in three other first year subjects. Students who do not secure an honour in POLITICS 1 are not automatically debarred from the honours school, but they may only be admitted with the approval of the head of the department.

(b) Students entering the honours school of Political Science shall take in their second year: Two of POLITICS 2A huns; POLITICS 2 В hons; International Relations 2 hons; Public Administration 2 hons. In addition students must take an approved Grade 2 pass subject in a discipline other than Political Science forming a two-subject sequence with a subject taken in the first year.

(c) Students who fail to gain first or second class honours in the examination in Political Science subjects at the end of this year will normally not be permitted to continue in the honours school.

Third Year:

(a) Two of POLITICS 3A hons; POLITICS 3 В hons; International Rela-tions 3 hons; Public Administration 3 huns, and Political Sociology 3. In addition students may take an additional pass subject or approved course of study. Students may use this opportunity to complete a pass major in another discipline, to do an additional political science subject, or to do a reading course In a foreign language.

(b) Students will not be permitted to proceed to the fourth year in Political Science unless they secure a satisfactory honours standard in the third year examinations.

379

Faculty of Arts

(c) Students who are unable to proceed to the fourth year, may, if their results have been adequate, apply to the faculty for approval to be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary.

Fourth Year: Two parts of Theories of Politics and the completion of a final year honours thesis, embodying the results of Independent research, of approximately 12,000 words on an approved subject.

3. Final Examination

Examinations in the third and fourth year will be regarded as com-prising a final examination in the School of Political Science and will normally consist of:

(a) In the third year not more than two papers in each of the political science subjects taken in that year. (b) In the final year, not more than one paper in each of the two Theories of Politics courses taken by the student. (c) Assessment of the final honours thesis and of other written work submitted during the final year. The thesis must be handed in at the beginning of third term.

Political Science in Combined Honours Courses

The subjects required by the department for the combined honours degree courses involving Political Science are as follows:

First Year: 166-101 POLITICS 1.

It is strongly recommended that students take, if possible, part 1 of a foreign language.

Second Year:

One second year political science subject at the honours level.

Third Year:

One political science third year honour subject at the honours level.

Fourth Year:

Either Theories of Politics 4F or 4G.

A thesis of 12,000 words shall be submitted in Political Science, or a thesis of an agreed length shall be submitted to the two honours schools for joint examination, or a thesis shall be submitted in the other honours school in conformity with the regulations of that school.

166-261 POLITICS 2A (HONS) 166-262 POLITICS 26 (HONS)

Units offered:

166-001 American Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-002 Problems of American Politics (Pass-or-Honours unit) 166-003 Western European Politics (Pass unit) (Not available in 1975)

166-004 Indian Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-005 Chinese Politics and Society (Pass unit)

166-006 Soviet Politics and Society (Pass unit)

166-007 Communist Political Theory (Pass-or-Honours unit)

166-008 Political Development (Honours unit)

380

Political Science

The honours course in Politics 2A (Ions) or Politics 28 (Ions) will consist of two pass units plus one pass-or-honours unit. The two pass-or-honours units available are those on Problems of American Society and Communist Political Theory. Students may not normally do both of these in the one subject. The special honours unit on Political Develop-ment will normally be taken in the Third Year of the Honours course. The syllabuses for units 166-001 to 166-007 may be found above, on pp. 372-376. The syllabus for unit 166-008 is shown below. Students will be required to submit essays in at least two of the units undertaken. Students will be required to attend lectures and tutorials in all three units.

EXAMINATION

Not more than three 2-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-361 POLITICS ЗА (IONS) 166-362 POLITICS 3В (IONS)

The same rules apply as in POLITICS 2A (Ions).

Students are strongly advised to do the course on Political Development If it is available.

EXAMINATION

Not more than three 2-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-008 POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT Mr D. F. Miller

A weekly seminar throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

An introduction to some aspects of the comparative study of politics In underdeveloped societies, with special reference to the analysis of political modernization. Students will be required to submit one honours essay of 2,000 words.

BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be Issued throughout the year.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-263 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 2 (IONS)

A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree together with regular seminars throughout the academic year. Students are required to submit extra written work and to prepare class papers.

SYLLABUS (1) As for the ordinary degree.

381

Faculty of Arts

(2) A study of international relations theory with special emphasis on the role of violence.

BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-363 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 3 (HONS)

As for International Relations 2 (Ions) but this subject will be taken by 3rd year honours students only.

166-264 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 2 (HONS)

M. J. Holmes, L. G. Peres

A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with one honours seminar each week throughout the academic year. Students are required to submit two essays (one pass and one honours) of 1,500-2,000 words in length.

SYLLABUS

(1) As for the ordinary degree.

(2) Some aspects of organizational analysis.

BOOKS

(1) As for the ordinary degree.

(2) Detailed reading guides for the honours seminars will be issued.

EXAMINATION

Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-364 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 (HONS)

As above for Public Administration 2 Ions. In addition students will be required to submit an extra honours essay.

166-365 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY 3 (HONS)

Dr Alan Hughes, Professor A. F. Davies

The honours component of the annual examination will be decided at the beginning of the academic year. Students will be notified by published sheets on departmental noticeboards no later than 31st March, 1975. It will put particular weight on projects to be assigned in the methods of social enquiry section of the course.

166-401 THEORIES OF POLITICS 4F A weekly seminar for 4th year honours students dealing with various problems in political analysis.

382

Psychology

Selected texts and detailed reading guides will be announced at the beginning of the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-402 THEORIES OF POLITICS 4G A weekly seminar for 4th year honours students dealing with the contri-bution of some leading writers to political studies. Selected texts and detailed reading guides will be announced at the beginning of the course.

EXAMINATION

Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-499 M.A. PRELIMINARY

For general information and procedure for enrolling see pp. 46, 53.

MASTER OF ARTS

166-601 I. SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE

Candidates will prepare a thesis on an approved subject and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. A discussion class may be arranged. Candidates may be expected to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

166-701 SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE

See the regulation, p. 55; also p. 47.

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Chairman of Department: Gordon Veitch Stanley, B.A., Ph.D.(W.Aust.), A.В .Pѕ .S., M.A.Ps.S.

INTRODUCTION Psychology is that branch of scientific enquiry concerned with human behaviour and experience. It is directly related to physiology (the study

383

Faculty of Arts

of the normal processes occurring in living organisms) and sociology (the study of the behaviour of groups). The profession of psychology in-volves putting into practice knowledge of psychology and related dis-ciplines, and carrying out research to extend that knowledge. The psychology course thus involves training in the scientific study, assessment and management of behaviour. This naturally starts from what everyone knows of human nature, but is very much more detailed and elaborate, and above all, more exact. The courses therefore include a thorough training in methods of analysing and assessing behaviour, and especially in statistical analysis and inference. Psychologists are employed mainly by government departments, both Commonwealth and State, especially Labour and National Service, the armed forces, and Mental Health and Education, and also by public hos-pitals. The field of industrial and commercial employment is growing. Just what psychologists do depends, of course, on the body which employs them. They may be concerned with advising young people on how best to find and settle into a job suited to their capacities and interests, or with advising school children and their parents on diffi-culties encountered in work at school. Or they may be concerned with the special problems of handicapped persons (deaf, or partially crippled, or with speech defects), or with the detailed psychological examination of patients in psychiatric clinics. In industry, the psychologist may deal with problems of social relations (morale, absenteeism, managerial problems, and so on), of ergonomics (the study of human factors in complex engineering systems), or of consumer research. All these various fields are also those of psychologists in the armed forces. Many psychologists are engaged in scientific research, not only in uni-versities and colleges, but also in government departments. Those with a particular interest in problems of a physiological, pharmacological or neurological nature will find increasing opportunities in the field of medi-cal research; in animal behaviour—especially in the area of ethology—among those studying problems of conservation; or in mathematical analysis, in the problems of computer simulation of intellectual processes. Membership of the Australian Psychological Society, which amounts to recognition of professional status, requires four years of academic training in psychology and two years of supervised postgraduate ex-perience. Those intending a career in psychology are therefore advised to become candidates for the honours degree. A basic training in psychology is considered relevant to many openings in the Education Department, although details vary, and in general it is necessary that 'teaching subjects' should also be undertaken at under-graduate level.

AVAILABLE COURSES

The 'ordinary' degree. This is the basic course, consisting of the sequence Psychology 1, 2A and 3A leading to a major. The degree with honours. This consists of the three subjects of the 'ordinary degree, together with an additional second year subject Psychology 2 В (honours), and additional units taken in the third and fourth years of the honours course. For admission to provisional honours at the beginning of the second year, a student should have obtained honours in Psychology 1 and passes at least in the other three subjects. To be considered for admission to Final Honours a student normally

384

Psychology

should have obtained adequate honours in the courses of Psychology 2A and 2 В , which together comprise provisional honours. N.B. The additional units of the honours course are not open to non-Honours candidates or to part-time students. Combined honours courses are not normally available. Subjects to study at school. In view of the mathematical and statistical work in Psychology, mathematics at Higher School Certificate is now virtually essential for prospective students. (HSC General Mathematics is an especially suitable preparation.) A science subject (preferably Biology) is also very desirable. A student can also study Psychology in the Science Faculty or in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (see the respective handbooks). Finally, note that some Psychology is required for other courses, such as those in Social Work and Criminology, and Is of Special value to those who are intending to become teachers.

THE BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES TERMINAL SEQUENCE

Behavioural Studies 1 and 2 are offered ae a first and second year sequence for students who wish to study Psychology but whose primary Interest is In another discipline. It Is not normally possible to proceed from Behavioural Studies 1 to Psychology 2A or 2B, and Behavioural Studies 1 and 2 do not constitute prerequisites for third year courses in Psychology.

ORDINARY DEGREE

(Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

SUBJECTS OFFERED

171-100 Psychology 1 171-200 Psychology 2A 171-300 Psychology ЭА

MAJOR

Psychology 1, Psychology 2A, Psychology 3A (taken in separate years). This is the only course that is accepted as a first and single major in Psychology. Criminology A does not form part of any major. The atten-tion of students Is drawn to faculty regulations concerning prescribed written work, laboratory work, etc., on p. 22 of the handbook.

171-100 PSYCHOLOGY PART 1

It should be noted that In the Psychology Part 1 subject quota, the competition for places Is so keen that offer of a place in the faculty of Arts does not guarantee enrolment in Psychology Part 1. Prospective students might wish to bear this In mind when choosing their preferences. A course of two lectures per week with three hours per week practical and discussion classes throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The development of behavioural patterns, individual differences and personality. Biological and social foundations of behaviour, including

385

N

Faculty of Arts

perception and learning. A programmed introduction to quantitative methods. No formal lectures are given in Quantitative Methods. Instead, students are expected to spend 1 r/2-2 hours per week, for 15 weeks, working through a series of programmed manuals which cover the Quantitative Methods syllabus.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading: as many as possible of the following:

Anderson J Durston B H et al Study Methods, McGraw-Hill paperback 1969

Miller G A Psychology, the Science of Mental Life, Pelican 1966 Prescribed textbooks:

All titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be in the possession of every student. Chaplin J P Dictionary , of Psychology, Doll paperback 1968 Ferguson G A Statistical Analysis in Psychology and Education, 3rd ed

McGraw-Hill 1971 King R A Readings for an Introduction to Psychology, 3rd ed McGraw-

/ill paperback 1971 Wright D S Taylor Ann et al Introducing Psychology: an Experimental

Approach, Penguin 1970 All students with less than HSC mathematics competence or who doubt their ability to deal with the material in Ferguson should buy and start studying the following paperback text: Bashaw W L Mathematics for Statistics, Wiley 1969

EXAMINATION

Examinations will take place during and at the end of the year. Labora-tory reports and other practical work must be submitted at specified times.

171-200 PSYCHOLOGY PART 2A

A course of 72 lectures, 48 hours of discussion and practical work through the year.

SYLLABUS

171-204 HUMAN LEARNING A(i)

The course will examine human learning in the light of behaviouristic and nativistic conceptual frameworks. Specifically human learning such as language learning will be emphasized.

171-205 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT A

The development of intelligence in children. Theories and evidence relating to the psychometric and cognitive approaches to intelligence.

171-206 AFFECTIVE AND SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT (a) Theoretical formulations and empirical studies relating to (i) Psycho-

analytic theory, (ii) Social development.

(b Specific socialization outcomes. Theories and evidence on the following will be examined: (i) Aggression, (ii) Achievement, (iii) Moral development, (iv) Sex role differentiation.

386

Psychology

171-241 QUANTITATIVE METHODS A(i)

Linear regression, product-moment correlation, t-tests, confidence limits, difference between correlations, partial correlation, non-parametric corre-lations, coefficient of concordance, elements of multiple correlation and factor analysis.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

All titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be in the possession of every student.

•Baldwin A L Theories of Child Development, Wiley 1967 •Danzinger K Socialization, Penguin 1971 •Ferguson G A Statistical Analysis in Psychology and Education, 3rd

ed McGraw-Hill 1971 for earlier edition) •McNeill D The Acquisition of Language, Harper & Row 1970

Recommended for reference: Erikson E H Identity Youth and Crisis, Faber 1968 Ferguson C A & Slobin D I Studies in Child Language Development,

Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973 Ginsburg H & Opper S Piaget's Theory of Intellectuel Development,

Prentice-Hall 1969 Piaget J & lnhelder B The Psychology of the Child, Routledge & Kegan

Paul 1969 Rutter M Maternal Deprivation Re-assessed, Penguin Modern Psychology

1972 Schaffer H R The Growth of Sociability, Penguin 1971 Other books may be prescribed or recommended — see Departmental Manual for 2nd year 1975.

EXAMINATION All examinations will take place during or at the end of units. Reports must be submitted at times to be specified on the practical and observa-tional work relating to the course and candidates must submit satis-factory workbooks.

171-300 PSYCHOLOGY PART ЗА A course of 60 lectures, 24 tutorials and 40 hours of practical work.

SYLLABUS

171-307 PERSONALITY INTEGRATION The concept of Integration. Co-ordination within and between persons and between the person and society.

171-320 SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES В (i)

Psychological and organizational theories of groups and their relation to personality variables. Integration disorganization and anomie. Types of groups and organizations. Their impact on the formation of social factors in the light of class, status, power, family, stratum, social roles, and bureaucracy. Examination of specific institutions, e.g. universities and hospitals, in the light of theoretical concepts.

387

Faculty of Arts

171-321 SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES B(ii) Theoretical models in experimental and social psychology.

171-333 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT

Defining the field. Conceptual models for behavioural development and change. Behaviour modification. Research tactics.

171-341 QUANTITATIVE METHODS В

Theory and practice of ability and trait measurement.

BOOKS

References will be available from the department of Psychology early in 1975.

EXAMINATION

Two papers at the end of the year or such other modes of examination as the board of examiners may deem fit. Satisfactory practical work reports and assignments during the year.

171-102 BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES PART 1

A course of two lectures per week with three hours per week practical and discussion classes throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The biological and social foundations of psychological enquiry. Patterns of individual and interactive behaviour. Contemporary psychological theories and their application.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Anderson J Durston B H et ai Study Methods, McGraw-Hill paperback 1969

Miller G A Psychology the Science of Mental Life, Pelican 1966

Prescribed textbooks:

A list of prescribed textbooks should be obtained from the department of Psychology.

EXAMINATION

Examinations will take place during and at the end of the year. Labora-tory and other practical work reports must be submitted at specified times.

171-203 BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES 2

Students wishing to enrol for this subject should have passed either Behavioural Studies 1 or Psychology 1. Behavioural Studies 2 is the second and terminal part of the Behavioural Studies sequence and does not constitute a prerequisite for third year courses in the department of Psychology. However, the sequence together with Political Sociology 3 (see details of subjects for the Political Science department) is an approved mixed major in the Faculty of Arts.

388

Psychology

COURSE DETAILS

Three 1-hour lectures and a discussion class per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

The course consists of two compulsory units and three optional units of which students must take two. The compulsory units are:

171-206 AFFECTIVE AND SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT

Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A.

171-223 INTERPRETATION OF SOCIAL RESEARCH

Methods for the investigation of contemporary social phenomena, includ-ing field experiments, surveys, ex post facto designs, unobtrusive measurement, analysis of social reforms; application to a variety of issues such as race, poverty, urbanization. The optional units are:

171-205 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT A

Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A.

171-208 LANGUAGE AND SOCIAL BEHAVIOUR

The study of language as a structured system; the functions of language in social settings; the relationship between verbal and non-verbal communication.

171-209 INFORMATION PROCESSING 2

Building on Information Processing 1 this unit covers the following topics: iconic storage, visual masking, visual information processing,

selective attention, theories of selective listening, expectancy and prepa-ratory set, habituation, attention and perception, vigilance.

BOOKS Unit 205 Baldwin A L Theories of Child Development, Wiley 1967 Unit 206 Danziger K Socialization, Penguin 1971 Unit 208 Green J Psycholinguistics, Penguin 1972

Robinson W P Language and Social Behaviour, Penguin 1972

Unit 209 Kahneman D Attention and Effort, Prentice-Hall 1972 Reed S K Psychological Processes in Pattern Recognition, Aca-

demic Press 1973 Unit 223 Swingle P G Social Psychology in Everyday Life, Penguin

1973

EXAMINATION Assessment will take place during and at the end of the year. Laboratory or other practical work reports must be submitted at specified times.

389

Faculty of Arts

HONOURS DEGREE

K. SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY

Requirements for admission to second year as provisional Honours can-didates and to third year (Final Honours) are stated below. Applications to depart from these requirements should be made in writing, through the Sub-Dean, to the chairman of the department of Psychology. The ten subjects required are to be taken in accordance with the follow-ing:

First Year. Psychology 1 and three other first year subjects as prescribed for the degree of Bachelor of Arts. Students intending to seek honours are advised to attend any special optional lectures. It is highly desirable that at least one of these subjects have a statistical, mathematical. or biological content. Students who have not taken Mathematics beyond 5th Form should seek advice at the end of the first year concerning vacation reading.

Second Year. Admission to the second year as provisional honours can-didates requires approval of the Faculty. A student should have obtained honours in Psychology 1 and, except with the permission of the chairman of the department, passes at least in the other three subjects. In the second year the provisional honours student in Psychology will normally study the following three subjects.

(i) 171-200 Psychology 2A (hurls). (ii) 171-260 Psychology 2 В (hons).

(iii) The second part of a major in a subject other than Psychology. This subject should be so selected that the student may complete a major in it if he does not gain admission to Final Honours in Psychology at the beginning of third year.

Third and Fourth Years. These two years comprise Final Honours in Psychology. To be considered for admission to this stage a student nor-mally should have obtained adequate honours in the courses of Psycho-logy 2A and Psychology 2B which together comprise provisional honours. During the third and fourth years the Final Honours student will study Psychology ЗА and units which together are equivalent to two further subjects. All students will take certain common core units, but some degree of specialization is provided through optional groups of units. Allocation (on application) to specialty groups will be determined by reference to the student's general record and the current availability of staff and laboratory resources. Evaluation of performance will be based on a thesis reporting substantial research, and on class papers and other means appropriate to the unit concerned.

COMBINED HONOURS COURSES

Combined Honours courses are not normally available.

171-100 PSYCHOLOGY 1

As for Psychology 1.

171-200 PSYCHOLOGY 2A (honours)

As for Psychology 2A (pass).

390

Psychology

171-260 PSYCHOLOGY 26 (HONS) A course of 48 lectures, 72 hours of practical work and 24 hours of tutorials.

SYLLABUS

171-212 NEUROPSYCHOLOGY A

Neurological mechanism of learning, memory, emotion, and motivation, sleep and arousal.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

•Williams Brain Damage and the Mind, Penguin 1973

EXAMINATION

During and at the end of the unit.

171-281 PERCEPTION A

Structure and function of perceptual sub-systems: vision, hearing, taste, smell, skin senses.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbook:

•Geldard F A The Human Senses, Wiley 1972

EXAMINATION

During and at the end of the unit.

171-263 QUANTITATIVE METHODS A(ii)

Design of experiments and methods of data analysis.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook:

•Edwards A L Experimental Design in Psychological Research, 4th ed Holt Rinehart & Winston 1972

Recommended for reference:

Campbell D T & Stanley J C Experimental and Quasi-Experimental Design for Research, Rand McNally 1966

Sokai R R & Roh1f F J Biometry, Freeman 1969 Winer R B ed Statistical Principles in Experimental Design, 2nd ed

McGraw-Hill 1971

EXAMINATION

During the unit.

171-265 HUMAN LEARNING A(ii) Topics will be chosen from discrimination and concept learning, proba-bility and rule learning, reasoning and problem solving, verbal learning, memory, language processing.

BOO К S

Prescribed textbook:

• К intsch W Learning Memory and Conceptual Processes, Wiley 1970

391

Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION After completion of the unit, before the end of the year.

171-266 SOCIAL RESEARCH METHODS Methods of obtaining, analysing and interpreting data from large and small samples.

EXAMINATION A research report after completion of the unit, but before the end of the year.

FINAL HONOURS

This consists of the following four sections:

1. PSYCHOLOGY ЭА (honours)

SYLLABUS

As for Psychology ЭА (pass).

EXAMINATION

As for Psychology 3A (pass). This subject will be examined in third year, as for pass students.

2. The following units each consisting of not less than 24 hours of class work, to be completed in either third or fourth year as advised by the department:

SYLLABUS

171-385 COGNITIVE PROCESSES

Problem solving and decision making, the structure of intelligence, concept formation end attainment, creativity, language and thought.

171-383 or 171-384 QUANTITATIVE METHODS C or D

C. Elements of multivariate analysis: a поп -mathematical introduc-tion. An elementary course in Fortran programming. (Alternative to Unit 384 Quantitative Methods D, which covers much the same ground, but is more advanced and requires some formal competence in mathematics.)

D. A fairly advanced treatment of multivariate methods of research, particularly factor analysis, and an elementary course in Fortran programming. It is expected that students have at least Higher School Certificate level mathematics.

171-388 THEORY IN PSYCHOLOGY A

Principal psychological concepts in their historical context. The development of psychology as a systematic enquiry. An analytical examination of some major theoretical systems, e.g. psycho-analytic theory, learning theory, and neurophyslological models of behaviour. The relationship between the methods and epistemo-logical foundations of these disciplines. Formalisation in psychol-ogy. Theories as deductive systems.

171-389 THEORY IN PSYCHOLOGY В

The logic of scientific concept formation in the natural and in the

392

Psychology

social sciences in so far as they are relevant to psychological theory. The role of artificial and natural language in psychological theory construction. The systematic analysis of the differences between structural and epistemological characteristics in a variety of psychological theories. Chomsky's conception of mind and language. The role of value concepts in psychological theories. Mentalistic concepts in behaviour theory. Brain function and Verstehen.

3. Six units to be selected from the list below in consultation with the staff of the Department, as an appropriate combination for the speciality group to which the student has been allocated on application.

171-383 Interaction in Groups 171-384 Psychology of Language 171-388 Information Processing 171-388 Cognitive Development B 171-389 Applied Personality Theory 171-370 Psycholinguistics 171-371 Perception B 171-372 Neuropsychology B 171-373 Human Performance 171-374 Psychophysics 171-378 Introduction to Simulation 171-377 Social Interaction Processes C 171-378 Introduction to Occupational Psychology 171-379 Interpersonal Processes 171-380 Models of Speech Production 171-381 Psychology of Religion 171-382 Theories of Personal Change 171-385 Assessment 171-388 Models of Data in Social Science 171-387 Analysis of Categorical Data 171-392 Reading Course 171-393 Communication and Specific Learning Disorders 171-394 Psychopathology 171-395 Mathematical Psychology 171-398 Psychology of Politics 171-397 Neuropsychology C

N.B. Some of the above units may not be available and others may be added, in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading, will be listed in the Department Manual before the end of the previous year. Numbers may have to be limited for any particular unit.

4. A Research Project (Unit 391), to be commenced during the middle of third year and completed by the middle of fourth year.

BOOKS These will be listed in the Department Manual.

EXAMINATION The examination of five of the required ten units comprising the com-pulsory and optional sections of the Final Honours course will be completed by the end of third year. The examination of the other five

393

Faculty of Arts

units and of the Research Project thesis will be completed by the end

of fourth year.

MASTER OF ARTS

171-801 K. SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY

1. All candidates are required to take part in a programme of seminars, lectures and laboratory work, and to submit a thesis based on ad-vanced research on an approved topic.

2. Candidates accepted for courses leading to the Master's degree in Clinical Psychology or Occupational Psychology are required to study for not less than two years, and must obtain professional ex-perience under approved supervision. All other candidates for the Master's degree are required to study for not less than one year full-time or an equivalent period part-time.

3. Applications for admission to a course for the Master's degree should be made on the appropriate form available from the Faculty Office. All intending students should consult the Department of Psychology and study the Departmental Manual of Graduate Studies in which full details of requirements will be found.

4. Three copies of each thesis ( А 4, typewritten, double-spaced) must be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University library. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar.

The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of candi-dature or, in the event of having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF RUSSIAN Chairman of Department: Mrs NINA CН RISTESEN, B.A. (Q'ld), M.A.

The University of Melbourne's department of Russian Language and Literature is the oldest in Australia. Degree courses began in 1946 and the department became fully independent in 1949. Three programmes leading to a University degree are offered:

(1) A three-year pass course in Russian Language and Literature.

(2) A four-year pure honours course in Russian Language and Literature.

(3) A four-year combined honours course (see p. 405).

The aim of the pass course in Russian is to give the students competence and fluency in the Russian language and to acquaint them with some aspects of Russian literature. The honours courses aim to provide students with a deeper knowledge of Russian language and literature, and/or to prepare them for post-graduate work in one of these fields, including the ability to write their

394

Russian

theses in Russian. Provision is made for the supervision of such post-graduate work. In addition to this the department offers a grade 1 course in Russian Literature and Society for students with no knowledge of Russian, the aim of which is to acquaint such students with the heritage of Russian culture. The course is recommended to all students of Russian.

COURSES OFFERED

First year

176-102 Russian 1A No prerequisite. This course is a prerequisite for 176-202.

176-101 Russian 1. This course assumes that students have passed in Russian at the Higher School Certificate examination. This course is a prerequisite for 176-201.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK

176-103 Russian Literature and Society. No prerequisite. All first year students are invited to consult with the chairman of the department before enrolling.

Second year

Ordinary and honours degree

176-201 Russian 2 (pass). Prerequisite: 176-101. 176-202 Russian 2A (pass half-course). Prerequisite: 176-102. This

course, together with 176-203, counts 1 1/z subjects and is a prerequisite for 176-301.

176-203 Russian 28 (pass). Prerequisite: 176-102. This course is a prerequisite for 176-301.

176-261 Russian 2C.

Third year

Ordinary degree

176-301 Russian 3 (pass). Prerequisite: 176-201 or 176-202 plus 176-203.

176-302 Russian 3A (pass half-course). Prerequisite: 176-202 plus 176-203. This course should be taken by the students who started at the 176-102 level.

Honours degree

176-361 Russian 3 Language (honours). 176-362 Russian 3 Literature (honours).

Fourth year

176-481 Russian 4 Language. 176-462 Russian 4 Literature.

176-102 RUSSIAN 1A

No prerequisite. A beginners' course of six classes per week, including individual language laboratory work throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

(1) Aural comprehension.

395

Faculty of Arts

(2) Reading comprehension and composition. (3) The fundamentals of grammar: morphology and syntax. (4) Translation from Russian and into Russian. (5) Practice In speaking, reading and writing, with stress on spoken

Russian.

BOOKS Dictionaries:

Akhmanova O S Russko-angliiskii slovař , Moskva, any ed after 1960 or Lapidus & Shevtsova A Russian-English Dictionary, any ed M ű llе r V K Anglo-Russkii slovař , Moskva, any ed after 1961 Avanesov i Ozhegov Russkoye literaturnoye proiznoshenie i udarenie,

Moskva 1960

Prescribed textbooks:

•Stilman G Stilman L Harkins W E Introductory Russian Grammar, Xerox College Publishing Lexington, Massachusetts Toronto

•Khavronina S A Russian in Exercises, 2nd ed Moscow Typescript material will be provided by the Department.

EXAMINATION

An oral examination of 15 minutes on part (5) of the syllabus and in addition, aural comprehension and dictation tests. Class work both oral and written, together with weekly assignments, will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination. Two 3-hour papers, the first on parts (2) and (3) of the syllabus, the second on part (4).

176-101 RUSSIAN 1

This course assumes that students have passed in Russian at the Higher School Certificate examination. A course of three lectures, tutorials and language laboratory sessions as detailed below. This course is offered for students who have passed the HSC examination (or equivalent) in Russian. Students are required to spend at least one hour per week in individual work In the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Language (5 hours per week during the first half of the year):

(a) A review of the fundamentals of grammar followed by an analysis of more complex grammatical phenomena (3 hours per week).

(b) Translation from Russian and into Russian (1 hour per week). (c) Conversation (1 hour per week).

Unit 2: Literature (5 hours per week during the second half of the year):

(a) Study of selected literary texts (4 hours per week). (b) Composition (1 hour per week).

Unit 3: Language Laboratory (1 hour per week throughout the year).

BOOKS

Dictionaries:

Wheeler M The Oxford Russian-English Dictionary, Oxford 1972

396

Russian

M ű ller V K English-Russian Dictionary, Moscow 1962 Avanesov & Ozhegov Russkoye literaturnoye proiznoshenie i udarenie,

Moscow 1960

Prescribed textbooks:

'Pushkin A S Povesti Belkina, any ed in Russian 'Turgenev I Asya, any ed in Russian Pulkina I M A Short Russian Reference Grammar, Moscow 1960 or Unbegaun B 0 Russian Grammar, OUP 1962 'Townsend C E Continuing with Russian, McGraw-Hill NY

EXAMINATION

An oral examination of 15 minutes each on Unit 1(c) and Unit 2(a) of the syllabus. Class work, both written and oral, together with weekly assignments, will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination. Two 3-hour papers, the first on Unit i(a) and (b) of the syllabus, the second on Unit 2(a) and (b).

176-103 RUSSIAN LITERATURE AND SOCIETY

No prerequisite. A terminal course of two lectures and one tutorial per week.

SYLLABUS

The principal aim of this course is to give students who have no Russian an opportunity to satisfy and develop the interest that Russian literature arouses in the Western world. All the texts are therefore studied in English. A second factor guiding the structure of the course is that Russian literature to an intense degree reflects the life and concern of the society that produced it: the course is therefore designed to allow the study of works of fiction (which form its backbone) to be supplemented by an understanding of the development of Russian life from the Kievan period to the Soviet era. Hence some time is given to Russia's pre-nineteenth century history, religious thought and art, while the political thought streams, movements and events of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries are studied in greater detail, though always in relation to the literature. Thue the course overall studies works of International significance in the context of the society which produced them, and invites the student to integrate the normally separate disciplines of national culture and politi-cal history — or, of literature and life. We offer this course so that students may, like Solzhenitsyn, "be en-couraged by a living feeling for world literature" which "is capable of helping the human race to understand itself properly . . ."

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Gogol Dead Souls, Penguin or Signet paperback Goncharov Oblomov, Penguin or Signet paperback Dostoevskii The Devils, Penguin Dostoevskii The House of the Dead, Penguin Tolstoy The Cossacks, The Death of Ivan llyich, Happy Ever After

(all in one volume), Penguin

397

Faculty of Arts

Tolstoy Anna Karenina, Penguin

Chekhov Plays, Penguin Chekhov Lady with a Lapdog, and other stories, Penguin

Gorkii My Childhood, Penguin

Sholokhov Quiet Flows the Don. Penguin or Signet paperback

Chernishevski What's to be Done?, Vintage paperback

Pasternak Doctor Zhivago, Fontana paperback Solzhenitsyn One Day in the Life of Ivan Denisovich, Penguin

Solzhenitsyn Cancer Ward, Penguin Solzhenitsyn Stories and Prose Poems 1973 Paustovsky Story of a Life, Harvill Press London

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour paper. Short papers to be prepared by students for tutorial discussions. Two essays on set topics (to be handed in at the end of first and second terms) will be taken into account in the grading of examination results.

176-201 RUSSIAN 2 (PASS)

Prerequisite: 176-101. A course of three lectures per week, with at least one tutorial class, throughout the year. Relevant materials are provided for use in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Language (4 hours per week during the second half of the year):

(a) Special problems of grammar, sentence structure and idio-matic expressions (2 hours per week).

(b) Translation into Russian and composition at an advanced level (1 hour per week).

(c) Practice in conversation (1 hour per week).

Unit 2: Literature (4 hours per week during the first half of the year):

Reading and study of set texts.

(a) Poetry (b) Lermontov (c) Chekhov

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Unbegaun B O Russian Grammar, Oxford 1972 or Pulkina I M A Shen Russian Reference Grammar, Moscow 1960 Borras & Christian Russian Syntax, Oxford 1963 •Lermontov M Geroi nashego vremeni, Bradda London 1961 •Obolensky D The Penguin Book of Russian Verse, Penguin 1962

•Chekhov A Chaika, Bradda London 1965

• Chekhov A Vishnevyi Sad, Bradda London 1967 Typescript material will be provided by the department.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, the first on Unit 1(a) and (b) of the syllabus, and the second on Unit 2(a), (b) and (c) of the syllabus. Oral tests and one essay during the year. 30 per cent of the final mark will comprise an

398

Russian

oral test of 15 minutes at the end of the year, class work and weekly assignments.

176-202 RUSSIAN 2A (HALF-COURSE)

Prerequisite: 176-102. A course of four classes during the second half of the year.

SYLLABUS

As for Unit 1 in 176-201 Russian 2 (Pass).

BOOKS

As for Unit 1 in 176-201.

EXAMINATION

As for Unit 1 in 176-203.

176-203 RUSSIAN 26 (PASS)

Prerequisite: 176-102. A course of lectures, tutorials and language laboratory sessions as for 176-101. Students are expected to spend at least one hour per week on individual work in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Language (5 hours per week during the first half of the year): (a) A review of the fundamentals of grammar followed by an

analysis of more complex grammatical phenomena (3 hours per week).

(b) Translation from Russian and into Russian (1 hour per week). (c) Conversation (1 hour per week).

Unit 2: Literature (5 hours per week during the second half of the year): (a) Study of selected literary texts (4 hours per week). (b) Composition (1 hour per week).

Unit 3: Language Laboratory (1 hour per week throughout the year).

BOOKS

Dictionaries:

Wheeler M The Oxford Russian-English Dictionary, Oxford 1972 М üllег V K English-Russian Dictionary, Moscow 1962 Avanesov & Ozhegov Russkoye literaturnoye proiznoshenie i udarenie,

Moscow 1960

Prescribed textbooks:

•Pushkin A S Povesti Belkina, any ed in Russian •Turgenev I Asya, any ed in Russian Pulkina I M A Short Russian Reference Grammar, Moscow 1960 or Unbegaun B 0 Russian Grammar, OUP 1962 •Townsend C E Continuing with Russian, McGraw-Hill New York

EXAMINATION

An oral examination of 15 minutes each on Unit 1(c) and Unit 2(a) of the syllabus. Class work, both written and oral, together with weekly assignments, will be taken into account in determining the results of

399

Faculty of Arts

the examination. Two 3-hour papers, the first on Unit 1(a) and (b) of the syllabus, the second on Unit 2(a) and (b).

176-261 RUSSIAN 2C A course of lectures and tutorials as for the ordinary degree together with the following requirements: For pure honours students — Unit 1 and Unit 2 as set out below. For combined honours students — Unit 1 or Unit 2. This course must be taken by all honours students. Pass students who have passed 176-101 (Russian 1) or who have already passed in 176-201 (Russian 2) may also choose this subject to intensify their studies in Russian. Together with 176-201 (Russian 2) and another grade 2 subject, this will satisfy the Faculty's requirements for the second year of the pass course.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Language (2 hours per week throughout the year):

(a) Old Church Slavonic. (b) Russian Phonology. (c) Special Problems of Grammar.

Unit 2: Literature (2 hours per week throughout the year):

(a) Study of prescribed texts from Russian literature and literary criticism in Russian.

(b) Practice in the writing of literary criticism in Russian.

BOOKS

For Unit 1:

Nandris G Old Church Slavonic, Part I of Handbook of OCS, London 1960

Auty R Texts and Glossary, Part it of Handbook of OCS, London 1965 Jones D & Ward D The Phonetics of Russian, CUP 1969 For Unit 2:

Dostoevskii F Bednye liudl, any ed Dostoevskii F Prestuplenie i nakazanie, any ed Obolensky D Penguin Book of Russian Verse, 1966 Chekhov A Selected Stories

WRITTEN WORK

Candidates will be required to submit two essays in Russian during the year.

EXAMINATION

Unit 1: One 3-hour paper. Class work and weekly assignments will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination. Oral test.

Unit 2: One 3-hour paper. Oral test.

176-301 RUSSIAN 3 (PASS) Prerequisite: 176-201 or 176-202 plus 176-203. A course of four lectures per week with two tutorial classes throughout the year. Students are

400

Russian

expected to spend at least one hour per week on individual work in the language laboratory:

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Language:

(a) Grammar. (b) Translation from English into Russian. (c) Composition.

Unit 2: Literature:

(a) Pushkin. (b) Tolstoy.

BOOKS

• Pushkin A . Evgeny Onegin, Bradda London 1962 or any other ed in Russian

•Tolstoy L Viina 1 mir, any ed in Russian Henry P Manual of Modern Russian Prose Composition, University Press

London 1963 Unbegaun B O Russian Grammar, Oxford 1962 Borras & Christian Russian Syntax, Oxford 1963 Pulkina I M A Short Russian Reference Grammar, Moscow 1970 • Vocabulary to 'Evgeny Onegin', Bradda London 1964

EXAMINATION

Three 3-hour papers. First paper: unseen translation from and into Rus-sian. Second paper: Pushkin. Third paper: Tolstoy. An oral examination. An essay during the year.

176-302 RUSSIAN ЗА (HALF-COURSE)

Prerequisites: 176-202 plus 176-203. A course of four classes per week during the first half of the year.

SYLLABUS

As for Unit 2 in 176-201, Russian 2 (Pass).

BOOKS

As for Unit 2 in 176-201.

EXAMINATION

As for Unit 2 in 178-201.

HONOURS DEGREE M. SCHOOL OF RUSSIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Russian Language and Literature comprises the following subjects: Russian 1 or Russian 1A Russian 2 Language and Russian 2 Literature Russian 3 (see Information below) Russian 4 (see information below) It Is recommended that students should acquire some knowledge of

401

Faculty of Arts

modern history, in particular Russian history of the 19th century, and of European philosophy, especially the French philosophers of the 18th and the German philosophers of the 19th centuries.

2. First (preliminary) year

In their first year, candidates who intend to enter the honours school should take Russian 1, or Russian 1A, and three additional subjects in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree. They are strongly recommended to do the optional additional work In Russian 1.

3. Second year

In their second year, candidates will take 176-261 Russian 2C Unit 1 and/or Unit 2, and the remaining additional grade 2 subjects.

4. Third and fourth years

In their third and fourth year students will make various choices from a block of common subjects. Third year students will take two of the options offered in that year, and fourth year students, three.

The following subjects will be offered:

A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics (2 hours per week) В . History of the Russian Language (2 hours per week) C. Comparative Slavonic Philology (2 hours per week) D. Advanced Translation into Russian (2 hours per week) E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian literature (2 hours per week) F. Nineteenth century — first half (2 hours per week) G. Nineteenth century — second half (2 hours per week) H, Contemporary Soviet Literature (2 hours per week) 1975 and (every alternate year)

Russian 3: any two of A, C, E, G. Russian 4: any three of A, C, E, G.

1976 (and every alternate year) Russian З : any two of В , D. F, H. Russian 4: any three of В , D, F, H.

Either A or D must be taken in one of the years.

5. Final examination

The final examination in the school of Russian Language and Literature will be held in two parts, part 1 in the third year and part 2 in the fourth year, and will comprise one 3-hour paper on each option studied in that year. In addition, students will be examined by oral examination in Russian, weekly assignments and class tests. Third year students will be required to submit an essay or equivalent in each option. Fourth year students will be required to submit early in third term a thesis of not more than 10,000 words on an approved literary topic. The Interdepartmental Programme in Eighteenth Century Studies will be accepted in lieu of one of the seminars in the final year of both the Pure and Combined Honours courses.

Vacation reading

Suggestions for reading for the essay will be posted on the departmental noticeboard. RUSSIAN in combined courses. See p. 405 below.

402

Russian

176-361 RUSSIAN 3 LANGUAGE (HONOURS)

A course of lectures as for ordinary degree, together with the required options and additional tutorial assistance throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

As for the ordinary degree, plus:

A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics (offered in 1975 and every alternate year).

В . History of the Russian Language (offered in 1976 and every alternate year).

C. Comparative Slavonic Philology (offered in 1975 and every alternate year).

D. Advanced Translation into Russian (offered in 1976 and every alter-nate year).

BOOKS

A. Advanced Stylistics:

Belevitskaia V S et al Exercises in Russian Syntax, 1 The simple sentence 2 Compound & Complex Sentences FLPH Moscow

8. History of the Russian Language:

Matthews W K Russian Historical Grammar, Athlone Press London 1960

Ivanov V lstoricheskaya grammatica russkogo yazyka, Moscow 1964 Gudzii N K Khrestomatiia po drevnei russkoi literature, any ed Moscow or Stokes A D Anthology of Early Russian Literature, Bradda 1968 C. Comparative Slavonic Philology: de Bray R G A Guide to the Slavonic Languages, 2nd ed Dent London

1969 D. Advanced Translation into Russian: Material to be provided by the department.

EXAMINATION

(Final Examination Part I)

As for Russian 3 (Pass) and in addition one 3-hour paper on part A or D and on part B or C of the syllabus, depending on the year. Essay or its equivalent in Russian. Oral test of 30 minutes.

176-362 RUSSIAN 3 LITERATURE (HONOURS)

A course of lectures as for ordinary degree, together with the required options and additional tutorial assistance throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

As for ordinary degree, plue: E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian Literature

(1975 and every alternate year) F. Nineteenth century—first half (1975 and every alternate year) G. Nineteenth century—second half (1976 and every alternate year) H. Contemporary Soviet Literature (1976 and every alternate year)

BOOKS

E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian Literature:

403

Faculty of Arts

Gudzii N Khrestomatiia po drevnei russkoi literature, Moscow (avail-abl a from the department)

Kokarov Khrestomatiia po russkoi literature 18 veka, Moscow 1952 (available from the department)

Stokes A D Anthology of Early Russian Literature, Bradda 1968

F. Nineteenth century — first half:

Pushkin A Polmoe sobranie sochinenii, any ed in Russian Griboedov A Gore of uma, any ed in Russian Gogol N Revizor, any ed in Russian Lermontov M Sochineniia v chetyrekh tomakh, any ed in Russian Tlutchev F G Polnee sobraniie stikhotvorenii, any ed in Russian G. Nineteenth century — second half:

Dostoevskii F Bratia Karamazovy, any ed in Russian Dostoevskii F Dnevnik pisatelia, any ed in Russian Ostrovsky A Groza, any ed in Russian Nekrasov N A Sochineniia v trekh tomakh, Moskva 1963 Tolstoy L Kazaki, Sevastopolski Rasskazy, any eds in Russian Tolstoy L Chto tekoa isskustvol (available from department) Chekhov A lzbrannyie proizvedenia, Bradda books (available from

department)

H. Contemporary Soviet Literature: Blok A Polnoie sobranie stikhotvorenii, any ed in Russian Esenin S Sobranie sochinenii v piati tomakh, Moskva 1966 Akhmatova A Selected Verse, Interlanguage Literary Associates 1965 Pasternak B Stikhotvoienls I pieTy, Moskva Leningrad 1965 Solzhenitsyn A August 1914, Godley Head 1972 Material to be provided by department.

EXAMINATION

(Final examination, part I.)

As for Russian 3 (pass) and in addition, one 3-hour paper on part E or H, and on part F or G of the syllabus, depending on the year. Essay in Russian. Oral test of 30 minutes.

176-461 RUSSIAN 4 LANGUAGE (HONOURS)

A course of lectures and tutorial assistance throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics (1975 and every alternate year) В . Comparative Slavonic Philology (1975 and every alternate year) C. History of the Russian Language (1976 and every alternate year) D. Advanced Translation into Russian (1976 and every alternate year)

BOOKS

As for 176-361.

EXAMINATION

(Final Examination Part 2.) Two 3-hour papers, the first on part A or part D of the syllabus, and the second on part В or C of the syllabus, depending on the year. Oral

404

Russian

test of 30 minutes. A thesis in Russian (or equivalent) to be submitted on or before the last day of second term.

176-462 RUSSIAN 4 LITERATURE (HONOURS)

A course of lectures and tutorial assistance throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian Literature (1975 and every alternate year)

F. Nineteenth century — first half (1975 and every alternate year) G. Nineteenth century — second half (1976 and every alternate year) H. Contemporary Soviet Literature (1976 and every alternate year)

BOOKS

As for 176-362.

EXAMINATION

(Final examination, part 2.)

Two 3-hour papers, the first on part E or H of the syllabus, the second on part F or G of the syllabus, depending on the year. A thesis in Russian is to be submitted on or before the last day of second term. Oral test of 30 minutes.

RUSSIAN IN COMBINED COURSES

For candidates taking Russian in a combined Honours course the required Russian subjects are Russian 1 (or Russian 1A); Russian 2 (or Russian 2A plus Russian 2B) together with one of the Russian 2 Honours subjects; Russian 3 together with one of the Russian 3 Honours options offered in that year; two of the Russian 4 Honours options offered in that year.

GENERAL PATTERN OF RUSSIAN IN COMBINED COURSES: First year Russian 1

or Russian 1A

Second year Russian 2 or Russian 2A plus Russian 28 plus:

Russian 2C—Unit 1 or Unit 2.

Third year Russian 3, plus one of the following: 1975 (and every alternate year) A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics C. Comparative Slavonic Philology E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian literature G. Nineteenth century Russian literature — first half 1976 (and every alternate year) B. History of the Russian Language D. Advanced Translation into Russian F. Nineteenth century Russian literature — second half H. Contemporary Soviet literature

Fourth year Two of the options listed above.

405

Faculty of Arts

FINAL EXAMINATION The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, and part 2 at the end of fourth year.

Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers:

As for Russian 3 (Pass) and in addition, one 3-hour paper on the options chosen for Russian З (Honours) in that year.

В . (a) Essay or its equivalent In Russian. (b) Oral test of 30 minutes.

Part 2

A. Formal Examination Papers:

Two 3-hour papers on the options chosen for Russian 4 (Ions) in that year.

В . (a) Oral test of 30 minutes.

(b) A thesis on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments, based on independent research and not exceed-ing 12,000 words, will be required to be handed in at the beginning of third term.

MASTER OF ARTS

176-601 M. SCHOOL OF RUSSIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in Russian on an approved subject, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised of a suitable course of reading and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research.

An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and oral examination on subjects approved by the head of the department. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS Chairman of Department: Professor E. J. WILLIAMS, B.Com. (Tas.), D.Sc., F.I.M.S., M.I.S.I.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

406

Statistics

Statistics 100 does not form part of any major. Statistics 111 is a short introductory course which, although not a compulsory prerequisite, is designed to prepare students for Statistics at 200 level. For combinations of Statistics 200 with Mathematics, Logic and History and Philosophy of Science. (See pp. 43-44.)

The prerequisite for Statistics 200 is Mathematics 1A and for Statistics 300 it is Mathematics 2A.

ENROLMENT

Students enrolling for subjects and/or units in Statistics must consult the Assistant to the Dean of Science as well as the Sub-Dean of Arts.

619-100 STATISTICS 100

SYLLABUS

Three units of equal value.

Units may be taken individually.•

N.B. Credit cannot be given for Statistics 100 and 200. Statistics 100 does not form part of a major.

619-101 STATISTICS

Descriptive statistics, probability and distributions: Sixteen lectures and 16 hours of combined tutorial and practical work.

SYLLABUS

An elementary presentation of statistical logic and techniques as ap-plied to problems of science and industry, illustrated by the use of clinical, field and laboratory data. Description of sample data by means of tables, graphs and simple arithmetic measures. Elements of proba-bility. Random variables and probability distributions: binomial, Poisson, normal. Distribution of the sample mean; use of the central limit theorem.

819-102 STATISTICS

Inference: Sixteen lectures and 16 hours of combined tutorial and practical work.

SYLLABUS

Sampling methods, populations, parameters. Estimation and hypothesis testing. Applications of normal t and chi-square distributions, distribution-free methods.

819-103 STATISTICS Design and analysis of experiments: Sixteen lectures and 16 hours of combined tutorial and practical work.

SYLLABUS

Linear regression and correlation. Elements of the design and analysis of experiments. One and two-way classification, Latin squares, factorial designs. Use of the F-distribution.

• Arts students must enrol for 3 units. Credit for the subject will be given only on completion of these three units.

407

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Borel E Probabilities and Life, Dover Wallis W A & Roberts H V The Nature of Statistics, A Free Press paper-

back Huff D How to Lie with Statistics, Gollancz

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Wonnacott T H & R J Introductory Statistics, 2nd edition (1972), Wiley

(c) Recommended for reference:

A list of books recommended for reference will be provided at the first lecture.

EXAMINATION

Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. Can-didates must also satisfactorily complete the practical work in each unit.

619-111 INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS Twenty-four lectures and 24 hours of tutorial and practical work.

SYLLABUS

Samples and descriptive statistics leading to random variables and proba-bility distributions. Normal distributions; the central limit theorem. Inference on parameters of a normal population; use of t, X2 and F distributions. Comparison of two normal populations. One-way analysis of variance. X2 goodness-of-fit tests. Linear regression.

BOOKS

The lecturer will recommend suitable textbooks at the first lecture.

EXAMINATION

Unit examination will be held at a time specified during the year.

619-200 STATISTICS 200 SYLLABUS

Three units, details of which are given below. Students not intending to major in Statistics may take individual units.t

819-201 STATISTICS

Probability and distribution theory, and 24 tutorial practice-class hours.

SYLLABUS Event spaces, assigning probabilities to events, probabilities of compound events. Random variables and probability distributions: expectation,

t Arts students must enrol for 3 units. Credit for the subject will be given only on completion of these 3 units.

408

Statistics

generating functions. Bernoulli trials, Poisson process, random sampling. Standard distributions and some of their applications.

619-202 STATISTICS

Statistical inference: 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours.

SYLLABUS

Descriptive statistics. Estimation of parameters of distributions: con-sistency, unbiasedness and efficiency of estimators. Testing of hypo-theses concerning parameters: critical region, size and power of tests. Details of some commonly occurring statistical tests, including analysis of variance.

619-203 STATISTICS

Design and analysis of experiments, regression: 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours.

SYLLABUS

The method of least squares: the general linear model and its applica-tions in regression problems, including the analysis of experiments. Basic principles in the design of experiments such as randomization and formation of blocks.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks: None of the currently available textbooks Is ade-quate for the entire course and students are advised to consult the lecturer about books which are suitable for Individual units.

Recommended for reference:

Larson H J Introduction to Probability Theory and Statistical Inference, Wiley

EXAMINATION

Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. A practical examination will be held in third term.

619-300 STATISTICS 300 (PASS COURSE) sУ LLАВ US

Six of the units listed below.

Three units, 301, 303, 305 are compulsory; in addition three of the re-maining units must be completed for the full course. Students not major-ing in Statistics may take individual units.'

619-301 STATISTICS Distribution theory A: 12 lectures, approximately 8 tutorials and б practice hours.

SYLLABUS Basic methods In probability and distribution theory for discrete and con-tinuous sample spaces. Distribution functions, generating functions, characteristic functions. Elementary limit laws.

•Arts students must enrol for a units. Credit for the subject will be given only on completion of these е units.

409

Faculty of Arts

619-302 STATISTICS Distribution theory В : 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

Detailed treatment of various special distributions and their interrelations.

619-303 STATISTICS

Statistical inference A: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 prac-tice hours.

SYLLABUS

Criteria for estimators; consistency, sufficient statistics, unbiased estima-tion. Criteria for tests of hypotheses.

619-304 STATISTICS

Statistical inference B: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 prac-tice hours.

SYLLABUS

Maximum likelihood estimators and their asymptotic properties. Com-parison of methods of estimation. Sufficiency and exponential families of distribution. Sequential analysis. Conditioned inference.

619-305 STATISTICS

Analysis of variance: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

General least squares theory of estimation and hypothesis testing. Ap-plication to one and two-way classifications. Mixed and random effects models.

619-306 STATISTICS

Introductory stochastic processes: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

The simplest Markov chain in discrete and continuous time. Poisson. birth, branching processes. Classification of discrete Markov chains, finite Markov chains, limiting distributions.

619-307 STATISTICS

Design and analysis of experiments: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

Randomization, randomized block and Latin Square designs. Balanced in-complete block designs and Youden Squares. Factorial and quasi-factorial designs. Analysis of experiments with and without recovery of Interblock information.

619-308 STATISTICS Regression analysis: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

410

Statistics

SYLLABUS

Application of least squares theory to multiple regression, orthogonal polynomials, analysis of covariance, discriminant analysis.

619-309 STATISTICS

Sample surveys: 12 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

Simple random sampling, cluster sampling, stratified sampling and other special methods.

619-310 STATISTICS

Distribution-free methods: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

Distribution-free estimation, for example, estimation of moments. Tests based on randomization. A survey of some special distribution-free methods.

619-311 STATISTICS

Decision theory: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

Loss functions as a basis for making decisions. Bayes and minimax principles for the choice of a decision rule. Statistical inference from e decision-theoretic viewpoint.

619-312 STATISTICS

Applied stochastic processes: 12 lectures, approximately 6 tutorial and 6 practice hours.

SYLLABUS

Simple application of the theory contained in 619-306 Statistics.

61 9-31 3 STATISTICS

Project: The study of a special topic and presentation of a written report.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Cox D R Planning of Experiments, Wiley Lindley D V Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Vols 1 and Il

CUP

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Feller W An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol I Wiley

Rao C R Linear Statistical Inference and Its Applications, Wiley

(c) Recommended for reference on special topics:

Cochran W G Sampling Techniques, Wiley Draper N R & Smith H Applied Regression Analysis, Wiley

411

Faculty of Arts

Ferguson T H Mathematical Statistics: A Decision Theoretic Approach, Academic Press

Fraser D A S Non-Parametric Statistics, Wiley Gass S 1 Linear Programming, McGraw-Hill Heathcote C R Probability: Elements of the Mathematical Theory,

Unwin Karlin S A First Course in Stochastic Processes, Academic Press Kempthorne O The Design and Analysis of Experiments, Wiley Peng K C The Design and Analysis of Scientific Experiments, Addison-

Wesley Raj D Sampling Theory, McGraw-Hill Wetherill G B Sequentia1 Methods in Statistics, Methuen Williams E J Regression Analysis, Wiley

(d) Recommended tables:

Fisher R A & Yates F Statistical Tables, Oliver & Boyd Pearson E S & Hartley H O Biometrika Tables for Statisticians, Vol I

CUP

EXAMINATION

Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. The practical work done during the course will be taken into account in assessing the results of these examinations.

HONOURS DEGREE

L. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Mathematical Statistics comprises the following subjects:

(a) Mathematics 1A, 2A, Э A and units of Mathematics 4 to be approved by the head of the department.

(b) Statistics 200, 300, 400 levels. (c) Three first-year subjects approved by the head of the department. in-

cluding normally at least one of Biology, Chemistry part 1, Physics part 1 or Psychology part 1, with Mathematics 1B, Economics A, Geography part 1, or Epistemology, Logic and Methodology as alternatives.

(d) Mathematics 28, Economics 2B, Psychology pert 2A, or Informa-tion Science 200, or another grade 2 subject approved by the head of the department.

The details of subjects for Mathematics are set out under the school of Mathematics. The details of subjects for Statistics 200 are as for the ordinary degree; those for Statistics 300, and those for Statistics 400 are as set out below. A student proposing to enter the honours school of Mathematical Statis-tics should normally have obtained honours in Pure Mathematics and in Calculus and Applied Mathematics at the Higher School Certificate ex-amination. Candidates who have not this qualification are advised to consult the chairmen of the departments of Mathematics and Statistics be-fore they enter. 2. In their first year, candidates who intend to enter the honours school will take the course in Mathematics 1A, and three subjects as listed in (C).

412

Statistics

Admission to the second and higher years of the honours school must be approved by the faculty; candidates should make application as soon as possible after the examination results of the first year are published. In their second year, candidates will take the courses in Mathematics 2A, Statistics 200, and one subject listed in (d). In their third year, candidates will take the courses in Mathematics З A, option (i) and Statistics 300. In their fourth year, candidates will take Statistics 400 together with a number of units from Mathematics 4 approved by the department of Statistics. They will also carry out, under direction, a practical project and the study of a special topic, involving the reading and collation of the relevant literature, and will present a thesis embodying this work at the beginning of the third term.

619-360 STATISTICS 300 (HONOURS COURSE) [B.A.(HONS)] sYLwВ Us

Seven of the units listed for the pass course, 301, 303, 305 being com-pulsory. 306 should be taken by students intending to take 400 level units. In addition a special project must be undertaken, and a written report of this work must be presented. The report will be given the same weight as any other 300 level unit.

BOOKS

As for pass course.

EXAMINATION

As for pass course.

619-460 STATISTICS 400 [B.A. (HONS)] A course of approximately 80 lectures with tutorial and practice classes throughout the year, together with preparation of the thesis referred to in the section 'School of Mathematical Statistics'. Students will also be given a practical project.

SYLLABUS

A selection, subject to departmental approval, of seven units from those listed below and from Statistics 300 units not previously taken by the candidate.

619-401 Statistics Distribution theory C 619-402 Advanced probability 619-403 Multivariate Analysis 619-404 Stochastic processes A 619-405 " Stochastic processes В 619-406 Queues and storage 619-407 Stochastic processes in biology 619-408 Time series analysis 619-409 Information theory

Each of the above units will comprise about 12 lectures.

413

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Students will be advised about recommended books. Reference will also be made to certain articles in journals.

EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year.

MASTER OF ARTS

619-611 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS

Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis on an approved sub-ject, in which they will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Candidates must also pass a test in two of the following languages to the satisfaction of the head of the department concerned: French, Ger-man, Russian. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time can-didates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his can-didature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commence-ment of his candidature.

SCIENCE SUBJECTS Certain Science subjects, viz: Physics (Arts), Chemistry 1, Biology, and Geology, may be taken as one year courses in the faculty of Arts.

640-012 Physics (Arts) is a terminal course and is consequently a suit-abl a subject for Arts students who wish to study one Science subject. Any Arts student who may possibly went to complete a B.Sc. and study Physics for more than one year is advised to consult the sub-dean of the faculty of Science; provided the student is sufficiently qualified, permission may be granted to proceed to the normal first-year course in Physics.

600-016 ASPECTS OF CONTEMPORARY BIOLOGY (Department of Botany, Genetics and Zoology; co-ordinator: Dr D. M. Calder)

An 8-point course of seven hours per week throughout the academic year, designed to develop an objective understanding of the living world; primarily for students who do not intend further study in the life sciences.

SYLLABUS The fundamental concepts of biology as they relate to man and our modern world. Biological diversity and classification; ecology, the inter-

414

Science Subjects

relationships and interdependence or organisms, food chains, food webs, ecological energetics and the nature of ecosystems, geochemical cycles. The structure and function of plants and animals, growth and develop-ment of organisms; reproduction, heredity and evolution; the dynamics of populations with particular reference to man. The chemical and structural basis of life, cell energetics; the origin of life. The physical and cultural evolution of man. Ecosystem management, pollution and environmental quality; the biology of food production within an eco-logical context, the cycling of renewable and non-renewable resources.

TEACHING

Formal lectures will be kept to a minimum and emphasis will be placed on group discussions. Instead of formal laboratory classes each week students will undertake a three-hour programme of independent instruc-tion in the learning laboratory, which will be set up with carrels, displays and appropriate biological material. Some of the formal time may be spent in the field and there will be at least two one-day excursions.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference:

Ehrlich P R Holm R W & Soule M E Introductory Biology, McGraw-Hill 1973

Other references will be given during the year.

EXAMINATIONS

One 3-hour written paper at the end of the year. In addition, assignments and excursion reports will be required and short tests may also be given to assess performance in the subject.

600-002 BIOLOGY•

A course of three lectures per week with laboratory work and field excur-alois during the year. A knowledge of Biology, Chemistry and Physics to Higher School Certificate standard is assumed; students who have not studied Biology for Higher School Certificate are advised to study the following sections in Biological Science — The Web of Life, 1, 2, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 11. (Other books recommended for preliminary reading are given below —see under Books.) It Is intended to allocate students who have passed Higher School Certificate Biology to one lecture group.

SYLLABUS An introduction to the living world; plant and animal diversity. The cell as the basic unit of life; structure and fine-structure of plant and animal cells; mitosis and meiosis. Growth, morphology and physiology of flowering plants and vertebrates. Behaviour responses of plants and animals — nervous and hormonal control. Photosynthesis, respiration and the flow of energy in biological systems. Plant and animal reproduction, embryology and development. Structure, life-history endbiological significance of selected invertebrates and non-flowering plants emphasizing the increasing complexity of the organism, the increasing adaptation to the terrestrial environment and the associated changes in life-cycles. Modes of nutrition and the significance

•This Is the subject 600-101, however Arts students are to use the code number 800-002.

415

Faculty of Arts

of heterotrophic plants in disease and decay and the cycling of carbon and nitrogen. Introduction to population genetics; the population as a biological unit, its structure and regulation. The community and interaction of populations. Environmental biology. Variation and evolution, "family" genetics and natural selection.

PRACTICAL WORK Three hours formal laboratory work per week. A further one hour per week will be required for demonstrations. Half-day and whole-day field excursions may be held. Students must provide themselves with an approved microscope, razor, dissecting instruments and laboratory drawing books, a number of micro-scope slides, coverslips and a hand lens (x10). Microscopes are normally hired from the laboratory in the Redmond Barry Building. Do not purchase any equipment until you have discussed your requirements with a staff member from the Biology laboratory.

ADDITIONAL FACILITIES

Students are advised to attend weekly tutorials. Self teaching carrels equipped for individual study are also available. From time to time these carrels will be used instead of demonstration work.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Bold H C The Plant Kingdom, 3rd ed Prentice-Hall 1970 Hanson E D Animal Diversity, 3rd ed Prentice-Hall 1972 Swanson C P The Cell, 3rd ed Prentice-Hall 1969

(b) Prescribed textbook: (c) Recommended for reference: Griffin D R Animal Structure and Function, Holt Rinehart & Winston

1962 Levine R P Genetics, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1962 Lehninger A L Bioenergetics, Benjamin 1965 McLuckie J & McKee H S Australian and New Zealand Botany, Associ-

ated General Publications 1954 Schmidt-Nielsen K Animal Physiology, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1964 Simpson C G and Beck W S Life, 2nd ed Routledge & Kegan Paul 1965 Stebbins G L Processes of Organic Evolution, Prentice-Hall 1966 Steward F C About Plants: Topics In Plant Biology, Addison-Wesley

1966 Sussman M Animal Growth and Development, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall

1964 Torrey J G Development in Flowering Plants, Macmillan 1967

EXAMINATIONS Three theory papers, one in each of the Science Faculty examination periods. Practical examinations will also be held during these examina-tion periods. The practical work of each student is assessed continuously throughout the year and is taken into account, along with all examination results, In compiling the final mark. Field excursions and examinations may be held on Saturdays.

416

Science Subjects

610-101 CHEMISTRY PART 1

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week, together with laboratory work throughout the year. A preliminary standard equivalent to Higher School Certificate Chemistry will be assumed.

SYLLABUS

(i) Physical Chemistry

Gases and Liquids Qualitative treatment of the kinetic theory of gases. Deviations from ideal gas behaviour: van der Waals and viriai equations. Liquefaction, critical phenomena. Phase equilibria in one-component systems, phase diagrams, metastable phases. Clausius-Clapeyron equation.

Liquid-vapour two-component systems: ideal and non-ideal solutions, distillation, lever rule.

Competing Equilibria

Experimental methods of analysis in systems at equilibrium: spectro-photometry, conductimetry, potentlometry. Acid-base equilibria: buffer solutions, titration curves, indicators. Solubility of solids in acid-base systems.

Electrochemistry

Conductance and its measurement. Ionic conductances. Determination of ionic concentrations, applications to equilibrium constant determination. Reversible cells: emf measurements, types of half-cell, Nernst equation. Use of cells in chemical analysis and equilibrium constant determination. Cells as sources of energy: fuel cells, storage batteries.

Thermodynamics

First law: heat and work; calorimetry; functions of state, U and H. Heat capacity. Standard thermodynamic quantities and their tabulation: enthalpies of formation of pure substances and solutes. Free energy and second law. Direction of spontaneous chemical and physical changes, reversibility and maximum work. Standard free energies of formation and their application in calculation of equilibrium constants and maximum cell emfs. Entropy and its definition. Entropy changes In chemical and physical processes. Standard entropy changes. Molecular interpretation of entropy. Variation of equilibrium constant with temperature.

Kinetics Measurement of reaction rate in homogeneous and heterogenous systems. Rate laws. Effects of temperature, catalysis, and radiation. Simple col-lision model and reaction mechanism.

(ii) Inorganic Chemistry Atomic structure and the theory of valency: electrovalent, covalent, co-ordinate hydrogen, metallic and van der Waals bonding. Structure of solids: influence of bond type on chemical and physical properties and type of structure. Introduction to co-ordination chemistry: nature of complex compounds, Werner's original experiments, isomerism and stereo-chemistry of com-

417 0

Faculty of Arts

р 1ех compounds, typical reactions, elementary approach to bonding, practical applications.

(iii) Organic Chemistry

The scope of organic chemistry. Bonding, structure and elementary stereo-chemistry of carbon compounds. An outline of the chemistry of hydrocarbons and of the major groups of mono-functional compounds in terms of molecular structure and elemen-tary electronic theory.

LABORATORY WORK

Three hours per week, throughout the year, illustrating the principles of inorganic, physical and organic chemistry together with exercises in quantitative and qualitative analysis. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry building.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Pauling L General Chemistry, Freeman Stranks D R et al Chemistry: A Structural View, 2nd ed MUP 1970

The lectures in Chemistry 1 will be based on the assumption that all students have read the textbook by Stranks et a1.

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Bell C F and Lott K A K Modern Approach to Inorganic Chemistry, Butterworth

De Puy C and Rinehart K Introduction to Organic Chemistry, Wiley 1968 Departmental Publications. Experiments in Physical Chemistry. Experi-

ments in Organic Chemistry. Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory Manual. 1975 ed. (These laboratory handbooks are available only from the Chemistry School.)

'Aylward G H & Findlay T J V eds S I Chemical Data, 2nd ed Wiley 1974

(c) Recommended for reference:

Mahan B H University Chemistry, Addison-Wesley Moore W J Physical Chemistry, 5th ed Longmans 1972 Barrow G M Physical Chemistry, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1973 Addison W E Structural Principles in Inorganic Compounds, Longmans Basolo F and Johnson R Co-ordination chemistry, Benjamin 1964 Douglas B E and McDaniel D H Concepts and Models of Inorganic

Chemistry, Blaisdell 1965 Companion A L Chemical Bonding, McGraw-Hill Gould E S Inorganic Reactions and Structure, 2nd ed Holt Cartmell E and Fowles G W A Valency and Molecular Structure, 3rd ed

Butterworth Harvey K B and Porter G B Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry,

Addison-Wesley Brown R D and O'Donnell T A Manual of Elementary Practical

Chemistry, 3rd ed MUP Morrison R T and Boyd R N Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Allyn & Bacon

1966 Allinger N L and Allinger J Structures of Organic Molecules, Prentice-

Hall 1965

418

Science Subjects

Saunders W H Ionic Aliphatic Reactions, Prentice-Hall 1965 Tedder J M and Nechvatal A Basic Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Wiley

1968 Sykes P A Guidebook to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed

Longmans 1965

EXAMINATION

In Physical Chemistry there will be three written assignments during the course of the year, performance in which will be taken into account in assessing the final result. These assignments account for one-third of the total mark for Physical Chemistry. There will also be three hours of written examination to be held in the Science faculty exam weeks or at the end of the year. In Organic and Inorganic Chemistry there will be assignments and tests throughout the course and these will be taken into account in determining the candidate's success in the year's work. The final examination will consist of one 2-hour written paper in Inorganic Chemistry, and one 2-hour written paper in Organic Chemistry.

626-003 GEOLOGY 100 626-101 THE THIRD PLANET

A course of 24 lectures, 24 hours practical work and field excursions.

SYLLABUS

A survey of the structure, composition and history of the planet Earth. This will include the materials constituting the Earth; the processes operating on and within it, their dynamic effects and the resultant structural changes; the concept of geological time and the evolution of life; evolutionary processes in the history of the planet Earth. Tutorials will be given on various topics within the course. They will be arranged at the beginning of the unit. Field excursions will be held on Saturdays and/or Sundays, and during laboratory periods. Field work reports will be used in the assessment of the student's examination results.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Flint R F & Skinner B J Physical Geology, Wiley 1974

Recommended for reference:

Gass I G Smith P & Wilson R C L eds Understanding the Earth, Artemas Press 1972

The library of the School of Geology Is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of the staff.

EXAMINATION

Examination in both theory and practical work totalling 3 hours. Short tests may also be held during the practical sessions.

626-102 GEOLOGY

A course of 48 lectures, 48 hours practical work, and field work.

419

Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS

A systematic introduction to the main branches of Geology. The nature of crystalline substances; the relations between crystalline structure, chemical composition and physical properties of common minerals; the nature and products of igneous and metamorphic activity. The relation-ship between geology and the surface environment; surface processes and the formation of sedimentary rocks and landforms. Mineral deposits and geological energy sources, their origin, exploitation and subsequent impact on the physical environment. The deformation of rocks and the geological results of earth movements. Past life and the record of evolution; the bases for elucidation of geological history and selected topics in Australian geology. Tutorials will be given on various topics within the course. They will be arranged at the beginning of the unit. Field excursions will be held on Saturdays and/or Sundays, and during laboratory periods. Field work reports will be used in the assessment of the student's examination results.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks:

Flint R F & Skinner B J Physical Geology, Wiley 1974 Berry L G & Mason B Mineralogy, Freeman 1959 Harker A Petrology for students, CUP 1972 Twidale C R Geomorphology, 2nd ed Nelson 1973 Eicher D L Geologic Time, Prentice-Hall 1968 Black R M The Elements of Palaeontology, CUP 1970 McAndrew J & Marsden M A H eds, Regional Guide to Victorian

Geology, 2nd ed School of Geology, University of Melbourne 1973 Recommended for reference:

Gass I G Smith P J Wilson R C L eds Understanding the Earth, Artemas Press 1972

Beerbower J R Search for the Past, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1968 Laporte L F Ancient Environments, Prentice-Hall 1968 Keller W D Chemistry in Introductory Geology, 3rd ed Lucas 1966

(recommended for students without a background in chemistry.) The library of the School of Geology is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of the staff. Other introductory textbooks are available for preliminary reading and general reference in the reserve section of the departmental library.

EXAMINATION

Examination in both theory and practical work totalling 6 hours. Short tests may also be held during the practical sessions.

640-012 PHYSICS (ARTS)

A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory work, throughout the year. The subject will normally consist of the four terminal units Physics 161, 162, 163 and 198, the description of which is given below. A student may, however, enrol for the non-terminal series Physics 141, 142, 143 and 199, which permit entry, if desired, into second-year physics; students with a strong background in HSC mathematics and

420

Social Studies Subjects

physics may be admitted to the advanced non-terminal series 121, 122, 123 and 199. Details of these units may be found in the Faculty of Science Handbook. In general, a pass in the terminal series will not permit entry into second-year physics. In special circumstances, however, the Faculty may grant permission for a student to proceed to second-year physics; in such cases, the School of Physics would arrange additional work in the long vacation prior to the commencement of the second year.

SYLLABUS

The syllabus for the terminal course will cover the basic principles of physics without the use of advanced mathematics. At the same time, material of general interest will be introduced and applications of physics to other disciplines will be used as much as possible. Details of the four terminal units are as follows:

161 Mechanics. The nature scope and Principles of Physics. Particle Mechanics. Rigid Body Mechanics. Fluid Mechanics. Wave Motion.

162 Electromagnetism and Thermodynamics. Thermodynamics: first and second laws, kinetic theory, viscosity. Electromagnetism: statics, dynamics, electromagnetic waves. Light.

163 Quantum Physics Relativity. Quantum Mechanics: waves, particles, uncertainty principle. Atoms: structure including Pauli exclusion principle, spectra, x-rays. Molecular structure. Nuclei: forces, radio-activity, reactions. Panicles and interactions.

198 LABORATORY WORK

Three hours per week. Due to present staff shortages, laboratory classes may not proceed throughout the entire academic year. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. The practical work of each student is examined continuously during the year, and is taken into account in assessing the results (including the class list) for the year. An additional test in practical work may be given.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks.

Burns M & MacDonald S G Physics for Biology and Pre-Medical Students, Addison-Wesley

Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Modern Physics, Allyn & Bacon

Recommended for reference:

Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Classical Physics, vol 1 2nd ed Allyn & Bacon

EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper after the completion of each term's work.

SOCIAL STUDIES SUBJECTS 760-801 SOCIAL BIOLOGY

This subject is a compulsory subject for students enrolled in the Diploma In Social Studies course.

421

Faculty of Arts

In recent years, this subject has had a restricted quota for students enrolled in other courses. The number of places, if any, available in 1975 has not yet been decided. Students wishing to undertake this subject as an approved subject of another course must apply on the appropriate quota form obtainable from the Secretary, Board of Social Studies or the Sub-Dean or Secretary of the Faculty concerned. A course of lectures, practical work, audio-visual programmes, and seminars amounting to six hours per week during the year. In addition, field work to the equivalent of 3 field days. Alternative practical classes are held in the Physiology department. For times, and all notices related to Social Biology, the noticeboard at the Social Studies department, 33 Royal Parade, Parkville, or Physiology department, Medical Building should be consulted before term begins.

SYLLABUS

Social Biology provides a study of the biology of man, both of the individual and of populations within the total environment. The social relevance of such study is emphasized wherever possible, selection of such material being kept topical and related to both local and wider societies.

Particular emphasis is placed on:

(a) the biological changes occurring during the life span of an indi-vidual which modify his function within his society and the total eco-system; man's adaptability to stresses both personal and environmental, and the changes that occur when the limits of adaptability have been exceeded.

(b) some of the biological bases of behaviour considered in an etho-logical context; heredity, the central nervous and endocrine systems, social and environmental interactions as contributors to man's develop-ment and functioning; specifically sexual behaviour, patterns of food intake, and behaviour within populations of high density as in cities.

(c) the basic principles of human ecology, including the utilisation of the earth's resources; the ecology of nutrition and of disease; population dynamics and control; urban ecology.

BOOKS

(a) Preliminary reading:

Brierley J K Biology and the Social Crisis, Farleigh Dickinson, UP 1970

Comfort Alex The Anxiety Makers, Panther Press Dubos R So lumen an Animal, Scribners 1969 Gideam Nelson & Ray ed Biologic Readings for Today's Students, J.

Wiley & Sons Inc. Watson Fuller ed The Social Impact of Modern Biology, Routledge &

Kegan Paul, London 1970 Luce Gay Luer Body Time, Sun Books, Melbourne 1972 Burnett John Plenty and Want, Pelican 1968

(b) Textbooks:

Clements F W & Rogers J F You and Your Food, Reed

Hardin G Biology, its Principles and Implications, W H Freeman 1968

•Social Biology A V programme guides.

422

Social Studies Subjects

(c) Recommended for reference:

Note: Lists of references will be issued to students from time to time. The following short list includes major works of general reference and selected studies of specialised areas.

Burnet F M & White D D Natural History of Infectious Disease, CUP 1972

Calder A B & Frith H J Conservation, Pelican Dalton K The Menstrual Cycle, Penguin Eibl-Eibesfeldt Irenaus Ethology of the Biology of Behaviour, Holt Rine-

hart & Winston, Hawthorn 1970 Ehrlich P H & Ehrlich A R Population, Resources and Environment,

W H Freeman 1972 Katchadourian H A & Lunde D T Fundamentals of Human Sexuality,

Holt Rinehart & Winston 1972 Kilbourne E & Smillie W G Human Ecology and Public Health, Collier-

Macmillan 1969 Krech D Crutchfield R S & Livson N Elements of Psychology, Alfred

A Knopf, NY 1969 Lerner J M Heredity, Evolution end Society, W H Freeman 1968 McKeown T & Lowe C R An Introduction to Social Medicine, Black-

well Scientific Publications. Oxford new ed 1973 Odum E P Fundamentals of Ecology, W B Sanders & Co 3rd ed 1971 Sinclair Human Growth, OUP Suser M W & Watson W Sociology in Medicine, OUP 1971 Young J Z An Introduction to the Study of Man, OUP 1971

EXAMINATION

(a) Progressive assessment by means of field study projects and written assignments to be completed by specified dates.

(b) An examination not exceeding 3 hours' duration during the fourth term examination period.

or A major essay not exceeding 5,000 words to be submitted on the date of the examination.

760-822 SOCIAL HISTORY

This subject is a compulsory subject in the postgraduate Social Studies diploma course and the combined Arts/Social Studies course. In recent years, this subject has had a restricted quota for students enrolled in other courses. The number of places, if any, available in 1975 has not yet been decided. Students wishing to undertake this subject as an approved subject of another course must apply on the appropriate quota form obtainable from the Secretary, Board of Social Studies. A course of two lectures each week and weekly tutorial classes throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The study of patterns of social welfare in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, chiefly in English-speaking countries and with particular emphasis on evolving welfare ethos, organizational structures, and methods. Australian, and especially Victorian, welfare history will be studied in some detail, and considered comparatively in relation to the welfare thought and provision of other colonial and post-colonial societies such as Canada and New Zealand.

423

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Trevelyan G M English Social History, Longmans Plumb J H England in the Eighteenth Century, Penguin Thomson D England in the Nineteenth Century, Penguin Thomson D England in the Twentieth Century, Penguin

(b) No textbooks are prescribed for this subject, but duplicated lists of references are issued to students from time to time, and at the beginning of each term the questions set for the weekly tutorials are issued with relevant reading for each.

(c) Recommended for reference (Section A only).

The following short list includes major works of general reference, books of documents, and selected specialized studies.

Clark G Kitson The Making of Victorian England, Methuen Woodward The Age of Reform, 1815-1870, Oxford Ensor E C K England 1870-1914, Oxford Taylor A J P England 1914-1945, Oxford Briggs A The Age of Improvement, Longmans Webb R K Modern England, Methuen Halevy E A History of the English People in the Nineteenth Century,

6 vals, Benn Aspinall A & Smith E R English Historical Documents, Vol XI, 1783-

1832, Eyre & Spottiswoode Young G M & Handcock W D English Historical Documents, Vol VII,

(i) 1833-1874, Eyre & Spottiswoode Cole G D H & Filson A W eds British Working Class Movements,

Select Documents, 1789-1875, Macmillan Harrison J F C Society and Politics in England, 1780-1960, Harper

& Row Thompson E P The Making of the English Working Class, Gollancz or

Penguin DeSchweinitz K England's Road to Social Security, Yoseloff Inglis K S Churches and the Working Classes in Victorian England,

Routledge & Kegan Paul Klein P From Philanthropy to Social Welfare Briggs A Victorian Cities, Pelican Pinker R Social Theory and Social Policy, Heinemann Owen David English Philanthropy, Oxford

EXAMINATION

Two 2-hour papers, one essay of 3,000 words, and such other written work as may be set for assessment during the course of the year.

424

INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES AND ARTS SPECIAL COURSES

This chapter consists of two parts:

Part A: Interdisciplinary Studies Part B: Arts Special Courses and Continuing Education

PART A: INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES

Commencing in 1974 Faculty will offer a number of new courses in interdisciplinary studies. Normally, these courses will be available for later year Honours students and for M.A. Preliminary and postgraduate students. As these courses are innovatory, and to some extent experi-mental, students are asked to note that close consultation with the Directors of the programmes and with the Individual departments is strongly advised. Students who wish to enrol in such courses, as well as seeking the approval of the chairmen of departments concerned and of the Directors of the programmes, must also obtain the approval of Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Students will be advised individually of the nature of the credit rating of such courses by the various Directors of the programmes, except In the case of Drama, where the credit is the same as for a second-year-level subject.

Enrolment:

After having gained the approval of the people mentioned above, students should note the following necessary procedures for enrolment:— (a) Each student must enrol under the general code number for the year and specific nature of his/her course in general, for example:—

code for 3rd Year Political Science Honours Pure School " " 4th " History/Philosophy Combined Honours " " 3rd " B.A. Hons/LL.B Combined Honours

in French/Political Science

(A code list is available at Students' Records Office.)

(b) Students will then enrol for the specific code numbers for the Individual subjects to be studied, noting that interdisciplinary pro-grammes bear a Faculty code number.

COURSES AVAILABLE:

In 1975 the following courses are available.

(a) 100-461 Eighteenth Century Studies. (b) 100-462 Religious Studies. (c) 100-463 Social Theory. (d) 100-464 Drama. (e) 100-465 Decolonlsatlon and Development.

100-401 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN EIGHTEENTH CENTURY STUDIES

Director: Dr G. D. Marshall, Philosophy

425

Faculty of Arts

Participants in 1975 will include: Dr P. A. Clancy, French Miss D. J. Dyason, History & Philosophy of Science Dr C. Gundolf, Italian Mr A. Hodgart, Economic History Dr R. W. Home, History & Philosophy of Science Dr D. E. Kennedy, History Mr J. H. Killip, Industrial Science Mr M. M. Moon, Music Dr A. M. Patrick, History Mr H. J. Pott, Germanic Studies Professor G. Schulz, Germanic Studies Mr P. Steele, English

In 1975, the course will be available to fourth-year Honours and graduate students (and to third-year Honours students by permission). It will be given in a series of lectures each week throughout the year and a weekly seminar of one and a half hours throughout most of the year. The purpose of the lectures is to provide stimulating material and raise questions for examination in the seminars, and to secure the continuity of the course. The seminars will be chaired by the relevant staff participant and given by members of the class out of their research. Early in the course students will be invited to design their own research programmes, having in mind their own particular disciplines and the interdisciplinary nature of the course.

SYLLABUS

An investigation of the major ideas of the Enlightenment and its place in eighteenth century European life and thought, by way of a consideration of the Encyclopédie and the principle works in European science, art, literature, philosophy, historiography and political economy.

ASSESSMENT

Students will be required either to submit two essays during the course of the year and present for a three hour open book examination, or submit one essay and a research project. Students electing to submit a research project in the place of the second essay and the examination, must demonstrate in their introduction the relevance of their chosen subject to the Enlightenment. Research projects are to be no longer than 10,000 words and are to be submitted on the day of the examination. In the normal case, the two essays will constitute 50 per cent of the year's assessed work and the examination the remaining 50 per cent; or the research project will constitute 75 per cent and the first essay 25 per cent.

CREDIT Where this course is undertaken as part of fourth-year Honours (or in certain cases, third-year Honours), whether pure or combined course, it will be credited as constituting one of the required papers in the end of year examination or examinations as prescribed by individual depart-ments. The exact proportion of credit will thus depend on the workloads required of their Honours students by individual departments. Students enrolling in this course as part of their Master of Arts or M.A. Preliminary will be advised by their departments, after consultation with the Director of the programme, as to the exact nature of the credit to be offered.

426

Interdisciplinary Studies

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Boswell James Life of Johnson, ed R W Chapman, Oxford paperback Boswell James London Journal, ed Frederick A Pottle, Penguin Franklin Benjamin Autobiography, ed Herbert W Schneider, Bobbs

Merrill Voltaire F Candide, Penguin Mossier E C The Forgotten Hume, Columbia University Press Pock S W C Admiral Lord Anson, Cassell Gendzier S J ed The Encyclopedia: Selected Articles, Harper Honour H Neo-Classicism, Penguin Anderson M S Europe in the Eighteenth Century, Longmans Cobban A The Age of the Enlightenment, Thames & Hudson Gay P The Party of Humanity, Weidenfeld & Nicolson

Texts:

Source material is available from the Secretary, room 141, Old Arts

100-462 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES

Director: Dr M. J. Charlesworth, Philosophy

Participants:

Dr W. K. Bartlett, Psychology Professor J. Bowman, Middle Eastern Studies Mr W. Culican, History Mr J. M. Dunham, Indian Studies Sister M. Manion, Fine Arts Dr J. S. Martin, Germanic Studies Dr N. A. Mirza, Middle Eastern Studies Mr L. R. Oates, East & Southeast Asian Studies Mr W. K. Presa, Philosophy Mr S. N. Ray, Indian Studies Dr G. V. Stanley, Psychology

The course will consist of weekly lectures/seminars of one hour duration throughout the year plus a weekly tutorial, and will normally be available to Honours (third and fourth year), M.A. Preliminary and Master of Arts students who have already completed at least one undergraduate course bearing upon some aspect of Religious Studies (e.g. Philosophy 2J; Indian Studies 2B/ З C; Fine Arts 2E/ З F; Middle Eastern Studies 2B/ Э C; History 2J/ З J, etc.). However, in exceptional cases, other students may also be permitted to enrol at the discretion of the Religious Studies Committee.

SYLLABUS

The seminar In 1975 will be devoted mainly to a study of the interaction between religious faith and "secularist" forces critical of, or hostile to, religious faith. Some of the themes which will be discussed in the seminar are as follows:

(i) the philosophical sources of contemporary atheism and of the theoretical background to the rise of modern secularism in the West, with reference to representative thinkers such as Comte, Feuerbach,

Marx, Nietzsche, Freud, Sartre and Camus; the psychological and sociological aspects of secularization, with reference to the works of Weber, Berger, Luckmann, Bellah et al.;

427

Faculty of Arts

(iii) the interaction between early Christianity, paganism and secular thought in the Graeco-Roman world;

(iv) the secularization of religious symbols and art; (v) the impact of urbanization, industrialization and secularization on

religious beliefs and practices in one or two modern Asian societies (e.g. India, Indonesia, Japan).

ASSESSMENT

Students will be required to submit two tutorial papers during the year and to write an essay of 5,000 words on a selected topic. This written work plus participation in seminars will be the basis of evaluation of performance in lieu of a formal end-of-the-year examination.

CREDIT

Where this course is undertaken as part of fourth-year Honours (or in certain cases, third-year Honours), whether pure or combined course, it will be credited as constituting one of the required papers in the final examination or examinations, as prescribed by individual departments. The exact proportion of credit will thus depend on the workloads required of their final honours students by individual departments. Students enrolling in this course as part of their Master of Arts or M.A. Preliminary will be advised by their departments, after consultation with the Director of the programme, as to the exact nature of the credit to be offered.

BOOKS

Masterson P Atheism and Alienation: A Study of the Philosophical Sources of Contemporary Atheism, Pelican 1973

Collins J The Emergence of Philosophy of Religion, Yale UP, New Haven 1967

Feuerbach L The Essence of Christianity, Harper Torchbooks, NY 1957 Niebuhr R ed Marx and Engels on Religion, Schocken Books, NY 1967 Nietzsche F Twilight of the Idols and The Antichrist, Pelican 1960 Freud S The Future of an Illusion, Doubleday Anchor 1964 Sartre J-P Existentialism and Humanism, Methuen 1948 Camus A The Rebel, Penguin Modern Classics 1971 Wilson B Religion in Secular Society, Pelican 1969 Robertson R ed Sociology of Religion, Penguin Modern Sociology

Readings 1969 Towler R Homo Religiosus: Sociological Problems in the Study of

Religion, Constable 1974 Hill M A Sociology of Religion, Heinemann 1973 Douglas Mary Natural Symbols, Cresset Press 1971 Martin David A The Religious and the Secular, Routledge & Kegan

Paul 1969 Bellah Robert N ed Religion and Progress in Modern Asia, Free Press,

New York 1965 Spencer Robert F ed Religion and Change in Contemporary Asia, Univ

of Minnesota Press, Minneapolis 1971 Foster George M Traditional Cultures and the Impact of Technological

Change, Harper & Row, New York 1965 Proceedings of the Xlth International Congress of the International Asso-

ciation for the History of Religions, 3 vols E J Brill, Leiden 1968

Rudolf L I & S H The Modernity of Tradition, Orient Longmans, New

Delhi 1969

428

Interdisciplinary Studies

Loomis C P & Z K eds Socio-Economic Change and the Religious Factor in India, Van Nostrand Reinhold, London

Smith D E India as a Secular State, Princeton Univ Press 1963 de Bary W T & others eds Sources of Indien Tradition, Columbia Univ

Press More detailed reading lists and further information about the course, prescribed texts, etc., will be available from the Secretariat of the Interdisciplinary Programmes, Old Arts, before the beginning of the 1975 academic year.

100-463 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN SOCIAL THEORY

A course of weekly seminars and weekly tutorials with occasional addi-tional lectures. Available for fourth-year Honours and graduate students.

SYLLABUS

An analytic study of 19th and 20th century social theory with special reference to Emile Durkheim, Max Weber, Karl Marx and Sigmund Freud. Social Theory will be studied in the social and historical context in which it was established and developed, the logical rigour with which its form and substance can be examined, its function in problem reso-lutions and its relation to other forms of knowledge. Application of general and middle range theory to such issues as personality, change, cultural and social relations, knowledge and life history will also be covered.

B00KS

Reading guides may be obtained from the Political Science, Psychology, History, Education and Philosophy department offices.

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT

Students will participate in the formulation of appropriate assessment in the subject. A maximum examination and assessment system would be two 3-hour papers and two essays.

100-464 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN DRAMA

Director: Mr J. McCaughey, Classical Studies Participants:

Dr J. Armstrong, Russian Mr D. Kendall, Theatre Department, M.U. Union Dr H. Maclean, Germanic Studies Mr A. D. Pryor, Classical Studies

The course constitutes a full subject, normally to be taken in the second year of a student's course, but not as part of a sequence. There are no prerequisites. The enrolment for it will be limited to 30 students. It will consist of one lecture, one seminar, and one workshop session per week. (Seminar and workshop will last up to two hours each.)

SYLLABUS

An exploration of three periods of western theatre from practical and critical standpoints. The plays will be discussed in seminars and explored in practice through workshops. At the same time, lectures and reading

429

Faculty of Arts

will set them against the background of the development of drama and lead to examination of the problems that the medium faces today. In 1975 the three areas to be studied will be (1) Greek and Roman Tragedy, (2) Chekhov, Stanislaysky and the Moscow Arts Theatre, and (3) Brecht. In later years, sections may be offered on Elizabethan Drama, French Classical Theatre, French Theatre of the 20th Century, and Goldoni and the Commedia dell'Arte. Where possible, comparison will be made with the practice of Eastern Theatre.

ESSAYS AND PROJECTS

Students will be expected to submit at least three pieces of written work during the course of the year. They will also be expected to complete projects in connection with the practical work.

ASSESSMENT

All aspects of the course will be assessed. Students will write one 3-hour examination paper, or its equivalent.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Artaud A The Theatre and its Double Grotowski J Towards a Poor Theatre Brook P The Empty Space Kerr W Tragedy and Comedy

STUDY AREAS

1. Greek and Roman Tragedy

The course will explore the nature of Greek Theatre and as counter-example, its Roman descendant. Particular focus will fall on Aeschylus' Prometheus Bound and Euripides' Alcestis, and a number of other trage-dies by these playwrights and by Sophocles and Seneca will be read in the course of the term. The course will also examine —the origins of Greek tragedy; —the social setting of Greek tragedy and the Festival of Dionysus; —the staging of Greek theatre in the 5th century B.C.

BOOKS

Texts:

•Aeschylus vol 2 (from The Complete Greek Tragedies, ed Grene & Lattimore, Washing Square Press)

'Sophocles vol 2 (from The Complete Greek Tragedies, ed Grene & Lattimore, Washington Square Press)

'Euripides vol 1 from The Complete Greek Tragedies, ed Grene & Lattimore, Washington Square Press)

'Seneca Four Tragedies and Octavian, Penguin Recommended reading: Nietzsche F The Birth of Tragedy

Jones John On Aristotle and Greek Tragedy, Chatto & Windus 1962

Pickard-Cambridge A The Dramatic Festivals of Athens, Oxford Clar-

endon Press

430

Interdisciplinary Studies

Lattimore R Story patterns in Greek tragedy, University of London Ath-lone Press 1964

Finley J H Pinder and Aeschylus, Martin Classical Lectures vol 24, Harvard University Press 1955

Wilson J R ed Twentieth century interpretations of Euripides' Alcestis, Spectrum Books Prentice-Hall 1968

Eliot T S "Introduction to Newton's Seneca His Tenne Tragedies" and "Shakespeare and Seneca" in Selected Essays, Faber

2. Chekhov, Stanislaysky and the Moscow Arts Theatre

The course will explore the plays of Anton Chekhov and his development as a playwright with reference to the parallel achievement and writings of Konstantin Stanislaysky and the players of the Moscow Arts Theatre. All Chekhov's major plays will be read, but particular emphasis will be given to The Cherry Orchard and The Three Sisters.

Lectures and Seminars will be devoted to the following topics:

(a) The tradition of Russian theatre before Chekhov. (b) Chekhov as playwright, and his relationship to late nineteenth

century Russia. (c) Naturalism and realism in the theatre: Chekhov in relation to con-

temporary developments in Europe. (d) The theories on acting and performance of Konstantin Stanislaysky,

with particular reference to the work done by the Moscow Arts Theatre.

(e) New aspects of design and staging: Edward Gordon Craig and others.

(f) Russian influence on modern American acting: Richard Boleslaysky, Stella Adler and the Group Theatre of the 1930s; the development of the Actor's Studio and the early plays of Arthur Miller and Tennessee Williams.

BOOKS

Texts:

'Chekhov A Plays, 2 vols, Penguin 'Stanislaysky K An Actor Prepares, Penguin `Stanislaysky K Building a Character, Elek

Suggested reading:

Stanislaysky K My Life in Art, Penguin Magarschack D Chekhov: A Life, Grove Ross Magarschack D Chekhov: the Dramatist, Hill & Wang Lewis R Method or Madness?, Heinemann Boleslaysky R Acting: The first Six Lessons, Heinemann Chekhov M To The Actor, Michael Joseph

з . Brecht

A critical survey of the work of Bertolt Brecht with a particular study of

The Caucasian Chalk Circle and Mother Courage. The course will examine

—the position of Brecht in the drama of his time and his relation to drama in general; .

—Brecht's dramatic theory and criticism; —the establishment of Brecht's theatrical tradition in the Schiffbauer-

damm theatre.

431

Faculty of Arts

BOOKS

(a) Prescribed texts:

• Bentley Eric ed Seven Plays by Benoit Brecht, Grove

•Willett John ed Brecht on Theatre, Hill & Wang

(b) Recommended for reference:

Mannheim & Willett eds Collected Plays of Benoit Brecht, Pantheon Gray Ronald Brecht, Oliver & Boyd Esslin Martin Brecht: the man and his work, Anchor Willett John The Theatre of Bertolt Brecht, Methuen Ewen Frederick Bertolt Brecht: his life, his art and his time, Calder &

Boyars Demetz Peter ed Brecht (Twentieth Century Views), Prentice-Hall Abel Lionel Metatheatre: a new view of dramatic form, uIl & Wang Additional materials will be supplied in the course of the year.

100-465 INTERDEPARTMENTAL STUDIES PROGRAMME IN DFC0L0N1SATION AND DEVELOPMENT

Director: Mr G. J. Missen, Geography

Participants:

Mr C. Coppal, E. and S.E. Asian Studies Mr D. Miller, Political Science Ms S. Nichterlein, Education Dr J. Nieuwenhuysen, Economics Mr L. Peres, Political Science Dr J. R. V. Prescott, Geography Mr S. N. Ray, Indian Studies Mr IC. F. Taylor, Psychology Dr A. Thompson, Economic History Dr J. Thompson, Middle Eastern Studies Dr R. IC. Wilson, Economic Geography

The course will consist of one 2-hour seminar per week throughout the year. Seminar discussions will revolve around papers presented by the above participants and, on occasions, selected papers written by students. The course will be available to Honours (third and fourth year), M.A. Preliminary, and M.A. students. In exceptional cases, other students may be permitted to enrol at the discretion of the Decolonisation and Develop-ment Committee. Student enrolment will be limited to thirty.

SYLLABUS

Discussion in 1975 will centre on the concepts and practices of develop-ment and underdevelopment in the world's low-income countries in the post-colonial era. The inequalities which exist within these countries and between them and the so-called developed world and the processes by which these inequalities are sustained or changed, the legacies of eco-nomic and political colonialism and the processes of decolonisation, and the problems of multi-racialism, ethnicity, and cultural and national iden-tity are themes which will be played throughout the course. While economic welfare will be a focus of interest throughout, it will not form the exclusive matter of the course. Issues such as the following are likely to be considered: the meanings of development, underdevelopment, modernisation, decolonisation, eco-nomic growth; theories of change and value systems; the economic,

432

Interdisciplinary Studies

political, and sacio-cultural pictures of low-income countries at the time of independence and at present; the territorial and resource patterns of different countries; the institutional and administrative structures related to development; the inputs for change (technical, capital, educational) and the responses to these; the economic systems operating within the low-income country; and the international political and economic systems of which these countries are a part.

ASSESSMENT

Students will be required to submit three seminar papers during the year plus a review of certain of the year's seminar papers. They will be assessed on this work in leu of the formal end-of-year examination.

CREDIT

Where this course is undertaken as part of third year or fourth year Honours (whether pure or combined) it will be credited as constituting one of the required papers in the final examination or examinations, as prescribed by individual departments. The exact proportion of credit will thus depend on the workloads required of their final Honours students by individual departments. Students enrolling in this course as part of their M.A. or M.A. Preliminary will be advised by their departments, after consultation with the Director of the course, as to the exact nature of the credit to be offered.

BOOKS

Preliminary reading:

Brookfield H Colonialism, Development and Independence, 1973 Buchanan K The Southeast Asian World, 1967 Frank A G Latin America: Underdevelopment or Revolution, 1970 Friedmann J Regional Development Policy, 1966 Griffin K Underdevelopment in Spanish America Hirschmann A O The Strategy of Economic Development, 1958 Lockwood W W The Economic Development of Japan, 1954 McClelland D C & Winter D G Motivating Economic Achievement, 1969 McGee T G The Urbanisation Process in the Third World Meier G Leading Issues in Development Economics, 1970 Myrdal Gunnar Asian Drama, 1968 Pandey B N The Break Up of British India Rudolf D 1 & S H The Modernity of Tradition Srinivas M N Social Change in Modern India Rhodes R I ed Imperialism and Underdevelopment: a reader, 1970 Reference (short list): Broomfield J H Elite Conflict in a Plural Society Clunies-Ross A & Langmore J Alternative Strategies for Papua New

Guinea, 1973 Holt C ed Culture and Politics in Indonesia Geertz C Agricultural Involution Johnson E A The Organization of Space in Developing Countries M isra B B The Indien Middle Classes Moore W E & Feldman A S Labour Commitment and Social Change in

Developing Areas, 1960 Myrdal G An Approach to Asien Drama Rosen C Democracy and Economic Change in India

433

Faculty of Arts

Mortimer R ed Showcase State: The Illusion of Indonesia's Accelerated Modernisation

Willmer Ann R The Economic and Traditional Accommodation to Political Independence: The Case of Indonesia

More detailed reading lists and further information about the course will be available from Mrs S. Zsizsmann, Secretary of Interdepartmental Studies, room 141, Old Arts Building, before the commencement of the 1975 academic year.

Note: Dr N. A. Mirza (I.E. Studies), a participant in the course, will be on leave in 1975.

PART В : ARTS SPECIAL COURSES AND CONTINUING EDUCATION

Details of fees to be charged for continuing education courses were un-available at time of publication of this handbook, but will be available from the Office of Continuing Education, prior to the enrolment period in 1975. This is a form of enrolment for students who do not wish to take a degree or diploma in the University. As the syllabus for courses offered in continuing education programmes differs from matriculation studies, students are warned that the taking of such courses is of no assistance in gaining selection for an Arts course and they will not be credited towards an Arts degree. Intending students must complete a special application form, obtainable from the faculty office, by 18 January. Applications will not be accepted from persons who have accumulated passes in three courses studied in a continuing education programme. Certificates showing details of results obtained at any annual examina-tion may be obtained on application and payment of a fee to the Registrar. In all cases, departments offering courses reserve the right to exclude applicants on any of the following grounds: 1. Inadequate prior qualifications 2. Lack of space in the course concerned 3. Failure to satisfy the particular prerequisite requirements of the

course concerned, where such prerequisites apply.

Applicants should note that results obtained in examinations taken in subjects offered as continuing education courses may not be taken into account for the purposes of selection into the B.A. degree course. Details of the courses listed will be found in the relevant department's entry in the text of this handbook.

THE LANGUAGE CENTRE

C Е 102-115 Linguistics 1 CE102-315 Introduction to Linguistics CE102-301 French Reading Course CE102-302 German Reading Course C Е 102-201 Science French C Е 102-202 Science German C Е 102-203 Science Russian

EAST & SOUTH-EAST ASIAN STUDIES

CE156-101 Chinese Part 1 C Е 156-201 Chinese Part 2 (Pass)

434

Special Courses and Continuing Education

CE156-301 Chinese Part 3 (Pass) CE156-131 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 CE156-231 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Pass) CE156-331 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (Pass) CE156-111 Japanese Part 1 CE156-211 Japanese Part 2 CE156-311 Japanese Part 3 CE156-121 East Asian Studies Part 1

ENGLISH

C Е 106-101 English 1 CE106-201 English 2 CE106-301 English 3 CE106-102 Rhetoric

FINE ARTS

CE111-101 Fine Arts 1A CE111-201 Fine Arts 2E CE111-301 Fine Arts 3F CE111-302 Fine Arts 3K

FRENCH

CE116-101 French 1 CE116-201 French 2 (Pass) CE116-301 French 3 (Pass)

GEOGRAPHY

C Е 121-101 Geography 1 CE121-201 Geography 2 (Pass) CE121-301 Geography 3 (Pass)

GERMANIC STUDIES

C Е 126-111 Dutch 1 CE126-101 German 1 C Е 126-121 Swedish 1

HISTORY

CE131-101 History 1A CE131-102 History 1B CE100-103 History 1C (Classical Studies 1A) CE131-104 History 1 D CE131-201 History 2G (Pass) CE131-202 History 2H (Pass) CE131-203 History 2J (Pass) CE131-204 History 2K (Pass) CE1з 1-205 History 2L (Pass) CE131-206 History 2M (Pass) CE131-262 History 2H (Honours) CE131-263 History 2J (Honours) CE131-264 History 2K (Honours) CE131-265 History 2L (Honours) CE131-266 History 2M (Honours) CE131-301 History 3G (Pass) CE131-302 History 3H (Pass)

435

Faculty of Arts

CE131-303 History 3J (Pass) CE131-310 History 3Q (Pass) CE131-311 History 3R (Pass) CE131-313 History 3T (Pass) CE1з 1-361 History 3G (Honours) CE131-362 History 3H (Honours) CE131-363 History 3J (Honours) CE131-370 History 3Q (Honours) CE131-371 History 3R (Honours) CE131-372 History 3S (Honours)

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

CE136-141 History and Philosophy of Science 1 CE136-241 History and Philosophy of Science 2A CE136-242 History and Philosophy of Science 26 CE136-243 History and Philosophy of Science 2C CE136-341 History and Philosophy of Science ЭА CE136-343 History and Philosophy of Science 3C CE136-344 History and Philosophy of Science 3F

INDIAN STUDIES

C Е 141-101 Indian Studies 1A C Е 141-202 Indian Studies 2C CE141-302 Indian Studies 3C CE141-111 Bengali

ITALIAN

C Е 149-101 Italian 1 C Е 149-201 Italian 2 (Pass) CE149-301 Italian 3 (Pass)

MATHEMATICS

Pass Degree C Е 618-011 Mathematics 1A CE618-131 Analysis CE618-132 Algebra and Geometry CE618-012 Mathematics 1 B C Е 618-152 Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems CE618-013 Mathematics 1 C C Е 618-171 Calculus and Linear Algebra CE618-014 General Mathematics C Е 618-021 Mathematics 2A (Pass) CЕ 618-022 Mathematics 28 (Pass) CE618-271 Real Analysis CE618-272 Further Real Analysis CE618-273 Linear Algebra C Е 618-274 Abstract Algebra C Е 618-292 Classical Mechanics CE618-293 Vector Analysis CE618-294 Boundary-Value Problems and Differential Equations CE618-295 Continuum Mechanics CE618-031 Mathematics зА (Pass) CE618-032 Mathematics 3B (Pass) CE618.301 Linear Algebra

436

Special Courses and Continuing Education

CE618-303 Analysis CE618-304 Further Analysis CE618-371 Complex Analysis CE618-372 Geometry CE618-373 Linear Analysis CE618-374 Algebraic Geometry CE618-375 Topology of Surfaces CE618-376 Foundations of Numbers CE618-391 Methods of Applied Mathematics CE618-392 Continuum Mechanics CE618-393 Systems Theory CE618-394 Linear Programming CE618-033 Mathematics 3C (Pass) CE618-318 Mathematical Structures

Honours Degree

C Е 618-061 Mathematics 2A (Ions) C Е 618-062 Mathematics 2 В (Ions) CE618-277 Numerical Project CE618-228 Number Theory Project CE618-231 Real Analysis C Е 618-232 Further Real Analysis CE618-233 Linear Algebra CE618-234 Abstract Algebra C Е 618-252 Classical Mechanics CE618-253 Vector Analysis CE618-254 Boundary-Value Problems and Differential Equations CE618-255 Continuum Mechanics CE618-071 Mathematics ЭА (Ions) CE618-072 Mathematics 3 В (Ions) CE618-331 Complex Analysis CE618-332 Introduction to Functional Analysis CE618-333 Measure and Integration CE618-334 Rings and Modules CE618-335 Further Complex Analysis CE618-336 Differential Geometry CE618-337 Topology CE618-338 Projective Geometry CE618-339 Infinite Groups CE618-343 Lattice Theory C Е 618-344 General Algebra C Е 618-345 Foundations of Numbers CE618-351 Ordinary Differential Equations CE618-352 Methods of Applied Mathematics CE618-353 Linear Programming CE618-354 Fluid Mechanics CE618-355 Water Waves CE618-356 Classical Mechanics CE618-357 Thermodynamics & Statistical Mechanics CE618-358 Electromagnetic Theory CE618-359 Solid Mechanics CE618-400 Mathematics 4

431

Faculty of Arts

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

C Е 181-141 Syriac 1 C Е 181-121 Hebrew 1 CE181-111 Arabic 1 CE181-131 Middle Eastern Studies 1 CE181-231 Middle Eastern Studies 2 CE181-331 Middle Eastern Studies 3 C Е 181-221 Hebrew 2 (Pass) CE181-321 Hebrew 3 (Pass) CE181-211 Arabic 2 (Pass) CE181-311 Arabic 3 (Pass) C Е 181-281 Syriac 2 (Honours) CE181-381 Syriac 3 (Honours)

PHILOSOPHY

CE161-101 Philosophy 1A CE161-102 Philosophy 16 CE161-201 Philosophy 2C CE161-202 Philosophy 2D CE161-203 Philosophy 2E CЕ 161-204 Philosophy 2F CE161-205 Philosophy 2G CE161-206 Philosophy 2J CE161-207 Philosophy 2K CE161-208 Philosophy 2L CE161-210 Philosophy 2N CE161-301 Philosophy Э C CE161-302 Philosophy 3D CE161-303 Philosophy 3 Е СЕ 161-304 Philosophy 3F СЕ 161-305 Philosophy 3G CE161-306 Philosophy 3J CE161-307 Philosophy 3K CE161-308 Philosophy 3L CE161-310 Philosophy 3N

POLITICAL SCIENCE

CE166-101 Politics 1 CE166-201 Politics 2A CE166-202 Politics 28 CE166-301 Politics 3A CE166-302 Politics 38 CE166-203 International Relations 2 CE166-303 International Relations 3 CE166-204 Public Administration 2 CE166-304 Public Administration З СЕ 166-305 Political Sociology 3

PSYCHOLOGY

CE171-100 Psychology 1 CE171-200 Psychology 2A CE171-300 Psychology 3A

RUSSIAN CE176-103 Russian Literature and Society CE176-101 Russian 1

438

COMBINED HONOURS COURSES CONTENTS

Hereunder follows a list of courses which students interested in a com-bined honours course can take. The courses, given in detail in a pamphlet obtainable from the Arts Faculty Office and the sample courses listed below, have been approved by Faculty.

Ancient Greek (see Latin) Arabic & French Arabic & German Arabic & Indonesian Syriac & .. . Chinese & Economics Chinese & French Chinese & History Chinese & Political Science Dutch (see German) Economics & History Economics & Mathematics Economics & Philosophy Economics & Political Science English & Fine Arts English & French English & German English & History English & Italian English & Latin English & Mathematics English & Philosophy English & Political Science Fine Arts & English Fine Arts & French Fine Arts & German Fine Arts & History Fine Arts & Latin Fine Arts & Philosophy Foreign Language & History and Philosophy of Science French & English French & Fine Arts French & German French & History French & Indonesian French & Italian French & Latin French & Philosophy French & Russian Geography & History Geography & Political Science

German & Arabic German & English German & Fine Arts Garman & French German & History German & Italian German & Music German & Philosophy German & Political Science German & Russian Hebrew & . . . History & Economics History & English History & Fine Arts History & French History & Geography History & German History & History and

Philosophy of Science History & Italian History & Latin History & Music History & Political Science History & Philosophy History & Russian History and

Philosophy of Science & a Foreign Language

History and Philosophy of Science & History

History and Philosophy of Science & Latin

History and Philosophy of Science & Maths

History and Philosophy of Science & Philosophy

Indonesian & Arabic Indonesian & French

439

(а )

(5)

Faculty of Arts

Indonesian & Political Science Italian & English Italian & French Italian & German Latin & English Latin & Fine Arts Latin & French Latin & History Latin & History and

Philosophy of Science Latin & Mathematics Mathematics & Economics Mathematics & English Mathematics & History and

Philosophy of Science Mathematics & Latin Mathematics & Philosophy Mathematics & Russian

Middle Eastern Studies & . . . Music & German Music & History

Philosophy & Economics Philosophy & English Philosophy & Fine Arts Philosophy & French Philosophy & German Philosophy & History Philosophy & History and

Philosophy of Science Philosophy & Mathematics Philosophy & Political Science Political Science & Economics Political Science & English Political Science & Geography Political Science & German Political Science & History Political Science & Philosophy Political Science & Russian Russian & French Russian & German Russian & History Russian & Political Science

Students interested in combinations not listed here should consult the Sub-Dean. In all cases, students are required to obtain approval from the Sub-Dean in consultation with the chairmen of the departments con-cerned where necessary. Faculty normally requires at least four of the main subjects from each of the two honours schools together with such other subjects as are considered necessary to provide a background for the main subjects or form an integral whole.

Candidates taking a combined honours course should make them-selves familiar with the preambles to, and the details prescribed for, each of the two honours schools. In particular, they should note:

that combined honours courses with Mathematics are approved only for the sequence Mathematics 1A, Mathematics 2A and Mathematics З A;

(2) that English in a combined honours course may be combined either through English Literature or through English Language;

( З ) that a knowledge of Latin is most desirable for all combined honours courses of which French or Italian form a part; that admission to the second year is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the first year, and will normally be granted only to candidates who have obtained honours (usually at least second class) in each of the main subjects of the course; unless the alternative of honours is specifically indicated In the courses below, candidates who wish to take a supporting subject at honours standard must seek special approval;

(6) candidates enrolled for a combined honours course in certain languages may, on the recommendation of the chairmen of both departments concerned, be permitted to specialize in one of the two languages in fourth year;

•An honours course in Middle Eastern Studies has recently been approved by Faculty and will be available in combination with certain other honours courses to be approved.

(1)

440

Combined Honours Courses

(7) a candidate enrolled for a combined honours course in English and a foreign language may, on the recommendation of the chairmen of the departments concerned, be permitted to specialize in that language in his fourth year;

(8) unless otherwise stated Faculty prefers that the supporting subject In second year be chosen from a discipline other than but related to the two honours disciplines of the combined course;

(9) combined honours courses in Dutch are available.

Details of some samples of a number of combined honours courses are given hereunder as a guide only. All students wishing to pursue a com-bined honours course should obtain the pamphlet containing details of all approved combinations from the General Office of the Arts Faculty.

1. English & History 2. English & a Foreign Language (e.g. French) 3. English & Philosophy 4. History & Economics 5. History & Geography 6. History & Philosophy of Science & Mathematics 7. History & Philosophy of Science & Economic History 8. Italian & German 9. Mathematics & Economics in Arts

10. Philosophy & French 11. Political Science & Geography 12. Political Science & Russian

ECONOMICS AND HISTORY

ECONOMIC HISTORY AND HISTORY

Students wishing to take either of these combined courses should consult one of the professors of History, Economic History or Economics. The details of the course will be arranged by the professors in consultation, subject to the approval of the Faculty of Arts, in order to provide for the needs and interests of those taking it.

ECONOMIC HISTORY AND HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

First year: History and Philosophy of Science 1. A grade 1 Economic History subject (Economic History A) or an approved alternative. Two additional grade 1 subjects.

Second year: History and Philosophy of Science 2 (hots). A grade 2 Economic History subject at honours level (Economic History В or C). One additional grade 2 subject (pass).

Third year: History and Philosophy of Science 3 (hans) — 2 or 3 papers as prescribed. Methodology of Economic History — 2 papers maximum. One approved grade 3 Economic History subject at honours level — 1 paper (Economic History C, D or History of Economic Thought).

Fourth year: Half of History and Philosophy of Science 4 — maximum 2 papers as prescribed.

441

Faculty of Arts

Economic History 4t — 2 papers. Thesis, topic to be approved by chairmen of both departments.

tEconomic History 4 will normally consist of an approved grade 3 Economic History subject at honours level, plus prescribed work taken from some of the following areas: (i) Current Debates in Economic History; (ii) The Industrial Revolution; (iii) The Development of Regions of Recent Settlement; (iv) Demographic History; (v) Special Topics in the History of Economic Thought.

ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICS First year: Economics 1A.

Mathematics 1A. Economic History 1A or another approved subject. Mathematics 1 В or Physics 1 •.

Second year: Economics 2 (hots). Statistical Method. Mathematics 2A (hots).

Third year: Economics 3 (hots) • •. Mathematics 3A (hots).

Fourth Year: Economics 4. An approved selection of units from Mathematics 4. Thesis, on a topic to be jointly agreed upon by the two departments

The final examinations will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

ENGLISH AND FRENCH

First Year: English 1, French 1, two additional grade 1 subjects.

Second Year: English Literature 2, French 2 (hots), an approved grade 2 pass subject.

Third Year: English Literature 3, French 3 (hots).

Fourth Year: English Literature 4, French 4.

In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis (or theses) fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature, and another thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of French; OR (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of French; OR (c) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1

A. Formal Examination Papers:

•Mathematics 1B is preferable to Physics 1. • • With some topics omitted.

442

Combined Honours Courses

(1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries (English). (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American litera-

ure or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating) (English). (4) French literature of the 18th century. (5) The special French literary study.

B. Class Tests and Essays:

(1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on contemporary French civilization.

Part 2

A. Formal Examination Papers:

(1 ) Thesis or theses. (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in

English. (3) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final

examination in English. (4) Modern French literature — 1st paper. (5) Modern French literature — 2nd paper. B. Class Tests:

(1) Advanced oral test in French. (2) Advanced unseen translation into French.

ENGLISH AND HISTORY

First Year: English 1.

A grade 1 History subject, preferably History 1A (British History c. 1485-1700). Two additional grade 1 subjects, normally including a foreign language.

Second Year: English Literature 2. One second-year honours History subject. One approved grade 2 pass subject.

Third Year: English Literature 3. One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination).

Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Honours History 4 (special study in History).

In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words In English in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature or in History in accordance with the requirements of the school of History or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments.

ENGLISH AND PHILOSOPHY

First Year: English 1. Philosophy 1A or 1B.

443

Faculty of Arts

Two additional grade 1 subjects. (It is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language.)

Second Year: English Literature 2. (a) Philosophy honours 2G?. (b) A grade 2 Philosophy subject.

Third Year: English Literature З .

Satisfactory participation in the third-year Philosophy honours seminar

Together with

Either

Two of the following:

Philosophy honours ЭН C, 3Н D, 31E, 31G, 3Н J, 31К , 31M, 3 Н N or One of the above together with two of the following units: Unit 2 of Philosophy 2F (Formal Logic) Unit 2 of Philosophy 2D• (Political Philosophy) Philosophical Theories Philosophical Problems Logical Problems The Interdepartmental Programme: Eighteenth Century Studies (see under entry for this programme: p. 425).t (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.)

Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W or 4X.

In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year either a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words In English in accordance with the require-ments of the school of English Language and Literature or two essays each of approximately 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy. Students who wish to write on a topic combining both English and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments.

The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1

(1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries.

(2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American Litera-ture or Studies in Drama.

(3) Practice of Criticism (dating).

(4) Assessment in the Philosophy component.

Part 2 (1) Thesis (English) or Essays (Philosophy).

•Provided 310 is not taken. ¡Provided a satisfactory arrangement is reached between both departments.

444

Combined Honours Courses

(2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English.

(3) Another course from those listed for part 2 of the final examina-tion in English.

(4) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W or 4X.

FRENCH AND PHILOSOPHY

First Year: French 1. Philosophy 1A or 16. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (lt is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language.)

Second Year: French 2 (huns). (a) Philosophy honours 2Q (b) A grade 2 Philosophy subject.

Third Year: French 3 (hols). Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar. Together with Either Two of the following: Philosophy honours 3HC, 3HD, 3H Е , 31G, 3HJ, 3HК , 3НМ , 3Н N or One of the above together with two of the following units: Unit 2 of Philosophy 2F (Formal Logic) Unit 2 of Philosophy 2D• (Political Philosophy) Philosophical Theories Philosophical Problems Logical Problems The Interdepartmental Programme: Eighteenth Century Studies (see under entry for this programme: p. 425).1 (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.)

Fourth Year: French 4 (hofs). Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W or 4X.

In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year either a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words in French In accordance with the require-ments of the school of French or two essays each of approximately 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy. Students who wish to write on a topic combining both French and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

•Provided 310 le not taken. 1Provided a satisfactory arrangement is reached between both departments.

445

Faculty of Arts

Pert 1 A. Formal Papers:

(1) French literature of the 18th century. (2) The special French literary study. (3) Assessment in the Philosophy component.

В . Class Tests and Essays:

(1) Advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Oral tests in French. (5) Test on contemporary French civilization.

Part 2

A. Formal Papers:

(1) Modern French literature (first paper). (2) Modern French literature (second paper). (3) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W or 4X.

В . Class Tests:

(1) Advanced oral test in French. (2) Advanced unseen translation into French.

C. Thesis.

GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

First Year: Geography 1. A grade 1 History subject. Two additional grade 1 subjects (preferably including a foreign language).

Second Year: Geography 2 (hoes). Geography 2A. One second-year honours History subject.

Third Year: Geography 3 (hofs). Geography З A. One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination).

Fourth Year: Geography 4. Honours History 4 (special study in History). Thesis.

The thesis of 9,000-12,000 words may be written in accordance with the requirements of the school of Geography, or in accordance with the school of History, or in a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both schools.

Final Examination:

Part 1 (3rd year)

(1) Geography 3 (hofs). (2) Geography 3A. (3) The third-year honours History subject studied (2 papers).

Part 2 (4th year) (1) Geography 4 (part only).

446

Combined Honours Courses

(2) Honours History 4 (special study in History) (2 papers). (3) Thesis.

GEOGRAPHY AND POLITICAL SCIENCEt

First Year: Geography 1. Politics 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects (normally History 1 B and a foreign language).

Second Year: Geography 2 (hens). Politics 2A (hons) or International Relations 2 (hens) or Public Administration 2 (hoes). Geography 2A.

Third Year: Geography 3 (hens). Politics ЭА (huns) or Political Sociology 3 (hens) or Public Administration З (hens) or International Relations З (hols). Geography ЗА .

Fourth Year: Geography 4 (part only). Theories of Politics 4F or 4G. A thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both schools.

The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the епд of the fourth year.

Part 1

(1) Geography 3 (huns). (2) Geography 3А . (3) Not more than 2 papers in the Political Science subject taken in

the third year.

Part 2 (1) Geography 4. (2) Theories of Politics 4F or 4G. (3) Thesis.

GERMAN AND ITALIAN

First Year: German 1. Italian 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects.

Second Year: German 2 (huns). Italian 2 course A (hens). One additional grade 2 subject.

Third Year: German 3 (huns). Italian 3 course A (huns).

Fourth Year: Any three half-year courses selected from German 4. Italian 4 (hoes) (3 units).

The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year and part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

t Comte nations of Geography with other sublecte may be arranged. Students should consult the chairmen of the departments concerned.

447

Faculty of Arts

Part 1

A. Formal Examination Papers:

(1) Assessment as for Italian 3 course A (hops).

For German, consult "'Details of Subjects, pp. 196 ff.

B. Class Tests:

(1) Advanced translation into Italian and composition in Italian.

Part 2

A. Formal Examination Papers:

(1) Not more than three 3-hour papers in Italian 4.

For German, consult ""Details of Subjects", pp. 196 ff.

B. Class Tests:

(1) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. (2) Oral test in Italian.

A thesis of approximately 10,000 words, or two shorter theses, one for each subject, based on independent study will be submitted before the end of the third term on a subject or subjects approved by the chairmen of both departments.

Note: A combined course in Italian and Dutch on similar lines is also offered.

Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the fourth year are required to apply to the chairmen of both depart-ments concerned, as well as to the Sub-Dean's office.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE & MATHEMATICS First Year: History and Philosophy of Science 1.

Mathematics 1 A. Physics 1. Mathematics 1 B or another approved part 1 Science subject. Science language.

Second Year: History and Philosophy of Science 2 (hens). Mathematics 2A (hofs). Philosophy 21.

Third Year: History and Philosophy of Science 3F. Mathematics 3А (horas).

Fourth Year: History and Philosophy of Science 4. An approved selection of units from Mathematics 4.

The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, part 2 at the end of fourth year.

Part 1

(1) Mathematics 3А (hofs). (2) History and Philosophy of Science 3F.

Part 2

(1) Mathematics 4 selected units. (2) H.P.S. 4. (3) Thesis or prescribed essay work.

448

Combined Honours Courses

POLITICAL SCIENCE AND RUSSIAN

First Year: Politics 1. Russian 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects.

Second Year: Politics 2A (hofs) or International Relations 2 (hofs) or Public Administration 2 (hofs). Russian Language 2 (hofs) or Russian Literature 2 (hofs).

Third Year: Politics ЗА (hofs) or Political Sociology 3 (hens) or Public Administration 3 (hofs) or International Relations 3 (hofs). Russian Literature 3 (hols) or Russian Language 3 (hofs)

Fourth Year: Theories of Politics 4F or 4G. Russian Literature 4 or Russian Language 4.

The final examination will be held in two parts, pert 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers:

(i) Either (a) Russian 3, papers (1) and (2), and Russian Language 3 (hone)

or (b) Russian 3, papers (1) and (3), and Russian Literature 3 (hofs).

(ii) Not more than two papers In the Political Science subject taken in the third year.

В . Class Test:

Oral test in Russian.

Part 2

A. Formal Examination Papers:

(1) Theories of Politics 4F or 4G. (2) Either (a) Russian Literature 4.

or (b) Russian Language 4.

В . Class Test:

Oral test in Russian.

C. Thesis.

A thesis one subject approved by the chairmen of both departments, based on independent research and not exceeding 12,000 words, will be required to be handed in at the beginning of the third term.

449 P

FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

A good many of the undergraduate scholarships listed in the summary (pp. 455-459) are under review. Students should make enquiries of the chairman of the department concerned.

Tertiary Education Assistance Scheme

Assistance under the Tertiary Education Assistance Scheme will be available to students: • for full-time study only in approved courses • subject to a means test • on a non-competitive basis • without reference to a student's age. Students continuing with approved courses in 1975 will also be required to be making satisfactory progress because assistance will normally be restricted to the minimum number of years of an approved course.

Eligibility

To receive assistance a student must also satisfy certain eligibility requirements concerning residence, bonding, other awards held and previous study undertaken. Students who already hold a first qualification and students transferring courses are advised to consult the Department of Education regarding eligibility for their proposed studies.

Benefits

Assistance under the Tertiary Education Assistance Scheme may include: • living allowance • incidentals allowance • allowances for a dependent spouse and/or child • travelling allowance. All benefits are available subject to a means test. A student must be eligible for living allowance in order to receive any of the other benefits listed. Former scholarship holders who do not qualify for a living allowance under the Tertiary Education Assistance Scheme will continue to receive, subject to meeting progress rules and other eligibility criteria, cover for incidental fees and a travelling allowance may be provided under the conditions of their previous award.

Applications

Applications should be lodged before 31 October, 1974. Applications received after this date will be considered, but payment of benefits may be delayed.

All enquiries should be addressed to:

The Regional Director, Department of Education, 450 St. Kilda Road, Melbourne, Vic. 3004.

450

Financial Assistance

Education Department Studentships

Holders of studentships are required to enter into an agreement to teach with the Education Department for three years after completion of course; service for one year is required if studentship assistance has been given for one year only (e.g. to enable holder to undertake Dip.Ed. course).

Benefits: Living allowances; special rates apply for undergraduates and graduates not previously assisted by Education Department.

Enquiries to:

The Secretary, Education Department, (Teacher Education Division) 480 Collins Street, Melbourne, Victoria 3002.

Gowrie Scholarship Trust Fund

In addition to postgraduate research travelling scholarships and secondary school scholarships, four or five University entrance scholarships, of the value $150 p.a. and tenable for the normal period of a University course, are awarded by the trustees. Applications for all scholarships are due on 30 September each year. Further particulars may be obtained from the Secretary, The Gowrie Scholarship Trust Fund, P.O. Box E5, St. James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001. Open only to members of the Australian Armed Forces (or their descendants) who served overseas during the war of 1939-40.

Students' Loan Fund

Loans up to $750 may be made to students in any year pursuing courses satisfactorily. An acceptable guarantor is required to guarantee the repay-ment of loans to students. Enquiries to:

Sub-Dean, Faculty Secretary, Student Counsellor or Accounts Branch.

PRIZES EXHIBITIONS and SCHOLARSHIPS

(The value of the awards quoted may be subject to variation.)

1. The following awards may be made annually on the work of the Year — Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the First Year of their course:

Greek part 1 H. B. Higgins exhibition of $30 Latin part 1 John Grice exhibition of $30 English part 1 John Sanderson exhibition of $30 French part 1 Baillieu exhibition of $30 German part 1 Exhibition of $30 Dutch part 1 Exhibition of $30 Russian part 1 Exhibition of $30 History 1A (British) Marion Boothby exhibition of $30 History 1B (The Age of Revolutions) Exhibition of $30 History 1C (Classical Studies A) Exhibition of $30 Philosophy part 1A or Philosophy

part 1 B Hastie exhibition of $30 Pure Mathematics (First Year) John MacFarland exhibition

of $30

451

Faculty of Arts

Applied Mathematics (First Year) Dixson scholarship of 930 Psychology part 1 Exhibition of 930 Modern Government 1A Exhibition of $30 Economic History 1A Exhibition of $30 Greek part 2 Douglas Howard exhibition of $30 Latin part 2 Douglas Howard exhibition of $30 English Language part 2 and Edward Stevens exhibition of $30

English Literature part 2 Alexander Sutherland prize of 921 ll (books)

Medieval French Language and Literature Mary Taylor scholarship of $30

Dutch part 2 Exhibition of $30 Russian part 2 Exhibition of $30 Pure Mathematics (Second Year) Dixson scholarship of $40 Applied Mathematics (Second Year) Dixson scholarship of $40 Psychology Provisional Honours Exhibition of $30 Statistics (Units 201, 202 & 203) Maurice H. Belz prize of books French part 3 Mrs. William Smith exhibition

of $30 Renaissance French Language and

Literature or Advanced Medieval Language and Literature Mary Taylor scholarship of 830

German part 3 Exhibition of $30 Psychology Final Honours part 1 Australian Psychological Society

Prize of $20 Comparative Philology Exhibition of $30

Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the First Year of their course or in the Second Year of their course for the degree with honours:

Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Second Year of their course for the degree with honours:

Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Third Year of their course for the degree with honours:

Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Third or Fourth Year of their course for the degree with honours:

A Hastie exhibition in Philosophy of $60 shall be open to competition among candidates in the Second Year of their course in the honours school of Philosophy.

The R. G. Wilson scholarship in History of $60 shall be open to com-petition among candidates in the Third Year of their course for the degree with honours, either in the school of History or in a combined course in which History forms a part.

The Dixson scholarships in Pure Mathematics (Third Year) and Applied Mathematics (Third Year) of 870 each shall be open to competition among candidates in the Third Year of their course either for bachelor of Arts (degree with honours), in the school of Mathematics or in a combined course in which Mathematics forms a part, or for bachelor of Science or for bachelor of Engineering.

Except with the approval of the faculty these scholarships shall not be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class.

Where no candidate in the Second Year of the honour school in Philo-

452

Financial Assistance

sophy is placed in the first class the emoluments of the exhibition may with the approval of the faculty be awarded in whole or in part to a can-didate who is placed in the first class in a combined honour course, of which Philosophy subjects form part.

Except as otherwise provided in the details of subjects for any honour school no exhibition may be awarded to any candidate who is not at that examination placed in the class list in two subjects of a course for the degree with honours. No exhibition may be awarded to any candidate in any subject which he is not at that examination passing for the first time. Except with the approval of the faculty no exhibition in any subject shall be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class in that subject.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding paragraph candidates taking Physics (First Year), Chemistry (First Year), Geology (First Year) or Biology who pass or obtain honours at that examination in not less than three approved subjects may compete for any prize or exhibition open for competition in such subjects in the course for the degree of bachelor of Science as set out in regulation 3.20.10, group 1.

2. At the final honours examination there shall be the following scholarships of $50 each in the named schools:

A. Classical Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship B. History Dwight final examination prize C. Philosophy Hastie scholarship E. English Language and Literature Dwight final examination prize F. French Language and Literature Dwight final examination prize G. Germanic Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship H. Economics Dwight final examination prize ,. Political Sconce Dwight final examination prize J. Middle Eastern Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship K. Psychology Dwight final examination prize L. Mathematical Statistics Dwight final examination prize M. Russian Language and Literature R. G. Wilson scholarship N. Fine Arts Dwight final examination prize O. History and Philosophy of

Science Dwight final examination prize P. Geography Dwight final examination prize Q. Chinese R. G. Wilson scholarship R. Italian Language and Literature R. G. Wilson scholarship

The scholarship or prize in each school shall be open for competition amongst those candidates who are presenting themselves in that school for the first time.

3. Except with the approval of the faculty no scholarship in any honour school at the final examination shall be awarded except to a candidate who la placed in the first class in the final examination. Where for any scholarship in an honour school there is no candidate or there is no candidate who is placed in the first class at the final examina-tion and the scholarship is not otherwise with the approval of the faculty awarded, the scholarship may with the approval of the faculty be awarded in whole or in part to a candidate who is placed In the first class in the final examination in any combined honour course of which subjects of such honour school form a part.

453

Faculty of Arts

Where there is more than one combined honour course in which subjects of the same honour school form a part and in which candidates have been placed in the first class, the scholarship may be divided between such combined honour courses:

Provided that no candidate taking a combined honour course may at the one examination be awarded emoluments of greater value than fifty dollars.

Where for any honour school there is no candidate or there is no candi-date placed in the first class and the scholarship is not otherwise with the approval of the faculty awarded in either a pure school or a combined course, the said scholarship may be transferred with the approval of the faculty to any other school or schools or combined courses in which there are a number of candidates placed in the first class at the final examina-tion.

Postgraduate Studies

Grants from Research Funds

Allocation: Grants from the general research fund are made by the Professorial Board on the advice of its Standing Research Committee and the chairmen of the departments concerned.

Research Awards: The University of Melbourne awards to students a limited number of research scholarships from its own resources. Where an award is made, scholars are expected to devote their whole time to research except for such tutoring and demonstrating work as is approved by the chairman of the appropriate department.

Research grants are awarded to selected graduates of Bachelor standing. Research scholarships (some known as Williams Scholarships) are awarded to selected graduates who have shown marked ability for research and who are undertaking further research training, as Master degree or Ph.D. candidates. Research scholarships may be renewed annually for a period not exceeding three years.

Emoluments of Awards: The value is 52,650 per annum plus compulsory fees.

Research Fellowships: The University of Melbourne has established twelve research fellowships with the status and salary of a lecturer. Travelling allowance is made for a fellow appointed from overseas. Fellowships will be granted for one year in the first instance and, in exceptional circumstances, may be extended. Applications close on 31 January and 31 July. Fellowships will be advertised as they become vacant.

Travelling Research Scholarships: Two travelling research scholarships are offered by the University in two years out of every three to enable a graduate who shows first-rate capacity for research to undertake approved work at an overseas university, or other suitable institution. The value of the scholarship, which is normally awarded for three years, is $3,200 per annum. The Aitchison Travelling Scholarship and the Myer Scholarship, which are together worth $3,200, are also available for research abroad. The combined scholarship is also offered for three years, as it becomes

availabie.

454

Awards

Research Report: All persons conducting research in the University, whether under research awards or otherwise, are required to submit, by the end of February in each year, reports on their research during the pre-ceding twelve months to the heads of their departments, together with a list of their research publications during the period. Heads of departments also submit departmental research reports, which are published in the annual University of Melbourne Research Report.

Mode of Application: Applications for research awards and grants must be made on a form designed for the purpose (and available at the office of the Dean of Graduate Studies). Applications must be lodged with the Secretary of Graduate St udies before 30 November. In general, research awards are made as from 1 March.

Further information may be obtained from the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

ADDITIONAL AWARDS AVAILABLE

This table contains a list of awards included in the University Calendar in chapter 6 of the regulations, other than those previously listed. It also includes those awards available to students either as annual gifts or as income from funds not held by the university as trustee.

The regulation establishing the award Is listed where applicable, or the source of further information cited. Students should consult departments for further information.

The value of awards quoted Is an approximation and may be subject to variation.

ENTRANCE

Field Title and Approximate Value

Unrestricted Senior Government

Calendar Reference or Information Source

Scholarships $80 p.a. Secretary, Education Department, Treasury Place, Melbourne, Vic. 3002.

to

Unrestricted

Free Places Tuition Fees

Unrestricted Edwin Nonus Smith Scholarship $100 p.a.

Unrestricted N.U.A.U.S. Aboriginal Scholarship Determined according individual needs •

Unrestricted Dick Bursaries $100 p.a.

Secretary, Education Department, Treasury Place, Melbourne, Vic. 3002.

R 6.91 Accounts Department

R 6.97 Registrar's office

R 6.54 Accounts Department

455

ENGLISH

Drama

Dramatic Performance

Shakespeare Scholarship $390 approх .

Murray Sutherland Prizes $28

R 8.2

R 8.72 (30)

Faculty of Arts

a.

Field

Unrestricted

Unrestricted

Unrestricted

Unrestricted

Unrestricted

Moran Bursaries $180 p.

Rest Home Bursary $100 p.a.

War Bursaries Tuition fees

Saltau-Price Memorial Scholarship $150 p.a. subject to a means test

Schutt Scholarship Fees and living allowance

R 6.40 Accounts Department

R 6.34 Accounts Department

R 6.105 Accounts Department

Accounts Department

Accounts Department

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or

Value Information Source

UNDERGRADUATE AND GRADUATE

Field

Title and Approximate

Calendar Reference or Value

Information Source

CLASSICAL STUDIES

Latin or Greek Poetry

Final Honours Latin or Greek combined with History

Final Honours Latin and/or Greek

H. B. Higgins Scholarship $50

Jessie Webb Scholarship

Wyselaskie Scholarship R 8.7 $485 p.a.

R 6.16

R 6.132

EAST AND SOUTHEAST ASIAN STUDIES

Chinese Australian-Asian Association for Victoria 850

ECONOMICS

Political Economy Wyselaskie Scholarship R 8.7 $220 p.a.

Economic Kilmany Scholarship R 8.43 Research $600 (Graduate Studies)

456

Final Honours Dutch or German

Germanic Languages

Poetry

HISTORY

Ancient

Australian

British

Awards

Field

Essay

Poetry

Final Honours English and History

Final Honours English Language and Literature

Icelandic

FRENCH

Title and Approximate Value

Bowen Prize $40 approx.

Morris Prize $20 books

H. B. Higgins Scholarship $50

Enid Derham Prize $15

Masefield Prize $20

Kathleen Fitzpatrick Exhibition

Wyselaskie Scholarship 1973, 1976 8424 p.a.

Lodewyckx Travelling Scholarship $1,000 or 8500

Calendar Reference or Information Source

R6.72(1)

R в .72 (6)

R 6.16

R 6.72 (22)

R в .72 (19)

R 6.72 (52)

R в .7

R 6.101

R в .7

R в .9

R 6.16

Final Honours French Language and Literature

Poetry

Wyselaskie Scholarship 1974, 1977 8424 p.a.

W. T. Mollison Scholarship $800

H. B. Higgins Scholarship $50

GERMANIC STUDIES

W. T. Mollison Scholarship $800

Wyselaskie Scholarship 1975, 1978 8424 p.a.

H. B. Higgins Scholarship 850

Rosemary Merlo Prize 818

Gyles Turner Prize $34

Dennis-Wettenhall Prize (Research)

Rosemary Merlo Prize $18

R в .9

R в .7

R 6.16

R 6.72 (42)

R в .72 (12)

R 6.137

R в .72 (42)

457

Faculty of Arts

Field Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Value Information Source

Late Medieval European

Final Year Honours Essay

Final Honours History and

English

Final Honours History and Latin or Greek

History

Indian Studies

Italian Poetry

Mathematics

Final Honours Mathematics

Middle Eastern Studies

Political Science

Russian Poetry

Felix Raab Prize

Margaret Kiddie Prize $50

Kathleen Kitzpatrick Exhibition

Jessie Webb Scholarship

Harbison-H iginbotham Research Scholarship $200 (approx.)

Caroline Kay Scholarship $300-$500

Ernest Scott Prize $500

Australia-India Society of Victoria Prize $50

Australian-Asian Assocation for Victoria Prize $50

H. B. Higgins Scholarship $50

Nanson Prize $36

Wilson Prize $124

Wyselaskie Scholarship $474 p.a.

Fanny Reading Scholarship $250 p.a.

Harbison-Higinbotham Research Scholarship $200

H. B. Higgins Scholarship $50

R 6.72 (56)

R в .72 (5з )

R 6.72 (52)

R 8.132

R 6.28

R в .20

R 8.61

see "Announcements"

see "Announcements"

R 6.16

R В .72 (14)

R 6.72 (2)

R 6.7

R 6.75

R 6.28

R 6.18

Unrestricted

Unrestricted

Aitchison Travelling Scholarship $ 2,000

Bartlett Research Scholarships $200

R 8.46 Graduate Studies

R 6.51 Graduate Studies See "Announcements"

458

Arts

Arts

Subjects and Codes

Field Title and Approximate Value

Unrestricted British Council Scholarships Maintenance and study

Unrestricted British Council Travel Grants Tourist return sea passage

Unrestricted Gowrie Research Travelling Scholarships $2,000 p.a.

Calendar Reference or Information Source

See "Announcements"

See "Announcements" The Trustees, Gowrie Scholarship Trust Fund, P.O. Box E5, St. James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001.

See "Announcements"

General Secretary Services Canteens Trust Fund, Victoria Barracks, Melbourne

R 6.80 Graduate Studies

Rhodes Scholarship £750 Stg. p.a.

Services Canteens Trust Fund Scholarships (For study abroad) Maximum $2,000 p.a.

Sir Arthur Sims Travelling Scholarship $2,000

Research Scholarships

Research Scholarships

Research Scholarships

Taft Interchange Scholarship $2,000

Shell Scholarship £1,000 Stg.

R 6.70 Graduate Studies

See "Announcements" Staff Manager, Shell Co. of Australia Ltd. 163 William Street, Melbourne, Vic. 3000.

Lizette Bentwitch R 6.98 Scholarship Graduate Studies $1,260 a рргох .

ENROLMENT-ARTS SUBJECTS AND CODES The following is a list of all Arts subjects and the code for each subject. The Departments are listed alphabetically and each list Is arranged alphabetically within the Department. Students enrolling in any subject must ensure that they enrol using the correct code number. The following points should be noted.

(a) Please note that the Pass and Honours subjects bear separate code numbers. Students taking any Honours subject must ensure that they enrol using the correct code number.

In some cases students must enrol in both the subject and the specific units which will comprise that subject. The code numbers for both subject and specific units must be used.

e.g. 168-201 Politics 2A consisting of: 166-002 Problems of Aте riс an Politics

166-005 Chinese Politics and Society.

(b)

459

Faculty of Arts

Failure to enrol in the correct subject will cause considerable confusion and inconvenience to students and staff so all students are asked to take some care in this matter.

CLASSICAL STUDIES

104-101 Ancient Greek 1 104-201 Ancient Greek 2 (Pass) 104-261 Ancient Greek 2 (Honours) 104-301 Ancient Greek 3 (Pass) 104-361 Ancient Greek 3 (Honours) 104-461 Ancient Greek 4 104-203 Classical Studies 28 (not available in 1975) 104-204 Classical Studies 2C 104-303 Classical Studies 38 (not available in 1975) 104-304 Classical Studies 3C 100-103 History 1C (Classical Studies 1A) 104-102 Latin 1 104-112 Latin 1A 104-202 Latin 2 (Pass) 104-262 Latin 2 (Honours) 104-302 Latin 3 (Pass) 104-362 Latin 3 (Honours) 104-462 Latin 4 104-111 Modern Greek 1 1 04-21 1 Modern Greek 2 (Pass) 104-499 M.А . Preliminary Examination—School of Classical Studies 104-601 М .А . School of Classical Studies 104-701 Ph.D. Department of Classical Studies

CRIMINOLOGY

711-801 Criminology A

EAST AND SOUTHEAST ASIAN STUDIES 156-101 Chinese 1 156-102 Chinese 1A (Half Course) 156-201 Chinese 2 (Pass) 156-202 Chinese 2A (Half Course) 156-261 Chinese 2 (Honours) 156-301 Chinese 3 (Pass) 156-302 Chinese 3А (Half Course) 156-361 Chinese З (Honours) 156-461 Chinese 4 156-121 East Asian Studies 1 156-131 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 1 56-23 1 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Pass) 156-271 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Honours) 156-331 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (Pass) 156-371 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 ( Н ono иг s) 156-471 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 4 156-111 Japanese 1 156-211 Japanese 2 156-311 Japanese 3 156-262 Medieval and Modern Chinese 2 ( Н ono иг s) 156-362 Medieval and Modern Chinese 3 (Honours)

460

Subjects and Codes

156-462 Medieval and Modern Chinese 4 156-498 М .А . Preliminary Examination—School of Indonesian Studies 156-499 М .А . Preliminary Examination—School of Oriental Studies 156-611 M.A. School of Indonesian Studies 156-601 M.A. School of Oriental Studies 156-631 M.A. School of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 156-701 Ph.D. Department of Oriental Studies

ECONOMICS. ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY & ECONOMIC HISTORY

321-101 Economic Geography 1 321-201 Economic Geography 2A 321-301 Economic Geography 28 326-101 Economic History A 326-201 Economic History В 326-301 Economic History C 326-302 Economic History D 31 6-1 51 Economics 1A (Arts) 316-271 Economics 2 (Honours) 316-371 Economics 3 (Honours) 316-471 Economics 4 316-201 Economics B 316-301 Economics C1—International Economics 316-302 Economics C2—Economic Development 316-303 Economics C3—Economics of the Firm 316-304 Economics C4—Social Economics 316-305 Economics C5—Public Finance 316-306 Economics CE—Banking and Finance 316-307 Economics C7—Labour Economics 316-308 Economics C8—Industrial Relations 316-309 Economics C9—Agricultural Economics 31 6-31 0 Economics C10—Comparative Economic Systems 326-303 History of Economic Thought 326-361 Methodology of Economic History 316-311 Mathematical Economics 316-202 Statistical Method 316-498 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Economics 316-602 M.A. School of Economics

ENGLISH

106-101 English 1 108-201 English 2 106-301 English 3 108-262 English Language 2 106-362 English Language 3 108-463 English Language 4 (Combined Courses) 106-461 English Language and Literature 4 106-261 English Literature 2 106-361 English Literature 3 106-462 English Literature 4 (Combined Courses) 106-102 Rhetoric 106-499 М .А . Preliminary Examination—School of English Language

and Literature 106-601 M.A. School of English Language end Literature 106-701 Ph.D. Department of English

461

Faculty of Arts

111-101 Fine Arts 1A 111-201 Fine Arts 2E (Pass) 111-261 Fine Arts 2E (Honours) 111-262 Fine Arts 2F (Honours) (still to be decided whether or not to

include 262) 111-301 Fine Arts 3F (Pass) 111-361 Fine Arts 3F (Honours) 111-302 Fine Arts 3K (Pass) 111-362 Fine Arts 3K (Honours) 111-461 Fine Arts 4R (Honours) 111-462 Fine Arts 4S (Honours) 111-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Fine Arts 111-601 M.A. School of Fine Arts 111-701 Ph.D. Department of Fine Arts

FRENCH

116-101 French 1 116-201 French 2 (Pass) 116-202 Medieval French Language and Literature 2 (Pass)

This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of either French 2 (Pass) or French 3 (Pass).

116-261 French 2 (Honours) 116-262 Medieval French Language and Literature 2 (Honours) 116-301 French 3 (Pass) 116-302 Medieval French Language and Literature 3 (Pass)

This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of, either French 2 (Pass) or French 3 (Pass).

116-303 Renaissance French Language and Literature 3 (Pass) (Available in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years) This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of French 3 (Pass).

116-304 Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature 3 (Pass) (Available in 1977 and thereafter in alternate years) This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of French 3 (Pass).

116-361 French 3 (Honours) 116-363 Renaissance French Language and Literature 3 (Honours)

(Available in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-364 Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature 3 ( Н on-

ours) (Available in 1975 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-461 French 4 116-463 Renaissance French Language and Literature 4

(Available in 1976 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-464 Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature 4

(Available in 1975 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of French Language

and Literature 116-601 M.A. School of French Language and Literature 116-701 Ph.D. Department of French 116-811 Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies 1 116-821 Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies 2

GEOGRAPHY

121-101 Geography 1

482

Subjects and Codes

121-201 Geography 2 (Pass) 121-262 Geography 2A (Honours) 121-301 Geography 3 (Pass) 121-362 Geography 3В (Honours) 121-461 Geography 4 121-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination-school of Geography 121-601 M.A. School of Geography 121-701 Ph.D. Department of Geography

GERMANIC STUDIES

126-111 Dutch 1 126-211 Dutch 2 (Pass) 126-271 Dutch 2 (Honours) 126-311 Dutch 3 (Pass) 126-371 Dutch 3 (Honours) 126-101 German 1 126-102 German 1A 126-201 German 2 (Pass) 126-261 German 2 (Honours) 126-301 German 3 (Pass) 126-361 German 3 (Honours) 126-262 Germanic Studies 2 (Honours) 126-362 Germanic Studies 3 (Honours) 126-462 Germanic Studies 4 126-121 Swedish 1 126-221 Swedish 2 126-321 Swedish 3 126-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Germanic Studies 126-601 М .A. School of Germanic Studies 126-701 Ph.D. Department ot Germanic Studies

HISTORY

131-101 History 1A (British History 1485-1700) 131-102 History 1B (The Age of Revolutions 1750-1850) 100-103 History 1C (Classical Studies 1A) 131-104 History 1D (Culture Contact in the Pacific) (not available in

1975) 131-105 History 1E (Urban History) 131-106 History 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology) 131-201 History 2G (Australian History) (Pass) 131-301 History 3G (Australian History) (Pass) 131-361 History 3G (Australian History) (Honours) 1 31 -202 History 2H (American History) (Pass) 131-262 History 2H (American History) (Honours) 131-302 History 3H (American History) (Pass) 1 31 -362 History 3H (American History) (Honours) 131-203 History 2J (East Asian History) (Pass) 131-263 History 2J (East Asien History) (Honours) 131-303 History 3J (East Asian History) (Pass) 131-363 History 3J (East Asian History) (Honours) 131-204 History 2K (French) (Pass) 131-264 History 2K (French) (Honours)

463

Faculty of Arts

131-304 History 3K (French) (Pass) 131-364 History 3K (French) (Honours) 131-205 History 2L (Modern British History) (Pass) 131-265 History 2L (Modern British History) (Honours) 131-206 History 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Pass) 131-266 History 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Honours) 131-306 History 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Pass) 131-366 History 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Honours) 131-207 History 2N (German) (Pass) 131-267 History 2N (German) (Honours) 131-210 History 20 (Roman History) (Pass) (not available In 1975) 131-270 History 20 (Roman History) (Honours) (not availaЫ e in 1975) 131-310 History 3Q (Roman History) (Pass) (not available in 1975) 131-370 History 30 (Roman History) (Honours) (not available in 1975) 131-311 History 3R (Late Medieval European History) (Pass) 131-371 History 3R (Late Medieval European History) (Honours) 131-372 History 3S (Early Modern British History) (Honours) 131-313 History 3 Т (Problems in Social and Reflective History) (Pass)

(not available in 1975) 131-373 History 3 Т (Problems in Social and Reflective History) (Ion-

ours) (not available in 1975) 131-461 History 4W (Theory and Method of History) (Honours) 131-462 History 4X (Special Study in History) (Honours) 326-302 Economic History D 131-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of History 131-601 M.A. School of History 131-701 Ph.D. Department of History

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 136-141 History and Philosophy of Science I 136-241 History and Philosophy of Science 2A (Pass) 136-242 History and Philosophy of Science 2B (Pass) 136-343 History and Philosophy of Scienc е 3C (Pass) 136-344 History and Philosophy of Science 3F (Pass)

Each subject consists of two units from the following: 136-201 Philosophy of Mathematics 136-202 General Philosophy of Science 136-212 History of Mathematics B 136-223 Darwinism 136-224 The Scientific Revolution 136-225 The History of Public Health and the Germ Theory 136-311 History and Philosophy of Science Education Course

136-261 History and Philosophy of Science 2A (Honours) 136-262 History and Philosophy of Science 28 (Honours) 136-363 History and Philosophy of Science Э C (Honours) 136-364 History and Philosophy of Science 3F (Honours) 136-461 History and Philosophy of Science 4 136-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of History end Philo-

sophy of Science 136-601 M.A. School of History and Philosophy of Science

136-701 Ph.D. Department of History and Philosophy of Science

INDIAN STUDIES

141-111 Bengali

464

Subjects and Codes

141-029 Hindi (Introductory) (half subject) 141-101 Indian Studies IA 141-201 Indian Studies 28 (Pass) 141-261 Indian Studies 28 (Honours)

consisting of two half subjects chosen from the following: 141-021 Modern Indian Political Thought and Movements

(available 1975 and alternate years) 141-022 Classical Indian Thought (available 1975 and alter-

nate years) 141-023 Modern Indian Literature (available 1975 and alter-

nate years) 141-301 Indian Studies 38 (Pass) 141-361 Indian Studies 38 (Honours)

consisting of two half subjects chosen from the following: 141-031 Modern Indian Political Thought and Movements

(available 1975 and alternate years) 141-032 Classical Indian Thought (available 1975 and alter-

nate years) 141-033 Modern Indian Literature (available 1975 and alter-

nate years) 141-202 Indian Studies 2C (Pass) 141-262 Indian Studies 2C (Honours)

consisting of two half subjects chosen from the following: 141-024 Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature (available 1976 and

alternate years) 141-025 Indian Art and Architecture (available 1976 and

alternate years) 141-026 Islam in India (available 1976 and alternate years)

141-302 Indian Studies 3C (Pass 141-362 Indian Studies 3C (Honours)

consisting of two half subjects chosen from the following: 141-034 Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature (available 1976 and

alternate years) 141-035 Indian Art and Architecture (available 1976 and

alternate years) 141-036 Islam in India (available 1976 and alternate years)

141-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Indian Studies 141-601 M.A. School of Indian Studies 141-701 Ph.D. Department of Indian Studies

INFORMATION SCIENCE

622-100 Information Science 100 which is composed of units: 622-101 Computer Programming 622-111 Computer Programming 622-102 Data Structures 622-103 Programming Applications

622-200 Information Science 200 which Is composed of units: 622-201 Computer Programming 822-202 Numerical Methods 622-203 Computers: Logical Design and Organization

622-300 information Science 300 which is composed of units: 622-301 Computers: Systems, Programming 622-302 Numerical Methods for Linear Systems

465

Faculty of Arts

622-303 Numerical Analysis for Continuous Functions 622-312 Computer Applications 622-313 Data Structures and Data Management

622-401 School of Information Science B.Sc. Honours 622-601 M.A. School of Information Science

INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES

100-461 Interdepartmental Programme in Eighteenth Century Studies 100-462 Interdepartmental Programme in Religious Studies 100-463 Interdepartmental Programme in Social Theory 100-464 Interdepartmental Programme in Drama 100-465 Interdepartmental Programme in Decolonisation and

Development

ITALIAN

149-101 Italian 1 149-201 Italian 2A (Pass) 149-202 Italian 2B (Pass) 149-261 Italian 2C ( Ноп o иг s) 149-262 Italian 2D (Honours) 149-301 Italian 3 (Pass) 149-361 Italian 3A (Honours) 149-362 Italian 38 (Honours) 149-461 Italian 4 149-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Italian Language

and Literature 149-601 M.A. School of Italian Language and Literature 149-701 Ph.D. Department of Italian

LANGUAGE CENTRE 102-115 Linguistics 1 102-215 Linguistics 2 102-301 French Reeding Course 102-302 German Reading Course 102-201 Science French 102-202 Science German 102-203 Science Russian

English for Foreign Students

MATHEMATICS

(Refer to details of subjects for full information)

618-011 Mathematics 1A: This comprises units: 618-131 Analysis 618-132 Algebra and Geometry

61 8-01 2 Mathematics 1B: This is the unit: 61 8-1 52 Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems

618-013 Mathematics 1C: This is the unit: 618-171 Calculus and Linear Algebra

61 8-01 4 General Mathematics: This is the unit: 618-183 General Mathematics (Social Sciences), but other

than Science students are to use the subject number 618-014

618-021 Mathematics 2A (Pass): This comprises units: 618-271 Real Analysis

466

Subjects acid Codes

618-273 Linear Algebra and two other of the units listed below. The selec- tion must be approved by the Department of Mathematics.

618-272 Further Real Analysis 618-274 Abstract Algebra 618-292 Classical Mechanics 618-293 Vector Analysis 618-294 Boundary-value Problems and Differential Equations 618-295 Continuum Mechanics

618-022 Mathematics 28 (Pass): This is comprised of those four units listed under Mathematics 2A (Pass), which have not been included in that subject.

618-031 Mathematics 3A (Pass): This comprises four or five of the 300 level units listed below. The number will be four or five depending on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the Department of Mathematics. 618-371 Complex Analysis 618-372 Geometry (not available in 1975) 618-373 Linear Analysis 618-374 Algebraic Geometry 618-375 Topology of Surfaces 618-376 Foundations of Numbers (not available in 1975) 618-391 Methods of Applied Mathematics 618-392 Continuum Mechanics 618-393 Systems Theory 618-394 Linear Programming

618-032 Mathematics 3В (Pass): This comprises four or five of the 300 level units listed under Mathematics 3A (Pass), which have not been included in that subject. The number will be four or five depending on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the Department of Mathematics.

618-033 Mathematics 3C (Pass): This comprises the unit: 618-318 Mathematical Structures

618-061 Mathematics 2A (Honours): This comprises units: 618-231 Real Analysis 618-233 Linear Algebra

and two of the units listed below. The selection must be approved by the Department of Mathe- matics.

618-232 Further Real Analysis 618-234 Abstract Algebra 618-252 Classical Mechanics 618-253 Vector Analysis 618-254 Boundary-value Problems and Differential Equations 618-255 Continuum Mechanics

In addition it is recommended that students take one of the vacation projects:

618-227 Numerical Project 618-228 Number Theory Project

618-062 Mathematics 28 (Honours): This comprises those four of the units 232, 234, 252-255 which have not been included in Mathematics 2A (Honours).

467

Faculty of Arts

618-071 Mathematics 3A (Honours): This comprises three, four or five of the units listed below. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the Department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year. 618-325 Matrix Theory 618-331 Complex Analysis 618-332 Introduction to Functional Analysis 618-333 Measure and Integration 618-334 Rings and Modules 618-335 Further Complex Analysis 618-336 Differential Geometry (not available in 1975) 618-337 Topology 618-338 Projective Geometry (not available in 1975) 618-339 Infinite Groups 618-343 Lattice Theory (not available in 1975) 618-344 General Algebra 618-345 Foundations of Numbers 618-351 Ordinary Differential Equations 61 8-3 52 Partial Differential Equations 618-353 Linear Programming 618-354 Fluid Mechanics 618-355 Water Waves (not available in 1975) 618-356 Classical Mechanics 618-357 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics 618-358 Electromagnetic Theory (not available in 1975) 618-359 Solid Mechanics 618-362 Mathematical Methods

618-072 Mathematics 38 (Honours): This comprises about five of the units listed under Mathematics 3A (Honours), which have not been included in that subject. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the Department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year.

618-400 Mathematics 4 618-602 M.A. School of Mathematics 618-701 Ph.D. Department of Mathematics

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

181-111 Arabic 1 181-211 Arabic 2 (Pass) 181-271 Arabic 2 (Honours) 181-311 Arabic 3 (Pass) 181-371 Arabic 3 (Honours) 181-471 Arabic 4 181-121 Hebrew 1 181-221 Hebrew 2 (Pass) 181-261 Hebrew 2 (Honours) 181-321 Hebrew 3 (Pass) 181-361 Hebrew 3 (Honours) 181-461 Hebrew 4 181-131 Middle Eastern Studies 1 (The Ancient Middle East) 181-231 Middle Eastern Studies 2A (Pass)

181-232 Middle Eastern Studies 28 (Pass)

468

Subjects and Codes

Each of these two subjects consists of two of the following units: 181-001 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part I (Pass) 181-002 The Islamic Middle East— Part I (Pass) 181-003 The Modern Middle East— Part I (Pass)

(Arab States) Available in alternate years 1975, 1977, etc. In 1976, 1978, students will take course 181-007.

181-004 The Archaeology of Palestine — Part I (Pass) 181-291 Middle Eastern Studies 2A (Honours) 181-292 Middle Eastern Studies 28 (Honours)

Honours courses in each of the four half courses (Pass) referred to above, namely 181-001, 181-002, 181-003, 181-004 will comprise the pass course plus additional Seminar work of up to one hour per week. An honours course will consist of two pass units plus Seminar work in each unit. 181-009 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East — Part I

(Honours) 181-010 The Islamic Middle East — Part I (Honours) 181-011 The Modern Middle East — Part I (Honours)

(Arab States) Available in alternate years, 1975, 1977, etc. In the years 1976, 1978, students will take the alternate third year course.

181-012 The Archaeology of Palestine—Part I (Honours) 181-331 Middle Eastern Studies 3A (Pass) 181-332 Middle Eastern Studies 38 (Pass)

Each of these subjects consists of two of the units listed below: 181-005 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part Il (Pass) 181-006 The Islamic Middle East— Part Il (Pass) 181-007 The Modern Middle East—Part Il (Pass)

(Non-Arab States) Available in alternate years, 1976, 1978, etc. In the years 1975, 1977, etc. students will take course 181-003.

181-008 The Archaeology of Palestine—Part Il (Pass) 181.391 Middle Eastern Studies ЭА (Honours) 181-392 Middle Eastern Studies 38 ( нопоиг s)

Honours courses in each of the four half courses (Pass) referred to above, namely 181-005, 181-006, 181-007, 181-008. Courses 181-009 and 181-010 are Honours courses with certain prerequisites. Two Honours courses comprise ONE Honours subject. 181-013 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East—Part II

(Honours) 181-014 The Islamic Middle East — Part II (Honours) 181-015 The Modern Middle East—Part Il (Honours) 181-016 The Archaeology of Palestine—Part Il (Honours) 181-017 The Ancient Middle East—Akkadian Part I

(Pass and Honours) 181-018 Introduction to the Semantics of Semitic Languages

(Pass and Honours) 181-491 Middle Eastern Studies 4 181-141 Syri в c 1

469

Faculty of Arts

181-281 Syriac 2 (Honours) 181-381 Syriac 3 ( Н o п o игт ) 181-481 Syriac 4 181-499 M.А . Preliminary Examination--School of Middle Eastern

Studies 181-601 M.A. School of Middle Eastern Studies 181-701 Ph.D. Department of Middle Eastern Studies

MUSIC

740-001 Music 1 A 740-021 Music 28 (Pass) 740-062 Music 28 (Combined Honours Course) 740-031 Music 3C (Pass) 740-072 Music 3C (Combined Honours Course) 740-082 Music 4D 740-083 Music 4E (Musicology) 740-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination-School of Music 740-611 M.A. School of Music 740-701 Ph.D. Department of Music

PHILOSOPHY

161-101 Philosophy 1A 161-102 Philosophy 18 161-201 Philosophy 2C (Contemporary European Philosophy) 161-301 Philosophy 3C (Contemporary European Philosophy) (Pass) 1 61 -321 Philosophy 3CC (Contemporary European Philosophy) (Pass) 161-202 Philosophy 1D (Political Philosophy) 1 61 -380 Philosophy 2D (Unit 1 only) 161-302 Philosophy 3D (Political Philosophy) (Pass) 161-322 Philosophy 3DD (Political Philosophy) (Pass) 161-203 Philosophy 2E (Ethics) 161-303 Philosophy 3E (Ethics) (Pass) 161-323 Philosophy ЭЕЕ (Ethics) (Pass) 161-204 Philosophy 2F (Formal Logic)

comprising units: 161-378 Rudiments of Symbolic Logic 161-379 Set Theory

1 61 -304 Philosophy 3F (Formal Logic) (Pass) 161-324 Philosophy 3FF (Formal Logic) (Pass) 161-205 Philosophy 2G (Greek Philosophy) 181-305 Philosophy 3G (Greek Philosophy) (Pass) 161-325 Philosophy 3GG (Greek Philosophy) (Pass) 161-206 Philosophy 2J (Philosophy of Religion) 1 61 -306 Philosophy 3J (Philosophy of Religion) (Pass) 161-326 Philosophy 3JJ (Philosophy of Religion) (Pass) 161-207 Philosophy 2k (Aesthetics) 161-307 Philosophy 3k (Aesthetics) (Pass) 161-327 Philosophy 3KK (Aesthetics) (Pass) 161-208 Philosophy 2L (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) 161-308 Philosophy 3L (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) (Pass) 161-328 Philosophy 3LL (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) (Pass) 1 61 -209 Philosophy 2M (Modern Philosophy) 161-309 Philosophy 3M (Modern Philosophy) (Pass) 1 61 -329 Philosophy 3MM (Modern Philosophy) (Pass)

470

Subjects and Codes

161-210 Philosophy 2N (Recent Philosophy) (Pass) 161-310 Philosophy 3N (Recent Philosophy) (Pass) 161-330 Philosophy 3NN (Recent Philosophy) (Pass) 161-361 Philosophy lu eurs ЭН C (Contemporary European Philosophy) 161-365 Philosophy Honours 31G (Greek Philosophy) 161-366 Philosophy Honours 31] (Philosophy of Religion) 161-367 Philosophy Honours 31K (Aesthetics) . 161-269 Philosophy Honours 21M (Modern Philosophy) 161-270 Philosophy Honours 21N (Recent Philosophy) 161-370 Philosophy Honours 31N (Recent Philosophy) 161-375 Philosophy Honours 311 (Logical Problems) 161-376 Philosophy Honours 312 (Philosophical Theories) 161-377 Philosophy Honours 313 (Philosophical Problems) 161-379 Philosophy Honours 314 (Set Theory) 161-272 Philosophy Honours 2P (Moral and Political Philosophy) 161-273 Philosophy Honours 20 (General Logic) 161-475 Philosophy Honours 4S (Philosophical Psychology) 161-476 Philosophy Honours 4T (Ethics) 161-477 Philosophy Honours 4U (Political Philosophy) 161-478 Philosophy Honours 4V (Kant) 161-479 Philosophy Honours 4W (Current Issues in Philosophy) 161-480 Philosophy Honours 4X (Philosophy of Knowledge and Rational

Enquiry) 161-378 Rudiments of Symbolic Logic 161-379 Set Theory 161-499 М .А . Preliminary Examination—School of Philosophy 161-601 M.A. School of Philosophy 161-701 Ph.D. Department of Philosophy 100-461 The Interdepartmental Programme: Eighteenth Century Studies 100-462 The Interdepartmental Programme: Religious Studies 102-315 Introduction to Linguistics

POLITICAL SCIENCE

1 66-203 International Relations 2 (Pass) 166-263 International Relations 2 (Honours) 166-303 International Relations 3 (Pass) 166-363 International Relations 3 (Honours) 166-305 Political Sociology 3 (Pass) 166-365 Political Sociology 3 (Honours) 166-101 Politics 1 166-201 Politics 2A (Pass) 166-261 Politics 2A (Honours) 166-301 Politics 3A (Pass) 166-361 Politics 3A (Honours) 166-202 Politics 28 (Pass) 166-262 Politics 28 (Honours) 166-302 Politics 38 (Pass) 166-362 Politics 38 (Honours)

The units of— Politics 2A—Pass and Honours Politics 3A—Pass and Honours are listed below. Consult the details of subjects for full information. 166-001 American Politics and Society (Pass unit)

471

Faculty of Arts

166-002 Problems of American Politics (Pass or Honours unit)

166-003 Western European Politics (Pass unit) (not available in 1975)

166-004 Indian Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-005 Chinese Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-006 Soviet Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-007 Communist Political Theory (Pass or Honours unit) 166-008 Political Development (Honours unit)

166-204 Public Administration 2 (Pass) 166-264 Public Administration 2 (Honours) 166-304 Public Administration 3 (Pass) 166-364 Public Administration З (Honours) 166-401 Theories of Politics 4F 166-402 Theories of Politics 4G 166-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—Ѕ chool of Political Science 166-601 M.A. School of Political Science 166-701 Ph.D. Department of Political Science

PSYCHOLOGY 171-100 Psychology 1 171-200 Psychology 2A

Syllabus: 171-204 Human Learning A (i) 171-205 Cognitive Development A 171-206 Affective and Social Development 171-241 Quantitative Methods A (i)

171-300 Psychology 3A Syllabus: 171-307 Personality Integration 171-320 Social Interaction Processes В (i) 171-321 Social Interaction Processes В (ii) 171-333 Psychology of Adjustment 171-341 Quantitative Methods В

171-102 Behavioural Studies 1 171-203 Behavioural Studies 2 171-260 Psychology 2B (Honours)

Syllabus: 171-212 Neuropsychology A 171-261 Perception A 171-263 Quantitative Methods A (ii) 171-265 Human Learning A (ii) 171-266 Social Research Methods Psychology Third Year Honour Units 1 Psychology Fourth Year Honour Units f 171-360 and 171-460 consist of, inter alia, the following

units: 171-365 Cognitive Processes 171-383 Quantitative Methods C or 171-384 Quantitative Methods D 171-388 Theory in Psychology A 171-389 Theory in Psychology В and six units to be selected from the list below in consultation with the staff of the Department, as an appropriate combination

472

Subjects and Codes

for the specialty group to which the student has been allocated on application. 171-363 Interaction in Groups 171-364 Psychology of Language 171-366 Information Processing 171-368 Cognitive Development B 171-369 Applied Personality Theory 171-370 Psycholinguistics 171-371 Perception В 171-372 Neuropsychology B 171-373 Human Performance 171-374 Psychophysics 171-376 Introduction to Simulation 171-377 Social Interaction Processes C 171-378 Introduction to Occupational Psychology 171-379 Interpersonal Processes 171-380 Models of Speech Production 171-381 Psychology of Religion 171-382 Theories of Personal Change 171-385 Assessment 171-386 Models of Data in Social Science 171-387 Analysis of Categorical Data 171-392 Reading Course 171-393 Communication and Specific Learning Disorders 171-394 Psychopathology 171-395 MathematicaI Psychology 171-396 Psychology of Politics 171-397 Neuropsychology C N.B. Some of the above units may not be available and others may be added, in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading, will be listed in the Departmental Manual before the end of the previous year. Numbers may have to be limited for any particular unit. 171-291 A Research Project to be commenced during the

middle of third year and completed by the middle of fourth year.

171-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination-School of Psychology 171-601 M.A. School of Psychology 171-701 Ph.D. Department of Psychology

RUSSIAN

176-101 Russian 1 176-102 Russian lA 176-103 Russian Literature and Society 176-201 Russian 2 (Pass) 176-202 Russian 2A (Pass Half-course) 176-203 Russian 2 В (Pass) 176-261 Russian 2C 176-301 Russian 3 (Pass) 176-302 Russian 3A (Pass Half-course) 176-361 Russian 3 Language (Honours) 176-362 Russian 3 Literature (Honours) 176-461 Russian 4 Language 176-482 Russian 4 Literature

473

Faculty of Arts

176-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Russian Language and Literature

176-601 M.A. School of Russian Language and Literature 176-701 Ph.D. Department of Russian

STATISTICS

619-100 Statistics 100 which is composed of units: 619-101 Descriptive Statistics, Probability and Distributions 619-102 Inference 619-103 Design and Analysis of Experiments 619-111 Introductory Statistics

619-200 Statistics 200 which is composed of units: 619-201 Probability and Distribution Theory 619-202 Statistical Inference 619-203 Design and Analysis of Experiments, Regression

619-300 Statistics 300. Pass Course students enrol for seven of the units listed below: 619-301 Distribution Theory A 619-302 Distribution Theory B 619-303 Statistical Inference A 619-304 Statistical Inference B 619-305 Analysis of Variance 619-306 Introductory Stochastic Processes 619 307 Design and Analysis of Experiments 619-308 Regression Analysis 619-309 Sample Surveys 619-310 Distribution-tree Methods 619-311 Decision Theory 61 9-31 2 Applied Stochastic Processes 619-313 Project

619-360 Statistics 300. Honours Course students enrol for seven units listed for pass course, 301, 303, 305 being compulsory, 306 should be taken by students intending to take 400 level. In addition a special project must be undertaken, and a written report of this work must be presented. The report will be given the same weight as any other 300 level unit.

619-460 Statistics 400. A selection, subject to Departmental approval, of seven units, from those listed below, and from the 300 level units not previously taken: 619-401 Distribution Theory C 619-402 Advanced Probability 619-403 Multivariate Analysis 619-404 Stochastic Processes A 619-405 Stochastic Processes B 619-406 Queues and Storage 619-407 Stochastic Processes in Biology 619-408 Time Series Analysis 619-409 Information Theory

619-611 M.A. School of Mathematical Statistics 619-701 Ph.D. Department of Statistics

SOCIAL STUDIES SUBJECTS 760-801 Social Biology 760-822 Social History

474

Subjects and Codes

SCIENCE SUBJECTS

600-016 Aspects of Contemporary Biology 600-002 Biology. This is the subject 600-101, however Arts students

are to use the code number 600-002. 610-101 Chemistry 626-003 Geology 100 (Arts Students). This consists of the units

626-101 The Third Planet 626-102 Geology

640-012 Physics (Ans)

475

Brown Prior Anderson Pty Ltd 5 Evans Street Burwood 3125

EXTRA-MURAL LOCATIONS

The following are situated outside the University's main grounds and are not shown on the map opposite.

University Departments

Agricultural Economics-32 Story Street, Parkville Archives-16 Wimbie Street, Parkville Clinical Sciences—Royal Parade Parkville, opposite R.M.H. Criminol оду -35 Royal Parade, Parkville Dental Science—Cnr. Royal Parade and Flemington Road, Parkville Maintenance Department-860 Swanston Street, Carlton Industrial Science-35 Royal Parade, Parkville Meanjin Q и e пвг l у -34 Story Street, Parkville Optoте t г y—C п r. Keppel and Cardigan Streets, Carlton Social Studies-33 Royal Parade, Parkville Student Health Service-249 Grattan Street, Carlton Student Counsellors-268 Elgin Street, Carlton Student Housing O іfїсе r-69 Кер pе l Street, Carlton Veterinary Precinct—Cnr. Flemington Road and Park Drive, Parkville

Teaching Hospitals

Dental Hospital—Cnr. Royal Parade and Flemington Road, Parkville Royal Children's Hospital—Flemington Road, Parkville Royal Melbourne Hospital—Flemington Road, Parkville Royal Women's Hospital—Cnr. Swanston and Grattan Streets, Carlton

Colleges and Halls of Residence

Graduate House-224 Leicester Street, Carlton Janet Clarke Hall—College Crescent, Parkville Newman College—College Crescent, and Swanston Street, Carlton Ormond College—College Crescent, Parkville Queen's College—College Crescent, Parkville Ridley College—Walker Street, Parkville St Hilda's College—College Crescent, Parkville St Mary's College—College Crescent and Swanston Street, Carlton Trinity College—College Crescent, Parkville University Women's College—College Crescent, Parkville Whitley College-271 Royal Parade, Parkville

Associated Institutions

State College of Victoria—Swanston and Grattan Streets, Carlton Walter and Eliza Hall Institute—Royal Parade near R.M.H.

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s:

The University of Melbourne

Title:

Handbook: Faculty of Arts 1975

Date:

1975

Persistent Link:

http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128835